« ‘
«
% = = > i)
Gi Pe coen ]
amas,
K
i
hal r
+e = ~
i he
ANNALS
OF THE
NEW YORK ACADEMY
Sips NC is
VOLUME XXV
NEW YORK
PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY
1916-1917
Editors
EDMUND OTIS HOVEY
and
RALPH W. TOWER
CONTENTS OF VOLUME XxXV
Page
LIE oO rae SS Sl ie oe aes BL oe See oc UO SE on oe ee i
BRCIECH ES ene einen enh ok rs Rane km LBRO Lok he Me EE ee eats ag ill
Dates of publication and editions of the brochures......................... ili
LTS}. TLRS NPIS TS 71 105 1s HR eR Gr a RAO en, Me ak TR Ua lv
A Study of Bagobo Ceremonial, Magic and Myth. By Laura Watson
| BSD (Cae OURS 1 aR ak Ree rete ra Ai eta, fn eS oP 1
EPG PESS 2 Page yg eed ip RE a Rr tL AS I A ea eet 283
Tepecano, a Piman Language of Western Mexico. By J. ALDEN Mason...... 309
(No Index has been prepared for ‘“‘Tepecano,”’ the detailed contents being
deemed sufficient for the reader’s guidance)
DATES OF PUBLICATION AND EDITIONS OF THE BROCHURES
Edition
Pp. 1—308, 15 May, 1916 1200 copies
Pp. 309—416, June, 1916 1500 copies
ili
iv ANNALS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Plates
I.—Group of Bagobo people and typical Bagobo house.
Fig. 1.—Group of mountain Bagobo in festival costume. In the foreground
are Datu Auga of Bago (left) and Datu Tongkaling of Sibulin. The
women (left to right) are Otik, Sipa, Ubing, Ingan and Sagomayan.
Fig. 2.—Typical Bagobo house with walls and thatch of nipa palm.
Il.—Datu Tongkaling of Sibuldin holding spear and warshield.
I1].—Ceremonial kerchief and carrying bag of the Bagobo.
Fig. 1.—Ceremonial tankulu, which may be worn only by those Bagobo men
who have killed other men.
Fig. 2.—Man’s carrying bag (kabir) worn on the back to hold medicine-case,
lime tube, betel box and other necessaries.
IV.—Bagobo medicine case and woman’s basket.
Fig. 1.—Old man’s medicine case of woven rattan, with telescope lid, for
holding charms, native drugs, flint, stones and tinder.
Fig. 2.—Specimens of the Bagobo woman’s basket, which is hung on the
left shoulder and contains areca-nuts, medicine, a little knife, beads and
materials for embroidery.
V.—Bamboo tubes decorated with incised patterns.
(These tubes (tagan) are used by the Bagobo to hold the powdered lime
that is chewed with areca-nuts.)
VI.—Strip of finely woven hemp textile.
(In this type of textile the crocodile charm design appears. The border
shows conventional representations of birds, snakes, frogs, human
figures and motives drawn from still life.) .
V1II.—Ceremonial shirt.
(Ceremonial claret-colored hemp shirt worn by old Bagobo men and
women. The decoration is of mother-of-pearl shell discs, with a border
of embroidery done by a Bila-an or a Tagakaola woman.)
VIII.—Festival jacket worn by the Bagobo.
(Young man’s festival jacket of hemp beaded in the “eagle’s wing”’ design.)
Text Figures
Page
Leaf dishes used in the rite of preliminary Awas...............-..++++++05: 109
Antler of Buso: deers sin: sgccle £5:.%. div eleng brateeeie eke tata ene ery eae tee We eee 113
Agongs at Datu Oleng’s long house ..........-...2 eee eee eee eter eee e eens 147
err
\
ANNALS OF THE NEW YORK. ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
, Vol. XXV, pp. 1—308, pll. I—VIII
Editor, Epmunp Otis Hovey
A STUDY OF BAGOBO CEREMONIAL,
MAGIC AND MYTH
BY
Lavra Watson BENEDICT
NEW YORK
PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY
15 May, 1916
Orricers, 1916
I President —MICHAEL Ipvorsky Pupry, Columbia Ciniveniny.
oe . ee Exsrse E. Situ, J. McKeen CATTELL,
s Dovetas W. Jonnson, Hermann von W. Scuure
fe, SB texponding Secretary—Hunry B. Cramproy, American Museum
: Recording Seeretary—Epmunp Otis Hovey, American Museum me
. a Treasurer—Hounry J. Cocuran, 389 Fifth Avenue
ey -— Librarian—Raren W. Towrr, American Museum
_ Editor—Evmunp Oris Hovny, American Museum
“SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY
»
~Chairman—Exyust EB. Surru, 50 East 41st Street
Secretary—Victor E. Lryine, College of Physicians and Surgeons
SECTION OF BIOLOGY
| Chairman—HerMaxn vox W. Scuvurr, College of Physicians and
Surgeons .
; Wor K. Grucory, American Museum
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY
— Charman—Doveras W. Jounson, Columbia University
3 Pi Secretary—Curster A. Reeps, American Museum
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY
: i —Chairman—J. McKeen Carrert, Columbia University
Bee tary —Ropenr H. Lowtr, American Museum
The sessions of the Academy are held on Monday evenings at 8: 15
. y o’clock from October to May, inclusive, at the American Museum of
Natural History, 77th Street and Central Park, West. |
fAnnats N. ¥. Acap. Scr. Vol. XXV, pp. 1—308, pll. I—VIII. 15 May, 1916]
A STUDY OF BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH '
By Laura Watson BENEDICT
(Presented by title before the Academy, 20 April, 1914)
CONTENTS
Page
ee raa m TMA a arc See best atalet se asyehs: ot vhf stella ean a tin were ais a 98,9 wee 3
Introduction. General characteristics of the religious attitude of the
eee a 2 rch iete remains a ace cierto SS Ly ITea) sl hehe niaseie «\n\ Sowvayse aie) A aid we 8
PAL lei NEUE NOLO OTGAL COMGEIESi . \ia.ciesc vie oa sian po nieioe Hale's ols yaw e eee ae a 13
SagCmaE Yee R ECAR AG TUE LEUVEN 24) 9) a Bonen nya Ser sian, oka wn wl Bee wie larval iw! 9s oin 13
Myth-gods: of the nine heavens... 1.2.06... 16. c ee eee pe eee ee eee 15
Gods associated with human interests ...0....000 0c ce See ce ween 18
SPACER SITEMAP SO ic See een hn wine iain wah «, xB ore ee Mew arsrea ne qo gece 29
interpretation of physical evironment .... +... 56. sess tact eee 43
Piescaiie. Of man and life after deaths 2... screecc.6 5s sas dels ss. ae 's's 49
Gharmeterizavion: Of RHE. GwWO SOUIS {.\5). iejsielese, cess 0S -< vielen ese eles aie’ os 49
Right-hand soul or Gimokud Takawanan .................-eeeeee 50
BSS OlW GEM EM cat me rcfe cig oes osaie A wegen sp lsla geo + osghqehetmierene wie les 54
rare Rie SEMC UU LINEA as. she att ~ gichegs) vest wianaya ate ePagelates ra reese apehe 51
Onong or travel outfit for the soul i... 60.6 .. eee te ee tees 53
ie one country of therdedd. 2. So «ja. sigue see s eich «retaee coesoueiyy sis < =i 54
Manzen of-existence in-Gimokudann <o.° sce Sierae scspe oe Fame = Se 55
Topography of the one country .............-..eseeeeeeeeeees 56
petting, AWE ra OE HIS eae tel ee A Ra Ra oa Tei a LE 58
fem tanned soul-om Gimokud Tebang ss. 2 cc soc oe nse Senne eu cee 58
Mra OM MUU agit g Sieh ace, Based e¥. rte slsyarste Saas ¥ elms wlni8 fae Be syepeee® ole 58
PEERED IE: Sorat eee. eA tea. Fiesta ane a c's garmin © win petlege ay Sis ae 3 60
Peer a CONST EL ALON oli ai. diac 4 tea Gl aoles errs vias ain oP chanel ieetehinge Sn 8 61
SredvoramoneGr the- Ged. BO. MCE ts. clue. \ wie acs wg 'cte al eieieis weyers sis, & 61
ELE REE LCA iam cic. Ota ve aes heal o wictauaiarsialek Oe, cramtye aise Cals 62
MAHL pn CHCHLLL ES otters ok usta nk ek Rk ach ale eiereae ns els Co ca quis ie ae 63
Souls of animals and of manufactured objects................... 64
Peatunons of taythical ancestors... oo. a. we. okie Me wae ce ete ee 88 65
Parrett, & bite: torial: ceremonial! 4. Sok... ap ole Se eawsle Seaweed ae eT O
Typical ceremonial behavior ............. ee cece eee cece eee e een nee 75
oer Re rt ACLEL Giri CereMOMinl:, 5 Ga. eis an Share w eee Cae where's whe a8) 0 a's © 75
pundamental Glements of ceremonial. «ii... voiste sce e we eres te ces 78
EDTA A ACERCO Oot crohns 2 EBV Sect ee ae eietts wear renee cue rha5)e sv 78
RRM TCRIA TER SIL Sad ace favs) Shaw ooh, ante n, KARR oyel oacel ore Mi cates aloes ehh wl as 79
MSE TURE RPQUILON See 0-20. .Jahe: «1h. clot e aim matelel eae oie Cia Le Aa apie ae wth 0d = 19
Marea TEL MASE chs C ive die.s °c oF Rae ana ater daley ds ha MRIS PES a aaa 80
Offerings of manufactured products............ee eee eee ence eee 81
1 Manuscript received by the Editor, 8 April, 1914.
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Page
ParvicHtionss [540 chs dg tees so ep eee CEP sie atom eee 81
Reeitation. of ritual avords. 2. eer. 4. ceee anes alate ain Vie se ree 82
Cerenionial .chant, 7.,.\. 8% Ge. < cpio tale h pes ate rein te. eres 82
AS ONE“ INIESIC ss. 05: Be Scot ete eelm Sethe Get ie = = he conte ae eee ee 83
Mancime’ and) cOSbUMies fee <n son fete dhe oct eae tae So ee 85.
The feast 26.05. 6 Tos ete ee ON Ee ee State Cals ae ge OO a ee 87
Mariganito 226 c/s. eta Sta cee teria ye dine a oe tial eae 87
Various’ types Of Ruan vino a. oes bere weet ee eee eee 87
Bamboo prayer stands called tambara......... 0: .0scssc0esseces 87
Hanging altars. ch cium sie cite ones atatersiyemp aetna oie ee 90:
Tie yawia. i. Hedy cyte date Rie te ee cele pies FS eae eee 90
Balekati. :..ccstets create ois olslotetene Sry « eesie ets S12] se pleis peat eee ee 90
Agony altars ‘called sonaran<. 52g. fcc = « <sh Se eee e 91
Hat shrines. jc.<5 2.00). ett Se emegh ete oe aisle = hos Ooi 92
Buis. or ‘biiso shouses i275. oes. toes ce 3c ot ee 92.
Parabunnian or rice-sowing altars...>...... “1, «21th ee See 92
Ceremonies*in details.4..0 Sac... re iced c Ae UY oe ae Oe ee 93
Kestival’ of drinking called’ Ginuth 322). «ne: oe ee 93
Introductory remarks: 2.5% SA 20sec neers Seine ee phe aie ee 93
Chronology of the preparation and of the four main days of the
festival hc Se se Face eee ty Sie capete soe Oh Ge eee eee 96.
Birst day of the Gimum. ti)... csigat air says ie ten 101
First night called tig-kanayan or the beginning............... 101
SOCOMG, ay. crattvsrtecardite sv se ee hele ae eee ee ee ee 101
Second nicht called ta dua dukilume.... A... S250. eee 102
Pbird: (day. Asin nyced weet ce cey es a) areas Sea ei a a ~ 102
Third Mights;6. ssf80% sae cia Wee wae aim i eee ee 103
Fourth ‘Sand vrata ay... oes atvae sicjeres es iece 5 eeu 103
Fourth and ast nip htste oavenli ac oe a 5s one erase ee eee 103
Ceremony of Awas or offerings of areca-nuts to spirits.......... 104
Preliminary, Awas wig = «els bet a otro cies oie Ren ieee ee 105
Misia ANWR ae 6st SE 5 ante Peact oh aC oy= Seael'e- eye ts eae otiake eC ae 411
Ceremony of Tanung or magic rites against Buso............... 1138
Preliminary Tamuug 2s 2020 hen ok ke ees esas Oe Cee 3h ee
Main. Tanung. o..:65 2a. shir eta ek hee cla le = cre 115
Ceremony of Pamalugu or purification, 72. 0.25.20. a ee 137
Ceremony of Lulub or washing of water flasks.................. 124
Ceremony of Sonar or offering on the agongs of manufactured
PPOMUCHS. 5. 6... 5 nis see itlaen sie «nba bele Res lee eee ete as pa ee ee 125
Offering of manufactured products to the gods................ 126
Ablutions’ called Sagmo..:s.-cisiawe sens s Ore nee ee tee 128
Visitation of Anito. 01.00: Tis ogtat eee ee cere es oe 128
Rites with balabba.. .. <. 2.0 .Sckcee wee ears once a Pee cr 129
Ceremonies on the main day of Ginum:. 2%. Rub. siwaganeaes 131
Arrangement of the long HOWSGsi ws aos ns + tte Cans vc es aes 151
Festival of Ginum at Tubisons 5). sacan ae wee ys aia veto vay 153
Question of head ‘hunting... . 0... cise sal pp eee ae Ee vines so eratrepa tee 158
A few ceremontal chants . (5. vesse on ee eee ee er ee 162
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 3
Page
futeror himam sacrifice called Pag-huagan. 2 sei ss.00 cs ceed ee hoes 166
Ceremonial at rice-sowing called Martimmas....................0. 171
Ceremonial at harvest called Ka-pungaan.............0.5..¢s00005 174
EPIRA ED TNL a fetee ey sicg 3g PPA es, TMG cosa Sik eke aera are eee wade arcs 38 oe 180
GRA ELIAS S Aho rhtiens, ter crete, «soa as a aie SRT eR Sere Rat aaa at oft 181
Permab Coremony called Validame, ...ac- sa oss oe we tine ote ee ec 181
PLoS aotendine. Geauh aiid, DUBAI). oak icaie clan siet wee settee tie ce 186
Pari. «Everyday forms: of religious responses... .... 022 de ds. cee ce 193
Interviews with the gods called Manganito. .... 2.22... 22s.cese seuss 193
SL RENRET Seg 0d 0G EAT Ge MS RRNA a Ree, coo 203
UlrtnseDy, ACUUML CELEMSE 5 cis sik See aia ae sini bhe, 31S Sse 0s Sines wince ene 206
Charms by substitution. <<... 0.5.6... Df is ois S PNEa ace See Oe 208
Charms through association by contiguity.............00..0....0% 213
ChacmMaphavinc AMheReNes VIELE 2% 2 2y eisai whys sAleys aredee @eceadoowe 217
BeOS eS crt Cet e i Sore heat ao arets ON a. anlar interned he te 222
Disease and healing in their supernatural aspects................... 223
Diseases thattresult. from ‘breaking taba... . 2... 5... bowen ewe See 223
Sea Se se GAUSCE! (Dye CMI copra te se. GOs tlre nore hin Dede oteretbee Sask ote 225
Diseases: caused by the left-hand soube. 025. oe. ee ds ces 227
sPRe MRMMCN CR DECUMNIES SCHEIOSS © 02 02 6.5 toteals 9.0 1s oa5 SS emai Dadam 229
RpEMEE AH Ul OVORION coo oie Shia 5 ones wey ei ome ere gel aie be SG aly 854 229
OIA Leg Par eM ae Ne eal Pend 9 oa sES Sena. Sars <b sbehe-ae sae eset) 4) Bee 230
Ege MALE MCP EBRERCI CE: RRETICA 20). os cc oe 25k ss cre jos poe oho vot aie gitie eb stoes 230
Merc OLY DUET o ty LS arpa ote We ara Oa nti ey ates ols ele Ss oR SPATE 232
Method .of external-use without, burning: . 3... 22. sacs ee oo 233
Method of imternal use: without burning... 05.2250. i. dele ness 234
Method of wearing or of carrying medicine on the person..... 234
Muameatcen isecor OF tae reliciouSs Hie. 2.8. <tc. mteee as bom aye Sen oes 235
ISR ENTER ADDIE ere eia tad ae Set rat AGAR lores ahe eins Shape Gata sala ee ae AG 236
MU GENNG En LAMA ces oy tei. See atclatoprcc f sveustagpeds a Lacks hotpaleie ake 238
Pee emt ACD eat etc ot rks NG (ease. ed iaye 4is)6" os x! = din vichans' s95 @ yale epee 240
PUTS RICM AU yee ores are one er aevs a. < oi snpkors sae’ Big se eee. 2, ME aud slogan tar 243
RRP OMSe AYN CELE HINES uses tes a cals Mahe otal 6: seo) wera. a ara ow the Ws wafer eval) eels 245
OENISR afer iaisyate ons BEB eee! ah a oe PNM crs aed he Jose. sah ged Seatac sae ee! 245
DUEL eeeten es A he Ceca a, Mere Maina Sic tocs, Paar e gicautrs ddl Seahel eMNS BRUAS sot cee 248
Part IV. Problem of sources of ceremonial and myth................. 250
eT ea res ee [MUM ceca tor ay Seer ais shane Steen ok Sea ays, « a aharpSetade “ee Pater e's oe! Shs: Aa re cid Manas. ake 279
MAC aT eB a hn Osher a Foe enn soles «wis «is « Peis su ahie eels se-eeeind fopenon ete eee 283
PREFATORY REMARKS
The Bagobo form one of those Malay cultural groups in the
mountainous country of southeastern Mindanao which have retained
their pagan faith in its entirety and have never accepted the religious
dictates of Islam. During the period when the Moro dominated
4 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
the southern coast? from Point Tagubum to Zamboanga, the Bagobo,
like the other wild tribes of the Gulf of Davao, doubtless paid
tribute to the Mohammedan conquerors, but they retained their
independence in customs and in worship. Unlike the lowland
peoples of the west, they would not fuse by conversion and by
intermarriage with the Moro, though they came into trading rela-
tions with Moro groups at the coast. In their remote homes on
mountain peaks, which could be reached only by hard climbing
through dense and thorny forest growth, the Bagobo remained safe
from attack, except as, now and then, a few of their number were
caught and pressed into slavery by the Moro.
Within the last sixty years, — that is to say since the Spanish
conquest of the gulf of Davao, — the Bagobo have begun to build
little villages on the west side of the gulf, and there to establish
their own cultural conditions. When Datu*® Ali, a chieftain of
great distinction, died in 1906, he had lived for fifty years in Liubu,
the old Bagobo name for the present village of Santa Cruz.
While a coast culture developed that was modified somewhat by
Visayan and Moro customs and by new elements from Spanish
sources, yet, on the whole, the Bagobo at the coast appear to have.
been but superficially influenced by these various contacts. They
have clung tenaciously to the old industrial processes and to the
ancient forms of worship. There is not to be found that sharp
dividing line which one would look for between mountain culture
and coast culture; and particularly is this true on the religious
side. While there is a considerable range of local variation, not
only between coast and mountain but also between different moun-
tain groups, yet, as a general characterization, it may be said that
* For a discussion of the Moro conquests in Mindanao, see N. M. Sarerby: “Studies in
Moro History, Law and Religion,” pp. 50—61. 1905.
* Datu, 2» Malay word for grandfather, is now, as applied to the chiefs, restricted
to the Moro and the wild tribes; but formerly it was in wide use among the Filipino
as well, Brarr and Rogperrson (The Philippine Islands, vol. 16, p. 157. 1904) quote
Pardo de Tavera as saying that the word datu or datuls, though not in the present day
vocabulary of the Tagal, primitively signified grandfather or head of the family, the term
being equivalent to the head of the Jarangay. The reference is given to ‘I’. H. Parvo de
Tavera: Costumbres de los Tagalos, p.10, note 1. 1892. Cf. also, Buatr and ROBERTSON:
op. cit., vol. 4, footnote, pp. 184—185, for a discussion of the Jdarangay, as meaning:
(1) the slender craft, pointed at both ends and put together with wooden pegs, that
formed the distinctive vessel of the Philippines; (2) the small social community of related
individuals directed by the same cabeza, or datu, who had been captain of the same
family group on the barangay in which they had crossed the water to the new home,
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 5
the same rites are celebrated on mountain tops and beside the sea,
the same tabus are respected, the same precautions taken against
ghosts and demons. Although the new doctrines and the new
rites suggested to the Bagobo fresh safeguards against evil spirits, —
safeguards which might well be added to their already ample collec-
tion of magic spells and of charm objects, — although they eagerly
accepted foreign amulets and untried formule that might, per-
chance, subdue a feyer or expel a cough, there are unmistakable
signs that even those coast Bagobo who have felt most strongly
the impelling force of the new forms of worship are at heart as
sincere pagans as they ever were. In all essentials, they believe
and think and behave like those remote mountain Bagobo who
have been scarcely touched by foreign influences.
Recent history accounts easily for this situation. The Bagobo
who have settled at the coast during the last half century have
come with a religion well organized, and fixed by centuries of
tradition. Furthermore, there has been continuous and unbroken
intercourse between the mountain people and the coast people,
particularly on occasions of ceremonial gatherings and for purposes
of trade. Intermarriage between mountain Bagobo and coast Bagobo
has not been lacking. More than this, there has occurred an inter-
mittent flow of whole families from the hills and from the nearer
mountains to the coast, and from the sea back to the upland villages,
in regulated response to a varying pressure of conditions both
ecclesiastical and economic. Particularly has this pressure been
operative since the American occupation, on account of the demands
of labor. Many houses at Santa Cruz, for example, which were
built and occupied by the Bagobo early in the present century
were deserted as soon as a return to their little hemp fields on
the mountain slopes was made possible by a change in the local
administration.
Throughout these fluctuations, the presence of the older chieftains,
like Ali, Tongkaling, Imbal, Oleng, Yting, and others of no less
dominating personality, as well as the existence of such permanent
centers of influence as Talun, Sibuldn and Tubison, has operated to
preserve the old traditions and the integrity of the tribal religion,
so that no group at the coast has been swamped by foreign in-
fluences. During the last few years, however, the death of several
leading datu, and the transference of entire mountain groups to
provide native labor for American plantations have been operative
6 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
factors tending, unquestionably, to bring about marked modifications
in Bagobo culture, such as to affect the mountain area almost equally
with the coast. The disintegration of the whole body of Bagobo
custom and Bagobo tradition cannot long be held off.
The material culture of the Bagobo is of a primitive agricultural
type. The food staples are rice, corn and sweet potatoes; fields are
cultivated without the aid of animals or of hand plough, for the
mere burning over of the land gives a soft soil in which holes
may be made with a digging-stick. In addition to garden products,
some wild food is secured by hunting and by gleaning.
The horse and the dog are their domestic animals, while the
coast Bagobo make use of carabao, or water buffalo, for dragging
loads and, to some extent, for riding bareback; they snare and
tame jungle fowl. They make a rough pottery and fire it without
the use of an oven; they weave baskets and traps and scabbards ;
they do highly specialized forms of overlacing and coloring of
hemp, a plant that has been cultivated by the wild tribes since
prehistoric times, and almost as far back as Bagobo tradition goes.
At the coast, the women have learned, in addition, to weave im-
ported cotton in the Visayan manner. —
One would say that the material culture, as a whole, suggested
that of the pile-dwellings of the Neolithic age, were it not that the
use of iron (of how recent introduction we do not know) has com-
pletely supplanted stone implements, and that the industry of casting
various bronze and brass objects from a wax mould has reached a
high degree of artistic skill.
With this brief introduction, we may pass on to our discussion
of the Bagobo religion. The ceremonial is closely associated with
the everyday interests of the people — interests which find expres-
sion in the ceremonial use of bamboo and of betel, of the fruits of
the field, of products from loom and from forge.
The religious material here presented was gathered in 1906—(,
during a personal expedition undertaken for the purpose of investi-
gating the culture of this tribe. The bulk of the description of
ceremonial, contained in Part II of this paper, was recorded in the
native district Of Talun, at the village of Mati,* which was situated
on the summit of Mount Merar, and which could be reached by ¢
steady ride of about fourteen hours from the coast, or on foot in
“ Not to be confused with the town of Mati on the Pacific coast.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 7
the same time; since the steep grade, as well as the thick jungle,
made progress by horse as slow as that of the pedestrian. At that
time, a very primitive culture flourished in those isolated villages
of Talun, a culture which, in large part, has now passed away.
It was but a few months after my visit there that the entire group
composing the village of Mati moved down to the coast.
Much of the folklore and mythical material was recorded at
Santa Cruz, a village to which the Bagobo resorted in great num-
bers, coming from long distances to exchange their hemp for dried
fish and rice and salt, and to enter their cocks at the little pit.
There, in the small nipa hut that I occupied, were gathered, day
by day, Bagobo men and women and young people in considerable
numbers, representing a large part of the rancherias® of mountain
and coast where Bagobo settlements existed. Some came occasionally ;
others, every two or three days. The method of securing material
which seemed to work most satisfactorily was to reduce questioning
by a set schedule to a minimum, and, following out the most
promising lead that presented itself at the moment, to let any
Bagobo talk on whatever subject pleased him. As a result, my
material is scanty in some directions; in others, very abundant,
but there is a compensating advantage for such lack of balance in
view of the spontaneity with which the information was given me,
in the pleasant intimacy of frequent intercourse during my stay
of fourteen months.
The collection of Bagobo stories recently published in the Journal
of American Folk-lore® form properly a part of the plan of this
discussion, if the mythology, the ceremonial behavior and the folk-
tales are to be examined as a unit.
The ceremonial texts were repeated to me either by the same
men who had sung or said them, or by other Bagobo who had
heard them often; the recitations were recorded by me, in Bagobo,
directly from their lips and have been translated as nearly as
possible word for word. The prayers at the shrines and the inter-
views with the anito were given me at the conclusion of the
respective devotions or the morning after a night seance, by Islao,
grandson of Pandia, the mantaman‘ of Bansalan in Talun, and the
* A name given by the Spaniards to the little hamlets of the pagan peoples.
° Vol. 26, pp. 13—63. Jan.—Mar., 1913.
7 The assistant datu to a head datu.
8 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
son of a Tuban man. He was a boy well versed in tradition and
in ceremonial material, a close observer, and possessed of a fair
knowledge of English. He was present with me at the aboye-
mentioned rites, and listened carefully to the formule, already
familiar to him from many previous hearings. For purposes of
checking, I often took the same texts from him both in English
and in Bagobo. Although the festival at Talun took place after
I had been for several months with the Bagobo, and could make
my way fairly in the language so far as everyday conversation
was concerned, yet, when listening to devotional exercises, it was
impossible for me to record more than small portions of the text.
This difficulty was due, in part, to a difference in ceremonial vocab-
ulary from that used in ordinary affairs; in part, to the necessity
of giving attention to various ritual activities that were going on
at the same time.
It would be ungracious to omit mention here of my great
indebtedness to many Bagobo friends who gave me, freely, stories
and magical devices, as well as explanation of the ceremonies; who
entertained me at their homes; who excused my blunders, and who
helped me in a hundred ways. Chief among these native friends
are my hosts at Talun: Datu Oleng, Datu Ido, Miyanda and all
of the members of their large families; Sambil of Talun, her mother
and her brother, and others of the village of Mati; my hosts at
Tubison: Datu Imbal, his wife, their sons and their daughters;
Datu Yting of Santa Cruz, his wives Soleng and Hebe and his
son Melanio; Ayang, Liwawa, Simoona and many other old women ;
Egianon’s family; Kaba and his wife Sugé, and their five sons —
Tungkaling, Gayo, Uan, Baya and Balusan; and also a great
number of young people, both girls and boys, who brought me,
with joyful alacrity, the songs and folklore and traditions that
they had learned from the old people.
InrRopUCTION. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE
Reticious ATTITUDE OF THE BaGosBo
The religion of the Bagobo is characterized by the highly sacri-
ficial nature of public and private ceremonial; by the composite
make-up of the rites, in which are blended both offerings of the
blood of slain victims and agricultural products; by the non-esoteric
character of the religious life of the community, where the people
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 9
— women, young men, children — are freely admitted as specta-
tors of almost all ceremonies, and as valued participants in many
of them.
Of prime importance are those irregularly periodical assemblages
of neighboring groups of villages for the celebration of the festival
known as Ginum,* at which event sacrifices of human victims or
of fowls are presented to certain gods; sacred liquor is ceremonially
drunk; formal lustrations in the river for the expulsion of disease
take place; rites magically protective against ghosts and demons
are manipulated; material wealth in garments, ornaments and
weapons is offered up with the primary intention of obtaining an
increase of riches; special types of chant and of percussion music
are performed; festival dances are in order, and social feasting is
shared in by all present.
Other ceremonial occasions are incident upon the annual rice
sowing and the harvest; while still others are associated with in-
dividual events, such as marriage and burial. It is specially at
the night gatherings called Manganito® that the Bagobo may come
into a more nearly direct and personal relation with the gods.
Here, various divinities collectively known as manganito speak to
the people; ask and answer questions, and issue oracles through
the mouth of some recognized individual — usually a woman — who,
in the capacity of medium, speaks or sings as she is prompted by
the spirit for the moment possessing her.
While group assemblages are of fundamental value in obtaining
benefits for the participants and in averting from them all disease,
yet it is noteworthy that the parents of every family, at their own
house-altar, are accustomed to perform devotions and to make offerings
for the health and well-being of the members of the household.
The priesthood is not closely organized, but there are recognized
several classes of official functionaries among whom ceremonial
activities are distributed with a fair degree of distinctness. (a) The
chieftain, called datv, who is both civil and ecclesiastical head of
his village or group of villages. It is he who repeats the central
liturgies of the Ginum festival and offers the sacrifice, and who,
® The word imum means “to drink,” or “a drinking;” g- is a particle used before
initial vowels, and appears to have a purely formal or a phonetic value.
® Manga-, a nominal element with a plural force; azito, a god who communicates with
the people through a medium.
10 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
assisted by prominent old men and a few old women, !° deliberates
in informal council when any problem arises with respect to religious
behavior or to secular activities. The datu is thus preéminently
the official functionary of the people. (b) The group of brave
men called magani, each of whom has killed one or more persons
on such occasions and in such manner as is regarded by the com-
munity as orthodox and justifiable ;'°* these men only may cut the
ceremonial bamboos; they alone are permitted to lay hold of the
bamboo poles while they recite their exploits, and it is their prerogative
to wear the chocolate-colored kerchief as a mark of distinction.
(c) Priest-doctors, who have some knowledge of the art of healing
by the use of native vegetable products commingled with magic
spells. Many of these persons are old women, he are Sieanitened
in cases of sickness, accident and childbirth; certain women of
distinction officiate as chief priestesses at the Bare ceremonies ;
while others conduct the anito seances, at which times they both
reply to the questions of the spirits and draw responses from the
medium to the queries of the people, and afterwards prepare any
medicine or offering that may be divinely ordered. A few men are
priest-doctors, and either a man or a woman from this class may
be called upon to perform the marriage rite. In recognition of such
an office, a small gift is made to the priest, but the Bagobo are
in no way burdened by the imposition of heavy ceremonial fees.
There is to be found in their communities no sign of an autocratic
shamanistic control '! on the part of a functionary belonging to any
te The Recollect fathers wrote of the natives of the Visayas: “The duties of priest
were exercised indifferently by both men and women...” Brain and RoBERTSON: op. cit.,
vol. 21, p. 208. 1905. ‘The situation among the Bagobo is not quite parallel to this;
for with them the men-priests have certain functions, the women-priests have certain
other functions, while still other offices may be performed either by men or by women
or by both sexes in codperation.
‘ea The following are recognized as occasions when killing is justifiable:
a) Human sacrifice, ceremonially performed; cf. under this caption.
b) The blood-feud.
c) Slaying a man in a fair fight between two.
d) The killing of foes in war.
e) Slaughtering the women of a village when the men have all failen in battle.
f) A private assassination of an undesirable individual, at the hands of a deputed
agent acting under commands of his datu.
11 Skeat calls attention to the fact that the shaman among peninsular Malays enjoys
an exalted rank aad a political influence not accorded to him by the wild tribes of the
islands, Cf. Malay magic, p. 59. 1900.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 11
one of these official religious classes. (d@) Mediums, by whose
instrumentality alone messages from the unseen beings can be
regularly transmitted. A medium may also have ceremonial offices
of a more formal character to perform, such as effusing candidates
with water shaken from medicinal twigs in the rite of pamalugu.'*
If all the intermediaries with the spirits were old people, we might
simply call them a specialized variety of priest-doctors; but the
fact is that some young men give oracles at the seances, and young
men are not ordinarily called upon to perform priestly offices.
Formal worship of the gods is carried on at fixed altars or at
temporary shrines of recognized types, where fruits of the field and
manufactured products are placed, or the slain victim is ceremo-
nially offered up. But acceptable devotions may be performed by the
wayside or in the forest, merely by laying on the ground an areca-
nut'? and a_ betel-leaf,'* with a word of prayer to some divinity.
The gods!® of the Bagobo may be roughly grouped, in part,
with reference to traditional concepts associated with them and,
in part, as touching those human interests to which their charac-
teristics make appeal, namely: (1) Gods of exalted rank who are
felt to be remote from human affairs, from whom neither help nor
harm is to be looked for, and to whom, therefore, no devotions are
addressed; (2) Divine beings closely associated with man’s interests
and the objects of his worship, among whom are nature spirits and
war-gods and protectors of home and field and industry. At this
point, it will suffice to mention briefly the names of Pamulak Manobo,
creator of the earth; Tigyama, guardian of the home; Tarabume,
god of the crops; the Tolus, a class of omniscient beings who are
in charge of special forms of worship and of particular industries ;
the Malaki t?Olu k’Waig,!® a divine man whose home is at the
mythical source of all the mountain streams, and to whom the
Bagobo may freely turn in sickness and in perplexity; and the
Mandarangan, who inspire men with fierce courage and who love
to drink the blood of the slain.
Yet less concerned is the Bagobo with gods than with. demons,
so far as the routine of daily life is involved. Countless. pains and
12 For an account of the ceremony of Pamalugu, see Part IJ, p. 117—123.
*3 4reca catechu. See footnote 165.
** Piper betel. See footnote 166.
1S For a characterization of the various classes of divine beings, see pp. 15—29.
*° For the etymology of this name, see footnote 4l.
42 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
miseries come to him through the direct manipulation of those fiends
called buso'’ who, in all events, must be propitiated by offerings,
tricked by subterfuges, banished by magical rites. These evil beings,
some anthropomorphic, some zodmorphic, dominate the Bagobo’s
attitude toward life and toward death, and keep him constantly
on the watch lest he be out-maneuvred, and thus become a prey to
bodily suffering.
Of the two souls that are recognized as inhabiting every human
body, the one on the left side, called gimokud tebang,'> becomes
a buso at death; this is the bad soul. The right-hand or good
soul, called gimokud ta-kawanan,'* goes to the Great Country
below the earth and there lives forever, engaged in the same actiy-
ities as those of earth and, except for the shadowy nature of all
phenomena, in a like environment to that of this world.
Disease is always referred to a supernatural agent who attacks
the human body, either through direct possession or by means of
a baneful influence which, though often working at a distance, is
transmitted by some potent force. To forestall the chances of sick-
ness, the behavior of a Bagobo is checked or re-directed by rigid
prohibitions at many points, each of which prohibitions has come
to be associated with a specific penalty attached to a hypothetical
transgression. The central motive in a large number of the religious
ceremonies performed by the Bagobo is the expulsion of disease and
the prevention of death, such matters being subject to control
and to influence along definite lines.
The character of individual existence after death, on the other
hand, cannot be determined or modified by ceremonial behavior,
however scrupulous the exactness with which the rite is performed.
Traditional accounts of what goes on in the country of the dead
form simply another chapter in the annals of mythical narrative,
which is accepted without question as familiar truth.
‘7 For a discussion of the buso, see pp. 29—42.
‘© Gimokud, “soul;” t(to), “the;” ebang, “left, left-hand.” See pp. 58—61.
1° Ta-(to), “the;”’ kawanan, “right, right-hand.” See pp. 50—58.
Part I. MyrnonoeicaL Concepts
THE BAGOBO PANTHEON
The number of supernatural beings that figure in Bagobo mythology
and that form the main source of stimulation for ceremonial rites
must reach an extremely high count. At present we know but
few of these mythical personalities, even by name, and only a very
long and intimate acquaintance with the people, with their cere-
monies, and with their oral literature, would enable one to make
a satisfactory analysis of the polytheistic system. In reply to a
question touching this matter, any well-informed Bagobo will prob-
ably give the names of several gods, and remark that there are
“no more.” Presumably, at the moment, there are no more present
in his consciousness. Yet, when the investigator has even limited
opportunities of assisting at Bagobo ceremonies; of listening to
mythical tales; of learning little songs; of joining in the spontaneous
talk of the young people, the mention of one and another divine
being, each in a natural setting, gives something like familiarity
with a few of the gods, and suggests that the larger number of
them still await discovery.
What we do find is a number of divine personalities whose in-
dividual characteristics can often be identified with such associations
as would be made, perhaps non-reflectively, by the Bagobo in the
daily activities of work and combat and worship, or in connection
with those emotional responses that natural phenomena would draw
forth. We have here a people whose simple agricultural existence
spent in the care of hemp and rice and corn, and in the enjoyment
of family relations that are remarkably pure and tender — is varied
by sacrificial acts of (to us) relentless cruelty and of not infrequent
oceurrence. We find, correspondingly, supernatural individuals who
14 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
seem to be identified, more or less completely, with these wide-
ranging interests of the Bagobo. Yet many of these gods may be
of foreign origin, for the chances for the diffusion of religious cul-
ture in this entire area have been considerable for a long period;
and gods borrowed from other peoples drift easily into places where
they hold a permanent relation to the native gods and to the
native worshipers. At the same time, a simple ritual while growing
slowly into an organized scheme stimulates the appearance of
newly-created beings with the functions of supernatural agencies, as
soon as the need for them rises into consciousness. It is clear
enough that investigations into the native cultures of the Islands,
and of their relations to adjoining cultures, are as yet in too rudi-
mentary a stage for us to determine definitely which of the unseen
beings reverenced by the Bagobo are exotic and which are indig-
enous.
The Sanscrit-Malay word diwata, which has long been in wide
use by many tribes throughout the Philippine Islands, is employed
by the Bagobo in reference to all of the gods, or to any one god,
but it has no specific content.*° On hearing casual remarks like
the following, from various persons, one is led at first to infer
that diwata is some particular divine being: “Diwata cares for the
rice; “Diwata watches over the sun, the moon, the stars, and all
the people; “Diwata is a good manobo who lives in the sky;”
“Diwata is the highest god.” In the first statement, however, the
diwata meant is Tarabume; in the second, Pamulak Manobo is very
possibly referred to; the “good manobo” in the sky may be one
of several deities, while the “highest god” suggests Salamiawan or
Lumabat or, perhaps, Pamulak Manobo.
[ should take with some caution any statement that assigned one
or another of the supernatural personalities to the rank of “the
supreme god of the Bagobo.” It all depends upon the point of
view of the Bagobo who happens to be talking. The story-teller
** This seems to be the ordinary Malay connotation of the word. Favre defines
dewata as, “condition divine, Jes dieux.”” Dictionnaire malais-francais, vol. 1, p. 848. 1875,
Mr. Cole, on the contrary, has reached the conclusion that the diwata are “a class
of numerous spirits who serve Eugpamolak Manobo.”’ “The wild tribes of Davao district,
Mindanao.” Field Museum of Natural History: Publication 170, Anthropological series,
vol. 12, no. 2, p. 107. 19138.
This very interesting work has come to hand too late for discussion in the body of
my paper; but in time, fortunately, for the incorporation of a part of Mr. Cole’s valuable
material in the form of footnotes, so that a wider comparative viewpoint may be gained.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 15
who gave me the myth of Lumabat wound up by saying that,
after entering heaven, “he became the greatest of all the diwata.”
At another time the same young man mediatively proffered the
remark that he thought Salamiawan was the highest god. That
many Bagobo regard Pamulak Manobo, in his function of creator,
as the supreme divinity, is undoubtedly true; but I have been
present at a ceremony when the aged celebrant addressed the Malaki
t’Olu k’Waig as “the head of all the anito,” and this god is appealed
to, again and again, as the all-knowing and the all-powerful helper.
Yet it is not to any one of the above-named spirits, but toward
Mandarangan and the Tolus ka Balekat that the central ritual acts
of the fundamental ceremonies are directed.
Therefore, in speaking of the composition of the Bagobo pantheon,
I shall make no attempt to place the supernatural beings according
to rank, but shall try to cluster them with a view to their special
functions as determined by the interests of the Bagobo, or in relation
to mythical associations. ‘two main groups may be recognized: —
A. The myth-gods of the nine heavens; |
B. Gods associated with human interests.
Myth-Gods of the Nine Heavens
Above the sky is a region of indefinite topography in which lie
nine heavens, perhaps one directly above another, perhaps spread
out more or less irregularly in space. They are inhabited by a
considerable number of diwata and are ruled over by nine deities,
some male, some female, of whom one hears occasionally in the
songs and in mythical romances. Two or three of them were once
mortals.?4_ All of the diwata in these upper regions exist bliss-
fully, without ever experiencing hunger, yet able to summon food
magically by a word; chewing betel like the Bagobo; riding on
horses and sailing in boats; living in houses built on the con-
ventional Malay pattern. The manner of this celestial life is not
very clearly visualized by the Bagobo, nor does it at all concern
them, for the diwata of the nine heavens have only an abstract
21 The Sarasin brothers note that in Minahassa the gods who have their dwellings on
mountain-tops, in water-falls, among great trees or under the earth, are simply deified
herous of antiquity. Cf. Reisen in Celebes, vol. 1, p. 44. 1905.
16 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
interest for man. So far as my observation goes, worship is not
directed toward these myth-gods, °? and sacrifices are not offered
to them. Of gifts of rice and sugar cane wine they apparently
have no need, for they are without bodily wants; perhaps worship
would be wasted on them, since they pay so little attention to the
affairs of man, and seem to exert no influence, either malign or
friendly.
‘ The god of the first heaven is Lumabat, one of the first of
mortals to achieve the sky. A myth relates that he alone, of a
large family who started for the sky-country, sueceeded in jumping
between the sharp edges of the horizon as it opened and closed in
rapid sequence; and that one of the diwata above the sky changed
him into a god by cutting out his alimentary canal, so that he
hungered no more.*? One tradition says that he became the greatest
of all the diwata.** The second heaven is presided over by Sala-
miawan, who, in his turn, is sometimes called “the greatest god of
all.” His home is in “the shrine of the sky” (tambara®> ka langit),
which is mentioned in one of the mythical romances that I have
heard Bagobo women recite. A quotation from this story will be
found below, in connection with the reference to Pangulili. Sala-
miawan married Bia-t’odan of the fifth heaven. Ubnuling rules
over the third heaven; he is the father of Pangulili of the ninth
celestial region. ‘The divine rulers of the fourth, the fifth, the
sixth and the seventh heayens are women. ‘Tiun is goddess of the
fourth heayen; she is a virgin (daraga) and is elder sister to
** According to Rizal, the chief deity of the Tagal people was not the object ot wor-
ship. He says, “it appears that temples were never dedicated to bathala maykapal, nor
was sacrifice ever offered to him.” Bratr and Ropertson: op. cit., vol. 16, p. 122. 1904.
** A similar episode occurs in Indian myth, in the story in which the hero says of
himself that ‘when he had attained the divine nature, from that moment his hunger and
thirst disappeared.’ Cf. Somadeva: The Katha Sarit Sagara; tr. by C. H. Tawney, vol. 1,
p. 36. 1880.
*“ Yor the details of Lumabat’s adventures and of his deification, see L. W. BENrpicr:
“Bagobo myths.” Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, pp. 20—24. Jan.-Mar., 1913.
According fo one of the traditions collected by Spanish missionaries, Lumabat “represents
the divine name of this hero, who, on earth, bore the name of Tagadium.” According to
another story, Lumabat and Tagadium were two different individuals. Cf. F. BLuMEN-
tritt: Vocabulario mitologico, pp. 73—74, 1895. (Bound with W. E. Retana: Archivo
del biblidfilo filipino, vol. 2, 1896).
*° Tambara, a house altar consisting of a bamboo standard and a white bowl —a shrine
which is fully described in Part I, pp. 87—90; sa, prep. “of;” dangit, “sky,” “heaven.”
See p. 17 for further mention of Salamiawan.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH ai
Kadeyuna. In the fifth heaven reigns the divine lady, Bia-t’odan,?°
spouse of Salamiawan, who himself is sometimes assigned to the
fifth heaven. This apparent confusion is easily explained in view
of the Bagobo custom requiring a newly married man to take up
a temporary residence, at least, at the parental home of his bride.
There is a little song containing the lines: “Go to the city far
away, to a sky above this sky.... where Diwata rides the heavens
in ,a banca’*' — a reference which is said to indicate the fifth
heaven. The sixth heavenly region is ruled by one whose name
is Bia-ka-pusud-an-langit,** a word-cluster which means, “Lady of
the navel of heaven.” Kadeyuna, queen of the seventh heaven, is
the younger sister of Tiun, and wife of Malaki Lunsud, one of the
heroes of romantic tales. Malaki Lunsud presides over the eighth
heaven. The name Lunsud is that of a great town known in the
prehistoric days of fable, and in the old story, “Adventures of
the Tuglay,”*’ there are many men bearing the name of Malaki
Lunsud that figure as characters in the action. The one who
presides over the eighth heaven married the goddess Kadeyuna,
but the myth of how he achieved divinity for himself is yet to be
unrolled. Pangulili is god of the ninth heaven; he is the son of
Ubnuling, the ruler of the third heaven. In the romance above-
mentioned, we find the following reference to Pangulili and Sala-
miawan.
“After these exploits, the Malaki t’Olu k’Waig went on his way... From
the mountain peaks, exultant over his foes, he gave a good war cry that
re-echoed through the mountains, and went up to the ears of the gods.
Pangulili and Salamiawan heard it from their home in the Shrine of the
Sky (Tambara ka Langit), and they said: ‘Who chants the song of war... ?
Without doubt, it is the Malaki t’Olu k’ Waig, for none of all the other malaki
could shout just like that’.’” 3°
The attitude of the Bagobo toward the myth-gods of the nine
heavens suggests that these gods are not of native origin,*' but
26 Bia, “lady;” ?¢’(to), “the;” odan, a word which sometimes has the meaning of “a
shower;” but it is questionable whether this divinity is associated with rain.
27 Boats of the dug-out type, some of which have out-riggers.
28 Pusud, “navel”; -an, a locative particle; /angit, “heaven.”
2° Of. Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, pp. 33—34. 1918.
3° Thid., p. 28.
31 For Skeat’s discussion of this question in connection with the peninsular Malays,
cf. his*Malay magic, p. 85. 1900. “The evidence of folk-lore, taken in conjunction with
that supplied by charm-books and romances, goes to show that the greater gods of the
9
~
20 5 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Bagobo dialect carries the idea of “something to be taken care of,”
“a pet,” like a tame bird. I have seen a boy pull from a snare a
little wood-pigeon and hold it to his breast with a caressing touch,
as he murmured, “It is my yama.” He had caught the bird in
order to cage, to tame and to care for it. Tigyama means “One
who takes care of or protects.” Like Pamulak Manobo, Tigyama
is lovingly summoned to come and be present at a ceremony;*' a
little hanging altar, also called tigyama,is placed in many Bagobo
houses, and on it betel is laid for this god when anybody in the
family falls sick.** It is possible that Tigyama is a divinity
borrowed originally from Indian myth and given somewhat different
attributes, for, in the Vedas and in the Sagas, Yama was god of
the dead.*’ The character of the Bagobo Tigyama seems more
nearly identical with that of Yima of Mazdeism,*° the protector of
the Iranians and the mythical founder of their postdiluvian culture.
Among the chief of those unseen beings that care for the Bagobo,
there is a divine man called Malaki t’Olu k’Waig*! who, unques-
tionably, represents the highest ideal of goodness and of purity, as
the native visualizes that ideal. He figures as a hero in mythical
romance, where, indeed, one finds many malaki tolu k’waig, who
go through remarkable adventures and achieve distinction. On the
deyotional side, however, all of these fabulous characters are fused
into the impersonation of one beloved individual, whose home is
associated with a legendary spring far up in the mountains which
is called “the source of the waters.” Here two rivers are said to
take their rise, and it is just at the point where the two streams
separate that the Malaki t’Olu k’Waig lives. He is the great
*7 See Ceremony of Pamalugu, Part II.
*® See Various types of Altar, Part IL.
°° Cf. Somadeva: Katha Sarit Sagara, tr. by C. H. Tawney, vol. 2, p. 188. 1884.
In the story, Sinhavikrama is led off by Death to the hall of Yama, where he is to be
judged. See also “A funeral hymn,” in the Rigveda, where the following lines occur.
“To him that passed along great heights and sought out a path for many, Vivasvant’s
son, the gatherer of men, Yama the king, to him bring worship and offering.” Peter
Peterson (tr.): Hymns from the Rigveda, p. 288. 1888. In the same hymn, the by-
standers are thus addressed: “Stand aside, go away, disperse, the fathers have made this
place for him, furnished with days and waters and nights: Yama will give him rest.”
Ih. p. 289.
“° Cf. James Darmesteter (ed.): The Zendavesta; part I, The Vendidid, pp. lviii—lix.
1895. (Sacred books of the Hast, vol. 4).
“* Malaki, “good man;” ?’(to), “the;” k (ka), “of;” waig, “water: the Divine Man
(or the god) at the Source of the Waters.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 214
healer, and to his home are carried all the diseases which the
Bagobo, by magic rites, have coaxed into leaf-dishes or into little
manikins. Here, at the mythical spring, the Malaki destroys all
sickness that is sent to him. He winds one end of a string, or
fibre, around the neck of each disease, ties the other end to some
post or tree, and quickly strangles the disease. The Malaki t’Olu
k’Waig is believed to know the whole world; he never sleeps;
he answers prayer wherever offered. The range of his influence
is now generously extended to include even recently-known foreign-
ers, for I was) told that if I, while praying in the United States,
should ask anything of the Malaki, he would give me an answer.
In ceremonies*? on the mountains, this god is invoked again and
again — indeed, there is no other divine person who is so often
appealed to for help, who is so frequently mentioned in song and
story, or who is so affectionately regarded by all of the Bagobo.
There is also a family of gods — a male deity, his wife, and
two children — known as Olu k’Waig, and associated with the
mountain streams. All of them are said to be extremely small in size,
but otherwise they are not definitely described, although it is
currently reported that Datu Yting once caught sight of them on
the mountain trails. In spite of the identity in name, they do not
appear to be traditionally associated with the Malaki t’Olu k’Waig.
There is said to be “a Bagobo god who lives everywhere” and
is called Tambara. This is the name given to the bamboo prayer-
stand found in many Bagobo houses, yet I have heard but a single
mention of a divine personality called by the same name. While
possibly this extremely common type of altar was once associated
primarily with the worship of the god Tambara, it is certain that
its use is not now so limited, for tambara are set up in honor
of many different spirits.
A supernatural protector to whom at least one ceremonial chant
is addressed is Duma-Tango, who is otherwise called, “the god
who keeps the people,” and a shrine is sometimes set up in the
festival house for this divinity. The word duma is variously used
to mean companion, wife, or husband, and it is possible that Duma-
Tango will eventually be found to be related to one of the
other Bagobo deities, for we have to bear in mind, continually,
the Malay fondness for paraphrase and for indirect allusions.
*2 See Part II.
20 ‘ ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Bagobo dialect carries the idea of “something to be taken care of,”
“a pet,” like a tame bird. I have seen a boy pull from a snare a
little wood-pigeon and hold it to his breast with a caressing touch,
as he murmured, “It is my yama.” He had caught the bird in
order to cage, to tame and to care for it. Tigyama means ‘One
who takes care of or protects.” Like Pamulak Manobo, Tigyama
is lovingly summoned to come and be present at a ceremony;*' a
little hanging altar, also called tigyama,is placed in many Bagobo
houses, and on it betel is laid for this god when anybody in the
family falls sick.*% It is possible that Tigyama is a divinity
borrowed originally from Indian myth and given somewhat different
attributes, for, in the Vedas and in the Sagas, Yama was god of
the dead.*® The character of the Bagobo Tigyama seems more
nearly identical with that of Yima of Mazdeism,*° the protector of
the Iranians and the mythical founder of their postdiluvian culture.
Among the chief of those unseen beings that care for the Bagobo,
there is a divine man called Malaki t’Olu k’Waig*! who, unques-
tionably, represents the highest ideal of goodness and of purity, as
the native visualizes that ideal. He figures as a hero in mythical
romance, where, indeed, one finds many malaki tolu k’waig, who
eo through remarkable adventures and achieve distinction. On the
devotional side, however, all of these fabulous characters are fused
into the impersonation of one beloved individual, whose home is
associated with a legendary spring far up in the mountains which
is called “the source of the waters.” Here two rivers are said to
take their rise, and it is just at the point where the two streams
separate that the Malaki t’Olu k’Waig lives. He is the great
*7 See Ceremony of Pamalugu, Part II.
*®See Various types of Altar, Part IL.
9° Cf. Somadeva: Katha Sarit Sagara, tr. by C. H. Tawney, vol. 2, p. 188. 1884.
In the story, Sinhavikrama is led off by Death to the hall of Yama, where he is to be
judged. See also “A funeral hymn,” in the Rigveda, where the following lines occur.
“To him that passed along great heights and sought out a path for many, Vivasvant’s
son, the gatherer of men, Yama the king, to him bring worship and offering.” Peter
Peterson (tr.): Hymns from the Rigveda, p. 288. 1888. In the same hymn, the by-
standers are thus addressed: “Stand aside, go away, disperse, the fathers have made this
place for him, furnished with days and waters and nights; Yama will give him rest.”
Ih. p. 289.
“© Of. James Darmesteter (ed.): The Zendavesta; part I, The Vendiddd, pp. lviii—lix.
1895. (Sacred books of the Bast, vol. 4).
* Malaki, “good man;” ?’(to), “the;” k (ka), “of;”? waig, “water:” the Divine Man
(or the god) at the Source of the Waters.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 21
healer, and to his home are carried all the diseases which the
Bagobo, by magic rites, have coaxed into leaf-dishes or into little
manikins. Here, at the mythical spring, the Malaki destroys all
sickness that is sent to him. He winds one end of a string, or
fibre, around the neck of each disease, ties the other end to some
post or tree, and quickly strangles the disease. The Malaki t’Olu
k’Waig is believed to know the whole world; he never sleeps;
he answers prayer wherever offered. The range of his influence
is now generously extended to include even recently-known foreign-
ers, for I was’ told that if I, while praying in the United States,
should ask anything of the Malaki, he would give me an answer.
In ceremonies?” on the mountains, this god is invoked again and
again — indeed, there is no other divine person who is so often
appealed to for help, who is so frequently mentioned in song and
story, or who is so affectionately regarded by all of the Bagobo.
There is also a family of gods — a male deity, his wife, and
two children — known as Olu k’Waig, and associated with the
mountain streams. All of them are said to be extremely small in size,
but otherwise they are not definitely described, although it is
currently reported that Datu Yting once caught sight of them on
the mountain trails. In spite of the identity in name, they do not
appear to be traditionally associated with the Malaki t’Olu k’Waig.
There is said to be “a Bagobo god who lives everywhere” and
is called Tambara. This is the name given to the bamboo prayer-
stand found in many Bagobo houses, yet I have heard but a single
mention of a divine personality called by the same name. While
possibly this extremely common type of altar was once associated
primarily with the worship of the god Tambara, it is certain that
its use is not now so limited, for tambara are set up in honor
of many different spirits.
A supernatural protector to whom at least one ceremonial chant
is addressed is Duma-Tango, who is otherwise called, “the god
who keeps the people,” and a shrine is sometimes set up in the
festival house for this divinity. The word duma is variously used
to mean companion, wife, or husband, and it is possible that Duma-
Tango will eventually be found to be related to one of the
other Bagobo deities, for we have to bear in mind, continually,
the Malay fondness for paraphrase and for indirect allusions.
*2 See Part II.
29 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Yalatandin (var. Yanatandin) is a diwata whose office it is to
protect solitary women in the meadows, and to permit no man to
molest them. In one Bagobo song, there is a reference, in highly
allegorical language, to a maiden alone in a field where the blades
of rank cogon grass** are sharp like needles; but from whose sting
she is saved when Yalatandin spreads over the ground a richly-
embroidered textile, the tambayang, for her to lie down upon.
One other mythical person associated with the meadow grass is
called Malaki Lisu Karan,** who, from his name, would be con-
ceived to live in the very densest part of the tall, waving, cogon
growth. He is mentioned in the songs together with malaki who
live in various species of bamboo.
Of high importance in relation to daily life, is Tarabume, *
who cares for the growing rice and for the hemp plants, and who,
if the ritual at planting is properly performed, gives an abundant
rice crop.*° The beautiful ceremonial called marimmas, with its
waving of plumes and its striking of clappers is carried on for the
pleasure of Tarabumé. “We make the digging-stick pretty to please
Tarabume; when the clapper goes, he can hear the pretty sound.”
“Diwata makes the rice and the hemp grow; he lives in the sky;”
and again, in this connection the Bagobo say that they mean
Tarabume.
In close association with the industry of casting brass, stands the
god Paneyangen, another so-called good manobo, of huge size, who
dwells far up on the mountains where he protects the swarms of
wild bees that hive in the flowering trees. That the comb-building
and the honey-making of the bees should go on unmolested and
under divine care, is of vital interest to the Bagobo, for the young
men must secure wax for the moulds used in the process of casting
bells, betel-boxes, armlets and leglets. The honey gathered with
the wax is a favorite article of diet, and the young bees are
relished too, the tablet-shaped comb containing the newly hatched
“* Cogon saccharum koenigii a meadow grass that grows rankly in the mountains of
Mindanao, large areas of it alternating with dense forests.
“* Tisu, “pit, kernel, center; saran, “meadow grass.”
“° The same name is recorded by Mr. Cole as Zaragomi. Op. cit., p. 85.
“* The Recollect fathers wrote of the Calamianes, in 1624, that “they adored a deity
who resembled Ceres, to whom they commended their fields and offered their fruits.”
Bram and Ropertson: op. cit., vol. 21, p. 228. 1905. The ceremonial at ice sowing is
described in Part II.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 23
bees being lightly toasted and dipped into liquid honey, or eaten
unbrowned. Thus the office of Paneyangen, as protector of the
bees, is a highly important one and a special dance, performed by
one girl alone, is danced in his honor. Several legendary episodes
cluster about bees, which are visualized in the myths as white. *!
The god who controls success in the hunt is Abog (var. Ubog),
an old man with a big belly who is engaged much of the time in
killing game. He is reputed to have his home on the small island
named Samal, in the gulf of Davao, and here he keeps a great
store of bows and arrows for shooting the wild boar and the deer,
which he brings down in great numbers. Offerings of arrows are
made to him by the Bagobo, and in return he helps them to
track and to spear their game.
Certain interesting water-gods, known as Gamo-Gamo, are distin-
guished in bodily aspect by mermaid characters, though they behave
in a different manner from the traditional mermaid. The female
gamo-gamo are divinities of little streams, while the gamo-gamo
men are in charge of large rivers. Both sexes are human down
to the waist; below that, fish — resembling a big fish called mung-
agat. In the test for theft, these river-people seize the guilty
one, and torment him with pricks from their sharp iron punches.
Another type of gamo-gamo is a good manobo who lives in the
ocean, and takes care of large vessels. He is said to be of enor-
mous height, with a head as high as a Bagobo man’s full stature.
Gods of the sky*® are Sebandal and Salangayd. There is a
beautiful dance called salangayd that I saw performed by Saliman,
one of the most artistic dancers on the mountains. They said it
was done for the sky-god, Salangayd. Another pretty dance is
executed by one girl for the “God-brother in the sky,” who, it
was explained to me, is brother to girls only, and is hence called
Ug-Tube. * A myth accounting for the origin of the “god-brother”’
is yet to be discovered.
*7%n an unpublished manuscript, I have a song that refers to a certain malaki who
was nurtured by a white bee. Note also a Spanish version of the story of Lumabat
which represents this hero as passing up into heaven escorted by a swarm of white bees.
Cf. ¥. Brumenteitt: Diccionario mitologico, p. 73. 1895.
*® The Bagobo very commonly speak of this or of that divinity as a “god in the sky,”
without specific limitation as to place.
*® A word indicating the relationship between sister and brother, each of whom is
zubé to the other. The prefix wg appears to have a purely formal or a phonetic value.
24 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Mountain-gods are Renerungen and Sindar. Of Sindar we know
nothing. Renerungan is the name of a family of friendly gods —
a man, his wife, and four children.
Another supernatural being associated with the mountains is
Tagamaling,°®” who is, traditionally, a god on the alternate months
only, and at other times a demon. In a later chapter,°’ under the
caption, “the Demons called Buso,” Tagamaling finds his place,
but he ought to be mentioned at this point because he is god half
of the time, and one hears him mentioned with the other dios of
the mountains. As the special protector, too, of deer and of pigs,
Tagamaling cannot be excluded from the spirits that are closely
related to the interests of the Bagobo. Primarily, there are two
chief tagamaling, a male god and his wife, but, according to folk-
lore, there must be very many spirits by that name.
The gods ruling over the ground and the air are known as Linug,
some of whom are male, some female; the former being in charge
of large areas of ground, while the latter are rulers of small sections
of land. As dinug is also the word for earthquake, it may be in-
ferred that these divinities are held responsible for all tremblings
and conyulsions of the earth, although I did not hear a statement
to that effect.
The names of two deities are forbidden to the lips of the Bagobo:
the god of fire and the god of the sea. Old men at Tubison, while
mentioning other gods, told me that, if they should speak the name
of the god of fire, the buso would come; and that they must not
utter the name of the god of the sea. In one corner of the Long
House at Tubison, I noticed a bamboo prayer-stand (tambara), set
up for a divinity of the fire (apuy); but no other bit of evidence
has come under my observation that would justify us in calling
the Bagobo “fire-worshippers,”
my
as reputed.°* Fire does not appear
to be held by them as a sacred object to any greater extent than
streams or trees or dense thickets may chance to be so regarded, though
it is true that spirits throng the earth and the air in such numbers
that any interesting phenomenon, like a flame, is likely to be
referred to a supernatural agency. The reverence of the Bagobo
for the names of fire-deities and sea-deities may be an extraneous
°°See pp. 35—386.
51 See p. 29.
52 Cf. United States Bureau of the Census: Census of the Philippine Islands, vol. 1,
p- 561. 1905.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 25
element, possibly due to some very early dissemination of an Indo-
Iranian tradition of the sacredness of the four elements. It has
been noted, however, in preceding paragraphs, that gods of earth,
of air, of fresh water, are freely mentioned, and that one gamo-
gamo is associated with marine life.
We have now to consider the Mandarangan, a class of war-gods **
of very high rank who, in their ceremonial capacity and in their
relation to individuals, are of first-rate importance. Ordinarily, one
hears only the chief of these war-gods mentioned, Mandarangan
proper, who is the mighty god of warriors, as well as of all brave
men who have actually taken human life in fair fight or by the
orders of the datu, and thus are privileged to wear the peculiar
kerchief known as tankulu. Mandarangan is one of the divinities
to whom the higher rites of the ceremonial are paid,** and for
whose pleasure human sacrifices are offered. He is called “the
God of the Sky for Men,” but he is conceived to live at will on
Mount Matutun®? and on Mount Apo.®° He fills a man’s heart
with fierce courage stimulating him to fight, and thus give blood
to him (Mandarangan) to drink; and any man who has killed many
persons is under the special protection of Mandarangan. In part,
because of his residence on the yoleano Apo; in part, because of
his love for blood, there has been some tendency among those
Spanish priests who have left documents on native customs to
identify Mandarangan with Buso,** but his personality stands out
sharply distinct from that of Buso. Carefully it was explained to
me that Mandarangan eats the flesh of those only who have been
slain in fight, and of victims offered in sacrifice; while Buso, on
the contrary, eats any dead body that he can get hold of, whether
5% The Calamianes are said to have “worshiped ... a petty deity who resembled
Mars, in order to gain protection in their battles.” Brain and ROBERTSON: op. cit.,
vol. 21, p. 228. 1905.
5* See index for references to Mandarangan.
°§ An extinct volcano, just north of Sarangani bay.
°® An active volcano in southern Mindanao, and the highest peak in the Philippines,
with a height of 10, 312 feet. Cf. Census of the Philippine Islands, vol. 1, pp. 71, 202. 1905.
57 Popular writers, as well as missionaries, have drawn the inference that Mandarangan
is “a devil” and “responsible for all ailments.” See A. H. Savage Landor: “The Gems
of the East,” p. 362. 1904. So far, however, from being in any manner identified with
evil, Mandarangan is represented as placing himself in oppositiou to evil in the combat
with Buso. Mandarangan’s presence is desired in the ceremonial house, where food and
drink and entertainment are prepared for him; while every art is used to drive away the
buso from the festival. Cf. section, “the Demons called Buso,” pp. 29—43.
sy
26 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
the death has occurred by sickness or by violence. Mandarangan,
according to tradition, often fights with Buso and invariably puts
the mean demon to flight.
There is a belief, not precisely formulated, in the existence of a
great number of minor spirits also called mandarangan, that are
closely related to those Bagobo men who have distinguished them-
selves by exploit. It is said that a mandarangan lives in the head
of a braye man and that this is what makes him brave. “When
the brave man is asleep at night,” Islao told me, “the mandarangan
stands under the house, under the bed. When you go out, he goes
too; when you come back, he comes too.”
As Mandarangan is called “God of the Sky for Men,” there is
correspondingly a “God of the Sky for Women,” whose name is
Tot-darigo. This is, undoubtedly, the same spirit that was called
by Father Gisbert, Daragé, and was by him identified with Manda-
rangan. ‘This investigator makes practically no distinction between
the war-gods and the demons, any more than between Mandarangan
and Daragé, according to his letter of July 26, 1886. “There is
no rancheria in which they do not annually make their feasts to
the demon — Busao, Mandarangan, or Daragé, for they are wont
to give him these and many other names.... There... they drink
toasts.. in honor of the great Daragd, whom they promise to follow
and honor forever, offering to him, as did their ancestors, the blood
of many human victims, so that he may be their friend and aid
them in their wars.”°* I heard Dartigo’s name coupled closely
with that of Mandarangan, and mentioned as holding a like relation
to women as his toward men; but while Mandarangan’s name was
constantly used in connection with the ceremonies, I rarely heard an
allusion to Daruigo. I am inclined to the opinion, however, that
she is included in the honors paid to Mandarangan at sacrificial
rites.
There remains to be discussed a class of omniscient beings whose
personal names, perhaps through fear of desecration, are never
° a word
which is explained as meaning “One who knows everything.”
mentioned, but who are invariably referred to as Tolus, °
°® Biark and ROBERTSON: op. cit., vol. 43, p. 249. 1906.
°° The derived adjective, matolus, is applied to great heroes of romance who have
superhuman understanding and who slay a multitude of foes by magical power. The
Malaki t’ Olu k’ Waig has the ‘quality of being matolus; but it is questionable whether
olu, “head” or “source,” and olus are etymologically related.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 27
The most deeply reverenced of them all is Tolus ka Balekat, the
god of the balekat, which is the highest type of altar, and the one
before which the culminating act of Ginum is performed on the
last night. In honor of this divinity, the ceremonial bamboos are
set up; before him the sacrificial food is placed on a sacred shelf,
and he is apostrophized by the priest in some such words as these:
“Tolus ka Balekat, we are making a Ginum for you; we are
killing a victim for you.” Many manufactured articles are hung
on the altar for this god, who is said to wear a shell bracelet into
which the spirit of each offering passes for his enjoyment, and he
makes known, through the lips of a medium, that he is extremely
jealous of his rights, not permitting the sale of any object that
should come to the balekaét. Yet he is not indifferent to the interests
of the Bagobo, for he warns them against sickness, and informs
them of the source whence the disease comes.
The god called Tolus ka Kawayan is the “All-knowing One of
the Bamboo.” He is particular about the punctual performance of
the Ginum, and threatens to send sickness if there be undue delay.
The Tolus ka Balekayo®° is a female divinity who is associated
with the sections of forest made up of that slender, thorny variety
of bamboo called balekayo. She is also interested in the proper
conduct of the great festival and gives directions, through a priestess,
on this subject.
Another woman-god is the Tolus ka Talegit, called the ‘All-
knowing Medicine of the Loom,” who understands perfectly the
art of weaving and knows all about the work of the women.
At present, it is impossible to state in how many connections the
unseen beings called tolus appear, but that a very large number of
them function as the mysterious, impelling forces of industry, is
highly probable. The little bamboo prayer-stand beside a black-
smith’s forge®' suggests the existence of a tolus for workers in
60 There is some evidence that a Tolus may be associated with each of the magic
plants and trees which are employed for repelling the approach of Buso; one of these is
the balekayo, another the dalinding. At a certain devotional office, the spirits of these
vegetable growths are addressed, and they are asked not to let the Buso pass by, but
to prevent him from getting into the ceremonial house. The dalinding, as well as the
balekayo, is asked to be “all-knowing” in respect to the Bagobo — the form of address
used to a Tolus. It seems to be understood that the spirits residing in those plants which
have a charm value shall shield the people from evil beings, and I am inclined to think
that it is a Tolus that gives such plants their magical effect.
°* It is interesting to note that Cole found at Sibulan the belief that the “workers in
28 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
iron,°* and the discovery of other such guardian divinities of in-
dustrial arts is to be expected. While the personality of the various
tolus is but vaguely outlined, this fact, at all events, is clear: that
their relationship with the people is a very intimate one, as con-
cerns daily work and daily needs; and it is equally true that the
wisdom of a tolus is considered infallible, whether the question be
one of a ceremonial detail, or of a wasting illness,
The anito, so often mentioned by the early writers on the
Philippines, even as far back as the Saavedra voyage®*? of 1527—
1528, and used with so many different connotations, in Bagobo theo-
logy are simply divinities under a certain aspect; that is to say,
they are gods coming into direct communication with the people
through the instrumentality of mediums who convey the divine
oracle. Almost any god or spirit, with the exception of the diwata
of the nine heavens, may assume for a brief time the character
of anito. My conclusion that the word anito refers to the temporary
functioning of any god, rather than to some well-defined class of
gods, is borne out by the fact that the spirit of a particular sick-
ness, or the spirit of a living individual, when speaking through
the mouth of an official intermediary in the conventional manner
is termed anito, equally with the divinities. This entire subject
will be more fully considered under the caption, “Interviews with
the gods called Manganito.” °*
As for guardian spirits of individual Bagobo, all that we know
is comprised in a few scanty allusions. he personal mandarangan
of brave men have been mentioned in an earlier paragraph. To
this I have only to add that, while attending the festival at Tubison,
I saw, in one corner of the Long House, a bamboo prayer-stand
which, they told me, was for the dios of Datu Imbal, our host.
At Yting’s harvest, the god of at least one member of the family
was invoked at a certain point in the ceremony. This was the
dios of Hebe, Yting’s younger wife.
brass and copper are under the care and guidance of a spirit, Tolus ka Towangan, for
whom they make a yearly ceremony, Gomek towangan.” Op. cit., p. 82.
62 For the position of the blacksmith among the natives of central Celebes, and for
the ceremonial paraphernalia of his smithy, see P. and F. Sarasin: Reisen in Celebes,
vol. 1, pp. 230—231. 1905.
** The chronicler of this voyage states that the natives of Cebu offered human sacrifices
to the anito. Cf. Brain and Rosertson: op. cit., vol. 2, p. 42. 1903.
®* See Part. III.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 29
The following divinities are mentioned by the Spanish fathers,
and collected by Blumentritt in his “Diccionario mitologico.” °°
Although there may be question as to their respective attributes,
they no doubt have their place in the Bagobo pantheon.
Domakolen, creator of the mountains.
Makakoret, creator of the air.
Makaponguis, creator of the water.
Mamale, creator of the earth.
Malibud, the deity who created women.
Salibud, a god who taught the first men to cultivate the fields, to trade,
and to carry on various industries.
Todlay,® a god who presides over marriages and was creator of the male
sex. Todlibon, wife of Todlay, yet a goddess ever-virgin.
I will conclude this section with a little word-picture of the
gods, as given by Uan, son of Kaba. “Diwata are good manobo
who live in the sky. They protect Bagobo, Americans, Kulaman,
Tagakaola, Kalagan, Ata — not the Moro; Moro are bad people.
The diwata are male and female. The diwata are rich. They never
eat; they sleep at night; they have very good clothes, fine and
shining clothes. They take care of all the living; they do not
care for the dead. No, indeed! Buso looks after the dead. Datu
Yting knows a diwata; he saw him once far up in the mountains;
he spoke Bagobo.”
THE DEMONS CALLED BUSO
All demons, spirits of diseases, evil supernatural beings of what-
ever form, anthropomorphic and zodmorphic, are classed by the
Bagobo under the generic name of buso. The fundamental concept
underlying all of these manifestations of evil is that of a being
that preys upon human flesh, that sends sickness to the living in
order to kill them and thus have their dead bodies for food. There
is, for the most part, no idea of an interaction between stimuli
from bad spirits and the religious or ethical transgressions of man. °‘
*> Cf. under each letter in its alphabetical position. The “Mamale” that he refers to
is perhaps identical with the constellation Mamare, since 7 and 7 are interchangeable
sounds, according to the location of the Bagobo group.
66 For myths concerning Tuglay and Tuglibung, (Blumentritt’s Todlay and Todlibon),
see pp. 65—74 Cf. also F. C. Core; op. cit., p. 106, where “Toglai” and “Toglibon”
ure mentioned as spirits in charge of marriages, and as having given language and
customs to the Bagobo.
°7 The demons, Tagareso and Balinsugu, should be excepted from this general statement.
See pp. 86—37.
30 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Buso does not incite a Bagobo to break tabu or to steal rice.
Though a spiritual foe, his attacks are aimed, ordinarily, against
the body alone.
Toward securing some means of propitiating Buso, or of shunting
off his attacks, the attention of the Bagobo is constantly directed.
They pray to Buso; they prepare for him offerings of areca-nuts
and betel-leaf; they erect to him tiny houses for shrines, under
forest trees, by the wayside, at the river, near the dwelling-houses
— particularly at the time of a festival.°* There are altars for
the buso of the woods, for the buso of the ground, for the buso
of the rattan, for the buso of the nearer side of the river, for the
buso of the farther side of the river. The shrines are like many
of those put up in honor of the friendly gods, and the form of the
devotions is outwardly much the same, but the intention of the
rites is altogether different. In the first place, altars to Buso are
never placed within the home or within the ceremonial house,
like altars to friendly deities, but at strategic points that command
the approaches to the house, or else in the deep forest. Secondly,
as regards the substance of the prayers, the gods are implored to
baffle the operations of disease-bringing demons; but a buso, the
recognized source of sickness, is conjured in various ways, Every
single devotion to Buso is a-mere magical device for inducing him
to go away. It must be noted, too, that in those cases where a
god sends sickness, it is because the Bagobo have broken some
religious mandate or have failed in the technique of a ritual,
and the sickness is felt to be the logical outcome of a clumsy per-
formance. ‘The diseases with which a buso tortures the body come,
avowedly, to cause death so that the food supply of dead bodies
for the buso may be increased. These distinguishing features give
to each form of devotion its own peculiar atmosphere.
Associated closely with the buso are the ghosts of the dead,
since it is believed that the evil soul,°® or tebang, of a person
becomes at death a burkan, which in its nature is practically
identical with a buso. It haunts graves and lonely trails; it eats
dead bodies, and is commonly called a buso. Tradition indicates
vaguely that long ago nobody died, and that the attitude of Buso
toward man at that time was friendly,‘® by which tradition we
®® See Ceremony of Awas, Part II.
*° For a discussion of the character of the evil soul, see pp. 58—61.
7° Cf. Jour. Am, Folk-lore, vol. 26, pp. 42—43. 1913.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH JF
are led to infer that not all buso are ghosts. It will not do to
press this inference too far, however, for the Malay may not feel
a contradiction that, to us, is at once apparent. Yet the most
malignant buso, called tigbanud, seem to be distinguished from
burkan, or ghosts, for I have heard an old man, while explaining
a ceremony, make this remark: *We offer betel to all the tigbanua
and to all the dead buso.” Again, the statement is made that
“there are many buso and many burkan.” Moreover, there are a
great number of zoémorphic forms called tigbanudé or buso that are
not identified with ghosts. The fact is, that so great is the mul-
titude of mental images associated with evil spirits in their diverse
shapes and functions, that some little confusion in dealing with the
subject is almost inevitable. There are different lines of approach,
according to whether a native is talking of sickness, or of death,
or of a ceremonial, or of a haunted tree, or of an episode in a
story; and he makes no attempt to correlate these various lines of
approach, or to define exactly the groups of evil personalities that
he happens to be dealing with.
The volcano Apo, whose intermittent eruptions of sulphurous
vapor and whose matchless height suggest mysterious dwelling-
places for spirits, has long been regarded as the home of the worst
buso or tigbanud, of many less malevolent buso or tagamaling, and
of a yast throng of bad ghosts (burkan), all of whom live in an
enormous house within the mountain into which the crater leads
as a vast passageway, or as an open door. Great numbers of wild
animals, reptiles and flying creatures live on the summit of the
voleano — deer, pigs, cats, dogs, civets, mice, flying lemurs, mon-
keys, birds, jungle fowl, snakes and monitor lizards — all of which
belong to Buso. Around the edge of the crater, the prints of these
animals may be seen by those persons who have the temerity to
make the ascent (so say the old men); but the fabulous animals
are invisible, except to all the buso. There are also living on
Mount Apo great numbers of the so-called “bad animals,” that is
to say, buso under the form of beasts. Here is one of the little
folk tales of Apo.
All the old Bagobo men say that in the crater of Apo lives a rich man.
He is a Chinaman, and he keeps a store there. Long ago a Bagobo man
climbed up to see the volcano. He saw a big hole in the top ofit. He went
down into the hole and found a big house with a store in it. He went in
and rested there a while. A Chinaman was keeping the store. By and by
32 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
the Chinaman told him that he must go away. “Why,” asked the Bagobo.
“Because the buso will be here in a few minutes and he eats people.”
Then the man went home. In a few minutes the Buso came to rest in the
store. He smiled and said: “Who has been here?” “Nobody but a dog,”
replied the Chinaman.
That Americans are not afraid to ascend the voleano without the
use of protective charms, is a source of bewilderment to the Bagobo,
and that no fatal illness follows the rash act is still more astonish-
ing; but the native explanation is that we treat Buso with pro-
nounced courtesy, and thus win his favor. “The American people
can go to Apo, because they are very polite to Buso. If they were
not polite, Buso would eat them.”
Though having their special habitat on Mount Apo, and on
another mountain called Mabanisan,‘' the buso are said to frequent,
in general, all localities where there are graves, empty houses,
solitary mountain trails. At any time, indeed, or in any place
outside of the house, there is the chance of a buso making his
appearance. The young people are impressed with the idea that
“Buso lives everywhere out-of-doors; and that a buso is “in every
way. For this reason, a Bagobo rarely walks alone for any con-
siderable distance over the mountains; two, or several, go in com-
pany, the more easily to ward off Buso’s influence, for, although
unable to attack directly a living man or openly kill him, he
works under covert by entering, in the form of some disease, the
body of his victim; or by some other means he makes him sick.
An empty house is likely to be buso-haunted, even if its owner
has gone away for but a short time, and the neighbors are cautious
about entering during his absence. One often sees several Bagobo
sitting on the bamboo rounds of the house-ladder, and waiting
patiently for some member of the family to return, when they will
all go up the steps together. Rarely does a buso dare to enter a
house while people are living there, at least during the day, for
the demons are supposed to be afraid of meeting, face to face,
people in health and action; but in case’ of mortal illness Buso
scents from afar the flesh of the dying, and flies through the air
until he comes to rest under the house, or even inside of the sick-
room. Unless by some magical means he can be driven away, he
seizes the body as soon as life is extinct, puts into its place a
*1 The situation of this mountain is not known to the writer.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 33
section of a banana-trunk, to deceive the friends, and goes off, riding
on the corpse.
Certain species of forest trees are traditionally haunted by demons,
particularly the baliti,‘* the mararag,‘* the pananag, the barayung,
the magbok, and the lanaon‘* — all of which are mentioned in
folklore and myth as sacred to Buso. In general, too, any individ-
ual tree‘? having spreading branches and heavy, straggling roots
protruding above the surface of the earth is associated with the
possible home of a buso, and is pointed out, fearfully, as an object
to be avoided after dark. Throughout the island tribes, indeed, a
tree of such appearance is almost universally held to be haunted.
Both mythology and current folklore represent the number of
individual buso as practically unlimited; they people the air and
the mountains and the forests by myriads; their number is legion. ‘°
72 Spelled by some writers as dalete; the form Jdaliti is here adopted as a matter of
uniformity with other Malay words throughout this paper. The tree is a species of /cus,
and is very generally associated with spirit habitation, in the beliefs of the Filipino as
well as of the wild tribes. It is a tall tree, with large branches, dark-green leaves — long,
narrow, firm-textured and glossy — and with roots that grow out from the trunk for
some distance above the ground. Sawyer observes that the dadi¢i corresponds to our
witch elm. Cf. The Inhabitants of the Philippines, p. 348. 1900. Cf. also Chirino’s
observations on the dalztz, Buarr and RoBERTSON: op. c7¢., vol. 12, p. 214; and footnote. 1904.
73 The Bagobo word for yellow.
74 Presumably the tree called, variously, Ziman, lanaon, lauan, lauaan, and identified by
Foreman and by Blair and Robertson as Dipterocarpus thurifera; it is characterized by
wood that is reddish-white or ash-colored with brown spots and is light in weight, and by
its yield of fragant white resin that is used for incense. Cf. J. ForeMAN: The Philippine
Islands, 2 ed., p. 370. 1899. Gf. also, Buarr and Roserrson; op. cit., vol. 18, p. 171. 1904.
78 Cf. “Bagobo myths.’ Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, pp. 44, 49, 50. 19138. Skeat
says that the peninsular Malays associate the Aaztus, or spirits of evil, with particular
trees which they suppose these spirits to frequent after dark. Cf. Malay magic, pp.
64—65. 1900. For similar traditions in the southern islands, ef. Blumentritt’s discus-
sion of sacred trees in Sumatra, Nias, Java, Borneo, Celebes, Burn, etc., in Diccionario
mitologico, pp. 29—31. 1895. The ancient Tagal and Visayan believed that the spirits
of ancestors, called xoxo or nzonok, resided in the da/zte and in certain other trees, all of
which, by a figure of speech, were similarly named zozo, For a treatment of this subject,
see the extract from Tomas Ortiz: “Practica del ministerio.” Buiair and ROBERTSON:
op. cit., vol. 43, pp. 104—105. 1906. Among the Bagobo, I have not heard the grand-
father, or zono, conception mentioned. With them, it is the buso that haunt the trees;
and, although the bad ghost is a kind of buso, this is not the ancestral spirit idea.
76 Here, again the Bagobo Follows the great body of Malay tradition. Cf. the dis-
cussion of the hantu among pagan tribes of the peninsula, as given by Stevens, and by
Martin, who says: “Wenn Stevens schreiht: ‘Jeder Baum hat seine besondere Art Han-
tu’s,” und wenn er ferner von Hantu redet, die ‘durch Regen, durch Hitze, in Bergen,
Seen, Steinen, Baiumen, u.s.w.’ wirken, so kommt dies einer Beseelung der Ganzen Na-
tur gleich...” “Die Mehrzahl dieser letztgenannten Hantu scheint nicht spezialisiert zu
3
34 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Of course, like the ghosts and demons of all other peoples, it is
in darkness‘* that the buso are particularly busy in their evil
deeds, although, here and there, they have been known to make
their presence felt by day.
These vast throngs of evil personalities, known under the col-
lective term of buso, are subdivided into several groups, and in
these, again, we find a great number of individual names, each of
which suggests some peculiar external buso-character, or some par-
ticular buso-trait, or some set mode of preying upon the human-
kind, Of such sub-groups and individuals, the following are typical.
The tigbanua‘* are representative fiends of the most dangerous
sort. ‘To them, more than to any other buso, shrines are erected,
magic formule are recited, and propitiatory offerings are made;
while numerous spells are constantly worked to frustrate their evil
designs. A tigbanud is reported to live in a state of perpetual
cannibalism and to be most repulsive in aspect, having one eye in
the middle of the forehead, a hooked chin two spans long and
upturned to catch the drops of blood that may chance to drip from
the mouth, and a body covered with coarse black hair. From
Mount Apo and from the deep forest the tigbanua come flying or
running to every fresh-dug grave, whether it be on mountain or
sein, d.h. man spricht meist einfach von Berg-, Wald-, und Baum-Hantu im Hinblick
auf einen einzelnen Fall. ...,,Die Inlandstimme der malayischen Halbinsel, pp. 946—
947, 1905.
77 Those evil spirits that figure in Indian saga under the names of Rakshasa, Yaksha
and Pisacha are said to “have no power in the day, being dazed with the brightness of
the sun; they delight in the night.” Somadeva; Katha Sarit Sagara; ed. cit., vol. 1,
p. 47. 1880. See also the prayer in the Atharva-Veda. “Shelter us... from greedy
fiends who rise in troops at night-time when the moon is dark.” R. T. H. Grirrivn
(tr.): Hymns of the Atharva-Veda, vol. 1, p. 19. 1895.
7® Tigbanua is practically identical with Banuanhon, of Visayan myth, and with Tig-
balang, a ‘Tagal demon, as indicated in the following passage from the writings of Fray
Casemiro Diaz, 1638—1640, trans. by Blair and Robertson. “Moreover, in those moun-
tains of Panay, are many demons, who appear to the natives in horrible forms — as
hideous savages, covered with bristles, having very long claws, with terrifying eyes and
features, who attack and maltreat those whom they encounter. ‘hese beings are called
by the Indians Banuanhon, who are equivalent to the satyrs aud fauns of ancient times...
They are called in the Tagal language Tigbalang, and many persons who have seen them
have described to me, in the same terms, the aspect of the monster. They say that he
has a face like a cat’s, with a head that is flattened above, not round, with thick beard,
and covered with long hair; his legs are so long that, when he squats on his buttocks,
his knees stand a vara above his head; and he is so swift in running that there is no
quadruped that can be compared with him,” The Philippine Islands, vol. 29, pp. 269—
270, 1905.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 3a
beside the sea; they drink the blood from the corpse, and gnaw the
flesh from the bones, and then throw away the skeleton. Gruesome
as is the situation, however, it is relieved by flashes of quaint hu-
mor, such as invariably dart into Bagobo talk and story. According
to the folktales, a tigbanua is often very dull of perception, very
credulous; so much so that a child, a cat, the moon, even a wo-
man’s comb may fool him and make a jest of him,‘* in much the
same manner that the trickster Coyote, of American myth, is him-
self, in turn, tricked by others.
The Tigbanua thost often invoked are the following:
Tigbanua kayo (of the timber, or forest trees);
Tigbanua balagan (of the rattan);
Tigbanua tana (of the ground);
Tigbanua waig (of the water);
Tigbanua batu (of the rocks, or stones);
Tigbanua dipag-dini-ka-waig (of this side of the river);
Tigbanua dipag-dutun-ka-waig (of the other side of the river);
Tigbanua buis (of the hut-shrine).
Another group of supernatural beings, the Tagamaling, are some-
times termed “good buso” on account of their extreme moderation
in eating human flesh, a practice in which they indulge only
on alternate months. The tagamaling are thought to resemble the
Bagobo in physiognomy and in manner of dressing. A few of them,
however, have eight faces. Their houses, invisible to man, are
hidden in dense foliage up on the mountains or the hills. I quote
from the “Story of Duling and the Tagamaling’’*° a tale of two
young men who are enticed to the house of a tagamaling by two taga-
maling girls; as a result of which adventure one of the youths is
turned into stone.
“Before the world was made, there were Tagamaling. The Tagamaling is
the best Buso, because he does not want to hurt man all of the time.
Tagamaling is actually Buso only a part of the time; that is, the month
when he eats people. One month he eats human flesh, and then he is Buso;
the next month he eats no human flesh, and then he is a god. So he
alternates, month by month. The month he is Buso, he wants to eat man
7° Stories of the tricking of Buso will be found in my “Bagobo myths.” Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, vol. 26, pp. 43—46, 48—50. 1913. With equal ease the Rakshasa of Indian
myth is duped, as shown in one of Somadeva’s tales: cf. op. cit., vol. 1, pp. 363—
364. 1880.
*° Jour. Am, Folk-Lore, vol. 26, pp. 50—51. Jan.—Mar., 19138.
36 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
during the dark of the moon; that is, between the phases that the moon
is full in the east and new in the west....
“The Tagamaling makes his house in trees that have hard wood, and low,
broad-spreading branches. His house is almost like gold, and is called
‘“Palimbing”, but it is made so that you cannot see it; and, when you pass
by, you think, ‘Oh! what a fine tree with big branches’, not dreaming that
it is the house of a Tagamaling. Sometimes, when you walk in the forest,
you think you see one of their houses; but when you come near to the place,
there is nothing. Yet you can smell the good things to eat in the house.”
Another literary reference to these legendary tree-dwellings of
the spirits is in a little poem, the text of which I have in manu-
script. A young man says to the girl whom he has seduced:
“In the mountains hide you,
Like Tagamaling’s house concealed.”
A rustic demon well known in folklore is S’iring,*' who, under
the guise of some relative or friend, lures a young person into the
densest part of the forest, causes him to lose memory and judgment,
and finally brings him to his death in some indirect manner.
What we call echo is the call of S’iring, who answers in a faint
voice the shout of some wanderer whom he is trying to entice from
the familiar trails. The S’iring is represented as having long sharp
nails and curly hair.
The demon who ‘makes men dizzy” is Tagasoro, and his presence
at a ceremonial is greatly feared.
Tagareso is an ugly fiend who stimulates ill-feeling and arouses
a quarrelsome spirit on festival occasions. He tries to make mar-
ried men dissatisfied with their wives, so that they will want to
run off and leave them.
Balinsugu is another dangerous spirit that stirs up enmity at
ceremonies, in the hope that good men may be induced to fight
and kill one another in the house where many are assembled, and
** For folklore of the Siring, see Jour. Am. Folk-Lore, vol. 26, pp. 51—53; and
ef. Katha Sarit Sagara, ed. cit., vol. 1, p. 837: “Whoever remains in the forest falls
prey to Yakshivi who bewilder him...”
Capricious forest demons, having certain characteristic marks of the Bagobo S’iring,
are mentioned by Aduarte, Bishop of Nueva Segovia. “They also tell of some very
mischievous tricks which the devil has played upon them. It happened sometimes that
when a man was alone in the field he came upon some creatures resembling little women.
They would deceive him, and either by alluring words or force would place him within
a thicket, and then toss him in the air as if he had been a ball; they then left him
half-dead.” Briain and Ropertson: op. cit. vol. 30, p. 293. 1905.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 37
thus give him blood to drink. I was present at a devotional meeting
at Oleng’s house when one of the anito urged the Bagobo to be
on their guard against Tagareso and Balinsugu.
The Mantianak,*? as everywhere throughout the Malay country,
is associated with childbirth, but there are local variations. Bagobo
tradition says that if a woman dies during her trial her spirit is
angry at the husband, since he is held responsible for the conditions
that caused his wife’s death. The ghost of the woman becomes a
mantianak that hovers in the air near her former home and utters
peculiar cries, resembling the mewing ofa cat. When the man hears
that sound at night, he knows that it is the voice of the mantianak
of his dead wife. This form of buso is characterized by a hole in
the breast and by the long claws, and it is called “a bad thing.”
They say that the mantianak is constantly trying to kill men and
boys, but that it is afraid of women and girls.
Some buso live in the sky, like the eight-eyed Riwa-riwa, *? who
62 A Malay compound of two elements; mati, “to die,” “dead;” anak, “child.” The
Bagobo and certain other tribes interpolate a vasal. ‘The Tagal makes the initial
sound a surd, p.
Concerning a parallel myth amoug the Tagal tribes, Father Plasencia wrote in 1589:
“If any woman died in child-birth, she and her child suffered punishment... at night
she could be heard lamenting. This was called patianac. See Brain and Ropertson:
op. cvt. vol. 7, p. 196, 1903. If the missionary drew a correct inference from the wail
of the woman’s spirit, the significance of the mantianak’s cry is distinctly different from
that given to it by the Bagobo, who put the burden upon the man. Birth-charms for
driving away this spirit are given by Ortiz, op. cit., vol. 43, p. 107, 1905. He states,
further, that when travelers lose their road, the patianac is to blame. Jd. p. 108.
Cole found among the Mandaya a belief in Muntianak, which was regarded as “the
spirit of a child whose mother died while pregnant, and who for this reason was born
in the ground.” Op. cit., p.177.
In the tradition of the peninsular Malays, the matianak (or pontianak) is a stillborn
child which takes the form of a night-owl that disturbs women and children at the time
of childbirth. If a woman dies in childbirth, she is popularly supposed to become a
lansugu, or flying demon, much like the pole-cat called bajang. Cf. W. W. Skeat: Malay
magic, pp. 329, 325, 327. 1900. Among certain inland tribes, according to Dr. Martin,
the matianak, as a jim or hantu, is the demon of puerperal fever, and occasionally takes
the form of a frog or a bird. Die Inlandstimme der malayischen Halbinsel, pp. 944,
946. 1905. The natives of Nias have a bechu matidna which has the power of tor-
menting a woman in childbirth, and of procuring abortion. Cf. Elio Modigliani: Un
viaggio a Nias, p. 625. 1890. For allied conceptions among the natives of Sarawak and
the tribes of south-east Borneo, and in other parts of the Malay area, cf. Blumentritt:
op. cit., article, “Patianak.”
** Blumentritt quotes the following description of Riwa-Riwa: “Segiin los Bagobos es
Rioa-rioa un ser espantoso y malo que, suspendido en el cenit, 4 manera de pendulo
38 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
listens to the talk of mortals. If anybody makes a random remark
that offends Riwa-riwa, his eight eyes “turn big;” he drops to the
ground, and brings sickness with him.
Of Busu buntud it is reported that he is black as soot, and has
nine faces.
Buso lisu t’?kayo, on the contrary, is pure white, being probably
associated with the pith of forest trees.
Buso t’abo is a mere torso of a demon, with head, chest, shoul-
ders and arms; but having no legs or abdomen. In pictures, his
body is cut off sharply at the waist.
One of the disease-bringers, named Karokung, is a white woman
with long black hair, whose home is in rivers. Her characteristics
will be described under the caption, “Disease and Healing.” **
In the native arts there are no figures or symbols of Buso to be
found, either in animal or in human form; but Bagobo boys and
girls who have learned to use the pencil a little and who also
come from families conversant with a wide range of buso folktales,
agree in stressing certain features that are traditionally character-
istic of the demon in his anthropomorphic guise — big round eyes,
tongue lolling from large mouth, branched horns, wings of varying
sizes, enormous feet, heavily clawed or hoofed. The characters that
are emphasized are those that stand out most prominently in folk-
lore, while the rest of the body takes its chance, so to speak, being
merely a “filler” for the really important buso traits. Such traits
characterize, in particular, the entire class of tigbanudé. On the
other hand, the tagamaling are pictured as looking like the Bagobo,
both in face and in costume; but their hair is curly rather than
wavy, and they carry small circular shields of an ancient pattern.
We now turn to the distinctly zobmorphic forms of the buso.
While the tigbanua, the s’iring, and perhaps other buso in human
form, have the power of assuming at will the appearance of certain
largo, llega con su boca 4 Ja tierra para devorar a los hombres que su servidor Zabankak
le presenta.” Diccionario mitologico, p. 100. 1895.
Blumentritt finds mentioned by the Spaniards a Bagobo demon named Pelubatan; and
in association with Riwa-Riwa another evil spirit called Tabanka that is characterized as
follows: “Un demonio de los Bagobos. Es el espiritu de impureza y libertinaje, cuyo
officio es tentar a hombres y mujeres contra el sexto y nono mandamientos de la Ley de
Dios, para que, habiendo muchos escindalos, rifias y asesinatos, tenga que comer en abun-
dancia su amo Riva-riva.” /éid, p. 111.
#*See Part III.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 39
animals, °° there are, in addition, a large number of evil personal-
ities that have peculiar and permanent bestial shapes. ‘These are
myth animals — the so-called bad animals — of strange shapes
and ill-matched members, that are visualised as curious modifica-
tions of familiar beasts and birds, or, more often, are purely fanciful
products. Doubtless there are hundreds of such fabulous animals
awaiting the discovery of the field worker, but the following names
will at least suggest what sort of creature a myth animal may be.
Most important of all, probably, is Kilat,°® that gigantic un-
gulate — it may be horse or it may be carabao — that runs
through the sky, and during a storm makes his voice heard in
claps of thunder. When the roaring is loudest, the people expect
Kilat to fall to the earth, and to bring in his train numerous
diseases.
Many buso have the form of deer, notable among which is Naat,
with his one good horn, and his one bad horn that has a branch
pointing downward. *‘
Numbers of buso are snakes, whose chief is Mamili, called “king
of snakes.”
The Buso-monkey is well known in myth, ** and even at this time
not only are there many buso who are lutung, or monkeys, but a
normal ape occasionally turns into a buso.
Timbalung is a disease-bringer whose home is on the mountains,
and who is said to be “a big bad animal that goes into the belly
and makes the Bagobo very sick.” It is thought dangerous to speak
the name of this buso, and children are so instructed; but occasion-
ally somebody will mention him in connection with the sickness
he causes.
®5 Aduarte writes of the natives of Nueva Segovia that, “The amiteras... dreamed
that they saw their anitos in the form of carabaos or of buffaloes, and of black men.”
Bratz and Ropertson: op. cit., vol. 31, p. 35. 1905. Chirino, 1603, writes in like
phrases that “another Indian, while very ill, was afflicted with horrible apparitions;
when he was left alone, hideous and furious black men appeared to him, threatening
him with death.” Jdzd., vol. 13, p. 78. 1904.
Morga, 1609, writes of the Pintados (Visayan): “The devil usually deceived them
with a thousand errors and blindnesses. He appeared to them in various horrible and
frightful forms, and as fierce animals, so that they feared him and trembled before him.”
Ibid., vol. 16, p. 131. 1904.
®° For the myth concerning Kilat, see pp. 48—49.
®7 See “Ceremony of Awas.”
28 Cf. op. cit. Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, pp. 46—48. 1913.
40 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Blanga is a cursorial animal, distinguished by enormous branching
horns. Pungatu is pictured as a fat quadruped, with a bird-like
head, and several humps on his back. He lives up on the moun-
tains. Limbago is a long-necked quadruped, that carries sickness
wherever he goes. Abuy and Ruut are pig-like forms, the lat-
ter being an underground animal, with a big belly and extremely
pointed teeth. Any intruder into Rutit’s house below the ground
is punished by having his strength taken from him. Straightway
he becomes so weak that he cannot walk, and his feet give way
under him. Then Rw attacks him with his sharp teeth. Sekur
is a big-eared quadruped, a mountain climber, sometimes called
Sakar. Marina is an arboreal animal with a snake-like body, that
climbs by means of long arms. Ubag looks like a horse with a
hump on his back, and is said to smite with mortal illness those
whom he attacks. Kogang is a bad animal which is visualized
under several shapes.
Still other diseases are brought by the Buso Tulung, who resembles
a jungle fowl.
The most famous mythical birds are, perhaps, the following:
Minokawa*® is an enormous bird that swallows the moon at the
time of a lunar eclipse, a feat accomplished easily, since this bird
is conceived to be as large as the island of Negros, or the island
of Bohol.
Kulago appears in myth as the bird into which Wari, brother
of Lumabat, was metamorphosed®® as a punishment for his diso-
bedience to one of the gods. Its ery is that of the screech-owl,
but its body is covered by both hair and feathers representing every
sort of animal and bird and jungle fowl.
The most rapacious bird of folklore is Wak-Wak, a fierce mythical
crow that flies headless, and feeds on human flesh, and must be
charmed away by a formula of suggestive magic. *!
*° Of. “Bagobo myths.” Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, p. 19. 1913.
®¢ The story of Wari’s transformation into a screech-owl is given in the same Jour-
nal, vol. 26, pp. 22—23.
®! For the Visayan aswang, see p. 42—43. The buso and the asuang that have the
form of birds of prey resemble the Penggalan of the Peninsula, that is characterized as
“a sort of monstrous vampire which delights in sucking the blood of children.” The
head of this bird flies separately from the body, but the intestines are attached. Cf.
Skeat: op. cit., pp. 327—828; and for other folklore touching fabulous Malay birds,
cf. tbid., pp. 110—132. See also Somadeva: op. cit., vol. 1, p, 54, 1880. “A bird of
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 4?
Of course, none of the above-mentioned demons, whatever its
form, can be seen by the Bagobo,** unless it be, rarely, by some
old man. But in response to what is, perhaps, a primitive psychical
impulse — that of attributing to other peoples and to other forms
of living organisms (with whose mental processes one is unfamiliar)
the power of perceiving things beyond one’s own sense-range —
the Bagobo say that the Kulaman folk can see Buso; and that Buso
is plainly visible to the domesticated animals, whether dog or cat
or chick or horse or carabao. When a dog bays mournfully into
the air at night, he is baying at Buso; when the carabao leave
their wallow ana dash wildly through the lanes of the villages,
they are fleeing from Buso. It is always Buso that makes animals
behave in a strange manner after dark, and it is currently believed
that Buso walks in the rain, for the dogs, seeing him, at once
begin to bark. This is the reason why dogs bark more often in
shower than in sunshine.
Charms against Buso are more numerous than any other class of
charms. A considerable number are described in the section entitled,
“Charms and Magical Rites,’ where they are grouped with other
sorts of spells, according to their several psychological aspects. For
convenience, howeyer, the forms of buso magic in most common
use are briefly listed together at this point. To forestall the approach
of a buso:
Repeat magical formule;
Set up images of wood to represent living men;
Make a thicket of “medicinal” plants near the house;
Lay pieces of lemon and red peppers under the house;
Circumambulate the house while holding a lemon; %
the race of Garuda pounced on her, thinking she was raw flesh;” and ¢f., in the same
volume, Tawney’s notes on fabulous birds of prey in other literatures: the Roc of Arabian
romance, ete. [did., p. 572.
®2 According to Aduarte, the Filipino of Nueva Segovia (in Luzon), “sometimes asked
the devil that he would permit them to see him; but he answered that his body was
so subtile that they could not see it.” Bram and RoBertson: op. cit., vol. 30, p. 290-
1905.
°3 The use of lemons as an antidote to the machinations of demons is not confined to
the Bagobo tribe. Mr. J. M. Garvan found that among the Manobo of Mindanao both
lemons and limes were thus used, as shown in “The Legend of Ango, the Petrified Ma-
nobo.” Of. H. O. Beyer: “Origin myths among the mountain peoples of the Philip-
pines.” Philippine Jour. Sci., vol. 8, p. 90. April, 1913.
On one occasion, I had an opportunity of taking part in the formation of such a magic
42 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Wear a bit of dried lemon on the necklace;
Hang a crab-shell over the door;
Hold a rice-winnower before the face;
Weave into textiles a crocodile design;
Paint the figure of a crocodile on bamboo rice-cases, on stringed instru-
ments, and on other manufactured objects of wood;
Carve the figure of a crocodile on the coffin, or decorate the coffin with a
conventional crocodile figure, made of strips of cloth;
Rub a dying person with sweet-smelling plants of magical value;
Hold a wake in the house of death;
Surround with all kinds of knives the bed of an expectant mother before
she sleeps at night. %
In Visayan myth, (as I learned in a number of conversations
with Visayans) the asuang is functionally identical with the buso
of the Bagobo: both haunt desolate places, tear open freshly-made
graves, feed on corpses, prowl over the earth at night in shadowy
shapes, or fly through the air and, having entered a death-chamber by
the window, suck the blood of the dead as soon as the soul leaves
the body. Yet there is a fundamental distinction between the two
conceptions on the morphological side; for the Visayan says that
many of the asuang are able to metamorphose themselves into human
beings, and thus live in intimate relationship with the people —
an extension of the sphere of demoniac influence quite foreign to
Bagobo ideas. The Visayan young people insist that a large number
of the asuang are men and women who live and work as near
neighbors of their own. In certain parts of their villages these
human demons cluster. In Davao, there is a short street, named
Claveria, where whole families of asuang are popularly believed to
have their residence, and their houses are pointed out to visitors.
At nightfall, the asuang resume their proper forms, put on wings,
become shadowy, and go flying off in search of dead bodies for
circle around the house; and I observed that we made the circuit clock-wise, so that
the house was kept always on our right, just as in the circumambulations of ancient In-
dia; but I did not hear a statement that the dextral circuit must necessarily be followed
for this charm. Cf. Somadeva: Katha Sarit Sagara, vol. 1, p. 98. 1880.
It is possible that Buso’s alleged fear of lemons may be associated with the myth
in which Buso is killed by thorns while he is trying to climb a lemon-tree. On the
other hand, perhaps the episode grew out of the wide spread tradition that all demons
are afraid of lemons. Cf. the tale, “The Buso-Monkey.” Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26,
p. 46—48. Jan.—March, 1913.
®* The folklore material in regard to this spell will be found ina story entitled. “The
Buso-Child.” Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, pp. 45—46. 1913.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 43
food. It is said that all asuang have oil in their bodies for lubri-
cating their wings, so that flight is easy. A human asuang is
ordinarily a person of tall stature, extremely thin, with a shiny
skin, and with eye-balls slightly protruding. However other bodily
characters may differ, there is one sure mark of an asuang to be
found in the pupil of the eye. Suppose that some neighbor is
suspected of being an asuang. One must examine his eyes, and if
in the pupil there is detected the figure of a boy upside down,
that person is unmistakably an asuang.
Among the Visayan on the coast of Davao gulf, it is said that
the asuang systematically propagates the baliti by making use
of rotten tree trunks as a suitable soil. An old tree of which the
native name is ononang was shown me by Manuel, a clever Visayan
boy, who assured me that that was an asuang-haunted tree. It
had a hollow trunk, into the decaying texture of which an adven-
titious shoot of a baliti had intruded, aud had pressed its way
upward through the soft material, its roots intertwined within the
trunk, its glossy, sharp-pointed leaves growing out through nume-
rous crevices in the bark. “Nobody but an asuang,” explained
Manuel, “can make the trunk of any tree hollow. You see, the
asuang works himself through some small hole in the bark and,
with his long nails, scoops out the trunk and claws away until
only a hollow shell remains. That done, he plants a seed or root
of baliti to grow there, and then he goes off to work at another tree.” ”°
INTERPRETATION OF PHYSICAL ENVIRONMENT
Natural objects or natural phenomena, as such, a Bagobo rarely
worships; but the larger processes of the physical universe, that
take shape in air and sky and earth and sea, are associated in his
mental processes with spirits, and these spirits are made the objects
of varied cults, some in the capacity of gods, some in that of
demons. The functions of nature spirits are rather sharply distin-
guished one from another, for the underlying concepts of the Bagobo
would not lend themselves readily to expression in terms of a
pantheistic religion. So far from conceiving of one common vital
principle as pervading nature and unifying it, he puts different
°° For other asuang myths, cf. Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 19, pp. 205—211, 1906; vol.
26, pp. 25—28, 31—32, 42—538, 57. 1913.
44 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
intelligent personalities back of as many physical phases; so far
from fusing gods and the visible world into one substance, his
nature-spirits are persons who can leave at will the natural objects
with which they are identified.
Nor does the Bagobo, from the polytheistic standpoint, regard
every single object in nature as controlled immediately by an in-
dwelling spirit. One highly-honored god, Pamulak Manobo, made
the world and the things in it; certain minor deities assist him in
regulating set departments, as Tarabume, who has charge of the
growing rice; while a throng of spiritual beings of which some
few hold a friendly attitude toward man, but many more a hostile
attitude, are associated with large classes of natural objects. There.
is, as we have said, a tigbanua of the woods, a tigbanua of the
water, a tigbanua of the rattan. In regard to individual objects,
it cannot be assumed that spirits inhabit every tree, every rock,
every stream; yet any particular rock or stream or tree may happen
to be the home of some supernatural being. Rarely, again, the
natural object itself which is supposed to have peculiar functions
attracts deyotions at fixed seasons, solely in connection with that
functioning, and, perhaps, at no other time. The stars are not
worshiped in mass, as stars, yet to certain constellations that tra-
dition makes responsible for the success of crops, offerings are made
at seed-time and at harvest, but on no other occasion. Further-
more, any special manifestation of natural processes, like a trem-
bling of the earth or a violent thunder-clap, that occurs at irregular
intervals and that stimulates a sudden emotional discharge, is in-
stantly referred to a supernatural agency either working within
the phenomenon or operating from a distance.
Thus the Bagobo tends to hold a receptive attitude toward nature,
for in the background of his consciousness lies a mass of fragments
of nature myths, nature songs, customary interpretations, any one
of which may, at any moment, become embodied in his own expe-
rience. ‘lo the play of natural phenomena, he reacts with emotions
of wonder, awe, fear, pleasure. Any shift out of the ordinary,
any unusual sound or shape, impresses itself insistently upon his
consciousness, until it comes to be associated with other and more
familiar mental images; and, finally, the entire complex takes shape
as some new episode in romance, or as some fresh exploit of god
or of demon. Of course, the range of fanciful associations that he
can make is strictly limited by a traditional myth-pattern, to which
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH AD
he clings with characteristic conservatism; but with an emotional
response to the unexpected in nature, he is always ready. When
a Bagobo walks out of doors, his manner tends to be more serious
and contemplative than indoors. Anything may happen, for nobody
can predict the possible freaks of spiritual beings. While, perhaps,
no buso may be in that particular trail; while this special clump
of trees may be uninhabited; while the entire journey may be free
from spiritual encounter, yet one must be on the alert, and it is
safer to behave with gravity toward nature in all of her phases.
This attitude of quiet seriousness finds expression in a curious
nature myth, which is repeated to the young people and possibly
tends to inhibit in them some of the propensities of youth. They
are taught that they must not laugh at their reflection in the
water; that they must not laugh at small animals; that no monkey
or rat or lizard or spider or fly may be put to ridicule.°° In a
word, as one boy expressed the idea: “You must not laugh at
anything you see; for, if you do, Kilat will break your neck.”
Whether: such little creatures are under the special protection of
Kilat, the Thunder Spirit, is not clear, but to make fun of them is
regarded as a presumptuous act, to which a severe penalty is attached,
nothing less than haying one’s neck dislocated and one’s head
twisted about.°’ Bagobo mothers tell their daughters that long ago,
°° In Beyers’s recent publication, it is interesting to note that among the Manobo
people of Mindanao there exists a tabu against ridiculing or mocking frogs, monkeys and
cats; and Garvan states that laughing at other animals, .tvo, is forbidden. With both
the Bagobo and the Manobo, we find that the punishment for such levity is associated
with thunder; although the punishment takes different forms, for Manobo tradition says
that the transgressor is turned to stone. Cf. “Origin myths among the mountain peoples
of the Philippines.” Philippine Jour. Sci., pp. 89—90. April, 1913.
°7 A tradition, corresponding, in every detail, to that repeated by Bagobo women, was
found by Dr. Nieuwenhuis, among the Bahau tribes of East Borneo. ‘They say, there,
that laughing at animals is punished by the Thunder Spirits, who twist round the neck
of the offender, and that it is incautious to place a domestic animal even in a situation
that would cause laughter.
»Diese Naturgeister tben auch direkten Hinfluss auf das Leben der Menschen aus; so
werden bestimmte Vergehen durch die ¢o deklare, Donnergeister, bestraft. Das Lachen
iiber Tiere z. B., das bei den Bahau als Verbrechen gilt, wird durch die to beklare sogleich
gestraft, indem sie dem Schuldigen den Hals umdrehen. Es ist daher sehr unvorsichtig,
mit einem Huhn, Hund oder Schwein etwas vorzunehmen, was die Laute zum Lachen
bringen kénnte. Als am Mahakam plotzlich ein kleines Madchen, wahrscheinlich an Ver-
giftung, starb, schrieben die Dorfbewohner ihren Tod dem Umstand zu, dass sie iiber
jrgend ein Tier gelacht haben sollte.” A. W. Nreuwrnuuis: Quer durch Borneo, vol. 1,
pp. 97—98. 1904.
AG ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
in another part of the world, there were some girls who laughed
at small animals, and that Kilat turned their heads around so that
they had to walk facing backward.
The Bagobo is highly imitative, very ready to incorporate the
myths and customs of other tribes, yet he borrows and assimilates
in a manner peculiarly Bagobo. The interpretation that he will
make of a bamboo trunk mottled with darkish spots, or of the
baying of a dog at night, while it may conform in general outline
to wide-sweeping Malay tradition, will yet have a characteristic
Bagobo touch, since the background of Bagobo experience is not
identical with the background of Bilaan, or of Tagakaola, or of
Visayan experience. His response to natural phenomena will be
somewhat different from that of any other group having a similar
environment.
Below are sketched in outline a few typical myths concerning
natural phenomena.
Before time began, the sky, the sun and moon, and all of the
heavenly bodies, the land and all green things that grow on the
earth, the sea and rivers and rocks, were created by Pamulak
Manobo. He also made people of every race and tribe that are
now in the world. Another widely-told story, ** that is repeated in
slightlyvarying versions, gives a different origin to the stars.
The moon is the mother of the stars and the sun is their father.
Kach star is one small fragment of the body of the moon’s little
daughter, whom the sun killed at her birth and cut into small
pieces, because of his. bitter disappointment that the child was not
a boy. He scattered the bright sherds by handfuls over the sky,
and they became the stars. °°
The earth is flat, and is shaped like a circle, over which the
sky fits down snug, like a cap or a circular box-lid; and thus we
get the line of the horizon, commonly called the ‘root of the sky,”
or the “border of the heaven.” At first, the sky hung low over
the earth, and through it the sun and the moon traveled close
together, for then they were on friendly terms; but the sky was
°* This story, and several other myths associated with natural phenomena, are given
in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, pp. 15—19. 1918. Cf. also Beyer’s Manobo tale, “The
origin of the stars.” Philippine, Jour. Sci., vol. 8, p. 91. April, 1918.
°° A Mantra legend represents the sun as engaged in a perpetual attempt to destroy
the star-children. Cf. R. Martin: Die Inlandstimme der malayischen Halbinsel. p.
977. 1905.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH AT
so near to the earth that the people could not work, and so Pa-
mulak Manobo commanded it to come up higher.'°° At about the
same time, the sun and moon had their altercation over the fate
of the baby, and no longer wished to journey together. For this
reason, after the sky moved up, they began the custom of taking
passage over the earth at different times. Both sun and moon
travel above the earth, from east to west, and then pass down
below the earth and go back from west to east. During our night,
the sun illumines the place where the dead spirits are staying.
An eclipse '°' of the moon is believed to be caused by the rapa-
cious bird named Minokawa that lives just outside of the eastern
horizon, and has beak and claws of steel. Eight holes the moon
makes in the eastern horizon by which to enter for her passage
over the earth, and eight holes in the western horizon, by any one
of which she can get out again when she takes her course under
the earth, back from west to east. Every day, when she comes in
at one of the eastern entrances, she runs the risk of being snatched
up and swallowed by the mammoth Minokawa-bird, in which event
an eclipse occurs. Then the Bagobo, following a widespread Malay
custom, begin to utter shouts and to beat agongs and to make a
tremendous din, in the hope of making the bird disgorge the moon. '"
*°° Another version, still more common among tho Bagobo, is given in the Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, vol. 26, p. 16. 1918. The old woman, called Tuglibung, cannot pound her rice
because the sky hangs so low, and she chides the sky until it rushes up to its present.
place. Almost precisely the same story is known among the Manobo. Cf. H.O. Bryer:
op. cit. p. 89; and compare the Ifugao tale, 2did, p. 105, which, like the version in my
text, calls in the help of a god to raise the sky.
*°1 Among Malays of the Peninsula and of Sumatra, the belief is widespread that an
eclipse is caused by a serpent, a dragon, or a dog devouring the sun or the moon; and
that the setting up of a din and clamor will frighten away the monster. Cf. Skeat=
op. cit., p. 11. In the Mantra myth, just quoted, the pursuit of the moon by the sun
is continually going on, and when the sun bites the moon a lunar eclipse occurs. Op. cit.,
p- 977. For the Bagobo story of the eclipse, see Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, p. 19;
and, for the Visayan legend, cf. Maxwell and Millington’s collection, in the same jour-
nal, vol. 19, p. 209. 1906.
In an Indian saga we find an episode of Rahu’s head swallowing the sun and the
moon. Somadeva: op. cit., vol. 1, p. 151.
+02 The Batak of Sumatra give a slightly different explanation of an eclipse. Accor-—
ding to Warneck’s story, the sun in the beginning had seven sons, each of whom gave
out a heat as intense as the sun herself. The plants on earth withered, and men could
not stand up against the heat. They asked the help of the moon. He called all the
stars to him and hid them; then, by the ruse of spitting betel juice into seven dishes,
and showing to the sun the dishes full of red juice, persuaded her that he had eaten his
children, Then the sun killed and ate her seven sons. On discovering that the moon had
48 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Tradition says that in the moon live many people who are like
the Bagobo. There is a great pananag tree there, with a white
monkey sitting on one of its branches. This is what causes the
phenomenon of “spots” '°* on the face of the moon. We can make
out the shape of the monkey and of the tree rather indistinctly,
but all the old men know that they are there. They say, however,
that if anybody should clearly see the white monkey sitting on the
tree he would instantly drop dead, or be taken with a fatal illness.
It appears that the clouds are all afraid of this monkey, and this
is the reason why, on a moonlight night, the clouds are often seen
flitting over the face of the moon, and then fleeing away into the
sky. Yet the monkey in the moon is a good animal, and the friend
of man, for he is continually fighting with the evil buso. According
to another myth, the clouds are not personified but are said to be
the white smoke arising from the fires of the diwata in the heavens.
The phenomena of thunder and lightning are referred to an
enormous horse, Kilat by name, that belongs to one of the diwata.
Kilat runs and fights, prances and gambols in the sky, making
lightning flash when he shakes his bright mane, sending out thunder-
claps when he neighs in a mighty, roaring voice. The power of
this mythical animal is feared like that of buso, since the heaviest
peals of thunder indicate that Kilat is about to drop down to earth,
bringing sickness and death to domestic animals and to the Bagobo.
When Kilat’s voice is heard at its loudest, they cut up a lemon
in water and throw the water here and there on the ground, since
this will frighten him back to his place in the sky. There is an
interesting tradition connected with certain small, bluish-black
stones, several inches long, that are, perhaps, of meteoric origin.
The Bagobo use them for whetstones and for scouring-bricks, but
they say that they are the teeth of Kilat which dropped out of his
mouth when it was wide open for emitting thunder-claps, or that
let out the stars, the sun sent the fighting spirits lau to attack him. When the moon
is hard pressed by the lau, an eclipse occurs. Then all the people on earth, mindful of
the moon’s kindness to them, ery out “Set the moon free, you liu!” Sometimes these
spirits attack the sun, and then an eclipse of the sun takes place. Gf. Die Religion der
Batak, pp. 43—44. 1909.
*°® Some peninsular Malay groups think the spots on the moon to be an inverted
banyan tree. Cf. W. W. Skear: Malay magic, p. 13. 1900. The Manobo call the spots
a bunch of taro leaves that the sun, in anger, threw at the face of the moon. Cf.
H. O. Beyer; op. cit., p. 91. The same author calls attention to the beliefs of other
groups: that the spots are a cluster of bamboos, or a baliti tree. Cf. doc. cit., footnote.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 49
he lost some teeth while eating. It is the action of Kilat’s teeth that
splits open cocoanuts and makes them fall to the ground. This is
the reason that cocoanuts are so often heard to drop, when no man
has climbed the tree to cut them off. Bananas, also, are found lying
on the ground, spoiled evidently by the teeth of Kilat, for the
dents may be seen in the skin.
There are several distinct notions connected with rainstorms and
showers. One belief is that when the diwata throw out water
from the sky, or when they spit, the yain falls; another, that
the tears of the little sister of the Malaki t?Olu k’Waig fall down
in drops of rain. Again, it is said that showers come when the
spirits of dead friends are weeping, because they are lonely and
are calling other Bagobo individuals to accompany them to the
lower world. Very commonly, however, rain is associated directly
with the mythical source of thunder and lightning, and said to be
due to Kilat, who is dropping water from his body. That Buso
walks in the rain is generally believed, and hence children are
instructed to remain indoors during a storm. Only dogs and other
domestic animals may safely walk with Buso in a heavy shower.
Finally, a thunderstorm may be brought to a close by some strong
and fierce buso who is able to devour Kilat himself.
THE SOULS OF MAN AND LIFE AFTER DEATH
Characterization of the two souls
Like other Malay peoples, the Bagobo have a great body of myth
and of folklore concerning the behavior of the souls of man,
events connected with death, and the nature of future existence.
Inhabiting every individual, two souls called gimokud are recognized !°4
790% Father Gisbert writes that, “The Bagobos recognize two beginnings, and say that
they have two souls... Of the two souls, one goes to heaven and the other to hell.”
Buatrj and Ropertson: op. cit., vol. 43, p. 235. 1906. As will be seen later, in our
treatment of the subject, the fate of the two souls is such that the Father’s use of the
words, “heaven” and “hell” is a broad extension of the popular meaning of those words.
The important point, however, is that he found two to be the generally received number
of souls belonging to each individual. It is clear that the conception of soul varies
somewhat in different Bagobo communities, since Cole found at Sibulén a belief in eight
souls for every individual. Cf. op cit., p. 105. The Malays of the peninsula, according
to Skeat, distinguish seven different souls. Cf. op. cit., p. 50.
The natives of Nias believe that there are three souls, according to Wilken, who, as
Modigliani quotes him, agrees with the missionary, Sundermann, in the statement that
4
50 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
— shadowy, etherial personalities, that dominate the body more or
less completely. The right-hand soul, known in Bagobo terminology
as the Gimokud Takawanan, is the so-called “good soul’ that
manifests itself as the shadow on the right hand side of one’s path,
The left-hand soul, called Gimokud Tebang, is said to be a “bad
soul” and shows itself as the shadow on the left side of the
path. The name for either shadow is alung. The takawanan is
associated, in native thinking, with those factors of existence that
stand for life, health, activity, joy; while the tebang is associated
with factors that tend toward death, sickness, sluggishness, pain.
The left-hand soul often departs from the human body and does
unlooked-for things that have an unhappy influence on the body:
it undertakes alarming exploits; it wanders about as a dream-spirit,
thus producing nightmare, or, at least, horrible mental images during
sleep. The right-hand soul, on the contrary, is associated with the
normal continuity of existence, for it never leaves the body from
birth until death, except to lie, at times, as the right-hand shadow,
still attached clingingly to the physical frame. Death is the simple
fact of the passing of the right-hand soul out from the body, and
becoming permanently separated from it. But the stream of indi-
vidual existence is not checked by death, for the takawanan goes
at once to the Great Country below the earth, and there continues
to live, in much the same manner as on earth, except for the non-
corporeal and ghostly appearance that characterizes all of its activities.
Right-hand Soul or Gimokud Takawanan
Brown in color like a Bagobo, they say the takawanan would
these souls belong, respectively, to the breath the shadow and the heart. ‘The first soul
is ndso, which, at death, returns to the wind and ceases to exist, except where it survives
as a hereditary soul. The second is the soul of man’s shadow, and can be seen only in
the light of the sun or in the brightness of love, though a priest may see it at all times.
At death, this soul becomes the béchu zi mdte, which goes to the realm of the dead in
the subterranean world. The third soul has its seat in the heart, and is known as ndso-
dodo, or soul of the heart, and this is the most noble of the three, since there is nothing
in man which does not take its origin from the heart.
Modigliani, however, differs from Wilken and distinguishes between the statements of
the natives of Nias concerning the soul of the dead, and the soul of the living. During
life, the xdso dodo, located in the heart, is the soul most commonly spoken of, and the
source of all emotions. At death, this soul resolves itself into three: the eAéha, or hered-
itary soul; the dso, or spiritual principle of all human existence, and the dechu zi mdte,
or spirit of the dead. Cf. Un viaggio a Nias, pp. 287—290. 1890.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH o4
look, could one but clearly glimpse it, and in all other character-
istics, it is like the living Bagabo, except for its tenuous substance.
It is identified with the activities and the life itself of the body,
and hence remains in the body throughout life; for the event of
its removing itself to a distance would spell death. I have heard
the opinion hazarded by a Bagobo youth that the takawanan might
go away for just a little while without the body dying, but this
idea may have been suggested by observing his shadow, and fan-
eying that it might move away from him. The customary concept
of the takawanan, as well as the conduct observed at a deathbed,
implies that this soul inhabits the human body perpetually, or as
a shadow remains closely attached to it, until death.
Signs of death. The beating of the pulse at the wrist and
the pulsations that are to be felt “on top of the head” are signs of
the presence of the gimokud takawanan in the living body. When
a Bagobo is mortally sick and death is imminent, an attendant
holds the wrist of the patient, with the index and the middle fingers
at the dorsal side, and the thumb on the pulse, in order to note
whether the gimokud is still there. When the pulse ceases to
throb, the gimokud is ready to take leave of the body, but, since
it cannot find an exit through the wrist or the finger-tips, it passes
up to the head of the dying man and goes out through that point
in the crown where a pulsation is apparent (probably the anterior
fontanelle). Somebody lays fingers or palm of the hand on top of
the head to ascertain the exact moment when gimokud takes its
flight. '°° The cessation of heart-beat, laginawa, is often noted also.
The signs of death are therefore three: (a) The stilling of the pulse;
(b) The cessation of throbbing on the skulleap; (c) The stopping
of heartbeat.
Sometimes they make efforts to detain the takawanan in the body:
they seize and shake the arms of the dying man; they grasp his
head and make it wag to and fro, in the hope of checking the
spirit’s departure; but as the sure signs of death become apparent
they cease all efforts to hold the gimokud.
Summons to the living. Between the time of death and
705 The Moro say that the soul enters the body through the top of the skull, and
makes its exit by the same hole at death. Cf. C. H. Forses-Linpsay: The Philippines
under Spanish and American rules, pp. 502—505. 1906. Perhaps the Bagobo have bor-
bowed the idea.
52 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
burial it is still possible for the right-hand soul to communicate
with the living, and this it does on a vast scale. Immediately
after leaving the body, it is customary for the spirit to give notice
of its last journey, and at the same time try to secure a com-
panion, by visiting in the form of an insect every house in the
world. The entire series of visits is supposed to be made during
the short period — say, from twenty-four to thirty-six hours —
that elapses between death and burial.!°° The insect enters a house
and sings in a small voice that is like the chirp of a cricket, or
the soft tinkling of a little bell called korung-korung. Nobody can
see the gimokud, but at night when “the bug with the sweet
voice chirps on the wall” one knows that somebody is dead.
Then the person listening must say: “Who are you? my brother?
my sister?” If the singing stops immediately, it is a sign that a
near relative is dead, but if the sound keeps on it indicates that
some other family has been bereaved.
Sometimes the chirping is interpreted as a summons to some
friend or relative to follow the dead one, who asks for a fellow
traveler to the lower world. Fearful of sickness and death coming
upon him, the listener quickly replies: “You can come here no
more because you are now going to the Great City. You have
still a little love (diluk ginawa) for me; do not bring me sick-
ness.’ This formula is usually potent to banish the importunate
spirit. It is said that when a gimokud is very insistent for a
companion, a friend may die within a day or two, an example
quoted being that of Adela, the Bagobo wife of a Visayan. Of
her, they narrate that she caused a woman friend to die one or
two days after herself, because she feared to journey alone to the
lower world.
This form of spiritual manipulation is considered quite proper for
a timid person or for a youth, but there is a feeling among the
Bagobo that a gimokud who is strong and brave will not wait
around for a friend to die, but will start alone for the Great City.
A boy of fourteen, nephew of Adela, confided to me his fears of
the gruesome journey.
“If a gimokud is not brave, he waits for a companion to die. I am afraid
to go alone to the Great City. When I am dead, my spirit will wait near
*°° The body of a datu may be kept much longer, but I failed to ascertain the process
of embalming that would be used.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 33
my friend, Karlos, and will say to his spirit: ‘I want you to go with me to
the One City. Then my friend will get a sickness and die, and I shall have
a companion; but if he does not want to go with me, J do not force him,
but I ask other friends — many.”
After the burial, the ghost-bug can sing no more, for the spirit
has started for Gimokudan, and can never again disturb the living
by chirping at night. The gimokud is now known also as Kayung.
A rain lasting several days, or even a week, is a phenomenon
very significant when it occurs immediately ater the death of a
Bagobo, for it is caused by the tears of the dead gimokud, who is
lingering about, waiting for a friend to accompany tiie A magical
rite must then be performed to still the lamentations of the ciate
Suppose that showers fall incessantly after the death of a boy.
Forthwith, his father places a few areca-nuts and betel-leaves, with
perhaps a little tobacco, on the ground as an offering to the gimo-
kud, and cajoles him with words like these: “Do not ery any more,
for you know you do not love your father; you would rather go
to the Great City.” The spell is efficacious; the rain ceases; the
gimokud stops its weeping and starts alone on the last journey.
This case does not appear to be reconcilable with the belief that
the soul leaves the earth for Gimokudan immediately after the
funeral, for in the tropics a body cannot be kept for several days
unless embalmed, while the metaphorical showers may last for a
week. A Malay, however, does not think in exact dialectic, and
perhaps would not be conscious of the contradiction.
Onong or travel outfit for the soul. The time required for
the journey from earth down to the land of the dead, called
Kilut, is variously estimated at from two days to one week. A
traveling outfit, technically known as onong, is prepared by the
friends of the deceased so that he may lack for nothing on the
road. The onong includes those articles which are in constant use
by the living — betel-box and lime-case, areca-nuts, buyo-leaf,
tobacco (for a. man), boiled rice, and other necessaries — all of
which are placed in carrying-bag or basket and buried with
the body.
In common with the animistic conceptions of many another prim-
itive tribe, the belief is held by the Bagobo that it is the spirit-
ual substratum or essence of the rice, the buyo or the tobacco,
that the gimokud abstracts and enjoys, while the material element
is left in the graye with the corpse. This spiritual substance is
54 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
regarded as the gimokud of the object, for, as stated in a later
section, every manufactured thing has its own soul: there is a
gimokud of the betel-box, a gimokud of the lime-case, a gimokud
of the carrying bag, and all these go down to Kilut with the
human gimokud. Only what is buried with a person can go with
him to the home of the dead, although it is thought that other of
his possessions may later reach him, after the material parts have
been worn out and thus have lost their gimokud.
The one country of the dead. The place of the dead is
variously called Kilut, Gimokudan, '% the Great Country (to Dakul
Banud '°*), the One Country (to Sebad Banu). It lies direetly
below the earth, which, in the form of a flat dise or circle, rests
upon it. The soul is conceived to go from the grave straight down
through the earth to reach the lower world. In talking of such
matters, a Bagobo will say that his kayung, or his gimokud “goes
into the ground” when he dies.
On reaching Gimokudan, it is necessary to pass, first, through
the City of the Black River (Banud ka Metum Waig '°°), which
has also the name of Alamiawan. Here, under the direction of
Mebuyan, ''° chief priestess of the place, the soul undergoes a cere-
monial lustration in the dark waters of the river, a bathing of
head and joints. This process stands for naturalization in the world
of spirits, and serves also to infuse a feeling of restfulness and
content into the newly arrived gimokud and to dispel any lingering
desire that it may have to return to earth. Failing this rite, the
spirit might slip away, go back to the world and reanimate the
body. The name given to this ceremonial bathing is pamalugu —
the same term that is applied to that important function at the
Ginum festival when water, applied with a bunch of plant charms,
is poured over the head of the candidate. While it would be
*°7 Gimokud, “souls or spirits”; -an, “place of, place where.” The particle -az, used as a
nominal suffix, has several meanings; sometimes it is a plural ending, sebad pamarang ;
dua pamarangan; “one ear-plug, two ear-plugs;” sebad kalati, dua kalatién; “one pear! dise,
two pearl discs.” Again, in many cases, this particle is locative, as in Gimokudan; and I
wish to correct the footnote made by me, in the story of “Lumabat and Mebuyan,”
Jour, Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, p. 20, which gives to this particle a plural force in the
word gimokudan,
*°8 To, “the ;” dakul, “big, great;” banud, a term variously applied to a town, a country,
or the world itself, as well as to the place of the dead.
10° Ka, particle, “of;”? metum, “black or dark-colored ;” waig, “water.”
*1° For the story of Mebuyan, see Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, pp. 20—21. 1913.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 59
going too far to assume that the Ginum rite is in any way typical
of the final bathing in the Black River, it is fair to say that the
two rites are closely analogous.
The country through which the dark river runs is said to be a
good place to stay in, for the cocoanut trees grow in abundance
and the areca palms are loaded with nuts; yet after the close of
the lustration, the spirits pass on'!' to join the rest of the dead
in Gimokudan proper, except the little children, who during their
period of helplessness remain under the care of Mebuyan.
Manner of existence in Gimokudan. No radical change in
manner of life is conceived to be incident upon the shift of the
soul to a new country. The spirit goes on with the same occupa-
tions that fill the time of the Bagobo during life, and everything
that is used on the earth may be obtained down there. Whatever
a spirit lacks in his traveling outfit (onong) that he brought with
him, he can buy down there from the supplies laid in abundance
before him. He may buy a jacket or a spear or a cock; since
any manufactured article that wears out, or any animal that dies,
forthwith gives up its immaterial gimokud, which then passes down
to supply the needs of the spirits in the Great City — a mythical
situation quite in accordance with the common primitive concepts
touching the souls of animals and of inanimate objects.
The same sun that shines on us by day travels around under
the earth, and illuminates the world of the dead while we are in
darkness, so that our day is synchronous with night in Kilut, and
our night, with their day. It is during their period of darkness
that all the dead are in action: the gimokud — weak, attenuated,
shadowy, as they are conceived to be — work and dance and play
and eat in the customary Bagobo manner; they sow and harvest
rice; they dig camotes and cut sugar cane. . The rice of Kilut is
of immaculate whiteness, and each grain as big as a kernel of
corn; the camotes are the size of a great round pot, and every
stick of sugar cane is as large as the trunk of a cocoanut-palm.
All night long, even until dawn, this glad existence continues.
At the rising of the sun, or just before sunrise, all of these
*12 T have not yet found mention among the Bagobo of the belief held by many
pagan peninsular Malays, taat there is a bridge leading into heaven, and that all souls
must cross this bridge, the good alone succeeding in maknig the passage. Martin derives
this tradition from an Iranian source. Cf. op. cit., pp. 951—952.
56 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
activities come to a halt. Every gimokud plucks one of the broad
leaves of a plant called baguwidn, and twists it into a vessel sug-
gesting the form of a boat, of a like pattern to the ceremonial
dishes of hemp-leaf in use at Bagobo festivals, and called by the
same name, kinidok. Each one of the gimokud seats himself upon
his individual leaf-vessel, and there sits, waiting, until the hot rays
of the sun cause him to dissolye, leaving the leaf-vessel full of
water. Not until our day begins, and darkness spreads over the
land of the dead, does the life of the ghosts swing back into action ;
but as soon as the sun has passed up above the earth every gimo-
kud resumes his personality, and takes up his work or his dance or
his feasting, apparently as if no break had occurred. Then, again,
the next morning, he makes a new leaf-vessel for himself from a
fresh leaf (the old one haying withered dry), sits down on it, and
once more melts away under the sun’s heat. This conception of a
periodically interrupted existence would seem to imply that during
twelve hours out of the twenty-four Kilut is empty of inhabitants,
but it is questionable whether the Bagobo has ever made that gener-
alization.
Fresh accretions are being added by individuals, from time to
time, to the myths concerning the legendary home of the dead,
though always along those lines that accepted tradition has drawn
out. Dreams of the One Country, as well as phantasies incident
to sickness and delirium, reveal fresh features that are deftly in-
corporated with the old. “My unele,” said a young girl, Igula,
“was very sick, and he went down to Gimokudan. A man there
asked him to stay, but he did not like to stay; he wanted to come
back to earth. They have cinnamon down there — much cinna-
mon — and the streets are made of good boards; there is plenty
of white stone too. My uncle told us about it when he came back.”
Topography of the one country. ‘The subdivisions of Gimokudan
are correlated, first, with age, and second, with the manner
of death. ‘The primary grouping consists in a segregation of
young children from adults. A part of the country through
which the Black River runs is set apart specially for nursing in-
fants. As narrated in an ancient tale, one of Lumabat’s sisters
descended into the lower world, took the name of Mebuyan, and
became chief of a special section of Gimokudan, which is named
for her, Banud Mebuyan. Little children who die when they are
still being nourished at their mothers’ breasts (a long period with
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH oT
Bagobo children '') go at once to Mebuyan,'!? who welcomes them
and gives milk to all; for not merely her breasts, but her arms
and her whole body, are plentifwlly supplied with milk glands.
Under her protection, the babies remain until they cease to be
parasites and can shift for themselves, when they are sent to join
their own families in the main banud of Gimokudan.
A special region, called Kag-biimoan,''* is reserved for those
who are slain by sword or spear, and it is said to be situated at
some distance from the other divisions of the country of the dead.
In Kag-btnoan there are everywhere suggestions of blood, or of
death by violence; for example, all the plants are of a blood-red
color, and the spiritual bodies of the inhabitants retain the scars
of their wounds. All occupations, however, go on just as in the
other parts of Gimokudan.
The Great Country, that is to say, Dakul Banuad proper, forms
the most extensive section of Gimokudan, since it is intended for
all people, good and bad, who die from disease, or from sickness
in any form. Hither, too, come trooping all the children who are
old enough to leave the fostering care of Mebuyan. Pale in color,
or pure white, are all the plants and trees here.
*** A Bagobo mother does not wean her child, but suckles it as long as it wants to
come to her, even when it grows old enough to run about. There comes a day when the
child, intent on play, forgets to run to the mother’s breast for food. In such case, she
does not call her child, but by and by gives it a little rice, and thus the change is
gently accomplished.
*** Mebuyan’s position in the spirit world suggests the worship of the “Great Mothers’
in northern India. See W.Crookr: The popular religion and folk-lore of northern India,
vol. 1, pp. 111—117. 1896. Cf. “Bagobo myths.” Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, pp.
20—21. 1913.
71% From dino, “to thrust, to spear.”
The concept that different colors characterize different localities in the land of the
dead appears in the north of the Philippines, and it is found among the pagan tribes of
Malaysia. In the “Relation of the Filipinas Islands,’ 1640, supposed to have been written
by Fr. Diego de Bobadilla, occurs the following passage, referring, apparently, to both
Tagal and Visayan groups: “They believed that when the soul ieft the body, it went to
an island, where the trees, birds, waters, and all other things were black; that it passed
thence to another island, where all things were of different colors; and that finally it
arrived at one where everything was white.” Buarr and Rosertson, vol. 29, p. 283. 1905.
Of the Mintera, Professor Martin writes as follows, quoting from Logan: “Als Gegensatz
zum Himmel treffen wir bei den Mintera auf die Vorstellung einer ‘Roten Erde’ (Tanah
Merah), d.h. auf ein verlassenes und elendes Land, in das die Seelen derjenigen Menschen
eingehen, die eines blutigen Todes gestorben sind.” Op. cit., p. 953 (taken from J. R. Logan:
“The Superstitions of the Mintira.” Journal of the Indian Archipelago and Eastern Asia,
vol. 1, p. 326. 1847),
58 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Idea of retribution. As a factor in the manner of life after
death, the concept of retribution for behavior on earth is practi-
rally non-existent. ''° Only one myth has come under my obser-
vation that hints at the possibility of a painful aftermath being the
punishment for «an evil life. This was an episode in the story of
Lumabat and Wari where the foreign flavor was distinctly apparent. '!°
My question as to whether a bad Bagobo would be punished in
Gimokudan brought the prompt answer, “No; but when I asked
whether a certain boy who had a reputation for small thievery
would be allowed to live with the other Bagobo, they told me that
there were many different towns in Gimokudan. Perhaps we may
infer that the spirits may group themselves according to inclination.
Left-hand Soul or Gimokud Tebang
Diametrically opposed to the takawanan, as regards its character
and its final fate, is that other soul of man, the Gimokud Tebang,
which shows itself as a shadow on the left side of one’s path, and
appears also as the reflection in the water. This left-hand soul
is hurtful to the body it inhabits, and is the direct cause of many
a pain and sickness.
When a Bagobo catches sight of his reflection’ in a clear
stream, he must look at it soberly; he must not betray any feeling
of pleasure or of amusement. If he laughs at his image in the
water, he will die (presumably because he has mocked his left-
hand soul).
Dream exploits. It is the left-hand soul which leaves the
body at night and goes flying about the world, where it encounters
11% According to Mr. Cole, there is among the Bagobo of Sibulan a belief in retribu-
tion. He says: “The gimokod of evil men are punished by being crowded into poor
houses.” Op. cit. p. 105.
‘16 Of, Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, p. 22. 1913.
‘17 Reflections in the water are held by certain other tribes in the Philippines to be
of great import, being sometimes used as means of divination. The Recollect Fathers
wrote, in 1624, of the inhabitants of the Calamianes and Cuyo groups: «Their priests
were highly revered . .. The devil showed them what they asked from him, in water,
with certain shadows or figures.” Brata and Ropertson, vol. 21, p. 228. 1905. As yet,
I have not seen that anybody has recorded, of other tribes, a tabu against laughing at
one’s reflection, or has stated that this image is, specifically, the evil soul of man.
Specialized observances, however, and local variations in belief might easily develop from
the suggestion of mystery and of wonder associated with a reflection in the water.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 59
various dangers. All these adventures, with their accompanying
sensations, are experienced by the Bagobo in his dreams. As a
Bagobo youth explained to. me: “When I dream at night, my
gimokud tebang is flying and the buso is catching me, or I am
falling from a cliff. I dream that I am riding on a boat and
fishing in the sea. Many ships I see there that the buso are
riding. They look like men with ugly faces and coarse black hair
all over their bodies, and some have wings. Then I try to run away.”
There is an element of real danger in these dream exploits of
the left-hand soul, for it is stated that if the tebang should be
caught and eaten by a buso, the human body to which it belongs
must die, for the buso, having swallowed the soul, instantly goes
in search of the body itself.
One startling exploit of the left-hand soul, that has become known
to the Bagobo in dreams, is an attempt to reach the Great City
and there join the good spirits in their pleasant home. The
tebang gets as far as the City of the Black River, but there is
stopped by Mebuyan, who asks, “Are you alive?” The tebang
replies, “Yes, Lady,” and then Mebuyan dismisses him with the
words: “Go back to where you came from.” Now, if the left-hand
soul still persists in forcing an entrance, and tries to bathe his
joints in the dark river, like the more fortunate right-hand soul,
he gets wet feet and becomes very sick, and is obliged to return
to earth.
Closely connected with dreams, are the delusions experienced in
trance by diseased or neurotic individuals, who, on waking, describe
frightful visions in graphic detail. I quote from a story given by
the boy, Islao.
“There are two kinds of dreams: the tagenup and the orup. In the orup,
you see nothing; you hear nothing. You will die. The Buso will kill you,
if you have no companion to waken you. The orup is making noise without
words. A man who wakens from orup tells about it: he says his body is
heavy; all the time -he hears a sound like the leaves moving in the wind,
or like the noise in your ears when you swim. He sees a big man with
one eye holding him; the eye looks like a great bowl in the middle of his
forehead. Many men who wake up from orup say this. The big man is a
buso who wants to carry him off and eat him.”
Thus we have the ordinary adventure dream, called tagenup; and
the trance or the delirium accompanying a pathological condition,
called orup. In both cases, the left-hand soul is supposed to ab-
60 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
sent itself from the body, and to become an actor in situations that
imperil the body, and that are remembered on waking.
Yet not alone in nightmare and in delusions, is a malign influence
exerted over the body when this evil soul escapes from it; for
other forms of suffering are connected, sympathetically, with the
varied exploits of Gimokud Tebang. He swims in ,the deep sea
and sends shivers through the person to whom he belongs; he
strikes his foot on a sharp stone and drives pains through the
material foot; he drinks poison, thus causing agony in the stomach ;
and, by various other sorts of behavior, he brings about a corres-
ponding condition in the body which he dominates.
Fate at death. At the moment of death, the tebang leaves the
body for the last time, now to become a buso-ghost, and to join
the innumerable company of buso that haunt graves and tall trees
and lonely places. Now he is lonely, they say, and wants a com-
panion to prowl around with him at night, everywhere. Like the
right-hand soul, he lingers about until the body is buried, in a
gruesome attempt to give a summons to some living friend. Folk-
lore tells us that the tebang wanders alone through the forests
until he finds an old rotten tree, to which he puts the question:
“Can you kill me?” and to this the dead tree answers, “No.”
Then the tebang bunts his head against the weak and hollow trunk,
and instantly the old tree comes crashing to the ground. This
means that somebody is going to die soon. Therefore, when one
hears at night the sound of a tree cracking and breaking down,
when there is no man near to fell it, one knows, straightway, that
the left-head soul is thrusting his head against the trunk, for a
signal to some companion. It is a sign of death.
Up to the time that the body is buried, the left-hand soul still
bears his old name of tebang, but after the funeral'!'® he is called
118 The conception of a ghost haunting the places connected with its life activities is, of
course, very widespread. In Malaysia, certain inland tribes carry this idea so far that,
according to Dr. Martin, they have a regular custom of forsaking their houses after a
death has occurred in them.
“Dagegen scheint es moglich, die Hantu je nach ihrer Beziehung entweder zur mensch-
lichen Psyche oder zu Erscheinungen in der Natur in zwei Gruppen einzuteilen, Die
ersteren kniipfen an die Seele des Verstorbenen an, die den Hinterbliebenen in irgend
einer Form Schaden tun kann. Darum verlassen ja Senoi (und Semang) nach jedem Todes-
fall ihre Wohnstitte, auch wenn das Grab sich entfernt von der Hiitte im Jungle befindet,
oder wenn sie selbst eine Anpflanzung damit aufgeben miissen.” Op cit., p. 945. A like
custom has found some following among the Bagobo.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 61
burkan, or kamatoyan. We may speak of him as a buso-ghost, for
convenience in designation, but there is now little distinction, if
any, between himself and the rest of the demons. Like other buso,
he digs up dead bodies, tears the flesh from the skeleton, and
devours the flesh; like other buso, he stands under the house of
the dying, or hovers over it, ready to drink the watery blood of
the corpse, and to catch every falling drop upon a chin two spans
in length. In short, it is those mental images most abhorrent to
Bagobo fancy that are pressed into service for picturing the future
of that spirit that throws a shadow on the left side of the path,
and that looks at one strangely from the water. If this flesh-
eating kamatoyan could be seen, the old people say, he would look
just like a shadow.
“There is no way by which a kamatoyan can talk with us,” the
Bagobo assert, “because he is bad;” but he manages to make his
presence felt, not only by such signs as the falling of old trees,
but by other peculiar noises that are heard in darkness only.
When one hears a sound of weird laughter at night, it is the
kamatoyan calling for blood to drink. If the laughter sounds faint
and far away, — tii! — it is actually close at hand; but if it
is loud and seems near by it is really far distant, because this evil
spirit deceives us. One need not be too much alarmed, however,
for, like the other buso, the kamatoyan is seeking only the dead
for food, though he may hurt the living by making them sick.
General considerations
Restoration of the dead to life. A few allusions in folklore,
and one or two particular episodes in myth, give us the im-
pression that the conception of raising a dead body to life contains
no element of impossibility, but may come to pass under certain
conditions, of which the following are examples.
If anyone should die in consequence of having laughed at his
image in the stream, the corpse must be buried directly under the
eaves of the house. By and by, life will return to the body. No
doubt some little ritual would accompany the performance, but my
informant gave me only the bare fact.
A magical restoration to life, brought about by a combination of
circumstances, forms one episode in a story of the S’iring, ''® the
**° Cf. Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, pp. 51—52. 1913.
2 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
for)
forest demon who bewilders men and carries them away. A boy
is lured into the woods, and brought to his death by a fall into a
ravine. A dream messenger appears to his mother and tells her
what offerings to make for the life of her son. The S’iring listens
to the woman’s prayers, and brings the boy to life by applying
chewed betel to the crushed bones of body and skull. When the
devotions of the mother are satisfactorily completed, her son is
restored to her. Here is involved, the codperation of a friendly
god, of a dream messenger, of the lad’s mother and of the demon
himself who caused the death.
A peculiar form of sickness that terminates fatally is caused by
the pig-like buso called Abuy, but “a good medicine” is said to _
bring to life those struck down by this demon.
There is a hypothetical type of resurrection that involves no
outside agency, but supposes a spontaneous return to the body of
a soul that fails to perform the required ceremonial bathing at
entrance to the lower world. The story entitled “Lumabat and
Mebuyan” '”° says that, “This bathing (pamalugu) is for the pur-
pose of making the spirits feel at home, so that they will not run
away and go back to their own bodies. If the spirit could return
to its body, the body would get up and be alive again.”
Cult of the dead. Prayers and gifts to the dead are made at
set points during the celebration of Ginum, notably at the function
called awas, '*' when areca-nuts on betel-leaves are offered in dishes
of hemp-leaf to all the spirits in Kilut, both ‘the old gimokud
and the new gimokud,” with an intention of including those who
have been long dead, as well as those recently deceased. In the
same devotion, the gimokud are urged not to think at all about
the festival, for there is clearly a lurking fear that the dead spirits
may return and draw the living after them.
Propitiatory rites at this same great festival are addressed to all
the buso who were once left-hand souls, so that they may be per-
suaded to do no harm to the Bagobo. As old Chief Oleng explained :
“All the tigbanua of the wood, and all the dead buso — we
prepare betel for them, to keep us from being sick.” !*?
229 Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, p. 21. 1918.
431 See Part Il.
122'The fathers of the Recollect missions in the group of islands called Visayas recorded,
in 1624, an account of the memorial rites there celebrated for the dead.
“Hach year every relative punctually celebrated the obsequies, and that was a very
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIU AND MYTH 63
Ideas of death. Young people among the Bagobo, tend to
confuse mental images of the dead body that they have seen put
into the grave with those of the gimokud which, they are told,
“evoes into the earth” in order to reach the underworld. The
people in the graves are blind, the children say, but they get
along because they have plenty of rice and chickens and bananas
and camotes to eat. Yet an intelligent adult differentiates perfectly
the tri-partite nature which tradition has assigned to man, — there
is a physical body that the buso will dig up and eat after it has
been put under the soil; there is a good takawanan that goes to
the One Country to continue its existence in a less substantial and
more highly idealized manner than on earth, although moved by
like interests and like emotions to those that motivate him here,
and, finally, there is an evil tebang that turns into a horrible,
man-eating burkan, perpetually roaming over the earth like a prey
animal, and preserving not a single tie or a single interest to bind
him to the friends and activities of his mortal life.
The point of psychological interest is, that when a Bagobo talks
of his own personal future existence, either as demon or as happy
spirit, his attention is wholly drawn off in the direction of the
special gimokud which at the moment appeals to him, to an extent
that the two conceptions may be said to be mutually exclusive.
Remarks like the following illustrate the point: “I shall be a buso
when I die.” “Everybody turns into a buso when he dies.”
festive day. They gathered a great quantity of food and beverages; they commenced
many joyful dances; they stuffed themselves with what was prepared, taking some to
their houses, and reserving the greater portion to offer to the dvata, and to the de-
ceased, in the following manner. A small bamboo boat was prepared, with much care,
and they filled it with fowls, flesh, eggs, fish, and rice, together with the necessary dishes.
The daylan gave a talk or a prolix prayer, aud finished by saying: ‘May the dead
receive that obsequy, by giving good fortune to the living’. Those present answered with
great shouting and happiness. Then they loosed the little boat (sacred, as they thought),
which no one touched, and whose contents they did not eat, even though they were perish-
ing: for that they considered a great sin.” Briark and Rosrrtson: op. cét., vol. 21,
p. 209. 1905.
In another Recollect document, 1624, a custom of the Calamianes is recorded which
appears to show a unique attitude toward the dead: “They believed in the Aumalagar soul
of an ancestor..... whom they summoned in their sicknesses by means of their
priestesses. The priestess placed a leaf of a certain kind of palm upon the head of the
sick man, and prayed that the soul would come to sit there, and grant him health...
They celebrated the obsequies of the dead during the full moon.” Jdid., vol. 21, p-
228. 1905.
64 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES”
“When I am dead I go to the Great City.” “I shall go down into
the earth some day.” “Suppose I am dead, and the shower lasts
a week; it is because I am crying.” Apparently this tendency is
due to an emotional reaction, stimulated by the discussion of his
own fate, so that he is unable to view the subject from all sides,
as he would do in a case of general application.
Souls of animals and of manufactured objects. Not only
man, but all of the larger animals,!?? the domestic fowls and
big birds, have each two souls called, like those of people, taka-
wanan and tebang. Similarly, the right-hand soul of every horse,
of every carabao, of every cat and so forth, goes down at death
into the earth and thence to Gimokudan; and when a cock is
killed in fight at the pit, its spirit passes down to the Great Country.
As for the smaller birds, and the bees, and the centipedes, and
insects in general, — to each of these there is assigned with cer-
tainty one gimokud, but only doubtfully, two. Manufactured ob-
jects, like articles of wearing apparel and weapons and tools, as
well as different kinds of food, have each but a single soul, which
goes down below with its owner, or after him.
The associations formed with the left-hand shadow extend to those
animals which are believed to have two souls. If a native falls
from his horse toward the right side, he will not be: injured,
because the takawanan of the animal will not hurt him. On the
contrary, if the accident occurs so that he falls from the left side
of his horse, he is likely to get killed, not from the force of the
fall, but through the instrumentality of the horse’s tebang, which
will try to kill him. '4
+23 Modigliani says of the natives of Nias that their belief in life after death for the
souls of animals causes them to feed and care for aged beasts, and to pay great respect
to all animals. Among the five classes of demons recognized at Nias, the Béchu narod dando
are the subterranean souls, or the souls of animals. “Presso molti popoli riscontrasi
la credenza che gli animali abbiano un’anima che gira errante dopo la morte. Da tutti
é conosciuto che i Baniani dell’India spingono il rispetto per ogni animale fino ad avere
degli stabilimente ove curarli e nutrirli quando siano malati o veechi. Nel Cambdgia
quando ne uccidono uno, temendo che la sua anima possa tormentarli, gli domandano
perdono per il male che gli hanno fatto ed offrono sacrifizi proporzionati alla forza ed
alla mole dell’ animale...” Un viaggio a Nias, p. 625. 1890.
All through the Malay country, we find the same attitude toward animals, but vary-
ing, from place to place, in its particular expression.
‘2% Vor a discussion of the belief in animal, vegetable, and mineral souls among penin-
sular tribes, cf. W. W. Skeat: Malay magic, pp. 52—53. 1900. Of the Senoi and
Semang, Martin says: ,,Selbstverstiindlich hat... jedes Tier seinen Hantu, der sich unter
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 65
A Bagobo always mounts at the right side of his horse, but to
what extent this motor habit is associated with the above tradition
concerning the double personality of the animal, cannot be definitely
stated.
TRADITIONS OF METHICAL ANCESTORS
Bagobo tradition records that before time began to be reckoned,
before man was made, the universe was peopled by creatures that
are now called monkeys!*?? (/utung); but ‘at that primeval period
monkeys had the form of man and were in all respects human.
After man appeared on the earth, the apes took on their present
form. Although the line of separation between monkeys and human
beings was then pretty well established, there still lmgered a ten-
dency toward metamorphosis, by which the simian groups gained
an occasional recruit from the ranks of man.
At the dawn of more authentic oral tradition, there were living
in the world very aged people called mona, '*° whose home, some
say, was at the center of the earth, but others think that the
ancestors of the Bagobo, even back to the mona, have always
occupied the mountainous sites in Mindanao where their descendants
live to-day. The old men were called tuglay, and the old women,
tuglibung, names originally given to the first pair of ancestors, and
afterward applied to all the mona. The god, Pamulak Manobo,
who created the earth and the mona, was assisted by the first
tuglibung and tuglay in making the plants and stones and other
objects that appeared on the earth.
Umstiinden fiir das Tier an dem Menschen riichen kann.” Die Inlandstamme der malay-
ischen Halbinsel, p. 946. 1905. Mental associations not very different from these are set
up with the Bagobo when a person falls from the left-hand side of his horse.
12° Everywhere in Malay folklore, there are traditions associating men with monkeys,
particularly with the gibbon of Borneo, because of its erect position in walking. For
several references to traditional accounts, see W. W. SKEAT: op. czt., p. 189.
The Moro say that people who neglected the opportunity of going with Noah “into
a box were overtaken by the flood and providentially changed to forms that had some
chance to survive. Those who took to the hills became monkeys.” C. H. Forspes-Lrinp-
ssy: The Philippines under Spanish and American rules, p. 504. 1906.
The same thought is expressed in a Mantra creation myth, which derives their people
from two white monkeys that descended to the plains, in company with their descendants,
where they gradually took on human form. The others, who stayed behind in the
mountains, remained monkeys. Cf. R. Martin: op. cit., p. 979.
*26'Tales of the Mona will be found in Jour. Am. Folk-lore vol. 26, pp. 16, 21,
24—42, 1913.
or
66 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
There were no young people in those days, and no babies were
born for a very long time. All the mona were extremely poor, for
this was before the days of cultural inventions. They knew not
the art of weaving hemp into garments, and were accustomed to
clothe themselves in bunut, the soft, dry sheath that envelops the
trunks of cocoanut palms and can be torn off in pieces of consider-
able size. !?"
127 This tradition answers, unmistakably, to actual pre-cultural conditions. Pigafetta,.
1519—22, makes mention of bark garments among the Visayans of Cebu. “Those girls...
were naked except for tree cloth hanging from the waist and reaching to the knees.” “First
voyage around the world.” Bratr and RopertTson: op. cit., vol. 33, p. 151. 1906.
The same chronicler speaks of the Cebu men as “wearing but one piece of palm tree cloth.”
Ibid., p. 171. The dress of the Jolo men, according to Pigafetta, was the same as that
in use at Cebu. Jbid., p. 109. Of the other sex, he says: “Their women are clad in
tree cloth from their waist down.” Jdid., p. 131. Cf. Morga’s mention of the use of
bark cloth among the Visayans. Op. cit., vol. 16, p. 11. 1904.
I quote from Blair and Robertson the graphic description given by Father Navarrete,
a Dominican, of bark clothing as used in the middle of the 17th century at Kaili, in
western Celebes, where he stopped on his way to Macasar. “That is the kingdom where
the men and women dress only in paper; and, since it is a material which does not last
long, the women are continually working at it with great industry. The material con-
sists of the bark of a small tree, which we saw there. They beat it out with a stone
into curious patterns, and make it as they desire, coarse, fine, and most fine; and they
dye it in all colors. Twenty paces away, these appear like fine camelets. Much of it is
taken to Manila and Macao, where I saw excellent bed-curtains made of it; in cold
weather they are as good as one can desire. In the rainy season, which is the great
enemy of paper, the remedy applied by those people is to undress and put one’s clothes
under one’s arm.” The Philippine Islands, vol. 38, p. 67. 1906.
The editor’s footnote suggests the paper mulberry, Broweson etia papyrifera, as the
“small tree”? referred to. Both the size of the tree, and the susceptibility of the clothing
to moisture would suggest that it was not the sheath of the cocoanut palm that was put
to use in Kaili. Still, it is possible that after long-continued beating the cocoanut bast
might easily become so thin as not to resist the force of rain. According to the Sara-
sins, many different kinds of barks are used in central Celebes, according to {the texture
of cloth it is desired to produce.
“Zur Herstellung dienen die Rinden einer ganzen Reihe verschiedener Biume, je nach-
dem man feinere oder grobere Stoffe herzustellen wiinscht. Die grobsten und rohsten
sind so dick wie die Stoffe unserer Winterkleider, die feinsten so diinn und transparent
wie Schweinsblase.”? Reisen in Celebes, vol. 1, p. 259. 1905. In central Celebes, where,
according to these distinguished writers, the art of weaving is unknown, the clothing of
the native Toradja consisted entirely of bark, until within the last half century, when
foreign stuffs have been brought in by trade. The bark is put through an extended process
of beating and coloring, as described in detail in the above-mentioned work, vol. 1, pp.
259—261.
In the northeast, the ancient dress of the natives of Minabassa was also of the outer
bark or of the inner sheath of trees (Baumbast- oder Rindenstoffen) but now, the Sara-
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 67
The old people had rice and fruit to eat, but they lived under
miserable conditions, for the low-hanging sky brooded so near the
earth that nobody was able to stand upright; all were forced to
keep continually a stooping posture. Worst of all, the sun blazed
in the sky, and so close to the earth that the mona had to seek
refuge in a deep hole from the terrible heat.'** During the hot-
test part of the day, they crawled into a great pit in the ground,
just as those fabulous black men! that live at the door of the
sun are said to do this very day. Stung to exasperation at last,
an old woman, while stooping to pound her rice, chid the sky for
impeding her work, and straightway the sky rushed up to a great
height from the earth.
After the sky went up, things were better. The people could
then stand upright and walk at ease. They built houses of bamboo
thatched with nipa palm, or with cogon grass. The air was cooler ;
plants grew in abundance, and the mountains were covered with
cocoanut palms and banana plants and sugar cane. The mona
had plenty to eat, except in seasons of drought, when the sun
wilted the rice-plants and spoiled the bananas. Yet they were still
called poor, since they had no material wealth in fine textiles, or
in ornaments, and they still continued to wrap themselves in pieces
of bunut as clothing.
By and by, the old people began to give birth to children. The
first boy was called Malaki, and the first girl, Bia: famous names,
retained in myth for brave heroes and for ladies of distinction.
All the country came to be full of people, for nobody died in those
days. The buso who now function as disease-bringers and death-
carriers were then kindly spirits, on intimate terms with the people.
It was at some later period that a quarrel is alleged to have
broken out that resulted in the buso assuming a hostile attitude
toward man. 1°°
One of the most renowned individuals of this early period was
sins state, this primitive material is rarely seen, except occasionally for work in field or
forest. Ibd., vol. 1, p. 49.
A map showing the distribution of the bark girdle in Melanesia will be found in
F. GRaEBNER: “Kulturkreise in Ozeania.” Zeitschrift fiir Ethnologie, vol. 37, p. 30. 1905.
A map of the distribution of bark clothing in Africa is given by B. Ankermann, in the
same volume, 1, p. 62.
*22 Cf. Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, pp. 16—17. 1913.
12° Cf. thid., pp. 18—19.
*2° Cf. thid., pp. 42—43.
68 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Lumabat, and several important episodes turn upon the achieve-
ments of himself, and of his brothers and sisters. It was at this
time that several people, following the lead of a brother of Luma-
bat’s, turned into monkeys, '*! just as their mythical predecessors
had done. <A quarrel between Lumabat and a famous sister of his
fixed the destiny of man, consigning him at death, not to heaven,
but to the country below the earth. It appears that Lumabat in-
sisted upon his sister’s accompanying him in an attempt that he
was about to make to reach heaven; but the girl refused to go,
and, after a fight with Lumabat, she sat down on the rice mor-
tar '°* and caused it to sink into the earth. As she disappeared,
while sitting on the mortar, she dropped handfuls of rice upon the
eround, for a sign that many should go down below the earth,
but that none should go up into heaven. This woman came to be
known as Mebuyan, a notable character in myth, for it is she who
guards the entrance to the One Country of the dead, and it is she
who determines the age at which each individual shall die. Down
there in Gimokudon, she shakes a lemon-tree, and the random fall
of green or ripe fruit, like the blind-snipping shears of the Greek
fate, Atropos, calls youth or age to the lower world. This element
seems very suggestive of Aryan influence, since the tendency of
pure Malay myth is to make demons and ghosts responsible for
all sickness and death. Shortly after the disappearance of Mebuyan,
Lumabat conducted an expedition '*? having for its object the
gaining of an entrance to the country above the sky. <A great
number of his relatives went with him, but all save Lumabat himself
perished in one way or another on the road. He alone succeeded in
jumping between the sharp edges of the horizon, as they flew apart
and locked together in rapid succession, and he alone reached
heaven and became a great diwata.
The exact arrangement of the mythical chronology is somewhat
hazy, and it is not clear whether it was before or after Lumabat’s
apotheosis that the Bagobo began to become acquainted with the
cultural arts. The Tuglibung learned to weave hemp into textiles,
after she had laced the warp into patterns and colored it with
dyes obtained from the root of the sikarig tree, and from the leaves
131 Of, ibid., p. 24.
131 OF, ibid., p. 20.
133 CF, ibid., pp. 21—22.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 69
and buds of the kinarum. She dyed thread in many colors and
stitched rich embroideries, piercing the holes with a point of brass
wire. The Tuglay began to cast small bells from moulds of bees-
wax and to stamp fine patterns in brass and to make kamagi
neck-bands from the most delicate of gold scales. The knowledge
of these arts seems to have spread slowly, for Bagobo romances
indicate that, while on one mountain-top the tuglay wore bark gar-
ments and knew nothing of hemp-culture, on another neighboring
mountain there were mona who had the finest of textiles and the
richest of ornaments. '*4
Be that as it may, a golden age was dawning for those pre-
historic Bagobo. The tuglay and the tuglibung, the malaki and
the bia, lived in houses of gold with pillars of ivory and doors of
mirrored glass. On the eaves hung linked brass chains; '’ the
‘attan bindings of the floor sent out flashes of forked lightning
that played perpetually throughout the house. Beside their homes,
were mountain lakes whose waves were pure white. All around,
grew fragrant plants with flowers of gold, and the leaves on the
trees were hung with little bells. Textiles of gold covered the
meadows like layers of dry leaves, and the blades of grass were
points of rare embroidery (tambayang).'*° Cocoanuts and areca-
nuts grew in clusters at the height of a man’s waist, so that one
had not the labor of climbing for them. In those days, many
individuals had magie power, and of many a malaki it is sung
that he was matolus.'°* When the tuglay lacked anything, he
had only to wish for it, and at once the wish was accomplished. '**
If he wanted a tall behuka'*° to grow in a certain place, it was
there. At the summons of the bia, there came, on the instant, a
wealth of ivory and gold and fine garments. '° The invincible
13% Of. wbhid., pp. 35—36.
LPPACF, 201d., De 21.
136 See p. 74.
137 See p. 26, footnote.
138 Tn the sagas of India, there are countless episodes where individuals or things
appear magically, as soon as wished for. “He when thought of readily came to the
minister.” Somadeva: Katha Sarit Sagara; tr. by C. H. Tawney, vol 1, p 282. 1880.
“And when called to mind they came.” T4id., vol. 1, p. 421. “The hermit came when
thonght of.” Jdid., vol. 1, p. 436. For similar Bagobo episodes, see Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, vol. 26, pp. 832—33, 35, 36, 1913.
*39'The Visayan word for several species of rattan.
14° Of, Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, p. 36. 1918.
70 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
malaki could slay buso in countless numbers, simply by holding
the sword first in his right hand, then in his left; '!' he was
invulnerable to attack, since all the weapons of his foes dissolved
at the first thrust; '*? he held up his spear and caused daylight
to turn to darkness. He flew through the air, riding on his
shield or on the swift wind. * There were malaki and there were
bia from whose bodies beamed rays of light so brilliant that the
houses which they entered needed no torch on the dark nights. '
In song and in romantie tale, even in the current talk of to-day,
there is assumed to be a yital relation between beauty in personal
adornment and a virtuous character. There is an ideal Bagobo, a
true malaki, who is young and perfectly chaste, and who is clad
in the finest of garments. In one literary passage, the high vir-
tues of a malaki are stressed; in another, his lustrous clothing,
but, throughout, there is ever a return to the one idea: that the
typical malaki is pure of heart and brave of spirit, and that he is
radiantly beautiful to look upon. One young Bagobo girl detined
a malaki thus: “Very good man who wears very good clothes, —
kerchief, jacket, trousers, all very good, — young man who has
no wife.” There is a word, katalwan, which is explained as mean-
ing, “to do something bad and to cease to be malaki.”’ While
the characters in romantic tales (w/it) do not always live up to
the ideal meaning of their name, malaki, yet the primary content
of the word is everywhere recognized.
Corresponding to the malaki, there is an ideal woman, some-
times called bia, and sometimes daraga, *° the latter word being
181 Of. abid., p. 28.
182 Of. tbid., p. 34.
RNS Ch thid., p. 86.
18% Of, wbid., pp. 29, 32, 33.
'*5 The association of radiant light with the bodies of distinguished individuals is very
common in ancient Indian tales. Cf. the following passages, from Katha Sarit Sagara,
ed. cit. 1880—1884. “The hermit Narada is said to diffuse a halo with the radiance of
his body.” Of. vol. 1, p. 162. Again, “he illuminates the whole horizon with brightness.”
vol. 1, p. 415. “There appeared a light inseparable from his head.” Vol. 1, p. 418.
“There, on a altar-platform illuminated by the great hermit Vijitasu . . . as by a second
fire in human form.” Vol. 2, p. 146. “And he saw that maiden near him, illuminating
the wood, though it was night.” Vol. 2, p. 133. “Her beauty illuminated the lower
world which has not the light of the sun or of the stars.” Vol. 2, p. 199.
‘8® Déra is a Sanscrit word, meaning “a girl.” The peninsular Malay for “virgin”
is dnak déra, “child girl”’ See F. A. Swerrensam: Vocabulary of the English and
Malay languages, vol. 2, p. 27. 1896.
The Tagal word for girls of marriageable age, Morga wrote in 1609, was dalaga. It
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 71
employed when it is desired to emphasize the youth and the chastity
of a girl. It is true that, in a broad sense, any unmarried woman
is daraga, but in poetical use daraga has the connotation of a pure
maid, a virgin. In the text of the songs, she is almost invariably
referred to by some metaphorical word or phrase suggested by
natural phenomena. She is called a point of very high land that
the birds cannot fly up to, that even the winds may not reach,
though they are crying for her; again, she is figured as the trunk
of a sturdy tree that the north wind is not able to break; or she
is a waterfall, dropping over steep terraces, around which the
snakes make futile attempts to curl themselves. The bird, the
wind, the snake — each of these represents the lover, foiled in
every attempt at approach to the girl. Here is a part of the Ogan
Daraga, or “Song of a Virtuous Woman.” One young girl says
to another: ‘Friend, friend, listen to the song of the kalisawa
bird as it flies over the sea and is calling fifty drops of rain. It
is well, my friend; we take shelter; the bulla leaf spread over
our heads protects us from rain from the north and rain from the
south.” In the same manner, practically all of the little poems
that at first sight seem to be nature songs are purely allegorical
in character.
In those ancient days, metamorphosis 1** was an ordinary event.
Many persons were turned into trees and stones and rocks, some-
times as a swift judgment upon them for presumptuous under-
takings. Wari, a brother of Lumabat’s, was transformed into a
sereech-owl for his disregard of the commands of a god. '** That
the tree-hornbill used to be a man, is a well-known fact; and the
proof is, that if you look at the body of a hornbill, under the
feathers, at some point between the neck and the wing, you will
see that its skin is like the skin of man. On the other hand, the
kingfisher, '*” as we learn from a myth, once turned into a beau-
tiful woman. ‘Transformations of monkeys to buso,!*® of a squirrel
has been noted that 2 and 7 are constantly interchangeable. Cf. Bratr and RogBertson:
op. cit., vol. 16, p. 129. 1904.
**7 For the episodes describing these transformations, see Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26,
pp. 21, 51. 1913. Cf. H. O. Beyer: op. cit. The Philippine Jour. Sci., vol. 8, pp.
89—90. 1913.
+48 Cf. Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, p. 28. 1913.
149 Of. ibid., p. 54.
42° Cf. ihid., p. 47-
72 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
to a malaki,'®! even the metamorphosis of a cat’s head into a
cocoanut 1? — all these changes are recorded by oral tradition.
Over and over again, does the poor tuglay of the ulit become a
ereat malaki; while the ill-dressed man called basolo turns into a
splendidly-dressed malaki, and again returns to the state of a basolo,
and passes through his final metamorphosis into a malaki: a series
of transformations that is achieved inside of one day. '** In the
last-named cases, it is always by a change of clothes that the meta-
morphosis is effected; '°* while the squirrel, too, takes off his little
coat, and the kingfisher, her feather dress, when the time is ripe
for them each to take on human form. Finally, there are stories
of babies that become tall in a few days by some magical accel-
eration of growth. '°°
In the recitation of romantic epics and legendary songs, from
which the above citations are mere gleanings, the emotional life of
Bagobo men and women finds glad expression. In the picturesque
phraseology of their richly-endowed dialect, they elaborate these
scenes of fabulous oriental splendor with a play of faney '°° that
is the more extraordinary in view of the conditions under which
even the better class of Bagobo actually live. In mean little huts,
unfurnished, except for the presence of a loom, three fire-stones on
a box of earth, and perhaps a stationary bench of bamboo, they
sleep on the floor and eat with their fingers, making no attempt
to add decorative touches to their homes, although they amply pos-
be eC fa UE ea IDe
+52 Cf. whid., p.
‘53 Cf. wbid., pp. 28, 36.
15% Of. ibid., p. 40.
‘°° Cf. tbid., pp. 34, 54. There are parallel Filipino legends of miraculous growth,
e.g. “The new-born child ran to the church.” F. Garpner, vol. 20, p. 111. 1907.
Corresponding cases of magical development immediately after birth are recorded in
Indian myth. “That girl the moment she was born. . . spoke distinctly and got up
and sat down.” Somadeva: op. cit., vol. 1, p. 119. 1880.
‘56 Por illustrations of this point, see “Bagobo Myths,” Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26,
pp. 24—40. 1918. While the descriptive terms in these stories, referring to the beautiful
objects possessed in those ancient days, are exact renderings of the Bagobo words, it is
hard to do justice to the charm of the original. Even when a boy tells a story in broken
English, he pours out a wealth of descriptive words and phrases in the Bagobo tongue
for which he, of course, knows no English equivalents. In making a large collection,
however, one soon becomes very familiar with the vocabulary that represents objects of
wealth, for the names and the explanations of hundreds of articles, that are constantly
coming for purchase, are given by Bagobo who know not a word of English.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 13
sess the artistic skill to produce such ornamentation. Only in
the decoration of objects that are worn on the person — garments,
ornaments, weapons — and of tools used in the industries, does
their esthetic taste find a channel for discharge. Yet as for such
a luxurious form of living as would suggest a basis for the
mythical romance, it is certain that no Bagobo, at least for many
generations, has come into contact with anything of the sort. It
should be observed, too, that the ulit, which embodies all of the
episodes in the legendary existence of Bagobo ancestors, is essen-
tially different from other stories in the range of native fiction, and
it points, both in character and in literary form, to an origin other
than Malay. No more interesting problem could arise in connec-
tion with Bagobo culture than an attempt to trace the manner of
dissemination of the peculiar elements that make up this mythical
romance which has now become so intimately associated with the
social life of the Bagobo, as well as with their artistic and poetic
interests. In the formation of the ulit complex, it is not unlikely
that, originally, Hindu sources were rather heavily drawn upon,
though we do not yet know the precise manner of contact by
means of which this borrowing took place. The Moorish incre-
ments must form a very recent, and perhaps a negligible, contri-
bution. There is little doubt but that the component parts of the
stories came to the Bagobo as a literary possession a very long
time Jago, and have been gradually modified by Malay tradition,
and enriched by elements associated with recent tribal and with
individual experiences.
An ulit '°' told me in Bagobo, by Tungkaling, son of Kaba, pic-
tures the mythical surroundings of those old mona people at the
dawn of Bagobo tradition, and I will give a part of the story here
in a translation as close to the original as is consistent with clearness.
Tuglay, the very wise one, lived by a white lake. He had one hundred
carabao, and horses, and seven thousand cows, and goats — all on one
mountain. He made kamagi; 18 he patterned brass by stamping; he made
brass finger rings. He had kept silver hidden under the ground since long
7°7 The wdit is the Bagobo mythical romance, the scene of which is laid in prehistoric
times; and the characters that figure in the action are the ancient mona, the malaki,
the bia and several other well-marked personages.
158A type of necklace highly treasured by the Bagobo. It is a fine, flexible cord
formed of small and extremely thin discs of gold that overlap slightly, after the manner
of fish-scales. It is said to be of Moro make.
74 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ago. All gold were his plants, his flowers, his sweet-smelling weeds...
Textiles of gold covered the sharp blades of the fresh-growing meadow-grass,
like a covering of dry leaves..... The Tuglibung decorated rattan neck-
bands with red dye, and she used black kinarum for coloring hemp. The
posts of the house were all of ivory; the raised walk to the kitchen was
made of eight guns;'5 all the doors were mirrors; ' the wood was gold;
the burden baskets were gold; the rattan bindings of the floor were flashes
of lightning.
At the rim of the sky there is a bird"! with feathers all downy, with
claws all of steel, with a beak that is a mirror, with a million scales over-
lapping one another. This bird looked at the town of Tuglay, and went
back home no more [i.e. because the town was so beautiful].
When Tuglay wished textile to grow on the mountains, it was there.
When he wanted rattan to grow, or when he wished to cut for boats the
large kind of rattan, it was all ready . . . He was very rich.
159 A Moro gun called szzapang.
16°JTn another story, the walls are all mirrors. Cf. Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26,
p. 27. Where the Bagobo got the visual image of a “mirrored wall” is a question. To
what extent this mythical conception exists among other Malay people, I do not know,
but it is to be found in Indian tales, e.g. “Its walls of precious stone were adorned
all round with living pictures, on account of the reflections in them of the lovely
waiting women.” Somadeva: op. cit., vol. 2, p. 199. 1884.
161 Perhaps this is the Minokawa bird. Cf. Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, p.19. 19138.
See also p. 47 supra.
Part Il. Tort Format CEREMONIAL
TYPICAL CEREMONIAL BEHAVIOR
In the conduct of the more formal religious functions of the
Bagobo, there appear a number of constant elements, which may
be termed normal ceremonial reactions. Peculiar factors will
necessarily combine to make up the ritual complex on occasions so
distinct as that of a harvest festival, on the one hand, and of a
human sacrifice on the other; furthermore, a wide range of variation
in the manner of performing the same identical ceremony is to be
found in different Bagobo groups. Nevertheless, there are every-
where to be seen certain distinct modes of response which charac-
terize so regularly the more important of the rites that it is proper
to group such responses under the head of typical ceremonial behavior.
General Character of Ceremonial
The orthodox time for the performance of a ceremony is deter-
mined by observation of the heavenly bodies. Festivals associated
with planting and reaping take place when certain constellations
appear in the sky, and it is probable that there are other cere-
monial dates which are calculated by the stars; while the time for
the drinking festival, called Ginum, is regulated strictly by lunar
phases, '°°
The Bagobo haye no permanent temples that function as common
gathering places for religious rites. In preparation for the ceremony
of Ginum, a large, well-roofed house is built for the accommodation
of a great number of guests or else the house of the chief is used,
temporarily, as a ceremonial house. Rice culture ceremonies are
162 Among the natives of Minahassa, in former times, all undertakings, such as sowing,
reaping, making clothes, procuring salt, had to be performed at definite times, and were
forbidden at other times. Cf. P. and VF’. Sarasin: Reisen in Celebes, vol. I, p. 44. 1905.
76 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
held in the homes and in the fields of individuals; still other reli-
gious rites, as, for instance, purification ceremonies and marriage,
take place at the border of a river or in the bed of a shallow
stream; while the rite of human sacrifice is ordinarily performed
in a retired place in the forest, or on the sea-beach. But, whatever
the place chosen for a ceremony, the immediate spot where the
priest must stand or sit for the recitation of prayers and the offering
of gifts is before an altar of recognized type — a subject which
will be discussed in some detail in a later section.
The religious rites of the Bagobo are typically exoterie in char-
acter, for the ceremonial and the doctrine are the common property
of the people. Not only are the young and the old of both sexes.
present in large numbers at practically all of the ceremonies, but
set parts in any performance belong regularly to different social
classes as determined by sex, by age, or by position in the family
of the person giving the festival.
The distribution of the leading ritual parts is briefly as follows.
Old men offer the sacred food and drink to the gods at the main
altar and perform accompanying rites; they cut the ceremonial
bamboo poles, and afterward, while holding the poles, recount their
exploits; they make arrangements for a human sacrifice; they
perform those magical rites which are associated with the carving
of wooden figures and the planting of medicinal branches for the
exorcism of evil spirits; they control the entire ceremonial.
The old women perform the altar rites at harvest, and make
devotional recitations at certain other times; they make offerings
of betel at wayside shrines to the buso and to spirits of the
dead and repeat the accompanying prayers; they summon the anito
and most frequently act as mediums; they direct many ceremonial
details, and are often called into consultation with the old men;
they exercise a general supervision over the religious behavior of
the young people. Such priestly acts as the pouring of water over
candidates at the bathing ceremony, the performing of a marriage
rite, and the dedication to the gods of manufactured articles brought
by the people, may be done by an old person of either sex who
is a recognized official.
It is the duty of young men to cut and shape bamboo for cere-
monial vessels; to mix the ingredients of the sacred food and cook
it in bamboo joints; to assist the old men at the altar in such
matters as handing utensils, clearing away dishes, and elevating the
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH
lI
a |
sacrificial food and drink to a high altar-shelf; to chant antiphonal
recitations called gindaya; to sing other songs; to carry the burden
of the agong playing; to perform certain dances; to help the girls
in preparing and in serving the general feast, and in passing
around sugar cane liquor.
To the younger women and girls fall such duties as assisting the
old women at the out-of-door shrines and at the harvest altar by
handing them areca-nuts and leaf-dishes as needed, and in other
offices of a like nature; of singing many songs other than gindaya;
of giving some assistance on the drums and agongs; of performing
a great number of dances; of cooking, dishing and serving the
banquet; finally, of stuffing rice by the handful into the mouths
of the guests, with special attention to youths of the other sex.
Young people of both sexes go out together on the first day to
gather leaves for the ceremonial leaf-dishes; together they make
leaf-dishes; and they prepare jointly the torches of bia nuts — the
boys splitting and sharpening long strips of rattan, on which the
girls string the nuts. At rice-planting, all the men and boys make ~
holes with digging-sticks, while all the women and girls drop the
seed-rice.
Even small children have some parts assigned to them. During
the preparatory days, they learn little dance-steps to the music of
agongs, and one small agong is always played by a child; they
have their special festival costumes of tiny trousers or skirts; on
the last night, a small girl is sometimes deputed to remove the
sprig of bulla from the waists of the women at a definite point in
the ceremony; after a human sacrifice, the hands and feet of the
victim are given to little boys, who must cut them into bits and
bury the pieces.
Yet, however exact the assignment of parts, and however careful
the preparation for a ceremony, the continuity of the proceedings
is frequently interrupted by consultation among the old people
about the manner of performance, and by anxious questioning as to
whether some tabu is being inadvertently broken. They discuss;
they gesticulate; they prompt the official who is reciting the prayers ;
one calls attention to some small blunder made in handling the
sacred paraphernalia; another quotes a forgotten line. By no means
may it be taken for granted that even to an aged and experienced
Bagobo every detail of a ritual is automatically familiar. The cere-
monial functionary is watched intently by several old people who
78 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
sit close to the right and to the left of him, each one ready to
help, to advise, to correct, because it is well understood that even
a minor omission, or a slight misstep, might result in weary months
of illness, or tempt the attack of a mortal disease. For this reason,
those responsible for the ceremony hold their attention at strain to
secure a perfect ritual.
The dominant motive in all ceremonial is to drive sickness from
the body and to prevent the approach of disease and death. This
underlying intention is ever present, whatever the rite, and it is
this which gives unity and coherence to many a series of ritual
acts that, at first glance, appear to be strangely ill-assorted.
Fundamental Elements of Ceremonial
The type of behavior that characterizes Bagobo ceremonial is
made up of a number of ritual elements, many of which are common
to several of the ceremonies, and a few of which appear in practi-
cally all of them. It is only at the ceremony of Ginum that every
one of these ritual elements may be observed.
Human Sacrifice. The ceremonial putting to death of a human
victim is called paghuaga, and is demanded by Bagobo custom on
specific occasions, chief among which are the following:
At the festival of Ginum, the offering of a human sacrifice was
anciently an integral part of the ceremony, though at present it is
possible to substitute a fowl as the victim.
After the death of a chieftain or other notable individual of the
tribe, slaves are killed to provide attendants for the deceased in the
country of the dead. The husband sacrifices for a dead wife, a
wife for her husband. For a chief, many victims may be offered
but sometimes the number is small. Two slaves were killed for
Datu Ayo at his death several years ago, as related by an eye-
witness of my acquaintance.
A paghuaga forms an important feature at the installation of a
datu, and is occasionally an element of the marriage ceremony.
At special crises — during an epidemic, when crops fail, when
drought lasts for a long period, or when other misfortune overtakes
the tribe — it is thought proper to find a suitable sacrifice to appease
the anger of the gods, and there is some evidence to show that
petitions to the datu to arrange for paghuaga may be proffered by
any individual on the plea that his life activities are being inter-
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH Tis,
fered with by the ghosts of relatives that will not be quieted.
In any one of the above cases, the victim is regularly a slave
that has been secured by purchase or by capture; preferably, a
poor, wretched slave is chosen, who, on account of some physical
defect, is of little use for work.
Although this sacrificial rite is often a constituent element of Ginum,
of funeral services, and so forth, yet, from another point of view,
it may be regarded as a ceremonial unit by itself, and as characterized
by the types of chanting, the form of altar, the ritual recitations,
and several other elements that will be mentioned as common to
many ceremonies. Furthermore, the special crises that may neces-
sitate such a sacrifice do not necessarily coincide with the date of
a festival, so that paghuaga may become an isolated ceremony.
Ceremonial Food. There is set before the gods for their enjoyment
certain foods having a ceremonial value, chief among which are
chicken meat and a rice ritually called omok, which looks red in
the raw grain, but becomes dark-colored, almost black, after boiling.
Grated cocoanut is mixed with the chicken and with the rice.
The sacred food may never be cooked in clay jars, but invariably
in vessels of bamboo. At a certain point in the ceremony, after a
period during which the unseen beings are supposed to have extracted
the spiritual essence '® of the food, the material part (the “acci-
dents,” if one may borrow a theological term) is eaten by men
and adolescent boys. They told me that it made them “good in
the body,” so that they “could not be sick.” This is one of the
very few privileges not enjoyed by women, who, however, eat at
harvest the sacred omok, at which festival no sacrificial meat 1s
mixed with the rice.
Ceremonial Liquor. A sacred drink, called balabba, which is
never used outside of ceremonial occasions, is offered to the super-
natural beings with an appropriate ritual, and afterward passed
about to be partaken of freely by everybody present at the festival.
I did not have an opportunity to observe the manufacture of balabba,
but the process, as briefly described to me, consists of boiling sugar
cane and treating the syrup thus obtained with the bark of a
tree called bogis, the liquor being then allowed to ferment in jars
for a very long time before use. It is of rather thick consistency,
163 The Bagobo term for the essence of the food and drink that the gods enjoy is
taguruing.
80 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
brownish in color, and extremely rich and sweet, having a flavor
suggestive of molasses mingled with old rum. It is a pleasant
tasting and refreshing beverage, and its intoxicating properties are
not excessive. At the moment of offering to the spirits this sacred
drink, the priest stirs it with a spray of fragrant manangid, and
with a spoon made by twisting to the proper shape a fragment of
bulla leaf. A liquor very similar to balabba, if not identical with
it, functioned as the ceremonial drink of the Tagal people, in their
pagan days. Bishop Aduarte makes interesting references to this use. 18+
Betel Ritual. No ceremony is complete without an offering of
betel to one, or to all, of the three classes of supernatural beings —
the gods, the buso and the spirits of the dead. When the occasion
is one of a high ceremony, performed before a main altar, the
areca-nuts '*? are sliced into lengthwise sections, just as in the
customary manner for chewing, and each section is laid on a betel-
leaf (buyo)'°® placed in a set position, A ceremonial sifting over
the nuts and leaves of lime from a bamboo tube follows, the lime
having been made by the usual process of calcining certain shells
to a fine powder. The areca, betel and lime are afterward chewed
by old people at the altar.
Another common form of making a betel offering is that in use
at a hut-shrine, when a certain number of entire (that is, unsliced)
areca-nuts are placed within the shrine with an appropriate ritual,
but are never afterward taken away for chewing. There are other
ceremonies when entire nuts are placed in leaf-dishes (hinidok)
*°* While working in the province of Pangasinan, in west-central Luzon, he wrote, in
1640, that “there were given up an infinite number of pieces of earthenware and a great
deal of very old wine — for this is regarded as the thing consecrated to the devil; and
no one dares touch or go near it except at the time of the sacrifice, and then only the
minister who performs it...” Aduarte: “Historia.” Briarr and ROBERTSON: op. cit.,
vol. 30, p. 186, 1905. A few pages further on, the kind of wine is specified: “These
chiefs were the very first to cause to be brought the vessels of Quila (this is a wine
which they make of sugar cane, and when it has aged for some years it has the color
of our amber wine). This they esteem very highly and keep with great care, using it at
their feasts in honor of their idols.” Zdid., vol. 30, p. 248.
"*° Areca catechu — known among foreigners as the betel-nut palm. The nuts, shaped
much like olives, grow in clusters just below the leaves at the top of bare, light-colored
trunks that reach a height of 40 or 50 feet. The Bagobo call the tree mdémddn and a
single nut, mama.
"°° Buyo — the Visayan name for the climbing plant, Piper dete, the leaves of which
are used everywhere in the Islands for chewing with areca-nuts. The Bagobo call it
monika, The plant is trained on sticks and grows to a height of several feet.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 81
of hemp, since the use of hemp (abaca) leaves, rather than of banana,
prevails for ceremonial dishes. The shape of this little vessel has
some resemblance to the keel of a boat, yet I cannot affirm that
this effect is consciously produced. Before I had seen the ceremony,
the Bagobo who told me about the kintidok remarked that they
looked like boats. The word kinudok, so far as I know, is not
etymologically related to any of the terms for native craft.
Offerings of Manufactured Produets. In addition to ceremonial
gifts of food, drink and betel, the gods are honored by offerings
of more intrinsic value: garments, weapons, ornaments, — new and
beautiful, — all of which objects are brought in great quantities
by the people, to be laid upon an altar or hung beside it, for a
longer or a shorter period according to the type of altar, the
oecasion, and the nature of the gift. This subject will be discussed
in connection with the remarks on altars in the following section.
I will here simply call attention to the salient points of interest
at this ceremony of laying manufactured objects before unseen
beings. First, the spirit or essence of the articles is enjoyed by
the gods, and, possibly, becomes their permanent property; second,
the material part of the objects thus dedicated becomes hallowed
to such an extent that they may never be sold, or even given
away, but must always remain in the possession of the individual
owners who placed them on the shrines, — unless, indeed, they are
left as permanent offerings, — severe sickness being the penalty
for transgression of this rule; third, there is an expectation of large
returns from the slight sacrifice made, since the deities who enjoy
the gifts are urged, at the same time, to help the worshippers to
gain riches or, as they say, “to get things.”
Purification. The ceremonial lavation bearing the name of
pamalugu is distinguished by several elements from bathing for
purposes of pleasure or for cleanliness, either one of which washings
is called padigis. It is on fixed occasions that pamalugu is per-
formed, — notably at Ginum and at marriage, — at which times
men and women are effused by the priest in a prescribed manner,
the water being applied by means of a bunch of green leaves and
twigs having a medicinal value. Orientations according to a set
form are made by the candidates upon whom the water is poured.
While the dominant intention of the rite is unquestionably that of
purification, in the sense of expelling disease, the Bagobo recognize
other advantages to be gained from the water and the magic greens.
6
s)
2 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
They say that they make use of pamalugu to keep off sickness and
to cure sickness; to drive anger from the heart; to get things and
to grow rich. In other words, while every single rite has its own
specific motive, yet there is a feeling, not too nicely defined, that
any ceremony, properly performed, promotes in several directions
the general well-being of the Bagobo.
Recitation of Ritual Words. At each of the rites thus far men-
tioned (that is to say, at the formal presentation before the supernatural
beings of human blood, of sacred food, of ceremonial liquor, of
fresh betel, of artificial products, and also during the lavations) set
forms of words are uttered by the official functionary, some of
which are short ritual formule and others are prolonged liturgical
recitations. The unseen personalities are apostrophised by name;
the objects offered are mentioned, or even listed, class by class;
and definite petitions are put up, the burden of which is that the
approach of disease may be checked, that all buso may be banished
from the ceremonial, and that the protecting gods may be present
to help the Bagobo.
Ceremonial Chant. An impressive element of the ceremonial
is a peculiar form of chant called gindaya, which, in its manner
of presentation, is distinctly marked off from other musical perform-
ances. I will give, first, a definition of gindaya offered by the
Bagobo themselves, and add to that such observations as I made
on different occasions. The Bagobo explain that gindaya is sung
in a loud voice (in contradistinetion to the ogan, a low-voiced song
accompanied by the guitar); that an even number of voices — two
or four or six or eight — sing against the same number; that
gindaya is sung at Ginum, but only on those nights when balabba
is drunk; that no young men can sing in the gindaya unless they
take hold of the bamboo posts, or of the spears tied to the bamboo ;
that they lay hold of the bamboo in order to make their voices
sweet-toned.
My own records verify the above statement, except that sometimes
a chant of one voice is answered back by one voice, and I have
not heard more than two at a time sing against another two.
Often, again, the chants are given with slight volume of sound,
not always in a loud voice; yet as compared to the soft singing
of an ogan, which is much like humming, gindaya may be called
loud, for the tones are pure and clear. In regard to the occasion,
it should be noted that whenever a Bagobo wants to say that
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 83
something is peculiar to ceremonial, he always says it is done ‘at
Ginum,” that being the most important festival. Gindaya is, however,
a feature of marriage and of human sacrifice, and it may be of
some other ceremonies.
On the three nights that I heard the gindaya, at two celebrations
of Ginum on different mountains, it was always chanted by very
young men, and preferably by the sons and by the brothers’ sons
of the datu giving the festival. The youths who take part in
gindaya sing with an arm uplifted and hand clasping a bamboo
post or one of the cross-timbers. This position is mandatory and must
be held until the singer is relieved by another, however long the
chant. While one hand is thus raised above the head, the other
holds lightly over the lips a corner of the singer’s head kerchief,
or an end of one of the tankulu that hangs draped from the rafters
above. The obligation to keep the lips covered, however, is some-
times complied with in a somewhat perfunctory manner by merely
holding the tankulu near the mouth.
The subject matter of the gindaya is in part narrative, in part
descriptive, in part devotional, with many mythical allusions
throughout the song or story. Of the three or four texts that I
secured, the subjects include the celebration of Ginum with special
reference to the activities attending the preparation, and a dialogue
between two men who have met at the feast, which possibly pre-
serves some tradition of mythical ancestors. Just as is the case
with other songs of the Bagobo, and with their long romances, the
impression conveyed in gindaya is of a metrical form an effect
due perhaps to the quantity observed, as well as to the slight pauses
made between groups of words, and to a fairly uniform accent
on the penultimate syllable. There is a tendency, also, to insert
extra prefixes and suffixes, and to duplicate entire words as if to
fill out the measure of the lines. In the chanting of gindaya, only
a very few intervals are used (the second and the fifth predomin-
ating) and the notes are long sustained. One is reminded of the
intoning of conyent offices, or the singing of psalms in Gregorian
tones. There is no instrumental accompaniment to gindaya.
Agong Music. Ceremonial music is furnished by the beating of
the agong — a large percussion instrument of bronze, '°‘ resembling
+67 Professor William Campbell, of the Department of Metallurgy of Columbia Univer-
sity, was good enough to look at one of the little bells that are cast by the Bagubo
84 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
roughly a deep inverted pan with a bottom curving slightly to the
convex and haying a big knob-like protuberance at the central point.
Agongs are of Chinese manufacture and are imported into the
islands from Singapore in considerable numbers. The wild tribes
gladly barter away their possessions for these instruments, one of
which is worth, according to size, from twenty to thirty pesos.
A datu or a Bagobo of wealth may own as many as twelve,
twenty, or even a larger number of agongs; if he is to hold a
festival, and owns only two or three instruments, he borrows as
many as he needs for the occasion. The agong is the standard
unit of barter in trading valuable objects, and in calculating large
debts and marriage dowries.
The tool for striking is the ftap-tap, a short wooden stick, of
which the head end is coated with rubber to give the proper
rebound, and covered with cloth, while the handle of many a fine
tap-tap is often richly carved. Unlike the Moro, who keeps his
agongs in a long frame with an individual socket for each instru-
ment, at which frame he sits down to play, the Bagobo hangs his
agongs by loops of rattan from a rod of bamboo and stands facing
the convex sides of the instruments during his performance. With
left thumb and index finger, he lightly grasps the central knob of
the agong, or holds with his left hand the suspending strings of
rattan, while his right hand wields the tap-tap. At a ceremony,
some expert musician carries the melody and handles in his per-
formance all but a few of the instruments, while his assistants on
the remaining agongs have but to accompany their leader by making
their strokes exactly with his, at set intervals. For example, if
there are eleyen agongs, the head performer plays on eight of
them, and perhaps three persons — a man, a woman and a
child — assist him. The leader must be a _ skilled artist whose
training is begun in early boyhood, for they all say that years of
practice are required to make a good agong player. But a man
who has a feeling for music and has received the necessary edu-
from metal obtained by melting down old agongs. He informed me that the alloy was
of copper and tin, with a high percentage of tin, and with the addition, possibly, of a
little lead.
In Pigafetta’s First Voyage around the World, 1519—22, agongs are mentioned. “These
gongs are made of metal and are manufactured in ... China. They are used in those
regions as we use bells and are called aghon.”
Mr. Cole states that the agongs he saw at Sibulin were gongs of copper. Op. cit.,
p- 102. 1918.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 85
cation plays with wonderful ease, while at the same time he leaps
from one agong to another and often executes the steps of some
graceful dance in rhythm with his beat. Again, he will dance
away from the agongs, tap-tap in hand, perform fancy steps,
then dance back to his place and resume the strokes without the
slightest break in the measure of the music, and without a check
to the even swing of his dance.
When drums are present, a drum call opens each set perform-
ance, and the beating of the drums continues for a short space
after the agongs cease playing.
At every ceremony where there is general dancing, agongs fur-
nish the music, but there are times when #agonggo is given without
dancing, unless it be the dance of the player; such occasions, to
cite an instance, as the auspicious moment of bringing in the cere-
monial bamboos, when the agong performance that immediately
follows is manifestly a sacred rite.
Dancing and Costumes. The dances (swimayo) at ceremonies do
not appear to differ from those performed on ordinary social occa-
sions. In my own house, at an evening gathering, with an audience
of perhaps twenty Bagobo, dances have been performed by the
youth Saliman quite as elaborate and varied as any to be observed
at ceremonies. Nor are the motives different, if one may draw an
inference from the names of dances, and from the steps and the
series of postures of the performers. Of course, at ceremonies,
there is a more definite order observed in the sequence of dances,
and in the appearing of individuals one by one. The girls ordi-
narily take the initiative, and for some time hold the floor; again,
the initial dance is given by men alone, wearing the tankulu.
Soon, both women and men are dancing, each one individually,
never in couples, every dancer with eyes bent downward, intent on
his or her own steps and attitudes, yet a collision rarely occurring
between two performers, although the space reserved is always
extremely small in proportion to the number of dancers — a floor
of ten by twelve feet being ample space for a score or more men
and women. Many motives are drawn from nature; others from
human interests, such as war and love; others have a devotional
significance. Here are a few characteristic titles of dances that I
have seen at different times, the explanations of which were eagerly
offered, without question on my part, by Bagobo young men and
girls at my side.
86 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
“Baliti,” representing the quivering of the leaves of the baliti tree;
“Karamag to kawayan,” the leaves of a bamboo swaying in the wind
(danced by a man);
“Bukason,”’ a snake dance;
“Tibarun,” and “Manok,” bird dances (performed by two women);
“Bulayan,”’ a descriptive dance to express fear of the Atas (performed by
two girls);
“Kulagsoy penek ka kayo,” a squirrel running up the trunk of a tree
(danced by one man);
“Us-tubé,” the god-brother in the sky (a girls’ dance in honor of the
god-brother) ;
“Salangayd,” a dance for the god of that name (performed by a man).
The dancers, both men and women, wear their usual full dress
costumes made from hemp and from cotton textiles, elaborately
embroidered and beaded. The “magani” wear tankulu twisted
about their heads, while youths who have not yet killed anybody
have cotton kerchiefs woven in bright stripes and decorated with
beaded and tasseled edges. Leglets and armlets of brass and of
vegetable fibre are generally worn by the men, and those of the
wealthier class are gorgeous in their wide, richly-beaded belts and
enormous ear-plugs made of discs of pure white ivory.
Certain hair ornaments are regularly worn by women dancers,
and to appear without these ornaments would be extremely bad
form. One is a wooden comb in the shape of a half-moon, deco-
rated in carved designs, with beads stuck in wax, and with
heavily-beaded tassels. Another is a long brass pin called /oling,
that is run vertically into the back coil of hair. It is decorated
with tufts of dyed goat’s hair tipped with brilliant down from
birds’ plumage and tied to the pin with fine brass wire. The
clusters of bright-colored goat’s hair and feathers bob and wave in
time with the steps of the dancer in a very effective manner.
There is one essential accessory to the costume of a woman per-
forming a ceremonial dance, and that is the wide closed scarf
called salugboy. This scarf, worn diagonally across the right
shoulder and under the left arm-pit, has the daily utility function
of supporting the baby or of holding needlework and parcels; but at
a festival this scarf becomes an esthetic element that figures prom-
inently in the dance. As she dances, the girl clasps the salugboy
with both hands and holds it out loosely from her body, or she
removes it entirely and lets it drape freely from her hands. It is
a pretty sight to see her swaying her body from side to side in
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 87
thythm with her steps, while swinging the scarf in soft waves of
motion that follow the curves of her form as she turns and bends,
in a series of balanced movements, to the right hand and to
the left.
The Feast. Near the close of every Bagobo ceremony, or imme-
diately following it, there is served a generous meal, which, in
view of the abstemiousness of every-day fare, might properly be
called a banquet. The regular festival foods, differing somewhat
according to the ceremonial occasion, include roast venison, pig-fat,
boiled fish, grated cocoanut and boiled white rice. At Ginum, the
fish is slivered, mixed with grated cocoanut and pressed into moulds
between leaves held in the palms of the hands; and at this festival
the dishes are made of pieces of hemp-leaf, curved at one end and
fastened by a bit of pointed rattan. The guests are served seated
on the floor, and a separate dish is given to each. During the
preparation of the food, nobody tastes a morsel, for the fast since
the preceding meal, however long, must not be broken until the
moment that all the company begin simultaneously to enjoy
the feast.
Manganito, During the nights immediately preceding a great
ceremony, and in some cases, as at harvest, on the night following
the main ceremonial, it is customary to consult the gods through
the instrumentality of a priestess, or of some other person who
acts as medium. !°°
‘ Various Types of Altar
The Bagobo recognize several types of altar, fairly distinct in
function, chief among which are the following: Tambara, Tigyama,
Balekat, Sonaran, Buis, Parabunnian. Roughly grouped from the
structural aspect, the above-named types include four classes of
altar, which may be distinguished as: (a) Bamboo prayer-stands
(tambara); (b) Hanging altars (tigyama and balekdt); (c) Agong
altars (sonaran); (d) Hut-shrines (duis and parabunnidn).
Bamboo prayer-stands called tambara. This is a form of altar
to be seen everywhere, since it functions as a family altar, as an
out-of-door shrine, and in various associations with ceremonial wor-
ship of a more formal type. The tambara consists of a small
+62 See Part II]. “Every-day forms of religious response.”
88 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
howl of heavy white crockery, supported by an upright rod of light
bamboo (balekayo) from three and one-half to four feet in height,
the rod being split down several inches from the top into four
forks which are spread out and bound with rattan at the center
of parting so as to form a rest for the bowl. ‘Tied to these branching
splints of the standard, one often sees slender leaves from plants
that possess a magical virtue, especially those that are fragrant,
and also flowering sprays called bagebé from the areca palm. Bands
of rattan fasten the upright standard to one of the timbers of the
wall, in the case of the house altar, while a tambara in use out-
of-doors has its bamboo rod fixed in the ground. That the bowl
is the essential part of this altar, and that it is the tambara proper
should be noted, the technical name for the standard being budibi.
When a tambara is set up in any home, the men cut the bamboo
for the budtbi and the women place the bowl. In some houses
there are two bowls, each in its own standard, and occasionally
there are three, side by side against the wall. To this little family
shrine recourse is had in case of sickness, when areca-nuts, betel-
leaf and old ornaments are placed in the bowls with a prayer to
one or another of the diwata; for a bamboo prayer-stand may be
dedicated to a diwata of the house, a diwata of the hearth, the
personal gods of the family, or to some other protecting spirit.
This same type of altar'®’ functions at several ceremonies, notably
at the feast of Ginum, on which occasion tambara are erected at
the edge of the river, or in the bed of a stream, for the devotions
in connection with lustration. Other tambara are set up by the
16° The tambara probably represents one of the most primitive altars of the Bagobo,
since it functions in such a number of distinct ceremonies. We find this type of altar
mentioned in the old mythical romance recited by mountain people, as well as in stories
that may be of more modern composition. Cf. op. cit., Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26,
pp. 28, 52. Jan.—March, 1913.
An altar somewhat similar in form is used by Peninsular Malays, among whom Skeat
found, along the wayside, shrines where incense was burned in little stands made of
bamboo rods, one end of the rod being “stuck in the ground and the other split into
four or five, and then opened out and plaited with basket work so as to hold a little
earth.” Cf. W. W. Skear: op. cit., p. 67. In one case, I have seen the half shell of a
cocoanut used in place of crockery, and this may have been the ancient receptacle. The
tambara is referred to by Father Gisbert in the following words: “When they are sick,
they perform the diuata in their ¢ambaro. That consists in a dish on top of a bamboo
which is fixed in the ground, on which they place buyo, bonga [areca], lime, and tobacco,
while they say to their god: ‘We offer thee this. Give us health.’” Bratr and Roperrson:
op. cit., vol. 48, p. 237. 1906.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 89
wayside; and still others in the Long House to receive offerings
that have been on the agongs, and to serve as centers for ritual
recitations. Tambara thus used tend to be placed singly in dif-
ferent spots, rather than in pairs. When a human victim is to be
sacrificially slain, it is customary to set up near the place of sacri-
fice a tambara, where betel may be offered and prayers repeated.
It is not unlikely that in former times these bamboo stands were
regularly placed at centers of special industries to insure the success
of the process and the protection of the spirits. I have seen in
Talun two of these bowls in their rods of bamboo standing at the
foot of the bellows of a blacksmith’s forge, with two old and
blackened brass bracelets in the bowls, while on the left-hand side
of the bellows hung a small parcel of charcoal wrapped in a bit
of petati which the blacksmith called medicine (baw?) for the forge.
Regarding the final disposition of objects placed on the tambara,
one hears statements that seem contradictory, for the same Bagobo
will at one time tell you that gifts put in the bowls for the diwata
must be left there always, while the next day he assures you that
the offerings may be taken away after one night, but must never
be sold. My own observations on Bagobo behavior wherever gifts
to the gods are concerned, correlated with information given me
by individuals, suggest the following explanation. Offerings made
on these bamboo prayer-stands are of three classes.
a) Agricultural products, particularly areca-nuts, betel-leaf and
tobacco which, once placed on the shrine, may never be removed,
but are left to dry up, to decay, or to be blown away.
b) Old objects believed to have become automatically sacred on
account of age, and hence are called ikut, — such as brass armlets,
fibre leglets, little bells, small trinkets in general that may be laid
in the bowls, and old spears and war-shields that are fastened to
the wall or stood up near the shrine. Such objects, once offered
on a tambara, belong permanently to the gods and must remain there.
It would appear that such gifts are not frequently made, for the
accumulation of them at any one tambara is small. Indeed, there are
few Bagobo wealthy enough to be able to make pious disposition of
manufactured articles that are still of material value. What I have
been told of the essence or soul (gimokud) of manufactured objects
leads me to the conclusion that when the material part has become
old and useless to the owner, the spiritual part is in no whit injured,
but may confidently be offered to the spirits for their enjoyment.
90 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
e) Articles of real value, which are habitually laid before the
unseen beings on ceremonial occasions — newly-woven textiles,
beaded garments, embroidery, fine weapons, ''° rich ornaments.
Such offerings are hung over a tambara or beside it (the smaller orna-
ments being laid in the bowls) for one night only, and on the following
morning returned to their respective owners. Thus hallowed, they
must remain in the possession of the owner during his lifetime. '!
Hanging Altars. Zigyama. In some houses there is no tam-
bara, but in place of it there is said to be a hanging structure
ralled tigyama that functions as the family shrine. This form of
shrine | have not seen. According to the description given me, it
consists of a white plate or large saucer, ealled pingan, suspended
by rattan from some point just above the line where the wall
meets the slope of the roof.'’* This altar belongs to Tigyama,
the spiritual protector of the family. When any member of the
household is sick, they put into the dish one areca-nut and one
betel-leaf, and say: “Where are you, Tigyama? I am preparing
this areca-nut for you.” Offerings placed in the dish for Tigyama
may never be taken away.
Balekdt. Another type of hanging altar in use in Bagobo house-
holds is the balekdt. This consists of one or more piles of cups
and saucers, ''* of uniform size, suspended from the timbers of the
roof by strong bands of rattan which, meeting under the lowest
dish, form a hammock-like brace for the entire set of sacred vessels.
From the structural aspect, the balekat might appear like an en-
larged and slightly modified tigyama, but functionally the balekat
occupies a unique place in the religious life of the group, for it
is not only a family shrine, but a ceremonial altar of high ritual
‘7° There seems to be involved here an animistic principle exactly opposite to that
held by the Toradja of central Celebes, who, according to Sarasin, offer to the spirits
spear-points, smith’s tools, etc., modeled from white wood, fearing that if the unseen
beings should make use of the iron implements, they would take away the soul of the
metal and render it weak and worthless.” Cf. Reisen in Celebes, vol. 1, p. 230.
‘71 Unfortunately, I failed to ascertain what disposition was made of such articles
after the death of the original owner. It would be an interesting point for investigation.
‘73 The place for the tigyama plates is said to be “under the gaso,” that is to say,
below the strips of light bamboo that run crosswise of the roof and form its lighter
framework.
‘73 Jt is probable that the dishes used in each of these types of altar are of Chinese
importation. The Chinese have been the chief traders in the islands for a very long
period, and the dishes used at shrines in the ceremonial rites of the northern islands of
the archipelago, from early times, are referable to the Chinese.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 91
significance. It is put up in honor of the all-knowing god whose
name is Tolus ka Balekat, and it is before this altar, not before
the tambara or tigyama, that the culminating act of the Ginum is
performed. At this time an accessory element is added which
heightens the ceremonial value of this altar, and temporarily extends
its capacity as a receptacle for offerings. On the last day of the
festival, a broad shelf of wood is swung from an elevated part of
the roof by rattan hangers, in a position directly in front of the
balekét. This shelf bears the name of tagudn ka_ balekdt, its
function being to hold, for a short period, the sacrificial food and
the sugar cane liquor that are offered to divine beings. This
temporary retable is so closely associated with the main altar that
it is not unusual to hear it called simply balekat, and whatever is
placed there is said to be put on the balekat itself.
In the matter of offerings, the situation is much the same as
with the tambara. One class of gifts consists of very old ornaments
and weapons that are rarely offered, but, once dedicated, can never
be taken back; the other class includes objects of intrinsic value
and newly-made articles that are hung around the balekat for one
night, particularly on ceremonial occasions, and then retained always
in the possession of those who offered them. It is said that if a
man should sell a tankulu that has hung on the balekat, “he would
be dead,’ and the case is the same with other such gifts. An
interesting problem is suggested as to whether the balekat was the
primitive shrine of the home, and was later utilized for group festivals ;
or whether we should take it to be primarily a ceremonial altar
and secondarily a family shrine.
Agong-altars, called Sonaran. At Ginum and at the harvest
festival, a temporary altar bearing the name of sonaran plays an
important part. It is formed by one large agong, or by several of
these instruments placed together on the floor, on which is piled
the rich collection of objects that are brought at the rite of Sonar,
as offerings to Mandarangan and to the anito. At this function,
the sugar cane liquor is ceremonially drunk, and an interview with
the gods through a priestess takes place. On one occasion, however,
I have seen an agong in use as the altar for the sacrificial rites
that occur on the last night of the festival. All fine textiles,
swords, knives and ornaments, which are heaped in ample quantities
on the agong-altar, are returned, at the conclusion of a ceremony,
to the individuals who brought them, to be kept always in their
92 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
possession; or, again, objects taken from the agongs may be hung
for one night upon the tambara1‘* and then returned to the owners. '°
They may never be sold, “because they have been on the agongs.”
Hut-shrines. These include dwis,!*® which I shall call “buso-
houses;” and parabunnidn, or “rice-altars.”
Buis or Buso-houses. Little huts, three or four feet in height,
of a pattern similar to Bagobo living-houses, are erected at the
opening of a Ginum festival on the grounds in the immediate
vicinity of the Long House. They are often placed in natural or
artificial thickets, at points that command the approaches from the
river and at turns of the paths leading to mountains trails — ob-
viously strategic positions with reference to unseen foes. ‘The buis
has a roof, and a floor that is raised on little posts; there may be
three walls, but the front is always left open. On the floor, or on
the ground below, the Bagobo put areca-nuts and betel-leaf for the
Tigbanua and for the rest of the buso, and, on a particular even-
ing, formal rites are paid to these eyil beings, with the distinet
intention of preventing them from breaking into the festival house
and thus vitiating the good effects of the ceremony.
I am told that some Bagobo families keep little houses of this
type standing continually near their homes and that they call them
by the same name — buis — but I have seen them only at Ginum.
Parabunnidn or Rice-sowing Altars. A hut-shrine is set up in
one corner of a field on the occasion of the annual rice-sowing, for
the purpose of securing a good crop through the favor of Tarabume,
17* Possibly the intention is to give the spirits a more prolonged period of enjoyment
of the offerings; and there may be also a feeling that the object becomes doubly hallowed
by its association with the two altars. Most of the objects, however, are returned
directly from the agongs to the owners.
+76 Tt is elsewhere noted that gifts dropped into the agong containing water are not
returned, but become the property of the priestess who utters an oracle at the ceremony
before an agong-altar. Cf. pp. 127—128.
17®Tn its broadest sense, the term duis includes all these little ceremonial huts in
which offerings for unseen beings are placed; the house structure of the parabunnian
being sometimes called duis in distinguishing this element from the magic plants, the
wickets, the bowls, etc. But it is busc-houses that are regularly designated as buis,
and it is in this stricter sense that I am here employing the term. For an account of
the devotional offices performed before the buis, see p. 108. Hut-shrines of a similar
type seem to have been in use among the early Filipino. Chirino writes that the Visayan
had, as shrines, little houses with only roof and ground floor at the entrance to their
villages. Buarrk and RopEeRtson: op. cit., vol. 12, p. 268. 1904.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 93
the god of growing rice. The parabunniin' is about the size
of the buis, or smaller, and often without any floor, !** the offerings
of betel and brass ornaments being then laid on the ground or in
a little bowl. Magie plants or branches are stuck in the earth
close to the house, each of which has an influence upon the growth
of rice plants. Every rice-field has its own parabunnian. The
areca-nuts, the betel-leaf, and the metal ornaments are left in the
bowl until harvest, after which festival the bowl and metal objects
are carried into the house and kept until the next rice-sowing,
when the same bowl and the same ornaments are taken out to a
new parabunnian. At harvest, there is put into a-hut-shrine known
as voro a small portion of rice representing the first fruits, together
with areca-nuts and betel-leaf, as a thank-offering to the diwata
and to certain clusters of stars; but I am not able to state definitely,
from observation, whether this is a shrine distinct from the parabun-
nian, or whether there are two functional names for the same
little house.
In addition to the devotions at the above-mentioned altars of
fixed types, it is customary to make temporary shrines on the
eround — close to the wayside, or under some great tree — by
merely laying down areca-nuts in leaf-dishes which are arranged
in a somewhat definite order. Such gifts are meant for gods, or
for buso, or for the spirits of the dead, and are offered with a
simple intention of preventing disease or of curing it; the unseen
being for whom the gift is designed being invariably stated by the
person who lays down the offering.
CEREMONIES IN DETAIL
Festival of Drinking called Ginum
Introductory Remarks. The word ginum (inum) means ‘a
drinking,” but whether the primary association was with the drinking
by the gods of the blood of the sacrifice, or the drinking by the
people of the ceremonial sugar cane liquor, is not evident. Both
elements now stand out clearly in consciousness. The sacrifice of
a slave, a fact at present concealed in deference to the attitude of
*77 The root, diimni, means “to plant.”
*7% Some Bagobo use the Bila-an type of rice-altar, which has a floor.
94 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
the new government, has been one of the essential rites of the fes-
tival from remote times.
It is for the satisfaction of three of four deities, and not, as is
commonly reported, for Mandarangan alone that a human victim
is offered at Ginum. The worshipful meetings called imanganito
bring out the fact that the Bagobo consider both the god known
as Tolus ka Balekat and the Malaki t’Olu k’Waig to be interested
in the sacrifice of a man at this time. This point is mentioned
in anticipation of the description of human sacrifices, because such
an offering is the central act of Ginum, which gives color to
the minor rites. In one sense, the ceremonies of the first three
days may be regarded as leading up to the fourth day and as
protective of those final ceremonies, since one of the salient objects
of the preliminary rites is the warning off of demons from the
Long House, lest they disturb the celebration on the last day.
From another standpoint, however, it may be noted that a rite like
Pamalugu (lavation) is a unit in itself, and so is the agong cere-
monial. These rites are performed with motives distinct from those
which permeate the peculiarly sacrificial acts of the main day. One
hears the ceremonial discussed from different points of view by
different Bagobo. It is stated by one that the Ginum is celebrated
for the Tolus ka Balekat. This is true, particularly, of the central
rites of the fourth day, where the fundamental idea is that of
the bloody and the bloodless sacrifice. When Datu Oleng, however,
viewed the ceremonies of the entire four days as a unit, he said:
“We now have a festival because we make offerings (tawer) '™
to the gods; this year we make the Ginum to be kept from
sickness and from other bad things.”
Definite values are associated with the religious acts of Ginum:
the gods are honored; the demons are appeased; diseases are cured;
threatened sickness is averted; prosperity and increase of wealth
are assured to the family giving the festival, and to all participants
who share in the rites and who make gifts to the gods in the pre-
scribed manner. !*°
The time for the ceremony of Ginum is variable. Datu Imbal
told me that it was often given soon after the sprouting of the
‘79 Tawer is a Malay word signifying, “to offer the price,’ “to make a bargain.”
18° Jn Minahassa, sacrificial feasts are held to ward off sickness, and to prevent failure
of crops, as well as to secure abundant harvests, long life, courage and other good things.
Cf. P. and F. Sarasm: Reisen in Celebes, vol. 1, p. 44. 1905.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 95
rice, though his own, in 1907, was held three days before the
expected sprouting. I myself attended one Ginum in May (Imbal’s
Ginum), another in August, and I knew of another, at Bansalan,
that was given in September. As a matter of fact, any one of the
following times is permissible for the celebration: in January, '*!
about the time of the clearing of the fields, or soon after; one month
after the sowing; a few days before the sprouting; soon after the
sprouting, or when the rice plants have grown to some height.
The above dates indicate a range of months from January to
September, inclusive, and possibly even through October, when this
festival may properly be held. The rice is ordinarily sown in the
months April, May and June, and harvested in November or
December according to the date of planting. The Ginum must be
held during the bright fortnight of the moon, preferably when
she is new in the west, or full in the east, or at the close of her
first quarter.
While any man of wealth who is able to give the ceremonial
and to provide entertainment for the guests is at liberty to do so,
yet the Ginum is most often conducted in the home village of a
head datu who presides over a group of rancherias. A Ginum
would not occur in the same village oftener than once a year, or
biennially; but at one or another place in the Bagobo territory
there is likely to be a Ginum every few months. If the chieftain
has a large house, '*? the festival would probably be given there;
but on this point I have not definite information. This was the
ancient Filipino usage. The regular Bagobo custom is to build a
181 Y was told that the Ginum was often held in January, and this answers, exactly,
to the time mentioned by Datu Tonkaling to Mr. Cole — “when there is plenty of
rice in the granaries.” Op. cit., p. 111. For the ceremonial at the season of clearing
the fields, see account by the same writer, pp. 85—86. See also Miacuri pe Loarca:
“Relacion de las Yslas Filipinas.” Buarr and ROBERTSON: op. cié., vol. 5, p. 165. 1903.
This author so characterizes a Visayan ceremonial that it appears to correspond to that
of the Bagobo at clearing time. The Visayans, he says, “set apart seven days when
they begin to till their flelds, at which time they neither grind any rice for their food,
nor do they allow any stranger, during all that time, to enter their villages, for they
say that that is the time when they pray to their gods to grant them an abundant
harvest.” When the Ginum is held in January, the clearing rites would apparently
precede it by a brief interval.
+82 Wor the great four days of the Tagal festival, they used the large house of their
chief, dividing it into three compartments; and during those four days the house was
called a simbahan (temple). Cf. JuaN De Piasencia, O.H.F.: “Customs of the Tagalogs,
1589.” Braiz and Ropertson: op. cit., vol. 7, pp. 185—186. 1903.
96 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
special house, called dakul balé (big house), which is long in
proportion to its width. It is also called “house with a good roof,”
as special care is taken to make the roof tight and secure. The
whole house is strongly built, having walls of balekayo firmly bound
with rattan, and a double floor of split bamboo. The roof is
closely thatched with meadow-grass or with nipa. No private house
is built with like care, and it would be in harmony with the
character of the rites to assume that the festival house is made
secure primarily to keep out those evil beings whose presence at
the ceremonial is feared. The ceremonial house, which I shall call
the Long House, is placed at the edge of the village, near the
opening of the trail leading down the mountain. At the time of the
great festival, the Long House serves also as a guest house, for the
entertainment of a great number of visitors, '*®
The Ginum here described was given by Datu Oleng, the distin-
guished chief of the native district of Talun, at his home village
called Mati, situated on the summit of Mount Merar. Oleng died
at an advanced age, several months after this (his last) Ginum.
Chronology of the Preparation, and of the Four Main Days
of the Festival. On account of ill health, and the added infirmities
of old age, Datu Oleng had retired from the exercise of the ac-
tive duties of chieftainship, and his eldest son, Ido, was holding
the position of executive datu. Temperamentally, he was not as
well fitted as his father to plan and to organize large affairs, and
somehow he failed to lay in the necessary supplies in time for
the festival. This was one reason for the long delays that occurred
during the preparation, and even after the formal opening. Possi-
bly, too, there may haye been another cause. Some weeks before
this Ginum, I heard that the boy had been picked out for the
sacrifice. Whether or not he was offered up at that time, I do
not know. My arrival might easily have upset the original plan,
to the extent of requiring secrecy in making the sacrifice, with
183 Tn central Celebes, the ceremonial house, called Zoo, has a variety of functions,
as enumerated by the Sarasins. “Diese Lobo’s dienen verschiedenen Zwecken zugleich.
Hinmal sind sie der angenommene Wohnsitz der Dorfschutzgeister, Anitu, und in dieser
Kigenschaft konnen sie als Tempel oder Geisterhaiuser bezeichnet werden; dann aber
werden in ihnen alle wichtigen Beratungen, Versammlungen und Iestlichkeiten der Dorf-
bewohner abgehalten, sie dienen auch als Ratshiuser; drittens finden darin Passanten eine
Unterkunft und einen Herd zum Abkochen, und damit erfiillt der Lobo auch den Dienst
einer Herberge.” P. and I’, Sarasin: op. cté., vol. 1, pp. 216—217. 1905.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 97
the necessary change of time, place, and so forth. Such change
would have entailed the long conferences and discussions always
required among Malay people when anything out of the ordinary
occurs; or, if the human victim were not slain, a number of inter-
views with the gods must have taken place, to persuade them to
accept the substitution of a cock. The utterances of the medium
at the seances that I attended showed that an undercurrent of
intense anxiety was accompanying the strong efforts then being made
by the Bagobo to please the new American Government, and at
the same time properly to pacify the ancient gods. The entire
well-being of the group hung upon the punctilious performance of
every rite of the Ginum, and particularly in the matter of the
sacrifice. On the other hand, there would be the utmost danger if
the sacrifice were discovered by us foreigners, with our inability to
realize the traditional necessity for the rite. In December of the
same year, when a human sacrifice was certainly offered in Talun,
at which time the event was betrayed by some native anxious to
put himself in good standing with the local authorities, the excite-
ment and the strict governmental investigation that followed fully
justified the earlier fears apparent in the Talun group. The Bagobo
were at this time meeting a severe crisis in their tribal history.
Thus Ido’s failure to secure cocoanuts and fish may not haye
operated as the sole cause for the delays and the apparent tendency
toward procrastination in getting ready for the Ginum. The last
change of date for the main ceremony, that is, from the 18th to
the 19th of August, was due to religious scruples attendant upon
the occurrence of an earthquake shock on the third day of the
rites.
So, for one and another reason, it came about that the Ginum
which was formally opened on the evening of August 14th, and
normally would have closed after sunrise on the 18th, was pro-
longed until after the sunrise of the 20th, Yet the relative sequence
of the rites was exactly preserved. There was simply an inter-
polation of one day, and a part of another, on which there were
no ceremonies — the first interpolation being that of the twenty-
four hours following the evening of the 15th; the second, of a
period from sunset on the 17th until the afternoon of the 18th,
These remarks are made in this introductory section in order to
make clear the chronology which immediately follows.
At Talun, there were four days set apart for the Ginum cere-
7
98 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
monies, and each was characterized by definite ritual performances.
It may possibly be that some rites are interchangeable as to days,
on different years. As to that, I heard no statement; but Oleng
listed the following acts as belonging to the first three days.
On the First Day, the men and women go out for abaca leaves
and for areca-nuts. The First Night, called Tig-kanayan (the be-
ginning), is the regular opening of the Ginum, when a very little
balabba (sugar cane wine) is drunk, when t’agong-go (beating of
agongs) and sumayo (dancing) begin, and when the leaf-dishes are
made.
On the Second Day, the men bring back areca-nuts, and the
bamboo is cut for the sekkadu (water-flasks). The Second Night
is called tu Dua Dukilum; at this time the preliminary Awas
is performed, and there is t’agong-go and sumayo (agong-beating
and dancing). On this night, no balabba is drunk; no gindaya is
sung.
On the Third Day, no man may work. ‘The people wash in the
river at the Pamalugu rite; the main Awas is said, and the Tanung
branches are put “in the way,” to keep the buso that makes men
fight from coming to the Ginum.
With this preliminary explanation, I will now give the main
events on the actual dates as they took place, from the day of
my arrival at Talun until the close of the Ginum.
July 25. The date first set for Ginum; the moon is full, but
supplies are not laid in.
July 26. Ido intends to start for the coast to get dried fish,
cocoanuts and other supplies, but is detained on one and
another pretext, and finally puts off the expedition until to-
morrow.
July 27. Ido saddles his horse, and with several men sets off
late in the forenoon, but on the way down the mountain trail
an accident of unlucky portent checks advance. Abok, Ido’s
little son, happens to give a hard knock to a chicken belonging
to a Bagobo at whose house the party are stopping for refresh-
ment, and the fowl dies as a result of the blow. Following
the indication furnished by this ill omen, the entire expe-
dition returns home.
July 28. Ido and his men make a fresh start, with a promise
that they will be back three days hence.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 99
July 29 et seg. The women are finishing the weaving of choice
textiles, some of which are to be ceremonially displayed at
the Ginum, and others are to be made into skirts, trousers
and jackets that will be worn at the dance on the last night.
August 1. Men are completing work on the Long House; they
are closing in great open spaces in the walls to the east and
to the west, by binding together sections of balekayo (a light
bamboo) with rattan, and tying them to the house timbers.
They work always in the direction prescribed for the Bagobo,
that is, from north to south, when adding section to section.
Datu Oleng, anxious for Ido’s return, goes down the trail, with
several other men, in the hope of meeting him.
August 2. Oleng and his party return, after a futile wait at
Bungoyan’s house, half-way down the trail.
August 3. The moon is in her last quarter, and hence the festival
must now be deferred until the new moon, or even, perhaps,
until the close of the first quarter, when the moon will be
“big-horned.” The girls finish their textiles and remove them
from the looms.
In the evening, a supply of powdered lime called apog, for
chewing with betel, is prepared. A fire is kindled under Ido’s
house; certain kinds of small shells are calcined and the hot
shell ashes dropped into a little water.
August 4. Ido returns with supplies; he had stayed at the coast
in order to be present at the great fiesta given by the Visayan
presidente, in memory of his wife, on the first anniversary of
her death. Old Miyanda, Oleng’s sister, is making fresh elay
pots for the Ginum. The textiles are put through a process
of softening and polishing. They are then laid in clay pots
to remain for thirty-six hours.
August 5—6. The work of molding the pottery continues. Un-
der the direction of Miyanda, the textiles are washed by young
girls, and hung up to dry.
August 6. At night, the God of the Bamboo (Tolus ka Kawayan)
and the God of the Altar (Tolus ka Balekat) speak at an anito
seance, and urge the speedy celebration of Ginum. They
threaten a visitation of sickness if there be further delay.
Oleng assures the gods that the Ginum shall be held when
the moon is in the west. The Tolus ka Kawayan blames Oleng
for not bringing a human sacrifice.
100 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
August 7. Guests are beginning to arrive for the festival in the
hope that it will be held at new moon; but there is not suff-
cient dried fish, and other provisions are lacking.
August 7 ef seg. ‘Textiles are polished with a shell.
August 8. The guests from Digas go home, saying that they will
return in five nights. The Ginum is put off until the moon
reaches her half. At night there is an interview with anito.
Embroidery of festival garments is going on, and this work
continues until the very last day.
August 9. At an anito interview, the Malaki t’Olu k’ Waig speaks,
saying that the women are to pound rice continuously until
the Ginum. Maying, Oleng’s daughter, gently awakens the
other women, and they pound rice all night long.
August 10. The sound of the pestle in the big mortar never
ceases all day, and we hear it all through the night.
August 11. The women finish pounding the rice. In an interview
with the anito, Oleng is told that he has the korokung '**
sickness, brought by the old woman at the mouth of the river.
Oleng begs the anito to carry his sickness to the Malaki t’?Olu
k’Waig, who will strangle the sickness.
August 12. Biau nuts" for festival torches are strung on long
sections of nap-nap (a fine rattan). A shelf, called tagudn ka
sekkadi, for the water-flasks, is put up on the porch. The
roof of the Long House is being finished by the young men,
who bring great bundles of meadow-grass, five or six feet in
length. With much laughter and merriment, they toss the
bundles to other men on the roof, who, in turn, lay them
crosswise on the timbers, and make the thatch secure with long
strips of laya'’® wood, which they place on the grass-bundles
and bind down with rattan. Guests continue to arrive.
August 13. Malik, son-in-law to Oleng, makes a capacious bed of
split bamboo for the use of guests. It is like a wide shelf
fastened to the east wall, at a height of three and three-fourths
feet from the floor.
*8* Karokung is an illness characterized by cough, chills and fever.
185 A small round nut, rich in oil. Bid/ nuts are reserved for ceremonial illumination,
. . . . ‘ .
the house on ordinary occasions being lighted by the /un?, a torch of resin, wrapped
in leaves.
+86 A variety of bamboo.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 101
The women bring in quantities of green corn, which they
earry in burden baskets on their backs.
August 14. First day of the Ginum. Men and women go out with
burden baskets for hemp leaves, to make leaf-dishes. Ido starts for
the house of Kaba, a long distance down the trail, whither he
has to go for more cocoanuts. Loda goes to the same place for
areca-nuts. ‘The girls cut one another’s hair in the style called
kalampa; that is, a fringe of bangs cut into a number of sharp
points, and stuck with vegetable glue to forehead and cheeks.
First night, called Tig-kanayan (The Beginning). The Gin-
daya, or ceremonial chant, is formally opened by three young
men: Ayang (a nephew of Oleng’s), Bagyu the leper (Ayang’s
brother), and Saman (a step-son of Oleng’s). The beating
of agongs and the dancing begin. The sugar cane liquor
is brought in, but on this opening night only a small amount
is served. Everybody may taste it, but we are permitted
to drink only sparingly. We make leaf-dishes, called kinadok,
in large numbers, for in them the food is to be served
on the last might. The young men sharpen slender sticks
of nap-nap, and with these the girls pin up the dishes. They
heat slightly over flame or coals each leaf-section, deftly curl
the two corners of an end, one over the other, turn up the
same edge, and run it through with the pointed thong of nap-
nap — a process called tawduk ka dain (preparing the leaves).
T’agong-go and dancing continue through the night, until near
dawn. Datu Oleng says that there shall be no sleep for four
nights,
August 15. Second day. About three hours after sunrise, nine
young men go out to hew down young bamboos, and on
returning they cut seventy internodal joints for the sek-
kadi, or water-flasks, that are to be filled on the last great
day. Clusters of areca-nuts are brought in for the ceremonial
offices, and for the guests to chew. Miyanda fires the pots.
A frame of laya wood is put up; from this the agongs are to
be suspended, and on it the textiles and the tankulu are to
be displayed. It consists of five smooth white rods, two of which
run lengthwise of the house, and three transversely; they are
tied to the large upright timbers, about six feet from the
floor. Competitive racing of horses by young men takes place
— possibly a mere diversion.
102 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Second night, called Ta Dua Dukilum. The preliminary
Awas is performed: areca-nuts are placed by the wayside, with
ritual words, the ceremony being conducted by old women,
who make the leaf-dishes and repeat the religious formule:
The first Tanung is performed, a ceremony at which branches
of magic virtue are planted in two places by the path, in
order to frustrate the evil plans of Buso. No drinking of
balabba is permitted on the second night, and hence no chant-
ing of gindaya, for gindaya is chanted only on the nights
when the sugar cane wine is drunk. The beating of agongs
and the dancing that were scheduled for this night are omitted,
for it becomes evident that Ido will not bring back the cocoa-
nuts in time for the banquet that was to be on the 17th,
Therefore, since the celebration of the Fourth Day cannot take
place on the 17th, the celebration of the Second Night is
stopped, while the tagong-go and sumayo that belong to this
evening are put off until twenty-four hours later. Oleng says
that we may sleep to-night.
August 16. The order of the celebration is now interrupted on
account of the lack of cocoanuts. Many guests have left Mati,
and, weary of the delay, haye gone to their homes. Malik is
putting up the dega-dega, a high ceremonial seat fastened to
the west wall, where Oleng is to sit while observing the cere-
monies that are to take place in the Long House. The young
men are cutting off brushwood and clearing a path through
the jungle, so that guests may find an entrance. In the after-
noon, Ido returns with the cocoanuts. The celebration is taken
up at the point where it was left off last night. All the
evening there is agong music and dancing. At night occurs
a brief interview with the anito.
August 17. Third day. Oleng says that on this day nobody may
work. The events of the morning occur in the following order:
Pamalugu, or lavations in the river; Lulub, or washing the
new water-flasks; Sonar, or ceremonies at an agong-altar, of
which the distinetive acts are the offering of clothing, weapons
and ornaments to the gods, the medicinal washing of faces,
an interview with the anito, ritual recitations, the ceremonial
with balabba. Two new tambara (bamboo prayer-stands) are
put up in the usual manner, and many articles taken from
the agongs are hung beside the tambara for one night. Masses
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 103
of fragrant green kummi are brought in by young girls; this
is to be worn at the waists of the women on the fourth night.
Beating of agongs and dancing take place at intervals throughout
the day. Two large wooden figures of men are carved, and
the magic branches called tanung are cut and brought in for
the evening ceremony. Little human figures (tingoto) are
shaped, and leaf-dishes made, for the Awas. The ceremonies
distinctive of this Third Day proceed in order until near sunset,
when a halt is called because of the earthquake. The cere-
monies of Awas and Tanung therefore are put off until to-
morrow. At night, the anito are consulted about the earthquake.
August 18, No ceremonies may now be performed until twenty-
four hours shall have elapsed after the earthquake. Young girls
boil the green ktmmi, a process which draws out the sweet
fragrance of the plant, and then they hang bunches of it from
the rafters, and stick sprays in their girdles and in their skirts.
More areca-nuts are brought in for the Awas.
Third night. The second Awas is celebrated late in’ the
afternoon. At sunset, the main Tanung is performed, at which
rite the wooden figures are stationed by the path and the
magic branches are set out, to frighten off the demons who
may try to bring sickness to the bodies, or anger to the hearts,
of those present at the feast. The preliminary Awas is repeated,
only because the areca-nuts and the betel-leaf that were placed
by the wayside on the second night have withered during the
delay. T’agong-go and sumayo proceed.
August 19. Fourth and main day. Agongs sound at dawn. The
balanan, or large vessels of laya bamboo in which sugar cane
wine is to be poured are made. Men cut mouths in the
seventy water-flasks, and women take them to the river to fill
with water. The ceremonial bamboo poles (kawayan) are
cut, brought into the Long House, decorated and set up. The
war-cry is raised. Agongs are beaten without dancing. Spears
are attached upright to the two poles of bamboo. <A display
of textiles on the laya and the balekayo frames is made. The
sugar cane liquor is brought in. A cock is shot as a sacri-
ficial victim. The shelf of the hanging altar (taguan ka
balekdt) is put up. The sacred food — chicken, red rice
and cocoanut — is prepared, and cooked in bamboo vessels.
Fourth and last night. Torches of bid nuts are lighted
104 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
and the war-cry is raised. Sacrificial offices over the chicken
and omok, rites over two bowls of balabba, and rites with
betel are performed at the altar called balekdt. Betel is ceremo-
nially chewed. The sacred food is deposited in two bamboo
vessels, called garong, and elevated to the shelf of the balekat.
A supplementary Awas is performed by the old women. Chanting
of Gindaya is resumed. Festival dances are performed, accom-
panied by the beating of agongs. There ensues a general drink-
ing of balabba by the entire company. Three successive periods
of chanting gindaya, of dancing, and of gindaya proceed. The
feast is served and eaten. There follows a recitation of exploits
by the old men as they grasp the bamboos. Men and adoles-
cent boys eat the sacred food at the altar. Drinking of sugar
cane liquor and informal speeches take place. Gindaya is sung
through the night and until one hour after sunrise.
Ceremony of Awas, or offerings of areca-nuts to spirits.
Among the many ritual acts which have been listed in chronological
order, are several important ceremonies that have their place on
the second and third nights, and on the third day of the Ginum:
the Awas, the Tanung, the Pamalugu, the Sonor. A somewhat
detailed account of these several functions will now be given, and
this will be followed by a narrative of the events on the fourth
and main day of the festival.
The word awas means, “something given to a god,” ‘a gift to
a spirit,” and there are two or three ceremonies that take their
name from the idea of the gift itself. The first or preliminary
Awas, called k’arag k’avas, is performed on the second night, and
consists in the offering of betel to certain gods, to the buso, and
to dead gimokud. This ceremony seems like a private one, for
few attend it besides the old women who conduct the rite, and
the chief datu, who assists toward the end.
The second or main Awas occurs on the afternoon of the third
day, in the Long House, in the presence of many people. This
second Awas is essentially one of substitution, in which little images
are laid down to receive and to hold the diseases of the Bagobo.
The religious formule are said by the datu. Both the first and
the second Awas are characterized by the use of yery small leaf-
dishes, which have the name of kinudok and, as aforesaid, bear
some resemblance to little boats.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 105
Finally, there is a short awas performed over a great number
of extremely small leaf-dishes, with an intention not materially
differing from that of the two preceding Awas. This last I shall call
simply a supplementary awas. It forms an element of the ritual
on the last night of Ginum.
Preliminary Awas. The preliminary Awas, though attended by
few, is an extremely important ceremony, at which the offerings
of areca-nuts and the accompanying devotions are directed toward
the following spirits: Pamulak Manobo (creator of the world), the
various buso, and the gimokud or ghosts, both those that have been
long dead and those recently departed from this earth.
“We celebrate the Awas,” old Datu Oleng said to me as we
conversed about the Ginum, “because the earth and the sky could
not have been made by man. Pamulak Manobo made the world,
and made all the different kinds of men: Bagobo, American, Bila-an,
Moro, Ubii (Ata), Kulaman; and he made all the trees and all
things that grow on the earth; this is why we prepare areca-nut —
because we pray to Pamulak Manobo. As for all the Tigbanua Kayo
and all the dead buso, we place areca-nut for them to keep us
from being sick.”
An element of pure worship may be recognized here, as of making
an act of thanksgiving to Pamulak Manobo for the creation of the
earth and of the things that grow on it. From this aspect, the
Awas stands out rather distinctly from other Malay rites, the
greater number of which are permeated by suggestions of bargaining
with deity.
Several of the old women had charge of the first Awas; they
made the preparation and performed the ceremony, assisted at one
point only by Datu Oleng. The women were Miyanda, sister to
Oleng and the leading woman of the group; Singan and Ikde,
Oleng’s wives, and Suge, a priest doctor. The only one of the
younger women taking part in the rite was Sigo, the eldest of
those of Oleng’s daughters who were still virgin. This girl,
during the devotions at the shrines, stood near to the old women
while she held a branch full of thick-clustering areca-nuts, which,
one by one, she plucked off and handed to the old women, or
laid in a little pile ready for their use.
Shortly before sunset on the second night of Ginum, the women
began to place areca-nuts in a number of small dishes — twenty-
three in all — which they had made from hemp leaves during
106 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
that day. These leaf-dishes, or kinadok, were of the same form
as those which had been made for the feast, but were only about
one-fourth as large as the banquet dishes, for they measured not
over five by ten inches, some being only three inches in width and
nine in length. Like the larger kinudok, these ceremonial dishes
were made by curving a section of hemp-leaf so that the corners
of one end over-lapped, and the opposite end opened out flat. The
cornucopia-shaped tip thus formed was then folded over on itself
and fastened to the body of the leaf by a small stick of sharpened
rattan. In these smaller vessels, the suggestion of little boats was
somewhat more apparent than in the larger ones, though, as stated
in a preceding paragraph, we have at present no evidence to prove
that this boat-shape was produced intentionally.
In all but one or two of the leaf-dishes, the old women laid
hetel-leaves — one very small leaf in each dish — and upon the
leaves they laid whole areca-nuts, ranging in number from one to
nine. In one kinudok there was a single areca-nut; two dishes
had two nuts apiece; one held three, while the remaining nineteen
dishes each contained from four to nine nuts. One of the women
tore into fragments some of the betel-leayes that were left over, and
after wrapping these fragments in small pieces of hemp-leaf, she
tied them into a few tiny packages. The remaining hemp-leaves
were gathered up by Singan, tied together in a bundle and left on the
wide shelf (tagudn ka sekkadi) where the seventy water-buckets stood.
When all was ready, the women picked up ten of the leaf-
dishes, leaving thirteen on the stoop just outside the door, and then
our little procession started from the house, to lay the offerings at
four different shrines by the wayside. There were but seven of us:
the four old women, the girl Sigo, Islao and myself. We turned
east from the Long House, and went a short distance down the
narrow path that led southeastward to the river. At a spot where
great trees overhung the path, not more than three or four minutes’
walk from the door-step, the women halted and sat down on their
feet in the posture common to them. Crouching there on the ground,
they set down beside them their ten kinudok, and uttered low-
voiced prayers. The faint sunset glow had blended with the soft
light of a moon almost at half when they placed their offerings of
areca-nuts and of buyo-leaf, just as their ancestors through long
centuries had offered areca and buyo by moonlight on those mountain
peaks.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTIT 107
Miyanda first. laid several of the leaf-dishes on the left-hand side
of the. path; then, facing north, she summoned the god who lives
at the source of all the streams.
“Malaki t’Olu k’Waig, I call you now, and ask you to speak to
the Tigbanua Balagan (Buso of the Rattan) and the Tigbanua Kayo
(Buso of the Wood), so that they will not hurt us. Give them
these leaf-dishes with the betel, for themselves, because we want
no sickness to come to us while we make the Ginum; and that
fearful sickness that is traveling round the world — do not send
it here where the Ginum is. If the sickness comes here, do not
let it go from this awas to where we live; but make it stay shut
up in these kinudok, until you, Malaki tOlu k’Waig, come to kill
it. When all the Diseases that go round the world and the old
bad Buso want to come to our house, make them stop here in the
hemp leaves. Malaki tOlu k’Waig, you must keep us from getting
sick.”
Then Singan, designating certain of the leaf-dishes, said: “Here,
Tigbanua Balagan, these are for you;” and Suge, pointing to other
of the leaf-dishes, added: “Here, Tigbanua Kayo, these are for you;
now do not come to our Ginum.” !*'
Then, turning to face the east, they placed on the ground the
remaining number of the ten leaf-dishes on the right-hand side of
the way, and addressed their petitions to the spirits of the dead,
in order to induce them to remain in Gimokudan and not to trouble
the living at the festival.
“All of you, Gimokud, we give you these areca-nuts and these
betel-leaves; we ask you not to think at all about our Ginum.
Old Gimokud and new Gimokud,'** these nine areca-nuts are for
you, one and all. We pray to you, too, all the Tagamaling and
all the Tagaruso, and we offer betel to all of you while we beg
you to keep away from this our Ginum.”
‘27 The same mental attitude, at the moment of laying down an offering, comes out
very nicely in the following prayer of a Toradja, recorded by the missionary Kruijt, in
Central Celebes: — “O Gotter, die ihr auf dem Takalekadjo wohnt, ich kenne eure Anzahl
nicht, aber hier ist ein Sirihpriemchen (quid of betel) und ein Stuck Fuja, die ich euch
gebe; denn ihr seid gross, und wir sind geringe Leute. Wir reisen dort driiben hin;
macht unseren Weg gerade, gebt uns Sonnenschein, denn hier ist ein Sirihpriemchen, das
ich euch gebe, und meine Nachkommen werden euch das auch geben.” P. and F. Sarastn
op. cit., vol. 1, p. 235. 1905.
182 Spirits of persons that have been long dead, and spirits of those recently deceased.
108 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
The funetion at this first place of prayer now complete, we
returned to the house; and while Singan and Ikde waited on the
little porch the rest of us walked under the house, from front to
back, and on down a very narrow footpath that ran for a few
feet to the southeast, ending at a little thicket. Here, almost
hidden in a natural growth of luago shrubbery, stood a buso-house
(buis), and here we halted. Miyanda had brought from the house
two more of the leaf-dishes, and one of them, which contained four
areca-nuts, she set on the ground under the shrine, for the Buso
of the Ground, with these words: “This kintdok is for you, Tig-
banua Tana.” Then, placing the other leaf-vessel which held eight
areca-nuts on the floor of the little house, she said: “To you, Tig-
banua ka Buis,'8* I give these areca-nuts, and I ask you to keep
us in good health all of the time.”
Having returned to the porch by the same way we had followed
on leaving, we stopped a moment for Miyanda to pick up two
more of the leaf-dishes. Then, while the other women waited
there at the house door, Miyanda, followed by myself, took her
way to another buso-house that had been set up north of the Long
House, at a distance from it of about twenty feet. Around the
shrine had been placed thick-leaved branches of luago, kalimping
and terinagum, all of which were set rather deep in the earth,
so that they stood erect like a natural growth of bushes close
to the little temple. On the ground below the shrine, Miyanda
laid a leaf-vessel containing one areca-nut and one betel-leaf, and
on the floor of the little house she put the other leaf-vessel, that
had in it one betel-leaf and eight areca-nuts. At the same time,
she said to the Tigbanud of this buis a few words to the same
effect as those uttered at the preceding devotions.
Thereupon, the other three old women — Singan, Ikde and Suge
came down the short ladder from the stoop, and brought with
them the nine leaf-dishes that remained of the original twenty-three.
They followed Miyanda and myself along a path that opened north-
west from the last-mentioned hut-shrine, and led toward the houses
of the two datu, Oleng and Ido. When we had reached a point
about 108 feet !° distant from the Long House, the women squatted
down as before, and placed the nine leaf-dishes in order on the
'®® Buso of the Shrine.
19° 65 paces of 20 inches each.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 109
, LR
LEONE BB
Z Z
SOE
Fic. 1. — Leaf dishes used in the rite of preliminary Awas
Showing arrangement in order on the ground at the last station. The areca-nuts in dish
No. 6 cannot be seen, as they are hidden by the curved margins of dish No.7 upon
which dish No. 6 lies. Drawn by Irwin Christman from a field sketch by the author.
110 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
right-hand side of the way. At that moment, Datu Oleng, who
had just finished setting out the magic tanung belonging to another
rite, overtook us and himself repeated the formula over the last
nine kintdok, thus concluding the Awas. He stood erect just back
of the women and said:
“You, Tagaruso, and all you Tagamaling, and the Tagasoro that
makes men dizzy, I bring this betel offering for you all; you must
not keep coming to our house, because I am giving you areca-nuts
to stop that. And now, Pamulak Manobo, we ask you to protect
us from all the bad buso, when you see them coming to us. To
you, Malaki t'Olu k’Waig, we offer prayer because you are the
head of all the anito and must know all things.”
The kindly spirit that these conservative old people showed in
permitting a women of another race, a new acquaintance, to take
part in this private ceremony, was emphasized by many a little
token of friendliness. They would take my hand as I knelt beside
them, and ask me if it were not all “very good;” and once Ikde
put her arms around me and asked if people performed rites like
this in America, and what would I do when I had learned all the
Bagobo ceremonies and other customs.
After the final prayer we returned to the house, the old women
in advance, filing along in the moonlight, followed by Oleng and
myself. No further ceremonies occured that evening.
Three days later, the preliminary Awas was repeated as a brief
minor ceremony, fresh leaf-dishes being then laid down, simply
because the first had become dry, and the areca-nuts had withered
during the delay resulting from Ido’s absence and from the ominous
earthquake. I did not see this repeated ceremony, as at the same
time the rite of Tanung was going on, but the words said by
Miyanda over the leaf-dishes were reported to me as follows:
“You, Tigbanua to the North, and Tigbanuda of the Rattan, and
Tigbanua of the Wood, and 'Tigbanua of the Ground, I have pre-
pared areca-nuts for you all, while praying you not to let us be
hurt, for we want to have good health all of the time.”
Presumably this preliminary Awas was repeated at the first station
only, by the path leading to the river. Here I afterward found
fourteen leaf-dishes, and their disposition was explained to me as
follows. Eight had been consigned to the buso, through the Malaki
Olu k’Waig as intermediary, and six were for the gimokud (ghosts).
Of the eight kinudok offered to the buso, two contained four areca-
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 111
nuts each; one dish held five nuts; two dishes, six each; two had
each nine nuts, and one dish contained fifteen nuts. Four of the
leaf-dishes belonging to the gimokud held, respectively, one, two,
seven and eight nuts, and the other two kintidok had four nuts each.
Main Awas. On the afternoon following the Pamalugu in the
river, preparations were being made for the second Awas, as well
as for the setting out of the Tanung branches, both of which
ceremonies were scheduled for the sunset hour. Kaba had already
whittled out two rough figures of wood, to be used in the Tanung,
and Ido was chiding the women because they had failed to make
the leaf-dishes for the Awas. Then Miyanda and Singan hastily
pinned together some pieces of hemp-leaf, — enough to make nine
ceremonial vessels, — and were just stacking them into a_ pile
when Datu Oleng arrived in haste at the Long House. He appeared
to be under strong emotional stress, and instantly called, in an
agitated voice, for Ido and then for Singan. Immediately after-
wards came Datu Yting, bringing the startling news of an earth-
quake shock that had occurred shortly before. It must have been
a very slight shock, for none of us at the Long House had felt
the tremor; but straightway all ceremonial activities were cut
short. The three chiefs, with Buat and the two women, Miyanda
and Singan, held an informal conference on the porch. At this
deliberation the fact came out that if any Ginum ceremony is
held on the same day that an earthquake shock is felt, the death
of all the members of the family of the man who is giving the
Ginum will certainly follow. On the other hand, the moon
would be full in a few days, and, if the Ginum were deferred
until after the date of full moon, it could not then be celebrated
at all that month; because to hold the festival during the third
or fourth lunar phases is strictly tabu. An animated discussion of
the question, including many calculations and much pointing toward
the moon, was summarily closed by Datu Yting, who announced
that if they did not hold the culminating ceremonies within two or
three nights, he, for his part, would go home without waiting for
them. Now Yting’s judgment was revered throughout the length
and breadth of Talun, and to lose his presence at the feast was
unthinkable; accordingly, it was proposed to hold the Tanung and
the Awas rites on the next day, and to let the chief rites of the
Ginum follow at night. The final ruling, however, placed the main
ceremonial two days later than the earthquake; while the Tanung
112 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
and the Awas were arranged to be held twenty-four hours later
than the time of the shock.
Accordingly, the next morning, in preparation for the main Awas,
old Kaba made twenty-three little figures of men, called tingoto,
some of which he carved from the white wood of magabadbad, and
others he shaped out from its green stem. The manikins were
not over one inch or one and one-half inches long. The women
made the leaf-dishes; and at noon Sawad came in bringing a
cluster of fresh areca-nuts, which, he said, he had gotten for the
Awas. The rite was performed early in the afternoon, in the
kitchen (abu),'’' near the door. <A large number of the Bagobo
observed the ceremony. Oleng sat on the floor, the little images
laid in order before him. Of the twenty-three tingoto, eleven were
of the white wood, and twelve were of the green stem of maga-
badbad. Ten of the white figures were placed in a row, with one
a little apart from the rest; while eleven of the green figures were
laid in a row, and one green figure by itself. Oleng then said a
short ritual over the twenty-three manikins.
“Now I lay you here, little tingoto, to make you just like slaves
to us. We give you to the bad sickness and to the buso in place
of our own bodies;'"* and now the buso and the diseases will not
hurt us, because we are offering them these tingoto. Let the buso
think about these little human figures and not hurt us. Now all
of you, little tingoto, you must keep us from being sick.”
At the close of this recitation, Miyanda placed six areca-nuts at
the feet of the ten white figures, and said:
“I pray to you, Buso, and to you, Sickness; and I lay down
these little men to make you kind to us. We give you these ten
figures so that our own bodies will not be hurt by disease, and
we give you these areca-nuts so that you will not do harm to us.”
At a later hour, the tingoto were taken out to a retired place
under the trees to the northeast of the Long House and _ laid
beside the narrow trail, and with the figures were placed six leaf-
dishes containing areca-nuts. Near the ten white figures were
191 The word aéu has two meanings: (1) kitchen, the room that contains the three fire-
stones and the native hearth. In the Long House at Mati, it was the first room that
one entered from the north door; (2) In a ceremonial sense, the abu includes the two
rooms farthest north. The rites on the first and second nights of the Ginum are held
in the abu; on the third and fourth nights, in the sonor (the whole house).
192 See Charms and Magical Rites, Part III.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 113
laid ten areca-nuts, and near the eleven green figures, nine areca-
nuts; while the odd white figure had eleven nuts beside it, and
the odd green one had nine. My notes do not state the precise
arrangement of the tingoto and of the leaf-dishes on the ground;
but my impression is that the ten white figures and the eleven
green ones lay either inside of the leaf-dishes or close to them,
while the odd white figure and the odd green one lay apart at a
little distance. Close beside three of the leaf-dishes, three sprays
of magabadbad were planted, or stuck in the ground.
After the ceremony, Oleng spoke to me of the symbolism. There
are ten, with one more, of the white figures and eleven, with one
more, of the green figures only because it has always been the
custom of the Bagobo to use that number at Ginum, for the celebra-
tion of Awas. He explained that the ten white figures are intended
to hold the sickness and keep it away from us, while the eleven
green figures are put there on account of the earthquake — to save
us from harm. The white and the green tingoto that are kept
apart from the rest represent the two horns of that great Buso
deer called Nadt who has one good horn and one bad horn. The
white tingoto is the right antler, all of whose branches point upward
and are good; but the green tingoto is the left antler, the bad
one, that has one branch growing downward. Then Oleng: seized
my pen and made a diagrammatic sketch with a firm eager stroke,
for he clearly considered this detail a vital point in the ceremony.
Ceremony of Tanung, or Magie Rites
against Buso. The distinctive elements of
the rite called Tanung are two: first, the
planting or sticking into the ground of a
clump of branches from various vegetable
growths that have a magic value; second,
the placing of large wooden images, !°? as
spirit scarers, at certain points near the
Long House. Like the Awas, there are two Fic. 2.— Antler of Buso deer
ceremonies with the same name. The first Di#8tam by Datu Oleng showing
Eat 3 the left antler with one bad branch
or preliminary Tanung is held on the sec- turning downward and another
ond evening of Ginum, and the main rite branch tending to deflect. En-
at the close of the third day. The magical )*"*
branches themselves are collectively called tanung, and the same
*** Hein refers to similar usages among the wild tribes of Sarawak, where wooden
8
114 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
name is given to the ceremony. Other terms, interchangeable with
Tanung, are Saut and Bunsud, the last word having primarily the
signification of “a post” or “setting a post in the ground.” The
use of bunsud here has reference to the pushing of the foot of the
wooden image into the ground, like a post. It will be noted
that both the green branches and the wooden images are intended
to block the invasion of spirits of evil that attempt, regularly, to
break into the ceremonial house on the occasion of a festival. A
second point to be noted is that some of the magic branches are
acceptable to the diseases, and are put there to make the diseases
kindly to the Bagobo.
Preliminary Tanung. The preliminary Tanung was performed
just after sunset on the second night. Leafy branches from a
number of trees and shrubs were fixed deep in the ground at two
different points: (a) at a spot directly north of the Long House,
and beside the path that leads into the village; (b) at the beginning
of the trail that winds down the mountain in the direction of Santa
Cruz and the coast, a place near the southeast border of Mati.
These branches were from the red-leayed terinagum, the sharp-
pointed balekayo, and the balala — all of which act as “medicine”
very salutary for the Bagobo. The specific purpose, as has been
said, is to keep away the bad buso who try to come to the Long
House, bringing sickness to the Bagobo, and introducing besides :
form of mental stimulation that would set the men to fighting,
and would drive from the house all peace and good fellowship.
One of the datu went out to cut the tanung, and Oleng, with the
help of his second son, Andan, made the holes in the ground and
planted the branches. The tanung stood up perhaps five or six
feet from the ground, one clump on each side of the path at the
figures are placed near the house to keep off epidemics. “Die Dayaks vom Sekayam stelleu
Holzbildnisse von 30—100 cm. Linge, Konto genannt, an die Pfosten ihrer Thiiren oder
an den Weg, welcher zu ihren Wohnungen fubrt, und die Dayaks vom Katingan thun
dasselbe, um Seuchen von ihren Kampongs abzuhalten, indem sie der Meinung sind, dass
die krankheitbringenden Hantu von diesen Holzstatuen abgehalten werden, bis zu den
Bewohnern der Hiuser selbst vorzudringen.” Cf. Die bildenden Kunste bei den Dayaks
auf Borneo, pp. 31—82. 1890.
The Punan of Sarawak, according to Furness, use carved poles, instead of single
figures, to scare off evil spirits, at least on certain occasions. A Punan chief had ill-
luck; “wherefore to exorcise the evil spirits a great feast had been held, poles elaborately
decorated with carved faces were erected to frighten away demons;... Home Life of
Borneo Head hunters, p. 179. 1902.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 115
chosen places. This rite occurred synchronously with one of the
offices of the Awas, and consequently I did not hear the ritual
words, although we were not very far from the spot where the
branches were being set out.
Main Tanung. The main Tanung consists in setting in a hole
in the ground a large human figure of wood, which is put outside
of the festival house, in the hope that Buso, mistaking it for a
living man, will be afraid to pass by it. Two of these figures
are put on station.
On the day of the earthquake, Kaba brought in large branches
of the red-leaved terinagum, and the mottled green- and white-
leaved terikanga, to be ready for the planting. Then, from a chunk
of terikanga-wood, he fashioned two human figures nearly three feet
in height, roughly cut and highly conventional in form. With his
short knife he shaped out, first, a circular ridge outlining the limits
between head and trunk; below that, a three-sided bust and waist;
then, leaving a protruding abdominal region, he sloped off the body
gradually to the base, so that it ended in a six-angled point for
the feet, with no division for legs.
“This is to make the Buso afraid,’ remarked the old man glee-
fully, as he whittled away at the image.
The ceremony took place at sundown, when the tanung branches
were set out in two places: on the path winding to the river, and
beside the way leading to the other houses of the village. Ten
different varieties of trees and shrubs were represented, each of
which had a charm value so that it would be effective in pro-
ducing the emotion of fear in the evil spirits. At each of the
places where the tanung was planted, one of the human figures of
wood was also placed, the leafy branches being clustered so close
about the figure as almost to conceal it. Oleng performed the
ceremony, with the help of two young men who dug the holes
and assisted in “planting” the figures and branches.
The first part of the rite was performed on the path leading to
the river, and here the tanung was set out on the right-hand side
of the way. When the younger men had done the manual part,
Datu Oleng turned toward the clump of magic branches enclosing
the image and, facing south, made the following invocation.
“I plant this tanung toward the south for all you, anito, and for
you, Malaki t’Olu k’Waig. I plant the tanung so that sickness and
other harm will not come to us at Ginum. All of you, anito, we
116 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ask you to take care of us and to protect us from the bad buso
and from the things that might hurt us while we celebrate the
Ginum. You, Tigbanua Balagan'* and Tigbanua Kayo, I plant
this tanung for you, and I beg you not to come to make men fight
at the festival. You, too, the bad Sickness that goes all around
the world, I plant this tanung for you, so that you will not hurt
us, but have a kind heart for the Bagobo.”
After this, we retraced our steps toward the Long House, passed
by it, and went on up the path leading to the other houses in Mati.
At a point not over forty or fifty feet from the house, the second
part of the Tanung rite was performed, the branches being placed
on the left-hand side of the way. When all was ready, Oleng
turned toward the figure in its thicket of potent charms '’ and,
while facing the north, he invoked the most dreaded of the buso,
the diseases and the magic plants themselves.
“For all of you, the evil Tigbanua, and for you, the bad Diseases,
I plant this sarabak and this badbad to make you feel kindly toward
us. Now you, the Tanung that we plant, Balekayo and Dalinding,
watch over us and be all-knowing in respect to us.'% If the
Sickness approaches, or if the Buso tries to come to our Ginum,
you must not let them pass by this spot, or go from here to our
house.”
After the ceremony, Oleng repeated to me the names of the
plants that Buso fears, and that hence are used for the Tanung:
sarabak, kapalili, terikanga, ramit, dalinding, balala, balekayo, badbad.
“There should be ten names,” the old man said, “but I can now
remember only eight of them.” One of the plants that he had
momentarily forgotten must have been terinagum, branches of which
were brought in by Kaba for the ceremony. “Long ago,” added
Oleng, “the old men told the Bagobo to plant the branches for the
Tanung ceremony, and that is why we do it now.”
‘94 Tigbanud Balagan is the Buso of the Rattan, and Tigbanua Kayo is the Buso of
the Forest.
‘9° 'Thickets consecrated to spirits, as well as groves and reserved places in the forest,
are frequently mentioned by the Recollects and by other missionaries as elements asso-
ciated with the ancient worship of the Filipino. Cf. Bolinao’s sketch of religious customs
in Zambales and Marivelez. Bram and Ropertson: The Philippine Islands, vol. 21,
pp. 144—146, 270, 272, 276—277, 282. 1905. Some of these thickets may possibly
have been buso-scarers, rather than consecrated places.
196 See pp. 27—28.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 117
Ceremony of Pamalugu, or purification, The Pamalugu, or
ceremonial washing in the river, takes place on the third day of
Ginum — the day preceding that on which the culminating rites occur.
The time set for going down to the river was an hour after
sunrise, or thereabouts, but it was considerably later — eight
o'clock or eight-thirty — when the party started from the house.
During the wait, the men beat agongs and chewed betel as usual,
while the girls sewed and embroidered on festival garments that
were yet unfinished. The sun, showing dimly from behind masses
of clouds, was more than two hours high when the priestess, Singan,
came in from the woods where she had been gathering the various
kinds of plant-medicines required for the ceremonial. She carried
a large bundle of small green plants, freshly cut, together with
bunches and sprays plucked from large vegetable growths and from
certain trees, all of which green things she had laid in a piece of
sheath torn from the areca-palm, a material which forms the regular
wrapping-paper of the wild tribes.
Here are the native names of a number of the varities of plants
in Singan’s bundle: bagebé, sarabak, dalinding, tarinagum, imaga-
budbud, uwag, lambingbaying, badbad, uliuli, manangid, balintudug,
lawddd, kapalili, bawing.'°* Singan divided the green bouquet into
two equal parts, carefully placing upon another piece of areca-palm
sheath one spray or plant of each kind. When she finished, she
had two green piles of fairly uniform size, which she made into
two bunches and tied with a strong, fibrous string of areca. One
of the boys tore off the narrow strips from a section of sheath,
and handed them to Singan as she needed them.
One element of the collection of greens was kept apart from the
rest — a single branch of areca palm that had just burst from its
enveloping sheath at the top of the trunk, and was full of clusters
of tiny white blossoms and pale green sprays of undeveloped leaves.
This branch, called bagebé,*°* Singan preserved almost intact, only
breaking off one or two little sprays to add to the two bunches
already made up.
*°7 An extensive list of the various leaves used to make up the medicinal bouquet with
which the rice-paste (Zepong Tawar) is applied, is given in Skwat: op. cit., pp. 77—80.
*9% Bagebé is the word for the flowers and leaf-buds of the areca palm in the earliest
stages of development. The blossoms just forming, are pure white, and the leaf-buds range
from white to pale green at the moment of the bursting of the enveloping sheath. The
same name is sometimes applied to this flowering axis when mature.
118 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
When the magic greens, known as sagmo, were ready, the
priestess sat holding them all, while the people gathered for the
walk to the river. Presently Ido said, “Panoydun” (Let us go),
and Singan glanced swiftly at Datu Oleng, who at once gave her
a signal to make the start. Then, with Singan well in advance,
leading the way, we all set out. Singan was closely followed by
Saliman, pale and emaciated from his long illness, and by two of
the little children. At a short distance behind, Oleng led all the
other people who were to be partakers of the rite. I was directly
behind Oleng; then came Buat; then Salf, Oleng’s elder brother,
a very aged man; then other members of the family: Ido, Inok
(Oleng’s third son), Sigo with her girl-cousin Odik, Miyanda, and
a long line of Oleng’s sons, nephews and grandchildren, with a
number of friends and guests.
The people, for the most part, wore their every-day clothes —
Oleng, his customary blue cotton jacket and hemp trousers of a
dull claret color, his well-worn tankulu bound round his head; the
women went down dressed just as on an ordinary working day ;
many of the men wore trousers only, and plain ones at that. Ido
alone had dressed for the occasion in a splendid pair of festival
trousers made by his Bila-an wife, who had decorated them richly
with embroidery of fine needle-work and appliqué, and with figures
done in small mother-of-pearl dises.
After a climb of perhaps twenty minutes down a bank that, for
a part of the distance, was steep and slippery, we found ourselves
at the bottom of a sharply V-shaped valley, where the grade of the
stream’s bed was slight and the stream ran shallow and was not
over ten or twelve feet in width. As the bed of the river widened
out, it was full of great stones and boulders that told of the work
of a young and vigorous stream which, during violent storms, had
rolled the boulders down the steeper grades, but in this more
level place had become overloaded with stones and debris and was
reduced to a mere brook. Here and there, where the shallow
current had become blocked, there were little pools hedged in by
slippery white boulders, and in other places there were flat stones
with their tops fairly above the surface of the water, and convenient
to stand on.
They consulted together as to the exact spot for the ceremony,
whereupon Oleng seated himself on one of the stony resting-places,
while the boys and younger men busied themselves in clearing a
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 119
freer passage for the stream by pulling out vegetable growths and
scooping up handfuls of pebbles. Then followed the preliminary rites.
Singan laid her bunch of leafy medicine upon the ground, and
began to place the areca-nuts and the betel-leaves, as she took
them from her little basket, in several spots that served as temporary
shrines. At the same time she uttered the appropriate prayers.
The placing of the betel for the gods, with ritual words, is called
garub-dun.
First the priestess laid an areca-nut on its betel-leaf in the water
at her feet, and said: “Tigbanua of the water, this betel-nut I am
laying here for you, to appease you. And you, Tigyama our pro-
tector, I beg you to keep away from us the sickness, for you care
for the living.”
Singan next put one areca-nut and one betel-leaf on a large
stone, with these words: “You, Tigbanua of the stone, are now to
have this areca-nut for yourself, while we are engaged in the
Pamalugu. From early times the Bagobo have celebrated the
Ginum, year by year, and we beg you not to listen if the children
have a good time and make a noise. See, I fix the betel for you.”
The woman then stepped from one to another of the stones in
the river-bed, until she found a good place on the east bank, that
is, on the side opposite to the slope down which we had come.
There, on a boulder, she laid one areca-nut with a betel-leaf and
addressed the Buso haunting that bank. “You, Tigbanua of the
other side of the river, here is an areca-nut for you; it is to keep
you from being angry with us that we fix the betel. And you,
Malaki t?Olu k’Waig, who live at the source of all the streams,
protect us with your tidalan (spear shaft) from the bad Disease
that is going round the world.”
Then Singan made her way over one and another boulder, along
the bed of the stream for some little distance to the north.
She moved cautiously, for the stepping-places were slippery and
she was frail and weak. On reaching a certain spot, she bent
down and said, as she dropped an areca-nut with its betel-leaf into the
stream: “Water that lies to the north, this is your betel; and I
beg from you this favor while we celebrate the Ginum, that you
will not take any notice of the merry noise of the people.” '”°
199 The idea is that the evil spirits which inhabit the water, on hearing the merriment,
may come to hurt the people at the feast.
420 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Having moved toward the slope leading up to the village, the
priestess then faced the west, laid down on a stone one nut in its
leaf and, speaking very slowly, adressed the Buso of the Rattan. °°?
“To you, Tigbanua Balagan, I give this areca-nut, for now, as
every year, we hold a festival for the ancient balekat. We beg
you not to send sickness upon us, and we want you to tell all of
your friends not to hurt us. It is with areca and with betel that
we ask from you this favor.”
After this, she turned to face the south and, laying a nut and
a leaf on a stone as before, she spoke first to the buso, and then
to that glorious and divine malaki who dwells at the never-failing
spring of all the waters. “To you, Tigbanua, I offer this areca-
nut, and I pray to you all, to move you to be kind to us. Take
this, and do not make us sick while we celebrate the Ginum.
You, Malaki t?Olu k’Waig, keep us by your power from illness
and from stormy weather, for you are the all-wise (matulus) Anito.”
Before the ceremony, a very small shrine had been set up on the
western border of the stream, having the usual white bowl wedged
into a rod of split balekayo; toward this tambara the priestess
now turned and laid in the bowl one areca-nut and one betel-leat.
Having done this, she took up her bundle of green sagmo (the
medicine plants) and handed to the girl, Sigo, the branch of
blossoming sprays from the betel palm that had been kept entire.
Without speaking, the young virgin placed the branch in her girdle
or within the waist folds of her panapisan. Singan then laid in
the water — one at each end of that section of the stream that
had been set apart for the purification a young plant or a leafy
cluster selected from the sagmo, and placed one spray of bagebe
on the little shrine.
At that moment Oleng, who up to this point had remained seated,
rose and called Singan’s name. The priestess turned to him and Oleng
20° Similarly, on the Peninsula, “the annual bathing expeditions ... are supposed to
purify the persons of the bathers and to protect them from evil.” W. W. SkearT: op. cit.,
p- 21. Ceremonies of purification having the special intention of driving away demons are
mentioned in Somadeva’s stories; e.g.: “Then he bathed in the Vitasta and worshiped
Ganesa ... and performed the ceremony of averting evil spirits from all quarters by
waving the hand round the head and other ceremonies.” Op. cit., p.197. Cf. the Iranian
ceremony in which an offering is made to the water itself. “He offered the sacrifice to
the good waters of the good Daitya.” J. Darmesrerer (tr.): “The Vendidad.” Sacred
books of the East, vol. 4, p. 210. 1895.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 12%
spoke one word, “Sakan” (1, myself). Then, with slow steps and an
attitude in which high dignity and a reverential sense of his sacred
office were peculiarly blended, the old man advanced to the edge
of the water and, in a clear voice, summoned the gods dear to the
Bagobo — the beloved Tigyama, protector of man, and Pamulak
Manobo, creator of all nature. It was an impressive moment when
the aged chief stood there, alone, still, beside a massive boulder,
in the silence of the mountains with the cool refreshment of morning
touching the air, his children and grandchildren grouped, in perfect
hush, upon the banks. Feeble and spent, he yet stood erect, and
strong in spirit, his face expressing a graye sweetness and purity,
as he called upon the ancient gods of the tribe.
“Where are you, Tigyama? and where are you, Pamulak Manobo ?
Come near to us for a little time, while I perform the ceremony
of Pamalugu; while I pour water over the men and over the women,
to keep them in health and strength. This prayer and this Pama-
lugu I offer, begging you to remove from our bodies the evil
sickness. Show your love for us; keep us from disease during the
festival of Ginum, and make us well ail of the time.”
As soon as Oleng ceased speaking, his wife, Singan, stepped
down into the bed of the stream and stood in the shallow water,
with the two bunches of medicine in her arms. The people had
dispersed themselves informally, and were sitting about on the great
stones, waiting for their turns. Five young men, sons of Datu Oleng,
were the first to present themselves for the rite. They went down
together and stood before Singan in the water, or sat on the stones
on the west side of the stream. Those who had the tutub or tan-
kulu on their heads removed it, so that their black hair, long and
luxuriant, hung down over their shoulders and around their faces,
as they stood with bowed heads before Singan, and received the
pamalugu at her hands. The priestess held one of the bunches of
leafy medicine in the running brook, and drew it out dripping.
Then, holding it over the young men, she let the water fall in a
stream upon their heads, whence it ran down over necks and
shoulders and backs. Again she dipped the sagmo into the water,
and again allowed the magic stream to pour down on their bodies;
and then again, until the effusion had been performed nine times.
She held the bunch of greens in a vertical position, with the stems
downward, so that the water from leaves and twigs collected into
one stream; or she held the bunch horizontally, but in either case
122 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
by a slight movement of her hand she could effuse five heads
almost at the same moment.
During this ninefold purification, the young men were facing the
bamboo shrine; after the ninth pouring, there came a slight pause,
whereupon they all oriented, simultaneously, so that they now
faced the east. Singan applied the water in the same manner as
before, nine times again, but she used the other bunch of sagmo
while the candidates held the eastward position.
When Oleng’s sons had retired, his nephews went down into the
stream by fives. Oleng himself stepped into the stream and assisted
his wife in the pamalugu of the nephews, he and Singan each
holding one of the bunches of sagmo. Over each group of five the
water was poured nine times while they faced the prayer-stand,
and, similarly, nine times when they turned toward the east.
During the ceremony, the men washed their faces, arms and bodies
with the water trickling over them. There was more or less con-
yersation and some laughter. Under this apparent lack of formality,
however, lay an exact ritual that a careful observer could not fail
to note.
Following the nephews of Oleng, his grandchildren (boys and
girls together) came by fives, and presumably some children of
nephews and nieces. A certain order in which candidates were to
present themselves was apparently adhered to, for when Oleng’s
daughter and her cousin stepped into the water and took their places
they were sent back to await their turn.
When any group of five had received pamalugu, the individuals
would go off behind the larger boulders, slap the water off from
trousers or skirts, shake out their hair, and perchance seize the
oceasion to take off some garment and wash it in the stream.
After Oleng and Singan had worked jointly for some time,
Singan withdrew to the bank, and Oleng continued the purification
alone. Presently, to my surprise, Ido motioned to me that my
own turn had come, and that I was to let down my hair. Oleng
sat down on the bank, and Ido gave me pamalugu like the rest,
thus perhaps recognizing me as a sharer in the benefits of the
Ginum, and as one of themselves, rather than a mere spectator. *°'
201 The two times nine number of effusions was broken in a few cases. Ido had eleven
effusions while facing the tambara, with slaps on his back administered with the sagmo
after the third, the fourth, and the seventh counts. Water was poured over myself the
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 123
Immediately afterwards, [do himself was effused by Singan, and
he was followed by a group of three — Sawi, a son of Sunog,
Bagyu the leper, who was one of Oleng’s nephews, and another
youth. Then came Sigo and her cousin, Odik, while Singan was
pouring the water, for Oleng was now resting at the edge of the
stream. Not many women received pamalugu; but Sigo, on this
occasion as at the Awas, represented, it would seem, the unmarried
daughters of Oleng of whom she was the eldest. Sigo and Odik
were effused immediately before the officiating functionaries.
When practically all of the people present had come out of the
river, Singan still stood waiting, and then Datu Oleng went down
to her alone. Up to this point, the act of lavation had been done
without any accompanying ritual words, except the checking of the
count by the occasional utterance of a number; but now a prayer
was said by the priestess as she poured the sacred water over her
husband. “Anito, take away from Oleng’s body the sickness that
is there; and you, Malaku t’Olu k’Waig, keep him from sickness.
Drive off the evil spirits, so that they may not come to our Ginum
and bring bad diseases to us while we hold the festival.”
Oleng was straightway followed by his sister, Miyanda, a woman
of distinguished presence and splendid physique, the director of
all the women’s industries, and the leader of Anito rites. She,
too, stood alone, while Singan effused her the orthodox two-fold
nine times with the words: “All the bad sickness in Miyanda’s
body, Anito, we want you to take away and carry it to the place
where the Malaki t?Olu k’Waig lives.’’*°? Then Miyanda added
her own petition: “You take away this feeling of weakness from me.”
Last of all, Singan herself received pamalugu from the hands
of Oleng, who said, while he poured the water over his wife:
“TI pray to all of you who are true anito that you will take away
this sickness from me, for I have no hunger for my food, and I
am very feeble. Make me a little stronger, so that I may gain
many good things. Now that I have been washed in the pamalugu,
I think that I shall get well.”
conventional eighteen times, but Ido counted the second set of nine as eight, for he said
“walu” (eight) after the last lavation. Possibly this was a detail in conformity with a
Bagobo custom elsewhere noted: namely, that of mentioning a number less than the
correct count.
792 The thought is, that if the sickness is taken to the benevolent Malaki at the water
sources, he will strangle the sickness.
124 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
The lustration of the priestess was to have closed the ceremony,
but one woman came late, running down the steep bank, and Oleng
did not send her away, but himself gave her the purification.
Very few women were at the river, though unquestionably they
were not excluded from any motive of sex discrimination. They
were all very much occupied with other matters on that day. The
young women were busy in finishing off their festival clothes; the
older ones, with house cares, for the presence of many guests in
the Long House entailed much additional labor. There was prepa-
ration for ceremonies, too, such as bringing down tho seventy
water-flasks for the ritual washing that was to follow.
When all was done, the people went away in scattered groups,
some climbing up the bank directly after the ceremony, others
staying behind to wash their clothes. Those Bagobo who did not
vo to the river, as, for example, Malik, who was engaged in making
the new tambara, Kaba and his family, went through with a per-
formance at home that was considered an equivalent. Each of them
poured water from one of the bamboo joints over his head, twice
nine times.
When Singan came back to the house, in company with Oleng,
she brought with her the two bunches of sagmo and laid them up
on the high guest bed that had been made for the festival. It was
then late in the morning, and the priestess absented herself until
the next ceremony, that of Sonar. °°?
Ceremony of Lulub or washing of water-flasks. A short
ceremony, that I did not see, took place immediately after the
pamalugu. As reported to me, this rite consisted in the washing
of the new sekaddu, or bamboo joints, seventy of which had been
made to hold water for the feast. A sekkadu consists of one bane;
that is to say, it is the hollow internode of the bamboo that lies
between two nodes or joints. One node forms the bottom of the
vessel, and at the other end the mouth of the vessel is cut. The
vessels must have been washed on the outside only, since openings
2°32 Almost directly after our return from the river, Ido and several others sat down
to have their damp hair freed from innumerable small organisms. Soon, the floor of the
porch was filled with people sitting in rows for a like purpose. The women did the
work with marked success, each woman hunting in the head of the mau immediately in
front of her, spying the louse with a rapidity perfected by experience, and deftly squeezing
it to death between her thumb-nail and a tiny, flat blade of wood, that resembled a
paper-cutter.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 125
for the mouths were not cut until early in the morning of the
last day of the festival.
The old women, Miyanda and Singan, performed the Lulub,
assisted by younger women. They rubbed magic leaves over the
surface of the bamboo joints and then washed them in the stream.
Afterwards, according to the account I received, one of the old
women carried a joint of laya bamboo to a place south of where
the Pamalugu had taken place. She stuck the bané, or joint, either
in the earth at the edge of the stream or in the bed of the shallow
water, and said these words. “Now I place this bane of laya for
you, Tigbanua Balagan, and for you, Tigbanua Waig. Remember
this, when we are trying to draw water and to pray to you. And
you, Gimokud mantu (new) and Gimokud tapi *°* (old), do not envy
us while we have our Ginum, because you have gone to the Great
Country. I think you did not want to stay on earth any longer.”
At the conclusion of the rite, the old women taught the girls
that they must not play so much while the house was full of guests.
Ceremony of Sonar, or Offering on the Agongs of Manutac-
tured Products. Soon after our return from the river, preparations
began for the next ceremony — the laying of gifts upon an agong-
altar, with accompanying rites. Devotions are directed, at this
office, toward Mandarangan, the Malaki t’Olu k’ Waig, certain anito,
and the agongs themselves that are addressed as sonaran. In the
ceremony of Sonar, just as in Pamalugu, there is an intention of
securing from the gods both health and wealth; yet in the lavations
the thought of purification is dominant, while at the offerings on
the agongs the desire to grow rich is stressed.
It was toward the middle of the forenoon when we came back
from Pamalugu, and there was an interval before the following
ceremonies. Four new bamboo prayer-stands had been made by
Malik early in the day, and these tambara were now ready to be
used at Sonar, the bowls being wedged in the split balekayo in the
usual manner; but there were many other things to be gathered
together by men and women who had already had a full morning.
From the frame on which the agongs hung, three of the smaller
instruments were taken from the upper row, and one of larger size
+°* The term ceremonially used to characterize souls that have been long dead is ‘api,
and this same adjective is applied to old manufactured objects. An aged person is called
in life tagu/, never tapi, like an old thing.
ee
ee —e—eEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeEeE—e—e————E
————————————eeeEeEeEeeeEeeeEeEeeeeeeeeEeeeeeee—————eee———eeeeeeeeee
a
———
eS ee eee
———
Pe ee oe es
ee
426 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
from the lower row. The four agongs were placed on the floor in
the middle room, not in contact with one another, but close enough
together to form an unbroken square. At one side of this temporary
altar, the bamboo prayer-stands were laid down in such manner
that the four bowls formed a little square, while the rods of bale-
kayo lay stretched out between (or beside) the agongs. The large
agong, and two of the smaller ones, were placed with their convex
sides up, so as to give a base on which material offerings could
be piled; while the fourth instrument was put concave side up,
like a big bowl which might function as a sort of font.
The ceremonies that followed may be briefly summarized as fol-
lows, though there was no well-marked line of separation between
the several acts, for two might be going on at the same time: (a)
the offering of manufactured products to the gods; (b) the ablutions
called Sagmo; (c) the visitation of anito; (d) the rites with balabba.
Offering of manufactured products to the gods
Datu Ido sat down on the floor, in front of the agongs and
facing the east. During the first part of the proceedings, Datu
Oleng sat perched on the high guest-bed and watched all that
went on, but gave no directions. At once the people began to bring
their nice things to Ido, who put them on the agongs or on the
floor close to the altar. In a few cases, the gifts were placed by
the owners themselves. Old Miyanda took the initiative and put
on one of the agongs a pair of man’s trousers (savoar). Then came
a long delay, during which everybody went about his ordinary
occupations. The men chewed betel; the girls kept on putting
stitch after stitch on the fine embroidery decorating garments
to be worn at the dance on the following night. In the interval,
Datu Ido and Miyanda, with a few others, talked over the proper
disposition to be made of the things destined for the agong altar.
Then Miyanda went to another part of the house, and returned
with an armful of hemp skirts, or sarongs, woven in figures and
called by the Bagobo panapisan. She brought, also, women’s cotton
waists, and necklaces of beads in solid colors, — green, white and
yellow, — all of which articles she placed together on one agong.
In the meantime, Ido had fetched a finely-decorated waist, a long
panapisan of Bila-an make, a number of pieces of Visayan textiles
and imported prints that had been secured at the coast and some
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 4127
white cotton cloth. All these he put in a pile on the floor. He
then changed the arrangement of the agongs, by placing them in a
row running north and south, with the one containing water at the
south end of the line. He laid the four tambara just east of the
agongs. At this point, the washing of faces began, as described
under the following caption. All the time, the women and the
men were approaching the altar from all directions of the house,
bringing garments, ornaments, swords, and calling, “Ido! Ido!” so
that the chieftain might recognize each individual, and thus asso-
ciate every object with its owner. Ido, under this stress, was trying
to keep the offerings in classified groups, so that at the end of the
ceremony they could, the more conveniently, be returned. He kept
asking, “Whose is this?” or “Whose is that?” before placing
the various articles. His disposition of things, however, was not
always respected. One cotton textile he demurred at taking from
a young man, but finally consented, rolled the cloth into a small
wad and put it on top of the pile of objects which he, himself,
had brought to the altar. As soon as Ido’s back was turned, the
young Bagobo unfolded his textile and spread it out on Ido’s things,
whereupon the chief, his eye returning to the spot, placed the cloth
in still another position. Soon, the three agongs were heaped with
offerings — embroidered shirts, newly-woven panapisan of glistening
hemp, wide bead necklaces and many cotton textiles. Ido took
from his neck a fine gold cord (kamagi) and with it crowned his
own heap of gifts.
The straight, one-edged swords called kampilan were brought, to
the number of eight, and also four long spears. Ido laid on the
floor the eight kampilan beside the agongs, and placed the spears
with their blades under the swords. At the Ginum that I had
earlier observed at Tubison, there were, similarly, eight of the
kampilan — a type of sword that forms a valued element in the
ceremony and is presumably associated with the war-god, Manda-
rangan, who is addressed in the prayers at this time.
Only a few trinkets were dropped into the agong containing
water, for an object placed in this agong cannot be reclaimed —
it goes to the priestess through whom the gods speak. On being
invited to make some offering, I contributed a heavy armlet of
brass, that Loda had cast from a wax mould. I stipulated, how-
ever, that it should be put on the agongs, and not in the water,
as it was an object of value to me. Directly, then, Oleng called
128 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
from his high seat, and requested me to put a little bell into the
water. I did so, adding also a small mirror. The priestess quickly
put her hand into the agong and took out the mirror, which she
held, clasped tight, during the anito seance that followed.
Ablutions called Sagmo. The agong that was turned with its
concave side up had been filled to about one-fourth of its capacity
with water, and the two green bunches of sagmo, with which the
candidates at Pamalugu had been sprinkled, lay in the water. Just
after the bringing of offerings had begun, and when Ido had placed
the four agongs in a row, a number of people came, one or more
at a time, and bathed their faces in the water that held the sagmo.
A good many of those who washed in the agong had not been
present at Pamalugu; but some who had received purification in
the early morning laved their faces now, as well, in the medicinal
water. There was more or less laughter and talk during the ab-
lutions, and all the while people were bringing their gifts to the
altar, so that the religious nature of the rite was somewhat obscured.
The value of this washing for the warding off of disease is appar-
ently due to the magic sagmo hallowing the water in which it lies.
Visitation of Anito. The usual manner of conducting an inter-
view with the gods is described in a later section of this paper.
Such interviews take place, ordinarily, at night, this being the only
instance that came under my observation of a seance during the day.
When the people had finished bringing gifts, the priestess, Sin-
gan, sat down on the floor at the south end of the row of agongs, so
that she faced north, and thus had the agong holding the medicinal
greens directly in front of her. Covering her head and face com-
pletely with her red cotton scarf (salugboy), she began to utter
those harsh and sepulchral groans that regularly announce the
coming of a spirit. Her right hand, grasping the tiny looking-glass,
lay in her lap; she pressed her left hand to her cheek, while her
body shook and trembled. Not only the children, but adult Bagobo
also, gazed at the priestess with keen curiosity, for they rarely get
a look at her in this condition. At the night meetings, the torches
are always extinguished. Her voice came muffled through the
cloth wrapped round her head, few of her words could be heard,
and soon the people began chatting and laughing. The oracle was
very brief, and was uttered without the chanting that forms a cus-
tomary feature of a seance. I was able to record only that the Ma-
laki tOlu k’Waig spoke as follows:
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 129
“[ am come this noon because you summoned me by the gifts
on the agongs. Now let all the people upon whom water was
poured from the sagmo, at the Pamalugu, put bells and_ brass
bracelets into the agong with the sagmo.”
Rites with balabba. The ceremonial drink of fermented sugar
cane, barely tasted on the first night of the festival, is drunk freely
on the third day; and it is at this stage of the Sonar that the first
deep draught of balabba is taken. A portion is offered to the gods
as their right, before the people drink.
While Singan was muttering incoherent words, Ido brought a
long bamboo flask, and from it poured out balabba, until he had
filled four large bowls, and his own little cup, with the thick, rich,
brown liquid. A delicious aroma came from the bowls, as it were
of boiling molasses mingled with old rum. Then the people began
to be eager for the close of the worship, and for the end of the
abstinence of the long morning; but they sat waiting in their cus-
tomary attitude of patience. Ido had placed the four bowls in a
row parallel with the agongs, but on the other side from the tam-
bara. His own little cup he moved into several different positions,
placing it, first, at the north end of the bowls, then at the south
end, again, in the middle, and finally back at the north end again.
As soon as Singan had lapsed into silence, Oleng came down
from his perch, and placed himself in front of the bowls of liquor,
so that he sat facing east, and also facing the agongs. Ido was at his
left, and he motioned me to a place between Oleng and himself
for this, the most worshipful act of the Sonar. The Long House
was full of Bagobo, standing, or sitting, as near the agongs as they
could place themselves, without intruding into the reserved positions.
Datu Yting was also at the altar, near the other datu.
Oleng, now acting as priest, touched the rim of the bowl of balabba
that stood farthest to his right, and said: “All of this, anito, is yours,
for this year we are making our Ginum; and when all of you, anito,
have drunk from this bowl of balabba, then we will drink the rest.”
A spray of a fragrant plant called manangid had been laid beside
the bowls, and he took this spray and stirred it three times around
in the bowl. Then, with the tips of his fingers, he touched the rim
of the second bowl, as he had touched the first, and said, addressing
the agong-altar: “Sonaran,*°° the balabba in this bowl is yours.
=x '
2° Oleng was doubtless addressing the spirit resident in the agongs. The agongs
tunctioning as an altar are called sonaran, while the name of the ceremony is Sonar.
9
130 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
See, now we have placed upon you our valued things — panapisan,
jackets, trousers, woven necklaces, gold kamagi, textiles, kampilan,
spears — because, from this time on we want to get rich. Now,
Sonaran, that we have put our gifts here upon you, you must
save us from sickness.”” Then he stirred the liquor in this bowl
three times with the spray of manangid. Finally, he touched
the rim of the third bowl, as he offered it to the great war-god,
with these words. “Now you, Mandarangan, this third bowl is for
you, because we are again holding our Ginum. We ask you to
taste this balabba, and to drink it all, then the rest of us will
drink.” Having said this, he stirred the balabba in the third
bowl three times, with the same spray. ‘The fourth bowl, unless
some detail escaped my observation, was not dedicated to any
deity, nor were any prayers said over it. At the close of the
office, Oleng gaye the spray of manangid to Ido, who put it in
his hair.
Oleng spoke to the gods in a conversational tone, and was some-
times prompted by Datu Yting when he forgot a word of the for-
mula. Ido gave vent to a few explosive groans while Oleng was
praying, for he thirsted to begin sipping the sweet balabba.
At the conclusion of the devotions, the three datu, Oleng, Ido
and Yting, drank from the bowls, and afterwards the rest of the
people. My impression is that they drank from all four bowls, but
this item escaped me. Ido gave his own cup to me to use individ-
ually, and offered to refill it when empty, but the large bowls
were passed about, from hand to hand, among all the company.
When we had finished drinking, Malik took up the four new
tambara and fastened them to the wall, or to some house-pillar.
Ido began returning the objects from the agongs to their respective
owners, and called out their names if there was delay in claiming
the articles. I saw one man gird on his kampilan as soon as Ido
returned it, but, in general, the people laid the smaller articles in
the tambara, and put larger objects in a wide scarf (sa/ugboy)
hanging close to the tambara. Here they must remain for at least
one night, and afterwards be retained always in the possession of
the individuals who offered them. At last, the three agongs were
hung up in their former places, and a tap-tap on a large agong,
nine times repeated, announced the end of the Sonar. A pile of
swords still lay on the floor, and were picked up after the tap-tap
had sounded. Last of all, the agong containing the water and
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 131
bunches of medicine was pushed under the high bed, where it re-
mained until the end of the Ginum (?).
Ceremonies on the Main Day of Ginum. The fourth and main
day of the festival — the Ginum proper — is crowded with im-
portant and deeply interesting ceremonial, that begins at dawn and
continues until after sunrise on the following morning. Attention
should be drawn to the events distinctive of the day, although, as
has been indicated in an earlier summary, many other rites (such
as drinking balabba, chanting gindaya, beating agongs, dancing,
performing awas, and so forth) which took place on earlier days, re-
appear during the culminating ceremonial, but are here characterized,
usually, by new elements that have to do with the formality, or
with the extent of time, of the performance.
On the last day occurs the sacrifice of a human or of an animal
victim; the cutting down of two ceremonial bamboos followed by
the bringing in, the shaving, the decoration, the raising, and the
attaching of spears to these poles; the raising of a war-cry at fixed
points in the ceremonial; an exhibition of products of the loom
and of the warriors’ kerchiefs; the preparation and the cooking of
special forms of sacred food; an illumination with ceremonial
torches; the altar ceremonial, when sacrificial food and holy liquor
and betel are first laid before the Tolus ka Balekat, and afterward
eaten; the rehearsing by old men, while clasping the bamboo, of
the number of persons they have killed; and the serving and the
eating of an excellent banquet, in which everybody present has a
share.
When the first trace of dawn appeared over the mountains, and
while the darkness in the Long House was still unbroken, the girls
got up and called Loda and several of the other young men, who
were to start the tagong-go. They rose forthwith, and beat agongs
lustily for about half an hour. Thus, at daybreak, the culminating
period of the great festival was ushered in.
About one hour after sunrise, eight men left the house to cut
the two bamboos that were to be placed in the festival house on
that day. The ceremony of cutting down the two bamboos, or
kawayan?° is called Dudo ka kawayan. The eight men included
206 The Bagobo distinguish nicely the many varieties of bamboo that grow in their
country. The larger bamboos (Bambusa arundinacea) that grow to a height of from forty
to sixty feet and are used for the heavier house timbers and for flooring, are called by the
Bagobo kawayan. Two of these trunks are cut for the ceremonial poles at Ginum.
432 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Ido, Bansag and other picked warriors, each of whom wore the
tankulu, a sign that he had killed at least one man. No other
Bagobo was permitted to go on the expedition. They had to go
some distance over the mountains, to reach a certain spot where
the bamboos might be cut, in accordance with a regulation that
the ceremonial kawayan must be cut each year from the same place
in the forests. The old man, Oleng, did not go with the party,
but rested during the early morning at the Long House. Later,
he seemed very impatient for the return of the men; he paced up
and down, watching from door or window, and would say, as the
hours crawled by: “It is time for them to come. I will go out
and meet them.” About the middle of the forenoon, he left the
house with two or three other men, intending to meet the party,
and to return with them.
In the course of another hour, a current of suppressed excitement
passed through the waiting group of people, as the word passed
among us, “They are coming.”
It was near the middle of the forenoon when a prolonged shout
was heard in the distance, and then repeated. After the second
shout, the nine men, headed by Oleng and Ido, came filing up the
path from the southeast, bearing two long trunks of bamboo.
The little procession came up the house-ladder and through the
narrow door, each man wearing the tankulu, and having a blossom
or two of red and gold darudu fastened in the folds of his kerchief
and hanging over his forehead. The expression on the face of
eyery man was one of rapt abstraction and of high exaltation.
Immediately on entering the house, they rested the two bamboo
poles against one of the transverse timbers. Then Ido, followed
A smaller species (Bambusa blumeana) has a slender, brittle stem, covered with short
thorns, and is called by the Bagobo dale-kayo, which means “house wood.” ‘They make
use of balekayo everywhere for the lighter parts of the frame-work of the house, such as
the joists running from the ridge-pole to the edge of the roof, to support the thatch;
and for the entire wall, sometimes, of the Long House; for flutes and other wind
instruments; for making fires where a short-lived, intense flame is needed, as when shells
are to be calcined for lime. This is the bamboo that the Spaniards referred to as “thorny
cane” (Cana espifia). Another bamboo (Baméusa vulgaris?) is thornless, has an exceedingly
hard-grained stem, and is known among the Bagobo as dudung; this is decorated with
fine carving and used for lime-tubes. The color of the wood is light yellow in the young
tree and a rich, mellow tan tint in older trees. Still another bamboo, of which the
native name is /aya, has a slender white stem that is utilized for various purposes, one
of which is to supply a ceremonial frame at Ginum, on which textiles and other garments
to be displayed before the gods are hung.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 133
by the other seven men, leaped toward the structure from which
the agongs hung, and seized hold of its long rods, round which
ogbus vine had been twined at an earlier hour. The eight men,
close clasping vine and pole, raised the same war cry that we had
heard from afar. There was a long drawn out nasal, prolonged
by holding the tongue against the palate so as to produce a humming
sound on one note — n-n-n-n-n-n-n! — followed by a continued
sonant — r-r-r-r-r-r-r-r! — given with open throat and resonant
voice, while the bodies of the men swayed slightly back and forth.
When this behavior had lasted for several minutes, Ido sprang to
the agongs, grasped a tap-tap, and beat the instruments with short,
ringing strokes, his face expressing a jubilant ecstasy, as he darted
from Tarabun to Matia, and from Matia to Mabagung.?°* He
produced such a grand clash of percussion melody that one felt a
sense of trampling under foot all foes to the Bagobo. From the
first signal at dawn until now, the agongs had not been struck.
Next followed the ceremonial decoration of the bamboos. The
two poles were of unequal length and girth, the longer one con-
sisting of nine internodes, and the shorter one of eight internodes.
The longer bamboo was perhaps fifteen or more feet in length (the
exact measurements [ failed to secure). With one end resting on
the floor, and the other end on a cross-beam of the house, each
bamboo stood at a gradual slant during the time that the men were
working on their decoration.
First, Ido scraped on each pole four lines running from one end
to the other, as an outline for the detailed work. On these lines,
the men shaved ?°* off the skin of the bamboo in short lengths,
707 Specific names of the instruments...
20s The ceremonial use of shaved poles, and of bunches of shavings, among the Ainu
of Saghalin is discussed very fully by Sternberg. After mentioning the various hypotheses
in regard to the significance of this element, as put forth by Batchelor, Bird, Dobrot-
vorski and Aston, the writer states his own conclusions: namely, that the shaved sticks
to which the Ainu give the name of zmao represent supernatural agents who carry the
prayers and offerings of the Ainu to God, and that the shavings themselves are the
tongues of the mediating-envoy. The Ainu place these inao at the door, in front of
the house, and at spots on the mountains, in the forest, and at the riverside. On special
occasions, as after recovery from an illness, or on returning from a journey, such shaved
sticks are set up. The bear to be offered in sacrifice is often decorated with bunches of
shavings. “To sum up,” Dr. Sternberg says, “mao are shaved trees and pieces of wood,
commonly in the shape of human figures, which act as man’s intercessors before deities.
Their power lies in their numerous tongues (shavings), which increase the suasive power
of their eloquence to an extraordinary degree.” (p. 436) “This odd cult,” he states, “has
134 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
until they had made nine clusters of shavings on each pole, each
cluster close to a nodal joint. The clusters on the long bamboo
consisted each of nine shavings, and the clusters on the shorter
bamboo, of eight shavings each, every individual shaving remaining
attached by its base to the pole. Each one of the single shavings
was then split into three or four or more fine curls, so that a
series of festoons appeared running down the poles, a group of
festoons at each node.
The next process was a mechanical device for the attachment of
leaves and flowers. Near each of the four central nodes on the long
bamboo, they cut a pair of small holes, so that there were eight
holes, four on one side, and four on the opposite side of the pole.
Similarly, they cut three pairs of holes in the shorter bamboo, near
the three central nodes. They inserted long slender sticks into the
perforations thus made, letting each stick run through a pair of
holes, and project several inches on each side. There were thus
eight sticks passing through the trunk of the larger bamboo, and
six sticks through the smaller one. The corresponding pairs of
perforations in the two poles did not lie exactly in the same hori-
zontal plane, and hence the sticks did not meet end to end. Long
branches of a plant called baris that has a slender, glossy-black,
stiff stem, were tied to the projecting sticks, every baris stem being
split into shreds — one large shred and eight small shreds for the
long bamboo, while the stems for the shorter pole were cut into
twelve shreds each.
The attachment of leaf-pennants and of flowers completed the
decoration of the poles. Great bulla leaves were cut or torn into
spread from the Ainu to the neighboring people of the Amur region, — the Gilyak, the
Orok, the Gold, and the Orochi ... Judging from Krasheninnikof’s description, an anal-
ogous phenomenon exists among the Kamchadal, but with the substitution of fibres of
sedge-grass for shavings.” (p. 430) “The Jnao of the Ainu.” Boas anniversary volume,
pp. 425—437. 1906.
Several years earlier, Furness had suggested a like interpretation for the symbolism of
the shavings. He says of the Kayans, when they select a camphor tree, “if all omens are
favorable, and they find that the tree is likely to prove rich in camphor, they plant
near their hut a stake, whereof the outer surface has been cut into curled shavings and
tufts down the sides and at the top. I suggest as possible that these shavings represent
the curling tongues of flame which communicate with the unseen powers).” The Home-
life of Borneo Head-hunters, pp. 167—168, 1902.
The Kayans are said to have lost sight of the significance of this ceremonial element,
and the Bagobo suggested no explanation.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 135
ribbon-like strips, which were fastened on by piercing them with
the stiff, wiry stems of the baris branches, so that an effect of
waving green pennants was, perhaps unconsciously, secured. Finally,
the symbolic flowers of the Bagobo warrior — red kalimping and
blossoms from the scarlet and gold darudu — were tied to the
projecting tips of the baris stems, and also to the bulla-leaves. The
last flowers and leaf-strips were added, and the final touches given,
after the raising of the poles.
At the same time with the processes just described, other Bagobo
were thrusting into the upper end of the hollow poles bouquets
composed of leaves and flowers of different kinds, with white clusters
of tender young leaf-buds and undeveloped fruit from the areca-
palm. These clusters are called wbus, and form one of the characteristic
decorations of the ceremonial bamboos. Sprays of ubus may be worn
at the throat, or stuck in the leglets, or tied to the spears of brave
men who have killed other men. A large part of these clusters of
leaves and flowers were concealed within the bamboo trunks, but
they protruded for a short distance from the openings.
The next proceeding was to raise the poles into place, so that
they should stand upright beneath the steepest part of the roof,
and directly in front of the altar called balekat. The shorter bamboo
was easily lifted to a vertical position, so that its upper end rested
against a joist of the slanting roof; but when the long bamboo had
been raised to an angle of some fifteen degrees from the vertical
it was found to be too long, by several inches, for the extreme
height of the roof, and it could not be forced to stand up straight,
so as to touch the ridge-pole as custom demanded. This check to
the performances proved a serious matter; for to let the bamboo
stand at a slant would be contrary to custom and hence unlucky ;
while to cut it shorter would be a sacrilege, certain to be followed
by the sickness or the death of somebody. The old men and women
talked over the matter, and everybody wore a graye and anxious
face. My crass suggestion that they break the roof was dismissed
as if unthinkable, and a long delay ensued, followed by a fresh
attack on the pole, a new adjustment, a pressure from the upper
end of the bamboo against the yielding joists and the thatch of
grass, and a tacit consent of all concerned to allow the ceremonial
bamboo to stand at a slant removed by an extremely small angle
from the vertical.
Just as the decoration of the poles was finished, there were brought
136 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
into the house two long rods of the slender, brittle-stemmed variety
of bamboo called balekayo. These were to serve as an additional
frame on which to hang fine textiles and other garments for the
ceremonial exhibit. They were very long, from one-half to two-
thirds the length of the entire house, and they were lifted to their
place between the two rods of laya that ran lengthwise of the house,
and parallel to them. The usual bindings of rattan fastened the
balekayo to the heavy cross-timbers of the house. Immediately
afterwards, a number of long-shafted spears were brought to the
ceremonial bamboos, and tied to them, At the moment of attaching
the spears, Datu Oleng said a few ritual words, which I was unable
to record. The spears stood with their points up, in the usual
position of a spear at rest, when it is customary to thrust into the
earth the sharp-pointed cone with which the handle is tipped.
While the rite with the spears was in progress, the women and
girls were gathering together all the new hemp textiles that, with
tireless industry, they had dyed, woven, washed and polished, and
with the textiles they piled up many women’s waists, men’s trousers,
salugboy (scarfs), fresh cotton textiles and various other articles.
All these they now brought forward and hung on the balekayo.
rods and on the long poles of the frame of laya wood that had
been put up, primarily, for the agongs. The function of the three
crossbars of this frame now became apparent, for so large a number
of garments and stuffs were displayed that they covered every inch
of the laya and balekayo, lengthwise and crosswise, thus making a
sort of rectangular super-enclosure within which the ceremonies
proceded. This is the annual occasion when the highly artistic work
of the women is spread out to view, when all the guests may see,
as in a picture gallery, the decorative designs done in glistening
hemp, the rich embroidery, the figured patterns formed by tiny
dises of mother of pearl. Ordinarily, the Bagobo keep all their
treasures packed away in tight yellow wood boxes or in baskets,
leaving the room, even in wealthy families, bare of all furnishings
except the loom, the altar and the hearth. Even at the Ginum,
the exhibition appeared to be purely a ceremonial affair. The girls
spread their beautiful things over the frames with a serious and
quiet mien, as if they thought only of the gods, for whose pleasure
the offerings were made, and who alone were to enjoy the spirit,
or essence, of the material objects.
Immediately after this, the sugar cane liquor was brought in. It
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 137
was carried in three long vessels of bamboo that Andan and Agwas
had made while we were waiting for the coming in of the two
great bamboos. These vessels, called ba/anan, had handles for the
more convenient bearing and pouring of the liquor, whereas the
ordinary water-bucket (sekkadi) has no handle. The balabba was
brought in by young men, who proceeded to pour out some of the
dark brown liquor into a tall metal jar, called tagudan ka balabba,
that had just been placed in the Long House. They stood up against
the wall the balanan holding the remainder of the liquor, to be
kept for the evening rites. After this, there was a short intermission;
it was long past noon, and nobody had eaten since very early that
morning.
The central event of the Ginum, namely, the sacrifice offered to
the god of the balekat, took place on the evening of the fourth
day, the preliminaries being handled in the afternoon. After the
intermission, Datu Oleng carried a cock that had been tied in the
house down under the house, where it was shot by Ido, with an
arrow having a head of bamboo. The fowl was plucked under the
house, and then brought up into the house again, where it was cut
into pieces by Muku, a brother of Singan’s. He cut it up in the
same manner that the Bagobo cook commonly prepares a chicken
for the pot: that is to say, opening the fowl by one lengthwise
gash of the work-knife, removing entrails and opening gizzard,
chopping off the wings, tearing off the skin by a downward pull
over the legs, striking off the legs, and finally cutting the body,
wings and legs into very small squarish chunks. Before this pro-
cess was finished, another ceremonial detail of import was in progress.
Against the west wall, and near the two bamboos, the shrine
called balekdt hung in its usual place. It consisted of seven piles
of old and smoke-grimed bowls and saucers, suspended by rattan
hangers in the customary manner. Directly in front of this altar,
the young men put up the broad shelf called taguan?” ka balekdt,
and attached it firmly to the timbers of the roof by means of
strong bands of plaited rattan. It hung at quite a distance above
our heads, so that, in order to place or to remove anything from
the shelf, the altar assistant was obliged to climb up the wall, and
209 Taguan is a word that expresses the idea of a receptacle of some sort. It may be
a shelf, as ftaguan ka sekkadié (shelf for water-flasks), or taguan ka balekdt (altar-shelf);
it may be ¢aguan ka sulu (torch-holder); or taguan ka balabba (jar for balabba).
138 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
on along the sloping roof, a feat easily accomplished by the help
of house-posts and cross-timbers, and of that monkey-like agility
which is characteristic of the movements of Bagobo youths.
The balekat now being complete for the sacrificial offerings, the
composition of the elements that were to form the offerings pro-
ceeded. The sacred food that is placed before the Tolus ka Balekat,
and afterwards eaten by the men and boys, is a mixture of chicken,
red rice and cocoanut. The dessicated fowl, to which some cocoa-
nut is added, is cooked by itself, while the bulk of the cocoanut
pulp, with all of the rice, is cooked in a separate set of vessels
After being taken from the fire, the contents of the different ves-
sels — chicken, rice and cocoanut — are mingled together, before
being offered to the god.
When Muku had cut the fowl into bits, he separated it into
two portions, the portion on his right hand for the men, the por-
tion on his left hand for the adolescent boys. In the meantime,
Inok was scraping out white pulp from one-half of a ripe cocoanut,
with a grater called parod. This is a little piece of cocoanut shell,
armed with a row of teeth notched on one edge. The curve of the
remaining margin of the shell fits nicely into the hollow of the palm.
As the shredded cocoanut pulp fell down in little heaps, Muku
picked it up, handful by handful, and mixed it with the chicken-
meat at his right hand. He rubbed each handful of cocoanut thor-
oughly with a small part of the chicken, and dropped the mixture
into a bamboo joint. He put each handful of cocoanut and chicken
as soon as he had rubbed them together into the vessel, then picked
up more cocoanut, mixed it with same of the remaining chicken
meat, and so on, until all of the chicken on his right was disposed
of. Next, he rubbed shredded cocoanut, in the same manner, with
the pile of chicken meat on his left hand, but all of this mixture
he put into a second bamboo joint. Both of the two bamboo ves-
sels had been lined with sarabak leaves before the mess of cocoanut
and chicken was dropped into them. Finally, Muku poured into
each of the vessels sufficient water to cover, in part, the food and
tied up the openings with leaves of hemp or of sarabak.
Simultaneously, or a little later, nine other bamboo vessels, called
lulutan, were being filled with rice and cocoanut in the following
manner. Inok continued to grate cocoanut from the same_ half
section of the nut, until he had seraped all of the pulp from the
shell. Then, from a large basket beside him, he took a quantity
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 139
of raw red rice that had been crushed in the mortar, and stirred it
up with the shredded cocoanut. The red rice is called omok, and is
one of the special forms of sacrificial food.?'® I understood that
the same name (omok) was given to the mixture of red rice and
cocoanut. Another young man, Ayang, took a part of the little
pile of red rice and cocoanut, heaped it on a sarabak leaf, and laid
on it another sarabak leaf. He then lifted the leaves with their
contents, so that his palms did not touch the omok, and pressed
the whole into one of the bamboo vessels — the lulutan. <A very
little cold water had previously been poured into the vessel. Im-
mediately afterward, Buak filled a second lulutan in the same man-
ner, thus using up the remaining cocoanut from the first half shell.
Inok then attacked the other half of the nut and scraped out all
of the meat, which he mixed with the rest of the red rice, where-
upon Ayang and Buak proceeded to fill seven additional lulutan.
Each of the bamboo vessels was filled up to about two-thirds of
its capacity, or a little less; but the amount put into each did not
vary, for Buak measured the content exactly, every time, by in-
serting a little stick of laya wood into the vessel and minutely
examining the point to which the moisture mark rose. When the
nine lulutan had been prepared, Inok tied together the two empty
halves of cocoanut shell with rattan so as to make one hollow nut,
which he left ready to hang on the altar at the close of the even-
ing ceremony.
The nine lulutan and the two bamboo joints containing the chicken
and cocoanut were then carried down the steps to a place under the
house, where each vessel was filled to the rim with cold water,
and its top tied securely with a leaf-covyer. On stones encircling
a wood fire, all of the vessels were placed where the food might
steam until soft, the fresh green bamboo being not at all inflammable.
It was then deep dusk, and we hastened up into the now dark
house so that we might be in time to see the illumination. Long
torch-chains of bidti nuts, that had been strung a week earlier,
were now to be lighted to take the place, for this one night, of the
71° T have been told that the root of a plant, probably saffron, from which a yellow
dye is obtained, is used at Ginum to stain the sacrificial food yellow, but, on this occasion,
I did not observe that any yellow stain played a part. Mandarangan, however, is said
to be very fond of yellow rice. Skeat mentions, frequently, the ceremonial value of yellow
among the peninsular Malays; but, as for the Bagobo, red and white seem to be the
colors chosen for offerings and for sacrificial use.
140 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ordinary torches of leaf-wrapped resin. To Maying, the second
in age of the virgin daughters of Oleng, the privilege of making
the sacred illumination was assigned. She hung several strings
of bidati nuts on the forked branches'of the native candelabra that
stood on the floor, and other strings she suspended from house
timbers. The nuts were rich in oil, and the flame flared up as
soon as lighted, the entire length of the sections being soon a row
of flickering lights. The Long House was as bright as if hundreds
of candles were burning. The silence was broken by a resounding
shout from the men, who now raised the war cry again at the
moment the blaze leaped forth.
Close upon the last war cry of that Talun Ginum, arrangements
for the eyening ceremonial were gotten under way, and the people
grouped themselves at their several activities in the appointed places
in the Long House: young women attended to the cooking of foods
— rice, pig, and venison — for the feast; old women prepared
leaf-dishes for a supplementary awas; young men tended the fire
under the house and watched the bamboo vessels in which the
sacred food was steaming; other young men up in the house helped
in the preparation of the feast, by placing cocoanuts ready to be
grated at a later hour. Some of the old men sat near the balekat,
while talking or making preliminary moves toward the altar cere-
mony now close at hand. Oleng was on his high seat (dega-dega)
just north of the balekat, from which he had been observing care-
fully the dressing of the fowl, the mixing of the ceremonial food,
and the succeeding activities. The weary guests sat in tightly-
packed lines on the floor, their faces wearing a patient, solemn
expression, and waited.
The ceremony over the chicken and omok was performed by
Oleng and Ido in front of the balekat, on the west side of the house
where broad leaves were laid.on the floor. On these, the contents
of the nine bamboo vessels containing the cooked rice and cocoanut,
and of the two vessels containing the chicken food were poured out,
the sarabak leaves being left in the lulutan. The chicken and rice
which had been boiled separately were now together in one brown
soft mass forming a mixture called taroanan. But in spite of the
apparent homogeneity of the food, there was a sharp distinction be-
tween the right-hand and the left-hand portions, for, in mixing
the chicken and rice, Ido or his assistant poured the contents of
the men’s bamboo on the rice to his right, and that of the boys’
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 141
bamboo on the rice to his left, thus keeping the two apart as Muku
had done in filling the vessels. The two halves of the sacred food
were marked by two sarabak leaves that Ido laid upon it, one leaf
on the right-hand portion and one on the left, with a very narrow
space between the ends of the leaves to mark the dividing line.
Upon each sarabak leaf he put eight pieces of areca-nut, and in
front of the aisle between the leaves, one entire areca-nut upon a
buyo leaf. Standing before Ido were two white bowls for balabba.
Immediately in front of the sacred food, Ido sat, while Oleng
took his place a little to the left, at the southeast corner of the
altar, and Malik, son-in-law to Oleng, sat between the two datu.
At the south end of the taroanan, were Buak, Inok and Ayang,
watching with deep interest the proceedings, and ready to assist in
handing about utensils. The chief of Bansalan sat on the dega-dega
but fell asleep during the ceremony, and did not waken until near
its close.
The only material offerings to be seen besides the food and drink
were a small pile of shells, little brass linked chains and miscel-
laneous ornaments that lay on the floor at Oleng’s left hand.
This collective gift, called pamading, was put there, I was told,
so that the Bagobo would get rich; but I did not observe that it
was touched during the ceremony, or that attention was directed
toward it. No doubt it was a case of simply laying before the
gods valued objects, with an expectation of receiving back a mani-
fold increase.
Mention should here be made of four vessels called garong,*"'
which had an important part to play at the altar ceremonial.
They were large cylinders of freshly-cut laya bamboo, with fitted
lids shaped from the nodal joints. The four garong were of uni-
form size, and each had, perhaps, five or six times the containing
capacity of the lulutan in which the rice was cooked. They had been
211 Bamboo vessels, looking much alike, receive different names, according to the function
c{ each type. The sekkadu is a water-flask; the balanan is a vessel with handles and
contains sugar cane wine; the lulutan is the vessel in which the red rice and cocoanut
mixture is steamed, while the garong is a vessel decorated with shavings and reserved
especially for altar use, including the sacred function of being elevated to the shelf with
its contents of food or of wine. Hach of these vessels consists of one internode of bamboo,
of which one of the nodes forms the bottom of the vessel and the other node is utilized,
often, for the lid.
I have no record of the specific name for the bamboo vessels that contained the chicken ;
possibly they, too, are called lulutan.
142 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
made that same day, immediately after the bamboos were filled
with green sprays. Like the bamboos, the four garong were orna-
mented with festoons of curled shavings peeled off in regular
clusters on the surface of the vessel, two garong having nine
clusters of shavings, and the other two, eight clusters. Two of
these vessels were intended for drink offerings, and two for food
offerings. At the beginning of the ceremony we are now discussing,
the two garong destined for drink offerings were filled with sugar
cane liquor, poured from the balanan by one of the young men
who were serving as altar attendants. From one of the garong
(now full of balabba), the sacred liquor was poured into two bowls
that stood in front of Ido, between him and the sacrificial food.
The other garong full of liquor was elevated to the shelf of the
balekat. To do this, one of the attendants climbed up from the
south wall and then along the roof, until he was close to the south
end of the shelf of the balekat. The vessel was then handed up
to him by Ido(?) and placed on the shelf, where it remained
throughout the following rites.
The more distinctively sacrificial part of the ceremony opened
with the stirring of the sugar cane wine in the two bowls. For
this purpose two spoons, known as barakas, were used, the spoons
being made of small sections of bulla leaf twisted to the shape of
bowl and handle, and the stem-handle tied in a knot. The larger
spoon had tied to its handle a red blossom of kalimping, and the
smaller spoon was adorned with a scarlet blossom that had tasseled
petals. Ido dipped into the bowl of balabba on his right hand the
smaller spoon, and, having taken it out with a little of the brown
liquor, he laid it with the liquor in it beside the bowl. In the
same manner, he dipped the larger spoon into the left-hand bowl,
took it out and laid it, holding a few drops of liquor, beside the
left-hand bowl. He then stirred the balabba in the bowl to the
right, with a small spray of manangid, and thereupon, either Ido
or Oleng, with a second spray of manangid, stirred the contents of
the bowl to the left.
The Gurrugga, or worship, was then performed by Datu Oleng,
who, in his priestly character, laid before the Tolus ka Balekat the
flesh of a victim slain in sacrifice, together with those selected products
of the field and fruit of the trees that are most highly valued by
the Bagobo — rice and cocoanut and areca-nuts and the precious
wine extracted from sugar cane. In his right hand, Oleng held a
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 143
small tube of hard bamboo, such as is used everywhere by the
Bagobo to contain powdered lime. From the lime-tube, he sprinkled
lime on the sixteen pieces of areca-nut, by sifting the white powder
in showers through a little sieve stopper of rattan that closed the
end of the tube. As he repeated certain ritual words, he made frequent
passes, tube in hand, to and fro over the sacred food, often pointing
the lime-tube toward the food and toward the areca-nuts on it. In
the low, conversational tone of voice so often heard at a Bagobo
ceremony, Datu Oleng said: “Tolus ka Balekat, I am making a
Ginum this year for you. I have prepared eight areca-nuts and I
pray to you, while offering you the areca-nuts. Tolus ka Balekat,
you demand a human victim this year, as in the years before when
we celebrated the Ginum, but now we do not kill a man in sacrifice
any more, because the Americans now hold control, and we are
using a little American custom in giving you no human victim.
Instead, we have killed a chicken,?!* which we offer to you with
the red rice.” Oleng then sprinkled lime on the betel several times,
and stirred the balabba in the left hand bowl with his spray of
manangid, whereupon Ido stirred the contents of the right hand bowl
with the other spray of manangid. Following this, the two spoons
of bulla leaf, each still having in it a small amount of balabba,
were handed up to be placed upon the shelf of the balekat, the
young man, Madaging, having climbed up for that act.
Next followed a ceremonial drinking and a chewing of betel.
Datu Oleng, Datu Ido, Sali, and other men of renown, drank from
the two sacred bowls of sugar cane liquor, and passed the bowls
from one to another until they were drained to the bottom. There-
upon, the men about the altar took the sixteen pieces of areca-nut
that lay on the sacred food, and chewed them in the customary
manner. Some other men then took areca-nut from the altar and
chewed it.
Up to this point, the sacrificial food had lain spread out before
the god, but in plain sight of all the people as well. Now, it must
be passed up for the enjoyment of the great deity of the balekat
alone. It was not put back into the same vessels in which it had
212 “Whatever kind of sacrifice is asked for by the gharu-spirit must ... be given,
with the exception of the human sacrifice which, as it is expressly stated, may be com-
pounded by the sacrifice of a fowl.’ W. W. Skear: Malay Magic, p. 211.
The Malay magician says that “if the spirit craves a human victim a cock may be
substituted.” Idid., p. 72.
144 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
been cooked, but into the two large shaved bamboo vessels (garong)
that still stood empty. Ido filled these garong with the taroanan,
or sacred food, and carefully drew together and gathered up the
last scraps clinging to the broad leayes on which the food had been
spread. Then he closed the vessels with their tight stoppers, and
passed then up to be placed on the shelf beside the garong of wine.
There they remained during the music, the dances, the chanting
and the feast, and were not taken down until after the old men’s
statement of exploits.
As soon as the taroanan was elevated to the shelf, Inok hung
up, below the balekat, the cocoanut shells that he had tied together
at the time the omok was mixed. At that moment, the profound
stillness that had lasted for an hour and a half broke to the sound
of the big drum, beat with dull monotonous taps, and accompanied
by resounding strokes on the agongs. This was the signal announ-
cing the close of the altar ceremonial. All the men who had been
drinking balabba at once discharged an animated flow of talk, but
the utter silence prevailing throughout the rest of the company
remained unbroken.
Before this point in the ceremonies, a supplementary awas had
taken place over a number of extremely small leaf-dishes which were
said to number two hundred — a rite conducted by the old women,
Miyanda and Singan. ‘This sacred office was going on at the same
time as the altar ceremony, and hence was not observed by me, but
was reported to have occurred after the taroanan food was spread
on the altar, and before Oleng said the prayers over it. I failed to
ascertain what was afterward done with the leaf-dishes, but, if their
disposition followed that of the other leaf-dishes at the three preceding
awas, they would have been taken out and laid down by the wayside.
It was not until after drum-beat that the chanting of Gindaya
began, but from this time on, ceremonial chants were given at
intervals throughout the entire night. The sons and nephews of
Oleng carried much of the burden of the gindaya; they sang in
the customary antiphons, one against one, or two against two, with
recitatives intervening in the usual manner.
After the opening performance of gindaya, the music of the agongs
called the dancers to the floor. The first dance was done by three
warriors alone who were dressed in embroidered trousers, fine beaded
jackets and tankulu of a very dark chocolate color, the tint showing
that they were brave (magani) men, whose human victims were
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 145
many. This and the later dances were all performed in the same
part of the house in which the bamboo poles stood, and in which
the altar was situated. They danced on the restricted portions of
the floor on each side of the two bamboos. This initial dance of
the men was followed by a second ceremonial chant.
At this Ginum, there were eleven agongs suspended from the laya
rods. Four of uniform size formed the upper row, and each was
named Matio. Just below them hung four others of uniform size,
but somewhat larger than the four above them. The agongs in
this lower row were called, from left to right, respectively, Tarabun,
Mabagong, Marubur, Mabagong. The eight instruments just mentioned
were all played by one expert musician, who beat tap-tap while
dancing in the customary manner of an agong-player. Suspended
just below the eight was another agong considerably larger in cir-
cumference, but of shallow convexity. It bore the name of Inagongan,
and a woman performed on it, beating an accompaniment to the
theme of the leading musician. Beside the Inagongan, hung a very
small instrument called Bandiran, on which a child rang the tones.
Some little distance to the right of the ten instruments just named,
was suspended an agong of exceedingly large size that was tapped
by a man as an accompaniment, and that bore the same name as
the woman’s instrument — Inagongan. One or two drums, each
beaten by two persons, a man and a woman, assisted the eleven
agongs at every set performance.
Now came the event that had been looked forward to with keen
anticipation by the weary people — the general drinking of the
fragrant and delicious balabba. So little food had been served for
the preceding twenty-four hours that it seemed more like a day of
abstinence than a festival, for when the Bagobo are preparing for
a great celebration, they pay no attention to bodily wants. Many
of the guests had tramped a long distance over the mountains and
were very tired; the refreshment of this first drink of balabba re-
lieved the tension greatly. When the liquor was served, separate
cups were supplied to the special guests, but a few large bowls
sufficed for the majority of the company, who passed the same
bowl from hand to hand. As fast as emptied, the bowls were re-
filled from the large metal jar, or from the fourth garong of
bamboo.
Three successive periods of chanting Gindaya succeeded the
drinking. Then followed the beating of agongs in dance measure,
10
146 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
a signal which brought girl dancers to the floor.*!* They were in
festival costume of shining hemp skirts; short, tight-fitting waists of
cotton, decorated with conventional designs done in fine needle-work ;
bracelets and leglets of brass and of bell-metal cast from a wax mould.
These ornaments were hollow, and each inclosed a number of tiny,
freely-rolling globes of metal that tinkled in the movements of the
dance. The girls wore, also, necklaces of beads, pure white or
many-colored; inlaid ear-plugs connected by tasseled pendants of
white beads that passed under the chin; and some wore wide belts
bordered with small, hand-cast bells.
When the dancing was done, two young men approached the
bamboos, and standing there, each with one arm encircling a pole,
they began afresh the monotonous yet sweet-toned chant that
lasted until the banquet opened.
Ever since the conclusion of the altar ceremony, many women
and men had been dishing up food and making preparations for
serving that houseful of guests. All of this work was going on
at one end of the Long House, while the chanting and the dancing
were in progress at the other end. Under Sigo’s direction, Sambil,
Sebayan and three other girls, filled the hemp-leaf dishes that had
been made five days earlier with an appetizing mess just dished
from the big clay pots, and called /wnodn. The ingredients were
white rice, grated cocoanut, hashed yenison and pig fat. Other de-
licious cocoanut mixtures were being prepared to be served with
the kumodan. Several of the young men halved and grated the co-
coanuts, Whereupon other men caught up the white shreds by hand-
fuls and mixed with boiled and slivered fish, manipulating the
food swiftly with fingers and palms. Other men mixed bits of
venison with grated cocoanut, and still others cut off narrow, thin
slices of fresh boiled pork. Three men were kept busy in handing
out to the women these foods as they were ready. Bansag handed
up the pork; another man, the cocoanut-venison; and another, the
cocoanut-fish. The five girls filled all of the leaf-dishes — an indi-
vidual leaf-dish for each guest, and one for every member of the
family. They pressed into each leaf-dish a large portion of the
rice and meat stew, and a small portion of cocoanut-venison and
of cocoanut-fish.
21% See also pp. 85—87 for a discussion of the dance. The Bagobo say that Mandar-
angan comes to see the dance, and watches its performance with pleasure.
t~
rr
1
“Loyyne oy} Aq YoROYS ploy YFnor v wos wemysiyO araap <q umeacy ‘uvtipurg (Q[) Suvsuosvuy (TT ‘g) fmquaeyy ())
‘suonuqemy (g 9) funqerez, (¢) four (fF ‘eg *g ‘T) :sSu0Se jo SOMBN “LOG “Wsnsny ‘unpey, ye wu Jo uo1yRIqazao oy} JV pasn yuoulasie.ry
asnoyy buoy sbuag nog yw shuobp — -e ‘OT
©
ID MYTH
IG AN
G
EREMONIAL, MA
Y
4
T, BAGOBO (
Y
4
BENEDIC
——
148 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Eight large plates of heavy white crockery were prepared with
special attention to arrangement and quantity of viands, for they
were to be served to the eight most distinguished guests at the
Ginum. An ample supply of the kumoan stew was heaped on the
plate, and pressed into pyramidal shape; the white food of cocoa-
nut and slivered fish was piled beside the stew, and the whole
bordered by bits of venison that had been first roasted, and then
broiled to a hard crisp. This last-named delicacy appeared only
on the plates of the eight elect, of whom I was one, the other
seven being datu and other Bagobo of note.
We all sat on the floor, tightly packed in solid rows, between
which the girls made their way and, with the help of a few young
men, handed to each of us a leaf-dish or a plate. I failed to note
just which were the “distinguished guests,” besides myself, who
received the special plates, but among them may have been in-
cluded Datu Yting of Santa Cruz; the datu of Bansalan; the two
brothers of Tonkaling, datu of Sibuldn; Sali, elder brother to Oleng,
and Awi. When all were served, Ido called out in a loud voice,
“Langun pomankit!’ (“Let all eat!) and in reply all the people
shouted out in unison, “Mimankid!” (“We will begin to eat.’’)
There were few words spoken after that until the end of the meal,
for we were all well-nigh famished. Swiftly the leaf-dishes were
emptied and the plates cleared, as with eager fingers the food was
rushed to the mouth. Scarcely had the meal come to a close when
the ceremonial offices were resumed.
The recitation of exploits began. An aged man, wrinkled and
gaunt from continued privations, his shriveled skin clinging close
to the bones of his famished face, stepped toward the ceremonial
bamboos and, clasping a pole with one hand, made a statement
hefore the god of the balekat, and in the presence of the assem-
bled people, to the effect that he had slain a certain number of
men during his lifetime. All the Bagobo listened attentively, but
made no comment, or gave sign either of dissent or of applause.
It was Sali, brother of Oleng, who was making the recital. Di-
rectly he had finished, another old man came forward, and then
another, each grasping a pole, or one of the spears attached to the
hamboos, throughout his recitation. No man may lay hold of the
hamboos, or of the ceremonial spears, unless he has killed at least
one man. If any man break this tabu, he will be struck down
by some terrible illness.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 149
When Datu Oleng made his recitation, he stated that he had
killed thirty men, and he then gave a charge to the bamboo and
to the balekayo and to the ogbus vine that they were to keep on
growing until the Ginum should be celebrated next year. Oleng
was followed by Awi, who gave a lengthy autobiographical nar-
rative telling how he had killed eighteen men in one locality; and
the circumstances which led him to kill nine men in another
place; and then, at a later period, eleven more; and how, on a
certain occasion, he had killed one woman; and, at another time,
one man; and, finally, how he slew three ‘men — a total of
forty-three on the face of the statement. Right here, however,
there comes into play a remarkable tabu that changes the result of
the count.
When a brave old Bagobo, while holding the bamboo pole, takes
his oath on the number of men he has killed, he must always give
one half the actual number, for if he should dare to state the
correct figure he would be attacked by disease. Moreover, his
audacity would be manifest to all the people, for if, while clasping
the pole, he should reveal the true number of his victims, the
great bamboo would instantly split, from the top down through
the entire length of the pole, without blow from human_ hand.
The man’s own Mandarangan, or personal war-god, would cause the
bamboo to split, because the man has spoken the truth about his
exploits. Applying this key, therefore, to the recitations of Oleng
and of Awi, we double the count of each, and discover that Oleng
had sent down to Gimokudan sixty individuals, and that Awi’s
victims reached the grand total of eighty-six. This case is a fair
illustration of that indirectness which forms such an essential ele-
ment in the psychic complex of the Malay. Other instances, too,
of what we call dishonesty or lying, may, perhaps as easily, be
often traced to some religious scruple, or to some ethical restraint,
making it incumbent on a man to say something less, or something
more, than the truth.
When the old men had finished checking up their achievements,
a rite of peculiar significance took place, namely, the eating of the
sacred food that a little while before had been offered to the god
of the balekat. The deity was supposed to feast on the spiritual
essence of the food, but the material part was partaken of by the
Bagobo men and adolescent boys, this being one of the very few
privileges tabu to women. The two garong containing the sacred
150 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
food were lifted down from the shelf, and the contents poured out
on the leaves that had been laid below the hanging-altar. The
distinction between the portion for the men and that for the boys
was still preserved, so that, just as before, the men’s food lay to
the right of the officiating datu, and the boys’ food to his left.
Old men near the altar ate first, and then the others, a few at a
time approaching without formality, each thrusting the fingers of
one hand into the taroanan and conyeying a small portion to his
lips, the boys taking from the left side and the men from the right.
Only the Bagobo and men from tribes closely akin in language
and in appearance are permitted to eat the sacred food. Any male
guest from the Guianga tribe, I was told, would be accepted at the
altar like a Bagobo visitor; but no Bila-an, or Ata, or Kulaman,
or a man from any other of those neighboring groups with which
the Bagobo trade and intermarry, would be permitted to eat the
taroanan. My own observation bore out this statement, for although
ten or fifteen Bila-an had been at Mati for weeks waiting for the
festival to begin, not a man of them approached the altar. Yet
one of Ido’s wives was a Bila-an woman, and the entire party of
her tribe was entertained at Ido’s house.
Now that the strain of the religious exercises was past, the people
fell to drinking sugar cane liquor with a freedom that up to this
time had not been permitted. The bowls were passed round, first
to guests from other towns and afterwards to the people of the
home yillage. Speeches of an informal nature followed the first or
second round of drinks. Datu Oleng and Datu Yting spoke on
various little happenings of the week, and Yting urged the men
not to drink enough to make them boisterous, but to remember
that the senora was present.
Soon the chanting of Gindaya rose again, and continued at inter-
vals throughout the entire night. Balabba flowed freely all night,
and some of the men kept on drinking until noon the next day,
so that they grew hilarious, and finally drowsy from the effects
of a drink which is but slightly intoxicating, unless taken in large
quantities. The extreme sweetness and rich quality of this liquor
often proves too much for a people accustomed to a slim diet,
and many Bagobo are sick the day following a festival. There
often follows a period of exhaustion that almost prostrates an old
man for some little time. Datu Yting had planned to return
to Santa Cruz immediately after the festival, but it was two or
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 151
three days before he felt strong enough to make the journey. ?!'
Arrangement of the Long House. The Long House, called
Dakul Bale, has another name that refers, possibly, to its security
from evil spirits. It is known in Gindaya chants as the *Tina-
malung Tambubung,” or “shady, well-roofed house.” The phrase
that best combines these various elements is “long, narrow house
with a good roof.”
On first entering the Long House, it appeared to be one con-
tinuous room, for there were no dividing walls, or noticeable par-
titions. Yet there were actually five compartments with distinct
functions, in which separate activities connected with the festival
took place. The lines of separation between the rooms consisted
in strips of bamboo or of palma brayva,*!® running the width of the
house and projecting barely above the level. These relief partitions
were tied to the same timbers to which the slats of the floor were
lashed. There was a double floor, the lower one being of balekayo,
and the upper of split bamboo of the larger variety (kawayan).
This upper floor, or carpet, was made from internodal sections of
bamboo, averaging 12'/, feet in length. The green sections are put
71% The following description of a Mandaya ceremonial is interesting to refer to at
this point, because it combines, in one complex, elements that appear at several different
ceremonies of the Bagobo Ginum: the rectangular altar made of four smaller altars
suggesting the sonaran of agongs; the floral decorations; the great bamboo set up in the
middle of the space; the drum-call at the opening of the festival; the costumed dancers;
the interview with Mansilatan in which the emotional disturbance shown by the priestesses,
the following silence, and the devotions as a whole resemble very closely the Bagobo
manganito; the offerings of areca (Jonga) and of betel (4uyo); the feasting and drinking at
the close of the ceremony.
“Otro sacrificio es el Talibung. Para celebrarlo levantan cuatro altares en forma de
reetangulo, y cado esquina del altar es adornada con flores. En medio de estos cuatro
altares, colocan una cafa gruesa de tres brazas de largo con sus hojas. Se inagura la
funcion al son del guzmbao 6 tamboril, salen tres 6 cuatro dailanes bien vestidas, organizan
un baile al rededor de dichos altares. — Al cabo de cuatro 6 cinco vueltas se sientan i
la vez, tiemblan, eruptan prolongadamente, sigue Juego un silencio sepulchral en cuyo
tiempo fingen el descenso de Mansilatan y su conversacion con ellas, en cuyo tiempo les
infunde el espiritu profético, le adoran Juego, y le ofrece cada cual su pollo asado y
partido, juntamente con algunos camarones, los cuales mezolan con 4uyo hecho de tabaco,
cal, fruta y hoja de la bonga, despues de cuya ofrenda repiten su baile, sientase, tiemblan,
eruptan, escuchan a su dios, anuncian la buena cosecha, la curacion de la enfermedad,
el buen viaje, y luego sigue la accion de gracias en el festin y la borachera de costumbre.”
P. Pasretts: Cartas, vol. 2, pp. 39—40. 1879.
*1° Lalma brava: Coripha minor. The Bagobo call it basag. It is a blackish wood,
strong and hard-grained, and is much used for building purposes, both for upright timbers
and in place of split bamboo for the slats of floors.
152 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
through a process of striking, cracking and splitting to make them
Hexible, so that they can be laid down flat to form the ‘asug ka
kawayan” (floor of large bamboo).
The room farthest south had a platform floor, raised by a few
inches above the rest of the house floor, and the edge of this plat-
form seryed as a seat, it being the nearest approach to a bench
that the house contained. This room was occupied entirely by guests
from other towns with a few from the same village. They all sat
crowded close together, covering this slightly elevated platform.
The next room to the north formed the center of religious rites,
and contained the sacred objects connected with the celebration.
Near the centre, the two ceremonial bamboos stood; the agongs
hung on the east side; the hanging altar was on the west wall,
and below it the sacred food was spread; a space on each side of
the two bamboo poles remained for the dancers. The dega-dega,
or high seat from which Oleng reviewed the ceremonial, was just
north of the balekat.
The third room was utilized in various ways. Attached to the
east wall was the wide guest-bed of bamboo. It was 10 feet, 2
inches in length, and 4 feet, 1 inch in width, and would accommodate
a number of men, sleeping side by side, their bodies across the width
of the bed; that is, at right angles to the wall. As many more
could sleep on the floor below, just as in a lower Pullman berth.
On the floor beside the bed, the young men cut in halves ripe
cocoanuts, and mixed venison and fish with cocoanut-meat. The
west side of this room caught the overflow of visitors, especially
young. girls who, with a few men, sat in well-packed rows on the
Hoor. A narrow aisle, between the cocoanuts and the girls, made
possible locomotion from the north end of the house to the ceremonial
room. 7!°
In the fourth room, the women were filling leaf-dishes with food
for all the people; piles of the leaf-dishes lay on the floor near
the west wall. On the east side was the vacant floor space used
by the older members of Oleng’s family for rest at night.
The last room to the north, and the smallest of the five, was the
kitchen, which opened upon a yery small poreh, In the northeast
*1° The uprights and the long bamboo rods that formed the frame of the loom, from
which the last textile had been removed before the festival, kept their place against the
west wall, in this third room.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 153.
corner of the room were the three large stones that formed the
native fire-place. They rested on a bed of earth several inches
high, banked by strips of wood, and having an area sufficient to hold,
besides the fire-stones, big clay pots, piles of kindling-wood, and a
little group of people who would gather round the fire. On this
hearth, during the Ginum, all of the boiling and the broiling pro-
cesses were carried on, and here, after the visitors had trooped off,
the members of the family would gather to roast corn and to chat.
Festival of Ginum at Tubison. On May 27—28, 1907, almost
three months earlier than the Talun festival, it was my privilege
to be a guest, during the last fifteen hours, at the celebration of
Ginum at Tubison, a mountain village at the top of a steep ascent
several hours ride northwest of Santa Cruz. Datu Imbal and his
wife, Siat, were the hosts. The festival was held three days before
the expected sprouting of the rice in Imbal’s fields, as he had planted
somewhat earlier than several other Bagobo who, during that very
week, were giving rice-sowing festivals to their neighbors. My obser-
vation of the ceremonies covered the period from about two hours
before sunset of one afternoon until one hour after sunrise of the
following morning. I shall here call attention to those ceremonial
details alone which present points of variation or contrast to identical
rites on the corresponding night at Talun; and, while passing over
those lines of ritual behavior that may be expected to manifest
themselves regularly at Ginum, I shall mention particularly some
few single religious functions that appeared at Tubison, and were
absent from Talun, as well as cases of the reversed situation.
The first important difference to be noted is one that touches the
order of ritual functions. The offering of material objects upon
the agong-altar with accompanying ceremonies ?'' (Sonar) which at
Talun took place on the third day of the festival, was performed
+17 The ceremony of placing the sacred food before the gods, and of reciting a liturgy
over it, probably took place very early in the evening. I must have missed that im-
portant rite, for I was told that a ceremonial had been performed at the agong-altar
abont dusk while I was in the grounds with the young people. If that were the case,
the rite must have been very much shorter thau at Talun. I feel pretty well convinced
that the betel ceremony which, at Talun, accompanied the rites over the sacred food was,
at Tubison, transferred to the Sonaran as described. In each case the officiating priest
placed sixteen slices of areca-nut on the altar, each being laid on a piece of betel-leaf;
they were separated into two sets of eight each, by sarabak leaves at Talun, and by the
little ceremonial spoon of bulls leaf at Tubison; and the betel was similarly sprinkled
with lime by the celebrant. Sugar cane liquor was drunk at the earlier ceremony a
154 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
at Tubison on this last night, as one of the early evening functions.
A single agong — a very large one — formed the altar, and on
this the entire ceremony was performed, there being no additional
agong holding water and medicine for lavations. The rite of washing
and the anito seance were both absent from the Sonar as performed
at Tubison. On the other hand, we have at Tubison the ceremonial
preparation and chewing of areca-nut and betel-leaf on the part of
the old men, a function which at Talun did not occur in connection
with the agong oblation. Another element of variation was the large
number of sacred dishes used in drinking the sugar cane liquor.
There were, in all, sixteen cups, saucers, and plates, eight being
placed to the right of the agong, and eight to the left; whereas
at Talun there were but four bowls and one individual cup. The
wide variety in the kinds of gifts brought to the altar at the Talun
feast has been noted; but at Tubison the offerings were noticeably
limited to swords, knives and brass armlets, *'’ there being no
textiles or bead-work or embroidery produced for the rite. Many
of the bracelets were brought tied in bunches, and a few of these
the celebrant fastened to the swords that leaned upon the agong.
In other respects, the details of Sonaran as performed at the two
places were fairly parallel.
The bamboo prayer-stands,*! called tambara, formed at Tubison
a more distinctive ceremonial element than at Talun. It will be
219
Tubison, I understood, as well as at the later one; just as at Talun this ritual drinking
occurred at the agong ceremony and also at the final sacrificial rites. As a whole, how-
ever, I should remark that the two ceremonies stood out from each other more sharply
distinct at Talun than at Tubison.
218 There were in all thirty-five brass armlets brought to the altar, in eight clusters
at different times, the clusters numbering from two to six armlets each; of these only
three were the fine bracelets cast from a wax mould and called daliniitung, the others
being the wire armlets punched in patterns and called pankis. As for the swords, they
were all of the long, one-edged type called sampilan — the most valued weapon among
Bagobo men, and always worn in full dress. The ritual performance over the agong
opened with eight kampilan piled one upon another, and resting in part on the floor,
and iu part on the agong. After the sugar cane wine had been poured into the sixteen
dishes, another kampilan was brought, thus giving nine, instead of the eight that at
Talun made the proper count.
249 In each corner of the house stood a bamboo prayer-stand (¢ambara) dedicated,
respectively, to the god of the house (dios ka balé), the god of the fire (dios ka apuy)
the personal guardian of our host (dios ku Dutu Iméal), and the unseen spiritual protector
called Tungo, this last shrine being set up with the particular intention of keeping the
family from sickness (“diri masakit to manobo tun to balé’’ — “not sick the people in
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 155
recalled that at the last-mentioned place bamboo stands functioned
merely as accessories to the agong rite, both in association with
the altar itself, and as shrines on which the gifts that had pre-
viously been offered on the agongs might be hung. At Tubison,
on the contrary, separate ritual recitations were uttered by the elder
brother of Datu Imbal, while standing before two of the four tam-
bara that occupied the corners of the house, and these devotions
were accompanied by some display of dramatic action which cannot
at the present time be discussed.
One of the distinguishing characteristics of this festival at Tubison
was the notable part taken by women, particularly in the singing.
While the chanting of gindaya was, as usual, reserved for young
men alone — indeed, the women told me that the daughters of
Datu Imbal did not know the words of the gindaya — yet many
other vocal performances were given by girls and women. My
notes, taken during the night, mention thirteen of these songs and
chants, six of which were performed by a chorus of adult women,
three by young girls assisted by a few young men, three were rec-
itatives by single female voices, and one was a duet between Imbal’s
sister and his brother’s son, the same nephew who carried the
burden of the gindaya. Alternating with the songs of the women,
or sometimes massed in consecutive numbers, came choruses by
male voices, including the war song (dwra), while ever and anon
rose the chanting of gindaya by Iti, Umpa and Imba, sons of Datu
Imbal, and by Umé, son of Imbal’s brother. Some of the women’s
songs were given in a high key and with an explosive utterance
that approached a shriek; others were softly chanted at a low pitch.
One, at least, of the women’s choruses was led by Siat, the wife
of Datu Imbal, a middle-aged woman of remarkably impelling per-
sonality, who took a prominent part in directing the schedule of
the entire night, acting, indeed, as a co-master of ceremonies with
Imbal himself. There was something very impressive in the execu-
the house’). It was before the two last-named shrines that the ritual recitations above
referred to were made. Above these two altars, and covering the intervening space, were
draped a great number of the ceremonial, dark red kerchiefs called ¢ankulu which were
hung from the bamboos, and spread from joist to joist, so as to form an almost con-
tinuous canopy at this end of the house — the same end where the agong-altar rites
were said. The family of Imbal had a wealth of tankulu, in a wide variety of figured
patterns, and they formed the festive decoration of the house. There were no long lines
of textiles displayed, as at Talun.
156 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
tive ability with which she superintended the various functions
and the scrupulous care that she bestowed on the correct perform-
ance of ritual details, her attention passing so swiftly from one
to another of the activities that were going on in the various parts
of the Long House that it seemed as if she perceived the entire
situation at one glance. Once I noticed that her keen eyes were
fixed sharply on Ume, who was singing gindaya; it was obvious
that he had made a blunder, and he stopped short, looking at Siat
and laughing in a half-disconcerted manner, but Siat promptly cor-
rected him, giving him his cue, and he resumed his chant. One
ritual recitation was given by Siat in a high voice, and she drank
sugar cane liquor from several of the sacred dishes at the altar.
One other woman drank with the old men.
A few minor ceremonial features may now be mentioned in which
slight variations from the rites at Talum become apparent. The
dancing took place late in the afternoon and up to dusk; during the
evening and the night, no dances were performed. The sprigs of
fragrant bulla, that were worn by all of us women at our waists,
had to be discarded at a definite point of the ritual. It was rather
soon after the opening strains of gindaya were heard, and while
the food was being pressed into leaf-moulds, that a little girl came
to me and removed the bulla-leaf from my belt, and I saw that
the Bagobo women were laying aside their own decorations of bulla.
Another detail to be noted is that the saered food, when taken
from the altar was emptied into a flat basket and placed on the
floor, where each man reached for it, putting his hand into the
basket. I observed no separate portion for the boys. The general
drinking of balabba by the guests followed immediately upon the
consumption of the sacred food, a much later period in the ritual
sequence than at Talun, where everybody was invited to drink ba-
labba, not only before the men’s food was laid out, but prior to
the big general feast itself.
We now turn to a dramatic episode of the ritual which set off,
to a marked degree, the religious activities of this night at Tubison
from those we have recorded of Talun. The chief actor was an
old man, Datu Idal, head of the neighboring village of Patulangan,
and his part consisted in falling on the floor in a trance, or a
pseudo-trance. This performance occurred quite late in the night,
after all the liturgical ceremonial as well as the eating and drink-
ing had come to an end. Following a period of suecessive singing,
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 457
interspersed with sharp cries from groups of women and groups of
men, and while I was standing at one end of the house listening
to the chanting of gindaya, there came a noise of tumult from the
next room, and thither everybody began to rush and crowd together.
There was a sound of a heavy body falling, followed by low cries
and exclamations. Instantly, the wife of Imbal hastened to me
and begged me not to be frightened; she told me that what was
happening was very good for the Bagobo, but that I must stay
where I was, and not attempt to go to look. As soon as her at-
tention was diverted, I succeeded in making my way to a place
where [I could get a glimpse of Datu Idal. He lay on his back,
stretched out at full length on the floor, his eyes closed, his
general aspect being that of a person in a faint. Siat (Imbal’s wife)
sat at his head and gazed fixedly at his face. The old people who
were standing about explained that Idal was dead, but that he
would come to life again by and by; and they assured me that it
was something good for the Bagobo. The crowd gradually thinned
out and the Bagobo, one after another, lay down on the floor and
fell asleep. After a while Idal’s condition of stupor, if it were
such, seemed to pass imperceptibly into natural slumber. After
keeping her position as watcher for one or two hours, Siat lay
down beside the old man, drew over herself a part of the cotton
sleeping-blanket which she had spread over him, and soon dropped
off to sleep. By that time, nobody was awake except the youths
who were relieving one another at the gindaya and myself. I did
not venture to lose sight of the sleeping datu, for it seemed highly
probable that he would “come to life’ suddenly, to bring to some
dramatic culmination the events of the night; but nothing unusual
occured. The hours wore on toward dawn, while only the monot-
onous intoning of gindaya broke the stillness. Soon after sunrise,
Datu Idal stirred, opened his eyes, sat up, and began to chew
betel as if nothing had happened. Everybody else woke up as
usual; and, as the sun shot rays across the mountain tops, only
the soft chanting of the weary boys, each still holding over his
lips an edge of the sacred kerchief as the last strains of gindaya
came forth, indicated that a great religious festival was drawing
to a close.
In attempting to characterize briefly this festival night as a whole,
one would note the high degree of animation that pervaded the
rites, a spirit which was quite as plainly apparent before the sugar
158 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
cane wine had been served as after the general drinking. In marked
contrast with the quiet, orderly, almost conventional manner in
which the proceedings at Talun were put through, the religious
activities at Tubison suggested some hidden psychological stimulus
to which every performer responded. *°*° ‘There were frequent shrieks
and screams from the women; groans and loud calls from the men;
shouting of directions; sudden dramatic outbursts, as when one datu
seized hold of another and tried to drag him from his seat, or when
one clasped the wrists of another during the prayers before the
bamboo stands, or when the entire company oriented at the same
moment, crowding together and facing the north, while the men
sang the locust song (Apang). Yet, throughout this intense excite-
ment, one was conscious of an organization so exact as to inhibit
any excess of emotional discharge. Many of the above demonstrations,
as well as the war songs, the cries, and the prolonged humming and
trilling sounds that are associated with war expeditions, gave the
impression of a battle-field with a fight in progress, or of the
return from a successful man-hunt.
Question of Head-hunting. Much work remains to be done
before the complete significance of the Ginum ceremonial is revealed.
Some of the religious rites that I have attempted to describe sug-
gest similar customs which, by a parallel development or through
convergence, haye grown up in many countries and among many
peoples all over the world. No attempt has been made in this
paper to draw attention, outside of a limited territory, to parallels
that will oceur to every student of primitive religion.
There are other elements of the Ginum which seem peculiar to
Malay groups, but the material is lacking for a detailed comparison.
Among these elements, the triumphal entry of the two bamboo
poles, with the attendant ceremonies, calls for special investigation.
That they are raised in honor of the same god who receives so
220 Two possible causes may be hinted at for what may be termed this difference in
psychical atmosphere: — (1) Possibly a human sacrifice had been offered ut Tubison
during the preceding twenty-four hours; while at Talun the enforced substitution of a
fowl as the bloody victim may have dampened the spirit of the feast. Bat cf pp. 96—97.
(2) There was evident, at all times, in Imbal’s family a temperamental strain of
buoyancy and of mental alertness that thrilled me, on every occasion when any one of
them came to visit at my house. Possibly, all of the guests were infected by the enthusiasm
and vivacity of our hosts. Oleng’s family, on the contrary, with the sole exception of
Ido, were less spontaneous in manner, not at all optimistic, cautious, reserved, and not
inclined to be over-hasty in the execution of their intentions.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 159
large a portion of the devotional exercises, that is, the Tolus ka
Balekat, is a point we have already noted; that the poles are asso-
ciated with exploit factors which include the shedding of human blood
is demonstrated by the war cry at the entrance of the poles, by
the attaching to them of spears, by recitations of the number of
lives taken, and by the detail of grasping hold of a ceremonial pole
and of maintaining this position as long as the narration continues.
Father Mateo was convinced that the decoration of the poles was
a sign that a human sacrifice had just been made. He mentions
this conclusion in two different letters, written about six months
apart. In his valuable description of Bagobo ceremonial, he says:
“From the place of the sacrifice they then go to the house of their
chief or the master of the feast, holding branches in their hands
which they place in a large bamboo, which is not only the chief
adornment, but the altar of the house in which they meet.” And
again, “Curious persons who are present at those feasts, do not
understand the language of the old men nor see anything that hints
of a human sacrifice, but those who are fully initiated in the
Bagobo customs, will note immediately the token of the human
sacrifice which was made in the woods on the preceding day among
the branches placed in the bamboo or drum, before which the old
men above mentioned make their invocation to Darago.” These
passages were written after Father Mateo had been ministering to
the coast Bagobo for about two- years.
My own findings agree with those of Father Gisbert, in regard to
the bamboos. At an interview with the anito, this association of
the poles with the sacrifice was stressed, and the Bagobo were told
by the god that the reason they were sick was because they no
longer followed the old Bagobo custom of killing a man before
performing the ritual with the bamboo poles; and the point was
made that it was formerly the custom after the man was killed to
get sprays of areca and certain plants to take into the house, and
to set up the two kawayan, and to sing the war song. But in
addition to their connection with the sacrifice, the bamboo poles
may have a larger significance.
During my observation of the bringing in of the poles and of
the rites that followed, I was impressed by the resemblance of these
activities to the sort of celebration that one would look for at the
close of a successful expedition against an enemy. The behavior
of the men suggested forcibly the return of a war party from some
160 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
hig slaughter, of the bringing back of heads, or of a related exploit.
Since that time, I have read Dr. Furness’s picturesque account **!
of the return of the Kayan head-hunting expedition, and I have
noted several features of the celebration that closely resemble the
Bagobo rites accompanying the entrance of the two bamboos. Still
more striking is the similarity in. mental attitude toward the cere-
mony, as would appear from such emotional responses as the fixed
position of the warriors, the rapt and exalted expression of their
faces, the restrained eagerness of the waiting women, the break
into the war cry on entering the house. Since this behavior is only
one of many points of resemblance between the Bagobo and the
wild tribes of Borneo, it seems possible that the same stimulus —
that of hunting human heads — gave rise to the ceremony in the
one group as well as in the other.
Among the Berawan of Sarawak, according to Furness, when, in
221 “At the very first glimmer of dawn I was awakened by an unusual stir throughout
the house. The women and children and the few men who were so unfortunate as to
have been obliged to remain behind, were all collecting along the edge of the veranda
below the eaves, whence they could get a view of the river. Just at the very instant
that the sun sent its first shaft of level light down the long expanse of river, we heard
coming up-stream, a solemn, low, deep-toned chant, or rather humming, in harmony,
There were no articulate words, only a continuous sound, in different keys, from treble
to bass, of the double vowel 00, as in doom. A minute later the long line of canoes,
lashed three abreast, slowly rounded the turn, and drifted toward the house. The men
were all standing... Only a few were at the paddles, merely enough to steer the pro-
cession, while all the others stood as motionless as statues, holding their spears upright
and the point of their shields resting at their feet. On and on they slowly glided,
propelled, it almost seemed, by this inexpressibly solemn dirge, which was wafting this
sacred skull to a home it must for ever bless.... In order to watch the ceremony more
narrowly, I left the veranda as the boats neared the beach, and I shall not soon forget
Abun’s solemn, absorbed demeanour. I could not catch his eye, and, unlike his usual
self, he took not the smallest notice of my presence, nor did any of the others. Every
face wore the rapt expression of a profoundly religious rite. Without intermitting the
chant, Abun, bearing the skull, led the procession in single file to the up-river end of
the house.... When they were all gathered, still chanting, in a close group, the old
‘fencing-master’ stepped out to the front with a blow-pipe, and, looking in the direction
of the Tinjar River (still chanting) addressed a vehement warning to the enemy, and then
(still chanting) raised the blow-pipe to his lips, and blew a dart high in the air to
carry the message to them. The chanting instantly ceased, and all gave a wild, exultant
shout...” The Home Life of Borneo Head-hunters, pp. 90—92. 1902. [The account
continues with a narration of the rites held over the skull.)
According to Furness, the Kayans have a legend on the origin of taking heads, and
the mythical account says that it was first done on the advice of a frog, and that this
initial trial brought them so many blessings that the practice was ever after continued.
Op. cit., p. 60.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 161
the old times, a man hunt was inconvenient, a slave was sacrificed
as a substitute. From this point of view, we might look upon the
Bagobo custom of sacrificing a single individual at Ginum as a
mere vestige of a much more noteworthy outpouring of blood for
the satisfaction of Mandarangan and for that of the Tolus ka Balekat.
But this view is not altogether satisfactory, for there is no reason
to suppose that human sacrifice may not be a practice that has been
associated with the Ginum equally as long as head-hunting,
admit both as ceremonial elements.
The situation in regard to head-hunting among the Bagobo offers
a question for investigation. For my part, I have never seen a
human head preserved as a trophy, nor have I seen a human skull
in any Bagobo house. Pig skulls are occasionally hung on the wall,
the number recording the skill of the hunter.
The Bagobo seem to stand in great fear of the human skull, as
to them it is a representative of Buso. One old woman, a priest-
doctor, caught sight of a single skull among my ethnological ob-
jects, and suffered such a shock that she told me, weeks afterward,
that she had been sick ever since she saw the “bonga-bonga”’ at
my house. Her feeling was fairly representative of the general
sentiment.
Yet the frequency in many other Malay groups of this practice
of taking heads, particularly in Borneo, in Celebes ?*? and in several
parts of the Philippines, leads one to look for the custom in the
history of the Bagobo tribe. One definite statement is given
by Father Gisbert in a letter to the Superior of the mission,
written from Dayao, July 26, 1886. The case is one of head-
hunting on a large scale and it occurred only two generations ago.
The father of Manip, who figures in the episode, was Panguilan,
the grandfather of the present datu of Sibulan,?*’ so that these
heads were taken well within the last one hundred years.
if we
222 The Sarasin brothers write that the greatest pride of the natives of Minahassa
was in head-hunting. The captured heads, they brought home in triumph, and this entry
was followed by banquet and dance. Small pieces of the slain foe were devoured. Cf.
Reisen in Celebes, vol. 1, p. 43, 1905. The natives on Kendari bay, in southeast Celebes,
say that if they did not take heads their crops would fail, and sickness would come.
Of. ibid., vol. 1, p. 379. For head-hunting among the Tolokaki, see zdd., vol, 1, pp.
374— 875.
223 See also “The Wild Tribes of Davao District,” p. 111, where Cole gives a con-
tribution from Sibulan that throws light on this point. He says: “According to the
tales of the old men, it was formerly the custom to go on a raid before this ceremony
11
162 ' ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
“The father of Manip was the dato of Sibulan, who died a few months
ago at a very old age (perhaps he was as much as a hundred), and whom
[sic] they say had already attained to the condition of immortality, which
was due to the matuga guinaua, or good heart of Mandarangan, because of
the many victims that he had offered that being. It is said that when he
was yet a youth, he sought a wife, but did not obtain her until he had cut
off fifty human heads, as was attested by the hundred ears which he carried
in a sack from the river Libaganon to Sibulan.” Blair and Robertson, vol.
43, p. 246.
[The word “ginaua” (ginawa) literally means “loving.”’]
Just why, and when, the custom of hunting heads passed out of
use among the Bagobo is an interesting problem. There is one
vestige, at least, in the practice that some old men have of fas-
tening the hair of their slain victims to the handle or to the seab-
bard of a weapon. I bought from Awi one sword with human
hair attached. Nieuwenhuis?** found this use to be a substitute for
the old practice among the Kayan.
All we can say now is that there is some evidence that the
Bagobo took heads at a time not very remote, and that the
character of certain of the Ginum ceremonies suggests that they may
originally have been performed in association with the bringing
back of heads (as well as with the human sacrifice), the two poles
serving for the attachment of the skulls. The present ritual of tying
on the spears and the recitations of the old men may be vestigial.
A Few Ceremonial Chants. A few of the typical chants are
here given.
Dura
(Part of a war-song that is said to be sometimes chanted at the time of
cutting down the two ceremonial bamboos).
{i.e. Ginum)} was to take place, and successful warriors would bring home with them the
skulls of their victims which they tied to the patanan.” The author in a footnote
explains this word as meaning “Ceremonial poles dedicated to Mandarangan and Darago,”
and continuing he says: “In Digos and Bansalan the skulls were not taken but hair
cut from the heads of enemies was placed in the swinging altar dalakat, and ... left
there until the conclusion of the ceremony.”
In connection with Mr. Cole’s use of the word patanan, it should be noted that at
Talun they invariably called the two poles sawayan (the ordinary name for the large
species of bamboo); but the ritual that was performed after the setting up of these poles
they called patanan. It is quite conceivable, however, that in another mountain group
the name for the ceremony might easily pass over to the ceremonial object itself, particu-
larly among such a metaphor-loving people as the Bagobo.
22% Of, Quer durch Borneo, vol. 1, p. 92. 1904.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH
Shout the war-cry ;
Sing gindaya;
Pamansad ka kawayan. 225
Cook food for Ginum:
Serve food; dish it up;
Make the leaf-dishes.
Clear the jungle;
Fell the trees;
Lop off branches ;
Burn the field;
Plant the rice;
Build the fence;
Place the altar.
Put on trousers;
Pull the drawstring ;
Bind on tutub; 226
Dress the hair;
Put on necklace;
Gird on sword;
Hold the war-shield;
Take the spear;
Hold up spears; 227
Gird on sword
Fringed with goats’ hair, 228
Tipped with kids’ wool.
Ride horses;
Run the horses,
Racing, racing.
Dance to kuglung ; 229
Dance to flute; 230
Dancing, all dancing.
225
Recitation of exploits that is made by
bamboo.
163
Lay betel in mouth;
Tobacco makes dizzy.
Wash in Ragubrub; 23!
At bank of Malilyo. 23!
Cook food; climb for bees 232
Making combs very high;
Fix logan 233 for bees.
Make saddles; make stirrups.
Dig the holes; 23¢ build the house.
Make palandag, 235
Place altar and bowls. 2%6
GINDAYA
Make the house strong;
Lay red peppers, 237
Lest fighting break in.
Hang up torches at dark.
Dance to the flute;
Hold shield on guard;
Break the shield of the other;
Fight with swords; fight with spears;
Ride horse running,
| Racing, racing,
Make fish-traps;
Dam the river;
Catch the fish.
| Climb fruit-trees.
Beat agongs, all dancing.
Go swimming and diving;
One boy drowns; 238
the old men while grasping the ceremonial
*26 A kerchief worn by those not eligible to the tankulu.
*27 That is, while tying the spears in an upright position to the bamboo poles.
*2° Tt is usually the scabbard, not the sword, that is decorated with a fringe of hair
of wool.
*2° The man’s guitar having two strings.
or
73° The ¢adali—a small wind instrument of light bamboo that is blown from one end.
231 The name of a river.
232 That is, smoke out the wild bees to get wax.
733 A framework of wood and rattan that is sometimes fastened to the branches of
trees to induce the wild bees to hive there.
+2" The holes for the posts of the Long House.
736 Another kind of smal) flute, that is blown from the side.
76 This is the balekat, with its pingan, or bowls.
737 A charm against demons.
*%8 Probably a reference to a single accidental occurrence.
Ni g
164 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
He is dying.
Make saddles; play agongs.
Clear the brush;
Hew down trees;
Burn the field;
Pile up branches;
Lop off branches;
Burn it over.
Wear good clothes.
Cook food;
Make leaf-dishes;
Dance and cook.
Get wood for the fire;
Bring water; fetch leaves;
Get water in buckets.
Raise the bamboos,
Plant the rice; | Balekayo2#? and laya#t
Hedge the altar; 23° Get tamanag 242 wood ;
Manga, 243 Janzone, *44
Durian, 45 areca;
Pound natuck. 246
Build the house;
Weave at loom.
Burn the meadow;
Hunt the boar.
Climb for cocoanuts.
GINDAYA
(A part of the Gindaya chanted on the opening night of Ginum.)
“God the Protector, 246 the All-knowing, come down here and tell us, you
who have been there, the story of the bird far away in the mountains. You
have heard the tale of the youngest nestling of limokon,*#* perched on a
golden tree on the farther side of the mountains of Baringan, *#* concealed
under the branches, finding at the topmost point fresh branches pointing
toward the sunset, waving toward the dawn.
239 The magic plants that are placed around the hut-shrine at rice-planting. Some of
the references are anticipatory of clearing and planting, as the Ginum is often held
in January.
240 The textiles exhibited at the festival are hung from ‘a frame of light bamboo,
called dalekayo. See p. 136.
241 The agongs are suspended from rods of /aya wood.
2“2 A white, porous, highly inflammable wood, much used for kindling.
2"3 Mangifera indica L.: a large and delicious fruit having a yellow skin, a long pit,
and a juicy pulp. Foreigners call it “manggo,” but natives give mg in this word as a single
phonetic element.
24% Lansium domesticum: a small fruit with translucent white pulp having an acid flavor.
2*° Durio zibethinus D.C.: A good-sized fruit having a heavy rind covered with prickles,
and a very soft, cream-colored pulp, which has a pleasently pungent flavor, but an
offensive smell. ‘The durian is a favorite fruit with the natives.
2*¢ Sago, which is extracted from the sago palm, pounded and boiled to a jelly.
Bagobo mothers feed their babies freely with natuch.
246 This is Duma Tungo, the “god who keeps the people.” Duma sometimes means
“wife,” sometimes “companion.” In the Long House at Tubison, there was an altar
dedicated to Tungo, and there is a question as to whether the two divinities are identical,
“7 The omen pigeon.
2*® Fabulous mountains of the ulit, the romantic tale.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 165
In the north on the seashore lie nine million kalati;2#9 in the north on the
seashore le nine rows of sequins. To fifty trees the branches cling; in the
south they drop showers; in the north the breeze makes branches sway.
There is a place in the Salikala mountains where there grows a bontia25?
pebble on the rocks. Wire cannot dent it; iron and knives cannot cut it.”
GINDAYA 251
Gindaya chanted antiphonally by Ynok and Abé against Atab and Luma.
Ynok sings to Atab:
“Now here we are. I have been traveling eight years to find my own
brother; these many years I have sought him, and now we have met in the
house called Tinamalung Tambobung 2 (narrow long house with a good
roof). Now I want to ask you, my brother,?53 if you have any areca-nut
and buyo leaf with you. You have probably come from a town a long way
off and if you have no betel you will be hurt by the wind and the hot
sun in my town. I have something to ask you. I want you to show me
the way to Tangos,24 the little island near to this town. 1 must meet some-
body there; and I have lost the way to my own town. I have not been
back for eight years. I should not know my own areca-palm plantation nor
my buyo. But this month I am going to find my way, and we will make
our luas,?>° not to speak each other’s names. We will meet in one month
and one day. Now I am going toward my own town; and do not you say
anything bad about me after I am gone, because we are very intimate
friends.
Atab sings in reply to Ynok:
“Here I am, my nearest brother. I came from Tangos island, near to the
2*9 Small discs of mother-of-pearl that are ground and pierced for beads by the Bila-an,
the Tagakaola and the Kulaman tribes. The Bagobo get kalati in trade for use in
decorating festival garments.
*°° Bontia is said to be a tiny white stone of magic properties. If kept wrapped in
a cloth and put away in a bamboo tobacco case or other tightly covered vessel, it will
after a time reproduce itself. It will have one child at a time, several years apart. If
the case or box it is kept in be not securely covered, the bontia may run away. This
magic white stone is described as “a little larger than a grain of rice, but smaller than
a kernel of corn.” The bontia was once found in a bird’s nest by a Bagobo of Tuban.
There is one variety of bontia — the Jontia tigaso — that never gets children, however
carefully kept.
251 This chant may, perhaps, refer to the wanderings of mythical ancestors, but I am
not able to make a definite statement as to this.
+°2 A shady house with a good roof; that is, the Long House. Except in the chants,
they always call it dakul balé, or “big house.” The main elements of this term are
-malung, shady; tam-, prefix with a sense of “good;” dobung, “roof.”
+53 «Brother,” or “own brother” is equivalent here to “close friend.”
»°* Pangos was explained as meaning any small island near to a town. From this it
would seem as if, perhaps, this song had its origin at a festival on the coast.
25° The names of certain persons are Jwas or tabu.
166 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
town, and | walked a long way on the American road with the wire,25* to
meet my own brother. I think I am a little pangalinan25* and the smallest
boy in the world, because I did not bring any areca-nut. It is not right
for you to say, “My nearest brother,’ when you ask me for betel. I think
you do not feel kindly to me, because I heard bad words from you after |
came. After that, I did not care to keep the areca-nuts and the betel-leaf.”
Rite of Human Sacrifice, called Pag-Huaga
A fundamental feature of the worship of certain gods is the
offering to them, from time to time, of a human victim, with ap-
propriate rites. The war-god, Mandarangan, demands this sacrifice ;
and the persons who take part in the ceremony pray that he will
keep them from sickness and death, in return for the human blood
which they, for their part, are pouring out for him to drink. At
the Ginum a deity of the altar, called Tolus ka Balekat, is the
one for whom, from ancient times, the human sacrifice has been
killed and ceremonially offered up.
Three hundred and fifty odd years ago, when the Spanish priests
began the religious conquest of the Islands, the custom of killing a
human victim as a religious ceremony was widespread among
Tagalog and Visayan peoples of Luzon and the Visayas, as well
as through the mountain tribes of Mindanao. These last-named
have never given up the custom, in spite of persistent efforts
made by the missionaries to crush it out. The attack has been
renewed by the American government, but the human sacrifice
represents so vital an element in the religious life of the Bagobo
and of the other tribes who have always performed it that it dies
very hard. There have been numerous references by many authors
to the sacrifice, and we haye three or four detailed accounts of it;
but all of these were given to the various writers by Bagobo in-
dividuals, for, so far as we know, no white person has ever had
the opportunity of being present at the rite. It is doubtful if any
investigator will ever be in a position to record from personal ob-
servation a human sacrifice. But of the significance, and of the
2°® 4 good illustration of the tendency of the native to incorporate recent happenings
with the ancient elements of his story. Atab had walked along some part of the coast
between Davao and Bolton, where telephone connections were established about 1906.
Thence he had taken the path up the mountain trail to Talun.
257 The traditional small boy of the old stories (u/it) who, though poor and often
dirty and covered with sores, eventually becomes a great datu, or a famous malaki.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 167
manner of its performance, we can get a tolerably clear idea from
the several accounts that have leaked out, or that have been ex-
tracted by questioning.
One does not want to betray the confidence of a Bagobo friend,
or to place him in an uncomfortable situation with respect to the
local authorities, now that the situation has become strained in
regard to this native custom. Without, then, mentioning the name
of the young man who gave me an account of the sacrifice, I will
simply say that the story was told without question on my part;
and, on his, with a spontaneity and a naive dwelling on gruesome
details that grew out of his ignorance of the danger of exposure,
quite as much as his confidence in my discretion. This was several
months before the case occurred that has been published by the
United States War Department.*°* My informant had observed a
number of sacrifices, and he was a keen observer. I have two or
three pictures that he sketched of the slave tied to the sacrificial post.
As the sacrifice offered up at Ginum is fairly typical, that form
may be selected for description.
The slave to be sacrificed at an approaching festival is selected
some time”? in advance. It may be two or three months before-
hand that the purchase, or barter, or transfer of the slave into the
family holding the ceremony is agreed upon. During the first and
second nights *°° of the festival, the slave-boy is kept in the cere-
monial house, tied by his wrists to the wall, and fed “like the dogs”
with scraps held to his lips. Clearly there is no suggestion of
making the ceremonial victim the subject for special privileges during
the hours just before death, or of feasting him before sending him
to sacrifice.
On the last and main day of Ginum, shortly after sunrise, the
slave is taken to the forest, or to the beach if the village is not
2584 full report of the governmental investigation that followed the human sacrifice
of December 9, 1907, was published in the Annual Report of the United States War
Department for 1908, pp. 367—370. Washington, 1909; and is reprinted in F, C. Core:
The Wild Tribes of Davao District, pp. 115—119. 1913.
29 According to the account in the government report above cited, the appearance
of the constellation Balatik is the signal for a sacrifice. This constellation appears early
in December. Mr. Cole heard the same statement from Datu Tongkaling. Op. cit., pp-
114—115. The same writer states that this constellation is identical with Orion. Plasencia
called Balatik the Greater Bear. Cf. Braig and Roserrson, vol. 7, pp. 186—187. 1903.
26° Among the Hindu also, the victim for the human sacrifice was kept chained all
night. Cf. Tawney’s footnote to SomapEva: Katha Sarit Sagara, vol. 1, p. 336. 1880.
168 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
too far from the coast. All the people from several miles around
gather to attend the ceremony, except the younger children who
remain at home, where they later have a little supplementary per-
formance.
At the place picked out for the ceremony, a frame — the ta-
kosan — is set up. This consists of three posts, vertically placed,
with a cross-piece connecting them at top. The three upright ele-
ments form the patindog, and the horizontal cross-bar is the balabag.
The balabag is decorated from end to end with fresh young shoots
from the areca palm. Directly in front of the middle patindog, a
hole is dug in the ground, to which the slave’s body will finally
be consigned; the pit is called huthut.
Near to the sacrifical frame, there is set up a small shrine (tam-
bara) consisting of the usual white china bowl wedged into the split
end of a rod of bamboo set upright on the ground, and secured to
a tree or other support. In the bowl of the tambara the usual of-
ferings of areca-nuts and buyo-leaf are laid. Before this shrine, the
old men gather for the office called garug-dun, which is recited by
one or two of them acting in the capacity of priests. The burden
of the rite is a prayer to Mandarangan, dwelling on Mount Apo,
asking him to accept the sacrifice, and to keep the Bagobo from
diseases and from all calamity. At the close of the garug-dun, or
just before it, the slave is brought forward for the saksakdn, or the
rite of killing and cutting the body to pieces.
The slave is fastened to the middle post of the takosan, his hands
uplifted, his wrists and ankles bound to the patindog by strong
cords of vegetable fibre (y/ana). Often he is tied so tightly that he
cries out more in physical pain than in fear: “The fetters hurt me!
Take them off! I can’t bear the bands! Untie them for this time!”
Immediately many of the men begin the dance with war-shields —
the palagise
a performance of remarkable maneuvers, demanding
considerable practice as well as athletic skill. The leaping, the
bending at the knee, the agile passes with the shield in presenting,
drawing back, springing lightly from one to another position — all
of these feats are done with a high degree of dramatic effect that
is intensified by the character of the occasion. As they dance,
they draw nearer to the takosan, and with spears and kampilan
begin to make stabs at the victim. Others of those present, men
and women, rush forward and each tries to inflict a wound on the
slave, each one stimulated by the hope of a benefit to be gained
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 169
for himself if he assist at the sacrifice. In a few minutes the slave
is dead from a multitude of gashes. The instant he is dead, they
cut the body, with the exception of hands and feet, into small
pieces, each about two and one-half inches by four inches in size,
and drop them into the hole prepared to receive them. The ritual
name of pinopil is given to a piece of a slave’s body thus cere-
monially cut off. The hands, sectioned just below the wrists, and
the feet, just below the ankles, are left entire, these parts being
reserved to carry home to the little boys in the family that offers
the sacrifice. The lads cut these members into small pieces and
bury them in another hole in the ground. This performance is for
the purpose of making the children very brave.
Immediately after the sectioning of the body, one of the young
men opens the chant called gindaya, in which he is joined by one
or three others who sing antiphonally for half an hour. Thus closes
the tragic rite, from which the Bagobo hope to secure so large a
measure of health 2°! and prosperity. *°?
261 Tt is immediately after the conclusion of the sacrifice, or else the day after according
to Gisbert, that the bamboo is filled with branches, and the accompanying rites are celebrated.
“From the place of sacrifice they then go to the house of their chief or the master of
the feast, holding branches in their hands which they place in a large bamboo, which
is not only the chief adornment but the altar of the house in which they meet.” Buatr
and ROBERTSON: op. cit., vol. 43, pp. 234. 1906. Again he says: “Curious persons who
are present at those feasts, do not understand the language of the old men nor see
anything that hints of a human sacrifice, but those who are fully initiated in the Bagobo
customs, will note immediately the token of the human sacrifice which was made in the
woods on the preceding day among the branches placed in the bamboo or drum, before
which the old men above-mentioned make their invocation to Darago.” Jdid., vol. 43,
pp- 249—250. Cole received from Datu Ansig a statement to the same effect, that the
sacrifice was made “at the time the decorated poles were placed in the dwelling.” Op.
Cieapoe lily
262 That the idea of substitution enters prominently into the complex of associations
set up by the act of human sacrifice is nicely shown by Father Gisbert in the following
paragraph: “When any contagious disease appears, or whenever any of their relatives
die, the Bagobos believe that the demon is asking them for victims, and they immediately
hasten to offer them to him so that he may not kill them. They are accustomed generally
to show their good will in the act of sacrifice in the following words.... ‘Receive the
blood of this slave, as if it were my blood, for I have paid for it to offer it to thee.’
These words which they address to Biisao, when they wound and slash the victim, show
clearly that they believe in and expect to have the demon as their friend by killing
people for him. For they hope to assure their life in proportion to the number of their
neighbors they deliver to death, which they believe in always inflicted by Busao, or the
demon who is devoured continually by hunger for human victims.” BLatr and ROBERTSON :
op. cit., vol. 43, p. 250. Attention has been called already to the confusion between
170 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
A human sacrifice of an entirely different type is that called
gaka, the victim being a Bagobo of virtue and valor who is killed
in order that his liver may be eaten by other brave Bagobo men.
The manner of sacrifice is the same as that of the slave, the man
being bound to the takosan and gashed to pieces. Before the body
is buried, the liver is removed and ceremonially eaten.?°* This is
the only trace of cannibalism*** that appears in Bagobo customs.
They look with horror upon the practice of eating human flesh
as a means of nurture. and say that it is a custom of the buso.
The eating of the human liver is a religious rite.
In prehistoric days, the custom of offering a human, victim in
sacrifice was widespread throughout the Islands. The Tagal, ac-
cording to Plasencia, tied a living slave beneath the body of a
dead warrior.?°> Artiedo, in 15738, writes of Filipino tribes in
general, that they have a custom of killing slaves to bury with the
chiefs.*°° This usage is not strictly analogous to the Bagobo rite,
for the slaves were, no doubt, sent along to provide the distin-
guished dead with servants in the other world — a custom prac-
tised by the Bagobo in addition to the ceremonial sacrifice.
Among the Visayan people, we have records of both kinds of
sacrifice. Chirino says that the people of the island of Bohol gave
the slaves a hearty meal and then killed them immediately after-
ward. Male slaves were buried with the body of a man, and
female slaves with that of a woman.*°' The chronicler of the Le-
gaspi expedition states that the Visayans of Cebu sacrificed several
slaves at the death of a chief.*°> Saavedra records, in 1527—1528,
that the natives of Cebu offer human sacrifices to the anito. *°
Morga, it is true, wrote, in 1609, that the Visayans “never sacri-
the personality of Mandarangan and that of Busao which appears throughout the writings
of the missionaries.
263 According to Coronel, the Zambales of Luzon ate the brains of those whom they
beheaded. Brarr and Roperrson: op. cit., vol. 18, p. 332. 1904.
2¢* The statements of popular writers as to the reputed cannibalism of the Bagobo
ought to be taken with a good deal of caution. Henry Savage Landor, for example,
writes of “their eyes having a most peculiar lustre, such as is found in cannibal races.”
The Gems of the East, p. 362. 1904.
26° Of, Brain and Ropertson: op. cit., vol. 7, p. 195. 1908.
266 Of, sbid., vol. 8, p. 199. 1903.
267 Of, ibid., vol. 12, p. 303. 1904.
268 Cf, ibid., vol. 8, p. 199. 1908.
269 Of, ibid., vol. 2, p. 42. 1908.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 171
ficed human beings;”**° but the Recollects, in 1624, found many
instances of this rite, and recorded that in Visayan groups a sac-
rifice, either of a hog or of a human being, had to be made be-
fore a battle, in sickness, at seed-time, when building a house, and
at other special times. 7"!
In regard to the wild tribes of the south, Pastells and Retana
state: “the human sacrifice.... called hwaga, is only practised among
the Bagobo, and the most barbarous heathen of Mindanao.” 2"?
Furness*"? obtained an account of the sacrifice among the Be-
rawan of Sarawak, and here two points are of special interest for
our discussion: first, that the slave is killed to take the place of
a head hunt; and second, that everybody present at the sacrifice
is allowed to have a thrust, a distribution of privilege which, from
various accounts, seems to be stressed by the Bagobo.
Ceremonial at Rice-sowing, called Marimmas
Rice may be sown while the constellations Mamaré, Marara, and
Buaya are visible, May and June being the months in which the
most numerous rice-plantings take place. If a new field is to be
cleared ?"*, the work is done two or three months before Marammas.
270 Cf. zhid., vol. 16, p. 1383. 1904.
271 Cf. thid., vol. 21, p. 208. 1905.
272 Cf, thid., vol. 12, p. 270. 1904.
*73 “In former days, on the death of any influential chief, if his people were either
too lazy or too cowardly to go head-hunting, a male or female slave was purchased and
sacrificed in honor of the dead. From far and near, friends were invited to take part
in the high ceremony. When the poor wretch of a slave was thrust into a cage of
bamboo and rattan, he knew perfectly well the death by torture to which he was destined.
In this cage he was confined for a week or more, until all the guests had assembled
and a feast was prepared. On the ‘appointed day, after every one had feasted and a
blood-thirsty instinct had been stimulated to a high pitch by arrack, each one in turn
thrust a spear into the slave. No one was allowed to give a fatal thrust until every
one to the last man had felt the delight of drawing blood from living, human flesh.
We were told by the Berawans that the slaves often survived six or seven hundred
wounds, until death from loss of blood set them free. The corpse of the victim was
then taken to the grave of the Chief, and the head cut off and placed on a pole over-
hanging the grave. Frequently some of the guests worked themselves into such a blood-
thirsty frenzy that they bit pieces from the body, and were vehemently applauded when
they swallowed the raw morsel at a gulp.” Home life of Borneo head-hunters, p.
140. 1902.
27% See the account of the ceremonial clearing of the fields at Sibulan, and of the
religious preparation therefor, given by F. C. Coxe, op. cit., p. 86.
172 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
First comes the iamut, or clearing away of undergrowth; next the
pamuli, or felling of large trees, one week after kamut; and finally
the burning over of the land, called panorok.
The Martmmas is a co-operative affair, to which all the neigh-
bors come to assist in turn the man whose field is to be sown.
During the season for planting, there is a Martmmas held every
few days at one or another field. After the sowing is done, the
host gives a feast to all who have helped him. The occasion is
made one for a display of rich textiles worn by the women, while
the men have on good trousers and richly beaded carrying-bags
and kerchiefs.
The ceremonial at the sowing is performed for the pleasure of
the god 'Tarabumé, who cares for the rice plants, making them grow
and bear grain for the Bagobo. The ceremonial tool is the digging-
stick, a slender pole of wood, ranging in length from six and one-
half to eight and one-half feet, to one end of which is tied a little
spade (karok or mata) of wood or iron, while at the upper end the
pole is run through a nodal joint of bamboo about two feet
long, split lengthwise to form a clapper. Whenever the digging-
stick hits ‘the ground, the two halves of the bamboo clapper
strike together, producing a crisp rattling sound very pleasant to
the ear, especially when many are striking in unison. The clapper
is called palakpak, and the entire digging-stick is hatebalan, but
the palakpak being the significant part of the tool, from a ritual
standpoint, the whole stick usually goes by the name of palakpak.
The clapper is decorated with cocks’ feathers, as long and gorgeous
as can be obtained, and often with strings of beads and little bells,
while the long handle is frequently scratched or carved in patterns,
and colored with torchblack and dyes from roots and sap. It is
for the pleasure of Tarabumé that the clapper is put on the digging-
stick, and it is to rejoice the eyes of Tarabume that it is orna-
mented with feathers and bells. The Bagobo say that “The feathers
are to make the palakpak very pretty to please the god in the
sky; the bamboo clapper is to make a pretty sound for the god to
hear. When Tarabumé sees the feathers and hears the sound, he
makes much rice.” The bamboo is cut for the palakpak several
months before planting. Each man cuts an internode of a fixed
size, measured on his own body. It must be the length of the
distance from a point on his right arm called /atitu to a point at
the wrist called taklaya. The katitu is a few inches below the
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 173
shoulder at a point just above the bulge of the biceps muscle; the
taklaya is the middle point of the wrist on its palmar aspect.
Between sowing and harvest, the palakpak is kept in the house,
for if it were sold or given away during that interval the rice
crop would fail.
While sowing, a line of men and boys goes first, moving in the
orthodox direction for the Bagobo, that is, from north to south,
for if they should move northward or eastward or westward they
would be attacked by the sickness pamalii. A man holds his pa-
lakpak at an angle of about forty-five degrees, with the right hand
higher up on the stick than the left. According to the fixed motor
habit of his tribe, the right hand grasps the stick from underneath,
as it guides the motion, while the left hand, in steadying the
downward thrust, is clasped over the stick. This gives a centri-
fugal motion exactly the opposite of the habit in hoeing common
among ourselves. The depth of the hole is to the neck of the
mata, or little spade, but the mata are not all of uniform length.
The holes are made as far apart as the distance from the point at
the wrist where the pulse-beat may be felt to the tip of the middle
finger; and the time between the rapid, regular blows of the spade
one can measure by the striking of the clappers; it is as the time
between the ticks of the pendulum of a small clock. All the
strokes are made in unison, so that the palakpak of all the men
rattle precisely at the same moment. A line of women and girls
follows, each carrying in her left hand a vessel of cocoanut-shell
containing the seed rice, or with a small basket of rice hanging
from her left arm. With the right hand she takes out a few
grains of rice, drops them into one of the holes, and pulls some
earth over the place with her foot, patting down the soil with
bare toes.
To secure the growth of rice and the well-being of the family
that tends it, there is placed in one corner of the field a shrine
called parabunnidn. Before sunrise on the day of the sowing, or
the morning of the preceding day, the shrine is set up, with
prayers for a good crop and prayers against sickness.
The parabunnian consists of a little house, three or four feet in
height, made of light bamboo thatched with nipa or cogon grass,
and having a steep, sloping roof like a Bagobo house, but with
only three walls, the front being left open. The parabunnian used
by the Bila-an people has a floor, and some Bagobo have borrowed
174 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
this style of shrine. Inside the house is a very small tambara,
with its rod of balekayo split at the upper end to hold a little
white bowl, old and blackened. In the bowl are various offerings
a few brass bracelets, tarnished by age, several fresh areca-
nuts on betel-leaves, and other small gifts — while a piece of
white cloth*’®? may be hung beside the shrine. At Egianon’s rice
planting, there were four brass wire armlets in the tambara, a
bracelet cast from a wax mould (balinitung), and six areca-nuts
on nine buyo-leaves. On the ground, just outside the little house,
five areca-nuts on four buyo-leaves lay in a tiny pile. The Bagobo
say that the god (probably Tarabumé) will come and chew some
of the betel while the festival of Martimmas is in progress.
Around the sacred hut, runs a little fence made of light bamboo
split into slender strips. This is the bulituk, and it is like a tiny
wicket fence with eight curves. I was told that ‘the number
eight is very good for parabunnidin, for with eight curves you
could not be sick.” Another function of the bulituk is to make
the rice plants grow thick together.
Spikes of rattan, leaves and little branches from plants having
magical value are stuck in the ground at different points close
around the shrine. Each has a definite effect on the development
of the young plants during their sprouting and growth. *"°
Tagbak makes the rice grow and open yery quickly. Bon-bon
grows abundantly and close together, just as one wants rice to
grow, so the use of bon-bon means that there will be a rich
sprouting of plants near together. Pula (palma brava) makes the
rice very sturdy, because the trunk of the pula is hard and strong.
Patugu also keeps the rice strong. Stalks of balala (a fine rattan)
are put there to, keep the leaves of rice moving, just as the balala
keeps swaying. Isug causes the rice to stand straight. Lupo
(cocoanut-leaves) keep the sun from the rice, because the cocoanut
palm never dies from the heat of the sun.
Ceremonial at Harvest Called Kapungdan
The rice is ready to cut from five to six months after the sow-
ing. At harvest, ceremonies take place which are called Kapungd-
27° Small pieces of white cloth are favorite offerings at the out-of-door shrines (kvamat)
of the Malay peninsula. Cf. SkEaT: op. cit., p. 67, 74.
77° For ceremonies at rice-planting in the Peninsula, cf. SKEAT: op. cit., pp. 228—235.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 175
an,7** a word meaning “the finish,” referring to the close of the
season in which rice is grown.
A shrine is set up in the field, in the shape of a little hut
which bears the name of roro. In this shrine is put, as soon as
harvested, a small portion of rice for the diwata and for the con-
stellation Balatik, which appears in December, one of the months
when harvest is celebrated. A portion of the rice in the roro is
offered to the three constellations, Mamaré, Marara and Buaya —
star-clusters under which the rice was sown, and to which the first
fruits are now due. ***
The religious performance in the house, following the cutting of
the rice, is characterized by such typical ceremonial elements as
the offering of manufactured products on an agong altar, the offer-
ing of food to the spirits, and the ceremony with betel.
The harvest ceremony at which I was present took place in the
house of Datu Yting, of Santa Cruz, and covered about three hours,
from half after one or two o’clock in the afternoon, until five,
when the guests dispersed. The arrangements were largely in the
hands of the women,?*? one presiding at the altar, and others
arranging the sacred utensils.
A wide, low platform, several feet long, close to the east wall
of the main room, served as the altar, and in front of this the
priestess Odal officiated, sitting on the floor, while another old
woman of distinction, Kaba’s wife, sat on a box at the south end
of the platform, and from this slightly elevated position super-
intended the placing of dishes and other objects concerned in the rite.
At the north end of the platform, stood one or two large agongs,
placed there for the offerings called sonaran. First of all, the
277 Three other names, 1 have heard applied to the harvest festival: one is Katapusan,
the Visayan word for “the finish;’ another is Pokankaro, whose meaning I do not know;
a third is Gatog-diaan, which signifies “guessing the season.” That guessing games were
formerly played at harvest, and perhaps are still in use is certain, although I can give
no explanation of them. Sometimes when children are at play, they run to the hemp-field,
tear off abaca (hemp) leaves, poke holes for eyes, nose and mouth, and wear them as
masks, called linotung, which, they say, are like those used at harvest “in the guessing.”
One man is said to wear a mask called dalekoko. Masks called buso-buso, | have heard
from a Bagobo, are worn at one of the Visayan festivals.
278 The harvest ceremony differs in a number of details at Sibulan. Cf. F. C. Coxe:
op. cit., pp. 88—89. 1913.
27° Father Gisbert says that the harvest festival is called “the feast of women.” See
Buiark and Ropertson: vol. 43, p. 233. 1906.
176 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
articles of clothing and the ornaments to be presented before the
gods were brought from various parts of the house by different
members of the family, and put in piles upon the agongs, in the
informal manner that characterizes this part of the ceremony at
Ginum as well as at harvest. Many pieces of hemp and cotton
cloth were brought by the women, including a great number of
the cotton textiles woven in small checks that had very recently
been taken off the loom in Yting’s house. On the top of the pile
of garments they put the ornaments — strings of beads, wide
woven necklaces (sinalapid) and bracelets of brass. A good-sized
betel-box (katakia) was placed on the floor at the side of the altar.
Just back of the heap of textiles stood a large, high burden-basket
(bokub) partly filled with rice (palay) in the husk, intended as a
thank offering to the spirits. Later there was placed in the basket
a green spray of palay and a section of bulla-leaf twisted into the
shape of a spoon.
The women proceeded, then, to arrange the leaf-dishes, and the
crockery of some foreign white ware that stood in confusion on
the altar. Every dish was handled by the old priestess, Odal, and
from her received its final placing. She sat directly in front of
the central point of the altar, erect, dignified, exact in the manip-
ulation of every detail; yet all the time she was watched, closely
and critically, by Kaba’s wife, who knew the orthodox forms of
arrangement equally well with Odal. Datu Yting’s younger wife,
Hebe, and a son of Yting’s prepared dishes of food by placing rice
and grated cocoanut on the plates; and Hébé’s sister helped her
in the handing of areca-nuts to Odal, as from time to time they
were needed. Yting’s older wife, Soleng, walked about the room
and near the altar, and made suggestions here and there about
the arrangements, or gave some definite direction to the younger
women — even to Odal. Occasionally, Soleng or Datu Yting
would detect some little break and hastily interfere; or would
check some intended move of Odal’s with a hastily uttered caution
that this or that would be madat (bad), or that it would bring
upon them all the sickness called pamalii. One of these warnings
was uttered when Odal attempted to break the spray of bulla.
The priestess arranged in a straight line, directly across the
altar before her, nine saucers of thick white ware, each of which
contained white food, of mingled cocoanut meat and boiled rice.
She placed betel on the rice in several of the saucers immediately,
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH ATT
and in the remaining saucers as the ceremony proceeded. Begin-
ning with the saucer farthest to her right, and moving her hand
from right to left, she placed one areca-nut with a buyo-leaf in
the first, fourth, fifth and sixth saucers. In the third dish she
put three of the little knives (gulat) used by women in all of
their work. She let the knives stand upright, near the rim of the
dish, with the points of their blades imbedded in the rice. At the
center of the same dish, she stuck in the food three needles, points
downward, two having been threaded with long white hemp, one
with short ends of hemp thread colored black, such as women use
for the process of overlacing warp. Later, she put an areca-nut
on its betel-leaf in this third saucer, and one each in the seventh,
eighth, ninth and second, as named, ending with the second from
the right.
Immediately back of the nine saucers, Odal made another row
of nine dishes, but these were of hemp leaf twisted into a boat-
shaped vessel**° such as is used on ceremonial occasions, and
in each of these the younger women had put a very small handful
of rice and grated cocoanut. Odal added to each a betel-leaf and
a thin section of areca-nut, about one-eighth of a lengthwise slice.
The priestess now proceeded to arrange a third row of dishes,
directly behind the preceding. This row consisted of nine good-
sized crockery plates, heaped up with boiled rice, well-moulded in
conical form. As at every festival, certain plates were prepared
for distinguished guests; here the number of plates thus designated
was six; at Ginum it was eight. I do not know, however, whether
the number six in this connection is distinctive of the harvest
rites, for this was the only harvest feast that I attended. On these
six plates, the moulds of rice were decorated with very small red
crabs, arranged in a circle around the base. Above these, were
slices of hard-boiled eggs, and encircling the apex of the cone were
rings of little fish of a blackish color, the name of which I failed
to ascertain. Near the rim of each plate lay eight or nine small
heaps of a russet-brown powder, evidently the pounded seed called
lunga, an edible seed that is used much more commonly in the
interior than at the coast, but here included as a representative
food to be laid, with the other first fruits, before the spirits.
Waving from the top of the mould of rice on each dish were two
280 See pp. 101, 105—113.
178 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
or three sprays of green nito**' bearing small white buds. The
color display was most brilliant and artistic, an effect which may
have been unconsciously produced, for the food elements were
probably placed in that particular order in obedience to custom.
The remaining three plates of the nine had smaller moulds of rice,
with no crabs, fish, or eggs.
The details of laying out the altar table were concluded when
Odal placed to the right of the first row of saucers another saucer
containing the ceremonial red rice called omok.*** To the left of
this first row she set a bowl containing a few spoonfuls of cocoanut-
water from a fresh nut, and just in front of this bowl she laid
one of the great circular leaves from the luago — a pile of
brown, powdered lunga-seed lying on the leaf. The bowl and the
leaf, however, were not put in place until a somewhat later point
in the ritual.
Now, Datu Yting who for some time had been lying stretched
out on the floor, got up and took a hand in the performance. At
the extreme left of the first row of saucers, he placed one of the
large, flat baskets that are used by women when they toss the
pounded grain to let the wind blow off the chaff. Yting laid eight
of the heavy work-knives**? called poko in this rice-winnower,
together with four of the short knives called swng?, such as men
use for doing their fine carving of wood, and for cutting up areca-
nuts. He brought all of these knives together in a pile, except
one poko that was added later, and after putting them into the
basket he said a few ritual words over them.
Immediately afterwards, the priestess opened her prayer, which
was a long one. At first, she was prompted several times by Yting
and Ikde; but afterward she proceeded fluently and without break
for perhaps fifteen minutes, while holding in her hand a spray of
manangid which she waved back and forth over the objects on the
altar. In the ritual over the clothing, she mentioned by name
281 Lygodium scandens: a climbing plant having a slender, glossy-black stem that is
widely used for making neckbands and bracelets.
2#2 See pp. 138, 139.
23 Pather Gisbert seems to have had this part of the ceremonial in mind, when he
wrote: “When they harvest their rice or maize, they give the first fruits to the diuata,
and do not eat them, or sell a grain without first having made their hatchets, bolos,
and other tools which they use in clearing their fields eat first.” Brair and RoBERtson:
op. cit., vol. 43; pp- 237—238. 1906.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 479
each class of garments that she was presenting to the gods: pana-
pisan (skirts), ampit (cotton textiles), sinalapid (wide necklaces),
pankis (brass bracelets), and when dedicating the first fruits of the
products of the field she turned slightly in the direction of the
plate, or bowl, or leaf-dish that she was offering. At a certain
point in the service, Yting handed to her a plain, undecorated lime-
tube, and she went through with the motions of sprinkling lime
over the betel, although no lime came out, because it had become
dried in the tube. For a few minutes during the invocation, Hebe,
having stepped to the altar, stood directly back of Odal. As she
went forward, she told me in a low tone, on passing, that her
own dios were now being called upon. When Odal had finished,
Datu Yting offered a brief prayer.
Then followed the binang; that is, the partaking of the now
sacred fruits of the field by individuals in the following order:
Datu Yting, Soleng (the elder wife), the priestess Odal, Sumi, Hébé
(the younger wife), Brioso (Yting’s eldest son), Hébe’s sister, then
Ikde, Modesto’s mother and several other old women, then the
younger women and the men. Each individual took a very little
rice with his fingers from some one dish and put the rice into his
mouth. A few took from several dishes, apparently in a fixed order.
Yting began with the third row of large plates, then passed on to
the first row of saucers, and finally returned to the plates. Soleng
took a portion from the third saucer, in which Odal had stuck the
needles and the little knives. The six large plates of rice, garnished
with fish, eggs, etc., were handed entire to the guests of rank.
The ceremony closed when all of the food had been eaten. 254
In the evening, there was the usual gathering at Yting’s house
for the consultatation of the manganito spirits.
*6* A letter written by Father Gisbert, and dated January 4, 1886, briefly charac-
terizes the harvest festival among the Bagobo. “They have two feasts annually: one
before the sowing of rice, and the other after its harvest. This last is of an innocent
enough character, and is called the feast of women. At that feast all the people gather
at the house of their chief or the master of the feast, at the decline of the afternoon.
That day they feast like nobles, and drink until it is finished the sugar-cane wine which
has been prepared for that purpose. There is music, singing, and dancing almost all
the night, and the party breaks up at dawn of the following day.’ Bratr and Ro-
BERTSON: op. cit., vol. 48, pp. 283—234. 1906.
For a description of the elaborate reaping ceremonies practised by the Malays of
Selangor, see SKEAT, op. cit., pp. 285—239.
180 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Marriage Rites
Courtship and marriage come about in a very spontaneous manner
among the young people of the Bagobo. The girls are quite as
independent as the boys, and both are of an age, when the question
of marriage comes up, to be fully able to make their own decisions.
Child marriage, or contract for the marriage of children, does not
exist among thom. The girl is from fifteen to eighteen years of
age, at least, and the boy, eighteen or twenty, at the time of
marriage. During courtship there are abundant opportunities for
meeting without surveillance from their elders, for songs and walks,
for glances and smiles and chewing of betel together. The girls
are exceedingly dignified, yet always frank and kindly in their
behavior with young men.
Ordinarily the boy asks the consent of the girl directly, and then
goes to her parents, placating them with gifts of agongs if they
object. Another method which is called a “very good way” is for
the boy to tell his father that he wants a certain girl, and ask him
to go to her parents; “the boy sends his father’ to manage the affair.
In other cases, the negotiations are initiated by the parents of the
respective families.
“Marriage by purchase’ in the sense that many of the early
writers on ethnology use the term is unknown among the Bagobo.
Though the young man gives a present to his prospective father-
in-law for the privilege of marrying the girl, his situation is very
different from that which is found among tribes where the woman
is actually sold against her will. In the first place, the Bagobo
woman is a free agent; she accepts or rejects her suitor at will;
her parents will not force her to marry unless she wishes. Secondly,
it should be noted that if the young man is accepted, the girl’s
father gives him in return for the gift he has brought a present
equal to one-half of its value; that is to say, if the boy brings ten
agongs, the girl’s father gives him five of his own agongs, thus
making a very personal gift, and completely removing the stigma
of selling his daughter. She is honored, deferred to, consulted in
everything by her husband to an extent that often seems to place
her at the head of the family. A word from his wife will often
mould a man’s plans and change his intentions on the spot. That
the purchase of the woman, in the sense of a marriage gift to her
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 181
father, necessarily implies the bondage of the woman, or even a
minimizing of the respect in which she is held by the man, is
effectually disproved in Bagobo family life, just as it is disproved
in many another primitive group.
Trial Marriage.” A wide latitude prevails in regard to a set
time for the formal marriage ceremony. In general, the wedding
takes place while the boy and the girl are still respectively malaki
and daraga, or virgins, They marry first, it is said, and try each
other afterwards. Another Bagobo custom, which seems to be an
ancient one, is to permit the couple to meet without restriction,
but to defer the Bagobo ceremonial until after the birth of the
first child, or even later. During the period of reciprocal test, if
no child is born either one of the lovers may change face, reject
the other, and choose another partner. The marriage of Oun and
Uné was not solemnized with Bagobo rites until three children had
been born, the eldest being then six years of age, and the youngest,
eighteen months old. But Oyog married Daban immediately after
the birth of their first child.
Formal Ceremony ’*’ called Taliduma.**’ A formal marriage
is an act of high ceremonial significance, at which event such im-
portant ritual acts appear as the application of medicine with water
(pamalugu), the drinking of sugar cane liquor (balabba), the chanting
of gindaya, and even, occasionally, a human sacrifice.
tites peculiar to marriage include the discarding of old garments
and throwing them into the river, an act typical of the casting out
of disease; the pointing of a spear toward the mountain, emblemat-
ical of the warding off of misfortune; the plaiting together of
locks of hair, symbolizing, possibly, the permanence of the union;
the exchange of gifts; the setting up of a house-altar when the
new family is formed. The entire ritual of marriage, which is
performed by a priest or priestess, covers more than twenty-four
hours, and informal drinking and feasting often begin a day or
two before the formal ceremony.
The first event of the main day is the bringing of the agongs
246 Of, the mythical romance, “The Malaki’s sister and the Basolo,’ Jour. Am.
Folk-Lore, vol. 26, pp. 39, 40. 1913.
226 | did not have the good luck to see a marriage ceremony. The account here
recorded was given me by Islao, and I have checked it up by one or two other accounts
that came to me.
2%7 Tali-means “to tie,” and duma, “the other,’ “the wife,” or “the husband.”
4182 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
that are to furnish the wedding music into the house of the girl’s
parents. This performance occurs at about seven a.m., and is
ralled piid k’agong. The instruments are supposed to be furnished
by the bridegroom, and include those that he brings as the mar-
riage price, and others that he borrows for the occasion if his
purchase falls short.
When the sun is about two hours high — that is to say, about
eight o’clock — the couple to be married, their families and all the
friends who have arrived, go in procession to the river, where a
convenient place has been selected for the ceremony. Two small
flat bowlders that lie close together and project above the water
are picked out in a narrow part of the stream’s bed where the
water runs shallow. The young man and the young woman are
directed by the old people to sit down on these two stones, while
the people cluster at the edge of the river. The sitting on the
stones is a rite called gunsad.
There follows the pamalugu, or ceremonial washing. The old
man or the old woman who officiates as priest steps down into the
stream, holding in his hand a bunch of medicine (w/i-uli) composed
of small branches, leaves and stems of freshly-plucked plants of
many varieties that possess magic properties. The priest stands
over the young couple, and having dipped the bunch of medicine
into the stream he holds it above them, and lets the water drip
down upon their heads and bodies. Then with the uli-uli he
rubs the head and joints of the pair, giving one downward
stroke to each joint, in the following order: top of head, back of
neck, shoulders, elbows, wrists, knuckles, finger-joints, hips, knees,
ankles, toes, jaw, and last of all the face. The object of the
pamalugu is to make the bodies of the young people strong and
vigorous, and to keep out disease.
A magical rite for warding off sickness and misfortune is that
of bracing the mountain (T°ohud ka Pabungan). The priest takes
two short spears and points them at one of the neighboring moun-
tains (it was Mount Roparan when Oun married Une) and at the
same time recites a formula to the effect that the mountain
may not roll down on the young couple and bring them sickness.
Then he puts the spears in place, one back of the boy, and the
other back of the girl, letting the spears stand braced by stones.
They say they do this because it is Bagobo custom (butasan), and
that it is s’a/at or something to keep sickness away, because it
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 183
means that the mountain will not roll down on them. After the
ceremony, the two spears are laid in the river and left there.
The next rite is the gantugan, or throwing of garments into
the water. Up to this point in the ceremony, the young man and
the girl haye been dressed in old shabby clothes, so far as exter-
nals indicate, but now the girl draws off her skirt (panapisan) and
reveals beneath a beautiful, newly-woven skirt. She throws her
old panapisan into the river. At the same time, the man takes
off his poor trousers (saroar), under which he wears a fine new pair,
and flings the old pair into the stream, where the current carries
it down together with the panapisan. It is said that with the old
garments all the sickness goes away, floating out to sea.
The old man then ties together a lock of the man’s hair and a
lock of the girl’s hair as a mark of their union — a function
called pagsugpat k’olu. The tying of hair is followed by the exhor-
tation called patongkoy when the priest addresses the newly-married
pair in the following words. “You must put the altar tigyama in
your house, for an alat to keep away sickness. Take a white dish
and put into it areca-nuts and betel-leaf, and keep it in your house.
Whenever you get sick, put some more betel in the dish. You
must never take betel from the tigyama for chewing, because that
would make you very sick.”
During the entire ceremony at the river, which lasts for upwards
of an hour, all of the guests who wish to do so may bathe in the
river since the water acts as an alat, or charm, to make their bodies
strong against the attacks of sickness. Very many of the Bagobo
present go into the water for padigus, or bathing.
Between nine and ten o’clock, all return to the home of the
bride, where beating of agongs and dancing take place, at inter-
vals, throughout the entire day and guests keep on coming all
day long.
During the evening, there is cooking of rice, broiling of pig and
venison, and the accompanying preparations for a feast. At about
nine o'clock, the festival meal comes off and the guests, seated on
the floor in the customary manner, receive the food distributed by
some of the younger women. After the meal, there is a general
drinking of balabba, and afterwards beating of agongs and dancing
to the music of agongs and flutes. A few young men chant gin-
daya in the usual antiphons. At some hour during the night, there
takes place a set conversation, or discussion, among the old men,
184 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
who sit in a group on the floor, and decide matters that come up
for consideration between the two families of the wedded pair, such
as the exchange of suitable presents.
At break of dawn on the second morning, the agongs are beaten
(Pagong-go), and there is dancing (swmayo) for an hour or two.
When the sun is an hour high, — about seven o’clock, — the
ceremonies of the day are started under way. ‘There is first an ex-
change of.gifts between the bride and her husband — a ceremony
known as pabulase. She gives him a good textile made up into a
panapisan, which she may have worn for a few days or more,
at pleasure, since she took it from the loom. His gift to her is
commonly a wide, solid brass armlet, or an entire set of bracelets
for one arm or for both. A set, or bude, for one arm may consist
of forty to sixty rings of brass cut from heavy wire, some of which
are plain, some punched in decorative patterns. Two or three fine
vast bracelets usually form part of such a set. There is no cere-
monial restriction on the disposal of these marriage tokens; they
may be kept or sold, at the wish or the need of the young people.
Soon after the exchange of presents, the rite of tigyama takes
place. The bride furnishes one saucer or small deep plate, of white
crockery, and her husband brings another. Both of these dishes,
called pingan, must be old ones. The pingan are placed with ritual
words, and they remain for an indefinite time in their place below
the edge of the sloping roof. Areca-nuts and buyo-leaf are put
into the dishes for the god Tigyama, with a prayer to be kept
from sickness. This entire rite has an important magical value for
the prevention of disease and for the cure of sickness, and hence
is called a/lat.
The gift to the old man, or woman, who officiates is termed
tkut — the same name as that given to an old article reserved
for the gods, for the priest’s fee has a religious significance akin
to that associated with a gift to the gods. The bride and her
husband present, jointly, two or three articles of some slight value:
a spear and a piece of textile, or a shirt simply embroidered, to-
gether with a bracelet of brass, or a few hand-cast bells. The
giving of ikut closes the ceremony, usually at about nine o'clock
in the morning.
During the day or the night following the wedding, there is
held a meeting of the old men, called gohkwm bayako. This is a
form of assembly characterized by antiphonal singing interspersed
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 185
with conversation, and having for its object a financial settlement
between the two families, in regard to the marriage price. The
bridegroom may have been obliged to borrow the agongs, or to
buy on credit; the man to whom he owes the instruments may be
inclined to come and take them away from the bride’s father; the
number of agongs brought in by the young man may fall short of
those he promised for the marriage price; and numerous compli-
cations may arise among a people so ingenious in resources for
borrowing, as well as for pawning and promising payment in
articles that they hope sometime to acquire. In any case, there
might arise a question as to how many agongs are due of those
customarily given back by the father of the bride. Gokum lasts,
often, far into the night or until morning.
In marriages among families of wealth and distinction, the killing
of a slave as a religious sacrifice (paghuaga) is regarded as an im-
portant factor for insuring an auspicious marriage. This is an old
eustom among the Bagobo, and as late as 1886 Father Gisbert
writes: “When they [the Bagobo] marry, if the lovers think that it
will be of any use, they make a human sacrifice so that they may
have a good marriage, so that the weather may be good, so that
they may have no storm, sickness, ete., all things which they
attribute to the devil.” ?** During my own stay among the Bagobo,
no such instance came to my knowledge.
According to Bagobo custom, the young man lives in the home
of the bride’s parents for perhaps a year, more or less, or at least
until his own new house is built. When this is ready they set
up their own establishment. But if a Bagobo girl marries a Vis-
ayan, she will go with her husband to the house of his parents,
in accordance with Visayan custom, for a longer or shorter period.
Neither tribal exogamy nor tribal endogamy exists among the
Bagobo. They marry?** freely both within their own tribe and
266 Brain and ROBERTSON: op. cit., vol. 43, p. 235. 1906.
#9 The mixture of the Bagobo with other tribes, which is considerable, will lead to
interesting questions concerning changes in Bagobo ritual from the outside influence thus
brought in. In the sparsely-settled country in the near vicinity of Santa Cruz, I noted
seventeen families in which a Bagobo man or woman had taken a mate from some other
tribe. Of these, there were five matings of Bagobo with Tagakaola; six with Visayan;
two with Tagal; two with Bila-an; one with Zamboanguinian Moro; while one Bagobo
man had three wives — one each, from the Tagakaola, the Bagobo and the Bila-an tribes,
respectively. In the mountains, intermarriage between the Bagobo and Bila-an peoples,
186 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
into other wild tribes with whom they are on friendly terms, as
well as with the civilized Visayan and Tagalog. Nor is there any
law regulating village endogamy or village exogamy, for they choose
partners in the same village, as well as from other villages; but
whether or not there is any regulation as to marriage within a
certain cluster of villages, I am not able to state.
Rites attending Death and Burial
As sketched in a preceding chapter,*°° the takawanan, or good
soul, goes after death to the pleasant underworld; while the tebang,
or evil soul, departs to find its place among the buso. The dead
body, abandoned by both of those personalities that have dominated
it during life, is left as the helpless prey of flesh-eating fiends,
unless it be safeguarded by friends. Attendants gather around the
dying person, to rub his face with the fragrant leaves of tagomaing
and manangid and other sweet-smelling plants that have a magical
efficacy against the demons. “We do this,” they say, ‘so that
Buso cannot come to the sick man; these plants make Buso
afraid.” If such precautions were neglected a buso would come and
suck the blood of the dying ?"' before the heart-beat had ceased.
After death the body is left on the floor, lying on the same mat
used during the sickness. A little cushion is put under the head
and a piece of hemp or cotton textile is spread over the body,
covering the head also. Before the American occupation, a wide
strip of Bagobo textile was always used for covering the dead, but
now it is a gaudy striped cotton cloth of Moro weave. It appears
that this change is intended as a sop to the American government
thrown in all sincerity by the Bagobo on account of a laughable,
albeit pathetic, misinterpretation of a scrap of our nomenclature.
When the Bagobo learned that a large part of Mindanao, including
their own territory, had been named by our government the Moro
who are very friendly together, is not unusual. To what extent the traditions and
ceremonies are being aflected by these unions, is a problem that ought to be minutely
investigated. Modifications in material culture and in decorative art are continually
being introduced by inter-mixture; and, unquestionably, we may expect to find borrowed
episodes appearing in the myths, borrowed rites incorporated into the ceremonies.
29° See pp. 50—61.
2®1 Although Buso is not supposed, ordinarily, to harm the living, those at the point
of death are thought to be in danger of his attack.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 187
Province, they at once inferred that Americans wished to favor
these traditional enemies of the mountain tribes. Moro customs
and Moro products would be favored by Americans. “We now
take a Moro gintulu to cover the dead man, because if we used
the Bagobo cloth it would make the American governor of the
Moro province angry.” Before the funeral the body is dressed in
a nice pair of trousers, if a man, or fine woven skirt, if a woman,
so that it be suitably arrayed for making its entrance into Gimokudan.
During the one or two nights that pass before burial, a death-
watch (damag) is observed to protect the corpse from all the buso,
who are supposed to smell it from afar and to come flying or
running to eat the flesh, but who fear to enter a company of living
people. At the coast, it is customary to play at the wake a
Visayan game of cards called traysetis, but whether any function
of divination is attached to the game, or whether it be a mere
device to keep awake, is not known to me. A little jesting and
fun relieve the strain. If anybody falls asleep he is not disturbed,
but they punish him by scraping soot from the bottom of the clay
pots and slyly rubbing it over the miscreant’s face and _ legs.
When he wakens in the morning he sees his blackened skin, and
realizes to his deep mortification that they have made game of him.
A highly efficacious device for scaring Buso from the coffin is
that of producing a crocodile design **? on coffin or pall. In the
mountains, it was formerly the custom when a datu died to carve
the head and lid of his coffin into the shape of a crocodile’s head
with open jaws showing tongue and teeth. The head was a carving
in the round that projected in front of the body of the coffin, the
lid forming the upper jaw, so that to open the coffin it would be
necessary to lift the upper jaw and thus open the mouth of the
dreaded reptile.
In ordinary burials, a conventional pattern of lozenges and zig-
zags made from strips of red or white cotton cloth is tacked on
the black cloth that covers the sides and lid of the box, thus
producing a highly schematic representation that is called buaya,
or crocodile. The women tear off lengths of cloth and turn
down the edges in exact folds, while the men attach the strips
to the pall.
At the closing of the coffin, the chief mourner gives utterance
SVE RG fie 2
188 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
to a perfunctory wail. If a man is to be buried, the wife or
daughter sits down on the floor at the precise moment when some
male relative is picking up the lid of the coffin, and as he lowers
it to the box she places her right forearm horizontally across her
eyes in the customary attitude of grief, and begins to wail in that
high-pitched, plaintive tone peculiar to Bagobo women and little
girls. The wail seems on the border line between genuine grief
and a cry meant as a feature of the occasion. While this wail
goes on, an old woman, mother or grandmother, makes a ritual
exhortation to the spirit of the dead, her eyes fixed steadily on the
coffin, her glance following keenly every movement of the men
and directed toward the exact place where a nail is being driven.
Precisely with the placing of the last nail, the old woman ceases
speaking, and the young woman’s grief closes abruptly.
If the funeral takes place in the early morning, breakfast is
served to family and friends immediately after the coffin is closed,
but before anybody receives a portion of rice the first handful 2%
is taken out to put with the onong for the dead. Someone near
of kin to the deceased wraps the boiled rice in a banana-leaf and
puts it into the dead man’s carrying-bag, before joining the rest
to eat rice and to chew betel. At the close of the meal, they
gather up the things that will be needed at the burial — petati**+
to lay in the grave, and the food and other conveniences that the
soul is to take along on its journey to Kilut.
In the mountains, a burial-box is hollowed out from a section of
tree trunk or a log split lengthwise; but Bagobo families living
near the coast have formed the habit of shaping out a coffin, after
the manner of foreigners, but it is made barely large enough to
sqeeze the body into. Measurements taken by myself on the coffin of
Obal, a fairly tall Bagobo whose body was enormously swollen by
disease, gave an extreme length of 5 feet 3'/, inches; a maximum
width at the head end of 1 foot 6 inches, sloping sharply to a
width of 8 inches at the top of the lid; while the foot of the box
had a maximum width of 11 inches, with a slope to 4°), inches
at top.
[ was told that in former times the Bagobo made no coffin of
*** This custom was noticed by Father Mateo. “When anyone dies, they never bury
him without placing for him his share of rice to be eaten on the journey.” Brat and
ROBERTSON: op. cit., vol. 43, p. 237. 1906.
*9* Professor Boas tells me that this is a Mexican word.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 189
any sort, but simply spread a petati or two at the bottom of the
grave to receive the body. A vestige of this old custom appears
at the present time, when the same mats upon which the person
died are carried by somebody near of kin, and laid in the grave
before the body is lowered, so that they lie under the coffin. For
chieftains and persons of rank, a burial-box has probably been used
for a very long period.
If the body is to be carried any considerable distance for burial,
the coffin is placed on a rough bier (tiangan), consisting of two
long poles and two short cross-pieces, tied together with rattan.
Male relatives bear the dead to the grave. At the funeral of Obal,
three cousins carried the coffin, and Obal’s daughter carried three
forked sticks on which the bier would be placed at intervals on the
road, when the bearers stopped for rest; she carried the petati, too.
While Jesuit influence has led those Bagobo who live near the
coast to inter in one section of land set apart for a graveyard, the
mountain Bagobo continue the ancient custom of burying their dead
in the ground directly beneath the family house — a convenient place,
on account of the Malay mode of house construction, by which the
floor is lifted several feet above the ground. Many references in
the writings of Spanish missionaries?’ show that the old Filipino
custom was to make individual burials under the house, or in the
open field.
The grave (kalian) is measured, as custom requires, by the stat-
ure of the digger;*°° that is to say, the top of the wall of the
grave must be on a level with a point of the body somewhere
between waist and breast. The grave runs north and south, and
the body is placed with head to the north, so that it faces south.
At the moment of lowering the coffin into the grave, another
29° The Visayan of Cebu, according to the chronicler of the Legaspi expedition,
1564—1568, buried in coffins, with rich clothes, pottery and gold jewels, the common
people in the ground, but chiefs in lofty houses. Cf. Buatr and RoBERTSON: op. cit.,
vol. 2, p. 139. 1908. Chirino describes Filipino customs of embalming with the juice
of buyo, and burying in coffins under the house, or in the open field. Cf. zbid., vol.
12, p. 30. 1904, Plasencia says that the Tagal buried beside his house, and that the
chiefs were buried beneath a little house, or beneath a porch specially constructed. C/.
abhid., vol. 7, p. 194. 1903.
296 Zoroastrian books prescribed the exact depth for a grave. “On that place they shall
dig a grave, half a foot deep if the earth be hard, half the height of a man if it be
soft.” J. DaRMesSTETER (tr.): “The Zend-Avesta.” Sacred books of the Hast, vol. 4,
p. 97, 1895.
190 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ceremonial wail is heard. At the funeral of Obal, the mourner
was his daughter Ungayan, his wife having died before him. It
was she too who mourned when the lid was nailed down. When
the coffin was lifted from the bier by Maliguna, Ogtud and Bungan,
the three men cousins of Obal, Ungayan stooped down on the
ground, and just as the coffin was placed in the grave she reached
down and with one hand silently touched the head of the coffin.
This she did twice or thrice. Then she rose and walked a few
steps east of the grave, where she squatted on her feet, then
turned her head partly away from the grave and placed her right
arm horizontally across her eyes. One of the relatives dropped
upon the coffin Obal’s old kabir in which was deposited the rice
that had been put aside at breakfast, with some coffee, a few areca
nuts and buyo leaves, Obal’s tobacco-tube (kokong), and two lime-
tubes (tagan), all of which constituted the traveling-outfit (onong) for
Obal’s soul. Then the three cousins began to push earth into the
grave. Simultaneously with the falling of the first clod, Ungayan
took up her wail for the second time that day, crying and moaning
as before, but for a longer period and in a more vehement manner.
While she mourned, her young husband, Ulan, made an inyoea-
tion addressed to the gimokud of Obal, which was supposed to
have been walking through the village since death, but whose
departure for Kilut must now be hastened. The intention of the
burial ritual seems rather for the benefit of the living than that
of the dead, for it is recited with the hope that the gimokud will
go down in peace to Kilut, without attempting to trouble the
members of his family, or to draw them after him. They told me
that Ulian said the words to keep Ungayan and himself and the
others from getting sick. Ulian took up a slightly elevated position
on the crooked trunk of a gnarled old balbalin tree, a part of
which had curved in growth until it was almost parallel with the
ground. Ulian looked steadily into the grave, gazing with a fixed
stare at the coffin as it disappeared beneath the falling clods, as if
his attention were wholly riveted upon the spirit which he was
addressing in an urgent entreaty to depart.*°* This formula was
called daso/, and ran as follows.
297 The tradition that the soul lingers near the grave and funeral customs that
express this belief are widespread in the Malay region. Martin says: “Besonders wich-
tig sind die Vorstellungen, die sich die Inlandstimme von dem Verhalten der Seele
nach dem Tode machen. Am meisten verbreitet ist der Glanbe, dass der Geist beim
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 191
“Do not envy us, Kawanan.*** We have got you. What is the
matter? I see you grieving. You are going there to the One
Country.?°° Do not be sorry. Go there to the One Country.
Do not speak, because you are going there. We are here above.
We must eat now at our house because we are alive. You, you
are there in the One Country. We are living. If we speak in
Bagobo, you must answer in Bagobo. Feet, hands, eyes, nose,
mouth, head, belly, forearms, back — you must turn away; you will
go out from here. Show the sole of your foot, your palm. It
was your short line of life that killed you. Do not come from
the One Country. We bury you in the ground; we dig the walls
of the grave. We will set pots on the stones, place dishes, put
wood on the fire, cook food, dishing *°° it with spoons. Let us
walk far away. We are sleepy. You will be on your road for
three nights. When we reach our home, we will rest because we
are tired. Walking hurts my knees. My whole body hurts. My
arm pains me from elbow to wrist. I am sleepy because I am
tired from walking a long way. I hurt my foot on a sharp bamboo
sugian *°' while I was getting betel-leaf and cutting bananas. I
shall dig camotes to fill the burden baskets, because we are going
home to our house; for we will cook them because I am hungry.
All day I did not eat until the setting of the sun. We will spread
the petati for sleep. Give me a kisi.*°* The mosquitoes are
stinging me. Kindle a fire, because many small gnats *°’ are biting
already. Bad mosquitoes sting me all over. Put away the dishes.
Tode den Kérper verlisst und nach einem paradiesischen Lande gelangt, wo er in aller
Ewigkeit verweilt. In den Einzelheiten dieser Legende bestehen aber ziemliche Differenzen,
die wohl, zum Teil wenigstens, auf Vermischung mit ahnlichen, fremdartigen Vorstel-
lungen beruhen. So glauben die Besisi, dass die Seele zuniachst sich noch einige Zeit in
der Nahe des Grabes aufhalte, und daraus erkliren sich gewisse, bereits erwahnte Grab-
gebrauche. Auch die Sitte, den Ort, an welchem ein Mensch gestorben ist und begraben
wurde, zu verlassen, diirfte mit jener Vorstellung zusammenhiangen, da naturgemiiss der
umschwebende Geist den Hinterbliebenen Schaden tun konnte.” Die Inlandstimme der
malayischen Halbinsel, p. 950. 1905.
226 The good soul, or gimokud takawanan.
°° The land of the dead, called also the Great Country.
s00 This reference is probably to the funeral feast.
°°? A trap of sharp bamboo points.
°°2 A mantle of woven cotton which a Bagobo sometimes wraps round him at night.
393 4 hint of the actual condition at the moment, for swarms of little gnats filled
the air. In that tropical jungle, the bodies of the men, naked to the the waist, were covered
with swarming and crawling things — vermin, black and yellow, long and shiny-looking.
492 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
We have finished eating. I will sweep the floor, chew betel, put
tobacco in my mouth and shake out lime. The river has risen.
We cannot cross. It is swollen.” *"4
By the time that Ulian had finished the recitation of the dasol,
the grave was entirely covered, and the frame forming the bier
was laid on the grave, with the forked sticks placed on top. Ulian
then stepped down from his place, and all the mourners went home.
A feast and a dance are often given after the funeral by families
that can afford the expense.
Another custom is to leave the body in the house, while the family,
after carefully closing the door and fastening the windows, moves
away and builds a new house to live in. Sometimes the new house
is very near to the old one which contains the body. I have seen
in a lonely forest on the mountains two small huts but a few feet
apart, one of which little houses was said to contain the body of
a boy, while his family lived in the other. I was told that they
lived there because they loved their little boy, and wanted to be
near him. An additional motive may have been the hope of pro-
tecting the body of their dear child from the attacks of Buso, since
the bad demon is traditionally afraid of living people.
An ancient custom of tree-burial is suggested by the story,
“The Tuglibung and the Tuglay,*”® in which the hero laid the
body of his little sister in the branches of a tree, “because the
child was dead.” Although in the myths thus far published this
is a unique case, it is not unlikely that such a disposal of the
body was common in old times. This probability is strengthened
by the fact that tree-houses used to be used rather widely by the
Bagobo and by the Bila-an people. The leaving of a corpse in
the tree-house °°’ would then correspond to the present custom of
shutting up a home with the body inside.
2°* The text of the address to the departing spirit was given me by Ulian after the
funeral. It seems to end abruptly, but such an ending is often characteristic of the
Bagobo songs and stories as well as of speeches. The exhortation contains several refer-
ences to the funeral feast, which gives the customary termination to the ceremony and
perhaps offers additional consolation to the departing soul.
29° See Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, p. 26. Jan.-Mar., 1913.
296 rom Ouirante’s account, the Igorot, at the time of their discovery by Spain,
used to bury in caves, but they also made use of the trees for placing their dead. “Others
they set in the trees, and they carry food for so many days after having left them.”
Buark and Ropertson: op. cit., vol. 20, p. 275. 1904,
Part III. Every-pay Forms or ReEticious RESPONSE
INTERVIEWS WITH THE GODS, CALLED MANGANITO
The concept of anito is somewhat variable throughout the Islands,
and hardly any two writers agree exactly as to the content of
the word. Among the Tagalog, nature deities of the mountains,
the plains and the sea, as well as the small images that imperson-
ated them, were called anito; the spirits of dead ancestors, also,
were placed among the anito.*°' Rizal explains that, “It appears
that the natives called anito a tutelary genius, either of the family
or extraneous to it. Now, with their new religious ideas, the
Tagals apply the term anito to any superstition, false worship, idol,
ete.” 3°S Mendoza wrote, in 1588, that in Luzon small images
were called manginitos, and a great feast was held for them. *°°
Visayan tribes, according to Morga, applied the name anito to their
idols of demons, and we find elsewhere that they used such images
for conjuring away sickness.*'° Jenks says that the Igorot give
the name of anito to all spirits of the dead. °?"!
The material gathered by me from the Bagobo does not give the
impression that the word anito is associated with demons or with
ghosts of ancestors, unless it be secondarily. With the Bagobo,
the anito are those gods that are in the habit of coming into direct
communication with man by means of a medium, through whose
lips they speak oracles, ask and answer questions and give advice.
The deities who speak in this manner to man are those who are
closely related to his interests, and who hold a friendly attitude
307 Of, F. Comin: “Native races and their customs.” Blair and Robertson: op czt.,
vol. 40, pp. 72—73. 1906.
302 Brain and Roperrson: op. cif., vol. 16, p. 131 footnote. 1904.
309 Cf, ibid., vol. 6, p. 146. 1903.
310 Of, ibid., vol. 16, p. 131, and vol. 21, p. 207. 1905.
311 Of, “The Bontoc Igorot.” P. I. Department of the Interior, Ethnological Survey
Publications, vol. 1, pp. 71, 196. 1905.
13
194 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
toward him, while some of them are addressed as anito even in the
devotions at out-of-door shrines at times other than those of the
regular seances. I have never heard of an utterance coming from
a dead ancestor or from any other ghost at these night meetings,
though at present I would not go so far as to state definitely that
a ghost might not function as anito.
Another class of spirits that speak to the people on these occas-
ions are the spirits of diseases, such as epidemics, malaria and
other forms of disease which attack large numbers of people and
are thought to travel from place to place. Sicknesses of individual
Bagobo also are appealed to and give answers at the seances.
These disease-spirits, often called buso, are the only personalities of
the nature of demons that come to the night meetings for such
dreaded fiends as tigbanud never speak as anito. Furthermore, the
highest diwata who are remote from man’s interests do not appear
to function as anito.
The words and songs uttered under the influence of the anito
are called collectively manganito, a term which is applied also to
the meeting itself. The occasions for calling manganito are various:
the time of a religious festival; before a journey to a distant place;
on putting up a new house; when sickness attacks a whole com-
munity or an individual, and in general when anything unusual
occurs, like an earthquake,?'* or when some new undertaking is in
progress. During the nineteen days covering the preparation for
the Ginum at Talun and its celebration, there were at least seven
or eight anito meetings. These gatherings are to be distinguished
sharply from a spiritualistic seance, since, as we have said, there
seems to be no attempt to get into communication with the spirits
of the dead.
In every village, there is usually one person who is said to
“have anito,”’ and in a large rancheria*'® there may be two or
three individuals who are able to act as mediums. An old woman
customarily takes this part, but sometimes a young man or an
older man officiates as medium.
At Talun, the medium was Singan, one of Oleng’s wives. She
was a middle-aged woman; in physique, frail and anaemic ; in manner,
timid and shrinking. She gave the general impression of extreme
312 See p. 202.
*'3 A name given by the Spaniards to fhe small hamlets of the pagan tribes.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH = 195
mental susceptibility and of unstable equilibrium that would invite
the slipping off into a trance or an ecstasy; yet, outside of the
manganito, [I never saw her show any sign of emotional excite-
ment. Much of the time she kept by herself; she rarely spoke;
for an hour or two before the meetings, one might see her crouch-
ing alone in some dusky corner where, in her mental isolation
from the rest, she was dreaming and meditating.
Another person acts as leader of the manganito meetings, in the
capacity of receiving directly the divine instructions and of seeing
that they are followed out. She answers the anito’s questions, and
stimulates the medium when her utterances begin to lag. At Talun
this official was always Oleng’s sister, Miyanda, a woman of dominating
personality, with a sonorous voice and persuasively kind intonations.
It was she who gave the order for the torches to be extinguished,
as the room must be profoundly dark for the visitation of the anito.
If a mere flicker of flame starts up from the embers of the hearth,
somebody runs to put it out.
The time may be any hour of night, after the evening meal has
been eaten, this last and most substantial meal of the day being
served at about nine o’clock. The place may be any Bagobo home,
but preferably the house of the datu or the Long House. All of
the night meetings that I attended in Talun were held in the
Long House.
On account of the deep darkness, the facial expression of Singan
and her exact posture could not be observed; but she would either
sit on the floor, or squat on her feet in the customary Malay manner.
When the possession began to come upon her, she grew cold and
shiyered, whereupon she would give a shout, followed by a series
of harsh velar sounds, such as, “Goh! gtsson! ugh!” Gradually,
then, she would swing into a slow chant or an intoning of words
that she felt herself inspired to utter. Brokenly and with great
difficulty the divine messages came at first, but soon a clearer tone,
a more sustained utterance and a greater confidence became apparent
in her delivery of the oracle. Between the songs, the priestess
talked along, with intervals of gasping, of dry coughing and clear-
ing of her throat. One means of emotional discharge to which
she frequently gaye vent was a violent expulsion of air through
the lips, in sharp, labial surds — “Upii!” — and semi-vowels thrown
out explosively — “Huwad!” When the utterances lagged, Miyanda
was always ready with an encouraging word, “Una!’? — a coaxing
4196 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ejaculation made use of by Bagobo, either to draw forth a tale
from a story-teller, or to stimulate an oracle.
The first manganito at which I was present during my stay in
Talun occurred on the night of August 1. Miyanda, as usual, was
the leader, prompting, encouraging, suggesting or assenting to the
messages of the gods. <A favorite answer of hers was “Katig” (We
know that; that’s so) given in a tone of genial assent. The chanting
of Singan was, for the most part, on two notes, one interval apart
(DDCC), uttered with a uniform quantity, but occasionally this
intoning was varied by a melodious tune on four notes.
When the two leaf-wrapped resin torches, wedged in the notched
ends of crooked branches, had been extinguished, the Malaki
Olu k’Waig was the first of the anito to speak through Singan’s
mouth. He said: “When the thunder-claps are heard, that is the
Malaki t?Olu k’Waig calling out in loud voice; and when the rain
falls the Malaki’s little sister is erying, and her tears drop down
in showers.”
After this, the Malaki instructed Miyanda in a method of cure
for her son-in-law, Malik, who had been attacked by the “Sickness
that goes round the world.” The remedy consisted in the offering
of betel, and in the observance of a certain tabu. Miyanda was
told to cut one areca-nut into two times nine pieces, and likewise
to cut one betel leaf into two times nine pieces, and having laid
the areca on the betel to place it in the way where people walk.
Moreover, Malik was forbidden to enter any other house for three
nights, and forbidden to eat any betel. After the third night, Malik
was to cut two times eight sections of the twisted fiber called tikus,
or else to carve a little wooden figure in form of a man and lay
it in the path leading toward the trail to the coast. This method,
the Malaki said, would cure Malik’s sickness.
Up to this point, the priestess had conveyed the utterances of
the god with quiet gravity, her speech or her song being inter-
rupted only when there broke from her a gasp, a sob, a shout, or
a chant on a higher key. Now, however, she began to give little
shrill laughs — “He! he!’ The anito of the “Sickness that goes
round the world” had entered into the priestess, and was deriding
the Bagobo. This anito is a female and she said: “I am the sick-
ness of Malik; I am traveling round the world to make the people
sick, and it is I that gives them chills and coughs.” This speech
was followed by a taunting laugh — “Hu! hu! hu!” and “Ha! ha!
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 197
ha!’ — a harsh, mocking laugh, repeated several times in hoarse
tones. The laughter ceased, and the priestess struggled through a
hard coughing spell, after which was silence, while all the people
in the Long House waited eagerly for the announcement of the
next anito.
se Singe tered a low-voiced shout, and chanted in trem-
Presently Singan uttered a low-voiced shout, and chanted in trem
ulous tones, “Malaki t’?Olu k’Waig.” The Malaki said, addressing
Miyanda, “The woman that brings sickness lives in the center of
the earth, where there is a large, deep hole.” Then Miyanda
replied to the Anito, “You, Malaki, must keep us all the time
from sickness.”
Soon after this, another anito spoke as follows: “I am the spirit
of the Senora, and I love (ginawa) the Bagobo.”
At this, the Malaki t’Olu k’Waig took up the same theme and
said, “Do not be afraid of that lady because of ka lambungan (dif-
ference in rank), for she is kind to us and we are friends of hers.”
When the Malaki had left off speaking, another anito made him-
self heard. It was Abog, the big-bellied one who lives with his
many dogs on a little island,*!* and he said: “You have no pig
to eat, because when you hunted your dog did not hold and bite
the pig. Now give me some arrows, and I, in return, will help
z .) y] ) y]
you catch a pig; but if you do succeed in spearing a pig, do not
sell any of the meat to any people to carry home.*!®> Do not let
them buy, unless they eat the pig-meat here in this house.”
y] 5
Singan’s voice was failing, for she had been under the strain
for some time and had grown very tired. Her chants were broken
cS) y
by labored breathing, by grunts, “Hm! hm! hm!” and by ejacu-
lations that were almost moans. Almost incessantly now she had
to be stimulated by encouraging little interpolations from Miyanda.
The priestess struggled to bring out her words between coughing
and choking — “Ohub! ohtib!” — a pause, a groan; at last, slowly
and faintly she enunciated the name “Malaki t?Olu k’Waig.” Her
voice died away, and she sank into the sleep of sheer exhaustion.
The second interview with the anito, in connection with the
preparation for the Ginum at Talun, oceurred on the night of
August 6. After the torches had been extinguished, the priestess
*1“ The small island of Samal, in the gulf of Davao, is Abog’s reputed home.
°° In reference to a ceremonial tabu which permits nothing used in connection with
the Ginum to be carried out of the Long House until the close of the celebration.
198 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
began to exhibit the usual signs of possession, — gasping, groaning
and laughing, — after which behavior she personated various dei-
ties by chanting and talking, as at the preceding visitation. The
time covered from the first sign of emotional disturbance in the
woman until the close of her oracles was very nearly two hours.
The Tolus ka Talegit spoke first, a female deity who under-
stands weaving and all the work of the women, and who is the
“All-knowing One of the medicine for the loom.” She said, “The
Senora came from a long way off. She has come to see the Bagobo
people, and she wants to know all the Bagobo customs.”
Next, the Malaki t’Olu k’Waig gave an utterance in regard to
Malik, who, it came out, had broken his tabu, the oracle being
addressed to Malik’s mother-in-law, Miyanda. The Malaki said:
“Malik does not respect me, because he has spoken to some man
during the eight days that he was forbidden, at manganito, to speak
to anybody. Now, I am not angry with him, but he must give
me eight pieces of betel-leaf, or eight pieces of areca-nut.” Then
Malik made answer to the Malaki: “We have no betel, but I will
give you, as an awas,*!® some little bells or a brass armlet or
some brass wire.”
The Malaki t’Olu k’Waig then spoke of the coming festival and
asked Oleng, “In how many days will the Ginum be?” Then
Oleng answered: “We will have the Ginum when the moon is in
the west. Now tell me what sickness this is in my body.” In
reply, the Malaki said: “It is the woman who lives in the middle
of the sky who makes you sick. The reason she brings you sick-
ness is because you have left off the old Bagobo custom of killing
a man before you set up the bamboos and performed the patanan,”’ *''
At this Oleng exclaimed: “Yes, we used to do that way, but
now things are different; we cannot now do the same way we did
before.’ The Malaki answered insistently: “It was Bagobo custom
to kill somebody before the Ginum, and then to get the young
sprays of areca-palm and the baris, and to carry them into the
house where the Ginum was celebrated. Then you would stand
up the two bamboos in the house, and you would sing the war-
song and chant the gindaya and perform the patanan over the
bamboos.”’ *!5
**® Awas is here used in its primary significance, as a gift to a god.
**7 Recitation of exploits by the old men, while they are holding the bamboo.
718 See p. 162, footnote.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 199
There was some further talk between Oleng and the anito about
the old customs and the present ones that I was not able to record.
After this, the All-knowing One of the Bamboos made his demands:
“If you do not hasten the celebration of Ginum, you will soon be
attacked by sickness, because I will send the sickness. I will send
the sickness if you do not make patanan quickly, just as is the
custom of the Bagobo every year when they have the Ginum.”
“But you must keep us from sickness; returned Oleng; “we want
you to take all the diseases to the home of the Malaki t’Olu k’ Waig,
so that he may kill them.”
Next spoke the Tolus ka Balekat, who is god of the high altar
and to whom much of the ceremonial of Ginum is addressed, saying:
“In how many days will the Ginum be given? If you do not get
ready quickly for the Ginum, the Tagaruso will come, or the
Balinsugu.” *!°
Then, changing the topic, the Tolus made a statement touching
the offerings due to himself, as follows: “The Senora came from a
long distance, and she wants to buy all the Bagobo things so that
she may have everything that the Bagobo manufacture. Now, I
do not want to have the Bagobo things sold, for I wish the spirit
of the objects to pass into my pangolan;**° therefore hold back
your possessions, and sell only a few things to the Senora, just so
that she will not be offended.” To this, Miyanda assented with a
single word, “Sadunggo,” (All right, certainly).
Then the anito of the “Disease that goes round the world” said:
“What strange woman is here?” Miyanda replied: “She is a
*2! who lives in the root of the sky.” Then the Disease asked:
“Can I make the Bia sick?” “Oh no!” rejoined the old woman,
“you cannot make her sick, because she is not of our blood.”
The last of the anito who spoke that night was Abog, a god
who controls success in the hunt. Malik put this question to Abog:
“Will you give us a pig to-morrow, if [luk goes to hunt?” “Yes,”
replied Abog, “provided you make me a gift of some arrows with
good steel points.”
On the night of August 8, Miyanda summoned the Malaki t’Olu
k’ Waig
g, as soon as the lights had been put out — perhaps between
bia
*1® Demons that bring the spirit of unrest and tumult to a festival. See pp. 29, 36—37, 107.
$20 A bracelet of solid shell, made from a cross-section.
°21 Bia means “lady.” Cf. Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, pp. 14, 30, 36, 1915.
200 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ten and eleven o’clock. The priestess sang in sharp staccato style
on two notes (C DC vu -v short, long, short) in a manner totally
different from her customary monotonous intoning. She poured
forth her words fluently, needing little of the usual prompting and
encouragement from Miyanda. The subject matter concerned my-
self and my efforts to become acquainted with the various pro-
cesses of Bagobo handiwork — the twisting of leglets, the tying
of patterns in cloth, the dyeing of hemp, and so forth. Frequently
Miyanda would exclaim, “Katig kanun,’” (She knows that, she has
learned that), The next morning Singan told me that all the
Bagobo were very sorry that I was not going to stay with them;
that Malaki t’Olu k’Waig favored the Americans; that when I went
away they would sell their things to me; that if I would put upon
the balekat some bells or a balinitung *** or some white cloth, I
would find it easy to buy the Bagobo things I might wish for.
These friendly approaches followed a question of mine as to what
she had said in the seance of the previous night. Fumbling her
feet and smiling in a timid uncertain fashion, she asked me whether
I loved the Malaki t’?Olu k’Waig, and on my replying in the
affirmative she looked pleased and repeated that I was to put on
the balekat a few little bells or a balinutung.
Soon after we had lain down to sleep on the night of August 9,
Singan began to cough and to gasp; and soon, with ejaculatory
speeches and chants, she entered into her character of medium for
a brief seance, covering perhaps twenty minutes.
First, the Malaki t?Olu k’Waig spoke as follows, referring to the
girls who had been pounding rice until late that evening: “I hear many
women pounding rice, and I am asking when the Ginum will be held.
Now I tell you women that since you have begun the binayu*** you
must keep it up, and pound rice all the time until the Ginum opens.”
Next the Tolus ka Balekit gave a warning to Oleng in the
following words: “You must take care of your body because you
are getting old, and by and by when you grow very weak, you
will die quick.” Replying, the old datu said: “I want you to keep
me from sickness all the time, but tell me what kind of sickness
will hurt me.” The Tolus ka Balekat answered: “Your sickness
comes from the root of the sky, from the horizon.”
*22 A closed armlet or leglet, cast in brass or agong-metal from a wax mold.
*22 The pounding of rice in the mortar.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 201
Following this oracle, a message came from a female deity of
the women — the Tolus ka Talegit— who said: “Before long, the
Tagaruso and the Tagamaling *** will come into your house; but
in order to keep them off you must tell her that she will have to
put a linimut balinitung*?? on the hanging altar, *?° because this is
her first visit here.”
Singan ceased speaking and came out of her trance. A little
later, when Oleng complained of feeling cold, she went to the hearth,
stirred up the fire and gave him some food or drink. Then Oleng,
Singan and Oleng’s daughter, Maying, talked together in low tones
for a few minutes, while gathered round the fire. After this short
consultation, Maying went to the other young women, all of whom
were now sound asleep, and spoke gently to each of them. With
great difficulty she awakened them, one by one, and then went
to the big mortar near the hearth and began to pound rice by
herself. Presently, other women got up and went to help her.
Through the rest of that night and all of the next day and through
the following night, they pounded continuously, working by relays.
The sound of the pestle in the mortar never ceased for thirty-six
or forty hours. It was the eleventh of the month when they
finished pounding; that is to say, three days before the beginning
of Ginum. The anito had told them not to stop pounding until
the opening of the festival, but it is possible that some further
message curtailing the time may have come from the gods, since,
on the night of the tenth, the old people *?' slept at Oleng’s house.
The rest of us were sleeping in the Long House, and it is not
possible to state whether on that night a manganito occurred or not.
On the night of the eleventh, there were a few brief communi-
cations from the divine beings. Bualan was told that his wife had
given birth to a child since he had left home to come to Talun,
and that the child was a boy.
52% See pp. 85—36, 38, 110.
*26 Two general types of metal rings, whether worn on arms or legs, are carefully
distinguished by the Bagobo: (a) pankis, or balinittung gutang, which is made of a section
of heavy brass wire rounded by pressure into a circlet that is not quite closed for the
two ends are never soldered, a very narrow space being left between them; (b) daliniitung
lintmut, a leglet or armlet much more higly valued than the other, for it is cast from
a wax mold in brass or bell-metal and forms a complete circle. The “her,” I was told,
referred to myself.
226 The balekat.
°27 That is, Oleng, Singan and Miyanda.
202 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Oleng consulted the Tolus ka Balekat in regard to his own ex-
treme feebleness and lack of appetite. “Why have I no hunger
for my food?” asked the old man. “It is the karokung **° sickness,”
replied the god, ‘and it comes to you from that old woman who
lives at the mouth of the river.” Then Oleng begged the anito
to take away his sickness and carry it to the Malaki t’Olu k’ Waig,
who would surely kill it.
On the sixteenth, about the middle of the night, the anito came
again, on which occasion there were some chants and recitations of
which I have no record.
On the Third Night of the Ginum, August 17, early in the
evening, while we were all chatting and playing games, there came
a eall for the torches to be extinguished. The occurrence of the
earthquake that afternoon with the consequent breaking off of the
ceremonies was one of those happenings which made the summoning
of anito very necessary. I am able to give only the substance of
the interview.
There was discussion about the earthquake and its relation to
the time of the ceremonies, the Malaki t?Olu k’Waig being the
god consulted.
The Malaki said that Kaba ought to find a wife for his son,
Tungkaling.
The Malaki stated, further, that a disease called gimusu*** was
in the mountains and would undoubtedly reach Talun.
A female deity, the Tolus ka Balekayo (All-knowing One of the
small bamboo), made known her wishes concerning the presence of
foreigners at the Ginum. She remarked that she objected to having
Americans come to the Bagobo festival; but several people in the
room exclaimed, with one voice, that if they did not let the Senora
come to the Ginum it would be bad for the Bagobo. “Well then,”
amended the anito, “the Sefiora must give a white chicken to Singan,
and I will give one to the Senora because she underwent pama-
lugu in the river this morning.”
On the following night, August 18, there was a manganito
meeting which had a particular interest for Saliman, a nephew of
*26 Attacks, probably of a malarial nature, characterized by fever, chills, cough and
other accompanying symptoms, are usually called by the Bagobo sarokung: but the white
woman with Jong black hair who lives in the river, and is held responsible for the
sickness, is not ordinarily called an “old” person. See p. 226.
22° A serious skin disease. See p, 227.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 203
Oleng’s, a young man gifted with unusual beauty, grace in dancing
and charm of manner. When he arrived at Talun, he was just con-
valescing from a terrible illness, brought on by eating some poison-
ous substance that had been given him at Bansalan.*°° He had pre-
sumed too far upon his social charms while visiting in the homes
of the sturdy and self-willed mountain girls, and they had deter-
mined to punish him in their own way. As soon as Singan had
slipped into her trance, the anito of Saliman’s malady came and
said to him: “This is a woman sickness. Do you know me? I
am the Sickness that makes you so skinny. Your lip is pale and
dry, and I caused that too, at the time when the women at Ban-
salan gave you medicine in your betel, so as to make you very
sick.” On hearing this, Salimén called on the Malaki t’Olu k’Waig
saying: “You must take care of us, Malaki t’Olu k’Waig, and
send the sickness to your own town. Do not let the diseases go
out from there.”
Then one of the anito gave instructions as to the proper remedies
for Saliman, as follows: “You take wli-wli and other good weeds,
rub them on your joints, and repeat at the same time these words,
‘Go back, Sickness, to your own body.’” *?!
Then Miyanda put some question in regard to gifts for the bam-
boo prayer-stand, and one of the anito said in reply: “The Sefiora
must give a string of beads to put in the tambara, and I, in return,
will give her one balintitung, because she is the first American lady
that ever came here. If she fails to put beads in the tambara, she
will be attacked, after a while, by sickness.”
CHARMS AND MAGICAL RITES
In the spiritual environment of the Bagobo, one seems aware of
a somewhat exact apportionment of magical potentiality, rather than
of a universal magical influence pervading the whole world. When
some phenomenon out of the ordinary or one hard to explain is
observed, it is called by one of several names, each of which im-
plies what we would call magic; but each of these names has a
particular meaning of its own that does not lend itself to the idea
330 4 Bagobo village not far from Mati. It was reported at Mati that the Bansalan
girls whom Salimén attempted to approach had put into his betel, when they prepared
it for him, a “medicine” that would kill a man.
331 The “body” of the sickness was the drug that the girls had given Saliman.
204 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
of an all-pervasive magical power; rather the person or the thing
has its own individual potency. Furthermore, there is no general
term, so far as I have observed, in use among the Bagobo that would
correspond to the kramat of the Straits Settlement, or to kamana of
Madagascar, or to mana **? of Melanesia — each of which words
usually has a connotation of some undefinable quality, or condition,
or force transfused throughout nature.
A Bagobo calls a hero of romance who is wonder working and
invulnerable matolus; a ceremony that is performed to produce
magical effects is alat; a single object that acts as a potent charm
is alang. Each of these terms is too highly particularized to be
held as an equivalent of the words above cited from other peoples
of not far-removed areas. Another term, baw?, which is in constant
use among the Bagobo, has a wide range, for though regularly
applied to a healing drug it is sometimes synonymous with alang,
a charm; and, again, bawi means something that is an antidote
for the breaking of a tabu. Invariably, however, bawi refers to a
certain material object, or else to a ritual act. You can never say
of a person, “He has bawi,” as the Melanesians say, “He has mana.”
You can say that a person “has anito;” but anito in this sense is
a word limited to a certain form of spiritual possession.
As for the words alat and alang, there is not a sharp line of
demarcation between them, but, in general, a/at is used to denote
a magical method or a religious rite, while a charm-object is called
alang. A potent medicine tied up in a rag is alang; a lighted
torch is alang, while the ceremony of lustration for bride and groom
is alat, and the rite of setting up the family shrine is also said to
be alat. Yet the line separating these terms is not always so
distinct as in the cases just quoted, for there is a special substance
carried to charm away snakes to which the term alat is applied.
It is worthy of note that every sickness, every bit of ill luck,
and (one might almost say) practically every transgression, carries
with it a medicine that draws out the poison of the situation and
puts things right again. There was once an old spear of a partic-
*°2 Tt is true that Codrington’s exposition of mana suggests a magic force personally
wielded, rather than a universal force (as I have heard Dr. Goldenweiser happily epitomize
the discussion); but among the Bagobo this conception would be associated only with
the quality of being matolus, and this characteristic is limited to gods and remarkable
men. It might be transmitted to a hero’s sword, possibly, but not to stones or to snakes,
like mana in Melanesia. Cf. The Melanesians, p. 191. 1891.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 205
ular type that I wanted to buy from Datu Yting; but he informed
me that he could not sell it because it had become an c¢kut and
was already hung on the wall for the gods, and that it would make
him very sick to let it go. Accordingly, I dropped the subject.
Some time later the old man came to me and intimated that he
might possibly sell me that spear; that there was a chance of his
finding a bawi that would nullify the effect of the sacrilege, “for
there is medicine for everything, Senora,” he added, “medicine for
everything.” °°
Magic, as a Bagobo apprehends it, is either a potency inherent
in certain objects or in several elements properly combined, as a
drug or a fetish; or it is the dynamic power of a ceremony whose
effect is sure; or it is an indirect suggestion that sets in motion a
train of mental images leading to a fixed response — it may be a
manikin, a formula, a significant action, or any one of a hundred
things which is chosen to give the initial suggestion for the train
of associations that it is desired to produce. An instance of such
indirect suggestion is the washing of chickens and goats as a charm
to eall the rain.
Following the natural clustering of charms and magical arts as
handled by the Bagobo, I shall attempt to make a rough grouping
under psychological motives, rather than with regard to human in-
terests, such as war, courtship, ete. Obviously, such groups will
overlap, and often a magical method may be considered as belong-
ing, indifferently, to one or to another class according to the point
of view; yet even a tentative classification is convenient when hand-
ling a large amount of miscellaneous magical material.
We may say, then, that charms and magical rites will work out
the desired end in one or more of four ways:
a). By actual defense magically placed;
b). By substitution, or the psychological principle of association
by resemblance (Frazer’s “homoeopathic magic,” in part);
c). By association by contiguity (Frazer’s “contagious magic,”
in part);
d). By inherent virtue, including fetishes and much of the native
materia medica.
°33 Cf. the same idea in Indian magic. “Brahmans can accomplish all things in this
world by means of ceremonies.” Somadeva: op. cit., p. 85.
206 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Charms by Actual Defense
Here belong many protective charms, such as magic circles and
similar devices, by means of which the individual using them is
fenced about by a rampart that cannot be broken through by the
demon, or penetrated by evil influences. The majority of these
charms act as preventive medicines. In many cases, their efficacy
is so closely associated with magic numbers, that if any other
numbers than these were used, the mascot would straightway
become a hoodoo. Even numbers are usually considered as the
lucky ones, and odd numbers as unlucky, but nine *%* is always a
good number and thus an exception to the rule.
Many objects worn on the person are charms. Any bracelet or
leglet that forms a closed circle may be magically used by Bagobo
men and women, but especially valuable as protective charms are the
armlets and leglets cast in metal from a wax mold and called by
various names according to their several variations. A single one
of such rings worn on arm or ankle is an amulet,**? for each
is a closed circle. As for bracelets like pankis, each of which
forms a circle not completely closed, an even number of these
— forty, fifty, eighty — should be worn, if they are to bring luck
to the wearer.
Closely associated with this idea is the custom of wearing certain
amulets always on the same part of the body. Change the place
and the charm is gone. If a bracelet, say, that is customarily
worn on the left wrist is changed to the right wrist, the spell is
broken, and the wearer will become sick.
A long girdle of hand-made brass links — the sinkali*8° — is
a potent charm if wound about the waist an even number of times,
*3* Not only in magical association, but in ceremonial use, eight and nine are held
by all Bagobo as sacred numbers. Skeat found among Peninsular Malays that seven
was the valued number. Op. cit., p. 50.
*9° Father Gisbert writes as follows on this point. “When they visit a sick person,
they have the custom of placing copper rings on their wrists or on their legs, in order
that the soul which they call dimocud may not leave.” Blair and Robertson: op. cit.,
vol. 43, p. 287. The idea here is rather that of using the magic circle to keep in
something essential to life, than of keeping out harmful influences. ‘There is apparently
a misprint in the initial sound of gimokud, as Gisbert’s own vocabulary gives guimucod
as a synonym for espiri/u. Diccionario espafiol-bagobo, p. 64, 1892.
*36 See also pp. 210—212.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 207
or nine times, but unlucky if wound once, or three, or five times,
or any odd number.
A tenuous and wiry legband called tikus, made by twisting the
split sheath of certain plants round the stems of certain other plants,
is worn by Bagobo men and women just below the knee. The
effect is highly decorative, and a man will wear two or three
hundred in a cluster, but a single tikus suffices as an amulet against
the bite of poisonous vipers. In selling a set of these legbands, a
Bagobo is pretty sure to keep one for himself as medicine. ***
A strip of rattan decorated in patterns by a process of over-lacing
with hemp before dyeing, forms a neck-band that is a charm against
the sting of centipedes. This type of neck-band is worn more than
almost any other, as it is also a magical defense against the attacks
of Buso.
One’s home may be safe-guarded from the demons if one walks
around the house — presumably in dextral circuit — while holding
in the hand a red pepper and a piece of lemon, for both of these
fruits are believed to frighten any buso.
As has been stated in an earlier chapter, a rice-altar is put in
the field at the time of sowing, and there is placed round the altar
a little eight-wicketed fence of split bamboo. The fence is alat,
and it forms a magical protection for the young rice so that no
harm can come to the growing plants. In addition, this charmed
circle keeps the family owning the field from being sick.
A charm on the principle of a barbed wire fence is the digo, a
shallow, squarish basket that is used as a rice-winnower. If a
woman is tossing rice up and down for the wind to blow off the
chaff, and she has reason to think that a buso is approaching, she
337 «Tass auch bei den Senoi, neben der Hiifte, der Hals und die Arm- und Fussge-
lenke als Schmucktrager verwendet werden, versteht sich wohl von selbst. Bei den Natur-
stiimmen spielt auch hier das schon erwahnte ‘akar batu’ die wichtigste Rolle, indem es
teils einfach um Hals und Gelenke gewunden wird, oder indem einige Mycelien zu einem
etwas kunstvolleren Schmuck miteinander verflochten werden... Die einfachen Arm- und
Beinbinder haben, so viel ich erfahren konnte, meist eine heilkraftige oder prophylak-
tische Bedeutung, oder ihr Trager hofft dadurch seine Muskeln zu kraftigen. Selten, und,
wie es scheint, nur bei den nordlichen Stimmen, finden sich an solchen Bindern auch
Blatter, Baststreifen, Griser oder Wurzeln angekniipft, von denen man wohl ebenfalls
eine Heilwirkung erwartet.” Martin: op. cit. p. 698—699. 1905.
“Allgemein verbreitet sind ferner Amulete in Form von Hals-, Arm-, und Beinbin-
dern, teils einfache Akar batu-Schniire, teils mit Knéchelehen, Zihnen und Haaren ver-
schiedener Tiere behangene oder aus Kriuterbiindeln bestehende Ketten, die besonderen
magischen Zwecken dienen.” Ibid, p. 954.
208 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
has only to interpose this flat basket between herself and the demon.
“Hold it in front of you when you hear the buso,” said an old
woman who brought me a digo,*** ‘and he will scratch it with
his claws, and his claws will stick in it, and he will die.”
A woman expecting to become a mother is liable to attack from
a buso; hence to defend herself at night time she must put near
her, before going to sleep, all the swords and knives** that the
house contains, for if this precaution be neglected the buso comes
and, in some unknown way, he metamorphoses her child into a
buso-child.
A legendary charm that is said to be resorted to by young vir-
gins to protect their chastity is a cloth of fine tapestry which has
the name of tambayang, a type of embroidery rare in these days
but a well-known art in earlier times. In one of the Bagobo songs
it is told that if a girl has spread the tambayang over herself,
before going to sleep, no man is able to approach her.
The wake, or damag, in the house of death is effective in keeping
buso from the house because of his fear of living men, and thus
may be properly classed in this group of defensive charms.
Charms by Substitution
We have now to consider a group of charms which might be
called charms by substitution, where the tendency is found to
substitute one thing for another. Such magical devices follow the
principle of association by resemblance, a small class, it would
appear, from the actual number of charms listed here, but from
a psychological point of view a group of some interest, since it
includes all tricks for fooling Buso by images made in the likeness
of man or of animal.
Little wooden manikins are laid down at Ginum and are told
to draw into themselves the bad diseases that threaten to force
their way into the bodies of the Bagobo.
To prevent or to cure measles, which is regarded as one of the
33® This winnower (digo) that was used by the old woman as an object lesson is now
in the American Museum of Natural History.
239 Gf. the episode in an Indian saga, where the “lying-in chamber” was hung with
various weapons. Cf. Somadeva: op. cit., vol. 1, p. 189. For a Bagobo tale bearing on
this charm, see Jour. Am. Folk-Lore, vol. 26, p. 46. 19138.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 209
buso, children wear, attached to their necklaces or to strings round
their necks, small figures, usually human figures, not more than
one-half to three-fourths of an inch in length and two or three
millimeters in thickness. The buso of the disease is expected to
leave the body of the child and to pass into the little manikin,
which thus becomes a substitute; eventually, the buso returns to
the forest.
During the great festival, two large figures of wood are set up
in thickets by the path to act as buso-scarers, as substitutes for
living men whom the buso traditionally fear to encounter.
Another charm for scaring off evil beings by the substitution
plan is the representation of a crocodile,**° a figure which women
weave into their textiles, and which men paint on guitars and on
bamboo boxes and carve on coffins. In place of the real animal,
a mere figure of this greatly-dreaded reptile of the rivers, that for
centuries has taken his toll of natives, is expected to fill the demons
with fear.
We have some interesting cases of the performance of little cere-
monies in order to render harmless a sale that is under tabu, and
here again the principle of substitution is the center of attention.
The rite is called Iwan, and whether the object parted with be
a new article or an old object that is thought to belong to the
gods, a brief ritual is performed. ‘Two or three illustrations will
show the nature of this little function.
At Datu Yting’s house, his wife Oleng sold to me two strips
of an extremely fine textile stiff from the loom, for it had not
yet been treated to the process of softening and polishing. Oleng
parted with the material rather unwillingly, at the solicitation of
her husband who was hard pressed for cash. After receiving the
money, she asked me to let her have the textile again. On my
handing it to her, she stepped toward the wall, turned her back
to us so that she faced the stationary bench of bamboo that ran
along the wall, and performed the Iwan. Upon the folded textile
in her arms, she laid one areca-nut and one piece of betel-leaf,
and said, at the same moment, words to the effect that she was
°*° The crocodile motive is widely used throughout Celebes, where it is carved on
the timbers of the ceremonial house (Lobo) and on the coffin of a chief; it forms also
one of the decorative designs on the swords of the Toradja. Cf. P. and F. Sarasm:
Reisen in Celebes, vol. 1, pp. 218, 229, 268—270; vol. 2, p. 46. 1905.
14,
210 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
selling her textile, but that she was providing a substitute for it
which she was going to keep. A pace or two brought her to the
other end of the bamboo seat, and there lay another textile, a
perfect duplicate of the one just sold to me except that it had
been softened, polished and made up into a skirt. Upon this
garment, Oleng laid the same areca-nut and the same buyo-leaf
that she had just before placed on my textile. Then she put my
textile on the bench close to her own duplicate garment, so that
the one touched the other. Next, she dipped the areca-nut, folded
in its betel-leaf, into a cup of water and made with it an unbroken
pass on the two textiles, beginning with the one just sold and
stroking toward the one to be kept. She stroked in a direction
away from herself, and with a sort of wiping motion in a line
several inches long across the textiles. Twice she made the stroke,
and, at the same time, repeated a magic formula to the effect
that this act was to keep her from being taken sick. Finally, she
returned to me the textile she had sold, and remarked: “Now, I
shall not be sick from selling my inabul, but the other, I must
always keep and never give it away.”
The intention of the rite was apparently to draw the spiritual
essence from the one object to the other; that is to say, to entice
the gimokud of the fabric that was leaving her into another fabric
which in all essentials resembled it, and which would be always
retained by her, in order that no evil consequences might attach to
the sale.
Another illustration of magie substitution is found in the ritual
attending the sale of a special type of linked brass chain called
sinkali. Little girls among the Bagobo wear, while very young,
nothing but a small pubic shield, which suffices as clothing for the
first four or five years of life or until the child is considered big
enough to put on a little skirt. The pubie shield (tambibing) is in
the form of a triangle and made of cocoanut-shell or, rarely, of brass.
In two corners are holes through which passes a girdle of hemp
or a brass chain (sinkali) just long enough to go round the waist.
A mother, Siye, visiting at my house, consented to sell the shield
worn by her little daughter, but the linked brass girdle attached
she reluctantly gave up after much discussion with her friends and
much persuasion from me. Relinquishing her plan of taking the
child home before removing the shield, she drew the linked girdle
down and off over the feet and asked for a little water. I brought
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 214
the water in a glass. Siye took off her own sinkali, which passed
several times round her waist and had a large bunch of bells at-
tached. It was made of brass links of the same pattern as the one
worn by the little girlk The woman laid her own sinkali close to
the child’s sinkali, dipped her hand in the water and gently rubbed
the two sinkali and the pubic shield, so that the water touched all
three objects and stood on them in drops. Then she pressed the
smaller sinkali into the child’s hand, on whose little wrist hung a
tiny bracelet of brass links like the girdle which was now in con-
tact with it. The mother lifted the little hand clasping the chain
to the child’s lips, so that she took in her mouth and swallowed a
very little of the water dripping from the chain. A few drops
that remained in the child’s hand her mother made her drink,
carefully putting hand to lips as before. Then she gave me the
pubic shield with its chain and put on her own girdle. My request
that the ceremony be repeated was readily complied with, but the
second time there were slight variations in the rite. Siye took off
her girdle and laid it on the child’s left wrist that had on it the
sinkali-bracelet. She again dipped water from the glass with her
hand and made passes over her own sinkali as she let the water
drip on it, after which she put the child’s hand on the chain, held
hand and chain to lips and let a few drops be swallowed as before.
Next she made passes with water over the child’s sinkali, and put
it to her lips. Finally, having given back to me my purchase,
Siye again girded herself with her own sinkali.
The explanation given by the woman and by several neighbors who
came in during the affair touched the various points of the ceremony
from different aspects. They said it was very bad to sell the tam-
bibing and sinkali; that if Siye had not applied water to them,
the child would have become very sick; that rubbing sinkali against
bracelet meant that the bracelet became a new sinkali to take the
place of the one sold; that the little girl must drink the water to
keep her from being sick, on account of the sinkali having touched
the water; and, finally, that Siye’s husband would get another wife,
if she failed to take off her own sinkali and put it next the child’s
sinkali and to make the strokes with water.
On later occasions, other pubic shields were added to my col-
lection, but each of these was worn by its little owner on a girdle
of hemp, and the closest observation on my part failed to detect
any ritual function attendant on the sale. One is led to infer that
212 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
a string or braid of hemp forming a mere temporary girdle to be
replaced when worn or broken, never comes to have the intimate
association with the human body that the chain of brass links
acquires. That is to say, the sinkali may become an ikut, while a
girdle of hemp, or of beaded cloth, may not become an ikut. Siye’s
child had worn the sinkali for about five years, or from birth.
The following conclusions may be drawn from the nature of the
rite. The child’s chain girdle was an ikut, and its sale was under
tabu. By a magical device, the child’s bracelet of brass links came
to be regarded as a substitute for the girdle of brass links, so that
the tabu was removed and the child freed from the curse of sickness.
The general belief that the sinkali-bracelet becomes, after the
ceremony, an equivalent to the sinkali-girdle justifies my conclusion
that what is actually attempted is the coaxing of the gimokud
or spirit of the girdle into a bracelet of similar pattern, so that
only the material part of the girdle is sold — the accidents, to
borrow once more the same theological term — while the spiritual
substance remains in the family to which the girdle has always
belonged. The use of the mother’s sinkali, in addition to that
of the child, possibly serves the purpose of a double substitution
ceremony.
On another occasion, my purchase of a linked brass chain from
a young man who wore it round his waist to carry his short knife
was achieved only after a magical rite, which consisted in making
passes with water upon the brass chain, and on a bracelet of like
design worn by the same man.
If no duplicate sinkali is in the possession of the owner, and a
sale is desired, the sinkali must be cut in two. When Sebayan,
Ido’s daughter, made a trade with me, she divided her brass linked
girdle in the middle, after her father had measured it exactly.
One half she sold to me, and the other half she kept, explaining
that the part of the girdle retained by her took the place of the
whole sinkali, and kept her from being sick.
In concluding this section on charms which work by a principle
of substitution, it should be stated that several elements in the
native materia medica, mentioned under the caption “Disease and
Healing, **' are of the nature of homeopathic cures, and are really
examples of association by resemblance or substitution, such as the
2*1 See pp. 223—235.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH ~ 213
application of heated leaves to skin burning from the sting of bees,
and the use of bile from serpents to cure snake-bite.
Some mountain Bagobo eat the flesh of monkeys to prevent sores,
for they say, quoting the myth of “The Buso-monkey,” **? that
the monkey sometimes turns into a buso, and that sores are caused
by a buso. This appears to be a Bagobo case of the aphorism that
“like cures like.”
Charms through Association by Contiguity
We have here a number of magical performances where the psy-
chological association may be readily understood, and which suggest
the principle of association by contiguity; that is to say, a clustering
of elements that belong together is made, with the expectation
that they will attract some other element which is commonly
joined to them. Certain magical groupings regularly induce certain
phenomena; make these groupings and the result is psychologically
mandatory. Some charms that come under this category suggest
Frazer’s examples of “contagious magic.”
In time of drought, the Bagobo call the rain by washing *** the
chickens, the goats,*** the clay pots and the dishes, because, they
say, chickens and goats and pots cannot wash themselves in the river,
and if these animals and objects get wet it must be from a shower.
Another charm to eall the rain is the following formula:
“Rain, rain on tagbak tree; 345
Make mud very wet;
Kill the little chickens;
Drops like bastkung.”
Here the association suggested is with rain so heavy as to be
heard pattering sharply on the stiff leaves of the tagbak in drops
like a round heavy fruit, big enough to kill a chick.
32 See Jour. Am. Folk-Lore; vol. 26, pp. 46—48. 1913.
34% 4 charm for rain-making was told to Skeat by a Malay woman of Selangor, who
said that “if a Malay woman puts upon her head an inverted earthenware pan ... and
then, setting it upon the ground, fills it with water and washes the cat in it until the
latter is more than half drowned, heavy rain will certainly ensue.’ Malay magic, p. 108. 1900.
344 The Bagobo do not keep goats; the goat’s hair used by them is obtained in barter
from the Bila-an tribe. The inclusion of goats in this charm is perhaps traceable to
some Bila-an tradition.
3*° Cf, the Selangor charm to bring rain, “Though the stem of the Meranti tree
rocks to and fro.” W. W. Skear: op. cit., p. 109.
214 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Ulap is a form of black magic employed to send a man to sleep
in order to rob him. It is said that the ingredients of this charm
are very hard to find, and that only a courageous person can carry
the enterprise through successfully. He must go at night to the
grave of a little child that has been buried during the preceding
twenty-four hours. He must dig up the baby, open its mouth, cut
off the tip of its tongue, cut many of the hairs of the eye-lashes
from each of its eye-lids, and then get away in safety before the
Buso catches him. The charm is thus compounded: the tip of the
tongue and the eyelashes are mixed with a certain resin (doka),
and thrown in the flames of a fire kindled under the house of
the man whom the conjurer intends to rob. The subject gets
very sleepy as soon as the fire is lighted, and falls into a sort of
trance. Then the one who is working the magic comes up the
steps into the house, and asks the sleeping person, “Where is your
food? Where are your nice things?” The other answers in his
sleep every question, and his possessions may easily be taken from
him. This charm more nearly approaches a form of hypnotic sug-
gestion than any other magical device that has come to my notice.
The association set up is clearly with three elements — the tongue,
the eyes, and the helplessness of an infant — so as to induce a
certain condition in the subject of the charm.
It is very difficult to see Buso, but the following charm may be
used by a brave person. Chips of wood cut from a coffin are taken,
on the night following the funeral, to the stump of the tree from
which the log for the coffin was cut, and laid upon the stump.
First there will be seen swarms of fireflies, shadows and parts of
the body of the dead; afterwards Buso will appear, for he will be
drawn by the smell of the chips of wood, which he associates with
the dead body. "4°
An efficacious charm to drive away the mythical bird called
wakwak"** is the use of a suggestive formula. The wakwak is a
rapacious bird resembling a crow, but having four legs, two of
which are covered with claws, and it flies over the country at night,
hunting for living men as its prey. The magic spell is as follows:
When you hear the sound of the bird’s yoice shrieking, *Wak-wak!
2“8 See Jour. Am. Folk-Lore, vol. 26, p. 42—43. 1913.
**?7 The wakwak is mentioned by Mr. Cole as a bird of ill omen among the Mandaya.
The wild tribes of Davao district, Mindanao, p. 174. 19138.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 2145
wak-wak!”” you must call to him: “I am not fat; I am skinny.
I eat rotten wood. I eat baguiang.”’ Then the wakwak cannot
hurt you; but you must speak again, saying, “You go on to Bago;
there are many fat men there.” By means of this spell, such
unpleasant suggestions are flung at the evil bird as to induce him
to seek prey elsewhere. If the baguiang leaf is chewed, it is said
to give itching lips and to leave a bad taste in the mouth.
Sore throat is cured by hanging round the neck a string which
has attached to it four bits of wood cut from the trees most fre-
quently haunted by Buso — the magbo, the benati, the barayung
and the lawaan. The inflammation of the throat, being itself one of
the buso, is attracted into one of the pieces of wood and eventually
returns to the tree from which the wood was chipped.
A Bagobo man eats the liver of another man reputed for valor
and worth, presumably in order that he may acquire those qualities
which he associates with that organ. The liver of a fallen foe
may be eaten, or the liver of a good Bagobo who is selected for
human sacrifice. One boy told me that his grandfather had eaten
the livers of as many as forty brave men.
A charm to discover lost property is to burn some beeswax
with a few red peppers, and to note carefully which way the
smoke goes. This will give the direction where one must go
in search of the lost articles. It is the S’iring, that troublesome
wood-demon, who hides one’s things, and the smoke behaves in this
manner because the S’iring is afraid of red peppers and of the wax
made by bees. It would appear to be the mingling of the S’iring’s
fear with his knowledge of where the things are hidden that turns
the smoke in a direction to reveal the secret.
A magical necklace to make a horse run fast consists of narrow
strips of deer-skin, or of goat-skin, with the hair left on them, the
strips being pierced and run on a cord. This is called very good
medicine for the horse, for since both deer and goat are fleet of foot
the train of associations would naturally set the horse to running.
A charm for tracking deer consists in a substance that is rubbed
on the bit and called “medicine to catch the deer.” I saw one fine
old brass bit with cheek-pieces decorated in the casting which the
owner refused to part with because it had acquired great value by
reason of this medicine.
A charm for catching fish (bawi ka séda) involves the response
of the fish to suggestion. The fish-line is measured by fathoms
216 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
and may be nine, twenty, one hundred, or any number of fathoms
in length, but if the catch is to be successful there must be an
extra measure called kalingi added to the length. The kalingi is
measured from the left shoulder to the tip of the right middle
finger, or from the right shoulder to the tip of the left middle
finger. This shoulder-measure makes the fish react to the bait, by
impelling it do turn its head back ‘over its shoulder” to bite.
As another charm for catching fish, certain kinds of wax are
stuck in small lumps on the hook. This is done, they say, merely
to attract the fish, not to stupify it, and while the significance of
wax in this connection has not been disclosed, its stickiness may
have a drawing efficacy, since a similar substance is used as an
attractive force in the following charm.
A lump of resin (doka) from the marina tree is used in the
magical spell, “anting-anting,” to draw the dead. The person per-
forming the charm makes set passes before his face with the hand
holding the resin, and the ghost thus summoned passes behind his
seat, but nobody in the room can see the ghost except the old men
and the person making anting-anting.
The magnet, of foreign introduction, made a deep impression on
the Bagobo, who at once saw its possibilities as a tool for conjuring ;
and those old men who can get hold of a magnet sometimes use
it in preference to doka, or as a substitute for doka, on account
of its wonderful power of attraction.
There are a number of other charms where the suggestive
significance is less apparent, and where we do not know just how
the appeal to associative memory is made, such as the following:
Every woman who clings conservatively to tradition puts in her
skirt a small patch, called tapung, of a different design from the
body of the textile. To make room for this patch, the central strip
is woven a trifle shorter than the other two strips. The patch is
a charm against sickness. One of the Talun girls told me that she
put in the patch because she was obliged to lengthen the middle
strip in order to match the others; but, in reply to a question as
to why she had not made it longer, she said that she had purposely
woven it short in order to add the patch. Finally, she explained
that the odd piece would keep her from being ‘very sick.”
The following is a building charm which is enticing by its rich
though vague suggestiveness. After the frame of a house is erected,
one of the skirts (panapisan) of the owner’s wife is sometimes
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 217
laid on the timbers of the roof, and kept there for a set length
of time during the process of building.
Charms having Inherent Virtue
In the forms of magic thus far considered, associations are set
up that: act as stimuli or as inhibitions to the individual that the
charm is meant to influence. In most cases, there is a more or
less conscious play of attention on the part of the subject of the
charm, in response to the suggestions put forth.
In the class of charms now to be discussed, the value lies in
some hidden virtue, some mysterious efficacy, by which the desired
result is produced directly, without any act of associative memory
on the part of the subject of the medicine or of the witchcraft.
Indeed, the person is ordinarily unconscious of being worked upon
until he begins to feel sick, and then he may not know who or
what has caused the trouble. On the other hand, the charm may
serve a beneficial end, and may bring about a valued result by its
own force, there being here, too, no need of calling out a train
of associations in the mind of the person who is undergoing the
magical influence.
In this connection, it should be noted that there are a few ani-
mals which are thought to have mysterious qualities, such as the
flying lemur, the monkey, the crow, **° and to certain parts of their
bodies a curative power or a magical virtue is assigned — the
liver and the foot of the crow, the hair of the flying lemur. The
armature of crabs, of tortoises, of lobsters appears in various mag-
ical associations. Monkeys (/utung) are regarded with wonder and
with a vague feeling of unrest that finds expression in little sym-
bolic acts or motions. Such expression was called forth one day
after a number of Bagobo men had been watching, with eager,
delighted faces, the antics of my pasteboard monkey climbing a string.
They were turning to go, when one man, almost as an afterthought,
3*® The crow was a sacred bird with the Tagal and with some other Filipino tribes.
Cf. Buair and Ropertson, vol. 12, pp. 265—266. 1904. While it might be going too
far to say that the Bagobo hold this bird as sacred, yet it is clearly regarded as pos-
sessing a peculiar magical value. The crow figures in mythical associations; Cf. Jour.
Am. Folk-Lore, vol. 26, p. 62. 1913. The crow’s liver, beak and foot are used as
charms or as medicine. Handles of guitars are roughly carved in imitation of a crow’s head.
218 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
picked up the toy and passed it once across his forehead. He
handed it to the Bagobo next him, who also made a pass upon his
brow; and he was followed by all the rest, though two or three
men merely pressed the monkey on the eyebrow or above it. They
said that they did this because it was lutung and that passing it
over the forehead kept them from sickness and death. It is true
that, as a matter of precaution, a Bagobo will often perform some
little ceremony when he wishes to forestall any possible evil effect
that an occurrence out of the ordinary may involve; but to the
monkey, in particular, which appears prominently in myth, now as
the prototype of man and again as metamorphosed into a buso, the
Bagobo reacts emotionally.
Particular articles of food taken at special times produce definite
magical results. A notable instance of this form of magic is found
in the charm to produce sacral spots on the body of an expected
child.
A small area of dark pigmentation was present in the region of
the sacrum in several Bagobo babies that I examined. The women
told me that all their babies had those dark-colored spots, that the
name for them was obud, and that if any child should be born
lacking the obud it would quickly die. Hence great care is taken
by the mother to produce the sacral spots on her child by means of
eating certain prescribed vegetable products — also called “obud” —
while saying a magic formula. Early in pregnancy the woman
must, on seven consecutive days, swallow some of the sweet sap of
the palma brava and chew with betel-nut a fine rattan known as
nanga. At the same time she repeats a metrical rendering of the
list of saps and fruits that should be eaten before the birth of the
child, closing each verse with the words, “Very good to eat,” “Very
sweet to eat.” Among these articles of diet are the tuba, a toddy
extracted from the inflorescence of the cocoanut palm, the stem of
baris, the bulla, the fruits of the balisinan, lapisut, tual, kamusi,
durian and lukka**°. This medicine will infallibly cause the sacral
spots to appear on the child, but if any expectant mother fails
to eat obud and to say the right words she will surely die, and
her baby also. Other articles of diet are thought to prevent the
formation of the sacral spots, and after the mention of such articles
the woman says, “Very bad to eat.”
349 Edible fruits. See index.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 29
Many charms of this class are small objects that may be easily
carried about, and the magical virtue of each charm is ordinarily
limited to specific qualities assigned to it. The magical result achieved
by such an object is not due to a spirit that either permanently
inhabits it, or that temporarily enters into it. It is never worshiped
or treated with reverence. It produces a given effect because of
some mysterious potentiality that belongs to it. It may therefore
properly be termed a fetish.
A number of magical usages of the type now under discussion
are simply examples of the black art. Gamut is a resinous sub-
stance or gum extruded from certain trees, a lump of which may
be carried about the person, tied in the girdle or put in the car-
rying-bag, when one wants to work witchcraft on some enemy. By
and by the person will grow thin and soon become sick; white
worms will appear coming out from his eyes and his head and his
body; soon he will die. The simple carrying of the gamut with
the intention of harming the foe appears to be sufficient to produce
the result, without any magical manipulation of the resin.
Parayat is the name of another magical substance used in the
black art. If one desires the death of a childless rich man, with
a view to seizing his goods, one has only to carry this medicine,
a performance which will cause the rich man to fall sick and die
of the disease called parayat.
The above named charm may be used if a man does not want
to accept a challenge to fight. If his foe wants to fight him, and
he, refusing the combat, at the same time holds the parayat, he
can make his foe sicken and die.
When a man is fighting, there are magical means of making his
enemy helpless °° without striking a single blow with spear or
sword. The old man, Butun, brought me an old war-shield that
had belonged to his father. The peculiar value of the shield lay
in the magical medicines that were fastened to the handle through
which the left arm passes, on the reverse side. The first of these
medicines is pankayang, a small piece of the skin of an eagle.
If a man, holding a shield to which pankayang is attached, simply
stands still and points his spear at his foe, instantly his foe will
35° A charm with such potential virtue is given the hero of a saga with the instruc-
tion: “By holding this jewel in your hand you can render ineffectual the best weapon of
your enemy.” Somadeva: Katha Sarit Sagara, vol. 2, p. 161. 1884.
220 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
drop dead. The second medicine is palids, a bit of the root of the
tree called by that name. The root is kept in a small tube of bal-
ekayo tied with a red rag, and the effect on the enemy is like
that of the preceding. *°' The third medicine is Mulug-mulug mata-
din (glaring eyes), magical leaves kept in the same tube with the
preceding. ‘This charm makes the eyes of him who carries it glare
at the foe with a fixed, terrifying stare that puts the foe at the
mercy of the other. Butun gave a dramatic rendering of the effect
of all three charms.
A charm called palimi is held by women, and is operated
to make a man thin and anaemic. They put the paltimi into a
cup of water, and then throw the water over the men who haye
incurred their displeasure. A girl will sometimes let it be known
that she is working this witchcraft, and while she is sitting on the
floor she will say to several boys who are trying to pass her,
“You cannot pass.” Then everybody in the house knows that she
holds the palumi. If a boy succeeds in getting by the girl without
having the water sprinkled on him, the charm is spoiled. Girls
use the paluimi as a means of repelling familiarity from those young
men who presume to disregard the old, strict Bagobo customs
regulating the etiquette that should prevail between the sexes.
When a boy goes too far with a girl, she may retaliate by putting
paltmi into the betel she offers him, thus causing him a severe
illness.
Kabibi is a love charm that is rather scarce, as only a few men
and a few women are known to possess it. When a girl rejects :
young man and he, in anger, determines to revenge himself for
the slight, he puts kabibi into the girl’s betel, or else lays ka-
bibi on one of her footprints in the ground. She reacts to the
°°) Of this sort of magic among the Visayan, 1624, a Recollect document records:
“They gloried in knowing charms and in working them, by consulting the devil — a
means by which some made themselves feared by others, for they easily deprived them
of life. In confirmation of this assertion, it happened, according to the recital of one of
our ministers, that while he was preaching to a great assembly one Indian went to
another, and breathed against him with the intent of killing him. The breath reached
not the Indian’s face, however, but an instrument that he was carrying, the cords of
which leaped out violently, while the innocent man was left unharmed. ‘The philosophy
of such cases is that the murderer took in his mouth the poisonous herb given him by
the devil, and had another antidotal herb for his own defense. ‘Then, exhaling his breath
in this manner, he deprived of life whomever he wished.’ Brarr and ROBERTSON: op.
cit., vol. 21, pp. 211—212.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 221
charm at once, and begins to ery for her lover. Her passion for
him grows more vehement until she loses her mind, and goes into
the woods where she weeps continually. The only remedy now is
for the young man to give her another medicine, usually the liver
of a crow, to set her right. After this performance, her lover may
still want marry her, but in one case that came to my knowledge
a youth after giving a girl, first kabibi, and then ugka (crow’s
liver) afterward married another girl. This same love charm may
be used by a woman upon a man.
The coast Bagobo think that the mountain Bagobo put something
into the betel to make their visitors spit blood, and they have
a special charm tied in a small cloth to counteract the danger,
merely by its presence in one’s bag.
A magical virtue inherent in certain medicines operates to punish
a supposed thief at the same time with the discovery of his guilt.
This is the bongat,**? a word which means trap. When a person
misses something, — perhaps some of his store of rice, — he gets
out a bamboo tube in which is kept secreted the magic bongat.
He lays the bamboo joint in the same place from which the rice
was stolen, and repeats this formula:
“Whoever took my rice,
Curse him with bulging eyes ;%5?*
Make his body swell;
After that let him die.”
This charm makes the abdomen of the guilty one grow abnor-
mally large; his eyes protrude from his head; his strength leaves
him, and by and by he dies. They say that this way of detecting
a thief is very simple, because it may easily be seen who gets big
belly and bulging eyes.
In connection with the magical punishment of a thief, the test
used to discover guilt is of interest; although the test or ordeal,
with its appeal to the gods, belongs rather to the category of de-
votional performances than to magic arts.
392 Pather Gisbert speaks of the use of bongat as common both to Moro and to pagan
tribes, and it is possible that this charm may have been borrowed from the Moro.
“When the thief is discovered, he may be cured by putting powder from the other joint
into the water and bathing his body with it.” Brark and Rogerson: op. cit., vol. 43,
p- 239. 1906.
3524 The same conception is to be found in the Atharva-Veda, in the lines, “Make the
confessing sinner’s eyes fall from his head, both right and left.” R. T. H. Grirritu
(tr.): op. cit., vol. 1, p. 19. 1895.
222 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Ordeal or Test
If two men are suspected of theft, and each man, laying the
blame on the other, asserts his own innocence, the test called
pasilumeé is resorted to. Both men are forced to swim in the river,
while the people gather on the bank to watch. Just before the
suspected men go into the water, the owner of the stolen property
recites the following invocation.
“Behold, Diwata ;
Like needles your teeth,
Like lunga-seeds 353 your eyes.
Whoever stole my tap-tap, 354
Send him cursed from the water.”
Then the guilty one comes out from the river, but the innocent
man sinks to the bottom lke a stone, and lies there all day. In
the evening, it is said, he is taken out unhurt. If by any chance
the thief should sink, he would be seized by the Gamo-Gamo people
who haunt the rivers and be tormented by them. All the river-
spirits of this class carry sharp iron punches, with which they prick
and gash the guilty person, but they never touch the innocent.
As long as the thief is in the water, he feels the torture; yet on
emerging his body does not show the wounds.
His guilt now established beyond doubt, there remains for him
but to make reparation as required. He must give whatever the
owner of the stolen goods demands — agongs, spears, or what not.
There is no set ratio between the amount of the theft and the
compensation insisted on. If a tap-tap worth two pesos has been
stolen, the owner may, if he please, demand five agongs (the
equivalent of about one hundred pesos) in satisfaction for the wrong
done to him. The supposed thief, if unable to pay or to borrow
the agongs for payment, would in the normal course of events
become the slave of his creditor.
Rizal tells us that, “The early Filipinos had a great horror of
theft, and even the most anti-Filipino historian could not accuse
them of being a thievish race. To day, however, they have lost
their horror of that crime. One of the old Filipino methods of
$63 A small, black, edible seed, about the size of a mustard-seed.
*°* Agongs are beaten with a small wooden hammer called ¢ap-tap, which has a head
coated with rubber overlaid by cloth.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 223
investigating theft was as follows: ‘If the crime was proved, but not the
criminal, if more than one was suspected... each suspect was first
obliged to place a bundle of cloth, leaves, or whatever he wished
on a pile, in which the thing stolen might be hidden. Upon the
completion of this investigation if the stolen property was found in
the pile, the suit ceased.’*°? The Filipinos also practiced customs
very similar to ‘the judgments of God’ of the middle ages, such as
putting suspected persons, by pairs, under the water and adjudging
cuilty him who first emerged.” °°
DISEASE AND HEALING IN THEIR SUPERNATURAL ASPECTS
Ignorant of the nature of metabolic processes in the human body,
and unwarned against the ravages of hostile bacteria, a Bagobo, in
the frankly primitive attitude, accepts pain and sickness as due to
the manipulations of the buso, or of his own left-hand soul, or
else he suspects that he has broken some tabu. Some blunder of
his own may, somehow, have brought on the illness: a failure to
observe a ritual detail so that some ceremony is spoiled; the doing
of some forbidden thing, such as eating a limokun pigeon, or
uttering the name of his dead grandfather, or putting on the cere-
monial red shirt while he is young. Just as frequently, however,
a man is the innocent victim of a buso who gets inside of him,
or of his evil soul that is playing truant from his body and shooting
pains into him from some distant point.
We find, then, that sickness is due to one of the following causes:
(a) The breaking of a tabu; (b) The attack of a buso; (c) The
adventures of the left-hand soul, or gimokud tebang.
Diseases that Result from Breaking Tabu
The simple fact of falling sick because of the transgression of a
355 For magical usages in the Tagal tribes, Cf. J. pe Puasencra: “Customs of the
Tagalogs.” 1589. Barr and RoperTson: op. cit., vol. 7, pp. 192—194. Cf. also P.
Cutrtno: “Relacion ...” 1604. Op. cit., vol. 18, p. 81. For Visayan magic, cf. M. de
Loarea: “Relacion ...” 1582. Op. cit., vol. 5, p. 163.
356 Bratk and RoBeRTsON: op. cit., vol. 16, pp. 128—129. In Minahassa, the judg-
ment of God by the water-ordeal was formerly in use, by which test he who could stay
longer under water was the innocent person. Cf. Sarasin: Reisen in Celebes, vol. 1,
p. 44. 1905.
224 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
tribal custom or mandate is called bogok, but among the specific
diseases resulting from breaking tabu — and breaking tabu is
merely a phrase for disregard of old customs — are the following.
Kataluan is a serious skin infection from which a person suffers,
it is said, if he sells a pair of old ear-plugs, or any other old
object that has become an ikut and is ready to be offered to the
gods. It appears that certain divinities are extremely jealous of
their ancient rights, and resent the loss of any object that should
come to the altar. It would seem, however, that this disease may
be present even in a child, for there is a traditional “small boy”
of the mythical romance who is covered with the sores called
kataluan.
Parayat, or parayan, shows itself in a form of sickness of which
the symptoms are pain in the eyes, in the wrists and at the elbow
joints, extreme pallor and emaciation, and profound drowsiness or
lethargic sleep. This sickness comes upon a woman who sells the
cloth patterned by over-tying, called binwbbid, while it is still in
the process of manufacture. Parayat may also be brought about by
witchcraft.
Kangulag is a term commonly applied to a person who is weak-
minded or foolish, but which is used specifically of a girl who is
eager for the society of men, and is emotionally unbalanced. It is
generally understood that she has fallen into this condition because
she has sold a textile before it was finished and ready to be taken
from the loom. Bagobo custom requires that no woven work be
sold until fully complete.
Karatas is a mortal illness in which the body grows thinner and
weaker until death comes, and which is the expected punishment
for any young man who presumes to wear the closed shirt called
linombus. This garment is woven of hemp dyed in a solid claret
tint, and is reserved for old men and old women.
Sakv’ tankulu, or tankulu sickness, manifests itself in various
symptoms not definitely stated, but it is sure to attack a man who
ties round his head the chocolate colored kerchief called tankulu
before he has earned this coveted distinction in the customary
manner; that is to say, by killing somebody.
Kalawag, or yellow skin, is a disease that afflicts a person who
mentions the name of his dead grandfather, or the name of any
other of his deceased ancestors. The skin turns yellow, the body
wastes away, and death results. A boy may get kalawag as a
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 225
penalty for another transgression, for the old people tell the children
that if they should eat the omen bird (imokun) their skin would
turn yellow, and they would “get skinny” and die.
Tulud is the disease to be looked for if the people taking part
in a rice-sowing festival do not preserve the proper direction of
- movement laid down for the Bagobo by a traditional pattern, that
is, toward the south. If the direction taken in planting be toward
north, or east or west, the tulud sickness would come. Just what
form the disease would take is not stated, but that it would cause
the patient to grow very thin and die is vaguely surmised.
Sebullo or nausea, accompanied by excessive vomiting and ending
in death, is a fearful penalty waiting for one who laughs at his
reflection in the water, for this image is the manifestation of his
left-hand soul.*°* My informant said: “When you laugh at your
alung in the river, you will die of sebullo, that makes all the food
come out of your mouth when you eat.”
Katapik is a disease that attacks a girl who attempts to em-
broider the scarf called salugboy*** after the ancient manner of
doing needlework. A young girl may wear the scarf, but the
privilege of embroidering it is reserved for old women.
Bogok is any sickness that comes to a girl who winds about her
waist an odd number of times the girdle of brass links called
sinkali. It has been noted that bogok is a general term for the
class of diseases that result from breaking tabu. °°”
Diseases Caused by Buso
Undefined and hazy is the line of separation between Buso as
a bringer of disease and the disease itself, which is commonly called
a buso. Many buso walk the earth under the names of Diseases,
and actually enter the body of the person who falls sick; other
buso merely operate from a distance and cause suffering, just as
does that potential buso, the left-hand soul. The following are a
few of the sicknesses that are referred directly to the agency of
evil personalities.
For sarampian or measles, the Bagobo have only the Spanish
2© See pp. 40; 58, 61
558 See pp. 86—87, 128, 130.
359 See p. 224.
15
226 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
name because, they say, it was unknown before the coming of the
Spaniard. It is very severe and often fatal among the wild tribes.
A buso is said to enter the body of the child afflicted, and the
treatment is to hang small charm figures on the neck of the patient,
so that the buso may be attracted into the figures. One small boy
told me that he must wear the “little man” for one year after his
recovery from measles.
Timbalung is a form of chronic constipation from which the
people suffer miserably, and which is attributed to a buso that has
succeeded in getting inside of the human body. The cure consists
in the ceremonial application of water to the joints of the body.
This treatment is given by an old priest-doctor, who applies the
water with a bunch of magical plants, continuing the treatment
until excrement is voided and the demon at the same time ejected.
“When Buso has come out from the intestines,’ they say, “the
patient feels so light, and immediately gets better.”
Giddiness is caused by a buso named Tagasoro, who in some
ways invariably makes the person lose his sense of direction.
Karokung is a common sickness, of which the symptoms are
fever, chills and a racking cough. It is to be traced to a white
woman who lives in rivers and is said to be very beautiful. Her
hair is long and dark; her feet black, or blue and black, while
her legs, too, are black to a line half-way up to the knees. The
rest of her body is white. She is very amorous, desiring to em-
brace eyery man she sees, and it is this propensity of hers that
throws men into burning fever. When high fever is running, she
is said to be putting the man into the fire, but directly afterwards
she plunges into the river, and forthwith the patient begins to
shiver. Nobody has ever seen the Karokung woman, but many
people have dreamed about her, and thus her characteristics are
completely established. When a Bagobo woman, however, has chills
and fever, her symptoms are caused by a white man with long
hair, who also lives in the river and behaves like the Karokung -
woman. In either case, the treatment consists in burning the
deserted nest of a limokun or of some other bird, and allowing
the patient to inhale the smoke. Another effective remedy is to
smell the fumes that come from burning a few wisps of hair cut
from the coat of the flying lemur, called tungalung; or one may
simply lay before a god some little agricultural offering. These
disease-bringing river inhabitants haye none of the ear-marks of
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 227
the traditional mermaid, who finds her counterpart, at least on the
morphological side, in the gamo-gamo people who have already
been characterized.
Three other disease-bringers are women, one of whom lives in the
center of the earth where there is an enormous hole; another
resides at the rim of the sky, and still another in the middle of
the sky.
Several illnesses — chills, cough, skin disease — are brought
by a mythical individual called “Sickness that goes round the
World” and said to travel down the mountain streams. The “Sick-
ness that goes round the World” is often called by the name
of Gimusu a disease which produces sores. At the time of the
Ginum at Talun, the gimusu was reported to be in the mountains,
and on the way to Mati.” °°
Furthermore, there are mythical birds and beasts that live in
the sky or roam over mountain and plain, and that have power to
bring sickness. These are the so-called “bad animals,” among them
some that were mentioned in our discussion of the various forms
of the buso.*°! Those specially noted as disease-bringers are Pung-
atu, Limbagu, the eight-eyed Riwa-riwa, the swine-like Abuy,
the chick-like Tulung and the aforesaid Timbalung. There seems
to be no essential relation between the type of sickness that any
one of these buso brings, and the zodmorphie form that the demon
assumes. Almost any buso, indeed, is supposed to be able to “make
the Bagobo very sick.”
Diseases Caused by the Left-Hand Soul
When a Bagobo cannot recall having broken any tabu, and is
unable to trace his sickness to any particular buso, he is likely to
360 The tree-hantu, and several other disease-bringers, mentioned by Dr. Martin in
his discussion of the religion of the Mantra, correspond to the buso diseases of the Bagobo.
« ... So sind vor allem die Krankheiten, von denen der Mantra befallen wird, in
seinen augen Damonen, die in den Menschen gefahren sind. Dementsprechend gibt es so
viele Krankheitsdimonen, als der Eingeborene Krankheitsformen zu unterscheiden vermag.
... die Mantra glauben ... an einen Hantu-Kayu (d.h. Baum-Hantu), der in jeder art
von Baiumen lebt und die Menschen krank macht. Hinige Baume sind der Bosartigkeit
ihrer Dimonen wegen besonders gefiirchtet...” Ruponr Marmin: Die Inlandstimme
der malayischen Halbinsel, pp. 942—948. 1905.
361 See pp. 31, 38—40.
228 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
blame his left-hand soul — his gimokud tebang — who is off on
an adventure, and, by some form of sympathetic magic, is making
the trouble. The left-hand soul, while absent from the body which
he tenants, is able to cause suffering in any part of it that he
pleases, simply by exploiting*°* a corresponding part of his own
shadowy structure. When the head aches, the gimokud tebang is
bunting his head against a tree or a rock, and as long as he keeps
this up the pain continues. A sensation of nausea means that the
tebang is drinking poison. Belly-ache comes when the left-hand soul
jumps into the river; but the pain may be relieved by securing
the bill of a crow, burning it to ashes, and swallowing the ashes
mixed with plenty of water. Sore mouth troubles a Bagobo when
his tebang is drinking boiling hot water. When the left-hand soul
runs a fishhook into his neck, sore throat comes on, but it may
be cured by tying in a rag a few hairs of the flying lemur, and
wearing the rag attached to the necklace. One woman who was using
this charm told me that she got it from a Kulaman. Sharp pain
in the foot is experienced whenever the tebang strikes his foot
against a sharp stone. The medicine is the ashes obtained by burn-
ing the foot of a crow. The ashes are to be rubbed five times on
the suffering foot, and this must be done with a gentle, downward
stroke. Some old women think that one single stroke is better. If
the tebang chooses to climb in great forest trees and swing him-
self from branch to branch, he can make the arms lame and sore.
When the whole body feels lame and bruised, the left-hand soul
is jumping from a tall tree down upon sharp-pointed stakes of
bamboo, stuck in the ground like q man-trap. Cold shivers through-
out the body, with sharp pains, mean that the tebang is swimming
in the deep sea.
I noted but one kind of pain that was not attributed to an oe-
cult cause, — that was sugud, or the sting of bees. Further investi-
gation, however, may yet find the sting to be a demoniac element.
The remedy suggests that “like cures like,” for it consists in laying
*°2 The impression I received of the left-hand soul was that of a spirit which hurts
the body maliciously, or sportively. Professor Boas has called my attention to the differ-
ence between this conception, and that commonly held by primitive man, namely, that
the harm done by the soul is due to accidents that happen in its wanderings. It is
possible that I misunderstood my informant, and that the implied distinction does not
actually exist, though the spirit of the folklore would bear me out.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH — 229
against the stung face banana leaves that have been heated over
a flame.
Methods of Healing Sickness
Unshaken in his conviction that he must look to the supernatural
for the source of bodily pain, the Bagobo proceeds, consistently, to
wrestle with a throng of diseases just as he would strive against
any other outbreak of hostile demons. The methods recognized as
efficacious are of three sorts, any one of which may be used either
by itself or in combination with the other two. A case of sick-
ness or accident may be treated, or sometimes prevented: (a) By
an act of devotion; (b) By magic; (c) By native materia medica.
By an Act of Devotion. A simple act of faith, a devotional
gift laid upon an altar or on the ground, a prayer asking that
some god will keep the body strong, or that a buso may be ap-
peased by a little betel and go away any one of these acts is
relied on for help eyen more than magic, more than curative plants.
Many a long ceremony with complex ritual may be resolved into
one straining, pitiful cry for health and freedom from pain. The
fundamental intention of many of the rites of Ginum is that of
being kept from sickness and death, and touching appeals are put
up in individual cases. At the preliminary awas the betel in leaf-
dishes is offered to the Malaki, who, in turn, is asked to give the
dishes to the tig-banud, so that those demons may be induced to
refrain from sending disease to the Bagobo. Again, the priestess
implores the Malaki to keep the diseases shut up in the leaf-dishes
until he comes to kill the diseases. The buso that are associated
with departments of nature are propitiated by offerings, and are
asked to keep the people in health. At the Pamalugu in the river,
areca-nuts with betel-leaf are laid before the Malaki t’Olu k’Waig
and before Tigyama, the protector, with prayers to be kept from
the Sickness that goes round the World. While the water is being
poured over the bodies of the candidates, appeals are made to
Tigyama and to Pamulak Manobo, and to all the anito that they
will remove sickness and feebleness from each person, and take the
diseases to the Malaki to be strangled. *°? Newly-married people
are taught by the priest to set up a shrine in their house, and when
263 See pp. 100, 123.
230 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
they are sick, to give an areca-nut to Tigyama, and to ask him to
take away the sickness.
It is customary, however, to supplement devotional exercises by
other means of cure, particularly in those cases where the god is
slow in giving help. In my journal kept at Talun, I find the
following entry: “Have just given Malik quinine for karokung
(malaria) — a disease caused by the ‘White Lady who lives in
the rivers.’ The medicine recommended by the anito... does not
seem to have done any good, and they have come to me for bawi.”
By Magic. Much of the material belonging to this division of
our subject has been discussed under the caption, “Charms and
Magical Rites;” but the sort of healing which requires magic in
combination with the use of native drugs will be considered in
the following section.
By Native Materia Medica. While a few of the older women
and men — that is to say, the priest-doctors — are highly skilled
in the use of curative agents, they by no means hold a monopoly
in the medical arts, for in every family the mother or grand-
mother has a store of remedies, and even young people treat them-
selves with varying success.
The list of native drugs that are supposed to have a curative
effect is enormously large, including an uncountable number of
names of trees, bushes, shrubs, rattans, climbing plants, whose yield
of fruit or leaf or stem or bark or root, is eagerly gathered
and carefully preserved by the Bagobo for their primitive practice
of medicine. The consideration of many such vegetable products
which have an actual curative value belongs rather to a work on
material culture than to a monograph on religion. Our interest in
the present connection does not extend to the probing into the
actual effects of this or of that specifie medicine; but we are con-
cerned with the general methods of treatment, particularly where
magic is instrumental in producing the desired result.
A very large number of curative elements consist of spells and
drugs used in combination, and depending for their effect, in part
upon the yalue of the pharmaceutical element, in part upon a
prescribed ritual of word-charms, of magic passes, of set counts to
be used with the drug or the lotion. For instance, in rubbing the
body the stroke must take an upward direction with one curative
agent, and downward with another; while certain other forms of
treatment would be futile unless employed simultaneously with
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 231
areca-nuts and betel-leaf. Naturally, then, some of these healing
remedies might just as properly be catalogued under the heading,
“Charms having Inherent Virtue.”
The overlapping of magic and medicine is a phenomenon that
is impressed on anybody who talks with the natives on such sub-
jects. One becomes distinctly aware of the lack of complete defi-
nition of such terms as bawi and alang — two words in constant
use. There is certainly a tendency to use alang for what we call
a charm or a talisman, and to give the name bawi to drugs and
to external medicinal applications. This distinction, however, does
not hold throughout, for certain charms against demons are quite
as often named baw: ka buso as alang ka buso; while, contrariwise,
a medicine to rub on the skin may be alang. One realizes, in
listening to a Bagobo as he rapidly repeats a list of medicines,
that he does not distinguish drugs from charm objects; he runs
them all confusingly together. Any line, too, that we ourselves
might attempt to draw between the healing by materia medica and
the healing by spells would be a highly artificial line. “I used to
be a leper,” said one of my boys, “but I took an areca-nut, and
stroked the sores on my skin, and after that I got well very quick.”
Even when a mode of treatment might be termed, from our own
point of view, a ‘rational’? mode, such as inhaling hot fumes for
a cough, a touch of magic is usually required to make the treat-
ment work.*°* <A fixed number of inhalations is required if relief
is looked for; two wafts of smoke are to be repeated, say three
times, for to repeat four or five times would be termed madat,
that is, unlucky.
Among the chief modes of treatment are the following: stroking
and rubbing; inhaling of medicinal fumes; drinking water containing
the ashes of a burnt object; wearing a medicine attached to necklace
or jacket. We may distinguish certain clearly-marked groups, in one
of which the factor of fire plays a prominent part. (a) The method
of burning; (b) The method of external use without burning; (c)
The method of internal use without burning; (d) The method of
wearing or of carrying the medicine on the person.
°¢* Similarly, the Indo-Iranians held that sickness should be cured by magical spells
and by washing. “In fact, the medicine of spells was considered the most powerful of
all, and although it did not oust the medicine of ... drugs, yet it was more highly
esteemed.” J. DarMeEsTETer (tr.): “The Vendidad.” Sacred books of the East, vol. 4,
pp- 1xxx, 108 et cet.
232 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Method of Burning. A widely-used method of extracting the
virtue of a medicinal element is that of burning or of charring.
Here the Bagobo recognize two distinct methods of manipulation,
which they set apart from each other by their definition of the
two terms, tiduk and gitbo. (a) To burn with flame is called tiduk;
(b) To burn with smoke is called gibo.
By the method of tiduk the medicine is burned to ashes, and
the ashes are either mixed, while hot, with water and swallowed,
or are applied dry to the diseased part. The ashes of many kinds
of non-succulent roots, and of various species of rattan, are used
for sore throat, for cold on the chest and for stomach ache. The
foot and the beak of the crow, when burned to ashes, are both
highly esteemed as a cure for pain in the belly and for a number
of other ailments.
A very common method of cure is by gtbo, which includes all
medicinal agents that can be readily charred, or from which smoke
may be drawn. In the charring process, the curative object is held
in the fire until it is blackened at one end and then the charred
part is rubbed on the throat, or chest, or other suffering member.
Sometimes this is done in silence, sometimes with word-charms.
Favorite objects used for charring are pieces of tortoise-shell for
bronchial colds; the shell of tabun-tabun nut for pain in the stomach
and for intestinal disorders; and a great variety of woods, roots,
barks and leaves, all of which are charred and stroked on the
painful part of the body in a manner which, for each form of ache
and pain, is prescribed with more or less definiteness. Galls pro-
duced by insects and forming excrescences on certain trees are
highly esteemed as a means of cure for sore throat and sore chest.
The healer holds the gall in a flame for twenty or thirty seconds,
rubs off a bit of the charred part while it is still glowing, and
applies it to the chest or the throat with a downward stroke that
leaves a black mark about two inches long. She does this twice
three times, while repeating the numbers, “Usha, dua, tolug; usha,
dua, tolug.” (One, two, three; one, two, three). She must say no
more, and may make but the six strokes.
The other form of treatment included under gibo is the use of
smoke produced by burning vegetable gums, or the hair of the
flying lemur, or deserted birds’ nests*°° (particularly the nest of
*°° Skeat notes the Malay practice of treating a fretful child by smoking it over a
fire obtained from burning the nest of a weaver-bird. Cf. Malay magic, p. 338. 1900.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 233
the limokun pigeon), or any other object from which fumes regarded
as curative may be extracted. The patient, or some friend, puts
his hand near the burning medicine, and wafts the smoke toward
the nose or the sore chest or the aching head. It is not unlikely,
though this inference is my own, that this treatment may be assumed
to smoke out the disease-demon from the body, exactly as wild
bees are smoked out from their tree-homes while the hunt for wax
and honey is going on.
A similar method of treatment, though no actual smoke is pre-
sent, is that made use of to cure pain all through the body (tapan).
Numbers of tiny brown calyxes from a plant ealled sale are kept
strung on a thread of hemp, and alternating with these calyxes
are little flat, black, glossy seeds known as teling, also pierced and
strung. From this flowerlike chain of brown and black, the patient
takes one calyx and one seed and puts them into the flame of a
candle or a torch. He then places his hand near the flame, and
waves it twice toward his face, so that each time the flame will
bend in his direction, after each of which moves he passes his
hand over his face from forehead to chin. He is to repeat exactly
three times the double wafting of the flame and the double stroking
of the face, for to repeat four or five times is very unlucky.
Method of External Use without Burning. Another class of medi-
cines include those that are never put into the fire, but are simply
rubbed on the painful spot, or drawn lightly over the skin. Certain
fruits and seed-pods are rubbed ov the stomach; kamogna root is
shaped into very small discs, mixed with betel, chewed and spit
upon the abdomen, the head, or the chest; the fruit of esor is
chewed with betel and rubbed with three upward strokes on a
sore chest; vegetable gums furnish a panacea for pains in head,
thorax, wrists and feet, provided they are rubbed on the part with
a gentle downward stroke; from strings of seeds that hang from
the necklace a few are cut off, mixed with betel, spit on the finger,
and with the finger rubbed on an aching head; selected fruits and
bits of wood have only to be touched to lame arms and legs, and
many roots are used in like manner. Leprosy is said to yield to
a few passes made with an areca-nut on the sores, the magical
motions being manipulated in this, as in many other modes of healing,
by the patient himself.
A panacea for any and every bodily pain was brought to me by
Aglang. It was a vegetable gum tied up in a cotton girdle, the
234 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
girdle being knotted at intervals so as to present several closed
pouches that held the gum. Brass rings encircled the girdle, and
alternated with the pouches. The manner of treatment was to take
the girdle in the hand, and with it to make passes on the body
of the patient: three gentle, downward strokes on the neck, three
down the length of the arm, and one from hip to foot. Possibly
the disease is thus forced to pass out through the feet.
Method of Internal Use without Burning. Definite rules are laid
down for the preparation of medicines to be taken internally,
according to the class of medicine and the sickness. Certain kinds
of seeds, grasses, reots and vegetable gums must be boiled in water,
and the decoction drunk entire; while certain other kinds of roots,
as well as many varieties of rattan, barks and twigs are to be
scraped, or minced, dropped into water, sometimes hot and sometimes
cold, and swallowed raw. Bile from serpents *°° — a good remedy
for pain in the belly — is put into water and drunk without
boiling. The liver of the crow will cure a great number of troubles,
whether eaten cooked or raw. Cinnamon bark and certain roots
are scraped fine, and eaten dry.
Method of Wearing or of Carrying Medicine on the Person. The
last type of curative agents to be mentioned includes all those
worn about the person or carried in one’s bag or basket, the mere
presence of the object seeming sufficient to secure the benefit.
One of the most universally-used medicines of this class is the
decorated neck-band of rattan that bears the name of limba and
preserves the wearer from spitting blood, from centipede bite and
from swollen breasts. Remedies for many illnesses are tied up in
small rags and attached to the bead necklace or to some part of
the clothing. Petals of ylang-ylang blossoms are strung for neck-
laces, and bits of fruit from the biiiid tree are also strung and
hung round the neck, to prevent pain or to cure it. Hanging from
the belt or from the jacket of the Bagobo are often to be seen
bunches of dry, but fragrant, leaves and flowers, and heavy tassels
fashioned from many strings of seeds or of tiny dises of aromatic
woods, all in readiness to smell in case of headache, or to dispel,
by their mere presence, other aches and pains.
266 The Benua of the Peninsula have a cure for fever which consists in wearing hung
on the neck the gall-bladder taken from a python. Cf. R. Martin: Die Inlandstimme
der malayischen Halbinsel, p. 965. 1905.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH ~— 235
It must not be forgotten, however, that in many cases a medi-
cine is worn simply for convenience, so that it may be readily ac-
cessible when needed in haste for burning or for chewing, while
one is on a tramp, or making a visit far from home. Some of the
above-named remedies, while they may give relief by mere contact
with the person, often are taken off and used like the other classes
of medicine. The rattan neck-band, for instance, may be removed
from the neck and a small portion of it burned off, in order to
secure enough ashes to apply to a centipede sting. From the
necklace or the tassel or the nosegay, little seeds of teling and of
kuyo and of simarun, as well as calyxes of salé, are pulled off,
one by one, just as they are needed either to hold in the fire or
to swallow. There still remain, however, many curative objects
that are worn as means of prevention, or merely smelled to relieve
pain, like the above-mentioned fragrant bouquets.
TABU AS A FACTOR OF THE RELIGIOUS LIFE
In every phase of activity, the Bagobo is bound up more or
less tightly by an array of inhibitions that delay or completely
check the prompt execution of his projects, by arousing in him
fears, questionings and hesitation as to whether some tradition will
be trampled upon, or some disease invited by this or that intended
moye. He explains his insistence upon any given tabu by drawing
attention to a ceremonial restriction, or a social custom, or a known
experience of a hurt that followed some transgression; but obvi-
ously present-day explanations give no clue to historical origin in
any single case. This fact becomes the more evident on observing
that the practice of the same tabu may be variously accounted for by
different Bagobo. For example, one person refuses to eat the flesh
of monkeys because once a monkey turned into a buso; while an-
other says that to eat monkey would make him very sick because
long ago, according to myth, monkeys had the form of man; and
a third Bagobo explains his aversion by pointing out that a mon-
key has hands like the hands of man, and feet like the feet of man.
In any attempt to group into classes the different forms of tabu,
this tendency of the natives to find more than one origin for a
single custom emphasizes the highly artificial element that neces-
sarily enters into every classification, for no item belongs in one
fixed place alone. Yet the natural association of the tabus suggests
236 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
some such grouping as the following: (a) The ceremonial tabu, a
tabu connected with objects sacred to the gods, or having a cere-
monial significance; (b) The mythical tabu, a tabu whose coercive
effect depends upon association with some tradition, myth, or su-
pernatural mandate, including omens; (c) The class tabu, a tabu
on privileges reserved for certain social classes; (d) The esthetic
tabu, a tabu which derives its force from the juxtaposition of in-
congruous mental images.
Ceremonial Tabu
The ceremonial tabus are connected particularly with ceremonies
whose efficacy would be spoiled by the infringement of the tabu,
of chief importance among which prohibitions are the following.
It is tabu to sell, or to give away, any article which has been
placed upon an altar as an offering. In certain cases, such offerings
must be left permanently upon the shrine; while in other cases
the objects are returned to the owners at the conclusion of a cere-
mony, or after one night has passed while these gifts have been
lying on the shrine. In any case, one must never part with an
object thus offered to a god.
It is tabu to sell a weapon, or an ornament, which by reason
of its age is called an zkut, a term used of certain classes of articles
when they become old, and are hence ready to be put upon an
altar. The following objects are called ikut after they haye been
worn or carried for a period of not less than two years and one
month. The pangidu, a long-handled spear, of which there are
some thirty or more types; the kampilan, a valuable one-edged
sword that is carried in a decorative scabbard; the swndong, a long,
two-edged sword of Moro manufacture, that is obtained by the
Bagobo in trade; the kalasag, a war shield made of fine-grained
wood and often elaborately carved; the sinkali, a chain girdle
of fine brass links worn by wealthy Bagobo women; the pankis, °°'
a general term for several types of brass bracelet; the pamarang,
ear-plugs worn by women and made of hard wood inlaid with
very fine brass wire; the gading, large ivory ear-plugs worn by
men. While exceptions may oecur, the tendency is to limit the
*¢7 The armlet cast from a wax mold and forming a complete circlet is preferably
the ikut.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 237
classes of objects called ikut to weapons, arms and ornaments of
metal and of ivory. The interesting point is that the object in
question automatically attains a ceremonial value just because it
is old. “Cannot sell; it’s old,” is the nonchalant and final answer
to a request for something that is ikut; for the ikut must go to
the tambara or to the balekat, or to the parabunnian. Nevertheless,
though the god of the field, or the god of the house shrine may
claim the bracelet, or the ear-plug, or the shield, the Bagobo may
still continue to wear the ornament, or to carry the arm or the
weapon, for some time at least, before placing it upon a shrine.
There seems to exist a sort of tacit understanding between himself
and the divine being that, sooner or later, the precious possession
shall pass over to the altar. The question as to whether or not
an object has yet become an ikut may not rise into consciousness
until an opportunity for sale presents itself. On one occasion, there
was some hesitation about selling me a pair of ivory plugs because
“the gading was old, and perhaps ready for parabunnian.”
It is tabu to hold the festival of Ginum during the dark fort-
night of the moon.
It is tabu to remove from the Long House any part of the
ceremonial apparatus until the close of the celebration of Ginum.
This tabu includes articles of food that are brought in for the feast,
such as meat and salt, and the prohibition extends even to such
small things as fragments of rattan and parts of torches. The night
we were stringing bidti nuts on sections of rattan for the illumina-
tion, I asked to keep a bit of the rattan for a sample, but my
request was promptly denied. They told me that it would be “very
bad” to take it until after Ginum. '
It is tabu to cut the end of a ceremonial bamboo that is raised
at Ginum. It is better to leave it standing at a slant if it is too
long to be put in an upright position.
In the old men’s statement of exploits, it is tabu for any man
to give the correct number of the victims he has slain. He must
mention only one half the actual number, because if he should give
the complete count the great bamboo would split from top to bottom
while his hand clasps it.
It is tabu to continue the celebration of Ginum if an earthquake
shock occurs, lest the death of the man who gives the festival
follow, and the death of every member of his family as well.
It is tabu te move toward the north or the west or the east
238 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
while sowing rice at the annual festival of Marummas. The pre-
scribed direction is from north to south, and to go in any other
direction would cause a Bagobo to “die very quick’ of a disease
ealled tulud.
It is tabu to sow rice at any time except during the traditional
rice-planting season, which covers a period of about three months —
April, May and June.
It is tabu to break the spray of rice that is ceremonially placed
on the altar for the harvest ritual.
It is tabu for a torch to burn at the night meetings called Mang-
anito, at which seances not even a flicker of fire is permitted.
It is tabu for anybody in the house where there is a dead person
to fall asleep during the death watch.
Mythical Tabu
The coercive effect of the mythical tabu depends upon its asso-
ciation with some tradition, myth, supernatural mandate or omen,
as the following examples will illustrate.
It is tabu to continue a journey if an animal belonging to any
member of the party dies on the road, or if any animal dies at a
house where the party is stopping or waiting on the road.
It is forbidden to laugh at one’s reflection in the water.
It is tabu to laugh at small animals. Whoever laughs at a mouse
or a monkey or a lizard or a fly, or at any other little creature,
will have his head turned round by the Thunder-god, so that he
will face backward.
To kill a cat is tabu*S because, according to the myths, the
cat on two or three occasions gave timely warning to the Bagobo
when they were in danger.
The killing of a snake, though perhaps not carrying a direct
prohibition, is regarded as unwise, in view of the attitude which
the snake community might assume toward the offender. My
*°° The Peninsular Malays consider it lucky to keep a cat in the house. Cf. W. W.
SkEAT: Malay Magic, p. 190. A passage quoted by Skeat from Hugh Clifford’s “In
Court and Kampong” (p. 47) reveals a like superstition. “It is a common belief among
Malays that if a cat be killed he who takes its life will in the next world be called
upon to carry and pile logs of wood as big as cocoanut trees, to the number of the
hairs on the beast’s body. Therefore cats are not killed but if they become too daring in
their raids on the hen-coop or the food rack, they are tied to a raft and sent floating
down stream to perish miserably of hunger.” Jdid., p. 191.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 239
mountain guide, Ayoba, on catching sight of a poisonous black
viper on the trail, uttered a startled exclamation, then cut a stick,
picked up the reptile carefully and tossed it into the jungle. They
told me at Bungoyan’s home that if the snake had been put to
death all its relatives and its friends might have come to bite us.
There is a tabu on eating monkeys, on the ground that once a
monkey turned into a buso. Another tradition quoted for the origin
of the inhibition is that of the primitive peopling of the earth by
monkeys that had the form of man. It is said, again, that after
the earth was occupied by human beings, a few persons were
metamorphosed into monkeys.
To mention the name of a deceased ancestor comes under the
tabu called /was, a transgression to which severe penalties are
attached. One often hears from the Bagobo remarks like the
following: “I must not tell his name: he was my grandfather ;”
“I cannot speak my father’s name, because he is dead.” I am
inclined to think that some Bagobo are afraid to mention the names
of any dead persons, whether they are related to them or not.
Once or twice I have heard it said that “a Bagobo does not speak
the name of the dead; it is very bad to do so.” It is probable
that the mention of the name would be held as an equivalent to a
summons to the ghost to appear, and the care with which cere-
monial is performed to prevent the spirits in Kilut from so much
as giving a thought to those on earth shows how great is the anxiety
of the Bagobo to shut off the possibility of ghostly apparitions. °°
Among mountain Bagobo, there is a tendency to avoid mentioning
their own names that suggests the existence of a generally prevalent
tabu at an earlier period. A chieftain educated strictly under the
old Bagobo system, like Imbal of Tubison, if asked his name will
motion to a companion to answer for him. There is an evident
feeling that one’s own name is a precious and personal thing, not
to be tampered with by others.
Certain special circumstances appear to set in motion a name-tabu
called /uwas; e.g. a man does not mention the name of a girl whom
369 Dr. Furness says of tabu on names ia Borneo: “Among the Kayans and Kenyahs,
as far as I know, the restriction on the utterance of names of relatives extends only to
the fathers-in-law of a married couple, whose names must not be mentioned by either
the husband or the wife. Again, it is most ill-omened for a son to mention his dead
father’s name; and, of course, neither man nor woman dare pronounce their own name;
this a downright courting of all conceivable disasters and diseases.” Op. cit. p. 17.
240 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
he has seduced; the names of two boys who are desperately at
odds may be luas to each other.
It is tabu to mention the name of the god of fire, lest such
mention act as a summons to Buso.
In building a house, it is tabu to place the floor at a level be-
tween the waist and the head of the builder. The floor must be
either in the same horizontal plane with the waist of the builder,
or else be raised to a height above his head. If the floor should
be at the height, say, of the shoulder, the house would inevitably
fall and crush the family.
In digging a grave, the depth must be such that the top of the
walls be at a point about midway between the waist and the breast
of the digger. It is tabu to dig a grave deeper or shallower than
this measure.
Among mountain Bagobo, there is a rigid tabu against the sale
of unfinished textiles or other handiwork that is still in process
of manufacture by the women, such as carrying bags, embroidery,
and oyer-laced work. To break this tabu will make the women
too eager for the society of men. Of such an emotional disturb-
ance, the dignified and self-controlled Bagobo woman is in deadly
fear; and it was only after much discussion among the old people
in regard to possible substitutes and medicines that I could secure
an article in process of making.
Class Tabu
The class tabu defines the limits of privileges reserved for cer-
tain classes. This type of tabu may, perhaps, have become oblig-
atory as a means of social control, or under the pressure of group
interests. By this, I do not intend to give the impression that
there has been any formal reservation of valued privileges for the
old people, or for other classes of individuals distinguished for ex-
ploit or by their ancestry; but merely that in single cases, through
some historic accident, such a tabu might easily have originated,
and later have become fixed as a social obligation. In the nature
of things, this class of tabus would be small, for the social system
of the Bagobo is frankly democratic, and most good things are
shared by all; yet here and there, though rarely, a young man
who has performed no exploit, or a woman, on account of her sex,
is at a disadvantage.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 2M
It is tabu for a youth who has never killed a man to eat the
flesh of the limokun pigeon. The boys are taught that if they
should dare to eat it they would feel very sick, that their skin
would turn yellow, and that they would grow thin and die; but
the man who has killed other men may safely eat this pigeon, for
the reason that the limokun is the king of birds, There seems to
be no feeling of hesitation about killing this bird on account of
its sacred association with omens, but only as to making it common
food. Limokun is set aside for those who have achieved renown,
just as certain articles of dress are reserved for old people and for
warriors.
The wearing of the head-cloth called tankulu is tabu to any man
who has never killed another man, for the tankulu is a ceremonial
badge, indicating that the wearer has given Mandarangan human
blood to drink. This much-valued kerchief is made by women
specialists, who employ a method of over-lacing cotton or hemp cloth
before dyeing it. After coloring, the binding threads are removed
and, wherever the dye has not penetrated, a decorative design in
cream-color is left on a dark red background. The color varies from
a claret tint to a dark chocolate shade in a progressive series, the
lighter tints indicating that the wearer has killed but few men,
the darker tints that he has killed many.
This beautifully decorated tankulu cloth, which gives the appear-
ance of having been stamped with pattern blocks, is often made
up into shirts, trousers and carrying-bags for the men, and into
short waists and separate sleeves for the women. ‘The use of this
cloth is tabu, however, to all except those who have won the right to
wear the tankulu kerchief and their near relatives. For example,
a young man who has never taken life, but is nephew to a datu
or other brave man, is often seen wearing the tankulu but a
youth who has no distinguished relatives must earn his own exploit
badge.
Another textile, the use of which is prohibited to young men
and to young women, is /inombus, a hemp fabric that is dyed a
solid color in the rich claret dye extracted from the root of the
sikarig tree, and made into closed, tight shirts for old men and
women. It is said that in former times, before cotton cloth was
imported at the coast, all Bagobo women, young and old, wore the
linombus waist. At present, there is an attempt to preserve the
ancient colors in the short waist of shop cotton, with its body of
16
249 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
bright scarlet and sleeves of dark blue, which is worn by young
women and girls. The old women keep for themselves the firmly-
woven hemp waist, with its long black sleeves and dark wine-
colored body. Younger women save themselves time and trouble
by securing cotton stuff that can be bought at the coast and quickly
sewed together; but just when the tabu on the use of linombus by
the young originated we do not know. That a custom which has
passed out of use from unmistakably economic causes should now
be prohibited under an ethical category is interesting to note. As
for the young men, I heard no statement to the effect that they
ever wore the closed linombus**° shirt. Their present short jacket,
open in front and made of hemp woven in fine checks, may haye
been the historic garment. Only the sons and nephews of chief-
tains are permitted to wear the closed, claret-colored shirt of the
old people, and for them it is frequently embroidered very beauti-
fully and decorated with pearl discs. It is possible that the linombus
shirt, like the kerchief of brave men, was formerly associated with
rank and prowess, and that later it came to be reserved for old
people only.
It is tabu for women to eat the sacrificial food which, under the
name of taroanan,**' is offered upon the altar at Ginum.
It is tabu for young women to embroider the wide closed scarf
called sinaya, which is worn by mothers to support the baby as it rests
upon the hip. This scarf passes over the right shoulder, across the
chest, and under the left arm, and is covered with highly decorative
figures embroidered with a special needlework that is now almost
a lost art. Only aged women are permitted to do this embroidery,
and now there are but few old women who understand the art.?"
The ivory ear-plugs called gading seem once to have been tabu
to married men. It is said that these splendid dises of ivory are
b
distinctive of men who are malaki, or virgin, but the tabu is cer-
tainly not now strictly preserved.
It is tabu to men and women who are not unmarried and chaste
(malaki and daraga) to wear the wide, solid shell bracelet called
pangolan. 1 remember haying seen but one married man wearing
®7°In the Bila-an tribe, young men freely wear both jacket and trousers of linom-
bus cloth.
971 See pp. 79, 104, 138.
372 See the illustration in Amer. Mus. Jour., vol. 11, p. 166. May, 1911. This scarf
is called also salugboy.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 243
this armlet, and that was Antis, brother of Datu Ido. Possibly the
tabu is lifted for relatives of chieftains.
Esthetic Tabu
The esthetic tabu derives its force from the juxtaposition of
incongruous mental images, often associated with some real or fancied
resemblance.
The few tabus to be found in existence among the Bagobo
on eating the flesh of certain animals are in nowise traceable
to any totemic origin; nor are they based on supposed hygienic
grounds; nor is there any scruple against taking the life of an
animal, as such; nor, except in the single case of the limokun, is
there a religious sanction involved. Rather does the mention of
eating this or that animal suggest a train of mental images that
stimulates a feeling of distaste or repugnance. The tabued animal
in said to be like some other animal which is never eaten; or it
resembles man in some character; or the visual or the gustatory
image is unpleasant simply because it is inhibited by Bagobo custom.
This group of tabus is by no means so generally binding as those
of the two preceding classes, and the Bagobo who fails to observe
them is gently derided rather than censured. The only animal
food that I have heard spoken of as likely to produce death is the
flesh of the goat.
The civet cat is tabu, the only reason given being on the ground
of custom.
The carabao, or water-buffalo, is tabu for food, possibly because
the animal is utilized for dragging loads, and for riding bareback.
Mountain Bagobo of the truly conservative type refuse to eat beef.
On my offering a share in a can of corned beef to some old women
at Talun, who had very little food, they said that they could not
eat it because the cow was “like the carabao.” 3"
373'To the mountain Bagobo, cows are known only by an occasional glimpse at the
very few herds kept by an occasional Spaniard at the coast. Rinderpest is so widespread
a disease in the district of Davao that the attempt to introduce cows has met with
little success. “The universal preference for the flesh of the Buffalo to that of the Ox in
Malay countries is evidently a prejudice bequeathed to modern times by a period when
cow-beef was as much an abomination to Malays as it is to the Hindus of India at the
present day.” W. W. Skeat: Op. cit., p. 189. As above noted, however, the Bagobo
women objected to cow-flesh on the ground that it suggested eating buffalo-meat.
D44 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Goat’s flesh is tabu, for “it would kill a Bagobo to eat it.” I
saw no goats under domestication with the Bagobo, but I was told
that the Bila-an people kept goats. Whether this tabu has arisen
through unfamiliarity with the animal, or because of the economic
value of goat’s hair for decorative purposes, or through some Bila-an
tradition borrowed by the Bagobo cannot be determined until the
Bila-an tribe is better known to us.
Reptiles, including snakes, monitor lizards and agama, are almost
universally tabu among the Bagobo. Although some Bagobo will
at the flesh of the monitor lizard and of certain snakes, the
esthetic repugnance that leads to the prohibition is pretty general.
Nearly all Bagobo, young and old, show disgust and abhorrence
at the mere suggestion of eating the flesh of monkeys. While the
story-teller accounts for this widespread feeling by reference to some
mythical or other episode where the monkey figured as a chief
character, most Bagobo explain the tabu by pointing out the re-
semblance which an ape bears to a human being. From boys and
girls, from old women and old men, one hears such remarks as
the following, uttered with manifest signs of horror and shrinking.
“The monkey has two feet like man’s feet; he has two hands like
man’s hands; I could not eat the monkey.” “A Tagakaola can eat
monkey ; a Bilia-an can eat monkey; a Kulaman can eat monkey.”
“Very few Bagobo can eat monkey, because monkey is like man.”
[ have known two or three Bagobo boys who frankly admitted to
eating monkey-meat, “because it is like deer,” or “because it is
like chicken,’ but these boys were ridiculed by the other young
people present. Doubtless, under stress of famine, which so often
comes when the rice erdps fail, any tabu that limits the food supply
runs a risk of being broken.
The Bagobo say that other tribes eat animals proscribed among
themselves. The Tagakaola are said to eat civet cat and lizards,
while the Bila-an and the Kulaman are accused of eating monkey.
No doubt the tabu on certain classes of foods is subject to con-
siderable local variation, but of course each tribe regards its own
customs as more or less distinctive. One day there were ten or
more Bila-an men at my house when we were talking of food
tabus, and they all admitted readily that it was their custom to
eat monkey-flesh.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH
bo
ASS
Ot
OMENS AND DREAMS
Omens
Closely related to the entire subject of tabu is the belief in
omens, signs and dream portents, some of which phenomena indicate
a line of behavior to be followed out, while others foretell un-
avoidable disaster, or simply serve to announce an event that has
already occurred. The greater number of omens noted by the
Bagobo as significant are believed in pretty generally by other
tribes in the Philippines, and are of a nature that requires no par-
ticular consideration. Many of the signs and portents that are here
briefly listed together have already been mentioned in our previous
discussion, in association with the various subjects which they concern.
A number of conditions observable in natural phenomena are inter-
preted as omens.
When the western sky has a lurid or reddish aspect on a cloudy
afternoon, it is a sign of misfortune for the world, and it especially
foretells the appearance of the sickness called pamalii. There is a
saying among the Bagobo, “When the sky is red, trouble will come.”
“Maluto langit, madat e banua.”
Red sky, bad is world.
It is said that at rare intervals the sun at noon seems to
have the shape of an umbrella, and that this ¢/mo/ud sun is an
omen of terrible import. It foretells the calamity of an incestuous
union between a brother and sister in some family, followed by
the death of the guilty individuals.
An eclipse of the moon is a sign that the mammoth bird Mino-
kowa has swallowed her, and that the sun and all the people on
the earth will be swallowed by the same bird, unless the Minokawa
can be induced to open its mouth and disgorge the moon — a
result which is regularly brought about by the shouting and
screaming of men, and the beating of agongs.
The so-called spots on the moon are actually a white monkey
sitting on a tree; but to distinguish the form of the monkey is a
portent of death to him that sees it.
Crashing peals of thunder augur sickness and death, for the z00-
morphie thunder demon is emitting growls and roars, a sign that
he will immediately drop down upon earth and devour somebody,
unless spells be performed with lemons cut up in water.
246 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
A shower falling within a few days after the death of any
Bagobo is to be interpreted as a sign that the dead person is weeping
for a companion to follow him. Some one of his relatives or near
friends, therefore, will be smitten with mortal illness, failing the
performance of the proper spell to charm away the lingering spirit.
A dire portent is the occurrence of an earthquake during the
celebration of Ginum, for it fortells the death of the host and of
all his family.
A journey must be given up, or postponed, if an animal belong-
ing to any one of the expedition dies on the road, for this is a
sign that to go on would be dangerous.
The sound of an insect chirping in a house at night is a sign
that somebody has just died, and this faint singing is the voice of
the right-hand soul (gimokud takawanan) making the announcement
of its departure from the earth.
The sound of a rotten tree crashing to the ground at night, when
no man is near to fell it, is an augur of death, for it means that
the evil ghost which was the left-hand soul (febang) is striking his
head against the trunk to show that he wants somebody to die
and be his comrade as he prowls about at night. *"*
The limokun** is recognized by the Bagobo as the omen bird,
whose yoice must be listened to carefully for indications of suc-
cess or ill-luck. Opinions in regard to the precise manner of the
°7* Father Gisbert records several omens that I did not happen to hear mentioned as
significant phenomena. In a letter dated February 8, 1886, he says: “When the Bagobos
have an evil presentiment, for which it is enough for them to see a snake in the house,
or that the jar breaks in the fire, etc., they hasten to their matanom, in order to have
him conjure the misfortune by means of his great wisdom.... Sneezing is always a bad
omen for them, and accordingly if anyone sneezes by chance when they are about to set
out on a journey, the departure is deferred until next day.” Brark and Rosertson:
op. cit., vol. 43, pp. 287—238. 1906.
*75 The limokun (Calcophaps Indica) is a species of turtle dove, or wood pigeon, having
green and white plumage, with red feet and beak. It is a large and beautiful bird
that Bagobo children love to catch and tame for a house pet, and this they do freely,
notwithstanding its character as an omen bird. The boys snare it by laying a slip-noose
on the red pepper plant, whose fruit the bird comes to eat. The string of the slip-noose
is tied by its other end to the slender branch of a tree or bush, so as to work by a
simple form of trigger release, the branch bending down and springing back when the
bird steps into the noose. In about two nights, a boy told me, the limokun, imprisoned
in a little cage of split bamboo, has grown fairly tame. The decoy note for limokun is
made by whistling between the two thumbs held in contact, vertically and close to the
lips, the four fingers of the right hand being clasped over those of the left, with a tiny
crevice left for an air vent.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 247
augury vary somewhat, though the postponing of a journey or the
abandoning of the expedition is usually involved. A Bagobo told
me that if the limokun were heard to whistle the journey must
be abandoned for that day. Either a return home, or a mere wait
on the road, will avert the threatened disaster. Certain other in-
vestigators °‘° have recorded that the advance or retreat of the party
must be determined by the direction whence the limokun’s voice
comes — whether from the right hand or the left hand side of
the path.?"
Omens of life and of death, of wealth and of poverty, are read
in the lines on the palm of the hand by Bagobos skilled in such
matters.
Among my acquaintances were two young men and one old chief-
tain who understood a little of palmistry. The long curved line
that follows the direction of the attachment of the thumb is called
the Jawa, which, when it ends proximally in many fine roots, means
that the person will have a long life. The well-defined line
running across the hand below the fingers is the kulili, which, if
strong and deeply-marked, signifies that the individual will grow
rich and possess many things. The line running transversely be-
tween the kulili and the lawa is named the tidalan, but I am un-
able to state its meaning, as my note on this line is broken off.
A faint line passing lengthwise over the middle of the palm, and
crossing the tidalan and the kulili, is to be seen in the hands of
some persons; this is the bera kamati, and its presence indicates
that one is the last of the family, that all of the other members
are dead. The short line near the wrist, running obliquely from
°7° Father Gisbert wrote, in 1886, as follows concerning the limokun augur among
the Bagobo: “The song of the limocon is for them the message from God. It is of good
or evil augury according to circumstances. Accordingly, when the limocon sings every
Bagobo stops and looks about him. If he sees, for instance, a fallen tree, the limocon
advises him not to advance farther, for the fate of that tree awaits him, and he turns
back. If he sees no particular thing which indicates or prognosticates any ill, he con-
tinues, for then the song of the limocon is good.” Buarr and Ropertson: op. cit., vol.
43, p. 238. 1906.
°77 Bishop Aduarte, writing in 1640 of the inhabitants of Nueva Segovia, probably
refers to the limokun in this passage. “If they heard the singing of a certain bird
which they regarded as a bad omen, they did not go on at all with what they had
undertaken, even though they had traveled for many days, and even in the case of an
entire army in war. They acted in the same manner if the bird came or flew toward
their left hand, or if it turned its bill in such or suchadirection.” See his “Historia...”
Biaik and Ropertson, vol. 30, p. 287. 1905.
248 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
the lawa to the bera kamati, is called the bangan, and means that
men will kill the sister of the possessor of the hand, or will kill
his sister’s husband. The soris is a short line branching upward
from the bangan; but koris may be used also as a general term
for the lines in the palm. The phrase madat palad signifies that
your lines are unlucky, that you will have a short life, and that
your wife, too, will soon die. **8
Dreams
Dreams are of two distinct types, which may be called exploit
dreams and warning dreams.
The exploit dream is characterized by adventures, hairbreadth
escapes, strange encounters all of which are actual exploits per-
formed by the evil left-hand soul, which has escaped, temporarily,
from the body in which it lives and is wandering about the earth. **"
The vision, or warning dream, is one in which a person who is
living under some stress of anxiety or suffering is visited by a
heavenly messenger, who tells him what to do to obtain relief.
Several myths illustrate this type of dream, such as the following.
*78 Parallel beliefs in the value of signs and portents for the determination of behavior
are found in many tribes throughout the Islauds. For example, Aduarte says of the
Filipino of Nueva Segovia, in 1640: “If the Indians left their houses, and happened to
meet anyone who sneezed, they went back home again even though they had gone a
day’s journey, as if the sneeze had been something in the road. Sometimes they went
on, and returned without delay from their destination. If the same thing happened
when they began to work, they immediately desisted from their labor... On the con-
trary, they were very much encouraged and very joyful when the augury was a good
one; and although a thousand times the event was opposite to what the augury... had
threatened or promised, they never lacked an excuse for remaining in that error...”
“Historia...” BLarr and Ropertson: op. cit., vol. 30, pp. 287—288. 1905.
One of the pioneer Jesuit missionaries in Mindanao, Francisco Combés, says: “What
they believe in thoroughly are omens, which are almost general in all the islands. There
are many of them: of birds, like the limocon; of insects, like the lizard [sic.]; of acci-
dental occurrences, like sneezing; of happenings, like deaths and earthquakes; of obser-
vances, at times of sowing, and of reaping, and of the hunt — all of those have their
observances which they fulfil in order to have luck in the work; for they believe that
without these it will be unlucky and without any profit.” “Historia de Mindanao, Jold,
etc.” 1667. Briar and Ropertson: op. cit., vol. 40, p. 184, 1906.
Cf. also, the following references as typical of many such to be found in the Indian
sagas. “After he had set forth he saw an evil omen presenting itself in front of him.”
Somadeva: Katha sarit sigara: tr. by C. H. Tawney, vol. 1, p. 283. 1880. “An evil
omen presenting itself to people engaged in any undertaking, if not counteracted by delay
and other methods, produces misfortune.” Jéid., vol, 1, p. 285.
*7° See pp. 58—60.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 249
During a legendary famine that aftlicted the Mona, the traditional
ancestors of the Bagobo, a little boy with white hair appears to
the old man, Tuglay, in his sleep and warns him to stay no longer
where there is so little food, but to go to the land of the water-
sources.
A mother whose son has been bewildered by the wood demon,
Siring, and lured to his death, sees at night a dream-boy who
stands beside her and bids her perform certain devotional rites that
will procure the restoration of her son. °°
An allied episode is that in the story, “The Sun and the
Moon,” *5! when a white-haired boy tells the Sun, in a dream, that
the Moon mother has hidden away her girl-baby in a box to save
her from the cruelty of the Sun. °°?
*80 Of. Jour. Am. Folk-Lore; vol. 26, pp. 24—52. Jan.—Mar., 1913.
SOD OE ith, i Mile
%%2 For a discussion of magic, tabu and treatment of disease in certain Melanesian
tribes, see Dr. C. G. SeLicmann’s “The Melanesians of British New Guinea,” pp. 186—140,
167—193. 1910.
The subject of divination, magic and omens among the Todas of Southern India is
examined by Dr. W. H. R. Rivers, in his “The Todas,” pp. 249—273, 459—460.
See also Dr. A. C. Hanpon’s Notes on the Omen Animals of Sarawak, in his “Head-
Hunters, Black, White and Brown,” pp. 38]—393. 1901. Cf. Reports of the Cambridge
Anthropological Expedition to Torres Straits, vol. V, VI, 1904—1908, for an analysis
of the magic and religion of the western and eastern islanders.
Part IV. PROBLEM or Sources OF CEREMONIAL AND MytTH
It is only during the last half century that the Bagobo have
come to the knowledge of the western world. We do not know how
early they came into contact with the Chinese; but Dr. Laufer, ***
who has made a careful investigation of those Chinese sources which
contain accounts of the Philippines, mentions no Chinese record of
the wild tribes of Mindanao.
When we turn to the Spanish writers, we find as early as 1521
descriptions of the Filipino and of the Moro peoples, *** and from
the end of the sixteenth until the close of the nineteenth century
the work of the priests progressed in Mindanao ; yet for some time there
is no mention of Bila-an or of Kulaman, of Tagakaola or of Ba-
gobo. Although as early as 1546 Saint Francis Xavier **° preached
in Mindanao; although missions were established on this island by
the Jesuits in 1596,*°° and by the Recollects in 1622;°°* although
in 1655 the number of christianized natives under the care of Jes-
wits and Recollects in Mindanao was reported *** to have reached
70,000, the mountain tribes of the southeast were not known to
the missionaries until two centuries later. It was along the coast
line from the northeast to the southwest, and in the immediately
adjoining territory of the interior that their numerous churches and
convents were established. One may search in vain the maps of the
early cartographers for any place-names along the gulf of Davao.
Even fairly detailed maps such as that by Sanson d’Abbeville, *°
*®* Of. “The Relations of the Chinese to the Philippine Islands.” Smithsonian Miscel-
laneous Collections (Quarterly issue), vol. 50, p. 248—284. 1907.
°8* See Buaik and RoBertson: op. cit., vol. 33—384; vol. 41, et cetera.
89° Cf, ibid., vol. 27, pp. 300, 304, 1905.
98¢ CF, ibid., vol. 28, p. 340. 1905. See also vol. 41, p. 284. 1906.
387 Of, ibid., vol. 21, pp. 214—233 e¢ sey., 302 et seg. 1905, See also vol. 13, pp.
48, 86. 1904. See also vol. 28, pp. 340, 344. 1905. See also vol. 41, pp. 187—157.
398 CF, ibid., vol. 36, p. 57. 1906.
98° See ibid., vol. 27, pp. 74—75. 1905.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 251
dated 1654; of Archivo general de India, *°° 1683; by Murillo Ve-
larde, °°! 1749; by Nicol,*°* 1757, and that from the “Complete
East India pilot” **? of 1794, indicate nothing in this region except
the situation of Mount Apo. It was not until 1847—1848 that the
conquest of Davao gulf was accomplished by the Spaniard Oyang-
uren, who by 1849 had the Moros of the entire coast of the gulf
subdued, and was turning his attention to the interior. °°
Our first descriptions, from Spanish sources, of the religious
customs of the pagan tribes of the east and west sides of Davao
gulf appear in that invaluable series of letters published under the
title of “Cartas de los PP. de la Compania de la Mision de Fili-
pinas,’ in 9 volumes, Manila, 1877—1891. We do not know the
precise date when the Jesuits began to work in the pueblos along
the gulf, but it was some time during the third quarter of the last
century. An undated letter from Padre Heras, Superior of the
Mission, that precedes a letter of 1876 in the first volume of the
Cartas, *°° mentions the little village of Davao as having a good
church and a school, and names several of the wild tribes, including
the Bagobo, which would come within the jurisdiction of the mission.
In 1877, Padre Moré and Padre Puntas were working in Davao
and were making visitations at neighboring Bagobo rancherias. *°°
Padre Mateo Gisbert was there as early as 1880 and remained until
his death in 1905, while Padre Juan Doyle came several years later
than Gisbert.*°* It is the letters of these four last-named missionaries,
therefore, that are of particular ethnological interest in relation to
the Bagobo and their neighbors.
When found by the Spanish fathers, the Bagobo were practising
a religion, the essential elements of which had been well-developed
for a considerable period. The genealogy of one of the head datu,
Manip of Sibulan, had been carefully preserved by means of oral
recitation, and it ran back for eleven generations to his famous
39° See zhzd., vol. 54, p. 51. 1909.
*°1 See zbid., vol. 48, frontispiece. 1907.
392 See zbid., vol. 48, p. 281. 1907.
*°2 See zbid., vol. 41, frontispiece. 1907.
*9* Of. Quirico Moré: “Letter...Jan. 20, 1885.” Brark and RoBeRtTson: op. cit.,
vol. 43, p. 194. 1906. Quotes Montero y Vidal: “Historia pirateria,” vol. 1, pp. 382—403.
39° Cf, Cartas, vol. 1, pp. 18—19. 1877,
°9° Of. Cartas, vol. 1, pp. 65, 81. 1877. Idid., vol. 2, pp. 47—50. 1879.
°°7 Cf. tbid., vol. 3, p. 104. 1880.
252 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ancestor, Salingolop.°°* According to Bagobo tradition, human sacri-
fices were offered to Mandarangan while Salingolop ruled, in the
same manner that they are offered to-day. It will be seen, then,
that no Spanish document can throw light, by contemporaneous
record, on the nature or the form of the Bagobo ceremonial of
two or three centuries ago; still less, on the processes by which it
grew to its present condition of complexity. Any attempt, there-
fore, to trace the mythology and the ritual customs to their sources
must analyze them on a comparative basis. Here, too, the lack of
detailed ceremonial material from a large part of the Malay area
permits only rather general comparisons; still, it is possible to
arrive at some sort of answer to the question: “To what extent is
the religion of the Bagobo identical with that of other peoples in
the Malay country, and in how far is it unique?”
In such a discussion, two or three lines of cultural development
on the religious side would suggest themselves; none of which,
however, should be considered as excluding the others. (1) The
ceremonial of the Bagobo may represent in some of its aspects
an independent local development; (2) Some elements of the cere-
monial may have been brought into the Philippines by one tribe,
or have taken shape in some one locality, and thence, as from a
cultural center, haye been superimposed on other groups; (3) The
fundamental ceremonial factors may be considered as the common
heritage of the wild tribes and the Filipino, and as haying undergone
merely such local modifications in each group as slight variations
in cultural conditions would give rise to.
Scanty as is the descriptive material that has thus far been
*9® Manip was the father of Tongkaling, who is datu of Sibulan at the present time,
and Salingolop appears to be the earliest ancestor known to this line. The genealogy
referred to was recorded first by father Mateo Gisbert, in a letter dated July 26, 1886;
and a few years later it was given, without change, by Father Juan Doyle in a letter
dated May 30, 1888. See Cartas, vol. 8, p. 205. 1889. Father Gisbert’s letter, as trans-
lated by Blair and Robertson, runs as follows: “The Bagobos of Sibulan usually show
their antiquity by the following genealogies. Manip, the present datu, had for father
Panguilan; Panguilan was the son of Tadpan; Tadpan, son of Maliadi; Maliadi, son of
Banga; Banga, son of Liimbay; Liimbay, son of Basian; Basian, son of Boas; Boas, son
of Baté; Baté, son of Salingolop. They say that of all their ancestors, Salingolop was
the most powerful, and his name was always preserved among all his descendants. Before
him there were already Bagobos with the same customs as those of today, that is, they
were heathens and slaves of the great Mandarangan or Satan, to whom it appears that
they always sacrificed human victims.” Op. cit., vol. 43, pp. 245—246. 1906.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH — 233
gathered by observers of religious rites as celebrated by pagan tribes
in the south, yet even in such records as we have, certain well-
marked characteristics in ritual appear in the same setting in several
different tribes. A number of the ritual elements that are found
to be the common property of two or three or more mountain
tribes of Mindanao will be mentioned briefly, not at all as a com-
plete list, but rather as suggesting a line along which a full
comparison might be extended.
We note, first, a close similarity in the essentials of sacrificial
rites as practised by the Bagobo and other peoples of Mindanao.
The offering of human victims seems, at present, to be peculiar to
the Bagobo, the closely allied Guianga and the Tagakaola; but the
manner of sacrificing animals in other tribes is in many points
identical with the Bagobo paghuaga. The intention and the tech-
nique of the bloody sacrifice is much the same, whether the victim
be a man, a hog or a cock. In the brief but trenchant description
given by Pastells*°° of this rite among the Mandaya, we learn
that the sacrifice is performed at the signal of drums and agongs;
the official sacrificers wear claret-colored shirts and ceremonial
kerchiefs; the victim is tied to some structure of recognized form;
a peculiar dance is performed about the victim before the attack;
definite ritual words are repeated to Mansilatan or to Badlao — gods
that answer to Mandarangan; the privilege of giving the first stab
is awarded beforehand to a particular individual; a feast following
the sacrifice is shared in by great numbers of people. The Buquidnon,
similarly, offer sacrifices of swine and fowls,*°” having old men as
celebrants of the rites, with the accompaniment of songs, dancing
and prayers. Besides the bloody sacrifice, the Mandaya, the Bu-
quidnon and many other tribes, make agricultural offerings of areca-
nuts and buyo and various products of the soil.*?! Antiphonal
songs relating the achievements of ancestral heroes are sung on
festival occasions by the Buquidnon, as well as by the Bagobo.
The shrines of the Buquidnon answer, structurally, to the Bagobo
399 <Carta...al R. P. Superior de la Mision, Catel, 8 de Junio de 1878.” Cartas de
los PP. de la Compaiiia de Jesus de la Mision de Filipinas, vol. 2, pp. 188—139,
144. 1879.
#00 J. M. Crorer: “Letter... Talisayan, May 11, 1889.” Bratr and Ropertson; op.
cit., vol. 43, p. 296. 1906.
“01 Papo Pasretis: loc. cit. Cartas, vol. 2, pp. 189—140. 1879. See also Clotet’s
letter (wt supra). Buarr and Roperrson: op. cit., vol. 48, p. 296.
254 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
tambara;*° the Bila-an have a rice-altar (parabunnian) in form of
a little hut much like that of the Bagobo. +”
Turning from the formal ceremonial to religious responses of a
more informal nature, it appears that throughout the mountain tribes
of Mindanao communication is set up with the gods through the
medium of priestesses. The Mandaya meeting, in particular, as
described by Pastells, corresponds in certain aspects to the manner
of giving an oracle among the Bagobo -— the emotional disturb-
ance, the silence preceding the utterance, the behavior of the
medium. 4°*
Valiant men, who have slain other men and have _ therefore
received the title of bagani (or magani), are everywhere entitled
to the same privileges: the wearing of a closed shirt dyed in solid
red, the ceremonial kerchief, and a costume graded (at least among
the Bagobo, the Mandaya and the Manobo) by the number of per-
sons the wearer has killed — from the kerchief to the full costume
of encarnado.**® Among the Mandaya, the Manobo, the Bila-an,
the Tagakaola and the Bagobo, and presumably in all of the neigh-
boring tribes, these “brave men” hold a position of great impor-
tance, both from the ceremonial and the social point of view, and
they exert a profound influence in the tribe.
Many of the popular beliefs*?° found among the Bagobo are cur-
rently accepted throughout the entire island. The appeal to con-
stellations to determine the proper time for burning over the ground
and for sowing; the cause of an eclipse; the danger of continuing
a journey when a slain animal is encountered on the road; the
position of limokun as the omen bird and the interpretation of its
cry; the sacredness of thicket growths; the haunting of the baliti
and of various other trees associated with evil spirits all these
beliefs are held by many, if not all, of the tribes. Beliefs essen-
“02 J. M. Crore: Joc. cit., p. 296.
“03 See p. 93, footnote.
*o4 P, PasTeLis: loc. cit. Cartas, vol. 2, pp. 189, 140. 1879.
“°° “Tos baganis se distinguen en su vestido segun el nimero de sus asesinatos. De
cinco & diez muertes, llevan en la cabeza pafiuelo encarnado, de diez i veinte paiiuelo
y camisa colorada, de veinte en adelante pafiuelo, camisa y pantalon encarnado.” P. Pas-
TELLS; foc. cit., Cartas vol. 2, p. 144. 1879. Cf. also, SantiAGO PunTas: Carta... Butuan,
19 Diciembre, 1880. Cartas, vol. 4, p. 37. 1881. Cf. also, F. Compts: “Natives of the
southern islands,” Briar and Ropertson: op. cit., vol. 40, p. 159. 1906.
“°° Of, Cartas, vol. 2, p. 141 e¢ seg.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH ~— 255
tially similar regarding death and burial are widely diffused through-
out the northern, the eastern and the southeastern regions of Min-
danao; such as the journey of the soul to another world, the impor-
tance of placing food for the soul to eat on the way,*”’ the burial
of rich clothes*°> and other possessions with the dead and, often,
the desirability of forsaking a house in which there has been a death.
Names of demons, such as Busao, Tagamaling, Tigbanua, appear
in other tribes, but sometimes with traits other than those that
characterize these eyil personalities among the Bagobo. The as-
uang*°5 of the Mandaya is clearly borrowed from the group of
Visayan situated on the Pacific coast. The Mandayan Busao,
however, is not identical with the Bagobo Buso, for the former spirit
is conceived to be a sort of intangible out-going from the good
gods, Mansilatan and Badlao; it is believed that the bagani or brave
men haye the spirit of Busao given to them to make them strong
and yaliant.*°° Thus the Mandayan Busao is functionally identical
with the Bagobo Mandarangan, who enters into the heads of brave
men and fills them with a desire to shed blood. Padre Pastells
states that the Mandaya had a Tagamaling, a being of gigantic
stature 1° (thus differing from the Tagamaling of Bagobo myth).
Again, the name of Tagumbanua is mentioned as “a god of the fields” 4"!
among the Bukidnon; but, here, it seems highly probable that this
spirit may be found to be identical with the Bagobo demon, for
the missionaries may have been misled by the composition of the word.
In general, however, I think that we ought to be very hesitant
about rejecting the records of the Religious in regard to the char-
acteristics of the supernatural beings. Their notes on demons have
a peculiar value on account of the sympathetic attitude of the priests
when the natives brought to them accounts of supernatural visita-
tions. Believing, as many of their letters show, that the spirits
called busao, asuang, and so forth, were actual apparitions of the
real devil of theology, they listened to the weird stories of the
people in a spirit that encouraged confidence. *!”
“07 Cf, P. PasTELLs: op. cit. Cartas, vol. 2, p. 142. 1879.
#08 Cf, P. PasTELis; ibid. Cartas, vol. 2, p. 143. 1879.
“029 Of, P, PastELis: zbid., Cartas, vol. 2, p. 1388. 1879.
pa 1 oom a 8B
411 J, M. Crorer: Joc. cit. Buatr and RoperTson: op. cit., vol. 43, p. 294. “Banna”
means “the earth” in the sense of “the world,’ in Bagobo.
“12 As the following passage and a number of others demonstrate, the missionaries
256 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF.SCIENCES
Certain of the religious beliefs that have been mentioned, such as
the reverence for haunted trees, are widespread throughout the
world and might easily have arisen independently in different Malay
groups; but we find also such forms and customs as the sacrificial
dance and the dress of the baganis that have a certain amount of
complexity, and since they occur in neighboring groups they point,
unmistakably, to contact and diffusion, for a completely inde-
pendent growth of ritual phenomena so essentially alike is highly
improbable. The chances for dissemination of religious culture from
island to island, and within each single island, must have been
good at all times, especially where Malay people are concerned,
who are both sea-farers and land-trampers.
The hypothesis of one cultural center in Mindanao from which
ritual practices have radiated is not an impossible one, although
at present there is not sufficient evidence to determine which
of the tribes has ever been in a position to impose its myth-
ical prepossessions on the rest. ‘To determine such a center of
radiation, it would be necessary to have aecess to records of the
full ceremonial and the stories of each tribe — records which are
not available. What we do know is that there must have been a
general interaction among all of the ceremonial groups, and that
borrowing of myths and of ceremonial details has undoubtedly been
going on for a very long time, especially among groups that inter-
marry and that hold toward one another relations that are fairly
friendly — such groups as the Bila-an, the Tagakaola, the Guianga
and the Bagobo — though we do not know just how recently
such friendly intercourse has come about. We have, indeed, de-
finite evidence from Spanish writers, as well as from the accounts
did not regard the stories of demons as mere fictions of the imagination. In the writings
of Fray Casimiro Diaz, 1638—1640, we find an account of spiritual apparitions among
the natives of Panay. “During the time when this apostolic minister Mentrida was
preaching in the mountains of Ogton, there were visible apparitions of the devil, standing
upon a rock and teaching superstitions and giving laws to a great number of Indians,
who, deceived by him, followed him. Even at this day these hideous monsters are wont
to appear to the Indians, some of whom remain in a demented condition for months from
the mere sight of them; others go away with the demons, and are lost for a long time,
and then will return in a terrified and fainting condition, few of them failing to die
soon afterward. J would have much to tell and relate if I should stop to mention what
has occurred with such monsters, who have been seen not only in the mountains of Ogton
and Panay, but very frequently in the province of Taal.” Bratr and Roperrson: op.
cit., vol. 29, pp. 269—270. 1905. See also, ApUARTE: Historia. Op. cit., vol. 30, pp.
178—180. 1905.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 257
of the natives themselves, that an attitude of hostility between
many of the pagan peoples has been very common, and that along
with this hostility has flourished the practice of slave-taking and
the other accompaniments of intertribal warfare. Nevertheless,
there is always much communication even between hostile tribes,
with innumerable opportunities for the transmission of folklore
and myth, particularly through the wide distribution of slaves.
Hostile or friendly, these mountain tribes of Mindanao must have
borrowed much from one another. Yet, while the opportunities for
the spreading of myth, either by direct grafting or through gradual
dissemination, cannot be emphasized too strongly, there need not be
excluded the hypothesis of a premigration development of the basal
structure of that ceremonial which prevails throughout the mountains
of Mindanao to-day; and the probability for such a common basis
is the stronger in view of the similarity we find in groups separated
by natural barriers difficult to cross. The question can be consid-
ered only in the light of ceremonial material from the other is-
lands of the Philippines.
Turning from the wild tribes of the south to the now Christian
races of the Visayas and of Luzon, we are at once confronted by
the problem as to whether the pagan peoples of Mindanao form,
in any sense, a cultural unit composed of similar ceremonial groups
that show essential differences to the Filipino of three centuries ago.
What material do we find among Tagal and Visayan tribes to favor
a hypothesis for such a religious isolation? So far from discovering
ceremonial evidence that would corroborate this view, a comparison
of the rites and beliefs of the Bagobo, say, as typical pagans of
the south, with the rites and beliefs of the early Filipino shows a
close parallel at almost every point.
Here in the north and in the west there is much more available
material than in the south, for the Spaniard came into immediate
contact with the Tagal, the Pintados, the Bikol, the Ilokano and
the other peoples that now compose the Christian population of the
Islands; and, from the Relation of Pigafetta,*!® who was the chron-
icler of the Magellan voyage, in 1519—1522, down to the sketch by
José Nunez *!* of vestigial superstitions among the Filipino in 1905,
“13 <Wirst voyage round the world...1519—1522. ms. ca. 1525. Brain and Roperr-
SON: op. cit., vol. 33; vol. 34, pp. 1—180. 1906.
“1% Op. cit., vol. 43, pp. 310—319. 1906.
17
258 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
records of great value on the religious customs of the natives have
been made by missionaries, by explorers and by Spanish officials.
Many of these observations, especially on ceremonial rites, are
fragmentary; many, isolated as single sentences in the midst of an
ecclesiastical document, or in a discursive narrative of a voyage;
many are tainted by religious bias; the majority are impressionistic
and non-critical, yet they are priceless records, as being contem-
poraneous accounts of religious practices now almost completely
vanished, simply and truthfully taken down without any attempt
to present evidence for a pre-conceived ethnological theory, and as
haying been secured before the Filipino had been contaminated by
intercourse with higher cultures. In some cases, we are able to
check the observations of one writer by frequently repeated state-
ments of other writers in not distant localities — all of which
records leaye us with the distinct impression that the Tagal and
the Visayan of the sixteenth and the seventeenth centuries worshiped
and worked magic and sacrificed slaves in pretty much the same manner
as the Bagobo do to-day.
The Tagal people used to set apart three days or four days
annually, before the sowing,+!® for a solemn feast which, in cere-
monial details as well as in fundamental character, closely re-
sembled the Bagobo festival of Ginum. The large house of the
chief was divided into definite compartments for the occasion, *!°
and during the four days of the feast it became the temple or
ceremonial house, whither the entire baranguy, or group of rela-
tives and dependants of the chief, came together for worship and
for feasting; percussion instruments of various sizes were brought
in and played on at intervals throughout the four festival days;
torches of special types were put at set places in various parts of
the ceremonial house;*" a sacrifice of a hog or of a cock was made,
the animal being put to death after a peculiar dance had been
executed around it,*'® and its flesh distributed to the people as-
sembled;4!® the music of drums and bells accompanied the sacrifice;
*t6 Of, ApuaRTE: “Historia, 1640.” Biatr and Ropertson: op. cit., vol. 30, p. 287.
1905.
“16 Cf, Prasencta: “Relation of the worship of the Tagalogs, 1589.” Bram and
ROBERTSON: op. cit., vol. 7, pp. 185—186. 1903.
“17 Loc. cit. pp. 185—186.
‘1° Of, Currtno: “Relacion..., 1601—1604.” Op. cit., vol. 12, p. 270. 1904.
“19 OF, Zititca: The people of the Philippines,” 1803. Op. cit., vol. 43. p. 125, 1906.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH ~~ 259
liturgical songs that had been passed down from generation to
generation, and that narrated the achievements and the fabulous
genealogies of tribal heroes and of divinities, were sung or chanted; *”°
offerings of material things**' had to be made by everybody who
hoped to obtain the benefits of the sacrifice; priestesses acting
under strong emotional stress gave oracles from gods who entered
their bodies, though the term manganito was not confined to this
phase alone of the religious functions for the entire celebration
had the equivalent name naganito;*** a special ceremonial liquor, 47°
fermented from sugar cane and well-aged, was reserved for the
festival, and finally the religious activities were followed by a big
feast and drinking that closed the celebration.
The Pintados (Visayan) held a somewhat similar festival when they
began to till their fields, *** and on special occasions, such as in
sickness, before building and before going to war. At the Visayan
festival, human victims seem to have been sacrificed 42> much more
frequently than among the Tagal, though the killing of slaves for
the service of the dead was common everywhere. The Recollect
priests mention the Visayan custom of having antiphonal chanting *°
at their festivals, the alternation being between a number of men
and a number of women.
Among the Filipino tribes in general, both men and women *!
officiated as priests, just as with the wild people now, and the
altars at which the rites were performed could not have been very
different from those which are found in use among the Bagobo and
other pagan groups of the south. Offerings to the gods were laid
in little houses, and these hut-shrines*** were placed at the entrance
*20 Of, BoBADILLA: Relation...” 1640. Buarr and Ropertson: vol. 29, pp. 282—283.
1905. See also “Early Recollect Missions.” Op. cit., vol. 21, pp. 187—138. 1905.
“21 Cf. Carrino: “Relacion...” Op. cit., vol. 12, p. 270.
“22 Cf. PuasENciA: “Relation... ,” 1589. Op. cit., vol 17, p. 186.
*23 Of, ADUABTE: “Historia...,” 1640. Op. cit., vol. 30, pp. 186, 243. 1905.
“24 Of, M. pe Loakca: “Relacion de las Yslas Filipinas,’ 1582. Op. cit., vol. 5, p.
165. 1903. See also, “Karly Recollect Missions,” 1624. Op. czt., vol. 21, p. 203. 1905.
“25 Of. A. DE SAAVEDRA: “Voyage... 1527—1528.” Op. czt., vol. 2, p. 42. 1903. See
also, “Early Recollect Missions,” 1624. Op. cit., vol. 21, p. 203, 1905.
“26 Of, “Harly Recollect Mission,” 1624. Op. ezt., vol. 21, p. 203. 1905.
“27 Of, D, ADUsRTE: “Historia...,” 1640. Op. cit., vol. 30, p.. 248.
See also, “Legazpi expedition,” 1564—1568. Op. czt., vol. 2, p. 189. 1908.
See also, “Harly Recollect Missions,” 1624. Op. czt., vol. 21, p. 203. 1905.
428 Of, P. Cuirino: “Relacion...,” 1601—1604. Op. cit., vol. 12, p. 268.1904. See also,
260 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
to the villages, or in retired places in the forest. The essential
character of another kind of shrine was the white bowl or dish ***
that must have been very widely used in ceremonial. Aduarte,
the Bishop of Nueva Segovia, lays great stress on having destroyed
a great amount of fine earthenware that had been consecrated to
the uses of pagan worship, but was finally brought to the fathers
by converted Tagal natives. In 1604—1605, Chirino speaks of the
little plates that were used in making sacrifices at Tatai, near
Manila. At the rites of the Visayan, white china may have been in use
at least four hundred years ago, for Pigafetta, in his account of the
Magellan voyage, 1519—1521, describes a funeral ceremony at Cebu
where fragrant gums were burned in the dishes. “There are many
porcelain jars containing fire about the room, and myrrh, storax,
and bezoin, which make a strong odor through the house, are put
on the fire.” 4°°
In Mindanao, the use of good crockery for sacred purposes by
mountain tribes, whose own hand-made pottery is of the roughest
sort, strikes the investigator as a remarkable phenomenon, especially
when one notes how old and smoke begrimed the dishes are, and
how different in shape from those which are now sold to natives
in foreign shops at the coast. The earthenware in use at Bagobo
altars is of a heavy quality, though always white; whereas Aduarte
seems to have found fine porcelain used at Tagal shrines. **!
The Filipino tribes of the north were the first, presumably, to
acquire such dishes from Chinese traders, who came often with
merchandise to the Islands. Later, the use of china bowls and
saucers as receptacles for offerings at shrines may have been either
transmitted by the Filipino to more southern tribes, or introduced
directly by the Chinese at the coast of Mindanao. Such dishes would
quickly have supplanted for ceremonial use the rough black ware
or the cocoanut-shell bowl.
We find records that betel was offered at Filipino shrines, though
it is not stated whether the areca-nuts were placed in the white
bowls. Manufactured products, as has been noted, were also cere-
monially presented to the gods.
ibid., vol. 18, p. 72. 1904. See also D. Apuarte: “Historia.” 1640. Op. cit., vol. 31,
p. 155. 1908.
“29 On. cit., vol. 30, pp. 186, 248. See also, P. Currino: doc. cit., p. 72.
“30 Op. cit., vol. 34, pp. 173 —175.
*31 Op. cit., vol. 80, p. 248.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 261
As for the places at which the informal ceremonial was conducted,
anything like a permanent temple seems to have been rare. Morga 4”
and others state that every person organized his family worship in
his own house. Little rooms especially dedicated to anito were found
by Chirino,*** and records of oratories in caves were brought to
light by Rizal. ***
The term anito was in use among the Visayan as far back as
the voyage of Saavedra, 1527—1528,** and for how many cen-
turies before that time, we do not know. We have already men-
tioned various interpretations of the word anito, as understood by
the Tagal, the Visayan and the wild tribes. One interesting point
in this connection is, that the care of the Bagobo to have all
torches extinguished at manganito**® is echoed in a note by a
Recollect Father, who says that the Visayan had a tabu against
lighting fires when a priestess entered for official purposes. ***
Turning from the ceremonial to popular beliefs and customs, we
find the names of a number of demons that are identical with those
feared by the mountain tribes. The Patianak *** represented either
the spirit of an unborn child, or of.a woman who had died in
childbirth, and consequently was conjured at the time of a woman’s
trial. Wood-demons identical with the Bagobo S’iring were be-
lieved to bewilder people in the woods and to leave them half
dead.**° The Tigbalag, or Tigabalang,**° of the Filipino answers
exactly to the Tigbanuda of the Bagobo. The asuang is not found
among the Tagal, but even to-day is dreaded by the Visayan,
Catholic though he be, and, as has been shown, the asuang**! is
almost identical with the Bagobo buso. Sacred thickets *** and single
“32 Cf. “Sucesos,” 1609. Bruate and RoBertson: op. cit., vol. 16, p. 132. 1904.
“33 Cf. “Relacion...,” 1604. Op. cit., vol. 12, p. 267. 1904.
“2% Cf. Rizal’s note to Morga’s “Sucesos’’, op. cit., vol. 16, p. 182.
“*° Cf. “Voyage of Alvaro de Saavedra.” Op. cit., vol. 2, pp. 36—43. 1908.
*2°See pp. 195, 202 of this paper.
“7 Of. “Karly Recollect Missions,” 1624. Briain and Roperrson: op. cit., vol. 21,
p- 207. 1905.
“22 Of. J. M. pe Ziiitea: “The people of the Philippines.” 1803. Op. cit., vol. 43,
pp. 125—126. 1906. See also T. Ortiz: “Superstitions and beliefs of the Filipinos,” ca.
1731. Idid., vol. 43, p 107. See also J. pe Prasencta: “Customs of the Tagalogs,” 1589.
Ibid., vol. 7, p. 196. 1903.
“9 Cf. D. ApusRTE: “Historia... ,” 1640. Op. cit., vol. 30, p. 293. 1905.
**° Cf. J. M. DE Zuntea, loc. cit., p. 126.
**1 See pp. 40, 42—43 of this paper.
**2 Cf. P. Cutgino: “Relacion de las Islas Filipinas.” 1604, Buarr and RoBERTSON:
262 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
trees were pointed out by all Filipino as objects appropriated by
some divinity or by some demon, and the baliti held a unique place
among other trees.
The omens regarded throughout Mindanao used to be of equal
concern to the Tagal and Visayan: such as the ery of limokun; **
the chance meeting with a lizard or a snake;**+ a sneeze at the
beginning of an undertaking; ** the significance of an eclipse **° of
the moon, and so on through a long line of folk traditions. The
crow *#" and certain other birds*#® were regarded by the Tagal as
sacred. ‘The place where lost articles were concealed *° could be
discovered by the bending of a flame in that direction. The con-
stellations were referred to for setting dates.4°” The ordeal was
resorted to for proving guilt and innocence.**' Vital parts of a
slain man were eaten to secure qualities of strength and valor. *°
The use of magical spells, *°? the black art, the carrying about the
person of small objects with which to harm a foe, the counteracting
op. cit., vol. 18, p. 72. 1904. See also various references in “Early Recollect Missions,”
1624, Jbid., vol. 21. 1905. See also pp. 115—116 of this monograph.
“#3 Of. D. ApUARTE: “Historia...,” 1640. Burarr and Roperrson: op. cit., vol. 30,
p- 287. 1905. See also “Harly Recollect Missions,” 1624. Jézd., vol. 21, p. 205. 1905.
“** Of, J. DE MeEnpoza: “History of the great Kingdom of China,” 1586. Op. cit.,
vol. 6, p. 147. 1903. See also, P. Cuirino: “Relacion...” 1604. Ibid., vol. 12, p. 267.
1904.
“*5 Cf, P. Curerno, doc. cit. See also M. pE Loarca: “Relacion...,” 1582. Op. cit.,
vol. 5, p. 165. See also D. Anuarte: “Historia...” 1640. /did., vol. 30, pp. 287—288.
1905.
“*6 OF, T. Ortiz: “Superstitions and beliefs of the Filipinos.” ca. 1731. Op. cit., vol.
43, p. 112. 1906.
“«7 Of, P. Currino: “Relacion....” 1604. Op. cit., vol. 12, p. 265. 1904.
“*8 OF P, Cutrino, loc. cit. See also “Barly Recollect Missions,” 1624. Op. ctt., vol.
21, p. 138. 1905.
“*9 Of, T. Ortiz: “Superstitions...,” ca. 1731. Op. cit., vol. 48, p. 109. 1906.
“580 Cf, M. DE Loarca: “Relacion...,” 1582. Op. ci¢., vol. 5, p. 165.
“51 OF, J. Riza (note to Morga’s “Sucesos.”) Op. cit., vol. 16, p. 128. 1904.
“52 Of. A, Picarerra: “First voyage round the world, 1519—1522.” Op. cit., vol. 38,
p. 243. 1906. See also, J. pp Prasencra: “Customs of the Tagalogs,” 1589. Jdid., vol. 7,
p- 193. 1903.
*63 Of. the following and many other references. M. pe Loarca: “Relacion ... ,” 1589.
Op. cit., vol. 5, p. 163. 1903.
L. pe Prasencta: “Customs of the Tagalogs,’ 1588—1591. Jdid., vol. 7, p. 192. 1903.
P. Currmo: “Relacion...” 1604. Jbid., vol. 13, p. 81. 1904.
“Karly Recollect Missions,” 1624, Zéid., vol. 21, pp. 211, 314. 1905.
D, Apuarte: “Historia...” 1640. Zsid., vol. 30, pp. 179—180. 1905.
T. Orviz: “Superstitions and beliefs...,” ca. 1731. bid., vol. 43, pp. 109—110, 1906.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 263
of one spell with another — these are recorded of the Filipino
everywhere, and survive among the Tagal, at least, to-day ;*°* but
of course only the details of such magical arts would have any
value in comparison, since magic is found the world over.
The accounts of Chirino, ** of Loarea, 4°° of Aduarte 4°? and others,
show that both Tagal and Visayan buried the dead in the ground,
either under the house or in the open field; that clothing, food
and valuables were buried with the dead for their use in the lower
world and in the journey thither; that slaves were regularly slain
at the death of chiefs and of other distinguished individuals, or,
more commonly, the slave was buried alive with the body of his
master.*°° The soul was thought to go down below to a good
place, *°® where a desirable existence without either reward or
punishment *°° could be expected. On memorial occasions, food in
small bamboo boats was sent to the dead — apparently, in real
miniature vessels that were actually let loose in the water. 4°!
We have no record of the details of religious ceremonies at mar-
riage among the early Filipino, but social regulations in regard to
marriage seem to have agreed, in many respects, with those that
exist among the Bagobo: such as the generally prevailing monog-
amy, except in case of chiefs; regulations in regard to dowry or
marriage price; conditions attached to the division or the return of
property in case of divorce, the crucial point being that the one
who initiates the separation, or is found at fault, is at a great dis-
advantage in the property settlement. *°? We are not here consid-
“9" Of, J. Nuiinz: “Present beliefs and superstitions in Luzon.” 1905. Brarr and
RoBeERTSON: op. cit., vol. 43, pp. 3L0—319. 1906.
“°° Op. cit., vol. 12, pp. 302—3038. 1904.
458 Op. ctt., vol. 5,.p. 135. 1903.
*°7 On. cit., vol. 30, pp. 292—293, 1905.
“°3 Cf. D, ArtrEDA; “Relation of the western islands...,?’ 1573. Op. cit., vol. 3, p.
199. 1903. See also, Lecaspr: Jbid., vol. 2, p. 182. 1908. See also, J. M. pp Ziifitca:
“The people of the Philippines.” 1803. Jé7d., vol. 43, pp. 126—127. 1906. See also,
J. DE Prasencta: “Customs of the Tagalogs,’ 1589. Jdid., vol. 7, p. 195. 1908. For
other references, see p. 189 of this paper.
“59 Cf. D. DE ARTIEDA, Joc. cit.
“60 Of. J. M. DE Zufitca, loc. cit.
“8. Cf. “Karly Recollect Missions,” 1624. Op. czt., vol. 21, p. 209. 1905.
“62 Cf. P. Currino: “Relacion ...” 1604. Op. czt., vol. 12, pp. 2983—296. 1904. “Early
Recollect Missions,” 1624. Jdid., vol. 21, p. 211. 1905. A. pp Morca: “Sucesos...”
1609. Idid., vol. 16, pp. 124—125. 1904. M. pe Loarca: “Relacion...” 1582. Idid.,
vol. 5, pp. 177—178. 1903. D. Apuarre; “Historia...” 1640. Zbid., vol. 30, p. 297.
1905.
264 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ering social regulations, or ethical factors; but were such to be
listed we should at once note that the blood-feud,*°* the attitude
of the community toward theft, 4°* customs of rinsing the mouth, *%°
of filing the teeth,*°° and so forth, are common to the Filipino
and the Bagobo, and many such customs might be checked up.
The Filipino, too, had the equivalent of the bagani, for the
Tagal man of valor was set off by special marks of distinction,
particularly in the wearing of the red kerchief called potong, the
use of which was permitted to him only who had killed at least
one man, special prowess, as well as chieftaincy, being indicated
by the color of the cloth. Probably the word translated as “color”
means shade or tint, a rendering that would bring this use into
harmony with the prevailing custom in the south, where the number
of men killed is indicated by the darker or lighter shade of the
chocolate-colored tankulu. 4°
In certain directions, however, the Filipino had developed his
religion along lines distinct from those followed by the Bagobo.
Foremost in importance was the universal usage of making images *°°
of stone, wood, bone, gold, ivory and crocodile’s teeth, and of
setting up such images in shrines or in houses to serve as permanent
idols which were afterward passed down by inheritance; whereas
the Bagobo custom is to carve rough images from soft wood just
as they are needed for each ceremonial occasion. Furthermore,
these images do not parallel the idols of the Filipino, for those, as
many documents show, were made in representation of the anito,
and as such received homage, while the Bagobo figures have a
purely magical function, and that a temporary one.
The custom of tattooing,**’ which may have had a magico-reli-
“2 Of. “Karly Recollect Missions.” Biair and Roperrson: Zoc. cit., p. 208—209.
“8° Cf. D. ApuartTE: “Historia...” 1640. Op. cit., vol. 32, p. 200. 1905.
“ee OF. P. Cumrino: “Relacion...” 1604. Op. cit., vol. 12, pp. 186—187. 1904.
“68 Cf. P. Cumino, loc. cit., p. 187.
“°7 Cf. J. Riza, note to Morga’s “Sucesos.” Op. cit., vol. 16, p. 76. 1904. See aiso,
D. Apuartre: “Historia...” 1640. Ldid., vol. 30, p. 296. 1905. See also, “Harly Recollect
Missions,” 1624. Jdid., vol. 21, p. 213. 1905.
“°° Of. the following passages.
A. Pigarerra: “First voyage... 1519—1522.” Op. cit., vol. 33, pp. 165, 167. 1906.
Menvoza: “History of... China,” 1583—1588. Jdid., vol. 6, p. 146. 1908.
P. Curemo: “Relacion...” 1604, Jbid., vol. 12, pp. 265—270; 272—275. 1904.
“Karly Recollect Missions.” 1624. Jdid., vol. 21, pp. 314—315, e¢ cet. 1905.
“°° Of. P. Currino, loc. cit. vol. 12, pp. 205—206. D. Apuarre, Zoc. cit., vol. 80,
p. 292; A. Moraa, doc. cit., vol. 16, p. 72; Antrepa, Joc. cit., vol. 8, p. 200.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 265
gious significance in all cases, as we know it to have had in the
painting of certain figures, was so widespread a custom among the
Visayan that the Spaniards gave them the name of Pintados. In
my work with the Bagobo, I saw only a few cases of tattooing,
and they said that an Ubu (Ata) man, from a place in the far
north, had done the work.
In many Filipino groups, there was a more distinctly devotional
attitude toward the sun, the moon and the stars‘‘® than we find
among the Bagobo, so far as is indicated by the attention given to
certain constellations, to which they look for the setting of times
and seasons, and to which they give offerings at certain times.
The Filipino is said to have paid worship to the sun, the moon
and the stars, but the records are brief.
There seems, also, to have been a tendency toward some forms
of ancestor worship among the early Filipino of a more distinct type
than the mere placing of a few areca-nuts for the ghosts, with the
intention of driving them away. It is possible that the stronger
influence of the Chinese in the north may haye been a factor in
directing this tendency. It may be, however, that the impression
gained by Spanish missionaries in regard to the extent of ancestor-
worship throughout the Islands would have to be modified if all of
the facts were at our disposal. One of the Recollect Fathers says
of the inhabitants of the Visayas: “When they became sick, they
invoked their ancestors to aid them, as we do the saints.” 4‘! Now
the custom of placing offerings at shrines in order to induce the
dead to keep away from the living might easily lead astray an
observer with a theological bent of mind.*'* In fact, the dividing
line between ancestor-worship and magical spells intended to influence
the dead is so hazy that perhaps it is hardly fair to name this
custom as one peculiar to Filipino usage. A belief, perhaps unique,
“70 Of, Menpoza, loc. cit., vol. 6, p. 146; A. Morea, loc. cit., vol. 16, p. 131;
Recollect Missions, doc. cit., vol. 21, pp. 138, 202, 314.
“71 Brarr and Ropertson: op. cit., vol. 21, p. 207. 1905.
“72 Warneck seems to use the term as the Spanish writers used it; for he finds
ancestor-worship and soul-cults and fear of ghosts to be central elements in the religion
of all Malay people. He says: “Die Religion der heidnischen Bewohner des Indischen
Archipels zeigen im wesentlichen einen Typus. Mégen Zahl, Namen und Mythen der
Gétter differieren, bei allen malaiischen Vélkern ist der Ahnen- und Geisterdienst, auf-
gebaut auf animistischen Seelenvorstellungen, der gleiche; in allen ist Seelenkult und
Geisterfurcht, das Zentrale der Religion.” Jon. Warneck: Die Religion der Batak, p. 1,
1909.
266 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
was found by Aduarte among the Tagal, to the effect that their
departed ancestors would come to life again, and that they would
look to find the people faithful to old religious customs. 47°
While methods of treating the sick show a general similarity,
one peculiar custom seems to be local to Nueva Segovia — that
of killing a young child and bathing the sick person in its blood,
or of anointing the patient with the blood of a bird in place of
the infant’s blood. ***
The above points are noted as fairly representative of numerous
religious customs and beliefs that doubtless could be cited as
evidence of variation from that great body of tradition which prob-
ably dominated the entire archipelago in prehistoric times. In
spite, however, of local differences and even of important peculiari-
ties, there still remains the fact of the existence of a mass of
ceremonial rites and magical usages common alike to Filipino and
Bagobo, and perhaps to a great number of mountain tribes in the
north and in the south. A range of ceremonies that reaches from
central Luzon to southeastern Mindanao, through groups where
transfusion of ideas would be an easy process, surely casts doubt
upon any hypothesis of imdependent local development in single
groups. The student is impelled to look for some common origin
that may date back even to a pre-migration period, and to recog-
nize, also, a development modified by a marked degree of dissem-
ination within the Philippines of ritual forms and of religious
practices. In this connection, Rizal’s historical comments on the
interrelations between the tribes in Spanish times are in point.
“This fundamental agreement of laws, and this general uniformity,
prove that the mutual relations of the islands were widespread,
and the bonds of friendship more frequent than were wars and
quarrels. There may have existed a confederation, since we know
from the first Spaniards that the chief of Manila was commander-
in-chief of the sultan of Borneo. In addition, documents of the
twelfth century that exist testify the same thing.” 4
In any attempt to trace the mythology and rites of these island
tribes back to a common origin, we are at a profound disadvantage
because of our great lack of native Filipino documents. Although
“78 Cf. D. Aduarre: “Historia...” 1640. Brarr and Roperrson: op. ecit., vol. 30,
pp. 290, 292, 293. 1905.
“7* Of. D. Apvuarre: “Historia...” 1640. Op. cit., vol. 32, pp. 42—48, 55. 1905.
“7° Brark and Ropertson: op. cit., vol. 16, p. 121. 1904 (a note by Rizal to Morga’s
“Sucesos’’).
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 267
the Tagal and Visayan were possessed of an alphabet, and were
accustomed to writing with a point of metal on palm-leaves and
on the inner sheath of bamboo, they had preserved few, if any,
written records of their mythology and ceremonial practices.*'° It
was largely by oral tradition that each generation became acquainted
with ancestral myths, and under the tremendous pressure of the
new religion let down on them by Spain these oral traditions were
slowly smothered. Origin myths disappeared ; folk-stories vanished,
and tribal narratives that might have thrown light on the historical
development of the ceremonial passed out of existence. *’? In ref-
erence to this unfortunate situation, Rizal says: “The ancient
traditions made Sumatra the original home of the Filipino Indians.
These traditions, as well as the mythology and genealogies men-
tioned by the ancient historians, were entirely lost, thanks to the
zeal of the Religious in rooting out every national pagan or idol-
atrous record. 4*5
The material before us indicates that the religion of the pre-
Spanish Filipino and that of the present day Bagobo have more
points of essential agreement than of difference, and may point to
a common origin. From the Bagobo, we get no help in seeking
for the source of the ceremonial, for according to Bagobo tradition
both their own tribe and the neighboring tribes were aboriginal to
Mindanao. Here, again, a comparative study alone may throw
light upon the problem. Throughout the present discussion, various
types of religious behavior among the Bagobo have found their
analogies in the peoples of the mainland on the other side of the
south China sea, as shown by the accounts of Martin, Skeat and
others. The geographical position of the Philippine Islands, as well
as manifest resemblances in material culture between the Islands
“76 OF, KE. G. Bourne: Historical introduction to Blair and Robertson: The Philippine
Islands, vol. 1, p. 44, and footnotes from Spanish and French documents. 1908.
*77 Since writing this paragraph, there has come to hand Beyer’s “Origin Myths
among the Mountain People of the Philippines,” in which be calls attention to the dis-
covery of ancient Filipino manuscripts in a cave in Negros. He says: “Until recent
years, it has been believed that all ancient records written in the syllabic alphabets
which the Filipinos possessed at the time of the Spanish conquest had been lost. It is
now known, however, that two of these alphabets are still in use, to a limited extent,
by the wild peoples of Palawan and Mindoro; and ancient manuscripts written in the
old Bisaya alphabet have lately been discovered in a cave in the island of Negros.
Many of these Negros manuscripts are written myths, and translations of them are
shortly to be published.” Philippine Jour. Sci., vol. 8, p. 35. April, 1913.
*7® An annotation by Rizal to A. Morga’s “Sucesos.” Op. cit., vol. 16, p. 74. 1904.
968 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
and the peninsula of Malaysia, suggests a brief comparison of the
religious elements in the two areas.
Certain constant factors in worship that appear pretty regularly
in the religious system both of the Bagobo and of several penin-
sular tribes seem to indicate a relationship — that is to say, so far
as those religious practices that are fixed below the veneer of Islam
are concerned. In addition to the points that have already been
noted in our treatment of Bagobo ceremonial and mythology, other
similarities may now be considered.
Observances in sowing 4** and in reaping **? and the magical spells
employed to ensure the success of rice crops in Malacea, while
forming a much more elaborate complex than the simple Bagobo
ceremonies, carry the same spirit and offer a lke plan in the
general form. We may note, in particular, the following details:
the necessity of planting rice in early morning**! and at a set
season of the year; ** the platform altar erected in the rice-field
for offerings, *** and the branches surrounding it for magical pur-
poses; the gifts to the gods of textiles, rice, ete.,*** at harvest;
the ceremonial use of yellow rice stained with saffron;**> rules
regarding exactness in posture, movements**® and so forth. Of
course, a Malay ceremonial in Malacca is so overlaid with Moham-
medan ritual that the analogy is to be found rather in the whole
animistic attitude toward rice eulture than in identity of rites.
Perhaps the sacrifice of blood that Filipino tribes offered shortly
before the sowing, or at the time of tilling the fields, finds its
counterpart in the peninsular custom of sacrificing a goats" to the
arth hantu at the rice sowing season.
The ceremony of purification by water, which plays such an im-
portant part in Bagobo ritual, is common among peninsular Malays,
who have ‘annual bathing expeditions... which are supposed to
purify the persons of the bathers and to protect them from eyil.” #°°
“79 W. W. Skeat: Malay magic, pp. 218—228, 228—235. 1900.
“8° Cf. ibid., pp. 235—249.,
“81 Cf. tbid., pp. 218.
“82 Cf. tbid., p. 219.
“83 Cf, tbid., p. 281.
"e* Of. 461d., p. 287,
“86 Of, sbid., p. 2438.
“88 Cf, ibid., p. 248 et seq.
“87 Of. ihid., pp, 232, 28383 —234.
“88 Of. ibid., p. 81.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 269
Like the Bagobo, they resort to lustration in cases of sickness; at
weddings the ceremony of bathing the bride and the bridegroom is
present, and the essential ceremonial object in purification is a
medicine-brush made up of a wide variety of magic plants by
means of which rice-paste is applied to the candidate, *%° just as
water is poured from the green sagmo bouquet in the Bagobo rite
of Pamalugu at the river. At first sight, perhaps it might seem
that lustration by water held no noteworthy place in Filipino rites,
or some record of such custom would have been made by the
missionaries; yet it is also true that purification ceremonies might
not have come forcibly to the attention of the Fathers for the
reason that ritual bathing, if it were like the same rite among
wild people, would not have involved accessories of permanent value,
such as religious zeal was hunting down for destruction. A bunch
of magic twigs and leaves would hardly be brought to a priest,
along with a white china dish.
That peculiar form of shrine called tambara that is used every-
where by the Bagobo, and apparently was a frequent type of altar
among some of the Filipino groups in their pagan days, consists
of a slender rod of bamboo split at the upper end to hold a dish
for offerings. A shrine of essentially the same type was found by
Sir W. Maxwell at several /kramats in Perak, the shrines being
formed by little stands made of bamboo rods, one end being “stuck
in the ground and the other split into four or five, and then opened
out and plaited with basket work so as to hold a little earth,” on
which incense is burned.4°” From this account, it would appear
that if the dish were ever an element of the shrine, it has now
gone out of use. Small pieces of white cloth are used by the Perak
Malays as votive offerings, just as white cotton textile is a favorite
gift to Bagobo gods,
Regarding the nature of the soul, the Bagobo and the peninsular
Malay, like primitive groups all over the world, fancy the soul of
man to be a tenuous, unsubstantial image or phantom *! that sep-
arates itself from the human body in sleep, in trance and finally
at death, and that functions during these absences like the physical
body. The Malay notion, however, of the soul as a manikin, or
“89 W. W. Skeat: Malay magic, pp. 77—80.
“9° OF, ibid., p. 67.
“91 OF, ibid., pp. 47—B0.
270 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
thumbling, is absent from Bagobo ideas, for they, on the contrary,
identify the soul with the shadow cast by the body. Skeat says
that the number of souls recognized by peninsular Malays is seven
in each human body; while animal and material objects are sup-
posed to haye souls*’? — a belief common to all Malays. Like
details in funeral customs may he noted: the arraying of the body
in fine material; *°* the observance of the wake; the measuring the
depth of the grave on the body of the digger; *** the placing of
the corpse with head toward the north;*° a burial exhortation
addressed to the deceased, to which he is supposed to listen with
close attention; *°° the funeral feast following the burial.
Popular folklore regarding sacred trees that are set apart as the
abode of hantu**’ is practically the same in Malacca as through the
Islands. Current beliefs concerning the nature of patianak (mati-
anak) ;*°° the vampire (penangalan) that sucks the blood of children;
the significance of omens drawn from earthquakes, from eclipses,
from thunder, from lizards and snakes,*°* from the cries of certain
pigeons, of night-owls and of other birds that suggest traditional
associations °°? — these are but few of the great number of portents
and popular traditions that differ little in the two areas that we
are considering. We find also in Malaysia the use of the ordeal
by water, from which the thief is forced to emerge in proof of his
guilt. °°!
Bagobo custom in the matter of boring the ears of children
agrees with the peninsular Malays rather than with Sumatra, for
the ears of Bagobo babies less than a year old are pierced. If it
were eyer a ceremony of adolescence, it is not now so regarded.
Concerning this matter, Skeat says: “The ear-boring ceremony
(bertindek) appears to have lost much of its ceremonial character in
Selangor, where I was told that it is now usually performed when
the child is quite small, i.e. as the earliest, when the child is some
“92 W. W. Sxrat: Malay magic, p. 52.
*93 Of, ibid., pp. 397—398.
“9% Of, thid., p. 405.
“95 CF. ibid., p. 401.
+96 Of, ihid., pp. 406—408.
“97 Cf, ibid., pp. 208—217.
*98 Of, tbid., pp. 320, 325—327.
“99 Of. ihid., pp. 582—535.
$00 OF, ibid., p. 354.
601 Of, ibid., pp. 542—544.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 271
five or seven months old, and when it is about a year old at the
latest, whereas in Sumatra (according to Marsden) it is not performed
until the child is eight or nine.”°°* The filing of teeth in Ma-
laysia is purely an adolescent ceremony, but the Bagobo boy under
ten years old may often be seen with filed teeth. The discarding
of ear-plugs by a girl at marriage is the custom in Malaysia, but
it is not so in the Bagobo country, for I knew many married
women who wore their ear-plugs.
Attention has been called, during the present discussion, to cere-
monial and myth and religious customs throughout the Hast Indies
— in Sumatra, in Nias, in Sarawak, in East Borneo, in Minahassa
and elsewhere in Celebes — which correspond very closely with
Bagobo ceremonial and myth and religious customs, or are even
identical with them. °°? In particular, the pagan tribes of Sarawak
have a ceremonial of peculiar interest for the present question.
Among the Berawan, slaves are killed at the death of a chief, and
the sacrifice is made a group sacrifice, just as with the Bagobo,
everyone present being allowed to give a spear-thrust to the un-
fortunate victim. Certain ceremonial details that characterize the
Bagobo Ginum, and which are not mentioned in the accounts of
Filipino rites, are noted by Furness of the proceedings at the return
of a Kenyah and Kayan war expedition.®°* Among these ritual
details are the decorating of the ceremonial poles by shaving off
the outer sheath into curled frills that extend down the entire length
of the pole; the cooking of rice in bamboo joints by a steaming
process, and the tabu on earthen pots for this ceremonial cooking ;
the substitution of the blood of a fowl for a newly-taken head; the
placing of wooden effigies by the path near the festival house; the
declaration of exploits by the warriors; the festival songs and the
dances and feasting. All of these elements, and others that have
previously been considered, give the impression of a celebration not
at all unlike the Bagobo Ginum.
Were it possible to make a full comparative analysis of rites and
myths that would be representative of the entire Malay area, it
might be discovered that no single religious custom or belief is
peculiar to the Bagobo. At present, there are many myths and a
504 Of, ibid., p. 359.
503 See pp. 38, 87, 45, 47, 64, 75, 90, 94, 96, 107, 1183—114, 160, 161 of this paper.
50% Of, W. H. Furness: The Home Life of Borneo Head-hunters, pp. 90—92. 1902.
272 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
number of ceremonial elements characteristic of Bagobo tradition
and Bagobo worship that have not as yet been reported from other
Malay peoples.
Perhaps the most striking of these characteristic elements is the
treatment of the sugar cane liquor at the agong ceremony, and also
on the last night of Ginum, during the rites before the balekat.
The old men stir the balabba with a green spray and dip out a few
drops with a leaf spoon having a knotted handle. The officiating
functionary offers the sacred liquor to the gods with these words:
“Do you take the first draught, and we will drink the rest.” The
part which balabba plays in the ceremonial suggests the cult of the
soma in Indian rites, and the Iranian cult of the sacred haoma.
Many passages in the Vedas and in the Avestas contain allusions
to ceremonies associated with the sacred liquor. °°
Another feature of Bagobo worship that has a distinetly Indo-
Iranian flavor is the use of a cluster of medicinal branches and
leaves for the lavations at the river. Lines of frequent occurrence
in the Vendidad refer to the bunches of sacred twigs bound up
with a vegetal tie. This is the Baresma,°°’ which is one of the
essential instruments in the purification of the body, at the offering
of sacrifice and when reciting the prayers. This element of puri-
fication occurs also, as has been noted, in Peninsular rites; but there,
too, it may haye a non-Malay origin. Swettenham inclines to the
opinion that seyen hundred years ago the faith of Malaya was a
form of Brahmanism, which had succeeded the original form of
spirit worship. °”
Other ceremonial elements which may, perhaps, hark back to
an Aryan source are the attitude toward the creator of the world
and of man;°"S the importance of making the agricultural or blood-
*¢5 Cf J. Darmesrerer (tr.) “The Zend-Avesta: pt. 1, The Vendidad.” The sacred
books of the East, vol. 4, pp. 61, 74, 126, 169, 212, 289. 1895. Cf. also, P. Pererson
(ed.): Hymns from the Rigveda, pp. 26, 46, 57, 119. 1888.
506 Of, J. DarMESTETER (tr.): op. ctt., p. 22. (Editor’s note): “The Baresma (now
called barsom) is a bundle of sacred twigs which the priest holds in his hand while
reciting the prayers.” Cf. also ibid, p.° 215. “The priest shall cut off a twig of
Baresma... The faithful one, holding it in his left hand, shall keep his eyes upon it
without ceasing, whilst he is offering up to the Ahura Mazda... the high and beautiful
golden Haomas...” See also p. 150. “You shall wash your bodies three times, you
shall wash your clothes three times... you shall bind up the bundles of Baresma, you
shall bring libations to the good waters...” See also pp. 214—215, 367 e¢ cet.
607 Of, Malay sketches, p. 192. 1908.
£08 Of, J. DARMESTETER (tr.): op. cit., p. Ixiv.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 273
less offering, as well as the bloody sacrifice;°*”’ the virtue of the
sacrifice for curing sickness and for securing material goods; °!” the
cleansing and generative power of the waters;°'! the celebration of
a festival during the bright fortnight of the moon. These and
other ritual aspects make one feel that the last word has not been
said when all the single Malay characters in worship have been
exactly compared and checked up.
Yet, after all, it is in hearing Bagobo songs recited and in
listening to Bagobo romantic tales that one is conscious of a pre-
vailing Hindu atmosphere. Without going too much into detail in
the direction of the myths, since a careful analysis of episodes
cannot be included within the limits of this discussion, there may
be named a few constantly recurring elements: such as methods of
magical manipulation; certain regularly appearing personalities;
distinguishing marks of exalted individuals; the character of con-
ventional incidents that are repeated so often as to form the woof
of mythical situations — all these methods of literary treatment
characterize Bagobo song and story as they characterized the Sagas
of ancient India, though the respective settings are very different.
As illustrations of this characterization, we might name, particularly,
the stress laid on the distinction of chaste men and of virtuous
women, from whose bodies rays of light emanate, and on whose
heads are halos inseparable from them;°!* the auspicious marks on
the bodies of semi-divine heroes; %!* the essential coérdination be-
tween rich apparel and a pure and lovely character;°'* the dis-
appearance of thirst and of hunger on attainment of the divine
nature;°'® the appearance of celestial women from trees in which
are cities or palaces; °1° the growth to partial maturity at the moment
of birth;°'? a magical covering of physical distance by flight through
the air,*'S or in response to a mental suggestion; the summoning
509 Of, J. DARMESTETER (tr.): op. cit., p. 1xil.
510 Of tbid., p. 81.
511 Cf, ibid., pp. Ixxx, lxxxi, 87, 282. Cf. also, R. T. H. Grirriru (tr.): The hymns
of the Atharva-Veda, vol. 1, pp. 87—38, 43—44.
512 Of, SomapEva: The Katha sarit sagara; tr. by C. H. Tawney, vol. 1, pp. 121,
166, 415, 418; vol. 2, p. 246. 1880—1884.
513 Of. ibid., vol. 1, pp. 25—26, 189; vol. 2, p. 141.
514 Cf. ibid., vol. 1, p. 333; vol. 2, p. 159.
515 (Cf. 207d.,, Vol. 1, p. 36.
518 Cf, ibid., vol. 1, pp. 121, 229, 574; vol. 2, p. 150.
517 Cf. tbid., vol. 1, pp. 119, 156.
518 Cf, ibid., vol. 1, pp. 142, 278, 327, 328, 344, 346, 457, 494.
18
274 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
of another by a mere thinking of him,°! and the accomplishing
of great exploits by a simple wish; the importance of auspicious
omens at the beginning of an enterprise; °°? metamorphosis into
other shapes;°*! the slaying of hundreds by one having magical
endowment *** and magic weapons; *** the averting of evil spirits by
conjuring the four cardinal points; the role of the bewildering charm
possessed by forest deities ;°** the behavior of the flesh-eating demons
called Rdkshasa; the characteristics of rapacious birds that have lances
for teeth and that prey upon man, and of demons that lose all power
on the approach of day, being dazed by the sunlight.°?? One might
extend such a list to great length.
This unmistakable Hindu tinge to Bagobo mythology seems to
imply a rather intimate association with Indian myth at some time
in Bagobo history, and suggests that the ancestors of the Bagobo
received their mythical impressions through indirect transmission
from Hindu religious teachers; and that, while clinging steadfastly
to the simple spirit worship or demon worship that probably under-
lies all Malay religions, they came to borrow, to assimilate and to
modify, until the complete fusion of Malay, Hindu and Buddhist
elements gave a new religious complex that was not all Malay, and
very far from being pure Indian in any phase.
Some of the elements just mentioned are obviously present, as
well, in Filipino myth and tradition, and that we fail to find there
such a deep impress of Indian influence as in Bagobo myth and
tradition may be due, wholly, to the extremely fragmentary character
of those vestiges of ancient religious practices which the Filipino now
possesses, and to the seantiness of the mythology recorded by the
missionaries. Diego de Bobadilla, writing in 1640, says: “AIl the
religion of those Indians is founded on tradition, and on a custom
introduced by the devil himself, who formerly spoke to them by
the mouth of their idols and of their priests. That tradition is
preserved by the songs that they learn by heart in their childhood,
649 Cf, SOMADEVA: op. cit., vol. 1, pp. 421, 436, 567.
#20 Of, ibid., vol. 1, pp. 127, 283, 285, 465, 490; vol. 2, pp. 160, 162.
621 Cf. ibid., vol. 1, pp. 46, 179, 389, 525; vol. 2, p. 168.
622 Cf, ibid., vol. 1, pp. 84, 455, 456.
$23 Of, ibid., vol. 1, pp. 69, 503, 559; vol. 2, pp. 150, 164, 172, 527.
52% Of, ibid., vol. 1, pp. 387, 439; vol. 2, p, 150.
25 Of, ibid., vol. 1, pp. 47, 60, 70, 167, 210, 268, 265, 338, 363—364, 572; vol. 2,
p. 164.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 275
by hearing them sung in their sailing, in their work, in their’
amusements, and in their festivals, and, better yet, when they
bewail their dead. In those barbarous songs, they recount the
fabulous genealogies and deeds of their gods...” °?° A record to a
like effect was made by a Recollect Father in Zambales, on the
west coast of Luzon. ‘Besides that adoration which they give to
the devil, they revered several false gods — one, in especial, called
bathala mey capal, whose false genealogies and fabulous deeds they
celebrated in certain tunes and verses like hymns. Their whole
religion was based on those songs, and they were passed on from
generation to generation, and were sung in their feasts and most
solemn assemblies.” 7?
The failure of the Filipmo to preserve in written form their
mythical epics and ceremonial recitations, coupled with the almost
complete extermination of the songs and stories that had passed
by word of mouth down through a great number of generations, °**
leaves us no means of drawing a comparison between the religious
literature of the Tagal and that of the Bagobo. We do not know
but that the vanished romantic myths of the Tagal, and of the
Visayan too, were characterized by the same literary quality as
the ulit and the ogan®*” that are sung or recited by the mountain
Bagobo of to-day.
If the wild tribes and the Filipino received the fundamentals
common to them all from the Indian archipelago, with which area
they share so many cultural traits, both material and religious, some
infiltration of Hindu elements into their rites and myths would
naturally be looked for, in view of the long occupancy of the
southern Malay islands by people from the mainland of India.
The more or less mythical chronology of the Javanese dates the
introduction of the Hindu religion into Java as far back as 149 A.D.,
or even earlier, since the first Indian prince is reputed to have
arrived at Java in the 75th year of our era.**? Crawfurd regards
these dates as presumably fabulous, and suggests the sixth century
as the earliest period to which, with any high degree of proba-
526 Brarr and Ropertson: The Philippine Islands, vol. 29, pp. 282—283. 1905.
527 Thid., vol. 21, pp. 137—138. 1965.
528 See, however, footnote 477, on the Negros manuscript.
529 The wt is an epic, or long mythical romance; while the ogaz is a short song,
ofteu accompanied by the guitar.
530 Cf. T. S. RaFFLes: History of Java, vol. 2, p. 67. 1817.
276 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF.SCIENCES
bility, the introduction of Hinduism into Java can be referred. °°!
He states, also, that western Sumatra was the first Malay insular
region to be influenced by the religion of India.*** Clifford has
reached the conclusion that the Hindu settled both Java and Sumatra
not later, probably, than the fourth century of our era. °°”
However traditional the period of first occupancy, and however
uncertain the dates given by native historians and the dates of the
inscriptions on the monuments, there must have been a gradual
extension of Indian influence for a very long time, and an enormous
opportunity for the dissemination of Hindu myth and of ceremonial
elements, even so far as those remoter parts of Java and Sumatra
that are said to have remained in “a state of complete savagery.” °**
For many ages, the dominant influence in the southern Malay is-
lands was Hindu, for Mohammedanism was not established in the
western part of the archipelago until 1320;°*° while Java, where
Hinduism had made the deepest impression, resisted the encroach-
ments of Islam successfully until the fall of her last capital in 1478. °°°
The period of Hindu rule in the Malay islands could not have been
less than six centuries, and probably covered a period of more than
ten hundred years. °**
A number of scholars have put forth the theory that the Philip-
pines, as well as the more southern islands, were anciently peopled
by an Aryan stock — an argument based on the physical type of the
mountain tribes, and on the fact that numerous Sanserit words are
found in various of the dialects of the Philippines. Another piece
of evidence sometimes quoted to establish this hypothesis is a paper
by the Chinese official, Chao Ju-Kua, who wrote, in the thirteenth
century, of the finding of numerous copper statues of Buddha
scattered in the forests of Luzon. °**
°31 Cf. A descriptive dictionary of the Indian Islands and adjacent countries, p. 185.
1856.
BAPAC I» A080; up se OUs
°39 Of, Clifford’s article, “Malays.” Encyclopaedia Britannica, 11 ed., vol. 17, p. 475.
1911.
634 Of, K. G. Jayne: “The Malay archipelago.” Encyclopaedia Britannica, 11 ed.,
vol. 17, p. 469. 1911.
©3° Cf, J, Crawrurp: History of the Indian archipelago, vol. 2, p. 221. 1820.
536 Thid., vol. 2, p. 85.
°37 Raffles says that in the ninth century the records of the native historians begin to
correspond in all essentials. Cf. History of Java, vol. 2, p. 64. 1817.
53° Cf, Chao Ju-Kua’s “Description of the Philippines.” (from his “Geography,” ch. 40
ca. 1280.) Buatr and Roperrson: op. cit., vol. 34, p. 185. 1906.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 277
This entire question, of course, is one that must be left to oriental
scholars; but, whatever the final conclusion in regard to a hypo-
thetical occupation of the Philippines by an Indonesian people, we
are in no wise dependant upon this theory for an explanation of
Indian elements in Bagobo myth, or for the presence of such ele-
ments in the religion of any other tribe in the Philippines. Even
setting aside the possibility of premigration influences, there are
records showing that a few centuries ago a much more intimate
relation *8° held between the Philippines and the East Indies than has
been the case since the Spanish occupation. More than that, if these
interrelations had been much less close, there would still have been
abundant opportunity for the diffusion of religious tradition and
story, from the most southern of the Spice islands to Mindanao, to
the Visayas and to Luzon, so that we would surely look for a
blending of Malay and Indian material in the customs and the
ceremonies of these peoples of the Philippines.
Diffusion of myth and of ceremonial rites is a cultural phenom-
enon found occurring all over the world, throughout very extended
areas, and, as Professor Boas has repeatedly pointed out, diffusion
of any sort requires no large movements of peoples, but only such
continuous transmission of cultural elements through the agency of
individuals as may give opportunity for imitation, borrowing and
permanent assimilation.
As for the Bagobo, whatever the time and manner of their emi-
gration, they and the neighboring mountain tribes were in possession
of Mindanao long before Islam dominated the southern coast, and
the way was open for communication with the southern archipelago.
Their Malay heritage may easily have been enriched by increments
from Hindu Buddhism, during the long centuries that the great
Indian empire flourished in Jaya, in Sumatra and the adjacent islands.
The entire problem is an intricate one, and must remain open
until further research work in the Philippines and among the wild
tribes of the southern Malay islands shall have secured such de-
tailed records of ceremonial and such full collections of songs,
stories and folklore as to make possible an intensive study of this
entire area. A few general conclusions, however, may be drawn
from the material that has been presented in the preceding pages.
The religious culture of the Bagobo is essentially like that of
539 See footnote 475.
278 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
the entire Malay region, and in ceremonial usages, magic rites and
folklore there is to be observed a marked resemblance to the cere-
monial usages, the magie rites and the folklore of other pagan
tribes in the Philippines, in the interior of the Malay Peninsula
and on the islands of the Indian archipelago.
The close correspondence of Bagobo ceremonies and popular
beliefs to those of many other mountain tribes in the Philippines,
and to those of the Filipino in the times of pre-Spanish culture,
points toward a common origin in the fundamentals of religion,
and also to a very wide diffusion of religio-cultural elements through
a long period of time. Both the complex character of certain cere-
monial factors, and a geographical situation that would lend itself
to ease of diffusion, negative the hypothesis of parallel development,
as well as that of convergence. **”
Many Bagobo rites and myths answer, very closely, to corres-
ponding rites and myths in Celebes, East Borneo, Sarawak, Sumatra
and Nias. In particular, the higher ceremonial of the Bagobo, on
its sacrificial side, finds its counterpart in the ceremonial of several
tribes of Borneo.
There are still some peculiarities in ritual details and in a number
of other forms of religious response among the Bagobo that, with
our present knowledge, seem distinctive to this tribe and would
indicate a considerable degree of local variation that has proceeded
independently of the continuous transmission of cultural elements
from without. Only after we become acquainted with the detailed
ceremonial of the various groups concerned in our discussion, shall
we be able to pick out what is peculiar to one group and what is
common to all.
Several ceremonial factors offer a strong presumption of derivation
from Hindu sources; while in the mythical romances or epics, that
are recited by the Bagobo, there appears a literary quality sug-
gestive of an appreciable Indo-Ivanian infusion.
The influence of the Chinese seems to haye been less apparent
on the Bagobo than on the northern tribes, although the white
dishes in use at shrines are referable to the Chinese.
Contact with the Moro has given mythical episodes, perhaps,
°«° Of, Dr. Goldenweiser’s discussion of parallelism and convergence in his “The
Principle of Limited Possibilities in the Development of Culture.” Jour. Am. Folk-Lore ;
vol. 26, pp. 259—290. 1913.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH ~~ 279
which have been incorporated into Bagobo tales, while a few be-
liefs and magical practices may be referable to Moro influence;
but, considering that this contact has lasted for three or four centuries
and has had a decided effect on the material culture of the Bagobo,
it is remarkable that there has been no weakening of the ancient faith,
and no concession to Islam. **
Spanish Catholicism had no effect at all upon the mountain
Bagobo, and at the coast the ancient faith of the Bagobo has under-
gone but a superficial disturbance, while ceremonial observances
have remained fairly intact.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
3ENEDICT. Laura Watson. Bagobo Fine Art Collection. Am. Mus. Jour.,
vol. 11, pp. 1464—171. New York. May, 1911.
——. Bagobo Myths. Jour. Am. Folk-Lore, vol. 26, pp. 13—63. New York.
Jan.—March, 1913.
Bryer, H. Ortey. Origin Myths Among the Mountain Peoples of the Phil-
ippines. Philippine Jour. Sci., vol. 8, pp. 85—117. Manila. April, 1913.
Biarr, Emma HELEN AND RoBERTSON, JAMES ALEXANDER (eds.). The Philippine
Islands, 1493—1803. 54 vols. Cleveland. 1903—1909.
In this collection, the following are of special value for ceremonial,
and for religious tradition and customs.
Vol. 2. Voyage of ALVARO DE SAAvEDRA, 1527—1528.
Vol. 3. ArtieDA, DizGo bE. Relation of the Western islands called
Filipinas. 1573.
Vol. 5. Loarca, Miauen pr. Relacion de las Yslas Filipinas. [Arevalo.
1582. |
Vol. 7. Puasencria, Juan pe, O.S.F. Customs of the Tagalogs. Manila.
1589.
Vol. 12—13. Currino, PEpRo pr, 8.J. Relacion de las Islas Filipinas.
Roma. 1604.
Vol. 145—16. Morea, ANTONIA DE. Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas, Mexico,
1609; with notes from José Rizal’s edition. Paris. 1896.
Vol. 214. San NicoLas, ANDRES DE (and others). Early Recollect missions
in the Philippines... 1624.
Vol. 29. [Bopapria, Dizco pe, S. J.] Relation of the Filipinas Islands.
| 1640. |
Vol. 30. Anuvartr, Disco pe, O. P. Historia dela provincia del Sancto
Rosario de la Orden de Predicadores. Manila. 1640.
°41 Warneck found a like situation among the Batak of Sumatra. He says: “Im
Gegensatz zu vielen Vélkern der hinterindischen Inselwelt haben sie ihre politische und
religiose Selbstandigkeit gegeniiber dem von allen Seiten auf jene Volker eindringenden
Mohammedanismus zu bewahren gewusst.’’ Die Religion der Batak, p. 1. Leipzig, 1909.
280 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF. SCIENCES
Vol. 33—34. PiGareTTa, ANTONIO. First Voyage Around the World,
1519—22. ms. ca 1525.
Vol. 40. Cortn, FRANcisco, S.J. Native Races and Their Customs.
(From his Labor evangelica. Madrid. 1663.)
Vol. 40. Compés, FrANctsco. 8.J. The Natives of the Southern Islands. 1667.
Vol. 40. San AGustin, Gaspar DE,O.S. A. Letter on the Filipinos. 1720.
Vol. 40. San ANTONIO, JUAN FRANCISCO DE, O.8.F. The native peoples
and their customs. (From his Cronicas. Manila. 4738.)
Vol. 43. Cxorer, José Maria, 8.J. Letter... Talisayan, May 11, 1889. (From
Cartas de los PP. de la Compania de Jess. Manila. 41889.)
Vol. 43. GiIsBeRT, MaTEo, S.J. Letters... Davao, Jan. 4, Feb. 8, Feb. 20,
July 26, Dec. 24, 1886. (From ut supra.)
Vol. 43. MARTINEZ DE ZuniGa, Joaquin, O.S.A. The People of the Phil-
ippines. (From his Historia de las Islas Philipinas. Sampaloc. 1803.)
Vol. 43. Mors, Quirico, 8.J. Letter... Davao, Jan. 20, 1885. (From ut supra.
Manila. 41887.)
Vol. 43. Nuiiez, José. Present Beliefs and Superstitions in Luzon. Dec.
6, 1905. El Renacimiento; Supplement. Manila. Dec. 9, 1905.
Vol. 43. Ortiz, Tomas, 0.5. A. Superstitions and Beliefs of the Filipinos.
(From his Practica del ministerio. ca. 1731.)
Vol. 43. Pastextis, Pasio, 8.J. Extract from a letter... Manila, Apr. 20,
1887. (From Cartas de los PP. de la Compania de Jesus. Manila. 1887.)
Vol. 43. RosEtt, Pepro. S.J. Letter... Caraga, Apr. 17, 1885. (From wt
supra.)
Vol. 47. Perez, Dominco, O. P. Relation of the Zambals. Manila. ms. 1680.
Vol. 48. Mozo, ANTonio, O. S. A. Later Augustinian and Dominican
missions. Madrid. 1763.
BLUMENTRITT, FERDINAND. Die Bagobos. Globus, vol. 42, pp. 219—222.
Braunschweig. 1882.
——. Vocabulario mitologico. 1895. (Bound with Rerana, W. E.: Archivo
del biblidfilo filipino, vol. 2. Madrid. 1896.)
Brinton, DanreL G. Professor Blumentritt’s Studies of the Philippines.
American Anthropologist, n.s., vol. 1, pp. 122—125. Washington, 1899.
Cartas de los PP. de la Compania de Jestis de la mision de Filipinas. 9 vols.
Manila, 1877—1891.
CuirrorD, Hueu. In Court and Kampong: being Tales and Sketches of
Native Life in the Malay Peninsula. London. 1897.
CopRINGTON, Ropert Henry. The Melanesians: Studies in Their Anthropol-
ogy and Folk-lore. Oxford. 41891.
Cor, FAy-Cooper. The Bagobos of Davao Gulf. Philippine Jour. Sci., vol. 6,
pp. 127—136. Manila. 1914.
——. The Wild Tribes of Davao District, Mindanao. Field Museum of Nat-
ural History; anthropological series, vol. 12, n°. 2. Chicago. 1913.
CoMBES, Francisco, S. J. Historia de Mindanao y Jolo, obra publicado en
Madrid en 1667, y que ahora con la colaboracion del P. Pablo Pastells
saca nuevamente a luz W. E. Retana. Madrid. 41897.
CRAWFORD, JoHN. History of the Indian Archipelago. 3 vols. Edinburgh.
1820,
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 281
Crookr, WiLLIAM. The Popular Religion and Folk-lore of Northern India.
New ed. 2 vols. Westminster. 1896.
DARMESTETER, JAMES (tr.). The Zend-Avesta, part I: The Vendidad. 2d ed.
Oxford. 41895. Sacred books of the East, vol. 4.
Favre, Paun. Dictionnaire malais-frangais... Vienne. 1875.
ForBes-LrinpSAy, CHARLES H. A.: The Philippines under Spanish and Ame-
rican Rules. Philadelphia. 1906.
ForEMAN, JoHN. The Philippine Islands. 2d ed. New York. 1899.
Foxwortuy, Frep. W. Indo-Malayan woods. Philippine Jour. Sci., vol. 4, pp.
409—592. Manila. Oct. 1909.
FurNEss, WiitiAM Henry. The Home-life of Borneo Head-hunters. Phila-
delphia. 1902.
GARDNER, FLETCHER. Philippine (Tagalog) Superstitions. Jour. Am. Folk-Lore,
vol. 19, pp. 191—204. New York. 1906.
——. Tagalog Folk-Tales. I. [bid., vol. 20, pp. 104—116. 1907.
GisBERT, Mateo, S.J. Diccionario espafiol-bagobo. Manila. 1892.
GOLDENWEISER, A. A. The Principle of Limited Possibilities in the Develop-
ment of Culture. Jour. Am. Folk-lore, vol. 26, pp. 1459—290. New York.
July—Sept., 1915.
GRAEBNER, F. Kulturkreisen in Ozeanien. Zeitschrift fiir Ethnologie, Bd. 37,
pp. 28—53. Berlin. 41905.
GrirFitH, Ratpu T. H. (tr.). The Hymns of the Atharva-Veda. 2 vols.
Benares. 41895—1896.
——. (tr.). Hymns of the Rigveda. 2 vols. Benares. 41896—1897.
Happon, ALrrep C. Head Hunters, Black, White and Brown. London. 1901.
——. Reports of the Cambridge Anthropological Expedition to Torres Straits,
vol. V, VI. Cambridge, 1904—1908.
Hern, Ators Raimunp. Die bildenden Kunste bei den Dayaks auf Borneo.
Wien. 1890.
Jenks, ALBERT ERNEST. The Bontoc Igorot. Philippine Islands. Department
of the Interior. The Ethnological Survey: Publications, vol. 1. Manila. 1905.
Lanpor, A. Henry SAvAGE. The Gems of the East. New York and London.
1904.
Laurer, BertHotp. The Relations of the Chinese to the Philippine Islands.
Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections: quarterly issue, vol. 50, pp. 248—284.
Washington. 1907.
LoHEz, VENTURA FERNANDEZ. La religion de los antiguos indios tagalos.
Madrid. 1894.
MarspEN, WILLtAM. The History of Sumatra. London. 1811.
Martin, Rupotr. Die Inlandstimme der malayischen Halbinsel... Jena. 1905.
Minturneton, W. H. and MAxFIeLp, BerToN L. Philippine (Visayan) Superstitions.
Jour. Am. Folk-Lore, vol. 19, pp. 205—211. New York. 1906.
MopiGLiaANi, Evto. Un viaggio a Nias. Milano. 1890.
MontTANo, JosEPH. Voyage aux Philippines et en Malaisie. Paris. 41886.
NIEUWENHUIS, A. W. Quer durch Borneo: Ergebnisse seiner Reisen in den
Jahren 1894, 1896—97 und 1898—1900, unter Mitarbeit von M. Nieuwen-
huis, von Uxkull-Guldenbandt. 2 vols. Leiden. 41904—1907.
PETERSON, PETER (tr.). Hymns from the Rigveda. Bombay. 1888.
282 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
{AFFLES, THOMAS STAMFORD. History of Java. 2d ed. 2 vols. London. 4817.
XETANA Y GAMBOA, WENCESLAO EmILIo. Supersticiones de los Filipinos: un
libro de aniterias. Madrid. 1894.
Rivers, W. H. R. The Todas. London. 1906.
Rotu, Henry Linc. The natives of Sarawak and British North Borneo.
2 vols. London. 1896.
SALEEBY, NAJEEB M. Studies in Moro History, Law, and Religion. P. I.
Department of the Interior. The Ethnological Survey: Publications, vol. 4,
part 4. Manila. 41905,
Sarasin, PauL and Fritz Sarasin. Reisen in Celebes... 4893—1896 und
41902—1903. 2 vols. Wiesbaden. 1905.
SCHADENBERG, ALEXANDER. Die Bewohner von Sud-Mindanao und der Insel
Samal. Zeitschrift fiir Ethnologie, Bd. 17, pp. 8—37, 45—57.
SELIGMANN, C. G. The Melanesians of British New Guinea. Cambridge. 1910.
Skeat, WatrerR WiLiiAM. Malay Magic. London. 1900.
—— and BLAGDEN, CHAPLES OTTo. Pagan Races of the Malay Peninsula.
2 vols. London. 1906.
SomaDEVA: The Katha sarit sdgara; tr. by C. H. Tawney. 2 vols. Calcutta.
1880—1884.
STERNBERG, Leo. The Inao Cult of the Ainu. Boas anniversary volume
pp. 425—437. New York. 41906.
SWETTENHAM, FrRanK ATHELSTANE. Malay Sketches. 3¢ ed. London and
New York. 41903.
——. Vocabulary of the English and Malay languages. 2 vols. London.
1896—1901. vol. 4, 4th rev. ed. 1901.
Tuurston, EpGar. Omens and Superstitions of Southern India. London. 1912.
United States. Bureau of the Census: Census of the Philippine Islands. 4 vols.
Washington. 41905.
—— War Department: Annual report, 1908, vol. 7. Washington. 1909.
VENTURILLO, MANuEL Hugo. Manners and Customs of the Tag-banuas and
other Tribes of the Island of Palawan... tr. by Mrs. E. Y. MILLer. Smith-
sonian miscellaneous collections, vol. 48, pp. 514—558. Washington. 1907.
Warneck, Jon. Die Religion der Batak. Leipzig. 1909. (Religions-Urkunden
der Volker, hrsg. von Julius Boehmer, Abth. 3, Bd. 4.)
ipINGI NEE
Names of Authors and other Persons in Heavy-face Type.
Titles of Papers in SMALL CAPS.
Abaca, Musa textilis, see Hemp.
Abbeville, Sanson d’, Map by, 250-251.
Abog, god of the hunt, 23, 199.
Abuy, myth animal, 40, 62, 227.
Adolescence, Ceremonies of, 270-271.
Aduarte, Diego de, O. P., cited, 36, 39,
44, 80, 247, 248, 256, 258, 259, 260,
261, 262, 263, 264, 266, 279 (bibl.).
sthetic interests, 72-73.
tabu, 243-244.
Agong altar, see Sonaran.
ceremonial, see Sonar, Rite of.
containing water, 126, 127, 128,
130-131.
used as unit of barter, 84.
Agongs, Description of, 83-84.
in marriage ceremony, 181-182,
183, 184, 185.
Illustration of, 146.
Agongs, Manner of playing, 84-85.
Names of, 133, 146.
References to, 77, 98, 101, 102,
103, 104, 117, 144, 163, 164, 175,
176, 222, 245, 253.
Agricultural offerings, 8, 11, 89, 226,
253, 272-273.
Alang, a charm, 204, 231.
Alat, a charm, 182, 183, 184, 204, 207.
Ali, Datu, References to, 4, 5.
Altar shelf, 77, 91, 103.
Altars, see Shrines and altars.
American government, Bagobo attempts
to please, 97, 166, 186-187.
lady, First at Talun, 203.
Museum of Natural History, 208.
rites, Questions concerning, 110.
Americans ascend Apo without charms,
32.
5“2 Bagobo words used in this paper are accented on the penultimate unless an accent
mark is placed on some other syllable. The stress is usually very slight. The vowels have
in general their continental sounds (a as in ah, etc.), but « before a final m (ginum) is
regularly short, as in English numb, and unaccented @ before final x is almost lost. When
marked short, d, @, 7, 6, % are broadly equivalent to the same short vowels in English.
As for the diphthongs, a2 is sounded as in aisle; ¢ as in eight, aw like ow in now.
Initial Y in proper names (Yting) is like Z spoken rapidly and with little stress, or slurred
over; medial y is like English y, but is kept well back in the throat. All final vowels are
sounded. In regard to consonantal phonetic values, the surds ¢, p and /, and the sonants
d, 6 and g are given much as in English, but & and / are uttered rather explosively.
Velars, while stressed and explosive, are not sounded very low down in the pharynx. An
initial velar seems often to be cut off by stopping the breath. M and ~ follow the usual nasal
type. The combination zg is like xg in wing; under no circumstances is it sounded like
mg in single, unless a second g is added, as in the exclamation “Oh manggo!” (“Yes, indeed”).
L is given from the tip of the tongue, and with stress. R tends to be trilled. S is as in
the initial of sill. W is soft, as in bower. No attempt is made in this outline to indicate
by exact symbols the finer shades of Bagobo phonetics.
284
Americans created by Pamulak Manobo,
105,
Labor demands of, 5.
not wanted at Ginum, 202.
protected by Bagobo gods, 21, 29,
200.
Amulets, 206, 207.
Ancestors, Filipino beliefs concerning,
33, 63, 193, 194, 265.
Myths of Bagobo, 65-74.
Tabu on using names of, 239.
Animals, Death of, an omen, 98, 238,
246.
Domestic, 6, 44.
Fabulous, 31, 38-40, 227.
Magical potency of, 41, 217.
Souls of, 64, 270.
Tahu relating to, 45-46, 64, 238,
243.
Animistic conceptions, 18, 43-45, 268.
Anito addressed in worship, 115-116,
423, 125, 129.
Characteristics of, 28, 193-194.
Filipino ideas of, 39, 193, 194, 261.
Head of all the, 15, 140.
References to, 39, 100, 102, 103,
426, 159, 170, 204, 264.
seance, see Manganito.
Ankermann, B., 67.
Ansig, Datu, 169.
Anthropomorphic forms of Buso, 29,
34-38.
Anting-anting, 216.
Antiphons, 82, 184-185, 253, 259. See
also Ceremonial chant.
Antlers of Buso deer, Illustration and
symbolism of, 113.
Apo, Mount, 25, 31-32, 34, 168, 251.
ARCHIVO GENERAL DE INDIA, Map in,
251.
Areca nut as medicine, 196, 231, 233.
buried with body, 53-54, 190.
Ceremonial use of, 14, 30, 53, 62,
77, 88, 89, 90, 92, 93, 98, 101,
102, 103, 104-113, 119-120, 143,
151, 154, 168, 174, 177, 183, 184,
198, 209.
chewed by gods, 15.
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Areca nut, Dead restored to life by, 62.
References to, 69, 165, 166.
Spiritual essence of, 53-54,
Areca palm, Areca catechu, 80.
in lower world, dd.
Sprays of, used ceremonially, 88,
117, 420; 135, 15957498;
Arrows offered to the god, 23, 197, 199.
Artieda, Diego de, cited, 170, 263, 264,
279 (bibl.)
Aryan elements in Bagobo myth, see
under caption, Indian.
Ashes as cure, 231, 232.
Association, Charms by, 205, 208-217.
Asuang, Visayan demon, 40, 42-43,
255, 261.
Ata tribe, 29, 86, 105, 150, 265.
ATHARYA VEDA, Citations from, 34, 221,
273.
AVESTAS, Citations from, 20, 120, 189,
231, 272, 273.
Awas, Rite of, 62, 98, 102, 103, 104,
445, 198, 229.
Main, Account of, 141-113.
Preliminary, Account of, 105-141.
Supplementary, 105, 144.
Awi, 148, 149, 162.
Ayo, Datu, 78.
Babies carried in scarf, 86, 242.
grow tall magically, 72.
not found in time of the Mona, 66.
Sacral spots on, 218.
suckled in lower world, 56-57.
Tongue and eyelashes of, used for
charm, 213-214.
Weaning and feeding of, 57, 164.
Bagani, brave men, 10, 132, 144, 145,
254, 255, 256, 264.
Bagobo culture, 3-6.
genealogies, 251-252.
history, 5, 161-162, 251-252.
intermarriage with other tribes,
185, 186.
literature, 13, 69-74, 273-274, 275,
277. See also Ulit.
Bacono Myrus, Citations from, see
Benedict, Laura Watson.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 285
Bagobo objects not to be sold, 199.
religion
Characterization of, 6, 8-12.
Indo-Iranian elements in, 272-
276.
Lines of development of, 252.
Polytheistic character of, 13-29,
44-45,
Sacrificial character of, 8. See
also, Sacrifice, Human.
Similarity of, to Filipino relig-
ions, 257-267, 278.
Similarity of, to other wild tribes
of Mindanao, 253-257.
songs, 17, 18, 23, 69-71, 72, 164-
165, 192, 271, 273, 277. See also
Ceremonial chant; Chanting at
seunce.
stories
cited, 16, 31-32, 73-74.
References to, 7,16, 35, 192, 277.
Typical features of, 69-73.
tradition, Dawn of, 75. See also
Ulit.
Balanan, vessels for sugar cane liquor,
103, 149.
Balekat, hanging altar, 90-91, 104,
135, 137-138, 152, 163, 200, 201, 237,
272.
Balekayo, a variety of bamboo, 88, 99,
103, 114, 116, 120, 125, 126, 135-136,
149, 164.
Balinsugu, a demon, 29, 36-37, 199.
Baliti tree, Ficus, 33, 43, 48, 86, 254,
262.
Bamboo, Bambusa (Bagobo Kawayan).
Boxes and rice cases of, 42, 209,
221.
Ceremonial poles of, 10, 27, 76, 82,
83, 103, 104, 131-135, 147, 149,
152, 158-159, 162, 164, 198, 237,
2741.
Digging sticks of, 172-173.
Fence around shrine of, 174, 207.
Filipino ceremonial boats of, 63,
263.
Furniture of, 72, 100.
Sheath of, for writing, 267.
Bamboo, Trap of, 191, 228.
Use of, for shrine, 88, 269. See
also Tambara.
Use of, in house construction, 67,
90, 96.
Varieties of, 27, 181-132.
Vessels of, for ceremonial food,
76, 79, 103, 138, 139, 141, 149,
271.
Water flasks of, 101, 124.
Bamboos, All-knowing One of the, 199.
Banana, Musa sapientum, leaf a cure
for stings, 228-229.
not used for ceremonial dishes, 81.
References to, 49, 63, 67,188, 191.
trunk substituted for corpse, 32-33.
Bansag, 132, 147.
Bansalan, Bagobo town, 7, 95, 162, 203.
Datu of, 141, 148.
Bauua, the world, 255.
country of the dead, 54, 56-57.
Baranguy, 4, 258.
Baris, a plant, 198, 218.
Bark as medicine, 232, 234.
clothing, 66-67.
Barter, 84, 167.
Batak tribe, 47, 279.
Batatas edulis, see Camote.
Bathing (padigus), 183. For ceremonial
lavation, see Pamalugu.
Bawi, medicine, 204, 231. See also
Charms and magic; Disease and
healing.
Bed for guests, 100, 152.
Bees, Myths of, 22, 23.
smoked out by Bagobo, 163, 233.
sought for as food, 22-23.
Souls of, 64.
Sting of, 213, 228.
Beeswax, 22, 69, 163, 245.
Bejuco, see Rattan.
Bells, Ceremonial use of, 172, 198, 258.
References to, 22, 69, 184.
Benedict, Laura Watson, cited, 7, 16,
17, 30, 33, 35-36, 39, 40, 42, 43, 46,
47, 54, 57, 58; 61-62, 65, 67, 68, 69,
71, 72, 74, 88, 181, 192, 199, 208, 213,
214, 217, 249, 249, 279 (bibl.)
286 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Benua, peninsular tribe, 234,
Berawan, tribe of Sarawak, 160, 171,
274.
Betel, Piper betel, box, 22, 53, 54,176.
juice for embalming, 189.
leaf
buried with body, 53-54, 190.
Ceremonial use of, 41, 30, 34,
53, 88, 89, 90, 92, 93, 103, 104-
113, 149-120, 154, 154, 165,
166; 4685 474 “4755 176A,
183, 184, 191, 192, 198, 229,
261.
References to, 80, 117, 126, 188.
Ritual over, 80-81, 104, 153.
Spiritual essence of, 53.
Use of, in healing and charms,
196, 208, 218, 220, 231, 233.
Beyer, H. Otley, cited, 41, 45, 46, 47,
74, 267, 279.
Bia, First born daughter of the Mona
called, 67.
Noble lady of the myths called,
69; 70\0s732
Senora called, 199.
Bia nuts, 77, 100, 103, 189-140.
Bier, 189, 192.
Bikol tribe, 257.
Bila-an altar, 93, 173-174.
tribe, 46, 105, 118, 126, 150, 165,
185, 192, 242, 244, 950, 254, 256.
Bile of serpents as medicine, 213, 234.
Bird, Blood of a, to anoint the sick,
266.
dances, 86.
Metaphorical reference to, 71.
Nest of a, as medicine, 226, 232.
Rain called by a, 71.
Birds, as omens, 270. See also Limokun.
Fabulous, 31, 40, 47, 74, 214-215,
245, 274.
Souls of, 64.
Black magic, 213-214, 219-221.
men at the door of the sun, 67.
river of the lower world, 54, 55,
56, 59.
Blacksmith, Shrine at forge of, 27.
Blair, Emma Helen and Robertson,
James Alexander, cited, 4, 10, 16,19,
22, 26, 28, 33, 34, 36, 37, 39, 44, 49,
57, 58, 63, 66, 70, 80, 88, 92, 95, 116,
162, 167, 169, 170, 171, 475, 4178, 179,
185, 188, 189, 192, 193, 206, 217, 220,
221, 223, 246, 248, 250, 251, 252, 253,
254, 255, 256, 257, 258, 259, 260, 261,
262, 263, 264, 265, 266, 267, 275, 276,
279 (bibl.)
Blood, Bia not of Bagobo, 199.
feud, 10, 264.
of a bird, 266.
offered to a god, 11, 161, 169, 241.
Spitting of, 221.
Blumentritt, Ferdinand, cited, 16, 19,
23, 29, 33, 37-38, 280 (bibl.)
Boas, Franz, references to, 134, 188,
228, 277.
Boat, in Visayan rites, 63, 263.
shaped dishes, 81, 104, 106. See
also under Leaf dishes.
Bobadilla, Diego de, 8S. J., cited, 57,
259, 274-275, 279 (bibl.)
Bohol island, 40, 170.
Bongat, a charm, 221,
Borneo, Myths and traditions of, 33,
on, 4.000:
Rites and sacrifices in, 160, 171,
271, 278.
Sultan of, 266.
Tabu on names in, 239.
Taking heads in, 160, 161,471, 271.
See also Sarawak.
Borrowing of material objects, 182, 185.
of cultural elements and myth,
4173-174, 256, 257, 277.
See also Diffusion.
Bourne, E. G., cited, 267.
Bowls and plates used in worship,
see Ceremonial dishes.
Boy, Dead body of, left in the house,
492.
White-haired, appears in dream,
249.
Boys, Ceremonial food for, 138,140-144,
150.
Digging stick used by, 173.
Filing teeth of, 271.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH
Boys, Help given to Singan by, 117.
Part in sacrifice taken by, 77, 169.
Tabu on limokun for, 225, 241.
Bracelets of brass and shell
as charms, 108, 206.
as offering or gift, 154, 174, 184,
236.
References to, 147, 199, 242-243.
Brass industry, 6, 27-28, 69, 73.
wire, 69, 198.
Brinton, Daniel G., 280.
Bronze, 6, 83-84.
Buddha, Statues of, in Luzon, 276.
Bulla leaf, 71, 77, 142, 156, 176, 218,
253, 255.
Bukidnon, Rites of the, 253, 255.
Bungoyan, 99, 238.
Burden basket, 176, 191.
Burial, Filipino modes of, 189, 263.
Place of, 189, 192. |
Rites attending, 9, 186-192. |
Burning of medicine, 232.
over of the ground, 6, 171-172, 254.
Buso, Charms associated with, 102, 116,
187, 206-209, 214.
Classes and characteristics of, 29-
43, 187.
Diseases brought by, 123, 194, 223,
225-227.
Graphic representations of, 38.
Offerings and prayer to, 93, 104,
117, 146; |
Presence of, endangering ceremony,
92, 94, 96, 98, 103.
References to, 9, 11-12, 24, 25-26,
Dita, AS, 490 59°67; 10, 74;
92, 107, 110, 161, 163, 169, 186,
187, 192, 207-208, 255. See also
Tigbanua,. |
Buso-child, 208. |
Buso-deer, 113.
Buso-ghost, 60-61, 62, 63. |
Buso-house, 30, 34, 80, 92, 108. |
Buyo leaf, see Betel leaf.
Calamianes tribe, 22, 25, 58, 63.
Calamus, see Rattan.
Caleophaps indica, see Limokun.
287
CAMBRIDGE ANTHROPOLOGICAL EXPEDI-
TION TO TORRES STRAITS. REPORTS,
249.
Camote, Batatas edulis, sweet potato,
6; 55,763, 1910
Campbell, William, 83-84.
Cannibalism, 470.
Carabao, 6, 41, 64, 243.
Mythical, 39, 73.
Cardinal points, 99, 1410, 119, 173, 274.
See also Directions, Prescribed.
Carrying bag, 53, 54, 188, 190.
CARTAS DE Los PP. DE LA COMPANIA
DE JESUS, Citations from, 251, 252,
253, 254, 255.
Carving in the round, 187.
Cat, Folklore and myth concerning the,
31, 41, 64, 72.
Mantianak’s voice like a, 37.
Tabus relating to, 45, 238.
Caves, Burial in, 192.
Filipino oratories in, 261.
Cebu, 28, 66, 170, 189.
Celebes, Bark clothing in, 66.
Ceremonial house in, 96.
Ritual usages in, 90, 107.
References to, 33, 161, 209, 271,
278.
Centipedes, charm against sting of, 234.
Ceremonial apparatus, Tabu on re-
moval of, 237.
bamboos, see Bamboo, Ceremonial
poles of.
behavior, 75-93.
chant, 9, 77, 101, 102, 104, 144,
147, 155, 156, 158, 169, 174, 183.
characterized as a ceremonial
element, 82-83.
Types of, 162-166.
dishes, 87-90, 92, 120, 125, 126,
129-130, 137, 154, 168, 175-176,
177, 183, 184, 260, 269, 278.
elements, 78-87.
food, 76, 79, 91, 103, 104, 137,
138-139, 140-144, 149-150, 152,
153, 156, 176, 242.
Formal, 75-166.
General character of, 75-78.
288 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Ceremonial groups, 256, 257.
house, 75, 151-153, 165.
liquor, 77, 79-80, 91, 98, 104, 102,
103, 104, 126, 129-130, 136-137,
142, 145, 150-151, 179, 181, 183,
259, 272.
official, 9, 76, 77-78, 129-130, 142-
143, 178-179.
percussion music, 83-85.
reactions, 75.
seat, 102, 140, 141, 152.
spoon, 80, 272.
tabu, 236-238.
Ceremonies, Modification of, by inter-
marriage, 186.
Detailed accounts of, 93-192.
Motive for, 12, 78.
Place and time for performing,
75-76.
Spoiling of, by presence of demons,
92, 94, 96, 98, 103, 114.
Variation in performing, 74.
See also under names of cere-
monies: Ginum, Rice sowing, etc.
Ceremony, A, as a magical method,
205.
Chanting at seance, 128, 195-203.
For other types, see under Cere-
monial chant.
Chao Ju-Kua, cited, 276.
Charms and magic, Discussion of, 205- |
221.
Healing by means of, 114-116, 208,
230.
References to, 12, 27, 30, 32, 34,
41-42, 53, 69, 163, 203-223, 245-
246, 258.
Chastity, 70-71, 273.
Chicken as ceremonial food, 138-139.
Chickens, Washing of, to call rain,
205, 213.
Chief, Bagobo, see Datu.
Filipino, Mode of burial of, 170, 189.
Child born to Bualan, 201.
Killing of, to annoint sick with
blood, 266.
marriage unknown among Bagobo,
180.
Child may have sores, 224.
unborn, Spirit of, 264.
Child’s part in ritual with brass chain,
210-212.
Children, Boring ears and filing teeth
of, 270-271.
Buso not to listen to noise of, 119.
Dead, under Mebuyan’s care, 55,
Sie
Drawings by, 38, 167.
get yellow skin from eating limo-
kun, 225.
Magic growth of, 273.
not born in days of Mona, 66.
Part of, in human sacrifice, 168,
169.
participate in ceremonial, 8-9, 77,
145.
Place of, in lower world, 56-57.
wear figures as charms, 208-209,
226.
Children’s ideas of death, 63.
Chills, Supernatural cause of, 196, 226.
China sea, 267.
Chinaman, Myth of a, 31-32.
Chinese as importers and traders, 84,
90, 260.
Influence of, 265, 278.
sources, 250, 276.
Chirino, Pedro de, S.J., cited, 39,170,
489, 223, 258, 259, 260, 261, 262,
263, 264, 279 (bibl.)
References to, 33, 92, 261.
Christian natives in Mindanao, 250.
Christman, Irwin, 109, 146.
Cinnamon, 56, 234,
Circle, Magic, 41-42, 206-207.
Civet cat, 31, 243.
Clappers, 172.
Class tabu, 240-243.
Clay pots made by Miyanda, 99.
not used for sacred food, 79, 271.
Clifford, Hugh, cited, 238, 276, 280(bibl.)
Clotet, José Maria, S.J., 253, 254, 255,
280 (bibl.)
Clothing, Decoration of, 73, 242.
Discarding of, at marriage, 181,
183.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 289
Clothing, Fine, associated with virtue,
70, 273.
Metamorphosis caused by change
of, 72.
of bark and sheath, 66-67.
offered at the altar, 125-131, 176.
worn at festivals, 86-87, 117, 118,
124, 126, 165.
Clouds, Myths of, 48.
Cock, Feathers of, for decoration, 172.
offered in sacrifice, 97, 103, 137,
253,258, 274.
Soul of, in Gimokudan, 55, 64.
Cocoanut for festival and ceremonial
food, 79, 87, 98, 102, 138-139, 147,
176, 177, 178.
leaves, to influence growth of rice,
174.
References to, in song and myth,
49, 55, 66-67, 69, 164.
shell
for offerings, 88.
for pubic shield, 210.
for seed rice, 173.
Toddy from, 218.
Codrington, Robert Henry, cited, 204,
280 (bibl.)
Coffin, 42, 187-190, 209, 214.
Cogon, native name for any rank, coarse,
high-growing grass, 22, 67, 173.
Cole, Fay-Cooper, cited, 14, 19, 22,
97, 99, 37, 49, 58, 84, 95, 161-162, |
167, 169, 171, 175, 244, 280 (bibl.)
Colin, Francisco, S.J., cited, 193, 280 |
(bibl.)
Combés, Francesco, 248, 254, 280 (bibl.)
CoMPLETE East Inp1A Pitot, Map in,
251.
Conclusions, 277-279.
Constellations, 29, 75, 93, 167, 171,
175, 254, 262, 265.
Contact in cultures, 256-257.
Contagious magic, 205, 213.
Contiguity, Charms working through
association by, 205, 213-217.
Continuation theory, 55.
Conventiona] episodes, 273.
Convergence, 278.
Corn, 6, 55, 101.
Coronel, cited, 170.
Corpse, 32-33, 186-192.
Corypha umbraculifera, sago palm, 164.
Cosmogonic myths, 46-49.
Costumes for festival, 86-87, 146-147.
Cotton textiles, 176, 241-249.
Country of the dead, see Gimokudan,
Courtship, 180.
Cows in myth, 73.
Flesh of, not eaten, 243.
Crab shell as charm, 42, 217.
Crabs on ceremonial food, 177, 178.
Crawfurd, John, cited, 275-276, 280
(bibl.)
Creator, 11, 15, 44, 46, 65, 105, 272.
Crockery, see Ceremonial dishes.
Crocodile as charm pattern, 42, 187,
209.
Teeth of, 264.
Crooke, William, cited. 57, 281 (bibl.)
Crow, 214-215, 217, 262.
Crow’s beak, foot and liver as medi-
cine, 221, 228, 232.
Cultural center, 252, 256.
elements, Transmission of,277, 278.
CULTURE, LIMITED POSSIBILITIES IN
DEVELOPMENT OF, 278; see Golden-
weiser, A. A.,
Cuyo islands, 58.
Dance at ceremonies and festivals, 9,
23, 63, 77, 98, 101, 102, 103, 104,
126, 144-145, 147, 183, 271.
at human sacrifice, 168, 253, 256,
258.
Characterization of the, 85-87.
Daraga, a virgin, 16, 70-71.
Darag6, identified with Mandarangan,
26, 162, 169. See also Darugo.
Darkness, Folklore and myth con-
cerning, 33, 34, 61, 70.
Darmesteter, James, (tr.), 281. For ci-
tations, see AVESTAS.
Darugo, god for women, 26. See also
Darago.
Datu, 4, 9-10, 52, 78, 84, 104, 166.
19
290
Davao, Gulf of, 4, 23, 197, 250, 251.
Village of, 42, 161, 166, 251.
Dead call friends by showers, 49, 246.
Cult of, and offerings to the, 62,
93, 104, 107, 125.
not summoned at Manganito, 194.
Place of the, see Gimokudan.
Return to life of the, 61-62, 266.
Tabu on names of the, 239.
Death and burial, Rites attending, 186-
192, 254-255
Cause and signs of, 50-51. |
Myth and folklore concerning, 52,
60-61, 63-64, 67, 68, 255.
Omens portending, 52, 60.
Decorative art, 72-73, 86, 165, 172, 186,
2M.
Deer, Charm to catch, 215.
Fabulous, 34, 39, 413.
Tagamaling protector of, 24.
Defense, Charms by, 205, 206-208.
Dega-dega, see Ceremonial seat.
Demons, Bagobo, see Buso.
Filipino, 42-43, 261, 274, 275.
in other Malay myths, 64, 68, 255.
Devotions for healing of sickness, 229-
230. See also under Ceremonial.
Diaz, Fray Casimiro, cited, 34, 256.
Diffusion, 14, 17-18, 46, 51, 73, 256, 277.
Digas, a village, 100, 162.
Digging stick, 6, 172-173.
Dios, Use of word, 18-19. |
Directions, Prescribed, 99,173, 225, 237-
238. See also Cardinal points.
Disappearance of myth and records,
267, 275.
Disease addressed in prayer, 116.
and healing, 10, 169, 223-235, 266.
Ceremonial cure of, 9, 21, 88, 90, |
93, 94, 104, 112, 121, 123, 174, |
203, 273.
drawn into manikin, 208-209.
Magie branches set to influence,
114-116.
Prevention of, 79, 93, 94,107,412, |
113, 154, 168, 182, 185,190. See |
also Charms and magic.
shut up in leaf dishes, 107.
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Disease strangled by Malaki t’Olu
k’Waig, 21, 100, 123, 199, 203, 229.
Substitution charms against, 211-
212.
Supernatural causes of, 8, 11-12,
29-30, 39-40, 50, 60, 67, 68, 78,
176, 199, 202, 223-229, 246.
Three methods of cure of, 229-235.
Warnings of, 27, 99.
See also Sickness.
Diseases, Spirits of, functioning as
anito, 194, 196-197, 199, 202-203.
Dissemination of religious culture, 256,
257, 266.
Divorce, 264.
Diwata, a general term for the gods, 14.
Kilut the horse of, 48.
Lumabat becomes a, 15, 68.
of the nine heavens, 15-18, 28.
Offerings to, 89, 93.
References to, 63, 175, 194,
riding the heavens, 17.
Shrines for, 87-92.
Tarabumé called, 22.
term for creator, a, 19.
Uan’s description of, 29.
Documents, Filipino, 266-267, 275,
Dog, Bahau tabu on ridiculing, 45.
domestic animal, a, 6.
Folklore concerning, 31, 41, 49.
Dogs of Ubog, 197.
Dowry, 264.
Doyle, Juan, S.J., 254, 252.
Dream-boy, 249.
Dreams, 50, 56, 58-60, 62, 248-249, 274,
Drugs, 230. See also Disease and
healing.
Drums, 85, 253, 258.
Duma-tungo, a god, 21, 164. See also
Tungo.
Duplicate, Substitution of a, 209-212.
Duriin, Durio zibethinus, D. C., 164,
218.
Dyeing of bark in Celebes, 66.
of hemp and rattan, 6, 68-69, 74.
of patterns in bamboo, 172.
Dying persons attacked by Buso, 32.
Treatment of, 42, 186.
999
me a
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 291
Ear plugs, 86, 224, 236, 274.
Ears, Boring of, 270-271.
Human, as trophy, 162.
Earth, Center of the, 197.
Creation of the, 14, 15.
Myth of the sky close to, 46-47.
Shape of the, 46.
Earthquake, 24, 44, 97, 108, 140, 141,
113, 194, 202, 237, 246, 270.
Kast Indies, 271, 275, 277.
Echo, 36.
Kelipse, 40, 47-48, 245, 254, 262, 270.
Kggs on altar food, 177, 178, 179.
Egianon, 8, 174.
Eight agongs played on by head per-
former, 85.
clusters of shavings on bamboo
poles, 133-134.
clusters of shavings on garong,141.
curves for altar fence, 174.
dishes for special guests, 148.
men go out to cut sacred poles,
131.
sticks run through sacred pole,
135.
swords offered at Sonar, 127, 154.
times two pieces of betel on altar,
143.
years on journey in song, 465.
Embroidery, 22, 69, 100, 117, 118, 126.
See also Tambayang; Salugboy.
Emotional disturbance
of Bagobo medium, 198 ef seq.
of Filipino priestess, 224, 240.
Encarnado costume, 254.
Endogamy not found, 185-186.
Environment, Interpretation of phy-
sical, 43-49.
Epidemics, 194. See also Disease and
healing.
Episodes in myth, 273, 278-279. See
also Ulit.
Ethical factors, 264.
Ethnological material, how secured, 6,
7-8.
Exhortation to the newly married, 183.
Exhortation to the soul departed, 190-
192, 270.
Exogamy not found, 185-186.
Exploit badge, 132, 241, 264. See also
Tankulu.
dream, 248.
Exploits accomplished by a wish, 274.
Ceremonial recitation of, 76, 104,
148-149, 162, 163, 198, 271.
External application of medicines, 233-
234.
Kyes, Bulging, of thief, 221.
Staring, at foe and at corpse, 188,
190, 220.
Facing backward, fixed position of, 238.
Family living next to grave house, 192.
relations, 13.
worship, 9, 261.
Famine, 244, 249.
Fast before feast, 87.
Favre, Paul, cited, 14, 281 (bibl.)
Feast as a ceremonial element, 87.
Eating of the, at Ginum, 148.
Preparation and serving of, 77, 98,
104, 140, 147-148, 164.
References to, 9, 63, 172,181, 183,
491, 274.
Fees, Ceremonial, 10-11.
Fence around rice-altar, 174, 207.
Festivals, see under specific name of
the festival: Ginum, Harvest, ete.
Fetish, 205, 219.
Fields, Cultivation of the, 6, 164,471-
174, 254.
Fighting brought into festivals by
Buso, 144, 199.
Charms to use in, 219-220.
Figures of wood used magically, 76,
103, 104, 112-116, 209, 226, 264, 274.
See also under Tanung.
Filing of teeth, 264, 274.
Filipino ceremonial and myth, 41, 57,
72, 92, 257-267, 274-275.
ceremonial house, 95.
culture, Resemblance of, to Bagobo,
257-267, 278.
302 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Rice given to the dead, 53, 188.
mortar, Myth of, 68, 200, 201.
offered in the husk, 176.
Pounding of, 67, 100, 200-201.
References to, 6, 55, 57, 63, 77, 79,
87, 147, 164, 183.
-sowing ceremonial, 9, 22, 77, 93,
95, 171-174, 238.
Spiritual essence of, enjoyed by
soul, 53-54.
Sprouting of, 95.
winnower, 42.
Ridge pole, 135.
Right-hand side of way, 115, 247.
soul, see Soul, Right-hand.
RIGVEDA, citations from, 20, 272.
Rinsing of mouth, 264.
Ritual words, 82, 102, 108, 110, 112,
116, 119-1241, 123, 129-130, 143, 155,
178-179, 183, 191-192. See also Word
charms.
River, Betel offered to the, 119.
Buso haunting banks of the, 419.
Ceremonies at, 117-125, 182.
spirits, 21, 23, 222.
Test for theft in, 222.
White woman in, 226.
Rivers, W. H. R., 249, 282.
Riwa-riwa, a demon, 37-38, 227.
Rizal, José, cited, 16, 193, 222-223, 261,
262, 264, 266, 267.
Robbery, Charm for success in, 213-214.
Bobertson, James Alexander, 279. See
Blair, Emma Helen and Robertson
for citations.
Romances, see Bagobo stories; Ulit.
Roof of Long House, 96, 100, 135, 165.
tooms of Long House, 151-153.
Rosell, Pedro, S. J., 280.
Roth, Henry Ling, 282.
tubbing, see Stroking and rubbing.
Saavedra, A. de, Citations from voyage
of, 28, 170-171, 259, 261.
Sacral spots, Charm to produce, 218.
Sacrifice, Human, Account of, 167-169.
Characterization of, 78-79, 166.
| Sacrifice, Human, Custom of, in Sara-
wak and Cebu, 28, 271.
Demand by the gods for, 94, 99,
143, 198.
Difficulty of offering, 96-97.
Filipino custom of, 166, 170-171.
Frame for fastening victim to, 168.
References to, 9, 10,13, 74, 89, 162,
486, 198, 215, 259, 274.
Value of, 169, 273.
vestige of head hunting, a, 161.
Sacrifice of fowls, 9, 97, 103, 137, 142,
253, 258.
of goats and swine, 253, 268.
Sacrificial character of religion, 8, 253,
272-273.
Sagas, Indian, see Somadeva.
Sagmo ceremony, 102, 126, 127, 128.
Sago palm, Corypha wmbraculifera
(buri), 164.
Salamiawan, a divine hero of myth,
14-17.
Salangayd, god of the sky, 23, 86.
Sali, Oleng’s brother, 118, 143, 148.
Saleeby, Najeeb M., cited, 4, 282 (bibl.)
Saliman, Oleng’s nephew, 23, 85, 118,
202-203.
Salingolop, Datu, 252.
Salugboy, 86-87, 128, 130, 225, 242.
Samal island, 23, 197.
Sambil, young woman of Talun, 8, 147.
San Agustin, Caspar de, O. S. A., 280.
San Antonio, Juan Francisco, O. S.F.,
280.
San Nicolas, Andrés de, 279.
Santa Cruz, 4, 5, 7, 8, 144, 150, 153,
4755485,
Sarasin, Paul and Fritz Sarasin, cited,
45, 28, 66, 90, 107, 161, 209, 223,
282 (bibl.)
References to, 75, 94. 96.
Sarawak, Human sacrifice in, 171, 271.
Myths and rites in, 37, 271, 278.
Wooden figures for magic use in,
113-114.
Sarong, see Panapisan.
Sawyer, F. H., cited, 33.
Schadenberg, Alexander, 282.
——— ee
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 303
Sea, God of, 24-25.
Seance, See Manganito.
Sebandal, a sky god, 23.
Sebayan, Ido’s daughter, 147, 212.
Sekkadu, see Water flasks.
Selangor, 179, 213, 270.
Seligmann, C. G., 249, 282 (bibl.)
Semang, peninsular tribe, 60, 64.
Senoi, peninsular tribe, 60, 64.
Sefiora, mentioned at manganito, 197,
198, 199.
Sexes, Division of labor between, 76-77,
88, 103, 173, 187.
etiquette between, 203, 220.
Shadow, 50, 58, 61, 64, 214, 270.
Shavings, Ceremonial, 133-134, 141-142,
144, 271. See also Bamboo, Cere-
monial polesof.
Shelf for sacred food, 77, 91, 103, 437.
for water flasks, 103, 106.
Shell bracelet, 199, 242.
Shells, Calcining of, 80, 99.
Shirt, Ceremonial claret-colored, 223,
224, 244, 253, 254.
Shivering, 195, 228.
Shrine, Tigbanua of the, 108.
Shrines and altars, 11, 76, 77, 87-93,
106, 120, 253-254, 259-260, 265.
See also Balekat; Buso-house;
Harvest altar; Hut shrine; Pa-
rabunnian; Sonaran; Tambara;
Tigyama.
Shrines, Filipino, 269.
Siat, wife of Datu Imbal, 153, 155-157.
Sibulan, Bagobo village, 19, 27, 49, 148,
1615-471, 175, 251, 252:
Sickness that goes round the World,
a mythical personality, 107, 116, 119,
196-197, 198, 199, 227, 244.
See also Disease and healing.
Sigo, Oleng’s daughter, 105,406, 148,
420, 123, 147.
Silver in myth, 73.
Sindar, a mountain god, 24.
Singan, priest-doctor and medium, 105,
106-112, 117-125, 428-130, 137, 144,
194-203.
Singapore, 84.
Sinkali, linked brass chain, 206-207,
210-212, 295, 236.
Siring, wood demon, 36, 38, 61-62,
215, 249, 261.
Skeat, Walter William, cited, 10, 17,
33, 37, 40, 47, 49, 64, 65, 88, 117,
120, 174, 179, 206, 213, 227, 238,
243, 267, 268, 269, 270-271, 282 (bibl.)
References to, 139, 143.
Skin diseases, 202, 203, 224.
Skirt, Woman’s, see Panapisan.
Skull, Human, 161.
Sky, Gods of, 23.
Myth of lifting of, 46-47, 67.
Red, an omen, 245.
Rim or root of, 199, 227.
Woman who lives in the middle
of, 198.
Slaves buried alive by Filipino, 170.
Killing of, at death of a chief, 78,
170, 263, 271. See also Sacrifice,
Human.
Purchase and taking of, 167, 257.
Tingoto figures likened to, 112.
Sleep, Absence of soul in, 58-60, 269.
Lethargic form of, 224.
Oleng forbids, for four nights, 101.
Smoke, for medicine and magic, 215,
232.
Snake as omen, 262, 270.
-hite, 213.
Dance named for a, 86.
Danger of killing a, 238.
Fabulous, 31, 39.
Meat of, not eaten, 244.
Somadeva: KATHA SARIT SAGARA, cited,
16, 20, 34, 35, 36, 40-41, 42, 47, 69,
70, 72, 74, 120, 167, 205; 208, 219,
248, 273, 274, 282 (bibl.)
Sonar, Account of rite, 125-131.
References to, 91. 94, 102, 104, 124,
153, 272.
Sonaran, the agong-altar, Characteri-
zation of, 91-92, 129.
Description of, 125-126.
Use of, at harvest, 175-176.
Songs, Bagobo, see Bagobo songs.
Filipino, 259, 275.
294
Hemp, Musa textilis (abaca), Barter
Ins aie
Ceremonial dishes of, 80-81, 87,
98, 101, 105-106.
Needles on altar threaded with,
177:
Overlacing and coloring of, 6, 68-
69.
Tarabumé’s care for growing, 22.
Heras, P., cited, 251.
Hindu influence, see under Indian ele-
ments.
Hinduism introduced into Java, 275-
276.
Historic accident, 240.
origin different from native ex-
planation, 235.
Hog, Sacrifice of, 171, 253, 258.
Hole for body of slave, 168.
for passage of sun and moon, 47.
in center of the earth, 197, 227.
in top of head for soul’s exit, 51.
Homeopathic cure, 212-213, 228-229.
Horizon, Myths concerning, 16, 47, 68,
200.
Hornbill, 74.
Horse, 6, 41, 64-65, 101, 163, 215.
Fabulous, 39, 48, 73.
House altars, 16, 20. See also Tam-
bara; Tigyama; Balekat.
Burials under, 189, 263.
Corpse closed up in, 192.
Fabulous, of gold, 69.
Festival, 258. See also Long House.
forsaken after death in, 60, 192.
Haunted, 32.
Meager furnishings of, 72-73.
Regulations for building, 194, 240.
Woman's skirt laid on unfinished,
216-217.
Human interests, Gods associated with,
13-14, 18-29.
Human sacrifice, see Sacrifice, Human.
Hunger before Ginum feast, 148.
disappears on becoming deified,
273.
Oleng complains of lack of, 123.
Hunt, God of the, 23, 197, 199.
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Hut shrine, 92-93, 108, 164, 259-260.
See also Buso-house.
Hypnotic suggestion, 214.
Idal, Datu, Trance of, 156-157.
Ido, Datu, References to, 8, 96, 97, 98,
99, 101, 102, 108, 110, 144, 148, 122,
123, 124, 127-128, 129-130, 131-132, -
137, 140-144, 150, 158, 212, 243.
Ifugao, Myths of the, 47.
Igorot, 192, 193.
Ikdé, Oleng’s wife, 105, 108, 110, 178,
179.
Ikut, an old object devoted to the gods,
89, 184, 205, 212, 294, 236.
Illumination of Long House, 139-140.
of Gimokudan by the sun, 47.
of the person, 70, 273.
Tlokano, 257.
Images, Filipino, 264, 274.
Bagobo, see Figures of wood.
Imbal, Datu, 5, 8, 18, 94-95, 153, 155,
156, 239.
Imitation, 277.
Inao, shaved sticks of the Ainu, 133-
134.
Incest, 245.
Independent development, 46, 252, 256,
266.
India, Great Mothers of, 57.
Indian archipelago, 270-271, 275, 288.
elements in Bagobo ceremonial
and myth, 68, 73, 272-277, 278.
empire in the East Indies, 275-277.
magic, 205.
Indirect suggestion, 205.
transmission, 274, 277.
Indo-Iranian elements in Malay ritual
and myth, 20, 25, 55, 120, 272, 278.
measurements for grave, 189.
use of spells, 234.
Indonesian problem, 276-277.
Industrial arts, Gods of, 41, 22-23,
27-28.
Inherent virtue, Charms by, 205, 217-
221.
Inhibition, 285. See also Tabu.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH
Inok, son of Oleng, 118, 139, 141, 144.
Insect, Chirp of, a sign of death, 246.
Insects, 45, 64, 124, 191. |
Intoning at seance, 195-203. |
Iranian, see Indo-Iranian.
Iron industry, God of, 27-28, 89.
Iron, Supplanting of stone implements |
by, 6.
Islam, 3-4, 268, 276, 277, 278-279.
Islao, 7-8, 59, 106, 181.
Ivory ear plugs, 236, 237, 242.
pillars in myth, 69, 74.
Java, 33, 275, 276, 277.
Jayne, K. G., cited, 276.
Jenks, Albert Ernest, cited, 193, 281
(bibl.)
Jesuit missions, Establishment of, 250.
Jolo island, 66.
Journey, abandoned or postponed, 247.
Manganito held before, 194.
Soul goes on, to lower world, 52-
53, 63, 64.
Jungle fowl, 6, 31, 40.
Kaba, 8, 29, 73, 101, 111, 412, 115, 116,
424, 175, 176, 202.
Kadeyuna, a female god, 17.
Kalagan tribe, 29.
Kamagi, precious necklace, 68, 73, 127.
Kamana of Madagascar, 204.
KATHA SARIT SAGARA, see Somadeva.
Kawanan, see Soul, Right hand.
Kayan tribe of Borneo, 134, 160, 162,
239, 271.
Kenyah tribe of Borneo, 239, 271.
Kerchief for warriors, see Tankulu.
Kilat, Thunder spirit, 39, 45-46, 48-
49, 238.
Killing by magical power, 70, 274.
Justifiable forms of. 10.
Recital of exploits in, 148-149.
Kingfisher, Metamorphosis of, 71-72.
Kitchen, 112, 152-153.
Knives protecting pregnant women
from Buso, 208.
Ritual use of, 154, 177, 178.
295
Korokung, River woman called, 38.
Disease named 100, 202, 226.
Kramat of Malaysia, 204, 269.
Kruijit, Alb. C., 107.
Kulaman tribe, 29, 41, 105, 150, 165,
228, 244, 250.
Landor, A. Henry Savage, cited, 25,
170, 281 (bibl.)
Lanzone, Lansiwm domesticum (lan-
sonis, Bagobo tual), 164, 218.
Lapisut, a small, green, thin skinned
and extremely acid fruit borne on
a tree with a tall slender trunk
and leaves like mammoth maiden’s-
hair ferns. The fruit grows low,
projecting directly outward from the
trunk, only four or five feet from
the ground, 218.
Laufer, Berthold, References to, 250,
281 (bib!.)
Laughing, Tabu on, 45, 58, 61, 225,
238.
Lavations, see Pamalugu; Purification.
Laya, a variety of bamboo, Frame of,
for agongs and textiles, 101, 103, 136.
Reference to, 164.
Thatch secured by, 100.
Vessels for liquor made of, 103.
Leaf dishes, Diseases drawn into and
shut up in, 21, 107, 229.
Drawing of, 109.
Festival use of, 147, 152, 164.
Process of making, 77, 98, 101,
102, 106.
Ritual use of, 62, 93, 104-113, 176,
Wie
Spirits of the dead enjoy, 56.
Leaves, Ceremonial cluster of,
Greens, Magic.
laid under sacrificial food, 139,
140-141.
See also under names of leaves.
Left-hand side of path, 116, 247.
soul, see Soul, Left-hand.
Legaspi expedition, Chronicler of, cited,
170, 189, 259.
see
296
Legbands, 147, 206, 207.
Lemon tree, Age at death determined
by, 68.
Lemons as charms, 41-42, 48, 207, 245,
Lemur, Flying, 217, 226, 228, 239.
Leper opens ceremonial chant, 101.
receives pamalugu, 123.
Leprosy, 231, 233.
Life after death, 263. See also Gimo-
kudan.
Lightning, 48, 49, 69, 74.
Lime for betel, 80, 99, 143, 179.
Lime tube, 53, 54, 80, 143, 179, 190,
192.
Limokun, omen pigeon, Description
and snaring of, 246.
Nest of, used for medicine, 226,
232-233.
References to, 164, 223, 243, 246,
247, 254, 262.
Tabu on eating, 225, 241.
Lines in palm, 191, 247-248.
Linug, god of the ground, 24.
Liver, Crow’s as medicine, 234.
Eating of human, 170, 215.
Lizard, 45, 238, 262, 270.
Loarca, Miguel de, cited, 95, 225, 259,
262, 263, 279 (bibl.)
Loda, 101, 127, 131.
Logan, J. R., cited, 57.
Lohez, Ventura Fernandez, 281 (bibl.)
Long House, 75, 89, 92, 94, 95-96, 99,
102, 106, 108, 414, 112, 413, 414, 145,
116, 132, 140, 163, 164, 165, 195.
Arrangement of, 151-453.
Loom, 72, 164.
God of, 27, 198.
Lost articles, 215, 262.
Love charm, 220-221.
Liibu, old name for Santa Cruz, 4.
Likka, probably bread-fruit, Artocarp-
us, 218.
Lulub, washing of water flasks, 102,
124-125,
Lumabat, mythical
44,15, 16, 23, AO,
Luzon, 80, 166, 193,
277.
hero and divinity,
56, 58, 62, 68, 71.
257, 266, 275, 276,
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Lygodium scandens (nito), 178.
Mabanisan, Mount, 32.
Magani, brave men, see Bagani.
Magellan voyage, 257, 260.
Magic and medicine, Overlapping of,
231.
Filipino, 262-263.
flight, 273.
Suggestive, 214-215,
Terms for, 203-204.
See also Charms and magic.
Magical function of tattooing, 264-265.
groupings, 213.
growth of children, 273.
potentiality, 203-204, 205, 274.
spells and usages, 230, 246, 265,
266, 268, 273, 279.
Magnet as charm, 216.
Malaki, hero of myth, 19, 67, 69, 70,
72, 73, 166, 229.
Lunsud, 17.
Lisu Karan, 22.
vOlu k’Waig
Addressed in worship, 107, 110,
415, 4419, 120, 123, 125.
Characteristics of, 14, 20-21.
Etymology of name of, 20.
Human sacrifice for, 94, 198.
Little sister of, 49, 196.
Mythical episode of, 17.
speaks at seance, 100, 128, 196
et seq.
Sickness strangled by, 21, 100,
123, 199, 229.
Malaria, 194, 226.
Malay area, 271, 277, 278.
ceremonies and customs, 97, 179,
189, 190-191, 253, 273.
folklore, see under Folklore.
heritage, 73, 274, 277.
magician, 143.
psychic complex, 149.
Malaysia, Tribes of, see Peninsular
Malay.
Malik, 102, 124, 130, 141, 196, 198.
Manama, a god, 19.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH
Manangid, a plant bearing fragrant |
leaves, 80, 129-130, 186.
Mandarangan, Characteristics of, 11,
25-26, 139, 147, 149, 253, 255.
Good heart of, 162.
not identical with Buso, 25-26.
Ritual and sacrifice performed for,
Vie OAS 1D. AT A2oe AON 161;
166, 168, 252.
Mandaya beliefs, ritual and myth, 37,
150, 155, 214, 253, 254.
Manganito a ceremonial element, 87.
Different concepts of, in the Philip-
pines, 193.
Gods speaking at, 194, 203.
References to, 94, 97, 154,179, 259.
Time and occasions for calling,
128, 194-195.
Value of, 9.
Women as leaders and mediums
at, 10, 76, 91, 92, 195.
See also Anito.
Mango, Mangifera indica, L. (Bagobo
manga), 164.
Manikin, 196, 205, 208, 209, 269-270.
Manila, 66, 266.
Manip, Datu, 161-162, 251.
Manobo tribe, 41, 45, 46, 47, 254.
Mansilatan, Mandaya god, 151, 253,
255.
Mantianak, demon of childbirth, 37
261, 270.
Mantra, Myths and folklore of, 46, 47,
65, 227.
Manufactured objects, Offering of, 81,
89, 91-93, 102, 126-129, 175.
Oracle in regard to selling, 199.
Souls of, 64-65, 81, 89.
Manuscripts discovered in Negros, 267
Marks on exalted persons, 273.
Marriage by purchase, 180-181, 185.
Filipino, 263-264.
gifts and dowry, 84, 180-181, 184.
in Malaysia, 269.
References to, 9, 76, 229-230.
rites, 180-186.
Marsden, William, 281.
Martin, Rudolf, cited, 33, 37, 46, 55,
297
57, 60, 64, 65, 190-191, 207, 227, 234,
267, 281 (bibl.)
Martinez de Zuniga, Joaquin, O. S.A.,
cited, 258, 261, 263, 280 (bibl.)
Martimmas, see Rice sowing ceremonial.
Mateo, Father, see Gisbert, Mateo, S. J.
Materia medica, Native, 230.
Material culture, 6, 267, 279.
Mati, Bagobo village, 6-7, 8, 96, 102,
412, 144, 146, 150, 227.
Matolus, having magical power, 26,
69, 204.
Matutun, Mount, 25.
Maxfield, Berton, L., cited, 47, 281
(bibl.)
Maxwell, Sir W., 269.
Maying, Oleng’s daughter, 100, 140.
Measles, 208-209, 225-226.
Measures calculated on human body,
172-173, 189, 215-216, 240, 270.
Mebuyan, Dead children under care
of, 5, 56-57.
Left-hand soul checked by, 59, 62.
Myths of, 54, 68.
Medicine, 204-205, 231, 234, 269.
See also Charms and magic.
Medium, Behavior of, at seance, 193-
203.
Persons acting as, 9, 14.
References to, 28, 194-203.
See also Anito; Manganito.
Melanesia, 67, 204.
Men, Ceremonial food for, 138, 140-141,
150.
Dances of, 85-86, 144-145.
Digging stick wielded by, 173.
See also Old men; Young men.
Mendoza, J. Gonzalez de, O. 5. A. cited,
193, 262, 264, 265.
Merar, Mount, 6-7, 96.
Mermaid, 23, 226-227.
Metal, 6.
point for writing, 267.
rings, 201, 206.
Metamorphosis, 71-72, 274.
Meteoric stones, 48-49.
Milk given to infants in lower world,
56-57,
298
Millington, W. H., cited, 47, 281 (bibl.)
Minahassa, Bark clothing in, 66.
Hero gods of, 15.
Rites and customs of, 75, 94, 161,
223, 2741.
Mindanao, Home of Bagobo ancestors,
65, 267.
References to, 166, 171, 186, 250,
266, 277.
Rites and popular beliefs in, 248,
253-257.
Mindoro, 267.
Minokawa, mythical bird, 40, 47-48
74, 245.
Mintera tribe of Malaysia, 57.
Mirrored beak of mythical bird, 74.
doors and walls, 69, 74.
Missionaries, Spanish, 166, 250, 274,
275.
Miyanda, 8, 99, 101, 105, 107-112, 118,
123, 126, 144, 195, 196 et seq.
Modigliani, Elio, cited, 37, 49-50, 64,
281 (bibl.)
Mohammedanism, see Islam.
Mona, fabulous ancestors of the Bagobo,
65-70, 73-74, 249.
Monitor lizard, 31, 244.
Monkey, Magical power of, 213, 217-
218.
Mythical episodes of, 31, 39, 42,
48, 65, 68, 71, 235, 239, 244.
Resemblance of, to man, 235, 244.
Tabus concerning the, 45, 235, 238,
244.
Monogamy, 264.
Montano, Joseph, 281.
Montero y Vidal, Reference to, 2
Moon, Bagobo myths concerning
40, 46, 245, 249.
Batak myth of the, 47-48.
Devotional attitude toward the,
265,
Passage of the, around the earth,
47.
Phases of the, determining Ginum,
7, 63, 94, 99, 100, 444, 198, 237,
273.
Spots on face of the, 48, 245.
?
ay
the,
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Moré, Quirico, S. J., cited, 251, 280
(bibl. )
Morga, Antonio, cited, 39, 66, 170-171,
193, 261, 263, 266, 267, 279 (bibl.)
Moro abhorred by wild tribes, 19, 29.
Conquests of, 3-4.
contact with Bagobo, 4, 73, 278-279.
created by Pamulak Manobo, 105.
music, 84.
myths, 51, 65, 73.
Province, 186-187.
References to, 185, 187, 236, 250,
251.
Mortar for rice, see Rice mortar.
Mosquitoes, 191-192.
Mothers, Daughters taught by, not to
laugh at animals, 45-46.
Great, of India, 57.
Weaning of babies by, 57.
Motor habit in grasping an object, 173.
Mountain and coast Bagobo compared,
4-5, 279,
Bracing of the, 182-183.
Intermarriage of, Bagobo with
Bila-an, 185-186.
Mati situated on a, 6-7, 96.
Tubison situated on a, 4153.
Mourners, 187-188, 190, 192.
Mozo, Antonio, O. S. A., 280.
Miiku, Singan’s brother, 137, 138, 141.
Mulberry, Paper, Broussonetia papyri-
fera, 66.
Musa, see Banana; Hemp.
Music, see under Agongs; Ceremonial
chant; Drums; Flutes; Guitars.
Myth gods, 15-18, 19.
Myth pattern, 44-45, 56.
Mythical ancestors, 65-74,
beasts and birds, 227.
characters, 17, 29, 47, 65-67, 69,
70, 72-74, 166, 192, 229, 249, 273.
romance, see Ulit.
situations, 273.
tabu, 238-240,
Mythological concepts, 13-74.
Naat, the buso-deer, 39, 113.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH
Names, Tabu on uttering, 223, 224,
239-240.
Natural phenomena, see Phenomena,
Natural.
Nature myths and songs, 44-49, 71.
spirits, 44, 18-19, 21, 23-24, 33,
30, 43-45, 193, 229.
Navarrete, O. S. D., cited, 66.
Neckband, Magic, 207, 234.
Necklace, 176, 179, 231.
Negros, Discovery of manuscript in,
267, 275.
Myth bird larger than, 40.
Nias, Myths and rites in, 33, 37, 49-
50, 64, 271, 278.
Nicols, N. N., Map by, 251.
Nieuwenhuis, A. W., cited, 162, 282
(bibl.)
Nightmare, 50, 59-60.
Nine clusters of shavings on sacred
pole, 133-134.
clusters of shavings on garong,141.
effusions at Pamalugu, 122.
leaf dishes at last shrine, 109.
lulutan for rice at Ginum, 138.
million pearl discs, 164.
rows of sequins, 164.
saucers on harvest altar, 176,
shreds of baris, 135.
taps on agong to close Sonar, 131.
vessels of hemp at harvest, 176,
M7:
Nipa fructicans, 7, 67, 173.
Nito, Lygodium scandens, 178.
North, More records in the, than in
the south, 257.
Tigbanua in the, 110.
Water to the, Betel offered to, 119.
Nosegays as medicine, 234, 235.
Nueva Segovia, 247, 248, 266.
Numbers, Magic, 124, 206, 207, 225, 231.
Nufiez, José, 257, 263, 280.
Obal, 189, 190.
Odal, priestess, 175-179.
Offerings, Classes of, 89-90.
Final disposition of, 81, 89-90, 91-
92, 130.
299
Offerings of manufactured objects, 9,
97, 126-128, 130, 153, 154, 168, 174,
200-201, 259, 260.
Tabu on selling, 81, 89-90, 91, 236.
Ogan, low-voiced song, 82, 275.
Old men, Ceremonial duties of, 76,
141, 148-149, 150, 183-184, 272.
in myth, 65, 69, 72-74, 192, 249.
people
Betel ceremonially chewed by,
80.
Closed shirt for, 241-242.
women
as mediums, 194.
as priest-doctors, 10, 228, 259.
Ceremonies conducted by, 10,
76, 102, 104-110, 175.
Mythical episodes of, 47, 65-70,
73-74, 192, 249.
Salugboy embroidered by, 242.
Oleng, Datu of Talun, celebrates Pama-
lugu, 118-124, 126.
celebrates Sonar, 129-130.
consults gods at manganito, 198-
202.
Diagram by, 113.
performs rites last night, 140-144.
performs Tanung rite, 114-116.
recites his exploits, 149.
References to, 5, 8, 37, 62, 94, 96,
99, 100, 101, 102, 108, 110, 111,
426, 127-128, 132, 136, 137, 148,
450, 152, 158, 4195.
Oleng, Yting’s wife, 8, 176, 179, 209.
Olu k’waig, small water-gods, 21.
Omen bird, see Limokun.
Omens, 98, 254, 262, 270, 274.
and dreams, 245-249.
Omok, ceremonial red rice, 138, 139,
178.
Onong, soul’s travel outfit, 53-54, 55,
188, 190.
Oracles, 195-203, 259.
Oral tradition, 267.
Ordeal, 224, 229-993, 262, 270.
Orientation, 81, 122.
Origin, Common, of rites, 266.
Non-Malay, of certain rites, 272.
300
Origins, Several, for same tabu, 235.
Ornaments as offerings, 88, 89, 90,91,
93, 427, 476.
References to, 73, 86.
worn at Ginum, 147.
Ortiz, Tomas, O. S. A., cited, 33, 37,
261, 262, 280 (bibl.)
Over-lacing, of hemp and rattan, 68,
224, 240, 241.
Owners of offerings, 81, 89-92, 127,
130.
Oyanguren, Conquest of Davao gulf by,
251.
Pain, Cause of, 50, 58, 60. See also
Disease and healing.
Palakpak, digging-stick, 172-173.
Palawan, 267.
Palma brava, Corypha minor, 151,174.
Palmistry, 191, 247-248.
Pamalugu ceremony, Account of, 117-
124.
at marriage, 182.
Characteristics of, 81-82.
in lower world, 54-55, 62.
References to, 9, 14, 76, 88, 94, 98,
102, 104, 1141, 125, 128, 129, 181,
182, 202, 229, 269.
Pamulak Manobo, the creator, 11, 14,
15, 19, 20, 44, 46, 47, 65, 105, 4110,
421, 229.
Panacea, 233-234.
Panapisan, woman’s skirt, discarded
at marriage, 183.
Gift of, to groom, 184.
laid on roof, 216-217.
offered to gods, 126, 127, 179.
Patch in, as charm, 216.
Panay, Demons in, 34.
Paneyangen, divine protector of bees,
22-23.
Pangolan, shell bracelet, 199, 242.
Panguilan, Datu, 161-162.
Pangulili, mythical hero and divinity,
1G ty.
Pantheistic, Bagobo religion not, 43-44.
Pantheon, Bagobo, 13-29.
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Parabunnian, altar for rice-sowing,
92-93, 164, 173-174, 237, 254, 268.
Parayat, a disease, caused by black
art, 219.
caused by selling over-laced work,
224.
Pardo de Tavera, T. H.,
to, 4.
Pastells, Pablo, S. J., cited, 151, 171,
253, 254, 255, 280 (bibl.)
Patanan ceremony, 162, 198, 199.
Patch as charm, 216.
Patulangan, Bagobo town, 156.
Pearl disc ornaments, 118, 165, 242.
Pebble, Magic, 165,
Peninsular Malay, Myths, rites and
customs of, 10, 37, 47, 57, 88, 105,
420, 139, 174, 206, 238, 267-271, 272,
278.
Popular beliefs of, 49, 55, 60, 64-65.
Peppers, Red, as charms, 41, 163, 207,
215.
Perak, Shrines in, 269.
Percussion instruments, 9, 258.
also Agongs.
Perez, Domingo, O. P., 280.
Petati, mat, 89, 188, 189, 191.
Peterson, Peter (tr.), 282. For
tions, see RIGVEDA.
Phenomena, Natural, 43-49, 245.
Philippine Islands, Ceremonies
sacrifice in, 166, 170-171, 257.
Cultural center in, 252, 256.
Peopling of, by Aryan stock, 276-
277.
References to, 14, 166, 193, 245,
257, 267, 278.
Pig hunt, 197, 199.
meat, 87, 147, 183.
skulls as trophies, 161.
Pigafetta, Antonio, cited, 66, 84, 257,
260, 262, 264, 280 (bibl.)
Pigeon, Omen, see Limokun.
Pigs, 24, 45.
Fabulous, 34, 40, 62.
Pintados, term for Visayan, 257, 2
265.
Piper betel, see Betel.
Reference
See
cita-
and
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 304
Plants, Pamulak Manobo creator of, 19,
65.
Fabulous, 57, 69, 74.
Magical, 27, 88, 92, 102, 103, 108,
113-116, 164, 174, 186. See also
Greens, Magic.
Plasencia, Juan de, O. S. F., cited, 37,
95, 167, 170, 189, 223, 258, 259, 2641,
262, 263, 279 (bibl.)
Plough, not used, 6.
Poison, 60, 203.
Poles, Ceremonial, see Bamboo, Cere-
monial poles of.
Polytheistic system, 5, 13-29, 44-45.
Popular beliefs, Filipino, 261-263.
in Malay area, 269-271.
in Mindanao, 254-255.
Possession, Signs of, 195, 197-198.
Pottery, 6, 79, 99, 101, 213, 260, 271.
Practice of medicine, 230.
Pregnancy, Articles to be eaten and
avoided in, 218.
Precautions against Buso in, 208.
Premigration influences, 277.
origin of ceremonial, 257, 266.
Pre-Spanish culture of Filipino, 257-
267, 278.
Preventive medicine, 206.
Disease and healing.
Priestess, Bagobo, 10, 182-184, 194-203,
229.
in other tribes, 254, 259, 261.
Priesthood and _ priest-doctors, 9-11,
161, 182-184, 226, 230.
Priests, Catholic, Credulity of, 255-256.
Value of records of, 255.
Work of, in Philippine Islands, 166,
250-251.
Priests, Filipino, 274.
Problems for investigation, 161, 185,
277, 278.
Property, Means of discovering lost
and stolen, 215, 229.
Settlement for, in divorce, 263.
Psychological associations, 213.
motives of charms, 205.
stimulus at Tubison, 157-158.
Pubic shield, 210, 214.
See also
Punan tribe, 114.
Puntas, Santiago, S. J., 251, 254.
Purification in Indo-Iranian rites, 272.
in Malacca, 268-269.
Quirante, Alonzo M., 192.
Raffles, Thomas Stanford, cited 275,
276, 282 (bibl.)
Rain called by bird, 71.
charms, 205, 213.
Mythical causes of, 49, 53, 64, 196,
246.
Rakshasa, Aryan demon, 34, 35, 274.
Rancheria, 7, 95, 194.
Rattan, Calamus (Visayan bejuco)
Magic neckband of, 207, 234.
References to, 69, 74, 88, 90, 99,
100, 174, 189, 218, 234.
Tigbanua of the, 107, 110, 120, 125.
Recitation at funeral, 191-192.
Ritual, 155, 162, 168.
See also Exploits, Ceremonial re-
citation of.
Recollect Fathers, cited, 10, 22, 58, 62,
63, 116, 174, 220, 259, 261, 262, 263,
264, 265, 275.
missions, 250.
Reflection in water, 45, 58, 61, 225, 238.
Religion, see Bagobo religion.
Renerungen, a mountain god, 24.
Resemblance, Association by, 208-213.
between Filipino and Bagobo re-
ligion, 257-267.
Influence of, on habit, 243.
Tabu associated with, 243.
Resin and wax as charms, 214, 216,
219.
Retana y Gamboa, Wenceslao Emilio,
cited, 171, 282 (bibl.)
References to, 16, 19.
Retribution, Idea of, 58.
Rice, Ceremonial use of, 177-179, 271.
cooked in bamboo joints by steam-
ing, 271.
culture in Malacca, 268.
field, Altars in, 92-93, 164, 175.
See also Parabunnian.
302
Rice given to the dead, 53, 188.
mortar, Myth of, 68, 200, 201.
offered in the husk, 176.
Pounding of, 67, 100, 200-201.
References to, 6, 55, 57, 63,77, 79,
87, 147, 164, 183.
-sowing ceremonial, 9, 22, 77, 93,
95, 171-174, 238.
Spiritual essence of, enjoyed by
soul, 53-54.
Sprouting of, 95.
winnower, 42.
Ridge pole, 135.
Right-hand side of way, 115, 247.
soul, see Soul, Right-hand.
RIGVEDA, citations from, 20, 272.
Rinsing of mouth, 264.
Ritual words, 82, 102, 108, 110, 142,
116, 119-121, 123, 129-130, 143, 155,
178-179, 183, 191-192. See also Word
charms.
River, Betel offered to the, 119.
Buso haunting banks of the, 119.
Ceremonies at, 117-125, 182.
spirits, 21, 23, 222.
Test for theft in, 222.
White woman in, 226.
Rivers, W. H. R., 249, 282.
Riwa-riwa, a demon, 37-38, 227.
Rizal, José, cited, 16, 193, 222-223, 261,
262, 264, 266, 267.
Robbery, Charm for success in, 213-214.
Bobertson, James Alexander, 279. See
Blair, Emma Helen and Robertson
for citations.
Romances, see Bagobo stories; Ulit.
Roof of Long House, 96, 100, 135, 165.
Rooms of Long House, 151-153.
Rosell, Pedro, S. J., 280.
Roth, Henry Ling, 282.
Rubbing, see Stroking and rubbing.
Saavedra, A. de, Citations from voyage
of, 28, 170-171, 259, 261.
Sacral spots, Charm to produce, 218.
Sacrifice, Human, Account of, 467-169.
Characterization of, 78-79, 166.
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
| Sacrifice, Human, Custom of, in Sara-
| wak and Cebu, 28, 271.
| Demand by the gods for, 94, 99,
143, 198.
Difficulty of offering, 96-97.
Filipino custom of, 166, 170-171.
Frame for fastening victim to, 168.
References to, 9, 10,13, 74, 89, 162,
486, 198, 215, 259, 274.
Value of, 169, 273.
vestige of head hunting, a, 161.
Sacrifice of fowls, 9, 97, 103, 137, 142,
253, 258.
of goats and swine, 253, 268.
Sacrificial character of religion, 8, 253,
272-273.
Sagas, Indian, see Somadeva.
Sagmo ceremony, 102, 126, 127, 128.
Sago palm, Corypha wimnbraculifera
(buri), 164.
Salamiawan, a divine hero of myth,
14-17.
Salangayd, god of the sky, 23, 86.
Sali, Oleng’s brother, 118, 143, 148.
Saleeby, Najeeb M., cited, 4, 282 (bibl.)
Saliman, Oleng’s nephew, 23, 85, 118,
202-203.
Salingolop, Datu, 252.
Salugboy, 86-87, 128, 130, 225, 242.
Samal island, 23, 197.
Sambil, young woman of Talun, 8, 147.
San Agustin, Caspar de, O. S. A., 280.
San Antonio, Juan Francisco, O. S.F.,
280.
San Nicolas, Andrés de, 279.
Santa Cruz, 4, 5, 7, 8, 444, 150, 153,
475, 185.
Sarasin, Paul and Fritz Sarasin, cited,
45, 28, 66, 90, 107, 161, 209, 223,
282 (bibl.)
References to, 75, 94, 96.
Sarawak, Human sacrifice in, 171, 271.
Myths and rites in, 37, 271, 278.
Wooden figures for magic use in,
113-114.
Sarong, see Panapisan.
Sawyer, F. H., cited, 33.
Schadenberg, Alexander, 282.
|
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 303
Sea, God of, 24-25.
Seance, See Manganito.
Sebandal, a sky god, 23.
Sebayan, Ido’s daughter, 147, 212.
Sekkadu, see Water flasks.
Selangor, 179, 213, 270.
Seligmann, C. G., 249, 282 (bibl.)
Semang, peninsular tribe, 60, 64.
Senoi, peninsular tribe, 60, 64.
Sefiora, mentioned at manganito, 197,
498, 199.
Sexes, Division of labor between, 76-77,
88, 103, 173, 187.
etiquette between, 203, 220.
Shadow, 50, 58, 61, 64, 214, 270.
Shavings, Ceremonial, 133-134, 141-142,
144, 271. See also Bamboo, Cere-
monial polesof.
Shelf for sacred food, 77, 91, 103, 137.
for water flasks, 103, 106.
Shell bracelet, 199, 242.
Shells, Calcining of, 80, 99.
Shirt, Ceremonial claret-colored, 223,
224, 241, 253, 254.
Shivering, 195, 228.
Shrine, Tigbanua of the, 108.
Shrines and altars, 11, 76, 77, 87-93,
106, 120, 253-254, 259-260, 265.
See also Balekat; Buso-house;
Harvest altar; Hut shrine; Pa-
rabunnian; Sonaran; Tambara;
Tigyama.
Shrines, Filipino, 269.
Siat, wife of Datu Imbal, 153, 155-157.
Sibulan, Bagobo village, 19, 27, 49, 148,
461, 474, 175, 251, 252.
Sickness that goes round the World,
a mythical personality, 107, 116, 119,
496-197, 198, 199, 227, 241.
See also Disease and healing.
Sigo, Oleng’s daughter, 105,406, 118,
420, 123, 147.
Silver in myth, 73.
Sindar, a mountain god, 24.
Singan, priest-doctor and medium, 105,
106-112, 117-125, 128-130, 137, 144,
194-203.
Singapore, 84.
Sinkali, linked brass chain, 206-207,
210-212, 295, 236.
Siring, wood demon, 36, 38, 61-62,
215, 249, 261.
Skeat, Walter William, cited, 10, 17,
33, 37, 40, 47, 49, 64, 65, 88, 117,
120, 174, 179, 206, 213, 227, 238,
243, 267, 268, 269, 270-271, 282 (bibl.)
References to, 139, 143.
Skin diseases, 202, 203, 224.
Skirt, Woman’s, see Panapisan.
Skull, Human, 161.
Sky, Gods of, 23.
Myth of lifting of, 46-47, 67.
Red, an omen, 245.
Rim or root of, 199, 227.
Woman who lives in the middle
of, 198.
Slaves buried alive by Filipino, 170.
Killing of, at death of a chief, 78,
170, 263, 271. See also Sacrifice,
Human.
Purchase and taking of, 167, 257.
Tingoto figures likened to, 112.
Sleep, Absence of soul in, 58-60, 269.
Lethargic form of, 224.
Oleng forbids, for four nights, 101.
Smoke, for medicine and magic, 215,
232.
Snake as omen, 262, 270.
-bite, 213.
Dance named for a, 86.
Danger of killing a, 238.
Fabulous, 31, 39.
Meat of, not eaten, 244.
Somadeva: KATHA SARIT SAGARA, cited,
16, 20, 34, 35, 36, 40-41, 42, 47, 69,
70, 72, 74, 120, 467, 205; 208, 219,
248, 273, 274, 282 (bibl.)
Sonar, Account of rite, 125-131.
References to, 91. 94, 102, 104, 124,
153, 272.
Sonaran, the agong-altar, Characteri-
zation of, 91-92, 129.
Description of, 125-126.
Use of, at harvest, 175-176.
Songs, Bagobo, see Bagobo songs.
Filipino, 259, 275.
304 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Songs of the medium, 195 et seq.
Sores, 213, 224.
Soul, Left-hand, Characterization of,
58-61.
Diseases caused by, 223, 227-229.
Exploits of, 58-60, 228, 248.
Fate at death, 60-61, 63.
References to, 12, 30-31, 50, 62,
186, 225.
Sign of death given by, 246.
Soul, Nature of, 269-270.
Soul, Right-hand, Beliefs concerning
existence of, after death, 55-56, 265.
bathes on entering lower world,
54-55.
Characterization of, 50-58.
communicates with the living, 51-
53, 246.
dissolves under sun’s rays, 56.
References to, 12, 186, 190, 194.
Travel outfit for, 53-54, 190.
Souls of animals, 64-65, 270.
of inanimate objects, 53-54, 55, 64-
65, 81, 89, 270.
of man, 45-64.
Number of, 49-50, 270.
Sources of ceremonial and myth, Prob-
lem of, 250-282. ,
Sowing, 6. See also under Rice-sowing.
Spanish conquest, 4, 251, 277.
influence, 4-5, 189, 267, 279.
missionaries; 166, 189, 250, 265,
274, 275.
records, 250-251, 256-258, 269.
Spear as ikut, 205, 236.
Gift of, to priest, 184.
-shaft of Malaki t’Olu k’ Waig, 119.
thrusts, Distribution of, at sacri-
fice, 271.
Spears, Ceremonial use of, 82, 89, 103,
127, 136, 159, 162, 163, 168, 4181,
182-183.
Spells, see Magical spells and usages.
Spirit scarers, 113, 116.
worship, 272, 274.
Spiritual essence of food, etc., 53-54.
Spoon, Ceremonial, 80,142, 143, 176, 272.
Squatting posture, 190, 195.
Squirrel, Dance named for, &6.
Metamorphosis of, 71-72.
Stare, Fixed, directed on corpse and
bier, 188, 190.
directed magically on foe, 220.
Stars, Myths of, 46-48.
Devotions to, 44, 93, 265.
Steel, Arrow points of, 199.
Bird with claws and beak of, 47,74.
Sternberg, Leo, cited, 133-134, 282(bibl.)
Stevens, H. V., cited, 33.
Stone images, 264.
implements supplanted by iron, 6.
Tigbanua of the, 119.
Stones, metamorphosis into, 45, 71.
Stories, see Bagobo stories.
Straits Settlement, Tribes of, see Pe-
ninsular Malay.
Streams, God at source of the, see
Malaki t’Olu k’Waig.
Stroking and rubbing, 228, 230, 231,
232, 233, 234.
Substitution, Charms by, 104, 205, 208-
213.
Idea of, in human sacrifice, 169.
of fowl for man, 97, 103, 271.
of lavation at home for Pamalugu,
124.
Sugar-cane, 55, 67.
liquor, see Ceremonial liquor.
Sugé, Kaba’s wife, 105, 175, 176.
Suggestion, Mental, 205, 213-217, 273.
Sumatra, Home of Filipino in, 267.
Myths of eclipse in, 47.
References to, 270-271, 276, 277,
278.
Sacred trees in, 33.
Sun, Black men at the door of the, 67.
Devotions to the, 265,
Dissolving of spirits by, 56.
lllumination of lower world by,
A7, 55-56.
Myths of, 46-48, 67, 249.
Passage round earth of, 47.
Sundermann, H., cited, 49-50.
Sunlight, Demons dazed by, 274.
Sunrise, Gindaya sung till after, 158
Supreme god, 14-15, 16.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH
Swettenham, Frank Athelstane, cited,
70, 272, 282 (bibl.)
Swords offered on agongs, 127, 130.
References to, 154, 168, 236.
Tabu, Discussion of, 235-244.
Malik instructed concerning, 198.
on breaking spray of bulla, 176.
On breaking roof of Long House,
135.
On earthen pots for sacred food,
271.
on grasping ceremonial poles, 148.
on holding Ginum in the dark
fortnight, 114.
on laughing at reflection in the
water, 58.
on lights at manganito, 261.
on reciting correct number of ex-
ploits, 149.
on ridiculing small animals, 45-46.
on sale of certain objects, 173, 212.
on uttering certain names, 39, 165.
References to, 12, 30, 77, 196,197.
Sickness caused by breaking, 223,
224-225.
Tagal festivals, 95, 258-259.
literature, 267, 275.
mode of burial, 189, 263.
rites, myths and folklore, 33, 34,
37, 80, 166, 170, 193, 257, 258-
259, 260, 261-263.
Tagamaling, a demon, Characteristics
of, 35-36, 38.
Devotions to, 410.
References to, 24, 31, 407, 201, 255.
Tagaruso, demon, 29, 36, 37, 107, 110,
199, 201.
Tagasoro, demon, 26, 110, 226.
Taguan, receptacle, 100, 103, 106, 137.
Tagubum, Point, 4.
Takawanan, see Soul, Right-hand.
Taliduma, marriage ceremony, 181-185.
Talun, Bagobo district, 5, 6-7, 8, 18,
89, 96, 98, 141, 153, 154, 155, 156,
158, 162, 194, 195, 196, 201, 216, 230,
231, 243.
|
305
Talun, Ginum at, and Tubison com-
pared, 153-155, 156, 157-158.
Tambara, bamboo prayer stand, a
primitive shrine, 88.
at blacksmith’s forge, 27-28, 89.
at Pamalugu, 120, 126, 127, 129.
characterized, 87-90.
described, 16, 87-88.
Functions of, 21, 87-89.
for god of fire, 24.
for guardian spirit, 28.
ka langit (in the sky), 47.
made by Malik, 124, 125, 130.
put up third day, 102.
References to, 16, 154-155, 168,
174, 203, 237, 253-254, 269.
Tambayang, a rare form of embroidery,
22, 69, 208.
Tangos, an island mentioned in song,
165.
Tankulu, warriors’ kerchief, displayed
on frame at Ginum, 101.
offered to gods, 91.
References to, 155, 224, 253, 254,
264.
removed at Pamalugu, 121.
Uses of, cloth, 241.
worn at dances, 85, 86.
worn by brave men, 10, 25, 83.
Tanung, Account of the ceremony of,
113-116.
Main, 113, 115-116.
Preliminary, 113, 114-115.
References to, 98, 102, 4103, 104,
44105-144-
Tap-tap, tool for striking agongs, 84,
222.
Tarabumé, god of the crops, 92-93.
Characteristics of, 22.
References to, 41, 14, 44, 172, 174.
Tattooing, 264-265.
Tawney, C. H. (tr.): KATHA SARIT
SAGARA, see Somadeva.
Temple among Filipino, 261.
Textile, Arraying of dead in, 187.
Display of, at Ginum, 136.
Gift of, to priest, 184.
Magical ceremony over, 209-210.
306
Textile, Offering of, to gods, 179, 268.
References to, 42, 67, 68, 74, 99,
400, 101, 127, 156, 164, 172,
186.
Tabu on sale of unfinished, 224,
240.
Thatch, 67, 96, 100.
Theft, 221, 222, 264, 270.
Thickets, Sacred, 92, 108, 115-116, 254,
261.
Thirst, 130, 273.
Thunder, 39, 44, 48, 49, 196, 245, 270.
-god, see Kilat.
Thurston, Edgar, 282.
Tigbalag, demon of Filipino, 261.
Tigbanua, Bagobo demon, Character-
istics of, 34-35, 38.
Classes of, 35.
Devotions to, 108, 110, 116, 1419,
420, 125.
not functioning as anito, 194.
References to, 18, 19, 34, 44, 61,
92, 105, 107, 229, 255, 261.
Tigyama, god of the home, 41, 19-20,
90, 149, 124.
a hanging altar, 20, 90, 181, 183
184, 229, 230.
Tikus, a fiber legband, 196, 207.
Timbalung, mythical animal bringing
disease, 39, 227.
Tingoto, charm figures, 103, 412-413.
Tiun, female deity, 16, 17.
Tobacco, 53-54, 89, 163, 192.
tube, 190.
Toddy from the cocoanut palm, 218.
Tolokai, Headhunters among, 161.
Tolus, a class of gods, 11, 26-28.
Tolus ka Balekat, Characteristics of,
27.
Ginum celebrated for, 94, 131, 138,
142-144,
Human sacrifice for, 94.
References to, 158-159, 161, 166,
199, 200, 202.
Ritual performed for, 45, 91.
urges Ginum to be hastened, 99.
Tolus ka Balekayo, female divinity,
27, 202.
?
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Tolus ka Kawayan, god of the bamboo,
27, 99.
ka Talegit, god of the loom, 27,
198, 204.
Tongkaling, Datu, 5, 95, 148, 167.
Toradja, tribe of Celebes, 66, 90, 107.
Torch, 70, 128, 202, 237, 258.
Torches to be extinguished at mang-
anito, 195 et seq. 238, 261.
Tortoise shell as medicine, 217, 232.
Totemic origin for tabu not found, 243.
Tradition, 56, 65-74, 266, 267, 274.
Trance, 59, 156-157, 269.
Transmission of myth and cultural
elements, 257, 266, 277, 278.
Trap, 191, 228.
Travel outfit for the soul,
Tree burial, 192.
Charm laid on stump of, 214.
Chaste woman like a, 71.
Falling of, an omen, 60, 246.
Haunted, 33, 60, 254, 261-262, 270.
houses, 192.
Metamorphosis into a, 71.
Women appear from, 273.
Trial marriage, 181.
Trousers, 183, 187.
Tual, Lansium domesticum (lansonis),
164, 218.
Tuban, Bagobo village, 8, 165.
Tubison, Bagobo mountain village, 5,
8, 18, 24, 28, 127, 153-158, 164, 239.
Ginum at, 153-158.
Tuglay, god of marriage, 29.
old man of myth, 65-67, 69, 72-74,
192, 249.
Tuglibung, goddess ever virgin, 29.
old woman of myth, 47, 65-69,
73-74, 192.
Tulung, mythical bird, 40, 227.
Tungkaling, son of Kaba, 8, 73, 202.
Tungo, a god, 154,164. See also Duma
Tungo.
53-54, 190.
Uan, son of Kaba, &, 29.
Ubog, a god, 197, 199.
Ubnuling, divine hero of myth, 16, 47.
BENEDICT, BAGOBO CEREMONIAL, MAGIC AND MYTH 307
Ulit, mythical romance, 70-74, 164,
166, 275, 278.
Underworld, see Gimokudan.
Unfinished articles, Tabu on sale of,
240.
Ungayan, Obal’s daughter, 187-188, 190.
United States. Bureau of the Census,
cited, 24, 25, 282 (bibl.)
War Department, cited, 167, 282
(bibl.)
Vampire, 270, 274.
Variation, 266, 278.
Vepas, 20, 34, 221, 272, 273.
Velarde, Murillo, Map by, 251.
VENDIDAD, 231, 272.
Venison, 87, 147, 183.
Venturillo, Manuel Hugo, 282.
Vestigial performance, 162.
Virgin, 181, 208, 242.
Virtue, 71, 273.
Visayan beliefs, myths and customs,
33, 46, 47, 166, 185, 187, 255, 257,
259, 265, 277.
demons, 34, 39, 40, 42-43.
influence, 4, 185, 266.
literature, 267, 275.
mode of burial and obsequies, 62-
63, 99, 189, 263.
priests and shrines, 10, 92, 95, 260.
textiles, 6, 126.
Visayas (archipelago), 62, 166, 257, 277.
Wail, Ceremonial, 187-188, 190.
Wak-wak, Fabulous crow, 40, 214-215.
Wake, 42, 187, 238, 270.
War cry and song, 17, 104, 133, 158,
162-163, 198.
expeditions, 159-160.
gods, see Mandarangan.
References to, 10, 257.
shield, Ceremonial and magical
use of, 89, 168, 219-220, 236.
Warneck, Joh., cited, 47-48, 265, 279,
282 (bibl.)
Water flasks, 98, 101, 103, 124-125.
Water, Health-giving power of, 81-82,
421, 123, 273.
Offering to the, 4119.
ordeal, 222-223.
Spirits of, 18, 19, 21, 23, 24-95,
125, 222.
sources, 249. See also Malaki t’Olu
k’ Waig.
Use of, in substitution ceremony,
210-212.
See also Pamalugu.
Wax moulds, Casting from, 6, 22, 69,.
427.
Wealth secured by rites and offerings,
94, 125, 129.
shown in palm, 247.
Weaving, 6, 66, 68, 99.
White fowl for priestess, 202.
cloth as offering, 174, 269.
crockery, 88, 183, 184, 260, 278..
See also Ceremonial dishes.
food, 176.
-haired boy of the myths, 249.
monkey, 48, 245.
woman in the river, 202,
230.
Wilken, cited, 49-50.
Wine in Filipino rites, 80, 259.
Winnower, 178, 207.
Witchcraft, 217, 219-221.
Women, Chanting of, at festivals, 77,
155, 239!
Clothing of, in pre-Spanish times,
66.
Dancing of, 85-87, 147,
Feast of, 4/a. mo:
Few, at Pamalugu, 124.
hunt for lice, 124.
Ideal, of the songs, 70-71.
Officiate or assist at ceremonies,.
8-9, 10, 76-77, 105-110, 119-123,
155-156, 168, 173, 174-179.
officiate as mediums, 9, 10, 193-
203, 259.
Myth and folklore about, 22, 37,
71, 203, 208, 227, 261, 273.
Rice to be pounded by, for Ginum,,
100.
996-297,
308 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Women, Sacred food tabued to, 79, 242. |
See also Old women.
Wood, Tigbanua of the, 107, 110.
Wood, Bits of, as medicine, 215, 232,
233.
Word charms, 209-210, 213, 2414-215,
218, 222, 232. See also Ritual words.
World, see Earth.
Xavier, Saint Francis, Preaching of,
250.
Yaksha and Yakshivi, Aryan demons, |
34, 36.
Yalatandin, protector of women, 22.
Yama, Aryan god, 20.
Bagobo term for pet, 19-20.
Yellow skin, 224-225,
stain for sacred food, 139, 268.
Ylang-vylang as medicine, 234.
Young men, Ceremonial duties of, 9
76-77, 115, 138-142, 147.
Chanting of, see Ceremonial chant.
Effusion of, at Pamalugu, 122.
Office of medium taken by, 11.
Roof of Long House made by, 100.
Yting, Datu, 5, 8, 28, 29, 444, 129, 130,
148, 150, 151, 175, 176, 178, 179, 205,
209.
Zambales, 116, 170, 275.
Zamboanga, 4.
Zobmorphic demons, 29, 31, 38-40, 227.
Zuniga, Joaquin Martinez de, see Mar-
tinez de Zuniga, Joaquin, O. S. A.
7
Annats N. Y. Acap, Scr. Votume XXV, Prate I
‘GROUP OF BAGOBO PEOPLE A D TYPICAL BAGOBO HOUSE
ho cs
Fic. 1. — Group of mountain Bagobo in festival costume. In the foreground are Datu
Auga of Bago (left) and Duth" Pohgkaling of Sibulan. The women (left to
right) are Otik, Sipa, Ubing, Ingan and Sagomayan.
Fie, 2. — Typical Bagobo house with walls and thatch of nipa palm.
Bee tee! Cb. £4
é
¥ Fiaurp 2
iad . fy 0 oli | CA at Heke | me
iy ANNALS NEW York ACADEMY OF SCIEN CES 4 :
q
LF | __ Women, Sacred food tabued to, 79, 049. Yellow skin, 294-995,
1 f See also Old women.
ie - Wood, Tigbanua of the, 107, 110. Ylang-ylang as ‘resilcthan 234,
Wood, Bits of, as faalieine, 215, 232, | Young men, Ceremonial duties of !
233. 76-77, 115, 138-142, 147. Me a
Word charms, 209-210, “213, 214-215, Ghautine of, see Ceremonial chant, ert
218, 222, 232. See also Ritual words. Effusion of, at Pamalugu, 122. —
A World, see Earth. Office of medium taken.by, 11. Aan
Tae Roof of Long House made by, 100.
MH . Yting, Datu, 5, 8, 28, 29, 114,129, 190,
Xavier, Saint Francis, Preaching of, 148, 150, 45M, 175, 176, 178, 179, 205,
Bt a0: | 209. . Ati
? 4 vba +f, v4)
} ae
Yaksha and Yakshivi, Aryan demons, | Zambales, 116, 170, 275. ¥ et
Ds Ties B | Zamboanga, 4.
Yulatandii, protector of women, 22. | Zodmorphic demons, 29, 31, 38-40, aad
Yama, Aryan god, 20. | Zuhiga, Joaquin Martines de, see Mar- —
Bagobo term we pet, 19-20. | tinez de Zufiga, Joaquin, O. S. AL of
Aik { ATAIS mes
42U0H OFODAE LADITTT A“ ALTOEI OLODAL to qu0AD
uis@ ore bavorgerot edt of .sntwteoo [eviteet ai odogsd aistavom io quo — .[ ot
ot fie!) aeusow od .ailodi2 to gailedgaoT ots bas (ftel) ogs to sguA
mayantogae has asgal .goidS .sqi@ AiO 918 (tdgir f
alsg sqia to dotedt bas allew dtiw sevod odoged [sviqzT — .& om i a
#
| |
XXV, Prate I
VOLUME
Sct.
ACAD.
Ve
ANNALS N.
s
TATE Leen clea ela
]
tE
FIGuI
GES
Votume XXV, Prats II
Il ATADY
GQISIHZAAW GZA AANIS DxIGIOH “hale 410 OAIIANDZOT UTAd
Annats N. Y. Acap. Scr. Votume XXV, Pratre II
Cw
pra ay
A i
£ :
Al i
*
a fi :
vrs | ae
Awnats N. Y. Acam Sc
coe
. wpers: r ?.
Vy g SANA ETE
eps — Vorume XXV,§Prare JT
shobdgoes0e9
pecasoooooeango? .
2 BORNE >
a PS)
9908060000989
odo 0000Oee
Go- / > POOR
600
oo
$80 066 S00 6
<9096) gooe
ag
%
engnoooneans™ :
% S %, |
a vty Sauoe yy 6 - Ve
. 59.9090? 6 "ya, ye Ne K€ y. oO 900, 000 “4
00900009 39 org
e0sp000000 2 B
, oreoos
og iS
$e
o
°
J
°
9
Sd
°
°
°
rs
iJ
9
°
°
°
A
°
Oo
:.
°
9
°
°
°
4
°
3
323
3.2 9
° ha
.
“Sin05
®o,
[90 ono'og.&
= ~ bh
es 5 2008 3
; = ears C8809000
0000900000 0080000090000 908,
000009 0000900 900090900008
2S %@ S
=
ba
o
2
o
o
2
99
S S va)
¥ byt 4 % 9
0000900000000096000 PECROOOSS
29008990000 0009099090099
2G0 oo OOOO SOD GOOOOL®S OOSE™
a1 409 290. 96d0 de
Pe
999
ar
1999
Figure 1
CEREMONIAL KERCHIEF AND CARRYING BAG OF THE BAGOBO
’ Fie. I. = Ceremonial ¢ankulu which may be worn only by those Bagobo men who have
killed ot} en.
Fic. 2, — Man’s ca bag (kabir) worn on the back to hold medicine-case, lime tube,
~
betel boxtim@eother necessaries.
FIGURE
Ve
Pe)
Tht ATAIT
OdODAM AHT 10 DAA YAITAAAD GAZA AAIHMIAAA IAIZOMAATD
eer ora on sens odogell seodt ef ylao atow od yer doidw whywisnt [sinomoer9) — i, ‘aed
Nees .agat t9dto bollid Pak,
Waders anil en9-onini boos blod ot dssd odt ao ato (xsbwd) ged gaiyiiss ene — Ng rd +e
fig zoiteze9ou 190 bas zod [sted ;
RA WAAAANANAOOAAAANAS
VotumE XXV,€Prare IT
SSS SSN
SARA
Acap. Sct.
Ye
ANNALS N.
%
fae
” 12808 00.900 S
8900 000 606 oy %
9999690060000
99 900° 9060 900 060 0
$%999000999.90000009000,
S.J gooococee
°
90
°
8
S000 2
O000e
ood
20900
yonee>
Ooo 9e0o
°
°
o
°
%
s
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
o
@
°
Ss
°
°
°
$
°,
o 0%
°
°
°
°
oe
°®
Pd
%,
s.
6000
9090000000000000000009
2ooeooego0e
~%
o20e000
Sooo cooeooDopooel OOOO?
e]
© &% & %
B vosbctooee Gove?
So0o0eccd000000009
999H00200000000
° So.
bi)
190900000000900 009
$9000900000 0005 04
00000
320000000000
3s000
3
r)
9000006
Co
groce
s
vvo2
wwe
eonook
°°
ay
,
Oogat C089
e
o 09.09% e@
ee
&,, 0960.
090040 H6
2090 Obe05
O48
()
S
eo
o9,
S
1000
0000090000
b Andd be)
Ss Yo
ogoo
0099000000000000
0028
00 s 34
8
05
90000
o%
%
S
°
SO00000000
000006 009009909009060 2900000
So
%
oso oeo? =
.
6
9
~)
00 00°
099 995 00000
62004
Qeacvesr
eoon000 00990009
°
o
5
%
O99 goo 0005
, Nd 9999!
( Fa MOOD.
2g 1
Ficul
9
FIGURI
5 ee od oe | » >. ~~ oo. et Ties ay
1 isd nen. (ft & a 8 4. Sart pag 5 ¥ :
vee se ‘ ! f as
ht AR a , ‘ iy %,
r wt peut ei J -. ° Ce 5
LN Re 4p we Ve J rey ;
J
: *
Awnats N. ¥. Acap. Sen >
PLATE IV
BAGOBO MEDICINE CAS$E;AXD]WOMAN’S BASKET
case of woven rattan, with telescope lid, for holding
asket which is hung on the left shoulder
tle knife, beads and materials for embroidery.
Figure 2
4
{
bs
+
4
4
; a
bi
24
es.
_
UP
e ls
4
ath
b eeiay
° 4
5 4 cs)
¢
~ % ¥
t
t
r 4
4
4
n
VI ATAID
THAZAT 2UAMOW GZA 249 AVIOIGAM OAODAA
gotblod sot ,bil sqooeslet dtiw .astist nevow to 9e89 snisibom e‘asor DIO — .I ail
tsboit bos esoote tail goth svitea zartisdo ’
t9blvode tiol odt ao gaud ei doidw todesd e‘asmow odogad sdt to ensmiosq@ — & .oi't
-visbiotd ars 101 elsitetem bas ebsod stiad olttil s oaisibour ,2tua-so018 enistaos bas
Annats N. Y. Acap. Scr Votume XXV, Prater IV
om
FieuaxE |
Figure 2
— x
comers 4
sue
resus
io
ane,
T+:
.- he han) K
2
V ATAID
24AATTAT GA210“Al HTIW GATAAODAd 24a NT OOAMAA
jedt omil boishvwoy sdt blod ot odoged adi yd been o16 (semgnd) 2odut s2odT
zisasoo1s dtiw bowers 2i
Annats N, Y. Acap. Sci. VotumMe XXV, Prats V
OTOIO
‘HOO eG
Be ee
ne
blaAle stants YY.
oN se
ape’ “is Ae i Gr
fh 4 ah teeth j \ ¥."
¥
3%
Annats N. Y. Acap, Scr.
Shuman figures
ars
MIST = |
, 7 o7L 4
: “S: t :
7 4 K
S a ~~. m fy! i “
ies aaa | i eee
} AY ht 1 * iD ete es
a A terete PP, ‘ ; ‘¢
b ~*~. Tk Pat wi.
he } :
4 * ‘ Un ae WM i i
q iY i ,, iff Mw r, oe ;
i fi ;
F f ,
ih h aah
‘ a i 4 ee Aa 3 Juks
it M ‘
j 7 i
# 4 yaar eA pees 2} .
i * ie ae Meld? ete |
Y yee > " a)
hh " - .
; tae
fp ‘
TESTE tas
, al 7
OMe border shows
<8
IV ATAID
GUTZAT IMAH “AVOW YIA“IA FO ALATA
awod2 tsbiod oT .2ts9qqe ogizsb miedo slibosots odd olitzes to sqyd 2idd al
zoe aed gott zoAsae ,zbiid to enoitssaszctqet [snoitnovaos
til ite mort awseib zsvitom bas
Annats N. Y. Acap. Sct. VotumME XXV, Prater VI
Sy
4 Ls u 4
fA it 5 B ;
f ‘ *
Se e763 0',.4
f eee ST AL
B3 la 4 aes v7
rs ax I
¥i i 1
p af mG 19"
ae i ny i,
i nf . \y
mie
ly
_ ys fl
4 y
4
i
0
i
bs
FA
i
fe
eu
%
ra
i}
a
s
a ( vest
Ss
'
i ?
ha
= 0
i
N
i
y
,
.
'
;
+
=
I
wv
.
7
VotuME XXV, Prare VIT
Ceremonial clagetseoter ip shirt, Avorn Bs bomen yang women.
afk . ; B oof
Scr.
Y. ACAD.
Annas N.
WV ATA
TAIH2 JAIAZOMAAAD
siiow bas asnt odogsd blo yd atow ttide qenod borolos-to1slo Lsinomts199
jo ssbi0d 6 diiw ,zozib Lede lis9sq-to-tsdiont to ai aoissi0o9h oT
emiow slosAsgeT s +0 as-slid s yd saob yisbio1dms
IIA StV1g ‘AXX awato, ‘IOS ‘(VOW “{ ‘N STIVNNY
tint
4)
Votume XXV, Prater VIII
Sci.
ACAD,
Awnats N. Y.
i
5
7
“ah “oniw lg odd ai detiaod se 0 son rie
Votume XXV, Phare VIII
. ¥. Acap. Sct.
J
ANNALS
rr
< "sy -*
+.
wig OE
<< oY a
¢
Si Aaa fn
Fi
PUBLICATIONS
OF THE
NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(Lyceum or Naturat History, 1817—1876)
The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz.:
(1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain the
scientific contributions and reports of researches, dnectlien with the
records of meetings and similar matter. i
and is sold at the es price of three dollars per volume. T
articles composing the volume are printed separately, each in its 4
cover, and are distributed in bundles on an average of three per year
? The price of the separate articles depends upon their length and the
number of illustrations, and may be learned upon application to th
Librarian of the Academy. The author receives his separates as soon M
as his paper has been printed, the date of issue appearing aboy
the title of each paper. i
(2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are issued
irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall be devoted to
monographs relating to some particular department of Science. Volume I
is devoted to Astronomical Memoirs, Volume II to Zodlogical Memoi
ete. The hf is one dollar per ae as issued.
any of the publications of the Academy should be addressed to —
THe LIBRARIAN,
New York Academy of oe
care of -
New York, N. Y.
PRINTED BY E. J. BRILL, Leypen (Hon.anp).
: } ul .
i
ANNALS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Vol. XXV, pp. 309—416.
Editor, R. W. Towser
TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF
WESTERN MEXICO
BY
J. ALDEN Mason
NEW YORK
PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY
1917
THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
(Lyceum or Natura History, 1817—1876)
OFFICERS, 1917
President—Micuak. Ipvyorsky Puptn, Columbia University
Vice-Presidents—Ernest KE. Smitu, J. McKeen Carrent,
Dovetas W. Jonson, HERMANN von W. ScHuLte
Corresponding Secretury—HeENry KE. Crampton, American Museum
Recording Secretary—Ratpeu W. Tower, American Museum
Treasurer —Henry J. Cocuran, 389 Fifth Avenue a
Librarian—Ratren W. Tower, American Museum
Editor—Ratru W. Tower, American Museum
SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY
Chairman—Ernest E. Suiru, 50 East 41st Street
Secretary—Victor EK. Levine, College of Physicians and Surgeons
SECTION OF BIOLOGY
Chairman—WERMANN von W. Scuuuts; College of Physicians and
Surgeons
Secretary—WittiamM K. Greaory, Américan Museum
SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY
Charman—Doveias W. Jounson, Columbia University
Secretary—Cuester A. Reeps, American-Museum
SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY
Chairman—J. McKeen Carrer, Columbia University
Secretary —Rosert H. Lowre, American Museum
The sessions of the Academy are held on Monday evenings at 8:15
o'clock from October to May, inclusive, at the American Museum of
Natural History, 77th Street and Central Park, West.
[ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Scr, VoL. XXV, pp. 309—416, June, 1916]
TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF WESTERN MEXICO!
By J. ALDEN Mason
(Presented by title before the Academy; 27 March, 1916)
CONTENTS
Page
LU GTA 58 RS SOO CA A i 311
PN VTE Ie ete a VAI ISS SSE Me GAS atin 4 «dx Shaiatehs. aoe eee cee 313
Brae tomes CHAT ACUORISEIES 216. 3.0. ielehat ios fa Beli-w's edie Save: a aR tee Ee oak 313
i) SRE ONT Ss SOR 88S er as ae . 313
RUE ELE FOOL) SI me al A ah OE ee TES os Raa em a ee 14
MPR PEE. ot Palen Mas PRONE OR ewok Tbs sa.e le Bae ea eee 314
Roma MLA ESV SLEM «70 ke = hontai i tamale ce Fee 2s os ole as nna leases 315
oT Ease Dep AR rn Pea irae. 3s Sk a ea ad Re Ree To a 319
PEMOMEC POGEBSES 22.0). 5) alas /oderoke Pant Mo hh cage nde ae wg 8k Goce 0d odes biapa ea o19
SUE SOLS SOUMOS rl) Watt PR A Walia hl eisrct Ss Chad Cale Via e wieoes Niele 319
SRT esto AR eee AI SIR ne Ha es ee ce PAT Pate 320
IU epeP ANAL o8 4 RP hol A atcha cpt adel a alata Ae HAG Sah daa ie SIRS s chase hehe eens 321
ASSUMUEAEIGRCANG, CUGSTTTARTOUs. 12... «1.2-fc\ + vais aferaboin' fase c/are a dteleidie tie oeees 321
i LL ee Month Ske Seb MMe! 5 ORE Ee aR Pe ee Ce hence tea 321
PI RSC MSM a ts, Sob i MIN tae 6 Na fy heals Wea rcs 9) rato ece-cay Seah tae otal Seah ae 321
ENONEIIC CNATHCLERISH Gsm mitts sis oh sue 4/4 Shins Ss cRatw a Wee Gee bates 321
MAMAS VCED Stems ering ch ytbns ss tah sc icics ca ete aie «Nay PL ag. 22
STG MEME Ao Some hal ok ah anes a a dA Bara sha at<!3'ak sets aap pe eR ie ass Acre 323
MOAT, SEM GEO POSTELOI. 115%.) Fa. rete NoraeR bane fold ako She dca 323
pga USEC HA MOBENI RES 2.9. tops cai 21 'Ae ao, <<! 2 ARMA G AMA hia ocele etek he'd a tthe 324
DE e GLEAN NOCESSES.« o's facile deren iG AMMADNS Goo sa hate wes cetoee 328
1p io 3 eg hale fe ae CROP ie Can RRR.» Jy ac cre te eR Re 328
Prowom nah possession.) 2 crepe le iefule =e = ete lol PAM, WOES atte etotieh aay: 331
PGSeE RAVE (SURES )3/ LAr egmtan ott ere mehr Pe tenants the ttt see 332
BRO POSIAGTIS: Wo. <1 ee et EE Lira Tote SPs Sees aad See ae 334
PEE RFs. siaucttin do ott RE CAIRNE LEN ee SE RRS RATES shalt ke a he 336
PMAGEY SIS, Ol EHS VERDAL GOMIDIO® i7l-t0) ein scins Sc aoe a ok eee ee 306
MO RNCRS -.\ ON ef eR EER Ee tp Pe RRA Re ty Meta eo meso tls Bh. 337
UES) GT) se Ce OR oc oe) Eee ee Roem pe ema eee 338
Prommninal SUbjectants esis eda ssl c. oS Uke Avothe he dense tay < a00
PR AEWRLEE NOs: Walaa dA te) aa ele PRs s, «ces ah, dis kek owen she eh eNO 339
Re SRN E LRIRRC SPER alse hal BN A ta POM I oa) «(she <in! wie cvele deltas bo Meee 339
ie AR INANEIE™ SUMEEIO LOR. «27.05, dha < viel tge wed oasis lon! Sta aRS hs doa ee od ee BOO
BNC RRP ORME TLS wo NRE Yat AD. era Pd Sahat cghe's «an IAT SY Se SEN Bit 340
UCHSEAEEUD ARCO DORA EONS tas aiiha-'. che telat sci dici a) hai SAG hw aici pvc! cae boos 340
MONEE RE NACOL DON AUS Leads A chia. nod iia Pune ey. GOEA ete: 341
* Manuscript received by the Editor, 28 November, 1915.
310 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Page
Medial :particles..x..:- \.cjcc aa Stoo stil ime ete gee os ee 342
Locative “particles... .../70% Tasks esis» ceueale eae © eet a eee 342
Modal .particles. . 02.) vic ¥ cae bist. te plete sates or eee 343
Final .elements . oo... 50,0 sie aw & tia 5 oe ee eee 350
Pronominal object...........- seek d Sea nial Soe Se OS ee 350
Verb, stems 20 < onis2 8a tae 2 she Hse ose eee oe oie ee eee 3900
Morphological classification of verb stems....................00. dol
Composition, of verb .stems). 0.20) 2. eo. ies tte ot ie 351
Singular ‘and plural verb “stems «1... ce ence see ile eee ee 301
Reduplication of verb’ stems s....0.5 5. 002 sas Cote ele 352
Internal modifications of ;yerb ‘stems. «0.2... 63.02 -3ureee | eer 352
Normal in == iterative ss s.0. ick... dew os «0s ae ie ene 353
Singular: 91 == pluvalig <2 02% 0S. aces oral cte ices ee 353
Formation .of the preterit: stem” <\7-).%. Jn). ose ee 353
Glossary of verb ‘stems: . ci)... 5-2. cjs/eicfabisiwinye ess Win ele 0a al Opa 395
Tense-mode suffixes so... 3)5).'6 5 si doen O uit bo sels iota eerie ee 362
Modal ‘Saffixes 20.5 i tc. 5) semlietee otal 6,5 ote aeedy oleae ae 363
Tense suffixes fe 02.5 0.05 See Seedieet vie Cette acne eee eee 369
Past tense aiqsv.ss-< «sed icisiele whe le'n = erst ote Sipe ieee ee 369
Futare: tenses: 2...) oc. bs Fest beige oe ee es ae 371
PrOnOUNS . os cei silo ee Phe tide oe waniele no's carp ieee eee 373
AD) eCEIVES o6i05)e's vse = ee © mire, ditto co esol wie, «sagittis SRS ERS = aoe 374
PNA VER DSc. oe CS eeatkaeie osteo weselhgnd lw 4 tha ielela Depa aN eee 374
Locative adverbial ‘particles... .. 2.2... nis seas Wo ap cles s Sele ae 374
Indefinite and interrogative locative particles...................-. 373
Locative ‘ad verbse ic. 2.2. ossi.8 Son y.\2100 tie Se ecionaek ets eee 376
Temporal adverbs -).). a. si etve o's odes oo ped wiereen Senne ge 376
Miscellaneous ‘particles, ...«:.. .2c.s.'s- caw Stee cite aes eee 376
INDIMOLAIB Noe eo Spa's Se Sk Parma 0 nw i ttre We ie FCs et ee 377
COonclusiGn : 225 30.05 5 woos tere, eee 'ncleng oe Pu sp eran Ree re (OR eee ieee ee 377
Relationship of Tepecano and Nahuatl....°% ...)....s.4 seu «seen 377
ID OUE waite tien aicierarey sistas aie ire sptw wala wei Sies0 are ty elacuiirm ini Sailer ls eee 378
Specimen. texts 5. o2.-+'cinjetece.s, sister aint ere alee wsisbais' bas =o piglet etch ee 378
Fox and “Opossam -ciaie's oo c:tsie’s visie'e om yy -slecbidlavela/niit »ininco"™ eon cutee 79
Translations a iso'oc oi eww s nis's oucip Cab ay oeiw ms sa vienna ae sa 380
ATID YBIG 2.00 Goin u's o-sis's x'n'a'0'0. io iv't wild wiein i bes9. 0 ¥ MeIM tA nig an 381
The Deerslayer.:. «. si eivss code e-niic’s vinaiswe bh vish a's ole We viele s 6 eke 386
TrANSLAtiOn: > 2s: aos ein oo 0 e'b 0 nm en's nb penis > miata steelers s meee yee 388
Analysis... s:ci0u 0 on 'sals oviole a sad Vis'y eG.» 0°05 hinietee eis Nii igts Steen 388
A Journey to Santa Maria Ocotdn. ..:..0.0..00se.>05 seul Sere 393
Translation «ss 5:0'%'s:0ee sie s.via'b ach vince mte Sainte e Peale 8kte te te 395
AMIEL Y BIB sis ui scare i'w oe vos dRionty ae ON oe Ome 5 Pe ee ge -o.. 396
The ‘Deer. Hunt, sss: oi 2d.’ Aine kcly ws ee sls Niele eiale ee eee 401
Translation. « > .divcie ou oie as aisle & hi6'slale oinse 019 ete init thie aie een 406
Anal yBisi so 0 is cs. aie ¥ op bo dae dlacminin sew hy bie p olets tO reiarinety meil a 408
AULD
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 311
INTRODUCTION
The Tepeeano Indians compose one of the smaller native groups
indigenous to the mountains of the Sierra Madre Occidental of western
Mexico. To-day they are confined to the unimportant village of
Azqueltan and the adjacent fields. These lie in the barranca or canon
of the Bolanos River in the northern part of the Mexican state of
Jalisco, near the well known mine of Bolanos and adjoining the
country of the Huicholes which lies to the west. Here the remnants
of this formerly more extensive tribe dwelt in comparative isolation
until about 1904 when the rapid growth of neighboring settlements
caused a sudden breaking down of their isolation.
To-day the remaining representatives of the group differ little
from their neighbors. For the most part they own their rocky and
infertile hillsides on which they grow corn in coamiles without the
use of ploughs. Houses of adobe are frequent but those of the
aboriginal thatch-roof type are more common. The medium of com-
munication to-day is exclusively Spanish and only the old or middle-
aged retain fluency in the aboriginal tongue. The older religion
exists only in the memory of the conservative, much mixed with
Christian ideas, but akin to the other native religions of this region,
particularly to that of the Cora.
The earliest references to the Tepecano are found in the Fran-
ciscan Relations reported by Orozco y Berra. * According to these,
the earliest settlements made in the neighborhood of Azqueltan were
in the territory of the Teules-Chichimecos who spoke Tepecano.
Other languages of this group are given as Cazcan and Tecuexe.
Orozco y Berra accordingly allots territory on his map to Tepecano,
Colotlan, Teul-Chichimee-Cazean and Coca-Tecuexe. All of these he
reports as extinet tongues, showing to what insignificance the group
had sunk by 1864. Tepecano and Colotlan specifically, and the
others by inference, he considers as dialects of Cora.
Nothing further was heard of the Tepecanos until the visits of
* ManvueL Orozco y Berra: “Geografia de las Lenguas y Carta Etnografica de México,
pp- 49, 279, 282; México, 1864.
312 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Lumholtz * and Hrdlitka * in 1898—1902. The former did not visit
Azqueltin but met several members of the tribe. He speaks of the
language as a branch or dialect of Nahuatl. Hrdlitka, however,
paid several visits to the pueblo and correctly classes the language
as a branch of the Tepehuane group. Other recent contributions to
the literature on the Tepecano are by Dr. Nicolas Leon ° and Tho-
mas and Swanton. °
The Tepecanos were among the natives known to the Spanish
by the comprehensive term chichimecos. The question of the identity -
of these legendary people has been discussed by Thomas and Swan-
ton® and by Hrdlitka.* It is certain that the Tepecanos formerly
occupied a more extensive area and probably populated the famous
city of Teul. With the now extinet kindred languages immediately
to the south, Tepecano probably formed the southernmost language
of the Pima group, which distinction it certainly possesses as present.
There can likewise be no doubt that they are practically, at least
from a linguistic standpoint, an isolated group of Tepehuane. The
latter name is universally applied to them at present, though patri-
archs admit to the former name Tepecano.* A casual inspection of
Tepehuane vocabularies and grammar * offers proof of the remark-
ably close resemblance between the languages. Moreover, a similar
observation proves the statement of early missionaries” that the
Tepehuane language differs little from the Pima, both upper and
lower. In fact, the Tepecano and the Pima of Arizona, the southern-
® Cart Lumportz: Unknown México. New York, 1902. (Edicién Espafiola, Nueva York,
1904.)
“ AreS Hrpritxa: “The Chichimecs and their Ancient Culture, with Notes on the Te-
pecanos and the Ruin of La Quemada, Mexico”. American Anthropologist (n. s.), Vol. 5,
N°. 3, 1908.
Nicotas Leén: Familias Lingiiisticas de México. México, 1902.
* Cyrus Taomas and Jonn R. Swanton: “Indian Languages of Mexico and Central
America’. Bulletin 44, Bur. Am. Eth., Washington, 1911.
7 During my first visit to Azqueltan the name Tepecano was denied by all informants,
On my second trip I was informed quite unexpectedly by an old patriarch that the true
name of the tribe was “tepekan”. I must therefore retract certain statements made on
p. 345 of the Proceedings of the XVIII International Congress of Americanists, London, 1912.
* The only Tepehuane grammar known to science is that of Benito Rinaldini:
Gramitica, Diccionario y Cuatecismo; México, 1743. Francisco Pimentel gives a digest
in his Cuadro Deseriptivo y Comparativo de las Lenguas Indigenas de México; México,
1862, 1874. A copy of the original, which is of extreme rarity, is in the Ayre Col-
lection of the Newberry Library in Chicago.
° Orozco y Berra: op. cit., p. 37.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 315
most and the northernmost members of the group, appear to be more
closely related than the Tepecano and Huichol, adjacent tongues.
The material for the present sketch was secured in Azqueltan
during a stay of five months in the winters of 1911—1912 and
1912—1913 while I was Fellow from the University of Pennsyl-
vania to the International School of Mexican Anthropology. While
the study of the language was the principal object of the expedition,
yet the greater portion of the linguistic data consists of a number
of native prayers in text which it is hoped to publish soon as part
of a study of the religion. A few mythological texts were taken
and these are appended to this sketch for purposes of illustration.
PHONOLOGY
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
The Tepecano language gives quite a pleasant acoustic effect to
the ear accustomed to English. Fortis and velar sounds are missing,
as is marked aspiration; affricatives are rare and consonantal com-
binations simple. Glottal stops are frequent but not abrupt. The
sounds are clear-cut and generally easily distinguishable. Quantity,
both vocalic and consonantal, is marked, so that the acoustic effect
received approaches that of a telegraph instrument, a low-toned
flow with constant hesitations. Stress accent is probably negligable
and pitch accent is scarcely noticeable in continued speech.
VOCALIC SYSTEM
The normal vowels of Tepecano appear to be a, 7, 0, u, 0. a Is
probably the most frequent vowel. ¢ is occasionally but very rarely
heard and appears to be of secondary derivation, frequently by assi-
milation from the diphthong ia, as aviam or avem.'* 7 and o need
10 The vowel ¢ is missing also in Lower Pima (Buckincnam Situ: “Grammar of the
Pima or Névyome”. Shea’s Lib. Am. Ling., New York, 1862; digest in Pimentel, op. czt.)
and Papago (Juan Dortorges: “Papago Verb Stems”, Univ. Cal. Pub. Am. Arch. Eth.,
vol. 10, no. 5. Berkeley, 1913). It is probably lacking also in the other members of
this linguistic sub-group, viz., Upper Pima and Northern and Southern Tepehuane. While
given in Rassell’s phonetic table for the Upper Pima (Frank Russert: “The Pima In-
dians’. XXVI Ann. Rep. Bur. Am. Eth. Washington. 1908) a rapid inspection of pages
of text fails to reveal a single example of e; it is almost equally rare in Lumbholtz’s
vocabularies from the Tepehuane (op. cit.). Rinaldini (op. c’t.) uses e considerably in his
Tepehuane grammar but there must be a natural suspicion that the sound is lacking
314 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
no comment; « and @ are produced without rounding of the lips.
6 approaches z and 7 in quality and the latter were occasionally
written as variants of 6.1!
The diphthongs a, oi, di, w and 7a are the most frequent;
others often found are au, ad, i and wa.
Vocalic Quality
It is probable that but one quality of vowel is found in Tepecano,
an intermediate between fully close and fully open, as heard, for
instance in English. a was heard exclusively as open; 7 was occa-
sionally distinguished as open and close but was never heard so
open as in English sz nor so close as in English seen. 0 is quite
open in quality, approaching aw of English Jaw. wu is very open
but is often heard as approaching close 0 and has sometimes been
confused with the latter.'* But one set of vocalic symbols have there-
fore been used in writing Tepecano, the ordinary roman characters.
Vowels slurred over or produced with less than usual strength,
é. g., When it is not certain whether a consonantal combination
obtains or whether a vowel intervenes, are indicated by raised
characters. This does not imply that they are voiceless.
i u
0 )
Accent
Accent is of doubtful function in Tepecano. '* Stress accent was
generally recorded and is here retained but as the same word was
frequently accented differently on different occasions, much doubt
of its value must ensue. Some words were heard with equal stress
on all syllables, some with equal stress on alternate syllables, and
some with main and secondary stress accent. The stress has most
frequently been marked on the antepenult. Such accent is indicated
by an acute accent mark following the vowel.
here also as he confuses it with @ and 7. All other languages of the Piman group appear
to possess normal e which doubtless relates to 6 of the Tepecano sub-group.
11 Kroeber uses 7 in Papago in place of Tepecano 6 (Dolores, op. cit.).
12 Rinaldini tends to confuse o and w in Tepehuane likewise (op. cit.).
*? Accent is weak and unimportant in Papago also (Dolores, op. cit.).
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 315
In many cases a rise in tone was also observed on certain syl-
lables. This appears on the whole to be more regular and standard
than stress accent. Thus a postposition suffixed to a noun generally
carries a higher accent than the nominal stem; the verb stem when
in final position, particularly when in the preterit form, frequently
has a raised pitch, and certain verbal particles appear to carry the
pitch. The vowel before a glottal stop, particularly with certain
classes of nominal plurals, likewise often receives a higher tone.
This is indicated by an acute accent mark oyer the vowel. '
CONSONANTAL SYSTEM
The consonantal system of Tepecano is primarily simple, consisting
of the nasals m and n, the trill 7, the spirants v, s, ¢ and h, the
sonant stops b, d and g, the surd stops p, t, & and the glottal stop ’.
These simple sounds are further modified according to position. '”
The semi-vowels y and w are abnormal and of secondary develop-
ment. The former is often heard instead of an 7 diphthong, as
ya puckar, ia’puckar, sweat-cloth; ka’cyo’, ka‘cio-, fox. The latter is
often heard for an w diphthong, as sw/-mar, su/-mar, deer, or for
an initial vu as wi’vas, vui'vas, face.
The bilabial nasal m and the linguo-dental nasal » are purely
sonant in initial or intervocalie position, but when in final position
the latter part of the occlusion becomes clearly surd. This voiceless-
ness is most marked in the case of final m, less so with final n.
To a lesser extent the same phenomenon is observed when a nasal
comes into contact with a surd stop or spirant. When evident
enough to be noted, surd quality is indicated by » and ¥, though
it is never more than a mixed quality, partially unvoiced rather
than clearly surd. The palatal nasal z has occasionally been ob-
served, always before a palatal stop, but it is not invariable in this
position and seems to be a secondary development.
r is a weak untrilled or weakly trilled linguo-alveolar. When
of a long quantity the trill is naturally more evident, but is never
strong. Like the nasals it appears to be normally sonant but in
final position is at least intermediately surd and is to some extent
14 Both voecalic length and pitch accent were reported by my informant to be more
marked among the Southern Tepehuane than with the Tepecano.
'5 Sounds vary as sonant and surd according to position in Papago (Dolores, op. cit.).
316 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
so in medial combination with a surd. As in the case of nasals,
surd 7 is indicated by x. 7 approaches / rather than d. It is never
found in initial position where it appears to be replaced by 7. This
liquid has a broader occlusion than English / and the position is
probably more dorsal or cerebral, giving a harsher quality. It is
the rarest sound in the language, found only initially in one or
two instances. Here it probably develops from 7, as ai/, small;
li’icpok, baby. '°
Spirant v is of weak bilabial occlusion, being occasionally heard
"Tt is probably normally sonant and is heard so initially
and in intervocalic position. In final position, and to a lesser extent
when in contact with certain surds, it develops a distinctly surd
character which is then expressed by the symbol 7, though it is
never so surd as Spanish bilabial f. Occasionally, particularly in
final position, it was heard as voiceless w, 1.
The spirants s and ¢ are probably both primary, though subject
to dissimilation. Both are invariably surd. s is pronounced ap-
proximately as in English while ¢ is softer than English sh. Both
are limited to certain phonetic positions.
At first both 4 and « were written and have been retained, but
they are probably variants of one sound. h was written most
frequently, « principally before 7 and 6. Whether the sound is a
as WwW.
16 An intermediate surd-sonant 7 is found in Papago (Dolores, op. cif.). Russell (op.
cit.) writes an 2 for Upper Pima. This is replaced by 7 in lower Pima (Smith, op. cit.).
In Tepehuane, according to Rinaldini (op. cit.) » and Z are interchangeable but the latter
in better favor. Lumholtz and Hrdlitka (op. cit.) write both r and Z in Northern and
Southern Tepehuane and Tepecano and the former does the same in Tarahumare, Tubar
and Huichol. K. T. Preuss: (“Die Religion der Cora Indianer”, Leipzig, 1912.) uses both
x and Z in Cora; José de Ortega (“Vocabulario en Lengua Castellana y Cora’, México,
1732; Tepic, 1888; digest in Pimentel, op. cit.) writes only 7. Hrdlitka (op. ett.) further-
more distinguishes an 7 in Tepecano, and Smith (op. cé/.) distinguishes an r# in Lower
Pima. These are probably surd variations of normal 7. Regarding the extra group
Sonoran languages, Opato (NataL Lomparpo: “Gramatica y Diccionario”, México, 1702;
digest in Pimentel, op. cit.) and Heve (BuckiNcHam Surru: “A Grammatical Sketch of
the Heve Language”, Shea’s Lib. Am. Ling. New York, 1861; digest in Pimentel, op.
cit.) use only #, the former distinguishing also 72. Cahita (“Gramatica y Vocabulario’’,
México, 1737; reprint, E. Buelnar, México, 1890; digest in Pimentel, op. cit.) and
Tarahumare (P. Micten Tettectea, Compendio Gramatical, México, 1826; digest in
Pimentel, op. cif.) use both r and Z though in the latter case 7 is said to be more
correct. Tepecano 7 is generally identical with Papago ¢ (Dolores, op. cié.).
>? » and w are difficult to distinguish in Papago also (Dolores, op. céé.). Here o is
commonly used before @ and i; w before o, wu und #,
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 317
weak palatal spirant or a glottal constriction is not certain, probably
the former. It is purely surd, is never found in final position and
tends to disappear in combination.
Two series of stops in three positions are normal to Tepecano.
These are, bilabial sonant and surd, approximating English } and
p; linguo-interdental sonant and surd, approximating Spanish d and
¢ and linguo-palatal sonant and surd, approximating English g and /.
The sonant stops are represented by 6, d and g. Initial b is
weakly occluded and thus often confused with initial ».'S As
initial, intervocalic or as the second member of a consonantal com-
bination they are purely sonant. In final position the sonancy be-
comes very weak and short, the latter part of the occlusion and
the release being entirely surd or unvoiced. The effect received is
little more than a bare sonant occlusion with silent release. The
same intermediate quality is heard to a lesser extent when a sonant
stop becomes the first member of a consonantal combination. To
such an extent is the sonant stop unyoiced in this connection that
during the greater part of the field work it was written, parti-
cularly when in final position, as surd, and generally not differen-
tiated from the surd stop in like position. This must be taken
into consideration in the use of native text where it has often been
impossible to establish the exact character of the final stop in any
given case. Such intermediate character of the sonant stop is denoted
by the symbols, 2, », «.'°
Surd stops entirely lack aspiration when initial, intervocalie or
*® The same phenomenon is characteristic of the Spanish spoken by the lower classes
of México. In Lower Pima (Smith, op. cit.) v and 4 are confused. In Opata (Lombardo,
op. cit.) and Cahita (Tellechea, op. cit.) the difference is said to be as in good Castilian.
*° Kroeber (Dolores, op. cit.) writes in Papago but one set of stops varying in quality
according to position. Nevertheless, he notes (p. 243) that a difference undoubtedly
obtains. Initial sonant and surd stops appear to be only slightly differentiated in Papago
but Dolores has unwittingly distinguished between sonant and surd final stops by regu-
larly preceding the latter by aspirate 4, leaving the sonant stop represented by the bare
surd sign. Russell gives only d@ as purely sonant in Upper Pima, g (inverted) and ¢d as
intermediate, but all three positions as surd and aspirate, — four classes, doubtless an
unwarranted distinction. Lower Pima distinguishes sonant and surd stops as does Rinal-
dini in Tepehuane, though he tends to confuse them. Lumbholtz writes both in Northern
and Southern Tepehuane and Tepecauo and Hrdlitka does the same for the latter two.
Among the other Piman languages the surds are uniformly noted, but the sonants va-
riantly. Opata and Heve are written with the sonant stops 4, d, g; in Cahita and Cora
4 is the only sonant stop noted; (Lumholtz writes d, g also). Sonant stops are entirely
omitted in writing Huichol. Tellechea writes 4 and g but no d in Tarahumare, Lumholtz
318 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
when the second member of a consonantal combination. This lack
of aspiration gives to the ear accustomed to English an intermediate
surd-sonant effect, not very different from that of the sonant stop
when truly intermediate in character. When final or the first
member of a consonantal combination, the surd quality is more
evident and in the former case a slight aspirate release is occasion-
ally heard. In the latter case there is generally no release, the
surd blending with the ensuing sound. Here it has frequently
been written incorrectly as of doubled length.
The glottal stop, ’, is frequent but not harsh or abrupt and has
been occasionally written in place of a mere cessation of voice.
Frequently it is synchronous with a stop, forming what is known
as a gilottalized stop. In such cases the glottal stop has generally
been written before the stop thus glottalized, less frequently after it.
The affricative ¢c is very rarely met, fs practically never. Neither
occur in final position.
Consonantal Table
Stops Spirants Trill-Liquid — Nasals
|
| |
_ Inter- |
Sonant mediate Surd Sonant Surd Sonant Surd Sonant Surd
Bilabial —b (Bs) op. v,(w) (vw) Frama vee be:
Dental ay at" Sah aa ae YS, =< aa ae
. en 8, Cc . )
Alveolar (y) (ts, te)! ™ (I) | (R) |
Palatal g (a) k (ae. (4) |
Glottal : h
Characters in parentheses are of secondary derivation or of doubt-
ful nature.
only 4; the former admits that p and 4, & and g are confused. In Lumholtz’s Tubar
vocabulary neither g nor p are found.
The evidence is almost incontrovertible that the sonant stops possessed by the Pima-
Papago-Tepehuane-Tepecano group have developed from original Uto-Aztekan spirants, 4
from kw, d from y and g from w. (Cf. Eowarp Sapir: American Anthropologist, (n s.),
Vol. 17, p. 306). The original spirants appear to remain in the other Sonoran languages.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 319
QUANTITY
Both yocalic and consonantal quantity are marked in Tepecano
and an effort has been made to distinguish such. Practically all
consonants, as well as all vowels, are susceptible of lengthening.
In the case of stops this tends to further increase the acoustic
confusion of series. Marked duration is indicated by a postscript
raised or inverted period, as a’, t. It must be confessed that in
the actual recording of quantities much confusion occurred and little
agreement regarding quantity has been attained; no individual case
therefore should be accepted as a criterion. In a few cases a mark-
edly short quantity was also observed but this was seldom recorded.
PHONETIC PROCESSES
GROUPING OF SOUNDS
The typical Tepecano word consists of an orderly alternation of
consonant and vowel. Any vowel may stand initial or final in a
word. Any consonant except + may be initial and any one except
h final. / may stand initially only. No more than one consonant
may stand initial or final, even the generally excepted affricative
te being of rare or doubtful occurrence initially and missing in
final position. Medially, complexes of three or more consonants
are never permitted, the rare affricative te beg considered a simple
sound, as piptcac, hawks. But medial combinations of two con-
sonants are very frequent and in fact are favored whenever permit-
ted by other phonetic laws.
All possible combinations of consonant and vowel are permitted
with the exception of certain ones involving the spirants s and ec.
The latter may stand before only the vowel 7 initially, while s
never precedes 7 either initially or medially. °° All other possible
combinations of both s and ¢ with vowels have been found, though
certain ones appear far more frequently with one of the spirants
than with the other. For instance, co and cé are rare medially,
os and és rare finally. Thus there will be in certain cases an
interchange of these two spirants, as:
20 A like distinction is made in Papago (Dolores, op. cit.) between s and c, but here,
curiously, it is s that occurs before 7 and #, c before a, o and w. Rinaldini (op. czt.)
320 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
avi’cko's he is asleep aniamko’cim I am not sleepy
ni/ig6/Gso [ am swimming anicicgo’cim I want to swim
There appears to be an intimate relationship between the glottal
stop and the trill 7. Frequently, particularly with reduplicated
stems, a glottal stop is apparently changed to an 7.
civo’D plume ci’vordap (3d. sing. poss.)
gi" great (sing.) 20'2OR (plu.)
da(’) be seated (sing. ) dadar (plu.)
hohi’ desire (pres.) hohir (pret.)
bavG be able (pres.) baigir (pret.)
There is frequently an effort made to keep morphological elements
separate and to prevent their blending. ‘hus there will often be
a pause, a perceptible hesitation, between two such elements, some-
times between two vowels, at other times between a consonant and
vowel, which has sometimes been wrongly indicated by a glottal
stop. It is best denoted by a period on the line, .. As already
stated, this device is adopted for the principal purpose of separating
morphological elements and preventing confusion among them.
Practically all dual consonantal combinations are permitted me-
dially. Examples of the majority of possible combinations have
been found and there is no indication that any of the others are
forbidden, unless it may be h as the first member of a combination.
SYNCOPE
The most frequent cause of consonantal combination is syncope.
This is a very active process in Tepecano. While the rules have
not been worked out in detail, it may be suggested that a short
medial vowel will generally disappear to permit the combination of
the adjacent consonants, provided, of course, that this will not entail
an initial or final consonantal cluster. This process appears in
strongest force in the case of reduplicated stems, where an appar-
ently possible but unconsummated consonantal combination is zpse
facto good evidence of the length of the intervening vowel.
ta’tpoc fleas (stem ta’poc)
mumu'var flies (stem mu‘var)
wniku’knat I am marrying (stem kuna‘t)
antimsa’sa‘kit I made you weep (stem sak)
distinguishes s and ¢ in Tepehuane, writing the latter se and using it almost exclusively
before 7. In the grammar of the Lower Pima (Smith, op. cit.) there seems to be no such
distinction made. Likewise Russell (oy. ct¢) terms c (sh) a rare sound in Upper Pima.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO o21
METATHESIS
Another functional process in Tepecano, though of less importance
than syncope, is metathesis. This seems to obtain in certain cases
of favored combinations of consonants, thus
avi’emumku he is dying (for avi‘’emumuk
miamina’mk6ip they do not pay me (for miamin‘a’mokiD )
ee Seee es re EEE:
nl'1go'Gso I am swimming (for ni‘ig0’gdc)
ASSIMILATION AND DISSIMILATION
Consonantal assimilation and dissimilation is not of great importance
in Tepecano though examples are found. Thus ¢ will naturally be
heard as b after m. For instance,
aniumbansian I am letting you down (for aniumvansan )
a/tiamiamb6’p-avuda We will not equal you (atiamiamvo’pauvda)
MORPHOLOGY
Worp STEMS
PHONETIC CHARACTERISTICS
In contradistinction to the majority of Sonoran languages, *!
Tepecano closes a great number of its words with final consonants.
In this, as in many other respects, it appears to resemble Southern
Tepehuane but to be somewhat different from Northern Tepe-
huane **. A comparison of the vocabularies demonstrates that Te-
pecano in most cases, and Southern Tepehuane in a slightly smaller
number of cases have lost the final vowel of the stem or suffix
which is retained in Northern Tepehuane, while in a minority of
cases the final vowel has been retained, the forms of the three
21 In Tarahumare (Tellechea, op. czt.; Lumholtz, op. cit.) every word closes in a vowel;
in Cahita (Buelnar, op. cit.; Petiafiel, mss. vocabulary, México), Opata (Lombardo, op.
cit.; Peiiafiel, mss.), Upper Pima (Russell, op. cit.), Lower Pima (Smith, op. cit.), Northern
Tepehuane (Rinaldini, op. cit.; Lumholtz, op. cit.), Cora (Ortega, op. cit.; Preuss, op. cit.;
Lumholtz, op. cit.; Peiiafiel, mss.) and Huichol (Pimentel, op. cit.; Lumholtz, op. cit.;
Peiiafiel; mss.) the great majority of words end in a vowel and only a restricted number
of consonants are permitted in this position. Jn the Heve (Smith, op. cit.), Tubar (Lum-
holtz, op. cit.) and Papago languages (Dolores, op. cit.; Pefiafiel, mss.) the number of
. final consonants is large.
22 HrpwicKa. op. cit.; Lumholtz, op. cit.; RINALDINI, op. cit.
322 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
languages being apparently identical. The rules for such retention
or disappearance can be worked out only by a comparative study
of kindred languages, but it may be tentatively suggested that an
original short final vowel was dropped in Tepecano while an original
long final vowel was shortened, both forms being retained in Nor-
thern Tepehuane as originally.
No yocalic timbre seems to replace the lost final vowel in Tepe-
‘ano, but that its influence has not entirely gone is proven by the
fact that, at least in the case of nominal stems, the original stem
vowel reappears in more extended forms.
Northern Tepehuane Tepecano Tepecano Extended
Stem 3 Stem Form
ogga father 0G organ his father
novi hand nov no’viD his hand
. a/t. } °
gatto bow ga't ga’tuD his bow
junu corn hun inhw’nuG my corn
but dadda arrive many dada arrive (plu.)
The final stem vowel 7 appears, for some unexplained reason, to
be more tenacious than the other vowels. Certain stems will thus
appear normally without, but at other times with stereotyped
final vowel.
vainum money invainmi’ my money
ta’ pore flea ictuta’pe. full of fleas
gO goc dogs itgo’Gei our dogs
a’tvaG altar a’tvagi
vo'p'gov lightning vo'p'govi
ma’svaG moon-? ma’svagi
tit vaG clouds to't'vagi
to’nor sun to’nori
The latter group of words are used with ceremonial context which
may possibly explain the persistence of the final stem vowel, through
religious conservatism.
In the case of verbal stems no certain instances of the reap-
pearance of the lost final vowel have been noted.
NOUN AND VERB STEMS
Noun and verb stems are generally dissimilar in Tepecano but
23 RINALDINI, op. cit.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 323
when similar they are distinguished by their syntactical elements
rather than by etymological ones. Thus
dc corn-field anitu’d"c I am sowing corn
ni‘o-k speech amicupnio’k they also speak
ha-k toasted corn anituhak I am toasting corn
THe Noun
As with most Sonoran languages, the noun plays a role secondary
to the verb in native syntax. The latter expresses the main idea
of the sentence while the other parts of speech, including the noun,
serve to qualify and amplify the meaning given. The Tepecano
noun usually stands independently in the sentence and is seldom
incorporated in the verbal complex. In either case it consists of a
stem which may be qualified by the suffixation of a few etymo-
logical elements and may either stand alone or be further modified
in meaning by the addition of syntactical elements.
NOMINAL STEM COMPOSITION
Composition of stems is not a typical process of Tepecano but
is occasionally found. Some examples are
bip-vak* adobe house, “dirt-house”
a’t-vak: back of house, “buttocks-house” culatas de jacal
to’n-vo beard, *“mouth-hair”
hod’-vo eyebrow (?), “?-hair”
Similar etymologies may be suggested for many other words, as
tii-vaG sky, “blue-house”
hu’n-va‘k sugar cane, “corn-house”
hun-ta’ha’k ears of corn
V0-S0"G rat, “hair-wolf”
Similarly, many words referring to water begin with the syllable
vd, a very common Sonoran root denoting water. ‘These are pro-
bably petrified examples of former stem composition.
vai dakar water-jar va’to'p" fish
vako'n heron vat-o’ weir, tapexte
vak-a water-gourd vap'ak reed
va’utaG drizzle, dew va’moR lake
324 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ETY MOLOGICAL SUFFIXES
A small number of etymological elements are found and other
nominal terminations are sufficiently frequent to suggest the possi-
bility that they may be nominal suffixes, even though the stem be
never found without them. The most certain of the etymological
elements follow.
1. -kar, (-kavr), instrumental.
This element when suffixed to verbal stems denotes the object
or instrument by means of which the act is performed. *
at buttocks atockar seat
atvackar trousers
ia’puc put upon ia’puckar sweat-cloth
ma’hin shoot ma’hinkar rifle, gun
noi’ dance nork-ar dance ground, patio
so7m sew somka'r needle
hak toast corn hakar griddle, comal
vai’g fetch water vai’ dakar water-jar, cantaro
don smoke déy kar pipe
noik-ar knife
vo’ckakar broom
bai’ykar sack, costal °°
One of the most common etymological suffixes is -kam. This
appears to give a sort of abstractive meaning difficult to formulate
to the stem; it is used generally with a ceremonial significance. *°
2. -kam, abstractive.
i’koraG filth ici’ krak‘am sins, turpitude, filth
0’ gipas south o”’gipaskam southern habitant spirit
br within érkam interior, belonging within
w'e stick u’ciakam authority, chief
wy woman uvikam the “Green Woman”
muk die (sing.) mu‘k‘am Death, Goddess of Death
cidu’ hoard cidu/kam fetish, idol
ho’pid be cold ho’pipkaim cold, wind, chilliness
ho’mad create hé’/mapkam human being, person
ha’rnip west hu’rnipkam western habitant spirit
ha’duk ha’dukam pertaining to the rain
2“ Lower Pima -carha (Smith, op. cit.).
25 The term Dé'mkar mi*‘tcu’ was given me as the Southern Tepehuane word for
tortilla; the suffix is evidently identical.
2® Tower Pima -cama (Smith, op. cit.).
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO
vov'l
ving
ba-barip
da’di(k)
da, da’dar
ta(’)
ton
tuk
go’, go’goR
kid
ko’
ko”o-k
road
north
healthen
sit
white
be hot
black
great
reside
die (plu.)
be sick
vo’poikam
vingikam
ba-baripkam
da’dik'am
da’kam, da’darkam
ta’/ha‘rikam
icto’nkam
ictutu’k'am
go’kam, go’gorkam
kidék:am
koi’/k:-am
ko’’okam
oit‘-kam
soi’k'am
cixa’/indukam
ha”’kam
tak'u’k:'am
325
ways, rules, laws
pertaining to the rain
northern habitant spirit
health, happiness
sitter, persons seated
whitish, pertaining to white
heat, plague, sickness
darkness, obscurity
greatness, leaders
habitant spirit, viviente
the dead, disembodied spirits
the sick, a sick person
horned serpent, chan
pets, deer
pertaining to ceremonies
mankind, people
piece, fraction, bit
Another quite common etymological suffix seems to have a similar
abstractive significance, though here also the exact connotation is
difficult to determine.
3. -da, -dara, -darakam, (contracted dakam) abstractive.
i’koraG sins Vk-rada filth, dirtiness
bka shadow o’kab'a shade, shadow
wy woman u’vda younger sister (?)
maim be drunk mai’mda drunken, one intoxicated
him go hi’mda ways, laws, fasting
ba‘i ripen bavida fruit
kid reside kid-a village, pueblo
ha’’gic(id ) pardon ha-gicdara pardon, forgiveness
20’ouk: remain (plu.) géguedara aid, succor, fortune
ko’k be sick ko’kdara sickness, plague
hoi’gurdara sadness, misery
ko’k be sick icko’k'dakam sickness, pain
or(id) feel o’radakam intent, wish, thought
ho’mad create ho’madakam — form, shape, kind
oidakam universe, world
da’/da‘kam
ripe ears of corn, elotes
A suffix -tém *' signifies “place of’, “place where are’’.
4, -tim, place of.
to’nar
vap‘ak
small ant
reed va’paktam
to’tonartam
Azqueltan, ant-place
Totatiche, reed-place
27 Philologically and morphologically akin to Nahua -t/an.
326 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
vi’hok mezquite vi‘hoktam Mezquitic, mezquite-place
nau’v nopal na’vtam Nostic, nopal-place
na’kua‘r quache na‘nakuartam place full of guaches
na’sko'r scorpion na’skor'tam Colotlan, scorpion-place
ho’ vip zapote ho’p'it'am place full of zapotes
kit dwell kitam house, dwelling
Another locative suffix of less definite significance is -7p.
o. -(U)p, locative.
o'G father 0” 2ip to the south
huwk set (sun) hu’rnip west
ba‘’bari grandfather ba’barip north
tuk dark tu’kip night
go'k two go"’kip to both sides
dor from dérap outside
Some of the apparently etymological suffixes may be in reality
examples of stem composition. One of such doubtful instances is
6. ~korak.
gO’ great go” korak ancestral spirits (?)
ka‘ hear kai’’korak master, lord, ruler
i’korak sins, filth, turpitude
These three words are used in a ceremonial-religious sense.
7. -o'r, natural phenomena.
ton be hot, heat to’no'r sun
mok distant, far mo’kor distant
ma’ko'r other side of river
ci’korr horizon
gihor rainbow
8. -um.
vi"sa'T bear vi/sarim greatgrandparent
sama'r palo mulato sa’marim greatgrandparent (?)
6"e(id) rob, steal icd’cviM robber
The stem a@/ (adjectival “small”, nominal “child”) is often used
in combination as a diminutive or familiar, particularly with terms
of relationship, the union being complete.
9. -ari, diminutive, familiar.
OG father o’gari godfather
nana mamma na’nari godmother
tata papa tari uncle
Probably also
ba’ bari orandfather
t=)
hu’ri grandmother
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 327
ka’kari grandmother
tea'li greatgrandmother
Possibly
k0/s6-ri small dog
ka‘6ri ankle bone
to’ganda'ri deer (ceremonial word)
ta white ta’‘harikam whiteness
Other possible etymological suffixes or noun combinations are: —
10. -as.
vul eve vwi'vas countenance, face
xixi intestines hi’vas groin, barriguita chiquita
ogip southward o-gipas south
ton mouth tiyk-as neck (?)
11. -we.
cic elder brother cl’wG morning star (elder brother of mankind)
kid reside ki/wG brother-in-law
A nominal termination -g, (-/) is equivalent to the English ter-
mination -y, forming an adjective. **
12. -g, (-k), adjectival.
sal’ hay, zacate ictusal’G covered with hay
hi‘korm mist, haze ichi’kmak hazy, cloudy
ho’da'i stone ictuho’dic stony
va”u't drizzle, dew icva’utak drizzly
su’di’ water ictusu’diG watery, covered with water
u’e tree ictu.u’ciG wooded, overgrown
dadi health nagamida’dik which healthens
Certain nominal terminations occur with a frequency sufficient
to intimate that they may be etymological.
15. -1t, (-id), animate (?).
ma’ vib puma, lion oit-kam horned serpent, chan
ho’vid zapote
kurupi‘t huitacoche hé-pit-kam coldness (iché:p)
teuvwi"’t small bird samit tortilla (samta)
14. -v, (perhaps animate). 29
mar child sa’sna'r rosa morada
miivar fly gi’da-war sascuines
28 Lower Pima -ga, “be many”; -magui, “be full of”. (Smith, op. ezt.).
298 A nominal suffix -ri (-/2, -ni) is frequent in many Sonoran tongues, the suffix being
probably cognate to Nahua -tdz (-t/, -/:). This Tepecano termination -7 may be the same,
the final vowel dropped as frequently.
328 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ku’ur
swimar
var
vi’sa'r
to’nar
kwimar
suipir
pipir
so‘k-or
na’sko'r
va" isor
mur
vi/sur
dur
diwdu'r
tu/ku'r
thk-ur
u" par
na’‘kua‘r
sAma‘r
Cora
deer
parrot
bear
small ant
pig
chicken
turkey
shells
scorpion
raccoon
turtle
Huichol
black ant
jaguar, tiger
owl
techalote
huizache
huache
palo mulato
MORPHOLOGICAL PROCESSES
va’ p*kor
k6’k-or
hikur:
gi’sur’
Vor
su’su'r
xur’
tu’pur
pur’
ka‘’nsur
Vak-tur
ka’va'r
var
ma’tor
hivo-r
va"mor
cl’ ar
hivdar
kikiar
frijolillo |
chile |
peyote
pithaya
blood
testicles
heart
hips
skirt
cloth
bastin
chimal
basket
metate
wind
lake
east
Cerro del Angel
Cerro de Colotlan
Nouns undergo few modifications for syntactical relations. Nor-
mally they stand invariable in the sentence.
Gender and case are,
as in most other American languages type, not designated, and the
sole modifications of the nominal stem are for number, possession
and the postpositional relations.
Plural
The plural is well developed in Tepecano, practically all nouns
being susceptible of change for number.
As typically in the So-
noran languages, the plural is normally formed by reduplication of
the initial elements of the stem.
Stems commencing with a vowel reduplicate this vowel with a
slight glottal stop separating the reduplicated vowels.
singular
Singula
a’tockar
iak‘tur
o'B
6c
up’
seat
bastén
foreigner
corn-field
skunk
Plural
a”’atockar
i’iaktur
o’o'B
WVob'e
wap:
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 329
Stems commencing in a consonant reduplicate the consonant with
following vowel.
Singular
mal
nov
su'G
cle
hoG
bauy
picnic
dur
tiu’p:
ga”’duk
ko’trup
mescal
hand
sensonte
elder brother
hide
bean
watermelon
ant
church
sabino
toloache
Plural
ma’mat
no/nov
su’suG
c1’clw’G
ho’hoa
ba’bauy
pi’pinic
didur
ti’tiu'p’
gaga”’duk
ko’ko-trup
The rules of syncope and consonantal combination appear in full
force here.
mi’sw’
na/‘kwa'r
sama‘r
clvoriG
pitea’G
ta’pore
gi’dai
ka’cio-
cat
guache
palo mulato
whirlwind
aguililla
flea
vamuchile
fox
mi’msw
na’/nkwa‘r
sa’smar
cl’cvoriG
piptcaG
ta’tpdc
eicdai
ka’kcio
Initial 6 and v are difficult to distinguish. But those stems uni-
formly written with an initial ) reduplicate to b, as bat, “tail”,
babai, while those whose initial sound was heard generally as »,
though occasionally also as b, reduplicate to v but change the initial
v of the stem, now in medial position, to p.
va’sa
vat'o’
vako'n
vis
vo’cl
vo'k
box
weir, tapexte
heron
bee
grandparent
belly
vapsa
£ ?
vapat*o
vapkon
vipis
vo’porei
vo’p'ok
The presence of a glottal stop in the stem appears to cause aber-
rant changes in the plural form.
pears to cause a disappearance of the final vowel.
,
sf”
ha’a
blanket
jar, olla
An intervocalic glottal stop ap-
sa’sa’
ha’ha’
330 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
In at least one instance, a final glottal stop disappears with
previous vowel in the reduplicated plural form.
mo’ head mo'M
mo’bar hat (head-basket) mo’m'bar
In another case an intervocalic glottal stop disappears in the
reduplicated plural form.
ka’ur
An intervocalie /
tion or combination,
simplification in the
Cora
ku’kewr
in the stem generally disappears in reduplica-
and the general tendency is toward a phonetic
plural and all extended forms.
vi'hok mezquite vi’piok
tihory cave titov
,/ “, 97 , ifoua'r
givhon rainbow g1’g1071
A second type of plural formation is found with dissyllabie stems
where the change, which is evidently a form of reduplication,
occurs within the stem itself. Thus an intervocalic v is often
changed to p-.
ma’viD puma ma’p"iD
to’vwa hen to’p»wa
tu’vur hip tupur
ho’vib zapote ho” pip
huvwa star hu’pra
hivorr wind xép ‘or
havu jicara ha’pru
va’va'l cliff va’pral
vo'vo.it aunt vopo.it
Similarly with other stops.
pwr skirt pur
kokon crow kOok-on
hi‘kur peyote hik‘ur
ho’da‘i stone hod-ai
ia’puckar sweat-cloth i’ap-uckar
ta’tak nerve ta’trak
go’gore dog gO'goc
i’mari squash mai
O’tiauy guizache saborosa Otiauv
u/nmaM stranger u’nmam
du’dwr jaguar, tiger dwdur
armup’ ant a’r’mup*
a’sa'k net a’’sak
u’cia baston u’’cia
i’bai tuna ibai
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO Bol
While it is a delicate task to analyse correctly the phonetic
characteristics of these plurals, and some of the above are probably
not accurately expressed, yet the general process of secondary plural
formation seems to be, first that a medial stop is lengthened or a
glottal stop introduced, and second that all vocalic lengths of the
ultima are shortened and the pitch raised on the penult.
A few instances occur where the plural seems to be irregular,
containing apparently extraneous elements. Some examples are
su’rul quail subrui
ha’/dun kinsman hba’ha‘edun
Cie elder brother cl’'ciwG
ku’rupi't huitacochi ku’krukpit
A few instances of reduplication of a secondary syllable are found,
this being prima facie evidence of composition or prefixation in
these cases.
atva'cka‘r trousers atva’pa‘ckar
cidu'k'am fetish cidu/pbkam
bamaro:G father-in-law bamaro’’o’G
Many nouns appear to be not susceptible of internal changes to
indicate the plural. In these cases number is expressed by the use
of the adverb mui’, “many”. °°
mui’ ga.a”an many papers
mul’ 00 many bones
mul’ gamai’ many mescales
mui’ gana’na‘ktua’ many squirrels
mui gava’haG many brooms
The proclitie ga- here found is probably related to the demon-
strative higa, “that’’, which is also occasionally found in this con-
nection. *!_ Here it has the force of an article and is most frequently
found prefixed to nouns in the objective relation as a sign of the
accusative.
Pronominal Possession.
Possession is expressed by the affixation of pronominal elements,
differing for number and person, to the object possessed. These
3° The natural impulse is to refer this adverb to the Spanish adverb muy, “very”, but
the word is proven by comparison with other Sonoran languages to be indigenous.
31 Or higa may be an extended form of ga.
332 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
possessive pronominal elements are practically identical with the
objective pronominal elements and related to the personal inde-
pendent forms. They are:
Singular Plural
dst person in- it-
Qud person um- am-
3rd person -d a-
All but the third person singular possessive are prefixed, cause
no phonetic change and require no remark. This exception, how-
ever, is of a different type, as it is suffixed. If the regimen ends
in a vowel, the suffixation is without phonetic phenomenon but if
it closes in a consonant, the original dropped final stem vowel
reappears (cf. p. 322), thus,
um0’o thy bone 0’0D his bone
itw’u our arrow WwWup his arrow
in.0"'G my father ogaD his father
amno’/noy your hands no’noviD his hands
ava’‘a'k their house va"’kiD his house
The great majority of such examples show a final @ vowel.
Whether this is normal or due to assimilation or other process can
be determined only by comparison with other Piman languages. *
When the stem ends in a glottal stop preceded by a vowel, the
vowel is reduplicated after the stop when used with the pronominal
possessive suffix -d.
hv urine hip his urine
mo’ head m0’oD his head
Possessive Suffixes
Two frequent suffixes of doubtful significance are found mainly
with possessives. The first, -(7)g(2)-, is probably more common, at
least with the third person singular, than the bare possessive. Its
significance is very doubtful, as the same stem may be found with
or without it without apparent difference in meaning. Its exact
form is also open to doubt, but it is generally found associated
with an 7 vowel, either as -i¢ or as -gi-.
*4 Rinaldini gives this pronominal possessive suffix as -de or -di for Northern Tepehuane
(op. cit.). Smith (op. cit.) gives -di for Lower Pima.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO O33
15. -(i)g, -gi-, possessive.
oc
hio’cip
var
mai/nap
ha’vu
vaindasabD
-kar, -karab
to‘naD
ban
corn-field
his flower
basket
his petate
jicara
his axe
(instrumental)
his foot
coyote
ind’ciG
6’egiD
umhio’ciG
Fria
hio’cgip
inva’riG
Puate
vargiD
mai/ngid
ha’vugib
vaindasgiD
-kargiD
tongiD
bangip
my corn-field
his corn-field
thy flower
his flower
my basket
his basket
his petate
his jicara
his axe
his (instrumental )
his foot
his coyote
The natural inference here is that the suffix is either -ig or -g7. °°
In the first hypothesis, it would dominate over the reappearing final
stem vowel (which as we haye seen, is most frequently «), and
change by metathesis to -gi- when followed by the possessive -d.
In the second hypothesis, it would appear as normal before posses-
sive -d but change by metathesis to -ic when in final position.
But either theory is further disturbed by the fact that in a number,
though a minority of cases, g appears with a vowel other than 7.
In many of these cases this phenomenon may be explained as a
predominance of the stem vowel over the suffix vowel.
ka’va‘R
VI'V
(S. Tep. vivai)
na‘uy
hun
(N. Tep. junnu)
bib
té-rvin
chimal
tobacco
nopal
corn
earth
rope
umka’varaG
vivgaD
in‘a’vok
inhu’nuG
hu’ngabD
inbidaG
bipgip
tirvingat
Thus
thy chimal
his tobacco
my nopalera
my corn
his corn
my ground
his ground
his rope
A fuller knowledge of Pima roots would doubtless elucidate these
apparent inconsistencies.
Occasionally an unexplained intrusive element is found in con-
nection with this suffix.
ta’ri uncle ta’tarisgiD
to’vua hen tovuatgiD
ka-'via 34 horse ka'viatgip
his uncles
his hen
his horse (Sp. caballo)
42 Rinaldini (op. cit.) gives this suffix as -ga and says that it must be used in certain
relations such as junugade, his corn; bavigade, his beans.
3% In native text, words or parts of words in italics are of Spanish derivation.
334 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
The other suffix used principally with the possessive is also of
doubtful significance. It appears to imply an ownership less abso-
lute or more communal than the bare possessive.
16. -tue, (-tuk), possessive.
bauy beans inba’vtuG my beans
va'ka’ cow va' pakatuk cattle (Sp. vaca)
t’rik wheat t’riktuk wheat (Sp. trigo)
tiu’p: church atiu’ptua their church
kia'cew cheese inkia’cw'tuG my cheese (Sp. queso)
ma'yor eldest brother inma’yortuk my eldest brother (Sp. mayor)
a'r] small a’rituG child
ma’viD puma ma’vitugip his puma
POSTPOSITIONS
A small number of particles are suffixed to nouns to indicate
certain relations, principally locative. They express the same
categories as the prepositions of European languages, but being
suffixed, are better termed postpositions. They frequently carry
a pitch accent.
17. aba, locative, temporal, place where, time when, in, at.
oida.a’pa at the hill
uc.a”’ba in the tree
su’di.a’B’a in the water
vara’ Ba in the basket
Vwi’mua’’Ba
vo'c.o/rasa”’ Ba
in the morning
at all hours
18. aM, inessive, position inside, in. (Frequently with body parts).
inmo”’a'm
in‘o/V.aM
inhu’ram
inkév.a‘m
tiho-.a'm
19, éR, inessive, position within, in.
hi‘kom.ibr
ho’cia.6’r
va/mor.OR
on my head
in my arm
in my heart
on my forehead
in the cave
within the mist
in the saucer
in the lagoon
20. dra, motion into, motion within, among.
ictutu’/k'am.ira
na’v’6ra’
ho’cia Ora
ba’ré’/ra
kivrar.ova
into the darkness
among the nopals
into the saucer
into the basket
into the corral
a
ne
tN
27.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO
. sa’gid, between, among.
oi’dasa’gib
hi‘komsa’gip
. so’na'p, position by, beside.
va’ va‘iso’na'p
. ha’, directive, motion towards, to.
mokha”’
bula’nyushy’
ga”’ourha”’
inki‘amha’
. ha’kup, directive, motion towards.
inra’nicu.hakut
ha’pu.ha’ kup
dorap.ha’ku’t
itNi/o' kh6’k-6t
noik-a‘ri’k6D
térdvinhi’ko’p
between the hills
within the mist
beside the cliff
toward a distant place
to Bolanos (let us go)
to one side
to my house (let us go)
to my rancho
to that side
outside (go)
. hAekddD, instrumental, with, by means of.
with our language
with a knife
with a rope
(n)mé, direction towards. (doubtful)
w0'tanmé
da’manmi
vwdygam, with, mixed with.
bavw6’ygam
ko’korvéygam
. vwit'a, wo'pta, subessive, beneath.
oi’D'aw6’pta
va’ va‘ivoi’ta’
to’ vaGwo'ta
avwi’
inha’dunvwi
inci’’evwi
avwo’m
ambo/m
. pan, locative. (doubtful)
ta’tpan
go’kpan
downward
upward
with beans
with chilis
beneath the ground
beneath the cliff
beneath the heaven
. vwi, vui, comitative, motion with, go to be with.
with them (go)
to my kinsman (go)
to my elder brother
. vwim, wim, bim, comitative, position with, in company of.
with them (dance)
with you (live)
between the feet
on both sides
336 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
352. dam, superessive. above, over, on.
um‘ai’/nigdam on thy petate
vo’idam in the road
t6’vaGdam above the heavens
go.su’didam in the river
ka'viadam on horseback
inka’madam in my bed
35. ko'vta’, ko'vav, at the edge of.
su’diko’vay at the edge of the water
va’vaiko’vt-a’ at the edge of the cliff
Many of the postpositions carry an accent of a higher pitch than
the stem, as nos. 19, 20, 25, 26, 29, 32. Others, such as 17, 18,
19, 20, 24 are generally separated from the stem by an appreciable
pause. This latter phenomenon intimates that these may be in
reality etymologically independent words serving morphologically as
postpositions. This possibility is furthered by evidences of compo-
sition in these and other examples. Thus 17 and 18 of kindred
meaning commence with the element @, possibly an indefinite de-
monstrative (ef. locative adverbs); 18 and 30 of like significance and
possibly 32 contain a final m, possibly the true postpositional
element; 27, 29 and 30 of kindred meaning and 28 as well com-
mence with the element vid.
THE VERB
ANALYSIS OF THE VERBAL COMPLEX
As common in American languages, the Tepecano verb expresses
in itself all the main points of the sentence as regards tense, mode,
and subjectival and objectival relations. ‘The accompanying nouns,
pronouns, adjectives and adverbs serve to qualify and explain the
statement made by the verb.
The essential elements of the verbal complex are the pronominal
subject and the verb stem. The former always stands at or near
the beginning of the complex, the latter at or near the end. It is
therefore possible to divide the verbal complex into three component
parts which may be termed initial, medial and final, each possessing
its peculiar elements.
The initial elements consist of the pronominal subject and the
sign of the preterit. The final elements comprise the pronominal
object, the verb stem and various tense-mode suffixes. Between
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 337
these two integral parts of the complex may oceur numerous other
elements, some of them modal or adverbial particles, others bodily
incorporated adverbs, postpositions, adjectives or nouns. These
compose the medial elements.
PROCLITICS
Preceding the nominal subject, which may be considered the true
initial element, are found certain proclitics more or less firmly
attached to the complex. ‘The more frequent of these are,
34. n-, relative. *5
This proclitic is found very frequently in continued narrative.
Its sphere does not seem to be well-defined and its force rather
weak. It occasionally introduces relative clauses in which case it
is translated by “which”, but frequently also introduces absolute
sentences without apparent cause. Its use may be to some extent
euphonie.
35. ku-, subordinate.
This proclitic is a little more forcible than n-. It sometimes
introduces subordinate clauses, being then translated by “that”, but
frequently begins a new sentence, particularly when a new thought
is introduced or a break in continuity made.
36. narku-, potential.
This may be a combination of the above two proclities but is of
relative rarity. It introduces statements implying uncertainty of
future consummation and is generally translated “to see if.”
Examples of these proclitics are frequent in the specimen texts.
Besides these three true proclitics there are many other con-
junctions such as hava, “and”; héna, “then’’; interrogative pronouns
and adverbs and locatiye adverbs which in connected speech are so
closely attached to the verb that they may well be considered as
proclitic. The distinction is, on the whole, a rather artificial one,
but the native mind seems to consider the three given particles as
incapable of independent position, the others as normally inde-
pendent. With the true proclitics however, should be considered
the interrogative and the indefinite-relative locative particles pa-
and pi- (p. 375).
°° Northern Tepehuane -za, relative (Rinaldini, op. cit.).
338 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
INITIAL ELEMENY'S
Pronominal Subject
The pronominal subject is the true initial element of the complex.
It is seldom omitted, only occasionally with the third person
singular and generally with imperative constructions, and is preceded
by only the proclities. The pronominal subject is often reduplicated
without apparent reason. This may be best interpreted as the sub-
jective form preceded by the independent for emphasis.
The subjective pronominal forms are closely related to the inde-
pendent ones. In some cases the two are identical, but more typically,
the subjective forms are briefer than the fuller forms, which seem
to contain a morphological element a.
Singular Plural
Ist person ani, an, ni, n ati, at, ti, t
Qad person api, ap, pi, p apim, pim
ord person a, (none) am, m
a’nividi'n I am making thread
antithi'k I cut it
niti‘vamu if I die
kunti/vamu and if I die
a’pibibi’ara you are going to fish
a’ptamdiD now you have burnt yourself
pi’pumd”’aa you are killing it
kupM0’ak then you kill him
ati’ada now it has flown
ti’tutui she ground it
a’tida’raiwa we are sitting down
na’tputuvoinuk where we wander
ti’ti.inida’k*ta if we leave it here
kutpacia’rapu let us go visiting
apimpuma’ton know ye it
pimibinbo’k bring me it
amti’tubi’bia they were fishing
micma’iG they are drunk
Phonetic rules of consonantal combination will probably account
for these variant pronominal forms except in the cases of conditional
and imperative constructions where the disappearance of the initial
vowel of the pronominal form appears to be of morphological value.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 339
Parasitic v.
In the use of the third person singular pronominal subject, a v
is frequently introduced. This is probably done for phonetic reasons,
as all the other pronominal subjects except the third singular may
end in a consonant. Yet in other instances it is difficult to explain
its presence on phonetic grounds. It is most frequently found before
the substantive -ar-, probably always in the present tense and ge-
nerally, though not always, with inanimate subjects.
navarica’p which is good
kuaviamicmok-o'r and it is very far
victohépip it is getting cold
Preterit Sign
The second initial element is the preterit sign.
37, -t-, preterit sign.
This normally follows the pronominal subject. Generally it is
preceded or followed by an 7 vowel of uncertain origin. This vowel
may belong to the pronominal subject or it may be an intrusive
vowel. The preterit sign may be actually -/t- or -t/- and the vowel
disappear by vocalic syncope or change position by metathesis.
Thus we find
antiuma’gic I told you it
napitpuda”iwa you sat down
natpudu’via he arrived
The most usual process is for the -7- to follow directly after the
pronominal subject. The exact form is doubtless invariable in any
given case and dictated by phonetic rules of euphony.
Verbalizing Particles
Three important constructions are verbal in syntax and meaning
but, being used with nominal instead of verbal stems, belong to a
mixed category.
The substantive and attributive relations are expressed by the
particle -ar- which stands between the nominal or adjectival stem
and the pronominal subject. The construction is therefore that of
a verb except that the functional stem is nominal or adjectival
instead of verbal.
340 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
38. -ar-, substantive, attributive.
n-apim-ar-in-ha’hacdun ye are my kinsmen
v-ar-am-ki’a‘m it is your house
n-a-v-ar-ic-t0’do’ which is blue
n-apim-ar-a’pim ye who are yourselves
n-a-Vv-ar-g0" FOR which is grand
An -a- inserted in like position seems to imply ownership.
39. -a-, possessive.
purke-n-yam-a-saa because | have no blanket
ani-a-mo’ba'r I have a hat
an-sapi’-a-viV the tobacco which I have
The particle -ta’ suffixed to nominal stems predicates the manu-
facture or preparation of the object indicated. *°
40. -ta’, factitive.
a/ni-tu-mo’bar-ta’ I am making a hat
a’ni-tu-ba”’ak-ta’ I am making a house
a’ni-tu-sa’m’-ta’ I am making tortillas
am-pusu"r?-da’ they are making posole
possibly
ni-ho"’n-ta’ I will marry (make a wife? ho-'ni, wife)
MEDIAL ELEMENTS
The medial elements, those falling between the preterit sign of
the initial elements and the pronominal object of the final elements
are quite diverse in character. The first and most evident division
between them is between the true verbal elements which never
function independently of the verb, and the bodily incorporated
normally independent elements which for the time being must be
considered as a part of the verbal complex. This brings up the
question of incorporation.
Nominal Incorporation
Nominal incorporation, the incorporation of the nominal object
in the verbal complex, is not a typical process of Tepecano. In
fact it seldom occurs in continued narrative. The question is largely
an academic one, depending on how closely the pronominal subject
may be considered as welded to the verbal complex. It is difficult
*®© Lower Pima -¢a (Smith, op. cit.); Northern Tepehuane -(a)/e, -(#)te (Rinaldini, op. cit.).
a
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 341
to see how the preterit sign, for instance, can be considered as
anything else but an integral part of the complex. By this cri-
terion nominal incorporation is theoretically very fully developed
in Tepecano, though actually of infrequent occurrence. Compare
the following forms given as grammatically correct.
hoga ti-vainum-in-tane’’tit he did-money-me-lent
an-ti/-um-mai’niG-dam-kovt I-did-thy-petate-on-slept
an-ti’-nauv-ké's I-did-nopal-transplanted
an-ti-sa’’a-c-hohir I-did-blanket-desired
Compare also the extraordinary complex in specimen text 4, p. 405.
n---a-——--t--tu/-oca-—n---sa’’a.-—in--ka’t'ua--dam--va-----vwa
oD
Then-she-did-it-the-1ny-blanket-my-shoulder-on-already-placed
A few cases of incorporation of the nominal subject have also
been found. This phenomenon is of even less frequency and less
authenticity than objectival incorporation, and must be admitted as
of doubtful function in the language, though the examples were
given as grammatically correct.
kuti’diusvantok ta if only God remembers me
to’ tiho’maiswi’marama’’cirk if one deer appears
Adverbial Incorporation
The incorporation of other elements such as adverbs, locatives,
postpositions and similar parts of speech is one of the vital pro-
cesses of the language and of constant occurrence. Practically all
adverbs and postpositions may be thus incorporated. In some cases
it is doubtful whether an element is a true verbal particle or
whether it is an incorporated adverb. Thus for instance the par-
ticle -p- (-ap-, -up-, -dp-) of frequent occurrence, denoting “also, as
well”, is evidently related to the synonymous independent adverb
puico-p. Similarly the particle -pu-, “thus, in a like manner”, is
related to the synonymous independent adverb hapu. The two
particles are often combined in verbal complexes to -pucp- or -po-p-
and translated “thus-also”, just as the independent adverbs likewise
are often combined and translated similarly, ha/pu puicé-p, (asi
también). These particles, therefore, may be considered either as
incorporated reduced adverbs or as verbal elements.
Among the adverbs most frequently incorporated in the verbal
complex are:
Ww
342 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ov quickly ap, Op, up, p also, as well
yamku’i not yet har’ a little, some
ta’pu pretty soon hactu something
ha’ban with it, by it
ari less, inferior paro'p slightly, hardly
ap well, good pork: so, thus, such
wa'M ill, bad pop, pup thus-also
to’mai continually pu thus, so
Medial Particles
There remain a large number of true verbal medial elements
incapable of independent position which haye various adverbial-modal
significances. Most of these have a standard order of sequence,
some gravitating toward the initial elements, others toward the final
elements. Some, indeed, assume different meanings according to
their relative positions in the complex, or, as may be a preferable
explanation in certain cases, two different but homonymous parti-
cles are distinguished by relative position.
LOCATIVE PARTICLES
Of considerable importance in the verbal complex are locative or
directive particles. The majority of verbs of motion contain one
or more of these, sometimes proclitic, more often incorporated. ‘The
proclitic locatives are true adverbs and are normally found inde-
pendently; they will be listed as adverbs. But there are moreover
a few dependent locative elements which occupy a medial position
in the verbal complex. They display some analogy to the inde-
pendent forms but are never found independently.
41. -bi-, hither from nearby.
Combines with completive @ to ba, and with perpendicular 7 to
bai, hither from just above or below.
bicidu’via come here!
anbadai’m’la here I come on the run!
napitbai’vavom which thou didst lift hither
42. -mi-, hence a short distance.
Combines with completive a to ma, and with perpendicular 7 to
mai, hence just above or below.
animina’mkia I am going to meet him
kunatpuma.a’di then he chased him away
maicimna’gia lower yourself!
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 343
43. -b0-, hither from or hence to a distance.
Combines with perpendicular 7 to bé7, between heaven and earth.
aticbohi’méop we come from afar
napboida’di from above thou sendest health
44, -no-, here (arrival and rest).
amti’nonio hither they spoke.
MODAL PARTICLES
While it is impossible to draw a definite line of distinction be-
tween the two categories, yet the medial verbal particles for the
most part express modal distinctions, while the final particles, the
verbal suffixes, express mainly ideas of tense. This often equivocal
distinction has therefore been adopted as the basis for a convenient
designating nomenclature.
49. -ic-, positive.
This is one of the most frequent and most equivocal of medial
particles. It is never translated and its nature must be determined
by its force when in combination with other particles. It is never
found with negative sentences and when combined with the negative
particle nullifies the effect of the latter; it has therefore arbitrarily
been termed ‘positive’. It is probably identical with a like par-
ticle which precedes most adjectival stems and may be considered
as the sign of the adjective. It is invariably found with positive
desiderative forms. The vowel 7 is weak and is generally assimi-
lated by any other vowel with which it may be combined, as
frequently with the completive @ to -ac-. Frequently it is redu-
plicated to -icic- or -icac- without apparent cause or modification in
meaning. Innumerable instances of it occur in the accompanying texts.
anichi’voinic I am bewitching
ana’ctono’M I am thirsty
anichi‘am I wish to urinate
picacko’cim do you wish to sleep?
icda’tpam clear, pure
40. -iam-, negative.
The negative particle is occasionally found independently as yam,
but is rare without the confines of the verbal complex. Here it
carries different significations according to its position as regards
other particles, particularly the positive -ic-.
344 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
When used alone it carries a negative force.
ania’mbiuk: I am not hungry
a’nicbiuk: ! am hungry
When the two particles are combined in different sequence entirely
opposite significations are obtained. When the negative particle
(which is then frequently slurred over and heard as -em- instead
of -iam-) precedes, and the positive particle (which is then occasio-
nally heard as -ac-, possibly by assimilation from the completive @)
follows, the latter seems to dominate and the combined particle
then carries the sense of a superlative, “very”.
ane/micworr I am sweating very much
aviamicdo’niG he smokes very much
ave’mactoton it is getting very hot
aniamicho’nim ] am very desirous of marrying her
Combined in the reverse order, the positive before the negative,
the two seem to nullify each other and to produce an equivocal
particle which is translated by the Spanish “no mas’, “no more”.
ami’ciama’c’da they are merely now seated
kuti’ciam vo’mgok then he merely sprang up
47. ti'-, t'tv’-, conditional.
The conditional particle closely resembles the sign of the preterit
and stands in practically the same position, making for a confusion
of the two. Under ordinary circumstances of future conditions, the
two may be distinguished by the form of the verb stem or tense
suffix and by the fact that the conditional particle seems to carry
a heavier stress accent than the preterit sign.
ticcpudu’k . if it rains
ti’ti.inida’k:ta if we leave it here
kuti’diosvantik'ta if only God remembers me
But in certain cases the preterit form of the verb stem is used
with the conditional without apparent reason. To avoid ambiguity
here a second particle té(’) seems to be prefixed.
toti’du'p if it rains (tomorrow)
to’ti/varu’v if it be female
to’ tiho’maiswi/marama’’cirk if one deer appears
Another characteristic of the conditional which is shared also by
several other modal constructions, is the abbreviation of the pronom-
=~
Or
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 34
inal subject. Thus the initial vowel @ of the pronominal form is
generally or always dropped in the conditional.
niti’ananio’k- if I speak to them
anti/anio I spoke to them
The same phenomenon appears to be characteristic and of mor-
phological importance in the case of the imperative and simple
interrogative forms.
Imperative.
Imperatives differ in little from indicative constructions and no
distinctive particle is used. The verb stem and the other elements
likewise remain the same as with the indicative. The characteris-
tics of the imperative are two; the use of the particle -ci- and the
abbreviation or complete disappearance of the pronominal subject.
The particle -c7- however, is probably not a distinctive imperative
particle but the intensive verbal particle 58 found in indicative
constructions and used with imperatives to render the command
forcible. When this particle is used the pronominal subject is
generally abandoned entirely.
cida’G seize it!
cida’iwa sit down!
bicibdi bring it here!
maicimna’gia lower yourself!
gambicihi’m come here!
When the particle -ci- is not used the pronominal subject gener-
ally appears in abbreviated form as with conditionals, the initial @
vowel disappearing, but a few aberrant cases are found.
pinma’kia give me it!
piam:a’hisda do not shoot it!
pimiambi’a’ka be ye not sad!
but
apceidai’’mia run!
ci’peihim run fast!
48. -so-, interrogative.
In many cases there is likewise no distinctive particle for inter-
rogative constructions. My informant always insisted that there is
no morphological difference between a simple indicative and a simple
interrogative, as for instance, between “he went” and “did he go?”
Occasionally the pronominal subject is abbreviated in the interrog-
346 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ative as in the above modes and at other times it is reduplicated,
but for the most part context alone betrays the nature of an inter-
rogative. There is however, a definite interrogative particle which
is probably used for emphasis or to avoid ambiguity. It is most
frequently found however, with adverbs interrogative by nature,
though also oceasionally with simple questions.
apso’puicba'm are you angry ?
pasopurumki’’a'm where is your house?
has‘Opuka’ida what does he say?
ha’rovs6épétu’uu who is cutting it?
49. -(u)m, passive, (reflexive). *
A true passive seems to exist in Tepecano though it is not of
very frequent occurrence. As in Spanish, or possibly through the
influence of the latter, there is a close relationship between the
passive and the reflexive. For the average reflexive the pronominal
object is used without variation, but in the case of the third person
singular reflexive where there is no object pronoun, the deficiency
is supplied by the passive sign.
has‘6’pumk'a’ how is it eaten?
natum.a’rei he was formed
ativum’0’1D he burnt himself
30. -a-, -va-, completive.
The vowel a, appearing alone or in yarious combinations with
other sounds among the medial elements, is always translated by
the Spanish adverb “ya”, “already”. It is very difficult to trans-
late idiomatically but seems to imply the idea of completion. It
is used however, with present, past and future tenses. With the
past it combines with the preterit sign to form the particle -ta-.
anta’tuhi I have eaten, (ya com; said when meal is finished)
anta’ava’tia I have already bathed, (ya me bané; said when refus-
ing an invitation to swim)
anta’’dép I have just smoked, (yo ya chupé; said when offered
a cigarette)
The same translations are given for the words
anti’ vatuhu’ I have eaten
natitpuvahu we have finished eating
anti’va.ava'tia = 4 I have already bathed
anti’va.adi:D ] have just smoked
57 Lower Pima -am(u) (Smith, op. cit.).
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 347
and it has been impossible to distinguish between the two forms
-ta- and -va- in meaning or use. The completive vowel may how-
ever, stand alone without either the preterit -f- or the particle -v-
and is frequently combined with the positive -dc- to form -ac-.
titi’ma’vwa I have thrown it already
pudaka‘top it was spread
ave’m-acbiu’k-ap I was very hungry
nanacma’hinam which I now want to shoot
A puzzling idiom is that of a frequent word anti’vahi, “I am
going’, (ya me voy). The form here is purely preterit and should
be translated “I have gone’’. It is a possible explanation that the
idiom is copied from the Spanish idiomatic use of the same adverb
“va”. anti’kiht is translated exactly the same, “I am going’’, and
is also purely preterit in construction.
ol. -sap-, repeated vr indirect statement.
This particle is seldom directly translated but when a translation
is insisted upon it is given as “dizque”, literally “said that”. While
in many cases the reason for the use of the particle is not evident,
it is principally used with statements made on the authority of an-
other, repeated statements, reported sayings and similar cases.
amsapiva’tia they are bathing in some other place
kutsapmito’gia let us go to see it
ku’/msapipututo’k-a they say that they are going to ask him
atsapida’da‘iya he says we will arrive
52. -gam-, progressive.
This likewise is a particle of rather vague and indefinite meaning
but of frequent occurrence. It occurs principally with verbs of
motion and seems to imply separation, departure, the commencement
of motion and similar concepts.
nagamiko’hinim he goes walking
napuvako’hinim already he goes treading
natpugamatono’idida that we may go living
na’tpuvapno’idida that we thus may go beholding
It is probably this same particle which precedes many imperative
forms when motion is implied.
gambicihi’m come here!
gambi’cimak give it here!
gamcida’ra‘iwa sit down!
348 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
33. -pu-, emphatic of subject.
This is one of the most frequent and most colorless of the medial
particles, following closely after the pronominal subject. In many
cases its significance is weak. It should not be confused with the
adverbial particle -pu-, related to the adverb ha’pu, “thus”, which
falls toward the end of the medial particles. When a translation
of -pu- was insisted upon it was generally interpreted as emphasizing
the pronominal subject.
aniputuga’gara I personally will go alone to seek
anipuma’kia I am the one who will give him
54, -tu-, mdefinite object.
This is also one of the commonest and weakest of medial elements.
It is rarely translated, but when done it is by the Spanish neuter
article “lo”. It seems on the whole to relate to the indefinite,
inanimate pronominal object somewhat as -pu- relates to the subject,
but in many cases seems to be interjected solely for euphony or
to separate and designate other elements.
35. -ki-, proximate time.
This particle is translated, when translated at all, by the Spanish
idiomatic term “’horita”, “presently, in a moment”. It seems
on the whole to denote immediate time, either just passed or just
approaching but is generally found with the preterit sign and stem
form, even when denoting future time.
anti’kihi 1 am going
a’nikihi/mia while I go
a’ntikihi’mok was going
I
anti’kiko’l I am going to sleep
anti’ckikot I just slept a moment
anti’kituhu’ I am going to eat in a moment
anti’ckituhu’ I have just eaten
anickihi/dora I will cook it in a moment
oO. -ma-, subsequent.
kupimiamra.’a‘Gda you must not afterwards say
pimia’m*dsa’nda you must not afterwards weep
This particle may not improperly be considered as an incorporated
temporal adverb.
57. -icap-, coterminous.
The adjectival particle -ap-, “good, well’, under certain conditions
assumes an idiomatic significance and is translated “as soon as”.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 349
naticapdu’via as soon as he arrived
natiti’ca‘pso’na:t as soon as we began
nanti’/captuna”’ta as soon as I finished
nanicapokia as soon as I break it
As the particle is invariably accompanied by its adjectival sign
-ic-, it is frequently confused with the incorporated adverb -icap-,
“well”, and the morphological distinction between them is not clear
except that the former generally uses the proclitic n-.
anica’pbaia I am well able
anica’pkanta’rot 1 sing well
58. -ci-, intensive, imperative. 38
This particle strengthens the force of the verbal stem, often
being equivalent to “rapidly, fast, much, suddenly” while at other
times it carries a malevolent sense.
cipcihi’mda run quickly!
ancioi’mor I walk much
anicituda’daG 1 work much
kumiamein'0’ip'a they shall not look evilly upon me
napimiamci't-O’gia you will not ignore us
napimiamit'o’gia you will not see us
It is probable that the imperative prefix ci- is identical with or
closely related to this intensive -c/- (ef. p. 345).
o9. -hak’- repetitive.
This particle, which may not impossibly be a secondary verb
stem, carries the meaning of “return”, or less often “again”.
anti’‘hak’toté I turned around and saw it
anihak’g6’cia 1 will return
anihak’wa’G I am bringing it back
60. -i-, perpendicular.
One of the most frequent and most important particles in the
language may directly precede any verbal stem which denotes
motion. When thus used it implies that the motion is up or down
in a vertical manner.
hég-avi.’Via’ria he will fall
hég-avi.’ia’ria he will stumble and roll
a’ni.iwa"’G | am dropping it
a’niwa’G ] am throwing it
*% Lower Pima sz, “fortiter” (Smith, op. cit.).
350 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
a’ni.ibd’ia I will lift it
a’nibo’ia I will seize it
anv itu’nia I will jump down
anitu’nia ! will jump away
a/niigd’cia I will fall down
a’nigd’cia I will dive
Other usages of the particle appear to be more idiomatic.
a’ni.ibia’G I am taking it out (of the fire)
a’nibia’G I am taking it*out (of the earth)
a’/ni.ik6’cda I will begin
a’nik6’eda I will fasten it
FINAL ELEMENTS
The final elements of the verbal complex consist of the prono-
minal object, the verb stem and the tense-mode suffixes.
Pronominal Object
The pronominal objective forms are identical with the prefixed
possessive forms, but are frequently reduced to single sounds when
in intervocalic position. The third person singular objective is
lacking but in the case of the reflexive its place is supplied by
the passive -(w)m-.
Singular Plural
dst person in, n tet
Qnd person um, m am
3d person . a
Verb Stems
The typical Tepecano verbal stem is monosyllabic or dissyllabic,
rarely polysyllabic. It generally begins and closes with a conso-
nant, the final vowel found in other related Piman tongues being
entirely lost.
N. Tepehuane 3° Tepecano
cuca stay, stand kork
mure run mor
gial urinate hia
COSO sleep kos
** Rinaldini, op. ett.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO dol
A large number of stems, however, retain, as do certain nominal
stems, their final vowels, and a small number of stems commence
with a vowel.
Morphological Classification of Verb Stems
Two classes of verbs are distinguished in Tepecano, those which
predicate an action and those which predicate a state or condition. *”
The former class comprises the majority of verbal stems. In the
preterit tense the stem of this class of verb undergoes a modification
according to certain phonetic laws, most frequently by the dropping
of the final consonant or syllable. The characteristic of verbs of
the second class, which on this account may be termed defectives,
is that they are not affected by these laws and have no distinctive
preterit stem. In place of the preterit stem they use the verbal
suffix of past continued state (imperfect). Other class characteristics
will be noted from time to time.
Composition of Verb Stems
Composition of verbal stems is not a characteristic of Tepecano
but a few examples are found. Thus the frequent verb 6i(’)mor,
“walk, go”, is probably a compound of the common verb mér,
“run”, with the less frequent verb o/, “accompany”.
atin.o”’1 he went with me
numa’vamor there he runs!
a’ni.oimOR I am walking
Similarly the verb oid with the meaning “feel, be in a certain
psychological or physical condition’ generally requires a second
verbal stem to complete its sense.
anicaptu.6’rip I am in my usual health
kuhapupimisoi”’da so thus ye shall endure it
anisoi’no’'rid I feel sad
anisoi’ma’’c I look badly
Singular and Plural Verb Stems
A few verb stems are used solely with one number, a different
stem being used for the other. Some of these are:
“° Cf. Dolores op. cit., p. 243, 244.
352 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Singular Plural
oimor walk o7ipo
morinog run vopo
muk die ko’
moak kill ko’d (plural object)
duvia arrive dada
Reduplication of Verb Stems
While reduplicated verbal stems occur infrequently in continued
narrative, yet most if not all stems are capable of reduplication.
The process impresses one as being in a more or less petrified and
quiescent state. If a verb stem is ever found reduplicated it is
frequently or generally found so. Different phases of the iterative
sense are expressed by this method; in some cases plurality of
subject is indicated, in other cases plurality of object, but most
frequently a continuation of action is thus denoted. Phonetic rules
of syncope apply here as with nominal reduplications.
napimtuda’dar ye are seated a’picda’ art thou seated ?
anidada I am sitting down
gamcida’raiwa _,_ sit ye down! cida’i'wa sit down!
mituko”’kos they sleep avi’ckors he is sleeping
amti’miava’’pas they placed them anti’va's I placed it
naparnu’nkap‘am thou art guardian napimitnikap‘a ye will guard us
(of all)
kupipuso’sbip'a thou wilt shield apinso’bi'da thou wilt shield me
(from all) (from it)
natpuivo’pmiG he lifted them natpu.awo’miG he lifted it
ani’/nanmok: I am meeting a’tibi’n‘am he met me
a’nituna’puab I am hunting nanitna’udim | went for deer
na’tpuvahi/hin he howled (dog) amihi’nik they shout
ave’micto’ton it is becoming hot —ave’micton it is hot
These few examples will be seen to express in some cases plur-
ality of subject, in others plurality of object and in still others
continuance of action. In every case the iterative sense is noted.
Nevertheless all three of these ideas are more frequently expressed
by the use of the unreduplicated stem, the iterative being more
generally indicated by adverbial means.
Internal Modifications of Verb Stems
The principal internal modification undergone by verbal stems
is in the formation of the preterit stem, but there are also two
other apparent changes which must be considered.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO Bad
Normal » — Iterative s
Many verb stems which end in -» are not subject to reduplication.
When it is desired to give such stems an iterative significance, which
in the examples noted is exclusively continuative, the -7 is changed
to -s. It is possible that both -n and -s are verbal suffixes, but
under ordinary conditions -7 appears to be a part of the verbal stem. *!
ci.u’rin saddle it! ani.u’/ris’ I am shelving it
anituma’hina I will shoot anituma’his 1 am shooting
cimci’taNn open it! ni’cita’s I am opening it
cihai’n chip it! aniha’hi-e I am breaking it
anihi’ain I am buried anihi‘a‘is I am burying it
natuhi’woina to bewitch avi.inhi’vois he is bewitching me
antihu’ru'n I crossed it anihu’ru‘ciD I am crossing it
a’nituvitn I am chewing anivi’sub IT am chewing
antiko’hinit I made him walk — nitdko’hics T am trampling
Singular m— Plural g
In several instances defective verb stems apparently ending in
-im for a singular subject change this to -ig when referring to a
plural subject. This is doubiless a cognate process to that obtaining
between the suffixes -iim and -ik (p. 364) but in this case the verbal
ending appears to be considered an integral part of the verb stem.
anta.1’bwim I am tired atita’ibwic we are tired
vicma*’im he is drunk micmaiG they are drunk
ticgampopba’’i-m he drowned ho’gamti’ba’ia they drowned
Formation of the Preterit Stem
The verbal stem is found in bare unmodified form in the present
tense. As such it frequently stands final in the complex but equally
often is accompanied by verbal suffixes. rom this stem is derived
the preterit stem form which invariably stands final in the complex
and is invariably accompanied by the preterit sign -f-. It expresses
therefore bare past time without other qualifications; the other
“1 In Lower Pima (Smith, op. cit.) verbs ending in -ava form their plural in -asa and
those ending in -aiva their plural in -aisa as vanisana, vanisasa, desgarrar.
“2 This phenomenon must be cognate with Lower Pima. Here (Smith, op. ezt.), -mu
is the sign of the singular desiderative, -coho of the plural, being the stems of the
respective singular and plural verbs “die”, and meaning “to be dying for.”
354 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
distinctions of past tense, such as imperfect, like other present and
future tenses, are expressed by the present stem with attached
suffixes, with or without the preterit sign -t-. The rules for the
formation of the preterit stem from the present follow:
1). A stem ending in a consonant normally drops the consonant
to form the preterit. In many cases the preceding vowel also is
dropped, causing a disappearance of the entire final syllable. Pho-
netic theory, supported by actual evidence, suggests that a short
vowel may thus disappear while a long one will merely have its
length shortened. This class comprises the majority of verbal stems. *"
2). Final @ is retained. Final ¢ is also probably retained but
the examples are few and inconclusive.
3). Final 0, 6 and w are changed to oz, di and ui. Final de
likewise becomes é7 instead of 6 as expected.
4). A variant of the first rule is presented by a small number
of monosyllabic stems consisting of an initial and a final consonant
with intervening vowel generally long in quantity. These stems
reduplicate and then drop the final vowel and consonant causing,
in effect, a substitution of the reduplicated initial consonant for the
normal final consonant. In two cases noted the final vowel is retained.
5). A very few verbs are found which form the preterit by the
suffixation of -i7 to the present stem. Most of these contain a
glottal stop. (Cf. p. 320).
Practically all verbal stems obey one of these rules of preterit
formation. Most of the apparent exceptions were obtained only once
in response to a request for the form and can be ignored as errors.
In the majority of cases a rise in pitch was noted on the final
syllable of the preterit form and this phenomenon most probably
obtains in every case.
‘> That the present form is the true stem and not expanded from the preterit by
means of terminations is shown first by the great variety of final consonants and second
by comparison with other Sonoran stems
Nahua Tepecano Tepecano Papago
present preterit
maca mak ma mah give
cochi kors kori kol sleep
It is interesting in view of Piman comparisons to note that Papago verbal stems
(Dolores, op. cit.) relate almost uniformly to Tepecano preterit stems, and where the
Tepecano preterit has dropped a final consonant this is frequently replaced in Papago by
the aspiration, /.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 355
Glossary of Verbal Stems
A list of Tepecano verbal stems in the present and preterit forms
is given below in phonetic order. These compose the total of stems
collected during the field work. They are here given to illustrate
the types of stems and the rules of preterit formation, to serve as
a vocabulary for the specimen texts to follow and the accompanying
syntactical examples and, possibly most important of all, as an aid
to the comparison and elucidation of other Sonoran languages.
Too much reliance, however, should not be placed on detailed
accuracy. In the first place many of the stems, particularly the
preterit forms, were received in answer to a request for these forms
and can not be aboye suspicion. Second, the custom of using
the present stem to represent the applicative in the past tense tends
to obscure the determination of the true stem. Third, as has
been stated, the principal mark of identification of defective verbs
is that they possess no preterit form of stem, being invariable.
But certain normal stems, such as those ending in -a, are likewise
invariable, and other cases of non-variation may be due to error.
When to this is added the natural auditory lapses of perception,
the possibilities of error or confusion become considerable. Such
can be best corrected by a comparison with the verb stems of
kindred languages.
Each stem is numbered from one to five according to which of
the five rules governs the formation of its preterit form (p. 354).
Defective verbs are denoted by D. Forms of dubious accuracy are
queried and doubtful elements of a stem parenthesized.
Tepecano Verbal Stems
Present Preterit Type Meaning
A
ad, al al 2,3 overtake, settle
aan ad I write
an a ] wash, cleanse
ag a J converse, advise, think
ar(’ )gi(d) a'r(’)gi 1,2 form, become, grow
I
lawa jawa 2 pour, fell, convey
lapue 2 ? hold
396 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Present Preterit
iag(id) jag
iatg(id) latag
iakdukda jiakdak
iar ia
ib (a’)i
ihok ihd
itbwim, itbwig
ikcit ikwe
i korak
O
oi(d) ol
oimor o7imo
oipo ?
oidak
oit ol
ohi
o-mis om
or fa)
O
o's, O'C a1
Ostd(a), G-ctd(ic) Getdi
cit ore
ér(id) or
obwi
OBki6t 6Bkib
oka oka
6k:(6) b
U
ua ua
()ua(’)
(ukatok) u.wk
u.li u.ul
wrin, u‘ris cr
(uva), up'a, wupa
M
maim, maig,
(maik)
mai ic(turid)
mahin, mahis
mare
mat
vwa, wa
mai ic(tur)
mahi
ma‘cir
mart
Type
Io wee yO
Soe
Meaning
bless with corn at fiesta
cheat, deceive
stumble, fall, fell
drink
cough
be tired
weave
be vile, dirty
accompany
walk (sing.)
(plur.)
pertain to, belong to
play
be beautiful
break (intrans.)
harvest corn
sow
hide
rob, steal
believe, feel
be afraid
frighten
happen, come to pass
break, crack, burst, smash
break wind
be carrying
carry (plur. obj.)
reap, cut, harvest (beans)
put on a high place, shelve
throw, scatter around, sow
be intoxicated (with peyote)
earn, gain, secure
throw at, shoot at, hit
appear, arise at dawn
know (apparently irregular; pos-
sibly defective; pret. form pro-
bably error; cf. Pap. mal)
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 357
Present
mak
movwa
moak
mé(id)
morinog, mor
mombra
muk
na
na(d)
namok
nas‘ap
navuad
natar
nagia
nagiu
nio-k
norg
nd(a), nd(id)
noi puc(turid)
no’
no"nd
nond(a)
nora
nua(’)
nukad
iv?)
sauv
sau-wad
savad, savat
sa‘dim, sa-dig
sa*k, (san)
sar’ kad
sol
so"m
sona‘t
sonia’g
sonin
sonvia
Preterit
ma
movwa
moa
méi
morin
moémbra
noi puc(tur)
noi
nond(a)
nora
nua
nuk
sa’s
savat (?)
sasa
sar’ ka
som (?)
sonia
soni
sonvia
Type
Se oi!
3,1,(2)
bo =p =
SN Ri er Dead i
BS in
~~ —
m4 19 ¢
—_
Meaning
give
nod, hit with the head
kill (sing. obj.)
burn
run (sing.?)
scamper, run about
die (sing.)
shoot with arrow
bend, bow
desire, crave
make a fire (pres. stem probably
error; cf. Pap. nal)
encounter, meet, pay
fold, double
hunt deer
finish, complete
hang
be hung, be hanging
speak
return
be looking, behold, see
address, pray to, worship
sing and dance in ceremony
fly, blow about in the wind
recollect, remember
await, wait
play a joke
guard, protect
play a musical instrument
fast (reflexive; possibly same as:-)
buy, purchase (pret. probably
sava; cf. Pap. Ca’val)
be leading, driving (animals)
weep, cry
open, disclose (ceremonial)
be sad
sew cloth (preterit probably so;
cf. Pap. Coh)
begin
hack, chop
strike, hit a person
bruise, wound
358 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Present Preterit
sob(id) so'b
sorin sor
soid(id) so’id
sudi(d) su'di
surig, surik sur
C
cia(’)d cia
cidid ci‘di
cidu
4 cip
citan, citas cit
H
ha(‘)in, hahi-e ha(-)i
han ha
har(a)sap haras
hapug(id) hapug
haduk
ha‘gic(id) ha‘gic
hak haha
ha’k ha
ha’kiar(id), ha’kiar
ha’ki(a)c
hakwupa hakwit
hiak, hia’ hia
hia‘in, hiatis hia‘i
hiord (hioc) hid
him hi
hivnak hin
hivsos hivso
hivoin, hivois hivo'l
hido-r hidé
hikia‘g, hick hikid, hirk (?)
hikoma(g),
hikoma(d)
horn(id) hoin
hon(tir) (?) ho-nit
hohi(’) hohir
ho-tos, ho-toe hort
ho-m hom (?)
hoémag(id), homag
hémad
hdpiid)
Type
SS
Meaning
shield, protect, repel
extend, straighten out
suffer, bear pain
fill with water
fall, return, dive (plural)
dawn, awake, arise
spy, watch
hoard, cherish in secret
break, burst
open
break, smash
examine, handle
fasten, stick
contain, hold
pertaining to rain (ceremonial;
never well translated)
pardon
toast corn
finish, fail, lack
tell, recount
return an article
urinate
inter, bury
blossom, flower
£0
cry, yell, howl, shout
sprinkle, throw water on
bewitch
cook
cut flesh or hair (preterit pro-
bably should be hi; cf. Pap. hih)
cloud up, become cloudy
shake, tremble
marry a woman
desire, wish
send, despatch
laugh (preterit probably should
be hé; cf. Pap. hith)
form, create
be cold
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 309
Present
hé-p(id)
hopir
hég(id)
huruw'n, huru’e
?
hug
huka(g), huka(d)
Vv
va‘id
vai’g
va’u(*)ta(g)
vanisan
va‘ pas
vap‘an
eg
vatia
vakoa
via’ tar
(vid), vipid,
vi(ya)
via’
vidin, (vi’in)
vi'n, (visud)
Vi4gi
vo’
vopo, (wo’)
vor nuk
vomig
vor
wopgo(v)
wop‘auv(id)
vwa, vua, wa, ua
wa'g
wahim
vuctan
vu'san
wur
(wuva), wup’a
wa'c(id),
wuwac(id)
voic(id), wic(id)
B
bai, (babau:r)
Preterit
hop
hog
hur
hutua
hu
hu-ka
vanis
va‘s, va"pas
vap'a
vata'p
vatia
vakoa
viat
vl
vid
Vi'p
vol
vo'p
voinu
vom
wopauv
vwa, vua, wa
vwa
wahi
vuci't
vu's
vuvua
vu
(da’i'd)
wuwuac
(vOic)
ba‘l
Type
I
D
I
I
2
I
1,2
?
OY [REV OS TPIS
(Je) —_—
‘fo
tt | > co
=
Meaning
rest
convalesce, become better
reply
set sun, descend
stumble, trip
eat
warm, make warm
call
fetch water
be drizzling
stretch, let out, pull
lead, put a person inside
glide like a snake, measure
split, be born
bathe
milk (Sp. vaca?)
possess, hold
remain, stop, stay
have, possess, own
spin, make thread
chew
pertaining to rain (ceremonial,
never well translated)
lie down, lay down
run (plur.)
roam, inhabit (plur-)
raise, lift, arise
be sweating
be lightning
equal, imitate
do, act, perform
place, put
remove, fell, carry away
blow with breath
start, depart, come out
(plur.)
tie, bind
shield, repel
select, withdraw
protect, deflect, prevent
ripen
360 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Present
ba’im(uk)
bai’g
ba'm
baile-vrot
basiarut
biag
bia’(ka)
biuk
bibia:
bit
bo(i)
bok
paciara
pale’wid
paron
dada
da, dadar
daiwa, darai‘wa
dai’mn, dai’vn
ada‘im, adim
darsak
dapik
dadi(k)
dada
da‘k
dagvin
dag, dadg
dag(id)
dagiun
dag
dakta
diskwidarut
dom
do’da
don
du
dun
duvia
du‘k, dudu
1
ta’a‘u'v
Preterit
ba’irm, ba.irg
baigir
baile-rot
9
bia
bibia’
bitb
boi
paciara
pale’wid
paro
da
daitwa,
darai'wa
dai’wus
adi
?
?
dada
?
dagvi
dad
dag(id)
dagiu
da
dakta
?
dod
do’da
dé'd
du
duvia
dud
ta
ROO SES ROE SS SIN
oS
~ to
Nope bo
OT as ta)
aes
cS
BNP eaNH APN HSS
~
Meaning
drown
be able, can
be angry
use, make use of (Sp. valer)
pour out (Sp. vasiar)
take out, withdraw
feel, have a sentiment
be hungry
fish
defecate
seize, take, lift, bring
carry, bring
visit (Sp. pasear)
aid, assist (probably word of for-
eign adoption)
mistreat, abuse
fly
be seated (sing. and plur.)
sit down (sing. and plur.)
run
follow, chase
don sandals (ceremonial word)
squirm, crawl, glide
be healthy, give health
arrive (plur.)
jump
knead dough
work
give, send
cleanse, bless, purify
seize
desert, leave
be careless (Sp. descuidar)
cohabit, copulate
do thus, do in a certain manner
smoke tobacco
refers to position of sun
make, do
arrive (sing.)
rain
put in (basket or bottle)
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 361
Present
tamiam
tan
tane't(id)
tata‘m
tat
tatc(id), tatac,
tats
tagv(id), tagiv
ton
tono-m
todak
toan
tonc(id)
tosad
tovor(id)
totia
totnit
t6, tort, (tod)
to’gia
tog
tokta
tokdqid)
tok(id)
tok
toka
tui’, aptul’
tui’d
tuid
tu'n
tusa (?)
tue(it)
tutu(a)
tukwr
tukag(id)
tuk, tug
G
gauh, ga’l, gai
gaera
gaga
gigia, gitak
gi(-)gid
gigit(ut)
gi(’)kod
?
Preterit
ta
tane't(id)
ta‘t
tatac
tagiv
toda, tod
toa
tonic
tos
tovor
totia
téton
t0i, tot, (to'd)
ti’gia
to
tokta
tik-6i
tok, (td)
tot
tok-a
(ur)
tuid
tut
tus
Type
D(?)
L4
oo:
?
1,(2)
-
mS Wp eS pow Poe eS Se eS
Sl os fl OMS)
Oorn~rwn
(?)
Meaning
think
beg
lend
grasp a person
feel tired, pained
collect wood, change money
cover, protect, shield
be hot, rise sun
be thirsty
frighten, be frightened
command, order
kiss
climb, rise, raise
lengthen, increase
play
uphold
say, tell
fight, battle
see, look, find
remember
put on sandals
place, put something, extend the
hand
call, name
inquire, ask
be (locative)
do, act
clear ground, sweep, clean
jump down or up
put out, extinguish fire (Pap. tewl
suggests tus, tw.)
give milk
grind corn
sting
pass the night
carry (generally combined with
other verbal stems)
roast
sell
seek
lassoo
tremble
fatten
whistle
362 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Present Preterit Type Meaning
goc gol 3 fall
gov go(")g 4 strike with whip or tail
govka govka 2 become hard, freeze
goguk: gogu I stop, rest, stay (plu.)
K
ka(’), ko(’), koi(’) D be eating
ka‘i(da) kai 2,? say, talk
kaé, kari kai 3,2 hear
kan ka I clear ground, cut brush
kantarut kantarut 2 sing (Sp. cantar)
kauvkat(da) kaukat ? tighten, constrain
kart D be spread out, thrown down
kid D(?) live, dwell, reside
kivia kivia 2 chew
ko’ kori 3 die (plur.)
ko’d koi 3,1 kill (plur.)
kompik komip I skin, dehide
ko's kori 3 sleep
ko’k, ko’ork, D be ill, sick
ko’kda
k6(’) koi 3 bite
koe(id) koe I place, fasten, begin, decorate
kohin, kéhiss, kohi 1 trample, tread, kick
koitpak
kék6s D(?) be scratching
kowa‘in kowa'l I freeze
késa, kék‘a, k6-k k6vs, kokua = 2? stop, stay, rest, fasten (sing.)
kua’g kua I gather wood
kunat, kunta kunat ? marry a man
kutpa (?) kup (?) ? confine, shut in (Pap. kuh sug-
gests kup, ku)
ku(*)m kuk 4 grind, chatter teeth
ku(*)gat ku(*)gat D(?) finish, end, arrive, cease
kumpaniarat kumpaniarat ? accompany (Sp. acompanar)
kusiaé kusia 2 soil, dirty
ku kui 5) moo, low
Tense-Mode Suffixes
In final position in the verbal complex and immediately following
the verbal stem stand one or more suffixes. These express princi-
pally qualifications of tense but a considerable number of them
indicate various modal distinctions. They are invariably suffixed
to the full (present) verbal stem.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 363
Modal Suffixes
61. -ut, (-ot, -at), adaptive.
This suffix is attached to adopted Spanish or other foreign verbs
when used in native speech.
avi’mbaile’rota it should be made use of (Sp. valer)
kuya’mumdiskwida’rutdat that he should not ignore it (Sp. descuidar)
ati’ckikanta”’rotda while we sing (Sp. cantar)
nicinipuamkumpa'niarat I will accompany you only
a little ways (Sp.acompanar)
anibasiarut I am pouring it (Sp. vasiar)
62. -d, (-iad, -dad), subjunctive, optative.
Used in subordinate clauses after future suffixes -ia and -da and
generally dependent upon verbs of desire or command.
anito”’g"iaD I would have seen it
kumi’bida’daiya‘bD that they arrive
nansaptuda’d'giab (they desired) that I should work
kuya’mumdiskwida’rutdat (he told him) not to be careless
kupuva.ako’m‘ip-giaD (I told him) to skin them
kuco’riovhak’g6’ciaD (would that) he may come soon!
a’piamhapuma’gaD (you need not) think anything
na’puinima’“RiaD (we desire) that he may appear here
ansapina’mkiaD they say that I must meet it
63. -6g, hortatory.
Denotes exhortation or weak command. The pronominal subject
is always omitted and the intensive-imperative particle ci- is some-
times used.
ma't'bG know it!
tanoG beg him!
inka’dG hear me!
cia’0G overtake him!
nio’k6G speak to him!
cima’koG give him!
64, -it, (-ut), causative, compulsive.
The suffix appears generally as -7t but sometimes as -ut. It is
possible that the original final stem vowel is the determining factor,
an hypothesis which can be confirmed only by comparative work
on other Piman languages. ** It is liable to be confused with the
-(i)d of the applicative.
* Lower Pima -tuda (Smith, op. cit.) ; Northern Tepehuane -(z)¢vde (Rinaldini, op. cit.).
364 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
antimsa’sa‘kit I made you cry
napgamitotko’hinitda which thou wilt make us tread
antihi’nkit I made him how]
a’niko’cit'da { will put him to sleep
sapicto’tnit it gave him the fever
anti/mdai’mnit J made you run
gamtuamto’gitda he will give you good sight
a/nipu.um‘a’tutda I will give you to know
aniumko’kdatut I am making you sick
ti’/punma‘imut he made me drunk
65. -am, (-im), desiderative.
The desiderative is most frequently found with the suffix -im,
identical with and liable to be confused with the present conti-
nuative -im, but other examples distinguish the desiderative by -am.
It is probable that the original final stem vowel is the determining
factor in this case also.*° Whether -am or -im, it is always ac-
companied by the positive particle -ic- or by the negative particle
-iam- according as the desire is positive or negative. It is possible
that the frequent reduplication of the positive particle to -icic- in
this connection serves to prevent possible confusion with the conti-
nuative particle -am.
_—
ani‘amtu.a‘gam do not wish to talk
anti’kitu.a’gam I am going to talk (with him)
atitua’gim we go talking
ani’cickanta’rotam I want to sing
a/nikanta’rotim I go singing
ani’cicdo“nim I want to smoke
anidé“nim I go smoking
anicicxi’a'm I want to urinate
anicicbi’tam T want to defecate
ananiamhi’mim I do not want to go
puctuga”im desirous of roasting
66. -ik, (-ig), potential.
A similar construction is that of the suffix -2k (possibly -2g)
which evidently correlates with the desiderative -im. It has been
shown on p. 353 how certain stems correlate a final -im singular
with an -7g plural. The present suffix is an homonymous analogy
but not a synonymous one. *°
a/niamko’cik I do not know how to sleep
a/niamko’cim | do not want to sleep
*® Lower Pima -mw singular, -coho plural, being the stems of the singular and plural
verbs “die”; i.e., to be dying for (Smith, op. czt.).
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 365
ane’micdénik I am a great smoker
ania’mdonik I am not a smoker
ni’cicdd’nim I want to smoke
anicda’i’ vnik I know how to run
aniamdai’vnik I do not know how to run
67. -(i)d, applicative.
The use of the applicative is one of the most recurrent features
of Tepecano. While the construction is not required for verbs by
nature denoting action toward or against another person, it is
generally found when a verb, as for instance a normal intransitive,
predicates an action addressed toward another person. The suffix
appears as -d or -7d alone or in combination with other suffixes in
present or future tenses. *°
a’/niumnio’kip I am scolding you
ami’cupnio’k they also speak
avi’bin’6/ndip he comes to see me
pa’napund’a where are you looking?
pimiaso’sbidida ye must go obstructing them
anti’aso’B I intercepted them
nampihotunha’nitda that they may maul me
a’nituha’n I am handling it
napubdit‘dkdim he is reaching down to us
anti’putd’k I placed it
Other uses seem to be more idiomatic,
miamin‘a’mk6ib they do not pay me
miamin‘a’mokdam they do not want to pay me
ani’nanmok I am meeting him
apticima’cib how did you awake this morning?
natima-cdim that we may go arising (every morn}
avi’ema‘c there it appears (the track)
pihd/natihirundim where we pass the afternoon
a’nimihu’r'nia I am going down (to the river)
But the suffix is seldom found in the preterit. Here the usual
process seems to be to distinguish the past applicative by the use
of the present stem instead of the preterit form, as,
a’mitun.a’gib they are speaking to me (pres. applic.)
na’pimpu.a"’G (that) which you say (present)
natpuvan.a’G then he told me (past applic.)
ati’tu.a he conversed (preterit)
*$ Lower Pima -(i)da (Smith, op. cit.); Northern Tepehuane -(i)de, -(2)di (Rinaldini,
op. cit.). °
366 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
napivo’pmigiD thou art raising them (pres. applic.)
ani’ckiwo’pmiG I am getting up (present)
anti’awo’pmiG I raised them (past applic.)
anti’ckivo’M I have just arisen (preterit)
In a few other instances the 7 vowel of the applicative seems to
be retained in the preterit. Unelucidated phonetic rules probably
account for this phenomenon. It should be noted that the appli-
cative verb functions as a normal verb stem, 7. e., to form its
preterit stem it loses in some cases its final syllable, the suffix, the
preterit applicative being then identical with the normal stem, and
in other cases loses only the final consonant but retains the vowel,
the preterit applicative being then equivalent to the normal verb
stem plus 7.
natpuma’nio’ki whence he spoke to him
natpuga’minio’k whence he speaks
napitivu’si thou hast drawn her out
ti/ciwus he ran out
natanda‘i she seated me
amdéhévicda there he is seated
The only other stems with which an -7 suffix was found in the
preterit are as follows:
ati’i.oimori he started to walk
’a’daimi he followed him
natpuvaho’madi where he created it
natpugamisa”’ki where he began to weep
natpugamaga’ga'imi he continually sought him
68. -c, (-s), interest.
The suffix -c indicates that the action of the verb stem is done
for the benefit of a person, to his detriment, or that he has some
interest in it. It is generally accompanied by the applicative suffix.
ticputd’maiamsa’kcit continually we weep for you
a’nisa*k I am weeping
aniumta’nciD I am begging it for you
anti/uMta”’nic I obtained it for you
aniumta’nib I beg you for it
a’nituaha’ncit I handle all his possessions
a’nituha’nip T maul him
kutké-amdodicda which we must decorate for you
ha’puti’putudo”da thus we do it
69. -n, interest.
The analogy obtaining between normal - and iterative -s has
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 367
before been noted (p. 353). A similar relationship probably exists
between the suffixes -v and -c, both denoting interest. -c probably
indicates a more continuous action than -n. In both cases it is
probable that the original lost final stem vowel reappears in certain
instances.
cima" kan give it to him!
cida’gin hold him tight!
aniumnio‘knim I go speaking about you
a'tivti‘anio’kcip we were talking to thera
kumi tunha* gicdan they must pardon me
kupimipuma’ton know ye it!
70. -tur, interest.
Another suffix of somewhat similar import is -twr. It is found
solely with transitive verbs and mainly in ceremonial concepts.
The force of the suffix is rather intangible and can best be deter-
mined by a study of the actual occurrences. **
namputso’sbiturdim they go defending us
namputso’sbidim they go obstructing us
anti’amnu k‘tur I did not guard your commands
; nat‘unu kturitda which we must always guard
anti tunu’k I guarded it
napgama.itwi cturda thou wilt repel it from our midst
napgama.itwi'cda thou wilt drive it from within us
ticputé maiama turit for this we give you to know
71. -im, present continuative with motion, iterative, participial, gerundive.
This is one of the most frequently met suffixes in the language.
It is probably derived from verb stem him “go”, which suggests
an earlier stem composition now reduced to a verbal suffix. The
primary meaning of the suffix appears to be the natural result of
the hypothesized stem composition, viz., the addition of the idea of
motion to the sense of the verb stem. ‘Thus it is normally trans-
fated) im Spanish 2 fir) 2:4. s.. » ndo” or in English “go ..... ing.”
Frequently however, the context does not support the idea of motion
and it appears that the use of the suffix has become idiomatic and
frequently amounts to no more than a continuative, iterative or
frequentative. ** It appears in unchanged form without suffix in
“7? A Lower Pima example of a suffix -tur changes the verb “speak” to “teach”
(Smith, op. cit.).
“8 Lower Pima -/im also means “go doing” but does not necessarily imply motion
and is often frequentative (Smith, op. czt.). The Northern Tepehuane gerund is formed
by the suffixation of -amz (Rinaldini, op. cit.).
368 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
the present and in exceptional cases in the preterit, and very rarely
with accompanying suffix in the future.
na puwako hinim where he goes treading
kuvipupkima’ kim so he thus also goes giving
micupnio kim they also go speaking
mi pugama.itwo cturdim they go obstructing it for us
nanitna udim I went hunting deer
napimitso’soigiM that ye went in sadness
anti kivai’gim I am going for water
apiga ga‘imida now you will go seeking him
In the future tense, contemporaneous motion is expressed by -2-
before the future suffix. This is practically always -da, making
the future motional suffix -ida, generally translated in Spanish
“haber de ir .....ndo”, “will go .....ing’. This -i- may be fa
reduction from -im. Thus
anipukanta’rotida I will go singing
ha’stu nata’nda kuvi putma’kda natarma*mraD
Whatever we may ask he shall give us who are his children,
gat.o'G kuvi'putma’ kida ha’snat‘a’nida
Our Father. He must gd giving us __ that which we go asking him.
For some unexplained cause, probably phonetic, possibly morpho-
logical, instead of -i-, -ii- with preceding variable vowel (probably
the original final stem vowel) occasionally appears. The ostensible
explanation is that this -/- belongs to the original verbal stem him.
This however, is a very doubtful explanation. Certain other trans-
lations seem to suggest that the suffix -/- carries a morphological
significance, possibly implying a difference in rank between speaker
and auditor, a reverential particle.
api.inda’giunihida thou shalt go purifying me
apida’giunida thou shalt go purifying him
api.it‘a’nihida thou shalt go begging us
apLita’nida — thou shalt go begging us
aniputumtok’d'hida I go asking thee
kupimipuma’ tohi know ye and ...?
kuti pukétdinahi we must decorate ourselves
anintamiamu hida I must go thinking
In the past tenses the concept of contemporaneous motion is
expressed by the use of the tense particles -dp and -dk with the
particle -im, viz., -imdp and -imdk.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 369
Tense Suffixes
The pure tense suffixes, those which denote variations of past
and future time, stand in absolutely final position in the verbal
complex. Practically all tense categories are thus expressed with
the exception of the bare preterit which, as has been shown, is
denoted by the prefix -f and the preterit form of the verb stem.
PAST TENSE
72. -6D, -(im)ip, (-0t, -imot), imperfect, past continued action, generally
with contemporaneous motion.
This suffix occurs generally with the motional suffix -im in the
form -imip. As such it denotes past continued action with motion
and is normally translated by the Spanish “iba ..... ndo”, “was
going .....ing’”. With a very few stems, all of which as yet
found are given below, it seems to carry a bare imperfect signifi-
cance, continued past state or action, and its difference from the
imperfect suffixes -kap and -dap is not evident. In some cases
there seems to be an idea of simultaneity as “while going speaking,
99
tHe ys: .cs 5:
anita’ nimit I was going (coming) begging him
anita’ndapb I was begging him
aminio’kim6"D they were going speaking
kuticbo’himop we were coming
anicbo’himdap I was coming
abimo'cka‘tot there it was spread out
avicna kop he desired it
aviema tot he knew it
lo.)
73. -0k, -(im)6%, simultaneous past action.
This suffix, which is also generally found combined with the
motional suffix to -7médk, indicates that two actions occurred simul-
taneously in the past, or that one occurred while the other was in
progress or immediately upon its conclusion.
kutsapnio k'imok speaking, (he died)
anicddnimok gamkovi smoking, I fell asleep
anti'va.oimorimok hakagéi I have gone walking and returned
tum:a’‘acdimok they were going about conversing
antihi’mok I had gone (when ..... )
oimérimok sakimo6k walking and weeping (he arrived)
antictomaita nimok I was begging continually
370 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
ati vomgok he jumped up (and seized it)
nanitpum‘a’tok then at last [ knew
74. -kap, (-kat), imperfect, continued past state or condition.
This suffix is found principally with defective verbs and is the
principal method of expressing past time with this class of verb
stems. It may even be suffixed to nominal stems to denote objects
which formerly existed. *°
ho: vitkap the zapote which used to be here
ave’ macicbiu'k-a't he was very hungry
nanko’skaD (1 remembered) that I had been asleep
a’mimicda'‘darkat here they were seated
anipuva nisankat I] am he who was let down
avicto'nkat it was hot
75. -dap, (-dat), imperfect, continued past action.
This is the more common imperfect suffix and is found with
most active verbs to denote a continuance of past action.
nampuacwa'daD (I noticed) what they were doing
ho’ga.vi’wa’'dat he carried it
anito’tnitdap I was holding it up
ho/namickida dakdat they were working on it
namtuka‘dat they were eating it
76. -(a)G, -(ak), completed past, perfect participle.
This suffix denotes completion in the past and is practically
equivalent to the perfect participle (Sp. ...do; Eng. ...ed). °°
amtinxo’tsak they had sent me
kunticanboidu’ via that [ had arrived here
antiamtikak I had placed you
gamava 't'iaG after having bathed
ica’ pko-cimdu nar well decorated
daiwak, daraiwak after being seated
dagiunak cleansed, purified
77. -raG, (-rak), purposive past motion.
Expresses past motion with a definite intention, “went to do”.
Note the analogy with the purposive future motion particle -ra,
possibly differing only by the addition of the perfect suffix -g.
“® Lower Pima -cada or -tada (Smith, op. cit.). Northern Tepehuane -cade (or in
other dialects -tade); e. g., inoggacade, “era mi padre” (Rinaldini, op. cit.).
*° Lower Pima -ca, “after having ..... ” (Smith, op. cit.).
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 37!
nanitsapbo irae which I went to bring
bitw’amwa'rak they went to bring
antiga’grarak I went to sell
antiga’garaG I went to seek
FUTURE TENSE
All varieties of future time are expressed by means of termi-
nations suffixed to the present stem.
78. -ra, purposive future motion with singular subject.
kuvibdi'ra (I told him) to bring
anikivai” gira while I go for water
nanato gira I am going to see
anibo’iamka'ira I am coming to hear them
apiga grara you are going to sell it
antuma hi‘nara I am going to hunt
79. -pu, purposive future motion with plural subject. +
mai kutsaptu’ua'pu let us go and bring them
maik-‘utmitd'gipu let us go and see
mai k-utpaciarapu let us go visiting (Sp. pasear)
nat-uko’i’ pu that we go to eat
na t'uvi nipu (we are going) to munch
The last two suffixes are preceded by either the vowel 7 or a.
It is most probable that these represent the lost final stem vowel,
though the slight range of variation is unassuring. Note the rela-
tionship of the former suffix -ra to the purposive past motion
suffix -rae.
80. -da, continued future action.
da is one of the most frequent of the suffixes in normal use.
Though its use seems to be more or less idiomatic and apparent
exceptions may be found to any interpretation, it seems on the
whole to point to a future action of more or less continuity and
therefore to relate to the corresponding past suffix -dap. It is
generally transitive and applicative in meaning. As will be seen
in the texts, by a strange idiom most verbs of speaking and like
concepts use the -da suffix eyen for the preterit.
kutiamiambo pavuda we can never equal your example
anani cintunu kap-a ! will remain here to guard it
°* Lower Pima -hoppo, “go to do” (plural; Smith, op. cit.).
372 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF. SCIENCES
pimiam‘asanda do not afterwards weep
pin.u'rivnda saddle me (the horse)!
hacatsopua.u‘kba how will we carry them?
kupimai’mutda thou shalt intoxicate her
a’nitum‘a‘kda I will give you your food (board)
niskiamno'ra’da I will wait for you
apinda giunda kindly absolve me (this man)
$1. -ka, continued future state.
This is one of the less frequent suffixes but the few cases of its
occurrence point unmistakably to its use in cases of future continued
state, thus relating it to the similar past suffix -/ap. Like the
latter it may be used with nominal stems also.
napuritu‘kuk-a that it may be our flesh
varinkiamka it will be my house
nanbicimto’ k'dak:a I will remember you
kupiamitda'k’ta’ka do not desert us
nanbwomatkiu”k-a so that I may live with her
pic.u"rinka leave (the horse) saddled thus
kuaviamiputu7 ka it must not be thus
82. -ta,. future.
The suffix -ia is of very frequent oecurrence. Just as the con-
tinuative suffixes -da and -dap, -ka and -kap are related, so the
future suffix -ia@ seems to relate to the bare preterit. That is to
say, it is non-continuative and generally intransitive.
naho'mai.aiya (in order) to overtake one
ani’into’d'cia I am going to sow here
pinma kia give me it!
aticpar6"pkihi mia we will walk a little ways
apxai’ vatukua’gia gather some wood!
apbino*'rgia (when) will you return?
85. -a, future.
The future suffix -a@ is probably identical with the suffix -ia but
differentiated by phonetic laws. It is found solely with certain
verb stems, these being principally or exclusively those ending in
the consonants -” for the normal and -s for the iterative. The
suffix therefore practically amounts to -na, -sa being by definition
impossible.
nagama.u' ra he will brush it aside
pi min.u*rinda saddle me it!
pimic.u‘rinka hide yourself!
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 373
anituma’hina I am going to hunt
piam‘a‘hisda do not shoot it!
anisO"Rna I will extend it
nat.i/nituha’na that we may examine what is here
naho'maituhi woina (in order) to bewitch one
apinhi'voinda kindly bewitch me this man
anigamituko hina I am going to take a step
Naturally a small number of cases were found in which a stem
varies in form and meaning but where corroborative evidence is
lacking to afford cause for hypothesis of the existence of an ety-
mological or morphological suffix or of stem composition. A few
such instances are:
tan beg tane tit lend
ton be hot tono™m be thirsty
da, dadar be seated dai-wa, daraiwa sit down
kohin, kohis trample, tread koit-pak kick
PRONOUNS
The pronominal relations of Tepecano are ordinarily expressed
by means of pronominal particles attached to the nominal complex
as possessive regent or to the verbal complex as subject or object.
There are however, fuller forms which are occasionally used inde-
pendently for the sake of emphasis. These are the more interesting
from an historical point of view since, at least in the case of the
first person plural, there is a phonetic element not found in the
dependent forms. ‘These independent forms, as well as the depen-
dent ones, are given in the table below. Definite independent forms
for the third person are wanting but this lacuna is filled by the
use of the demonstratives hog:a, “that”? and héig-am, “those”.
The dependent subjective pronominal forms (p. 338) are frequently
identical with the independent ones, a fact which suggests that
originally the full independent forms were thus used more or less
in the nature of proclitics. Today they occur with equal frequency
as reduced or abbreviated forms.
The oblique forms of pronominal object and possessive regent
are practically identical and invariably dependent. They belong to
an entirely different series from the independent-subjectiye forms
though the general phonetic resemblance between them is evident
(pp. 331, 350).
374 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
Table of Pronominal Forms
Singular Independent | Subjective Objective Possessive
4. pers. | ani ani, an, ni, n | in, n in, n
2. pers. | api api, ap, pi, p | um, m um, m
3. pers. hég:a (demonst.) | a, (missing) (missing) -(vowel)d
Plural
4. pers. | ativ eatin calt dubicat aml aiteot iteet
2. pers. | apim apim, pim am am, m
3. pers. | hég‘am (demonst.) am, m a b a
ADJECTIVES
Tepecano adjectival ideas are generally expressed by independent
adjectival stems which are not united with any other part of speech.
Occasionally certain adjectival stems such as ap, “good” and wa’m,
“bad’”’ are used adverbially and incorporated in the verbal complex,
but the typical process is to use the adjective independently or
with the attributive particle -ar-. A few of the more frequent
adjectives such as o”Ai, “beautiful” and go’, go’gdrx, “grand” are
used independently with bare unmodified stem, but the majority of
adjectival stems are accompanied by the prefix -ie- which is probably
identical with the positive verbal particle.
84. -g-, verbalizing.
The particle -g- gives a verbal effect to adjectival stems as in
e 5D u
English “whiten”, “redden’”’ (active, not causative).
oD ? y)
aviciamgicta” it simply whitens
avicia Mgicwo'G it simply reddens
avicgictidoG it is becoming green
amiciamgicgo'k they are becoming simply numerous
ADVERBS
LOCATIVE ADVERBIAL PARTICLES
One of the most noticeable characteristics of Tepecano is the
development of locative adverbial particles. Most verbs of motion
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 375
include in their complex one or more directive particles, but there
are furthermore independent adverbs compounded of from one to
four locative particles which are of frequent occurrence.
The more definite of these particles occupy initial place in an
adverbial compound and are seldom incorporated in the verb. Their
exact connotation is uncertain but their translations and use seem
to indicate the following values:
inna, i-n(i) here, right here
a’mi very near, nearby
numa” nearby and beneath, below
duba”’ nearby and above, over, (below ?)
namo middle distant, above, higher
a’mo distant, (below?)
abi very distant, above
ani round about, all around
In second place follow two less definite elements mé and hd.
These are very difficult to define; dé seems to refer principally to
rest, mé to motion, but there are numerous apparent inconsistencies.
Another interpretation is that they may qualify the initial locative
element as more or less near or far.
In final position may stand one of two locative postpositions,
-van or -dér. The latter is often found in purely postpositional
relations, the former seems to be purely locative. -dé denotes
“from” while -van denotes “at”, possibly also “to”.
These three classes of locative elements may combine in almost
any possible compound, such as
amoho'van over there
aniho’ all around
a’bi’dor from above
abim0o'dor from above
INDEFINITE AND INTERROGATIVE LOCATIVE PARTICLES
The interrogative locative is expressed by the particle pa-. The
indefinite or relative is expressed by a similar prefix pi-. Both
are frequently prefixed to verbs as proclitics.
pinanitg61 (the house) where I was born
piho van where
pador whence ?
pa: ps0’ pukié where do you live?
ina‘muwr
ma‘kor
mia D
mok, modkor
SOR
ha’’dor
hu'ray, hurap"
ické'kov
OV, O'TIOV
umci’V
yamkuii
mw iv
wi mu(’),
vul mu(’)
wopo
ho'k:
Avak
i
ma‘ik*
morik6p
mul’
si-'rkam
sidam
(ijcavho'van
ci” 14M
har’
hac, has,
hactu
ha'roy
ha'va
ha'ban
ha'pu
LOCATIVE ADVERBS
hereabouts
other bank
close by
far, distant
to the right
this side
half way up the
canon
va" kor
di’da’p'dor
dorapmd
tasa‘p
tigika
tik-auy
s oy?” >
gal, ga’’gul
ku ida
TEMPORAL ADVERBS
in the morning
now, soon, quickly,
today
presently, at once,
shortly
not yet
often, many times
tomorrow
previously, before,
earlier
a long time
arichu kam,
lichu'k‘am
dampan
du‘kab
itdamdu’kak
ta’pu
ta‘k-auv
gatukdora
gdmhi
gumxo"" wan
kaikat
MISCELLANEOUS PARTICLES
nearly, thus,
approximately
affirmation
come! (interj.)
hastily, rapidly
many, much
certainly, very
full, filled
greeting!
quickly, rapidly
some, little,
how, what, why
something
who?
and
by, beside, with
thus, so
hakia
hi‘di
hi:
ho/na
hoc
hido-r
ho'gia
ho'kia
vwomab, bwomabD
vive, wore, bie
vopra
paro'p
pork
pondG
pui'cd-p
di
dok
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
indoors
this bank
outside
in the sun
up stream
above, overhead
aside
down stream
a short time
afterwards
part of a day
midday
pretty soon
yesterday
afterwards
always, all
one’s life
every time
afterwards
same, no more
this
yes, also
then, next
when, how
alone, solely
only, no more, solely
how many, so many
with, beside
all, whole
equally
scarcely, hardly
so, thus, such
like, in like manner
also, as well
than, or
or
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 377
du'sa‘r slowly goma'l another, different
tai’ face upward gbk-6 on this account
téidok-a yes, certainly ku‘pur face dewnward
gar a certain one etc. etc.
Compare also the incorporated adverbs on p. 341.
NUMERALS
The numerical system of Tepecano follows that of Tepehuane
closely as far as five, but from here on departs from the decimal
system of Tepehuane and follows the quinary system of Nahua
and Cora.
1. ho’map, hé’ma‘t 6. civhé’map
2. gork 7. civgo’k
3. va" ik 8. civaik
4. ma'‘kov 9. civma’ kov
3. (ijetuma'M 10. ma’mvoc
CONCLUSION
Tepecano is characterized by comparative phonetic simplicity, by
the relatively small influence of phonetic rules and by morpholo-
gical thoroughness in development.
RELATIONSHIP OF TEPECANO AND NAHUATL
The Uto-Aztekan hypothesis, the question of the interrelationship
of the languages of the Nahuatl, Sonoran and Shoshonean groups was
the primary cause of the present work. Stated in the barest terms,
the hypothesis is to the effect that three of Major Powell’s linguistic
stocks: the Shoshonean of the American Great Plateau region, of
which Ute is possibly the best known; the Piman of the Mexican
and Arizonan western mountains, of which Tepecano may be con-
sidered a typical example; and the Nahuatlan of western and
southern Mexico, of which the classical Mexican or Aztek is the
greatest exponent, are but three main branches of one greater
linguistic family termed by general consent Uto-Aztekan.
Though the first suggestion of this hypothesis was advanced as
far back as 1859, it was not until 1913 that any serious com-
°2 J. C. E. Buschmann, Die Spuren der Aztekischen Sprache, Berlin, 1859; Gram-
matik dér Sonorischen Sprachen, Berlin, 1864.
378 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
parative work on material other than that presented by Busch-
mann himself was attempted. These articles °** may be considered
as definitely establishing the validity of the hypothesis. Detailed
phonetic comparisons are there made establishing uniform philo-
gical laws of correspondence and change which can leave no doubt
of their force. The present paper makes no claim to be in any
manner comparative but it is a source of gratification to the
author that it has served as an aid in the elucidation of this im-
portant problem.
The Piman or Sonoran branch, as it may be termed, of the
Uto-Aztekan stock appears to fall into three main divisions: the
northern, consisting of Cahita or Yaqui, Opata and probably Tara-
humare and Eudeye; the southern, consisting of Cora and Huichol;
and the central, consisting of Upper and Lower Pima, Papago,
Northern and Southern Tepehuane and Tepecano. Each group has
its phonetic peculiarities. Judging from a lexical standard, the
former group displays considerable resemblance to Nahuatl, the
latter group very little.
APPENDIX
SPECIMEN TEXTS
Four mythological or descriptive texts are here appended for the
purpose of illustrating the processes of the language. While few
in number, these compose the total of such texts collected. The
great majority of native Tepecano texts secured were set prayers
which will be published separately in conjunction with an expo-
sition of Tepecano religion. But while the following texts constitute
but a small part of the material collected, they contain rather the
greater part of the lexical material and the morphological examples,
since the prayers are more or less cast in the same mould and
contain much repetition.
Each of the appended texts is given with literal interlinear trans-
lation and followed by free translation and morphological analysis.
°% Edward Sapir, Southern Paiute and Nahuatl, A Study in UWto-Aztekan, Journal de
la Société des Américanistes de Paris. The first part, treating of the vowels, appeared
in Tome X (nouvelle série), 19138. The second and third parts, treating of the conso-
nants, have appeared in the American Anthropologist, n. s., Vol. 17, nos. 1 and 2, 1915.
A fourth part on comparative morphology is promised for a later date.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 379
I. Fox anp Opossum
1. ka‘cié: havagaho’v
Fox and the Tacuache.
2. avicna'giukat —ho*’virta”ba kutm6 wadu’via hégaho-’y
He hung was zapote in. Then there now arrived that tacuache.
3. natpuvar tot arma’no —-yamha‘etu’ ~—nictuka’ —gahov’vit
Then he said “Brother, not anything I eat it, the zapote.,
to him,
+. has‘d’pumk-a’ a‘’pitai’vo"’ya konh6”"k6’duma‘hina
How is it eaten?” “You mouth-upward lie will that T with it you hit will”.
5. natpuhd”"kéda'ma‘hi —kuti’egampé-pm6‘a_ =~ kunatpumévadu'via
Then he with it threw. Then he killed him. Then he there now arrived
6. hé’ganut ov uMeiy apiga gaimida kupM6/ak
that vulture. “Now, at once, you seeking him go will. Then you kill him”.
7. kuti't-d ya'vaiko vta’ avi cdakat natpuwa tot
Then saw cliff at the edge he seated was. Then he now said
him ; to him,
8. piaminm0 méa’da i*nayvicna’giw’ gatumpittt si'dam
“You not me kill will! Here it is hanging the tompiate full of
9. hé'gavainuM maicimna’ gia kupbit6’sa’da
that money. There yourself hang that you here bring it up will”.
10. kutmana’gia kutbai‘cida kumticiampop*tuk'wR
Then there hung. Then there seized it. Then they simply thus stung him.
11. na-’puvaka‘i’da hd’gahorv citnva’ni‘saN
Then he now say, that tacuache, “Do me let down!”
12. kuti ciameida’k-ta vwo tran'm6’ ku’ticgampépmu
Then actually loosed him beneath. Then thus died.
13. kunatpumoévaduw via ho’ganui kupigamiga ga‘imida
Then he there arrived that vulture. “Now you seeking him go will!”
14. kuti’té avictal’ ‘kat va’ va‘ivo’ta’ o”rasinimo’ ak
Then saw He mouth-upward cliff beneath. “Now, yes, I you kill!’
him. was stretched
15. kupia minm6 méa’da mita’puigoi gaa’ yhelis nicto’tNit
“But you not me kill will; they soon fell the angels; I uphold
16. hé'ga t6'do’ ti'vwaG kuga.u’'c va chiort
that blue heaven”. Then the tree already was blossoming.
17. kunatpévadak’tra mok-pop'turt siempre
Then he now left it; far jumped. Continually
380 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
18. natpodgamaga’ga‘im‘i kuti’to- su’dik‘o’vav —avi'edakart
he went seeking him. Then saw him; water at the edge he seated was.
19. sa’pinu' kart hé'gakia‘eru sudi.o°R puva‘ka-tét
Said guard that cheese water in now thrown was.
20. ave'marcicbitka’t natpuvim’a aniihain‘a natpuamagéri
He very hungry was. Then he now “J break bit Then he now
thought, will’. fell.
21. kuti’egampopba’irm: amuh6'dér avichi’mdat gaan ri
Then thus drowned. There from it coming was the child.
22. natpda’tosaD nat*pova’ bok: kiamitha’ natpovatot
Then he drew Then he now home his toward. Then he now
it out. carried told her
23. gad6"u-p kuvihido-rda kuti ciamyo’mgék bai’do’ké’p
the mother that cook it shall. Then merely arose Tail his with
his and went.
24. natpua g6°G ticiamté’ t'oa’’povoa nata’mori'N.
then he now Merely wall in struck. Then he fled.
struck.
. TRANSLATION °*
Fox was in a zapote tree when Opossum happened along. The
latter said, “Brother, I have never eaten zapotes; how are they
eaten?” “You must lie mouth-upward so that I can throw you one”.
So Fox threw a zapote at him and killed him. Soon the vulture
arrived and revived him. “Now go find him and kill him!”
Opossum found him seated at the edge of a cliff— “Do not kill
me!’ he said. “There hangs a tompiate full of money! Lower
yourself down and bring it up!’ So he let himself down and
seized it. The wasps stung him. Then Opossum cried, “Let me
down!” Fox let go and he was killed. Then the vulture came
and revived him. “Now go and find him!”
Soon he found him lying on his back at the foot of a cliff.
“Now surely -I will kill you!” “No! Do not kill me or all the
angels will fall! I am holding up the blue heaven!” The tree
was in flower (and Opossum believed the bees to be angels).
Then Fox let go and jumped far aside.
Continually Opossum sought him and finally found him seated
at the water’s edge. Fox said he was guarding the cheese that
was lying in the water. (But it was the reflection of the moon).
°* Of, Journal of American Folk Lore, Vol. XXVIJ, No. CIV, 1914, p. 150.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO Jol
Opossum was very hungry and thought, “I will break off a piece”.
Then he dove into the water and thus drowned. Soon a child
came and pulled him out. He carried him home and told his
mother to cook him. Then Opossum jumped up and struck him
with his tail and knocked him against the wall. Then he fled.
ANALYSIS
1. havagahor. hava, proclitie conjunction. -ga-, article; possibly
reduced from demonstrative hdga, or possibly basis of latter.
2. avicnagiukdt. a-, 3° pers. sing. sbj. pronoun. -v-, euphonie con-
nective. -ic-, positive. nagiu, defective stem BE HANGING, BE
HUNG. -/kat, continued past state.
howirtd ba. -a’sa, postposition, IN.
kutméwaduvia. ku-, proclitie conjunction. -t-, preterit sign. -md-,
locative. -wa-, (better -va-) completive. duvia, invariable sing.
stem ARRIVE.
higaho'y. héga, demonstrative.
3. natpuvatit. n-, proclitie conjunction. -a-, 34 pers. sing. sbj.
pronoun. -f-, preterit sign. -pw-, emphatic subj. -va-, com-
pletive. #0, probable stem say. -t, (better -p), applicative (?)
armano. Sp. hermano.
yamhactw. yam-, negative. -hac-, indefinite. -tw, inanimate neuter
obj. pronoun.
nictuka’. n-, 1° pers. sing. pron. sbj. -¢c-, positive. -tv-, imani-
mate pron. obj. ka’, defective stem EAT, BE EATING.
gaho-vit. ga-, article.
4. has‘bpuuk-a. has-, indefinite, (assimilated from hac before s).
-86-, interrogative, (combines with preceding hac- to has‘d).
-pu-, emphatic sbj. --, (surd before /), passive. ka’, .BAT.
apitai’voya. a-pi-, 24 pers. sing. sbj. pron. -tai’-, descriptive ady.
vo, LIE DOWN. -ya, future.
konho’ki’dumahina, ko-, proclitie conj. (better ku-). -n-, 1° pers.
sing. sbj. pron. -hd’ké’d-, postposition. -wm-, 2° pers. sing.
obj. pron. (Better -wm'-, as final m of pron. combines with
initial m of verb.) mahin, pres. stem HIT, THROW, SHOOT.
-a, future.
5. natpuho’ kidamahi. n-, proclit. conj. -a-, 3° pers. sing. sbj. pron.
-t-, preterit. -pu-, emphatic sbj. -hd’hdd-, postposition, -a-,
382
~l
10.
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
either completive, (reduced from -va-, or latter may be built
up from a), or else 3¢ pers. plu. obj. pron. mahi, pret. of
stem mahin, HIT.
kuticgampo-puoa. ku-, proclit. conj. -t-, preterit. -7c-, positive.
-gam-, (m surd before /) progressive. -pd-p-, prob. combination
of -pu-, THUS and -dp-, ALSO. mda, pret. of méak, KILL.
(m surd after p.).
kunatpumivaduvia. ku-n-. proclit. conjunctions. -d-, 3¢ sing. sbj.
pron. -f-, preterit. -pu-, emphatic sbj. -md-, locative. -va-,
completive. duvia, invariable sing. stem ARRIVE,
héganul. héga, demonst.
apigagwimida. api-, 2° sing. sbj. pron. gaga’, continuative redup.
stem gd, SEEK. -im-, contemporaneous motion. -ida continued
future with motion.
kupmuiak. ku-, proclit. conj. -p-, 2° sing. sbj. pron. mdéak, stem
KILL (m surd after p).
kutit-G. ku-, proclit. conj. -t-, preterit. -7-, euphonic interpolation.
(The true pret. sign may be -ti-, the vowel normally disap-
pearing.) ¢é, pret. of tog, SEE.
vavaikorta’. kovta’, postposition.
avicdakdt. a-, 3° sing. sbj. pron. -7-, euphonic interpolation.
-ic-, positive. da’, invariable stem BE SEATED. -kat, continued
past state.
natpuwa tot. ef. § 3.
piaminmd méoa'da. p-, 2° sing. sbj. pron. imperative form. -2am-,
negative. -in-, 1% sing. obj. pron. méméa’ (probably auditory
error for méméak) redup. stem méak, KILL. -da, continued
future.
imavicnagiw. in, locative proclitic. a-, 3° sing. sbj. pron. -v-,
euphonic interpolation. -ic-, positive. nagiu defective stem,
BE HANGING, BE HUNG.
gatumpiut. ga-, article. Mex. tompiate.
higavainum. higa, demonst.
maicimnagia. mai-, locative. -ci-, imperative. -m-, 2° sing. obj.
pron., here reflexive. nagia, invariable stem HANG.
kupbitisawda. ku-, proclit. conj. -p-, 2° sing. obj. pron. -b7-,
locative. tis@, (probably auditory error for ?isap), CLIMB,
BRING UP. -da, continued future.
kutmanagia. ku-, proclit. conj. -t-, preterit. -ma-, locative.
nagia, HANG.
EY.
13.
14.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 383
kutbaicidd. ku-, proclit. conj. -t-, preterit. -bai-, locative. -ci-,
intensive, da, pret. of stem dag, SEIZE.
kumticiampop tuk-we. ku-, proclit. conj. -m-, 34 plu. sbj. pron.
-t-, preterit. -7c-iam-, positive + negative, equivocal. -pip--
(probably pd-p, pu-dp) adverbial particles THUS-ALso. tuk-u'r,
STING, (stem uncertain).
natpurdkaida. n-, proclit. conj. -a-, 3¢ sing. sbj. pron. -é-,
preterit. -pu-, emphatic subj. -va-, completive. kai, probable
stem say. -da, continued future. (This form, though evi-
dently future, is commonly used for the past tense with this
verb. Like inconsistencies apply with some other verbs of
saying, etc.).
hégahorr. héga, demonst.
crnvani'saNn. ci-, imperative. -in-, (combines with preceding
element to ci‘n-) 1% sing. obj. pron. vani:say, stem STRETCH.
kuticiameidak ta. ku-, proclit. conj. -t-, preterit. -ic-iam, posi-
tive + negative, equivocal. -ci-, intensive. dakta, invariable
stem RELEASE, LOOSE,
vwitanmé. vwota-, normally postposition, here adverb. -n-mdé’,
(m0), possibly postposition.
kuticgampipmu. ku-, proclit. conj. -t-, preterit. --ic-, positive.
-gam-, progressive. -pdp-, (probably pu-dp) THUS-ALSO. mu,
pret. of muk, DIE.
kunatpumévaduvia. ku-n-, proclit. conjs. -a-, 3° sing. sbj. pron.
-t-, preterit. -puv-, emphatic subj. -md-, locative. -va-, com-
pletive. duvia, invariable sing. stem ARRIVE.
higanui. higa, demonst.
kupigamigagaimida. ku-, proclit. conj. -pi-, 24 sing. sbj. pron.
gam-, progressive. -i-, possibly perpendicular. gaga-, redup.
continuative of ga", SEEK. -i/i-, contemporaneous motion. -ida,
continued future with motion.
kutité. ef. § 7.
avictav kat. a-, 3° sing. sbj. pron. -v-, euphonic interpolation.
-ic-, positive. -tai’-, descriptive adv. kat, defective stem LIE,
BE SPREAD OUT.
vara ivita. vitw, postposition.
orasinimeak. Sp. ahora si! -ni-, 1% sing. sbj. pron. (m here
should be m:, long in quantity to represent m of 2% sing.
obj. pron. plus m of verb stem). m<d’ak, (possibly better méak),
stem KILL.
384
15.
16.
18.
19.
20.
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
kupiaminmimiarda, ef. § 8.
mita puigit. mi-, 3° plu. sbj. pron. ta’pu, ady. IMMEDIATELY -
-i-, perpendicular. gé-2, pret. of géc, FALL. (It is difficult to
avoid suspicion of Spanish influence in the use of the com-
pletive particles -va- and -ta-, generally translated by Sp.
“ya”, “already”. “Ya” is frequently used in Spanish for
future tenses as “ya merito”, idiom for “at once”, which is
generally translated in Tepecano by ta’pu. Similarly anti'vaht,
an obvious preterit, is translated, “ya me voy”, “I am going”.
This Spanish example may explain the use of the preterit
verb form and particle for an evidently future tense).
gaayhelis. ga- article. Sp. angeles.
nicto’ twit. n-, 1% sing. sbj. pron. -ic-, positive. ti’tn, probably
by syncope from tétén, UPHOLD (mw surd after ¢; ° dubious).
-it, (probably -ip) applicative.
kuga.uc. ku-, proclit. conj. -ga-, article.
vachiot. va-, completive. -c-, positive (by assimilation from
-ic-). hiort, (possibly better hio-p), BLOOM.
kunatpivddak ta. ku-n-, proclit. econjs. -a-, 3¢ sing. sbj. pron. -t-,
preterit. -pd- (better -pw-), emphatic subj. -va-, completive.
dak’t-a (better dakta) invariable stem SEIZE.
mokpoptut. mik-, adv. FAR. -pip- (probably -pu-dp-), THUS-ALSO.
tut, pret. of tu'n, JUMP.
siempre. Sp. siempre.
natpigamagagwimi. n-, proclit. conj. -a-, 3° sing. pron. sbj. -t-,
preterit. -pd- (better -pu-), emphatic sbj. -yam(a)-, progressive.
gaga, veduplicated continuative of invariable stem ga’, SEEK.
-im-, contemporaneous motion. -7, pret. applicative.
kuctité. ku-, proclit. conj. -t-, preterit. -/-, euphonic interpolation.
ti*, pret. of tig, SEE.
swdikovvar. kovvav, postposition, AT EDGE.
avicdatkat, ef. § 7.
sapinwk-at. sap(i)-, repeated statement. nurk-at (possibly nw kan,
quantity dubious), stem GUARD.
higakiacu. héga, demonst. kiacu, Sp. queso.
swdi.orr. o'r, postposition.
puvakatit. pu-, emphatic sbj. -va-, completive. kat, defective
stem LIE, BE SPREAD ou. -dt, past continued (imperfect).
avemercicbiukeat. a-, 3° sing. pron. sbj. -v-, euphonic connective.
-em-, heard yariant of negative -iam-, which in conjunction
21.
22.
23.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 385
with positive -ic-, (here heard as -ac-), denotes superlative.
-ic-, repetition of positive, possibly denoting desire. biuk,
defective stem BE HUNGRY. -ka't, continued past state, (final
and initial / combine to &-).
naipuvdma. n-, proclit. conj. -d-, 3° sing. pron. sbj. -f-, preterit.
-pu-, emphatic sbj. -va-, completive. -m-, passive, used here
as 3° reflexive pron. obj. a, pret. of ag, CONVERSE, TELL.
With reflexive object denotes THINK, i. e. to COMMUNE WITH
ONESELF.
ani.thain-a, ani-, 1** sing. pron. sbj. -7-, perpendicular. hain,
stem BREAK. -@, future.
natpuamdgo2. n-, proclit. conj. -a-, 3° sing. pron. sbj. -f-, pret-
erit. -pu-, emphatic sbj. -a-, completive (v weakened after 7).
-ma-, locative. gi, pret. of stem géc, FALL.
kuticgampipbaivim:. ku-, proclit. conj. -t-, preterit. -7c-, positive.
-gam-, progressive. -pdp-, probably pu-dp, THUS-ALSO. ba@i-m,
sing. pret. form DROWN. (Stem probably defective).
amuhédér. amu-, locative THERE. -/d-, locative, place where.
-dir, locative postposition, FROM.
avichimdat. a-, 3° sing. sbj. pron. -v-, euphonic connective. -ic-,
positive. him, stem Go. -dat, imperfect, past continued act.
g@ari. ga-, article. -a7ri, adjective, SMALL.
natpia tosap. n-, proclit. conj. -a-, 3 sing. sbj. pron. -t-, pret-
erit. -pd- (better pu), emphatic sbj. -a-, completive (v wea-
kened after 6, “). tésap, stem TAKE OUT, CLIMB OUT. (Pres.
stem used in pret. for applicative.)
nat-povabi-k. n-, proclit. conj. -a-, 3° sing. pron. sbj. -t-, pret.
-pi-, emphatie sbj. (better pu). -va-, completive. bi-k, stem
CARRY; defective (?)
kiamitha’. -it, 3° sing. possessive (better -7p). -ha’, postposition.
: an “ 2 < : 5 aes Sie i pads
natpovatot. n-, proclit. conj. -a-, 3° sing. pron. sbj. -f-, preterit.
-pd-, emphatic sbj. (better pu). -va-, completive. té, stem TELL.
-t, very dubious; may be preterit by reduplication; may be
error for applicative -d; may be integral part of stem.
gadi'urp. ga-, article. -di’u-p, stem used only in 3° sing. poss.
kuvihidorrda. ku-, proclit. conj. -vi-, uncertain. hidovr, stem COOK.
-da, continued future.
kuticiamvomgok. ku-, proclit. conj. -t-, preterit. -ic-iam-, positive
+ negative, equivocal. vomg, by syncope from vomig, stem
ARISE. -dk, past simultaneous.
386 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
bavde kip, bai-, stem TAL. -’d, auditory error for -d, 34 sing.
poss. pron. 6’kd’p, elision from hé’ké’p, postposition.
24. natpuagi-c. n-, proclit. conj. -a-, 3° sing. sbj. pron. -f-, pret.
-pu-, emphatic sbj. -a-, completive (v weakens after w). gé-e,
pret. of stem gdr, STRIKE, WHIP.
ticiamti’ tow povoa. t-, preterit. -ic-iam-, positive + negative,
equivocal. ¢é’t-o, nominal stem WALL. -a’pd-, (better axa),
postposition. voa (better vua), invariable stem po. (A good
instance of nominal incorporation).
natamirix. n-, proclit. conj. -a-, 3° sing. pron. sbj. -t¢-, pret.
-a-, completive. mdritn, pret. of morinoc, RUN.
THE DEERSLAYER
1. hdmai gar homatkam nat.61 ~—sihdga.6’’6e ~——sh og aban
One certain individual he sowed that field. That coyote
2. natpuvapo'i =kugah6/matkam —nayanu’katdap _—h6’ga.6/egip
he now also sowed. Then the individual he now guarding was _ that sowing his.
3. kuna.ai‘tuma’“ria = kuied’ckat = hd’gaba’uv sh gah6'‘matkam
Then it dawn will. Then sowed was that beans. That individual
4. na’puvaka‘ida ha'rowsépu.uu h6'ga.inba’vtue
then he now says, “Who reaps that my beans?
5. kuananici*’dida ha‘rowsépétu’ uu ick6’koya’’Ba
Now I hereabouts who it reaps.” Morning in
spy will
6. natpuva’ci'di kuamih6’eda napuci*’dip kuamihdé’ wan
then he now And there is that he spies Then right there
spied. seated ; him.
7. amiti’ciwu's h6’graswi/maR po/nde x0/matkam
there came out that deer; in form human’
8. avi’cma‘¢ kunapuyatoé’D'a para'a’e kuputuw’u
he appears. Then he now tells him, “For what that you it reap
9. hé’gra.inba’vtue kuna’tpuva’xé°a = h6/gaswimar anti’biu”uam
that my beans?” Then he now replied, that deer, “J hither to reap
came
10. hé’gabav para nanténé”ya_ndi’k'arda’m — kunapéyaté'dra
that beans in order that I sing shall patio in.” Then he now
tells him,
11. marik inki/amha”’ ku’gatio’’D na’ puvahé-gip
“Come my house toward!” Then the man that he now replies,
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 387
12. paspsé/pukid ~~ naméni‘pukid oida.a”’ ba kunamitpuya hi
“Where you do “Above there I live, mesa in.” Then they now went;
live?”
13. natpubéyadu’via homai toho-v —_ami’ciama’e’da ti'tio’D
then he there now One cave they merely are seated, men
arrived.
14. havaga.wu'v kuna’mpuvatétda bir’ciduvia inaha”’ dor
and the women. Then they now tell him, “Here arrive! Hither from!
15. gambicibéi héga.a’tockar nada‘i/wa hi’dinha’dun
Go, hither bring that seat that he sit down this my kinsman!”
16. kuamihé’vieda kunapuvakai’‘da = hé’/ga_——s mars kori’gip
Then there is Then he now says that most old,
seated.
17. gambai‘citumak‘utéhu’gia hogac’a’’m wo’sd°@ a’nihéemd/mbra
“Go, here it give that to eat!’ That yellow rat about scampers.
18. hé/gala’mpara tok-auvana’g-iu kunapuvatié’tda h6’gahomatkam
That lamp above now hangs. Then he now that individual,
tells him
19. kuya’mumdiskwida’rutdat purke ami’cimnda — nanicapokia
that “not you careless should be, because they you want. Now I as soon
as break will
20. héigala’mpara na’a’gocia — kuvicgamtutu’-k‘ia ho/gataci
that lamp then it fall will. Then darken will that light.
21. hé’/na napavi'snia napcibo’ kta hégata't ma’tordaM
Then you run out will; then you must carry that light metate in.
22. kunapamori‘ygia kunata*’vu's aticiamparépma*ciR
Then you flee will.” So he now ran out. He only little appeared.
23. kuna’puvaka*‘ida — hégaswimarr ga’ Mcida'G inm6’vahim
Then he now says, that deer, “Go seize him! Here now goes!”
24. kuamihévan nampruva’kavida inmovahim ga/meidaG
Then right here they pow say, “Here now goes! Go seize him!
25. apimiamda’daktarda nakimérdat atfgumhé-wan amihémti’civi
You all not release Then he He got away. There they
him will!” running was. stopped
26. ictutu’k-am.dra kunampuva’katida numa’vamor amihéeda‘kat
darkness in. Then they now say, “There now runs!” There seated
was;
27. avi’ctuk’a ha’pruka‘ida i‘ciampucika‘ida hégamu’var
he eats. Thus say, merely say will that fly
28. ha”a h6’ga.i’ma‘i napuha’bantuhi‘do'r —_kunapuva'kavida
jar that squash that he with it cook. Then he now says
388 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
29. hégahai’’ mars kunu‘kap-a ga.lma‘l kuptu’cidakta
that others more that guard it will the squash. “Then you it
release.”
30. nathi
Then he went.
TRANSLATION *°
A man was sowing his field; Coyote likewise was sowing his.
He guarded the field and at daybreak had sowed his beans. Then
he said to himself, “Who can be cutting my beans? I will watch
and see who it is!” Another morning he was seated there watching
when a Deer in human form came out of the woods. So he addressed
him, “Why do you cut my beans?” And the Deer replied, “I came
to cut the beans in order to sing in the patio!” Then he said,
“Come to my home!” “Where do you live?” asked the man.
“Above there in the mesa”. So they went and soon arrived there.
There in a eave were seated men and women. They cried,
“Come on! Over here! Go! Bring him a seat that he may sit
down; he is my kinsman!” So he sat down. Then said the oldest
man, “Go! Bring him’something to eat!”
A yellow rat was scampering around and told him, ‘Don’t be
off your guard; they want to eat you! Now as soon as | break the
lamp which hangs above there, it will fall and the light will be
dimmed. Then run out! Hide the light in the metate and flee!”
So he ran out and was hardly seen. Then the Deer cried, “Seize
him! There he goes!’ Then in another place, “Here he goes!
Grab him! Don’t let him escape!” Still he kept running and got
away, while they stopped in the darkness. And still they cried,
“There he goes!”
Nearby was seated the fly eating. So he cried to him to cook
the squash in the jar. Then he told the others to guard well the
squash. “Do not let it go!” Then he went away. °°
ANALYSIS
1. hémai. cardinal numeral, ong. (Also obtained as Admap).
gar. uncertain as to meaning.
®° Cf. Journal of American Folk Lore, id., p. 153.
®° The last paragraph is extremely dubious.
5.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 389
himatkam. hémat-, probably from himag, hémad, FORM, CREATE.
-kam, abstractive suffix; thus CREATURE. (Possibly related to
himap, ONE.)
nat.ov. di, pret. of dc, SOW.
héga.o"'bc. Gc, reduplicated plural of 6c, CORNFIELD.
natpuvdp'oi. -p*-, assimilated from 6p, LIKEWISE. 67, pret. of
dc, SOW.
navanukatdap. nukat, heard for nukap, stem GuARD. (d_ be-
comes partly surd as 1st member of consonantal combination).
-dap, imperfect, continued past action.
héga.dcgip. Gcgiv. Gc, CORNFIELD. -gi-, possessive, (possibly by
metathesis from -7g.) -p, 34 sing. poss. pron.
kuna.aituma‘ria. -ai-, doubtful, probably locative.
-tu-, indef. impersonal object. ma‘r, unexplained variant of
stem mac, APPEAR. mar may be distinct root.) -ia, future
suffix.
kuicockat. oc, stem sow. -kat, continued past state.
napuvdkaida. kaida, stem probably kasi, say. -da, continued
future. (But many verbs of saying, etc., use pres. and fut.
forms in past.)
harowsopu.uu. haroy-, interrog. pron., WHO? -sd-, interrogative.
uu, stem REAP. (Also heard wu and wi:)
hoga.inbartue. in-, 1st sing. pron. possessive. bav, BEANS. (v becomes
partly surd before ¢). -twa, possessive suffix.
kuananici'dida. an-, 1st sing. pron. sbj. -ani-, locative. HEREA-
Bouts. ci*di, stem sPpY, WATCH. -da, continued future.
tkokova pa. wc-, adjectival sign, probably identical with positive.
kokov, stem meaning uncertain. -a’pa, postposition IN, AT.
. kuamihocda. ami-, locative, NEARBY. -hd-, locative, place where.
-c-, positive, (¢ combines with @). da, invariable sing. stem BE
SEATED.
napucidip. ci-di, stem SPY. -p, present applicative.
kuamthowan. ami-, locative, NEARBY. -hd-, place where. -wan,
(better -van), locative postposition, TOWARDS.
. amiticuvus. ami-, locative, NEARBY. -ci-, intensive. wuss, (better
vu's), pret. of vus(a)n, LEAVE, DEPART, COME OUT.
. avicmac. ma‘c, stem APPEAR, BE SEEN.
kunapuvatopa. stem probably td, say, TELL. (Stem uncertain;
ef, text 1, 22.) -da, continued future suffix used with verb of
saying in past tense. (Heard as -p'a).
390
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
para-ac. (better para.a‘c). Sp. para, FOR. -a'c, for hac, indefinite.
kunatpuvaxo'c. «xodra, (better hoc), stem REPLY. Present stem
used in pret. for applicative.
antibiwuam. -bi-, locative, HITHER. wu, stem REAP. -am, desi-
derative.
nantono ya. -to-, probably for -tw-, indef. inanimate object. 7d(’),
stem SING, DANCE. -ya, future.
novkvarddm. noi’), stem DANCE, SING. -ka‘7, nominal instru-
mental. -ddém, postposition, ON.
kunapovitopa. ef. § 8.
maik. iwterjection.
inkiamh@’. in-, 1st sing. poss. pron. kiam, HOME. -hd’, post-
position.
napuviho-gip. hog, stem REPLY. -?-, possibly original stem
vowel; possibly euphonic interpolation; possibly part of suffix.
-p, applicative. (Present form, used as frequently with verbs
of speaking for past tense).
papsipukio. pa-, locative interrog. WHERE? -ap-, 24 sing. sbj.
pron. -sd-, interrogative. -pu-, emphatic. sbj. kid, stem DWELL,
RESIDE (probably defective).
namonipukio. namo, locative, THERE ABOVE. -pukid, ef. supra.
oida.wba. -aba, postposition, IN.
kunamitpuvahi. ami-, 34 plu. sbj. pron. -t-pu-va-, pret. — em-
phatic. sbj. — completive. fi, pret. of him, stem Go.
natpubovaduvia. -bo-, locative, THITHER. duvia, invariable sing.
stem ARRIVE.
amiciamac’da. am-, possibly 34 plu. sbj. pron., THEY, but more
probably locative, THERE. -?c-iam-, positive + negative, equi-
vocal. -ac’-, doubtful; possibly indefinite hac; possibly com-
pletive -a- plus positive -ic-. da, sing. stem BE SEATED. (But
context should require plural stem dadar here. Both are
invariable).
titio’p, havaga.w uy. reduplicated plurals.
kunampuvatotda. ch § 8.
biciduvia. bi-, locative, HITHER. -ci-, imperative. duvia, inva-
riable sing. stem ARRIVE.
inaha dor. ina-, locative, HERE. -ha’, postposition, TOWARD. -dor,
postposition, FROM.
gambiciboi. gam-, progressive. -bi-, locative, HITHER. -c?-, impe-
rative. boi, pret. of bo, BRING, CARRY.
16.
17.
18.
19
20.
21.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 391
hoga.atockar. atoc, uncertain stem, (cf. af, BUTTOCKS). -kar, no-
minal instrumental.
nadaiwa. daiwa, invariable sing. stem sIT DOWN. (cf. da, BE
SEATED).
hidinhaduy. hidi, demonst., THIS. -n-, 1st sing. poss. pron.
kuamihovicda. -ami-ho-, locatives, THERE. da, invariable sing.
stem BE SEATED.
kunapuvakaida. cf. § 4.
ma‘s. Sp. mas.
gambaicitumak-utohugia. gam-, progressive. -bai-, locative, HI-
THER. -ci-, imperative. -tu-, indef. inanimate obj. mak, stem
GIvE. ku-, conj. THAT. -to-, (better -tu-), indef. inanimate
obj. hug, stem EAT. -a, future. (Really two words).
hogac’am. hoga, demonst. THAT. -c’-, (probably better -c.-), by
assimilation from -zc-, adjectival prefix (possibly same as posi-
tive; 7 absorbed in @). -am, adjectival stem YELLOW.
wosd'g. Possibly etymologically vo, WOOL, sd-c, WOLF.
anihocmombra. ani-ho-, locatives, HEREABOUTS. -c-, from -ic-, po-
sitive. mombra, invariable stem SCAMPER, RUN ABOUT. (Possibly
reduplicated from or related to stem mdr, RUN).
tik-auvanagiu. tok-auv, ady. ABOVE. -a-, completive. nagin,
defective stem BE HANGING.
kunapuvatotda. cf. § 8.
kuyamumdiskwidarutdat. ku-, proclit. conj. THAT. -yam-, nega-
tive. -wm-, 24 sing. pron. obj. (Or possibly passive). diskwidar,
Sp. descuidar. -wt-, adaptive suffix appended to foreign words.
-da-, continued future. -¢-, (better -»), subjunctive.
amicim-nd. am-, 34 plu. sbj. pron. -ic-, positive, used commonly
with verbs of desiring, etc. -i-, doubtful, possibly -c7-, intensive.
-m-, 24 sing. pron. obj. (From -wm-; wu being absorbed in 7.).
na, defective stem CRAVE, DESIRE (TO EAT).
nanicapokia. an-, pron. sbj. -ic-ap-, positive + ady. WELL, to-
gether forming ady. As soon as. 0k, stem BREAK -ia, fut..
n@agocia. na-, proclit. conj. + 34 sing. pron. sbj. ’a, (probably
better .a), doubtful, probably completive. goc, stem FALL.
-ia, future.
kuvicgamtutuk-ia. -gam-, progressive. tutuk, probably redup.
continuative of tuk, DARK, BLACK. (ef. ¢ctutuk‘am, DARKNESS.)
-ia, future.
napavi'snia. -ap-, 24 sing. pron. sbj. -a-, doubtful, probably
392 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
completive. vursn, by syncope from vu'san, DEPART, LEAVE.
-ia, future.
napcibokta. -ap-, 24 sing. pron. sbj. -ci-, probably imperative,
possibly intensive. bok, stem carry. -ta, probably for -da,
continued future.
matordim. -ddu, postposition.
22. kunapamiriggia. -ap-, 24 sing. pron. sbj. -a-, dubious, probably
completive. médriyg, by syneope from mérinog, RUN. (Pro-
bably related to mdr, RUN). -ia, future.
kunatavus. -ta-, probably preterit completive. vus, pret. of vusan,
DEPART.
aticiamparopma'cir. parop, diminutive ady., possibly compounded
with op, ALSO. ma‘cin, pret. of marc, APPEAR, BE SEEN.
23. kunapuvakaida. ef. § 4.
gaucidarc. gam-, progressive, (m partly surd before c). -ci-,
imperative. da‘a, stem SEIZE.
inmovahiu. in-mo-, locatives, HERE. -va-, completive. hin,
stem GO.
24. kuamihovan. ami-ho-van, locative particles.
namp uvakaida. ef. § 4.
inmovahim, gamcidarc. ef. § 23.
25. apimiamdadaktarda. apim-, 24 plu. pron. sbj. -7am-, negative.
dadaktar, probably redup. continuative of dakta(’), RELEASE,
LOOSE. (-r-, dubious, probably developed from ’). -da, con-
tinued future.
nakimordat. -ki-, proximate. mor, stem RUN. -dat, imperfect.
atiguinho-wan. a-, 34 sing. sbj. pron. -t-, preterit. -igum-, dubious.
-ho--wan, locative particles here functioning as verb, lit. mE
AWAY.
amihomticivi . ami-ho-, locative particles. -m-, 34 plu. pron. sbj.
-(7)-, preterit. -c/-, intensive. v7, pret. of vi0, REMAIN, STAY.
26. ictutuk‘am.ora. ic-, adjective prefix, possibly identical with po-
sitive. tutuk, vedup. plural of tuk, BLACK, DARK. -kam,
abstractive suffix. -dra, postposition INTO.
kunampuvakaida. ef. § 4.
numavamor. numa-, locative. -va-, completive. mdr, stem RUN.
amihocdakat. ami-ho-, locative particles. -c-, from -ic-, positive ;
(¢ absorbed in 0). da, invariable sing. stem BE SEATED. -kat,
past continued state.
bo
“I
avictuked. a-, 34 sing. pron. sbj. -v-, euphonie interpolation.
28.
3.
4,
Or
6.
~]
8.
9.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 393
-ic-, positive. -tu-, indef. inanimate obj. kd, defective stem
BE EATING.
hapukaida. hapu, adv. tuHus. kaida, cf. § 4, ete.
iciampucikdida. -ic-iam-, positive + negative, equivocal. -pu-,
either emphatic sbj. or ady. Tuus. kavida, ef. § 4, ete.
napuhabantuhido-r. -a-, 34 sing. pron. sbj. -pu-, emphatic sbj.
haban, ady. meaning uncertain. -tu-, indefinite inanimate obj.
hidovr, stem COOK.
kunapuvakaida. ct. § 4, ete.
kunukava. nukap, stem GUARD. -da, continued future.
kuptuciddkta. -p-, 24 sing. pron. sbj. -tw-, indefinite inanimate
obj. -ci-, probably imperative. dakta, stem RELEASE. (There
should be doubtless a negative here; the form was translated,
“Do not release it.” The stem may however be daceda, con-
tinued future of dag, skizE. The two stems probably have
a common origin).
natht. -a-, 34 sing. pron. sbj. -t-, preterit. h/, pret. of him, Go.
A JOURNEY TO SANTA MARIA OCOTAN
varx0'kva’ nanitxi*mok* g6'ma'l ki'dadam
It is long ago that I gone had another town in
pi nampuptunidk- hégathaha-edun ha’pumi ctunidk:
where they thus speak. That our kinsmen thus they speak
po née a’tiv avemicmék-orr ci’ vgork to’no‘rhd’kép
like ourselves. It very distant, seven sun with
nanitgamahi para godmai kidadam pinampu ptunidk-
that I went to another town in where they similarly
speak
ponok ativ itNi o-khd’k6’p ami cupnio"k
like ourselves. Our language with they also speak
gagokik-dadam antipuo'imé _nanitsa’pbéfraa _—hdgati-'tolo
the two towns in. I walked for I, ordered bring that title
went to
havagakampa'na havahémai gavande:'ra civma kov
and the bell and one the banner. Nine
tono‘rhok-it- antibédu via kuna‘nitpuvatuati'k-a
sun with I there arrived. Then I now it them asked
hégatha’ha-cdun kumsapiam:a: tot pih6 napua-ptutul’
that our kinsmen that they maybe not knew where that they are.
394
10.
Bs
12.
13
14.
15.
16.
ye
18.
19.
20.
mi
26.
27.
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
nampuyanté tda kumiputuati’ka ho'gahai” gama’skék-rigit-
Then they now that they it them that rest the most old
me tell ask will
na‘kuhé'gamsa'piema't: pixdnapuap'tu’i’ para
that to find they maybe know where that it is in order
namsapbaitxo t'ocda ave micmo6k’or anantiso r*kami* bwim
that they said here us It very distant. I, I was extremely tired,
send will.
anihdnanitpé’o'imé kunampuanté tda kumia’mrart
there that I walked. Then they me tell that they not know
pihé napuap'tul’ kwnamitpuwavi kumibituna” anda
where that it is. Then they now remained that they here it me
write will,
kumtiambituna”a'N anticté’maiténd"rimok: kutiamha’ctupima’ cir
But wrote they not here it I uselessly it wait did, for not anything appeared.
higati’tulo —-var’a*'tiv ivnkam hidi ki‘da dé3rkam
That title is ours, local, this town, internal.
kumti’punxo-'tsak* ga’u"ciaka‘m kuntiamha’etubibé-k- — umei’v
And they me sent had, the authority. But I not anything here Now
brought.
ansapi puphi mia pero a’ naniamhi mim porke
I, they say, again but TI, I not going because
go will :
miamin‘a’mék-dam nanpova’até'tda kumihémaiga*ga —porke
they not me pay wish. So I now them tell that they one find because
ananiamkihi*mim porke aviamicmé‘k‘or na*kugémai.dida’a’ba
I, I not to go wish, because it very far. Maybe another year in
nivti’am‘u’ yam kunti’vamu kuniamikihi mia.
I if not die not. And I if now die, then I not go will.
nanatogira gatha’ha‘cdun —na*‘kumhémaiinma’‘kia —ga.u"v
I see them the our kinsmen if they one me give will the woman
will go to
ame’micapno nd gato tia gokb nipuchi mitm
they very good look, the girls. On this account I go wish.
kunampuanhd6 git paho'do-r pichitm nanpuyva.ato tda
Then they now me “Where from you come?” And I now them tell
reply
kunatrpoponarta’mdor ku‘nampuvaténté'k-a hoe
that is ants place from. Then they now it me ask, “How
napdemo kor ananpuwa.ato tda kuayviamicmOk-o-r
that it far?” I, I now them say that it very distant.
ku‘nampuwa cituna gip o”'dam micupnidk-itm
Then they now it me converse, mecos, they also speaking;
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 395
28. mar ithaha:cdun hapw’ mi cuptunio’k-im sirkam
they are our kinsmen similarly they also it speaking. Extremely
29. na‘ vapictéhé-p-it kov avi clamgic'ta” pupil’
that it also grows cold, ice it simply whitens. Head-man
30. navachohidaD nansaptuda’pgiap = kua'nantiamhohir —_porke
that he desiring that I, he said, work but I, I not wished, because
was should,
31. nemici’vwim:tu'giat hénamickida'‘dakdat hogat‘iup-
I very tired (?) Then they working were that church
32. nanitmé’oimé gattha‘hacdunavwi kunanitpuva ptit-d
that I there walked that our kindred with. Then I now when saw
33. ha’etunampuacwa dap hon-a nampuwacho hidap
the thing that they then that they now desiring were
doing were,
34. nantuda DgiaD kugasa*mit* miamput*dt-dk- po nok
that I work should. And the tortilla they not call like
35. a*'tiv h6'gam-iputé tok: pom:kar mi teu’
ourselves ; they call, “pim'kar mi'teu’.”
TRANSLATION °°
It was a long time ago that I went to that other town were they
speak the same as we. Our kindred there speak just like our-
selves. It is very distant; it took me seven days to reach that
other town where they speak like ourselves. They speak our
language in two towns. I walked there to get a title, a bell and
a banner. In nine days I arrived. Then I asked our kindred if
they knew where they were. They said they would ask the others,
the oldest people, to see if they knew where they were, that they
might send them to us. It is very far; I was extremely tired
when I walked there. Then they told me they didn’t know where
they were; they said that they would write to me. But they have
not written. I got tired of waiting for they didn’t find anything.
The title is ours, of this town, and the authorities sent me.
°7 Santa Maria Ocotan is the principal settlement of the Southern Tepehuane, some
forty miles south of the city of Durango. (Cf. Hrdlitka, Physiological and Medical Ob-
servations, etc., Bulletin 34, Bur. Am. Eth., p. 11; The Chichimecs, etc., p. 418; Lum-
holtz, Unknown Mexico, p. 469). Some of the municipal insignia of Azqueltan are said to
have been carried thither during one of the ubiquitous Mexican revolutions. My infor-
mant, Eleno Aguilar, was sent there to bring them back.
396 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
But I didn’t bring anything. Now they want me to go again but
I don’t want to go because they won't pay me. I tell them to
find someone else, for I don’t want to go because it is very far.
Maybe some other year, if I don’t die! And if I die, — then I
won't go! I want to see if they will give me a wife, our kindred;
the girls are very pretty. On this account I would like to go!
They asked me, “Where do you come from?” and I told them,
“From Azqueltin.” Then they asked me, “How far distant?” and
I told them that it is very far. Then the Tepehuanes conversed
with me; they speak just the same; they are our people. It was
extremely cold; the ground was white with ice. The head man
wanted me to go to work but I didn’t want to, for I was very
tired. They were building the church when I walked there with
our kindred. I noticed what they were doing and they wanted
me to work too!
They do not call the tortillas as we do; they call them “pim-ka‘r
miteu’.”
ANALYSIS
lL. varvik-va’. v-, euphonie interpolation. -ar-, substantive. -hirk-,
adv. -va’, possibly completive.
nanitalmok. him, stem Go, -dk-, past simultaneous.
kidadam. -dam, postposition, IN.
2. pinampuptuniok. pi-, locative relative, WHERE. -am-, 34 plu.
pron. sbj. -pup-, probably -pu-dp-, THUS-ALSO. -tu-, indefinite
inanimate obj. niok, stem sSPBAK.
hogathiharcdux. -t-, 1st plu. poss. pron. (i of -it- is absorbed
in a). haharcdun, redup. plural of hasdun, (¢ is unexplained
intrusion).
hapumictuniok. hapu, ady., THUS, SIMILARLY. (Generally found
in shorter form -pu-). -m-, 34 plu. sbj. pron. -ie-, positive.
-tuniok’, cf. § 2.
3. avemicmoko'r. a-, 34 sing. pron. sbj. -v-, euphonie interpolation.
-em-ic-, heard variant of -/am-ic-, negative + positive, super-
lative, VERY. mdk-, adv. DISTANT. -o7r, phenomenal.
civgo"k. Cardinal sEvEN. (lit. “? two’).
tonorhi'kop. ton, stem denoting HEAT. -o7r, phenomenal suffix,
thus tonovr, SUN, DAY. -ho’ko’p, instrumental postposition.
4. nanitgamahi. -gam-, progressive. -a-, completive. hi, pret. of
him, GO.
5.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 397
itwiokho’ko’p. it-, 1st plu. poss. pron. nio*k, stem sPEAK or
SPEECH. (n partially surd after t). -hd’ko’p, instrumental
postposition.
amicupniok. am-, 34 plu. pron. sbj. -ic-, positive. -wp-, adv. ALSO.
(possibly better -dp-). nio*k, SPEAK.
. gagokrik'dadam. ga-, article. -gok-, cardinal numeral, Two.
GU ga-, , ; ;
kikeda, by syneope for kikida, redup. plu. of kida, Town.
-dim, postposition, IN.
antipuoimd. oimd, pret. of oimor, WALK.
nanitsaphotrac. -sap-, repeated statement. bo/, pret. of bd, BRING.
-rac, past purposive motion.
ciumakoy. Cardinal numeral NINg, (lit. *?four’’).
. antiboduvia. -bo-, locative, THITHER. duvia, invariable sing. stem
=
10
Et:
12.
ARRIVE.
kunanitpucatuatokea. -a-, 34 plu. pron. obj. ték-a, invariable
stem ASK.
kumsapiama'tot. -sap-, repeated statement. -iam-, negative. mat,
stem KNOW. -dt, uncertain, possibly subjunctive » with
euphonic 0; possibly continued past state or condition.
Pihonapuaptutur’. pi-ho-, \ocative indefinite, WHERE. -ap-,
generally excellentive, Goop, but always accompanies this
verb stem. tutu’, redup. of tui’, BE (place). (redup. used
for plural sbj.)
nampuvantotda. -n-, 1st sing. pron. obj. td, stem TELL. (Stem
may be tot.) -da, continued future. (Used frequently with
past tenses of verbs of speaking).
kumiputuatokea. cf. § 8.
gamaskok-rigit’. Sp. mas. kok-rigit', by syncope from kokérigit-,
redup. plu. of kérigit-, oup.
nukuhogausapicmet:. narku-, proclitic of possibility, TO sEE
ir. higam, demonst. THOSE, THEY. -sap-, repeated statement.
-ic-, positive. ma‘t?, stem KNOW.
pixinapuap tui’. cf. § 9, but note stem without reduplication.
namsapbaitzotocda. -sap-, repeated statement. -hba-, locative,
HITHER. -7t-, 1st plu. pron. obj. xot-oc, stem DESPATCH, SEND.
-da, continued future.
anantisor-kami-bwim. anan-, redup. 1st sing. pron. sbj. -ti-,
preterit. somkam, ady. EXTREMELY. “tbwim, defective stem
BE TIRED.
398
13.
14.
16.
18.
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
anihinanitpo’oimod. ani-hi, locative, THITHER. -pd’-, (probably
better -pu.-), emphatie sbj. oimo, pret. of oimor, WALK.
kunampuantotda. ef. § 10.
kumianvat. -m-, 34 plu. sbj. pron. -7am-, negative. mat, stem
KNOW.
kunamitpuwdvi. -wd-, completive, (v heard as w after w). v7,
pret. of vid, REMAIN; (“quedar’. The use of this stem here
is not quite clear, as the context evidently requires a verb
ANNOUNCE, DECIDE).
kumibitunwanda, -bi-, locative, HITHER. -tu-, indef. inan. obj.
-n-, Ist sing. obj. pron. wan, (probably better a.a-n), stem
WRITE. -da, continued future.
kumtiambitunway. ef. supra. -iam, negative. @acy, stem WRITE.
(Pres. stem used as commonly in past tense to denote ap-
plicative).
antictomaitono-rimok. -ic-, positive. tomai, ady., USELESSLY, TO
NO PURPOSE. -té-, (probably by assimilation from -tu-), indef.
inan. obj. nd, by elision or assimilation from nd-ra, in-
variable stem AWAIT. -im-, contemporaneous motion. -dk-, past
simultaneous.
kutiamhactupima:cir. -iam-, negative, -hac-tu-, indef. inanimate.
SOMETHING. -pi-, probably indef. locative, ANYWHERE. ma-cir,
pret. of macc, APPEAR, BE SEEN.
var'a‘tiv. v-, euphonic interpolation. -a-, substantive. (’ is pro-
bably better ., a hesitation). atiy, independent 1st plu. pron.
inkdm. imn-, locative, HERE. -kdm, abstractive, HERENESS, i. e.,
LOCAL.
orkam. o'r,
INTERNAL.
kumtipunxotsak. -n-, 1st sing. pron. obj. xorts, by syneope from
stem o'tos, DESPATCH, SEND. -d-, possibly reappearance of
original stem vowel. -k*, perfect, completed past.
gauciakam, ga-, article. (° is probably better ., merely hesi-
tation). wc, nominal stem TREE, STICK, thus STAFF OF
AUTHORITY, (Sp. bastén). -da-, nominal suffix of undetermined
meaning. -kam, abstractive.
kuntiamhactubibo:k. -iam-, negative. -hac-tu-, indefinite-inani-
mate, ANY-THING. -bi-, locative, HITHER. bd-k-, defective (?) stem
BRING.
ansapipuphimia. -sap(i)-, repeated statement. -pu-, probably adv.
?
generally postposition, IN. -kas, abstractive, INNESS,
20.
Ak:
22.
23.
24,
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 399
THUS. -p-, probably assimilated from dp, ALSO, AGAIN. him,
stem Go. -ia, future.
ananiamhimi-m. anan-, redup. 1st sing. sbj. pron. -iam-, negative.
him, stem GO. -im, desiderative, (possibly same as -im, con-
temporaneous motion; normally expresses negative desire after
-iam- as it expresses positive desire after -7c-).
miamin-amibk-dam. -in-, 1st sing. pron. obj. namok-, stem EN-
COUNTER, MEET. Used applicatively denotes Pay. -d-, appli-
cative. -am, desiderative.
nanpova’atotda. -po-, probably auditory error for -pu-, emphatic
sbj. -va-, completive. (’ is probably merely a hesitation, .).
-a-, 34 plu. pron. obj. totda, cf. § 10.
kumihimaigaga. homai, pron. numeral, (SOME)ONE. ga‘ga, inva-
riable stem SEEK.
ananiamkihi-mim. ef. § 18. -ki-, proximate time.
aviamicmok-or. ef. § 3. -iam-, frequently heard as -em-, superlative.
narkugomai.cidaawba. narku-, prefix of possibility, TO SEE IF.
gomai, ady. ANOTHER. dida’, nominal stem, YEAR. -a’ba, post-
position, IN.
ni-ti'am-u. -ti-, conditional. (The principal difference between this
and preterit -ti- seems to be in the heavier stress accent
carried by the former. The tense form of the verb stem
seems to be the determining factor). -2am-, negative. mu,
pret. of stem muh, DIE.
yam. independent negative.
kuntivamu. cf. supra. -va-, completive.
kuniamikihimia. ef. § 20. -ia, future.
nanatogira. -a-, 34 plu. pron. obj. tig, stem sEE. -i-, possibly
original stem vowel; possibly euphonic connective. -ra, pur-
posive future motion.
nakumhomaiinmakia. narku-, proclitic of possibility, TO SEE IP.
-m-, 34 plu. pron. sbj. hémai, numeral, ONE. -in-, 1st sing.
pron. obj. mak, stem Give. -2a, future.
amemicapnon'o. -em-, heard variant of -cam-, negative, which in
conjunction with -ic-, positive, makes superlative. -ap-, excel-
lentive WELL. dnd, redup. of nd, LOOK, SEE.
gatotia. ga-, article. totia, redup. plur. of toya, GIRL.
nipuchimi-m. -c-, for -ic-, positive. him, stem GO. -im, deside-
rative.
kunampudnhogit. -d-, completive. (v of va is weakened after vw).
25
26
27
28
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
-n-, 1st sing. pron. obj. hég, stem REPLY. -(7)t, (better -7(p),
applicative present. (Verb of speaking using present form in
past tense).
pahodo-r. pa-, locative interrog., WHERE? -/d-, locative of place.
-dor, locative postposition, FROM.
pichi'm. p-, 24 sing. pron. sbj. -ic-, positive. hi-m, stem Go.
nanpuva.atotda, ef. § 19.
kuna bopvonartamdor. -ar-, substantive. povonar (probably better
totonar), redup. plu. of to-nar, SMALL BLACK ANT, (Mex.
azquel). -tam-, descriptive locative, PLACE OF. -dor, postpo-
sition, FROM.
kunampuvatontok-a. -ton-, by synthesis from -tu-in-, indef. ina-
nimate obj. — 1st sing. pron. obj. tok-a, invariable stem ASK.
napocmok-or. -poc-, by synthesis from -pu-ic-, emphatic sbj. —
positive. cf. § 3.
ananpuwa.atotda. anan-, redup. 1st sing. pron. sbj. -wa-, com-
pletive, (heard for va after uw). cf. § 19.
kuaviamicmok-orr. -iam-ic-, negative + positive, superlative. ef. § 3.
kunampuwacitunagiv. -wa-, completive, (heard for va after uw).
-ci-, intensive. -fw-, indef. inanimate obj. -v-, 1st sing. pron.
obj. ag, stem CONVERSE. (7)p, applicative. (Verb of speaking
using present form for past tense).
micupnioki'm. -tc-, positive. -up-, ady. ALSO. niok", stem SPEAK.
-7m, contemporaneous motion.
marithahacdun. m-, 34 plu. pron. sbj. -ar-, substantive. (’ is
probably merely a pause, .). -it-, 1st plu. pron. poss. hahacdun,
ci.go2:
micuptuniokim. ef. § 27.
sir'kam. (Orthographic error for sirkam, sorkam).
navapictého-pit. n-, proclit. conj. -a-, 34 sing. pron. sbj. -va-,
probably completive. -p-, reduced from -dp-, adv. ALSO. -ic-,
positive. -f0-, (better -tu-), indef. inanimate obj. Aé-p*, stem
COLD, (tchd-p, adj.). -7t, doubtful; possibly -cp, applicative,
(but note ho-pitkham, THE COLD).
aviciamgicta’. ~-ic-iam-, positive + negative, equivocal. -g-, ver-
balizing adjectival, BECOME. -ic-, adjectival sign, (possibly
cognate to positive ic.). ta’, stem WHITE.
. navachohidan. -a-, completive. -c-, probably for -ic-, positive.
hohi(), stem DESIRE. -dap, imperfect, continued past act.
nansaptudabgiap, -sap-, repeated statement. -fu-, indef. inani-
31.
32.
33.
34.
|
2.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 401
mate obj. dapg, uncertain, but probably by syncope from
continuative redup. dadag of stem dag, WoRK. -ia, future.
-p, subjunctive.
kuanantiamhohir. anan-, redup. 1st sing. pron. sbj. -f-7am-,
preterit-negative. hohir, pret. of hohi(’), DESIRE.
nemicivwim tugiat. -em-ic-, negative + positive, superlative; (em
for cam). twwim (or zbwim), defective verb BE TIRED. -tugiat,
of uncertain meaning.
honamickidadakdat. hona, proclitic conj. -ki-, proximate time.
dadak (probably better dadac), continuative redup. of stem
dag, WORK. -dat, imperfect, continued past action.
nanitmo’o:imo. -mo-, locative, THITHER. (’ is probably merely
a hesitation, .). o-7mo, pret. of o-imor, WALK.
gat hahacdunavwi. ef. § 2. -a-, 34 plu. pron. obj. -viw7, postposi-
tion. WITH, IN COMPANY OF.
kunanitpuvaptot-d. -p-, doubtful, probably reduced from -dp-,
ALSO. totd, continuative redup. of fo, pret. of stem tog, SEE.
hactunampuacwadav. hac-tu-, indef. — inanimate, SOME-THING,
-ac-, probably by assimilation from va-ic; (v weakens after
uw; 7 assimilates into a). wa defective stem BE DOING. -dap
imperfect, continued past action.
nampuwachohidap. -wa-, completive, (v weakens to w after 1).
-c-, by reduction from -ic-, positive. hohi, stem DESIRE. -dap,
imperfect, continued past action.
nantudangian. ef. § 30.
miamput-ot-ok. tot-ok: (better totok), redup. usitative of stem
to-k, NAME, CALIA
hogamiputotok. hogam, 34 plu. pron. sbj. or demonst., THOSE,
THEY. -?-, doubtful. totok, cf. supra.
pom-kar mitew. Southern Tepehuane words. pom, (probably
better tim), stem of dubious significance. -ka‘r, instrumental
nominal suffix.
Tue Deer Hunt
hé'mai__— to nora’’Ba anti hi na’nitna uydim inei*e
One sun on I went I deer-hunting. My elder brother
ati’n.o"'i ananiama' pbaik nantuma hina pero ho'ga
he me I, I not well that I it shoot but he
accompanied. am able will
402
3.
10.
My EE
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
a
18.
19.
20.
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
aviematét tuma“his — hé’gavi’’ua’dat hégama*hin’k-arap
he knew did to shoot. He carrying was that rifle his
kuanihd'gia ——h6’ganga‘t havaganuw’u wi ps __ titisénast
but I only that my bow and the my arrows. At first we began
kutiti'tuga di’dap-dor gork o'rasaBa pero
that we sought this bank two hours in bat
titiama’etuté mas di hé’mai vat‘sOR ati’ k-ot*
we not more than one racoon he slept
anything saw
ho"vitwé'ta —su'diko'vav = hayahdmai ~— nut natM0‘ak
zapote beneath water at the edge and one zopilote which he killed
hé’‘gaban x6na natpuvan.a’G hd’ganci“e —aviama’etu
that coyote. Then that he now me said, that my elder “It not anything
brother,
swimar ini mu’iv ganta ta umci Vv natuda daa
deer here ! Often the my father, new he works
bula-nius atituma ‘hisdat in.amuR kugumxé-wan
Bolatios, we it hunt did here about but each time
natpum6 aga ga‘imda kutiamha’ctuné‘néikda ma*ik-
that we there them but we not anything see will. Come
seeking go will
ma’‘kora’’B'a hé‘na nanitpuwa tort: kuti'tdamadt
other side to!” Then that I now said, that us over now was sun.
ap apia’‘mbiu"k- ho- pero avia mha ctusa* mit
“You, you not Ves. but it not anything tortilla
hunger?”
avia mkui' tuba" hé'gagi’swr anti’ putot: kuvirsor‘kam
it not yet ripen that pithaya.” 1 said that is certain,
pero anti’ma:t pinahé'maiko-k- gana’ k-uar x0'mai
bat I knew where that one grows the guache one
ba’viatam cin'dra asta kunhakg6'cia ani kivai’ gira
spring place. “Wait until that I return shall. I to get water
will go.
citukua”’ gia nap‘a‘tunasda porke vi ctoho- pit
Gather wood that you make a fire will, because it gets cold.
t6’tih6’maiswi marama‘ cir té’ti’varu'v piamra’hisda
If one deer now appeared, if is female you not shoot it will.”
héna ani nanta'sona‘t nanoimor para vaviataM
Then I I now began that I walk toward spring place
ha’ kup kuvoi'da‘m nantato x6mai ganoi’ kar
towards. But road in that | saw one the patio
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
33.
od,
36.
oe.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 403
pinamtiné"dap vwopddér gavagé”gér ina nantaso’nart
where they dancing formerly the forefathers. Here that I began
were
nanacma hinaM gork: gatu’ tute’ nana‘acmuimkat
that I shoot wish two the rabbits. I them shoot wish did
inwuhé'k-é’p ~=namtuka”dat hégasai” pero antiamx6d'maimui-
my arrows with which they eating that grass but I not one shot.
were
kumtihi kuntim6-du'via su‘ditam nanta sona‘t
And they Then I there arrived water place. Then I now began
went.
nansu sdiD héganva ka nanti cap’tuna’ ta nanta'dak-ta
that I fill it that my bule. Then | as soon as it then I now left
finished,
nanta't’a'm h6é'gana’k‘ua‘r nanta’sonia para
that I now cut that guache. Then I now hacked in order
wished
nanicbai’gria = nanha’bantés’dia — nanitbéva‘da mo k-médér
that I be able that I thus climb Then I out grabbed far up
will will.
in‘o” Vh6"k6’p nantatu.ui hodgana’k-uarr nanta civani's
my hand with. Then I now it cut that guache. Then I now extended.
kuticgam.o*'M nanit.a gol nanita’n.o*’M ganka't'ua
But broke and I now fell. I now me broke the my shoulder
a’idaM kuxé-k- nia’‘mbaig nanvomgia ni nans0d“rna
bedrock on. And long I not am able’ that I arise will nor that I move
gan‘ov ninde'dos nanaho’hoinda ~——ihé‘na’ __ nanitinda‘k.am
the my nor my fingers that I them shake Then I did my nose on
hand will.
ha’yaganmo’ nantanso'n'via hé/na_ nanitpuva'na’ — anhédé-r
and the my I now me wounded. ‘Then that | now me I alone,
head thought,
yampo k-cituko k-da kuganci'e- avin'é'ré ani = x0dna
“Not much hurt, and the my he me awaits. 1.2 Then
brother
nanta vom nanta’so-na-t nan.ol mor pero
I now arose; I now began that I walk but
a naniamictuko'k:dak-at liexu’ktamh6”"k6’p nantanam hd6'mrai
I, I very ill was. Short time with that I now met one
ganami go nanitpuvatét kuvibdira hoganva‘kra vaviatam
the my friend. I now told to here bring to that my bule spring place.
nava'ténté’k-a —s pasd’puva’viaG = nanitpuya'tét —-vavariso’na*p
Then he me ask, “Where? spring.” Then I now told, “Cliff beside,
404
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
38. oi dasa*'git- natkib6'im —s héganya‘k-a_~—_—nanita’vori tal’
mesa between.” Then he bring that my bule. Then J now lay face-
went upward
39. hé'mai hwuk-wo't-a naticapdu via nata. inxi’ Vso
one ocote beneath. Then he as soon as then he now me
arrived sprinkled
40. su'dihé”k6’p — inka’tua.d’’Ba hava.inwivas kunanta’x6"pir
water with my shoulder in and my face. Then I was relieved.
41. nanta’da hégaka‘nsur para ganmo napuso" nvyia
Then I that cloth for the my head that it hurts.
seized
42. nanitpuva'té't = kuvi'cbaig nan.ori'mér = asta ~—_—sinha’dunywi
Then I now told that able that I walk as far as my kinsman
with
43. nandu’via natpuva'ntot ma” ik: hé/na natita’.hi
that I arrive. Then he me said, “Come!” Then we went.
44. kutiti’eériovmé-’dada incl cvwi ho’ga nata‘ama hi
Then we soon there my brother with. He that he now them
arrived shot,
45. gasu'suimar hé'mapD para at ni kuh6'mai —s para
the deer, one for me and one for
46. héga nanitpuva'tét = kunéi'k-ard’ké’p =~ kupuwa.ako’mipgiap
him. Then I now told that my knife with that now them skin shonld.
him
47. kuhéna natita‘ahu = gaya‘kac —itvé’pra_—_—skunatiti’captuna*‘ta
And then we them ate the meat us equal. Then we as soon as
it finished,
48. ha‘cats6pua.u' kta gava k-ac titi’ inida kta
“How we them carry the meat? We if here leave
will
49. kugaba’ban amihu’gia natpuva nto't hé'ganami'go
then the coyotes they eat will.”
Then he me said, that my friend,
50. anti kihi’ kida.éra nanhoémaiga” gara para
“I went town to that I one seek will in order
51. na’itpale-’wita para nabwo'k-ta gaya’ kac pero
that he us aid will in order that he carry will the meat.’ But
52. gakir’da ave micmo:k-orr kunata’so“na't nadu*k
the town it very distant.
And it then began that it rains
53. kusér-kam — nava'pictéx6"pip —a’hala_~—_—sdkuco'riovhak~’gi'ciat
and extremely that it also becomes “Would that quickly return
cold. would!”
54. ape'nas anti’s6”'iD inta’tam nana‘akw'mdat
Hardly I bore it; my teeth I chattering was
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 405
55. havagantu'tr-ui iclampu pumgi' gitdat nantaso'na‘t
and the my knees simply trembling were. Then I now began
56. nanaho‘ho-inip hégan‘o nov hayaganto ton para
that I beat that my hands and the my feet in order
57. nanhu“k-a so" R’ kam hona namitama mci‘R va’ ik:
that I warm much. Then they now appeared three
myself
58. hégati’tio’D mas di ganani go kumi bida‘daiya*p
that men more than the my friend that they here arrive
should.
59. gowk amikuw'siatuk hégaswimar hédmat havaganami-'go
5 5
Two they shouldered that deer; one and the my friend
60. nampuya’ua gagd'mai hdoganci'c —nata’Nda in‘o'V.AM
they now carried the other. That my he me seized my hand by
brother
61. para nanoi’moé‘riat = =para — gacxé"’p naso”pdap __—voi’ dam
in order that I walk in order the cold avoid should. Road in
should
62. avemcici haik sor-kam nava ctoho'dia ka’ dactuma‘M
it very rough. Extremely that it stony. Every five
63. minu'tos nana’ia riM gork: o vasa’ Bra titi‘mé-dada
minutes that I falling. Two hours in we there arrived
64. kadax6"mai —kiamitha”kup = inxo’ni — tibin‘am d6‘rapmo
every one home his toward. My wife here me met outside
65. voi’dam natva kérha’anva's nata nda‘f ha‘ban
road io Then she inside me led and she me seated with her
66. gago’'ta*iso’na‘p natu gansa”a.inka'ttuadamyaywa*
the big fire beside. Then she the my blanket wy shoulder on placed,
67. avidamicto’nkat xona ho'ge nata tuhi do hégava kare
It very hot was. Then she she it cooked that meat
68. di gago'k: 26" br su suimar nath6”k6’da'‘tunma
of the two great deer. Then she with it me gave.
69. antia mho“hir nanituhu’ = porke aniamkuibiu'k-at pero
I not wished that I it ate because 1 not yet hungry was but
70. héga ti t‘unma nantuhu giad ho‘na nanta’vori
she if me gave that I it eat might. Then I lay down,
71. aniticapravkoi = pero) =9wimudaG _ické'kov anticko’ o*kap
1 well slept but next day morning I ill was
72. a’ci'a’D homat siiman anicko’ ok inka madam
now rose. One week I sick my bed in
27
406 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
73. anikart wore gakida amtiahu gaswi mar
T lie. All the town they them ate the deer
74. havamti.anéi = ania‘minki‘aminma*t> = porke __ nien6”’irmkap
and they danced. TI not my home me know because I wish dancing did
75. to'tia.avwo-m pero gomx0 tik-a ganei"'¢
girls them with but every night the my elder brother
76. avibin'6’néip = gdmh6'wan avi hé-mdap natpuva ntort
he here me see every time he laugh did. Then he now me said,
77. ani —s napax6"'pria gahwa'n x6-na nata p*kinauvdipu
Ie “That you recover the Juan, then we again hunting
will, will go
78. pero x6éna ti tubr-tuktu’gia sa*’miD bavw6"'ygaM
but then we it here eat carry tortillas beans with.
will,
79. hoé’na nata dak-taka hégana kua‘r para gako’ kon
Then that we leave will that guache for the crows!”
TRANSLATION °°
One day I went hunting. My elder brother went with me. I
can’t shoot well but he knew how to shoot. He carried his rifle
but I took only my bow and arrows. At first we began looking
on this side of the river for two hours, but we didn’t see anything
but a racoon sleeping under a zapote at the water’s edge and a
zopilote which had been killed by a coyote. Then my brother said
to me, “There are no deer here! Often my father who is now
working in Bolaios and I hunted around here but we never found
anything. Let’s go to the other side!’ But I said that it was now
noon. “Aren’t you hungry?” “Yes, but we have no tortillas and
the pithayas have not yet ripened.” I said that it was true, but I
knew where there was a guache tree by a spring. “Wait until
I return,’ I told him. ‘1 will go and get water. Gather some
wood for a fire, for it is getting cold. If a deer appears, if it is
a female, don’t shoot it.”
Then I began to walk toward the spring. On the road I saw
a patio where the forefathers used to dance. Here I tried to shoot
°® This story was composed by the author in Spanish for the purpose of elucidating
certain constructions. It was then translated by the informant, Eleno Aguilar, into
Tepecano. Therefore, while rearly all of the forms are doubtless correct, many of the
idioms can not be above suspicion of foreign example
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 407
with my arrows two rabbits which were eating the grass, but I
could not hit them and they ran. Then [ arrived at the spring
and began to fill my water-bule. When I had finished I left it
there and went to cut the guaches. I hacked steps in order
to climb the tree. Then I reached far up and cut the guaches.
Suddenly the limb broke and I fell! I broke my shoulder on the
rock. For a long time I was not able to arise nor to move my
hand or shake my fingers. I hurt my nose and my head. At last
I thought to myself, “I am not much hurt and my brother is
waiting for me.” So I got up and began to walk, but I was
very sore.
Soon I met a friend and told him to go to the spring to fetch
my bule. He asked me, “Where is the spring?” and I replied,
“Beside the cliff, between the mesas.”” So he went to get the bule,
and I lay face upward beneath an ocote. As soon as he arrived
he sprinkled me with water on my face and shoulder and I felt
relieved. [I put a bandage on my head where it hurt and then I
told him that I could walk as far as my brother. “Come!” he
said, and we went.
Soon we reached my brother. He had shot some deer, one for
me and one for himself and I told him to skin them with my
knife. Then we ate the meat equally. When we had finished,
“How shall we carry the meat?” we said. “If we leave it here
the coyotes will eat it.” Then my friend said to me, “I will go
to town and get someone to help us to carry the meat.” But the
town was very distant and it began to rain. It was very cold.
“Would that he would return quickly!” I said. I could hardly
stand it; my teeth chattered and my knees trembled. Then I
began to beat my hands and feet to warm myself.
But now appeared three men besides my friend. ‘Two of them
shouldered one deer and my friend and the other man carried the
other one. My brother took me by the arm to help me walk in
order to avoid the cold. But the road was very rough, full of
stones. Every five minutes I fell. In two hours every one reached
his house. My wife met me outside in the road and led me inside
and seated me with her beside the big fire. Then she put my
blanket on my shoulder; it was very warm. She cooked the meat
of the two big deer and gave me some of it. I didn’t want to
eat because [ wasn’t hungry but she gave me some to eat. Then
I lay down and slept well, but the next morning I awoke ill, and
i,
408 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
for a week I lay sick in my bed. The whole town ate venison
and danced. I didn’t like to be at home for I wanted to dance
with the girls, but every night my brother came to see me. And
every time he would laugh and say, “When you are better, Juan,
we will go for deer again, but then we will carry food, tortillas
and beans and we'll leave the guaches for the crows!”
ANALYSIS
1. nanitnauvdim. Stem probably nauvad, possibly navuad (nauvd
by syncope; HUNT DEER.
2. atin.o. ov, stem ACCOMPANY. (As verb is by nature appli-
cative, present stem is used exclusively in past tense).
ananiamapbaik. anan-, redup. pron. sbj. -iam-, neg. -ap-, excel-
lentive, WELL. baik, (better bata’), BE ABLE, CAN.
nantumahina. Stem mahin, sHoor. -a, future.
3. avicmatot. mat, stem KNOW. -0f, continued past contemporaneous.
tumathis. machis, iterative stem of mahin, SHOOT, THROW.
hogaviua'dat. -vi-, undetermined. ’wa’, invariable stem CARRY.
-dat, imperfect, past continued action.
hogamathin'k-avap, mahin, stem snoor. -h-ar, (probably better
kar), nominal instrumentative. -¢-, probably reappearance of
lost stem vowel, kara. -p, 34 sing. pron. possessive.
4. havaganwu. hava-, proclitie conjunction, AND.
titisonat. sonact, pret. form BEGIN; (present stem uncertain).
D. kutititugd. ga, invariable stem SEEK.
6. titiamactutd. actu-, by elision from hac-tu, ANY-THING. fo, pret.
of tig, SER.
ati kot. (7, of doubtful value). /-0/:, (better /o:/), pret. of kore,
SLEEP.
ho-vitwot'a. -wota, (or vot‘a), postposition, BENEATH.
sudikovar. -kovar, postposition, AT THE EDGE.
natuoak. uoak, (m quite surd after #). The stem seems to be
moak. This past form may be the present stem used in past
tense for applicative, but is more probably pret. moa and
perfect suffix -/,
8. natpuvan.aG. ac, stem CONVERSE, (Present form used in past
=~!
tense to denote applicative).
%. natudadac. dadac, redup. continuative of stem dag, WORK.
10.
11.
13.
14.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 409
atitumahisdat. mahis, iterative stem sHoor. -dat, imperfect, con-
tinued past action.
natpumoagagawimda, -mo-, locative THITHER. -d-, 34 plu. pron.
obj. gaga’, redup. continuative of invariable stem ga’, SEEK.
-7m, contemporaneous motion. -da, continued future. (One
would expect a past tense to be used in this case).
kutiamhactunonoikda. nonoik, doubtful; possibly error for nonoip,
redup. continuative applicative of no, defective stem BE
SEEING. -da, continued future.
maith. interjection.
nanitpuwatot. tot, possible stem say. (Used applicatively in
past tense. But occasional non-applicative examples give stem
to, pret. to).
kutitdimadu. -it-, 1st plu. pron. obj. -ddm, postposition, ABOVE.
-d-, doubtful but possibly completive. du, defective stem re-
ferring to position of sun.
ap apiambiuk:. ap’ap- (probably better ap.ap-), redup. of 24 sing.
sbj. pron. -dam-, negative. biwk= (better biuk-), defective stem
BE HUNGRY.
aviamkuitubai. -kui- (with neg. -iam-), incompletive, NOT YET.
bai, stem (probably invariable), RIPEN.
kuvivsir-kam. -ir-, probably related to -ar-, substantive.
15. pinahimaikork. pi-, locative relative, WHERE. homai, cardinal,
te
18.
ONE. ork, uncertain, possibly stem /v, REMAIN, GROW, BE
FIXED. -h", perfect.
baviatau. -tiu, descriptive locative, PLACE OF.
cimora. ci-, imperative. -n-, 1st sing. obj. pron. nora (better
nora), invariable stem AWAIT, WAIT FOR.
kunhakgocia. -hak-, repeative. goc, stem FALL. The particle
(possibly secondary stem) /ak changes the meaning of the
stem goc from FALL to RETURN. -ia, future.
anikivai gira. -ki-, proximate time. vai'g, stem FETCH WATER.
-i-, possibly reappearing stem vowel. -ra, purposive future
motion.
citukua gia. ci-, imperative. kua’g, stem WOOD or GATHER WOOD.
-ia, future.
napatunadd. -ap-, 24 sing. pron. sbj. -a-, undetermined. na’,
doubtful stem MAKE A FIRE. -dé, continuative future.
victoho-pit. cf. text § 3, 29.
to tihomaiswimarama cir. to’ ti-, uncertain. The verbal stem form
410 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
used is preterit, possibly due to error of informant who was
translating dictated Spanish. Thus -f7- may be the preterit
sign and fd’- the conditional. In other instances the conditional
particle has appeared as -ti’-. homai, cardinal, ONE. swimar,
DEER. -d-, euphonic interpolation. marcir, pret. of mare,
APPEAR, BE SEEN. A good example of a verbal complex.
to’ti’varuy. ef. supra. -ar-, substantive. wr, stem WOMAN,
FEMALE.
piam-ahisda. p-, 24 sing. pron. sbj. -iam-, neg. malis, iterative
stem sHoor. -da, continued future.
19. nantasona't. -a-, completive. sonat, cf. § 4.
nanoimor. oimor, stem WALK.
20. nantato. -a-, completive. (Note that this text commonly uses
preterit forms in -fa- rather than in -#/- as in former texts).
to, pret. of tog, SEE.
ganov' kar. noi, pret. of no’, DANCE. Kear (better kar), in-
strumental.
21. pinamtono’dap. pi-, locative relative, WHERE. -f0-, probably for
tu. no’, stem DANCE. -dap, imperfect, continued past action.
gavago gor. -va-, doubtful, possibly error for -v-ar-, substantive.
go gor, redup. plural of go, GREAT.
22. nanacmahinau. -ac-, probably -a-, completive and -c-, for -7c-,
positive. mahin, stem sHoor, -am, desiderative.
gatututc’. Redup. plu. of tute’, RABBIT.
nanaacmuimkat. -a-, completive. -a-, 34 plu. pron. obj. -c-, po-
sitive, (by assimilation from -7c-). mu, stem SHOOT WITH
ARROW, -im-, contemporaneous motion; when compounded
with positive -ic-, denotes desiderative. -/at, past continued
condition or state. (The use of -kat would imply that the
emphasis is laid on the continuance of the desire. The verb
stem would ordinarily require the imperfect suffix -dat).
23. inwuhiko'p. wu, redup. plu. ARRows. -ho’/o'p, instrumentive
postposition.
namtukadat. ka’, defective stem BE EATING. -dat, imperfect,
continued past action.
antiamxomaimui, mui, pret. of mu, SHOOT WITH ARROW.
24. huntimo'duvia. -mod-, locative, THITHER. duvia, invariable sing.
stem ARRIVE.
25. nansusdip. susdipv, (or susdit), redup. continuative of sudit,
FILL WITH WATER. (By syncope from susudit. Stem doubtless
2
32.
Jd.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 411
related to su-di(’), WATER, possibly by addition of applicative
suffix -d).
nanticaptunata. -ic-ap*-, positive + excellentive, this combina-
tion denoting immediate subsequence, AS SOON AS. na‘ta, pret.
of natar, FINISH, COMPLETE.
nantadak-ta. dak-ta, invariable stem LEAVE, DESERT.
nantaram. wa, by assimilation from wu (probably better w.7.),
CUT, REAP. -am, desiderative.
nantasonia. sonia, pret. of soniac, HACK, CHOP.
nanicbaigria. bai'gr, by syncope from bai’gir, pret. of baiC)g,
BE ABLE, CAN. -/a, future. (The use of the preterit form with
future suffix appears inexplicable).
nanhabantis'dia. haban, ady., BY THAT MEANS. tos’d, by syncope
from tosad (” probably auditory error), CLIMB. -7a, future.
nanitbovada, -bi-, locative, directive da, pret. of dag, SEIZE.
mok*médor. mok-, ady., FAR. -md-, locative, THITHER. -ddr, post-
position, FROM.
iwovho’ kop. nov, stem HAND. ho’ko’p, instrumentive postpo-
sition, WITH.
nantatu.ut. u.ui, pret. of wu, CUT, REAP.
nantacivdni's. -ci-, intensive. vani's, pret. of vanisan, STRETCH,
“9
kuticgam.o'm. -gam-, progressive. o7m, pret. of o-mis, BREAK.
nanit.ago. gol, pret. of goc, FALL.
widdu. -ddm, postposition, ON.
nanvom-gia. vom-g, by syncope from vomig, ARISE. -ia, future.
nanso"rna. so'rn, by syncope from sérin, EXTEND. -a, future.
nanahohoinda. -a-, 54 plu. pron. obj. hohoin, redup. continuative
of hoin, SHAKE. -da, continued future.
nanitindak.au. -t-, preterit. -in-, 1st sing. poss. pron. dak, stem
NOSE. -dm, postposition, IN. (This form seems incomplete as
it contains verbal elements without verbal root. Too much
importance should not be given to it, as the informant was
translating from Spanish).
nantanson-via. (Possibly better so-nvia), invariable stem WOUND.
nanitpuvan.a. a, pret. of ag, CONVERSE, which when used
with personal pron. obj. reflexively, denotes THINK.
yampok-citukol-da. yam-, negative. -pok-, adv. superlative, VERY
MUCH. -ci-, intensive. kok-da, defective stem (exact form
uncertain, possibly /ok’da), BE SICK, ILL.
412
3D.
38.
39.
40).
41.
42.
44.
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
avin-ord. cf. § 16.
nantavom. cf. § 30.
ananianictukokdak-at. anan-, redup. 1st sing. pron. sbj. kok-da,
ef. § 33. -/vat, past continued condition or state.
liceukeamho’ko’p. li-, adv. sMALL. (Generally found as ar%,
SMALL or YOUNG, CHILD. In the rare cases where 7 falls
initially it is heard as /; rarely also medially, as occasionally
ali, SMALL).
nantanau. nam, pret. of namok, ENCOUNTER, MEET.
kuviboira. boi, pret. of 60, BRING, FETCH. -ra, future purposive
motion,
navatontok-a, ton, synthesized from -tu-in-, 1T-ME. tokva, inya-
riable stem ASK.
pasopuvaviac. pd-, interrog. locative, WHERE? -sd-, interroga-
tive. vavia, stem SPRING. -G, uncertain, possibly perfect.
vavaisonap. -sona'p, postposition, BESIDE.
oidasagit*. -sagit’, postposition, BETWEEN.
natkiboim. -ki-, proximate time. b0, stem BRING. -im, contemp.
motion.
nanitavot. voi, pret. of vo, LIE DOWN.
hivuk-wot'a. -wot'a, postposition, BENEATH.
naticapduvia. ef. § 24.
natainrivso. -in-, 1st sing, pron. obj. Airso, pret. of hirsos,
SPRINKLE.
hava.inwivas. hava-, proclit. conj., AND. wivas, heard for vuivas,
(doubtless cognate with vui, EYE), FACE, COUNTENANCE.
kunant@xo:pir. xo'pir, defective stem CONVALESCE, GET BETTER.
(Doubtless cognate to hé-p, COLD, BECOME COLD, REST.).
nantada. da, pret. of dag, SEIZE.
napusoneia. cf. § 32.
kuvicbaie. ef. § 27.
nan.oimor. oimor, stem WALK.
inhadunvwi. -vwi, (probably better ru‘), postposition, TOGETHER
WITH.
hutiticdriovmo'ddda. -ic-, positive. -oriov-, ady. PROMPTLY, SOON.
-mo-, locative, THITHER. ddda, invariable plural stem ARRIVE.
natuamahi. -a-, 34 plu. pron. obj. mahi, pret. of mahin, sHoor,
THROW.
. gasusuimer, susuimer, redup. plural of suimarr, DEER,
46.
47.
D1.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 413
kuncoik-aro’ko’p, -n-, 1st sing. pron. poss. noth, reconstructed,
possibly obsolete stem cuT, SHAVE. -/ar, instrumental suffix,
e. g.- KNIFE. -0’k0’p, by elision for -ho’ko’p, instrumentive
postposition.
kupuwa.akomipgiap. -wa-, completive, (heard for va after 1).
-a-, 34 plu. pron. obj. komipg, by syncope from komipig
itself syncopated to ompia in present), SKIN, DEHIDE. -/a-,
future. -p, subjunctive.
natitaahu. hu, pret. of hug, BAT.
itvopra. it-, either poss. or obj. 1st plu. pron. -vopsa, probably
adv. EQUAL. (ef. verb vép'aur, EQUALIZE, “emparejar’’).
kunatiticasptunata. ef. § 25,
hacatsipua.ukta. hac-, indefinite, How. -at-, 1st plu. pron. sbj.
-sd-, interrog. -pu-, emphatic sbj. -a-, pron. obj. uh-ta, un-
certain but possibly by metathesis from what, CARRY).
titi.inidaletd. ti-, pron. sbj. -t-, conditional. -/7/-, locative, HERE.
dak-ta, stem LEAVE, DESERT.
kugababan. baban, redup. plu. of ban, coyorer.
amihugia. hug, stem EAT. -ia. future.
antikihi. -ki-, proximate time. (cf. note Text § 1, 15. The use
of the preterit sign and stem form is inexplicable here, where
the meaning is “I will go”; it may possibly be explained as
a literal translation of the Spanish idiom “ya me voy’’, the
particle “ya” normally carrying the significance “already’’).
kida.ord. kida, Town, (possibly from stem /i0, DWELL). -ora,
postposition, INTO.
nanhimaigagara. gaga, redup. continuative of invariable stem
gu’, SEEK. -rd, purposive future motion.
nvitpalewita. (’ is probably merely a hesitation, ). -/t-, pro-
nom. obj. palewit, invariable (and consequently irregular) stem
AID, Assist. (This is probably a borrowed stem as it con-
tains three very rare or abnormal sounds, initial p, / and e,
besides being irregular). -a (probably better -da), future.
nabwokta. bwok:, probably defective stem BRING, CARRY. -td,
(probably for -da), continued future.
nadwk. dwk, stem RAIN.
navap ictoxo' piv. cf. Text § 3, 29.
kucoriovhak’ gociat. -c-, positive, (assimilated from -7e-). orior,
ady. PROMPTLY, SooN. hak’gocia, cf. § 16. -t, optative.
58.
62.
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
antiso’ip. sd()id, pret. of stem sdidip, SUFFER, BEAR. (It is
quite possible that the stem is sd’/d, the -ip of the apparently
present form being applicative, but the reason for such use
is not evident).
intatam. tatam, doubtless redup. plu. of tam, ToorH, but this
simple stem appears to be not in common use.
nanaaki-mdat. -a-, completive. -a-, pron. obj. kiwi, stem CHAT-
TER. -dat, imperfect, continued past action.
havagantutreui. tutiui, by syncope from tuturui, redup. plu.
of turud, KNEE.
iciampupumgrgitdat. ic-iam-, positive + negative, equivocal. -pup-,
probably adys. -pu-dp-, THUS-ALSO. -uwm-, probably passive.
gi-git, stem TREMBLE, SHAKE. (The apparent present stem here
may be iterative reduplication of stem git). -dat, imperfect,
continued past action.
nanahonoriniv. cf. § 31.
hogan‘onor. n-, poss. pron. nonor, redup. plu. of nor, HAND.
nanhwihea. hola. (Other examples point to stem hul-ad, pret.
hutka. One would expect a form such as hukda, with future
suffix; this form may be due to error of informant).
namitdmamcrr. iImanci'r, by syneope for mamaci-r, reduplication
of maci*r, pret. of mac, APPEAR, BE SEEN. (Redup. for plu. sbj.).
kumibidadaiyasp. -bi-, locative, WITHER. dada, invariable plural
stem ARRIVE. -/ya’-, probably heard for -ca-, future suf. -p,
probably subjunctive. (Why the future subjunctive should be
used in this instance is inexplicable, unless it be that the
informant misunderstood the intent).
amikusiatuk. Uneertain; kusia is given as invariable verbal stem
SOIL, STAIN, “manchar’’. tuk, defective (?) stem CARRY.
nampuva'ua. (’ is probably hesitation, .). wa, invariable, defec-
tive stem CARRY (BE CARRYING ?).
nutanda. ef. § 41.
iv'ov.dM. in-, pron, poss. nov, HAND. -d@1, postposition, IN, BY.
nanoimoriat, oimor, stem WALK, -ta-, fut. -t, subjunctive.
gacxo"p. gac-, for ga-ic-, article-adjectival sign. ho-p, stem COLD.
naso pdap, sop, stem SHIELD, PROTECT, OBSTRUCT; (stem uncertain,
probably sob’). -da-, continued future. -p, subjunctive.
avemicihaik, -emt-ic-, (-iamic-), neg.-pos., superlative. 7haih, (pro-
bably better (thaic), adj. DIFFICULT, HARD.
navactohodi«. -ac-, assimilated from = -a-ic-, completive-positive.
63.
64.
68.
MASON, TEPECANO, A PIMAN LANGUAGE OF MEXICO 415
-to-, probably auditory error for -tu-. hodi, probably elided
form of hoda‘i, STONE, ROCK. -¢, adjectival, FULL OF.
kadactuma'u. kada-, Sp. cada, EVERY. ctewmav, reduced from
ictumasm, cardinal, FIVE.
nanwiartu. ’ia, stem FALL, -/, contemporaneous motion.
titimo-dadd. ef. § 44.
kiamithw kup. kiam, stem HOME, (probably cognate with kv,
LIVE and kida, TOWN). -/-, original stem vowel. -f-, (better
-p-), 3d sing. pron. poss. -ha’hup, postposition, TOWARDS.
tibincdu. -bi-, locative, HITHER. -n-, pron. obj. naw, pret. of
namok, MEET, ENCOUNTER.
natrakorha dnvass. vakor, adv. invoors, (doubtless from va’ak.dr,
HOUSE-IN). -ha’, postposition, TOWARDS. -a-, completive. -7-,
pron. obj. va‘s, invariable (defective?) stem LEAD.
natandat. da, invariable stem BE SEATED. -/, pret. applicative.
gago taisonap. go, adj. GREAT. fa‘t, FIRE. -sona‘p, postposition.
natugansw'a.inkatuadamvdvwa:. An extraordinary verbal complex.
v-, proclit. conj. -a-, pron. sbj. -fw-, uncertain, possibly em-
phatie sbj. but there should be a preterit -¢- here. -ga, article.
--, poss. pron. s@’a, BLANKET. -i-, poss. pron. kat'wa, SHOULDER.
-dam-, postposition, ON. -va-, completive. vicar, pret. of wack,
PLACE, PUT.
aviamictonkat. -iam-ic-, neg.-pos., superlative. ton, defective stem
BE HOT, HOT. -kat, past continued state.
natatuhido. hido, pret. of hidorr, CcooK.
go gor. redup. plu. of go’, GREAT.
natho' ko’datunmd. ho’ko’d, instrumental postposition, here func-
tioning as ady., WITH IT. -v-, pron. obj. ma, pret. of mak, GIVE.
antiamho hir. ho-hir, pret. of hohi’, WIsH, DESIRE.
nanituhu. hu, pret. of hug, EAT. (Possibly the future tense
should have been used here as no pret. particle is used and
the context would seem to demand the future).
aniamkuibiuleat. -kui-, (after neg. iam), incompletive, NOT YET.
bink, defective stem BE HUNGRY. -kat, past continued state.
tittunma. ef. § 68.
nantuhugian. hug, stem EAT. -ia-, future. -p, subjunctive.
nantavo. ct. § 38.
aniticap.akovi. -ic-, positive, or more probably in this connection,
adjectival sign. -ap-, excellentive, WELL. -a-, completive. kot,
pret. of koc, SLEEP.
416
-I
bo
Lae |
[|
=~]
~l
.
ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES
anticko’o-kap. ko’o'k, unexplained variant of stem ko’k, BE ILL.
-kap, past continued state.
acia’p. a-, completive. (The ° is probably merely a pause, . ).
cia’p, invariable (defective?) stem DAWN, AWAKE.
anicko’ork. ef. § 71.
anika't. kat, defective stem LIE, BE STRETCHED OUT.
havamtianoi. novi, pret. of no’, DANCE.
aniaminkiaminmat’. -in-, pron. poss. kiam, HOME. -in-, pron.
obj. mat, invariable (and consequently irregular) stem KNOW.
(This form was given as a translation of “I did not want to
stay in my house’’).
nicnoimkap. no’, stem DANCE. -i'm-, contemporaneous motion ;
after positive -ic, desiderative. -/ap, past continued state.
(The use of this suffix instead of -dat shows that the conti-
nuance of the state of desire is emphasized).
totia.avwo-m. totia, vredup. plu. of féya, GIRL. -a-, pron. obj.
of postposition. -vworm, postposition, TOGETHER WITH.
gomxotilea. gomho, ady., EVERY. tukea, NIGHT, (cf. tui", BLACK,
DARK).
avibinonoip. -bi-, locative, HITHER. -7-, pron. obj. dnd, redup.
frequentative of 0, SEE. -(7)p, applicative.
aviho-mddp. horm, stem LAUGH. -dap, imperfect, past continued
action.
natpuvantort. ef. § 12.
napaxo'pria. xo-pr, by syneope for xopir, CONVALESCE. ef. § 40.
-ia, future.
natapkinaucdipu. -at-, pron. sbj. -ap-, probably for op, ALSO,
AGAIN. -ki-, proximate time. naued, by syncope from nauvad.
ef. § 1. -i-, probably reappearance of lost stem vowel. -pw-,
plural purposive future motion.
titubi-tuktugia. -bi-, locative, wirHerR. -tuk-, doubtful, probably
refers to food, as complex carries that meaning. tug, possible
stem CARRY. -7a, future.
bavwoygamn. bay, BEANS. -vivo'ygam, postposition, MIXED WITH.
natadakstaka. daksta, invariable stem LEAVE, DESERT. -/a, con-
tinued future state.
gako'keon. ko’keon, plural of hdhovn, Crow.
y
‘si » . ,
Sees a
tt a ae
.
-
Printep By E. J. BRILL, LeypEn (HoLLaND).
of ue i ©
i
i
{
& r
) :
q ‘Os oF " : ' “7
wah ng AUN ane ” 4 \y Y) Py 1}
. . -
Ca Me Be Ti Ly NB
ee een
*)
Me
WM PLUME
3 5185 00258 3340
340
<
——